Turnpike Specifications PDF

P300.
236
NEW JERSEY TURNPIKE AUTHORITY

GARDEN STATE PARKWAY
Contract No. P300.236
Interchange 163 Improvements
Milepost 162.2 to 163.9
Borough of Paramus
Bergen County
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Advertisement for Proposals ................................................................................................................................... 1
Prequalification Recapitulation .............................................................................................................................. 1
Proposal Bond ............................................................................................................................................................ 1
Letter of Surety ........................................................................................................................................................... 1
Contract Agreement .................................................................................................................................................. 1
Contract Bond ............................................................................................................................................................. 1
Power of Execution .................................................................................................................................................... 1
Standard Specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 1
Supplementary Specifications ................................................................................................................................ 1
Division 100 - General Provisions .......................................................................................................................... 2
SECTION 101 - GENERAL INFORMATION ..................................................................................................................2
101.02
Definitions ...........................................................................................................................................2
SECTION 102 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONDITIONS ..................................................................................5
102.03
Proposals .............................................................................................................................................5
102.04
Familiarity with Work .........................................................................................................................5
102.05
Examination Of Contract Documents ................................................................................................ 7
102.07
Proposal Guaranty .............................................................................................................................. 7
102.09
Submitting Proposals ..........................................................................................................................7
102.11
Causes For Rejection ...........................................................................................................................8
102.13
Prevailing Wage Rates ........................................................................................................................8
102.15
Public Works Contractor Registration Act .........................................................................................9
102.16
Business Registration Act ...................................................................................................................9
102.17
Public Law 2005, Chapter 51 and (Executive Order 134) and Executive Order 117 .........................9
102.18
Disclosure of Investment Activities in Iran ...................................................................................... 10
SECTION 103 - AWARD AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT ...................................................................................... 10
103.04
Subletting and Assigning Contract .................................................................................................. 10
SECTION 104 - CONTROL OF WORK ....................................................................................................................... 10
104.01
Intent of Contract .............................................................................................................................. 10
104.04
Change of Plans And Specifications. ................................................................................................. 11
104.06
Contractors Organization ................................................................................................................ 11
104.07
Cooperation by Contractor ................................................................................................................ 11
104.08
Shop And Working Drawings ........................................................................................................... 12
104.09
Construction Layout ......................................................................................................................... 13
Table of Contents - 1
P300.236
104.11
104.13
104.14
104.15
104.17
104.18
104.19
104.20
Noise Control ................................................................................................................................... 15

Sanitary, Health And Safety Provisions ........................................................................................... 15
Construction Safety ........................................................................................................................... 17
Access To Working Sites ................................................................................................................... 17
Protection Of Wetlands And Transition Areas During Construction ............................................. 17
Nighttime Operations ....................................................................................................................... 18
Environmental Health And Safety. ................................................................................................... 22
Diesel Equipment Operation ............................................................................................................ 30
SECTION 105 - CONTROL OF MATERIALS ............................................................................................................... 30

105.01
Materials ........................................................................................................................................... 30
105.02
Local Material Sources ...................................................................................................................... 31
105.06
Foreign Materials .............................................................................................................................. 31
105.07
Storage of Materials And Staging Areas........................................................................................... 31
105.14
Timber Grading and Certification ..................................................................................................... 32
105.15
Material Handling Plan .................................................................................................................... 32
SECTION 106 - LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY ...................................................................................... 34
106.02
Laws and Ordinances ........................................................................................................................ 34
106.10
Permits, Licenses and Taxes .............................................................................................................. 34
106.18
Utilities.............................................................................................................................................. 36
106.20
Insurance ........................................................................................................................................... 40
106.24
Small Business Enterprise Program.................................................................................................. 56
106.25
Warranties Made By Contractor ....................................................................................................... 57
106.26
Discrimination in Employment on Public Works ............................................................................. 58
SECTION 107 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS ...................................................................................................... 58
107.02
Pre-Construction Conference ............................................................................................................ 58
107.03
Commencement Of Work. ................................................................................................................. 59
107.04
Progress Schedule. ............................................................................................................................. 59
107.11
Lane And Roadway Occupancy Charges .......................................................................................... 59
SECTION 108 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .................................................................................................... 60
108.03
Partial Payments ............................................................................................................................... 60
108.04
Payment for Cost-Plus Work ............................................................................................................ 61
108.08
Fuel Price Adjustment ...................................................................................................................... 66
Division 200 - Earthwork ........................................................................................................................................ 69
SECTION 201 - CLEARING AND GRUBBING ............................................................................................................ 69
201.01
Description. ....................................................................................................................................... 69
201.03
Methods of Construction. .................................................................................................................. 69
201.04
Measurement. .................................................................................................................................... 69
201.05
Payment. ........................................................................................................................................... 69
SECTION 202 - ROADWAY EXCAVATION ................................................................................................................ 70
202.01
Description ........................................................................................................................................ 70
202.03
Methods of Construction ................................................................................................................... 70
202.04
Measurement ..................................................................................................................................... 72
202.05
Payment ............................................................................................................................................ 72
SECTION 203 - EMBANKMENT ................................................................................................................................ 72
203.01
Description. ....................................................................................................................................... 72
203.02
Materials ........................................................................................................................................... 73
203.03
203.04
Measurement ..................................................................................................................................... 79
P300.236
203.05
Payment ............................................................................................................................................ 79
SECTION 205 - FOUNDATION EXCAVATION ........................................................................................................... 80

205.01
Description. ....................................................................................................................................... 80
205.02
Materials. .......................................................................................................................................... 80
205.03
205.04
Measurement ..................................................................................................................................... 80
205.05
PAyment ........................................................................................................................................... 80
SECTION 208 - TEMPORARY SOIL EROSION AND DUST CONTROL ........................................................................ 81
208.02
Materials ........................................................................................................................................... 81
208.03
208.04
Measurement ..................................................................................................................................... 83
208.05
Payment ............................................................................................................................................ 84
SECTION 210 - DEMOLITION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES ........................................................................................ 84
210.01
Description ........................................................................................................................................ 84
210.02
210.03
Disposal of Debris. ............................................................................................................................ 86
210.04
Measurement. .................................................................................................................................... 86
210.05
Payment ............................................................................................................................................ 87
SECTION 212 GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING ............................................................ 88
212.01
Description. ....................................................................................................................................... 88
212.02
Responsibilities. ................................................................................................................................ 88
212.03
Instruments. ...................................................................................................................................... 88
212.04
Instrument Monitoring. .................................................................................................................... 89
212.05
Quality Assurance. ........................................................................................................................... 90
212.06
Submittals. ........................................................................................................................................ 93
212.07
Job Conditions. .................................................................................................................................. 95
212.08
Materials. .......................................................................................................................................... 95
212.09
Methods of Construction. ............................................................................................................... 100
212.10
Measurement. .................................................................................................................................. 111
212.11
Payment. ......................................................................................................................................... 112
SECTION 213 - PROTECTION OF NJDEP REGULATED AREAS ............................................................................. 112
213.01
Description. ..................................................................................................................................... 112
213.02
Measurement. .................................................................................................................................. 114
213.03
Payment. ......................................................................................................................................... 114
SECTION 214 NON-HAZARDOUS MATERIAL HANDLING ................................................................................ 114
214.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 115
214.02
Additional Requirements ................................................................................................................ 115
214.03
Execution......................................................................................................................................... 116
214.04
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 119
214.05
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 119
Division 300 - Pavement ....................................................................................................................................... 121
SECTION 302 - HOT MIX ASPHALT [HMA] PAVEMENTS .................................................................................... 121
302.02
Materials ......................................................................................................................................... 121
302.03
Contractors Quality Control .......................................................................................................... 121
302.04
Asphalt Plant and Equipment ......................................................................................................... 121
302.05
Methods of Construction ................................................................................................................. 122
302.07
Air Voids Acceptance Plan ............................................................................................................. 125
302.09
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 125
P300.236
302.10
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 126
SECTION 303 SHOULDER AND BERM SURFACING ............................................................................................. 127

303.01
Description. ..................................................................................................................................... 127
303.02
Materials. ........................................................................................................................................ 127
303.03
Methods Of Construction. .............................................................................................................. 127
303.04
Measurement. .................................................................................................................................. 127
303.05
Payment. ......................................................................................................................................... 127
SECTION 305- PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND SURFACE MILLING ........................................................................... 128
305.01
Description. ..................................................................................................................................... 128
305.03
Methods of Construction. ................................................................................................................ 128
305.04
Measurement. .................................................................................................................................. 129
305.05
Payment. ......................................................................................................................................... 129
SECTION 309 HOT ASPHALT FRICTION COURSE ............................................................................................... 129
309.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 129
309.02
Materials ........................................................................................................................................ 129
309.03
Composition of Mixtures ................................................................................................................. 129
309.04
Equipment ....................................................................................................................................... 134
309.05
Construction.................................................................................................................................... 135
309.06
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 139
309.07
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 140
Division 400 - Structures ...................................................................................................................................... 141
SECTION 401 - CONCRETE STRUCTURES............................................................................................................... 141
401.01
Description. ..................................................................................................................................... 141
401.02
Materials. ........................................................................................................................................ 141
401.04
Contractors Quality Control .......................................................................................................... 141
401.12
Machine Finishing of Bridge Deck .................................................................................................. 142
401.16
Test Specimens ................................................................................................................................ 145
401.17
Surface Finish .................................................................................................................................. 146
401.18
Curing ............................................................................................................................................. 146
401.19
Protective Coatings for Concrete Surfaces ...................................................................................... 146
401.23
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 148
401.24
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 149
SECTION 403 - STEEL STRUCTURES ....................................................................................................................... 149
403.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 149
403.02
Materials ......................................................................................................................................... 150
403.03
Inspection and Testing .................................................................................................................... 150
403.05
Workmanship and Finish ................................................................................................................ 155
403.06
Fabrication And Welding ................................................................................................................ 155
403.08
Shipping, Handling and Erection ................................................................................................... 155
403.09
Setting Anchor Bolts and Expansion Bearings ............................................................................... 155
403.12
High-Strength Bolts. ....................................................................................................................... 156
403.18
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 156
403.19
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 156
SECTION 405 - PILES.............................................................................................................................................. 158
405.03
Equipment. ...................................................................................................................................... 158
405.04
Preparation For Driving. ................................................................................................................ 158
405.06
Methods of Driving. ........................................................................................................................ 158
405.07
Determination of Bearing Values. ................................................................................................... 158
405.14
Payment. ......................................................................................................................................... 159
P300.236
SECTION 406 - SIGN SUPPORT STRUCTURES ......................................................................................................... 159
406.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 159
406.05
Erection of Sign Support Systems ................................................................................................... 159
406.07
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 160
406.08
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 160
SECTION 407 TFE EXPANSION BEARINGS ......................................................................................................... 160
SECTION 408 - ELASTOMERIC BEARING PADS...................................................................................................... 160
SECTION 408 LAMINATED ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS ........................................................................................ 160
408.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 161
408.02
Materials ......................................................................................................................................... 161
408.03
Qualified Manufacturers ................................................................................................................. 161
408.04
Shop and Working Drawings .......................................................................................................... 162
408.05
Fabrication of Laminated Elastomeric Bearing Assemblies ............................................................. 163
408.06
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 165
408.07
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 165
SECTION 411 - PAINTING AND REPAINTING STEEL STRUCTURES........................................................................ 166
411.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 166
411.02
Materials ......................................................................................................................................... 166
411.03
Thickness of Paint ........................................................................................................................... 167
411.04
General Precautions ........................................................................................................................ 167
411. 05 Cleaning and Painting Steel Structures ......................................................................................... 168
411. 06 Cleaning and Painting of New Weathering Steel ........................................................................... 168
411.07
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 169
411.08
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 169
SECTION 413 - UNDERBRIDGE SLOPE PROTECTION ............................................................................................. 170
413.02
Materials ......................................................................................................................................... 170
413.03
Preparation Of Slopes ..................................................................................................................... 171
413.03
Preparation Of Slopes Or Channels ................................................................................................ 171
SECTION 415 TEMPORARY SHEETING ................................................................................................................ 171
415.02
Materials. ........................................................................................................................................ 171
415.04
415.05
Measurement. .................................................................................................................................. 172
415.06
Payment. ......................................................................................................................................... 172
SECTION 417 - BRIDGE DECK REHABILITATION ................................................................................................... 172
417.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 172
417.02
Materials ......................................................................................................................................... 174
417.03
Equipment ....................................................................................................................................... 175
417.04
Concrete Deck Rehabilitation .......................................................................................................... 176
417.06
Spall Repairs. .................................................................................................................................. 179
417.07
Joint Reconstruction ........................................................................................................................ 183
417.09
Installation of Fascia Catch/Deck Support Systems ........................................................................ 186
417.10
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 187
417.11
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 188
SECTION 418 - BRIDGE STRUCTURAL REPAIR....................................................................................................... 188
418.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 188
418.02
Materials ......................................................................................................................................... 188
418.03
Repair Substructure Concrete ......................................................................................................... 188
418.04
Sidewalk, Parapet And Curb Surface Repairs ................................................................................. 189
P300.236
418.06
418.07
418.08
418.09
Substructure Waterproofing ........................................................................................................... 190

Repair Bearings, Reset Rockers, Reset Bearings and Replace Masonry Plates ............................... 193
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 195
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 196
SECTION 426 - ANTI-GRAFFITI PROTECTIVE COATING ....................................................................................... 197

SECTION 428 - MECHANICALLY STABILIZED EARTH (MSE) WALLS .................................................................. 197
428.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 197
428.02
Materials ......................................................................................................................................... 197
428.03
428.04
Working Drawings.......................................................................................................................... 205
428.05
Substitutions ................................................................................................................................... 206
428.06
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 207
428.07
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 208
SECTION 429 - HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE (HPC) .................................................................................... 209
429.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 209
429.02
Materials ......................................................................................................................................... 209
429.03
Mix Design and Fabrication of the HPC ........................................................................................ 210
429.04
Production of the HPC .................................................................................................................... 212
429.05
HPC Acceptance Requirements ...................................................................................................... 214
429.06
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 216
429.07
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 216
SECTION 430 DRILLED SHAFTS FOR SIGN STRUCTURE FOUNDATIONS ......................................................... 216
430.01
Description. ..................................................................................................................................... 216
430.02
Materials. ........................................................................................................................................ 217
430.03
Shop Drawings. ............................................................................................................................... 217
430.04
Installation of Drilled Shafts. .......................................................................................................... 220
430.05
Crosshole Sonic Logging of Drilled Shafts. ..................................................................................... 225
430.06
Measurement. .................................................................................................................................. 226
430.07
Payment. ......................................................................................................................................... 227
SECTION 431 - SEISMIC ISOLATION BEARINGS ..................................................................................................... 227
431.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 227
431.02
Performance Requirements.............................................................................................................. 228
431.03
Qualified Isolator Manufacturers .................................................................................................... 228
431.04
Quality Assurance .......................................................................................................................... 229
431.05
Contract Documents, Shop and Erection Drawings ....................................................................... 230
431.06
Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling....................................................................................... 230
431.07
Markings ......................................................................................................................................... 230
431.08
Materials and Materials Testing ..................................................................................................... 231
431.09
Fabrication....................................................................................................................................... 233
431.10
Isolator Testing................................................................................................................................ 235
431.11
Installation ...................................................................................................................................... 237
431.12
Certificates of Compliance ............................................................................................................... 238
431.13
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 238
431.14
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 238
SECTION 432 HIGH-LOAD MULTI-ROTATIONAL BEARINGS .......................................................................... 239
432.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 239
432.02
Materials ......................................................................................................................................... 240
432.03
Qualified Manufacturers ................................................................................................................. 240
432.04
Working Drawings.......................................................................................................................... 240
P300.236
432.05
432.06
432.07
Fabrication of HLMR Bearing Assemblies ...................................................................................... 241

Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 243
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 243
SECTION 433 TEMPORARY RETAINING STRUCTURES .......................................................................................... 244

433.01
Description. ..................................................................................................................................... 244
433.02
Materials. ........................................................................................................................................ 244
433.03
Working Drawings. ......................................................................................................................... 244
433.04
Measurement. .................................................................................................................................. 245
433.05
Payment. ......................................................................................................................................... 245
SECTION 434
TEMPORARY SUPPORTS FOR CONCRETE DECK ..................................................................... 245
434.01
Description ..................................................................................................................................... 245
434.02
Materials ........................................................................................................................................ 246
434.03
Methods of Construction ................................................................................................................ 246
434.04
Measurement .................................................................................................................................. 247
434.05
Payment ......................................................................................................................................... 248
Division 500 - Incidental Construction .............................................................................................................. 249
SECTION 501 - UNDERDRAINS .............................................................................................................................. 249
501.02
Materials. ........................................................................................................................................ 249
501.05
Payment. ......................................................................................................................................... 249
SECTION 502 - STORM DRAINS ............................................................................................................................. 249
502.02
Materials ......................................................................................................................................... 249
502.03
502.05
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 249
SECTION 503 MANHOLES AND INLETS ............................................................................................................. 249
503.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 250
503.02
Materials ......................................................................................................................................... 250
503.03
Methods Of Construction ............................................................................................................... 250
503.04
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 252
503.05
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 252
SECTION 506 - CONCRETE CURB .......................................................................................................................... 253
506.01
Description. ..................................................................................................................................... 253
506.02
Materials. ........................................................................................................................................ 253
506.04
Measurement. .................................................................................................................................. 253
506.05
Payment. ......................................................................................................................................... 253
SECTION 508 - CONCRETE MEDIAN BARRIER ...................................................................................................... 253
508.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 253
508.03
508.04
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 254
508.05
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 254
SECTION 509 - SIGN PANELS................................................................................................................................. 254
509.01
Description. ..................................................................................................................................... 254
509.02
Material. .......................................................................................................................................... 255
509.03
509.04
Measurement. ................................................................................................................................. 255
509. 05 Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 256
SECTION 510 - GUIDE RAIL ................................................................................................................................... 256
510.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 256
510.02
Materials ......................................................................................................................................... 257
P300.236
510.03
510.04
510.05

Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 260
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 260
SECTION 515 - DELINEATORS ............................................................................................................................... 261

515.02
Materials ......................................................................................................................................... 261
SECTION 516 - PAVEMENT STRIPES AND MARKINGS ........................................................................................... 261
516.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 261
516.02
Materials. ........................................................................................................................................ 262
516.04
516.05
Measurement. .................................................................................................................................. 267
516.06
Payment. ......................................................................................................................................... 267
SECTION 517 FIELD OFFICE................................................................................................................................ 268
517.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 268
517.03
517.04
Measurement. .................................................................................................................................. 275
517.05
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 275
SECTION 524 IMPACT ATTENUATOR ................................................................................................................. 276
524.01
Description. ..................................................................................................................................... 276
524.02
Materials. ........................................................................................................................................ 276
524.03
524.04
Measurement. .................................................................................................................................. 277
524.05
Payment. ......................................................................................................................................... 277
SECTION 530 RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS ..................................................................................................... 277
530.02
Materials ........................................................................................................................................ 278
530.03
Methods Of Construction .............................................................................................................. 278
530.04
Measurement. ................................................................................................................................. 279
530.05
Payment ......................................................................................................................................... 280
SECTION 531 - PIPE JACKING ................................................................................................................................ 280
531.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 280
531.02
Materials ......................................................................................................................................... 280
531.03
531.04
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 282
531.05
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 283
SECTION 532 - FORCE ACCOUNT FOR SNOW REMOVAL ...................................................................................... 283
532.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 283
532.02
532.03
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 284
532.04
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 284
SECTION 533 TEMPORARY SEDIMENT BASIN RISER .......................................................................................... 284
533.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 284
533.02
Materials ........................................................................................................................................ 284
533.03
533.04
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 284
533.05
Payment ......................................................................................................................................... 284
SECTION 534 ASBESTOS REMOVAL .................................................................................................................... 285
534.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 285
534.02
Materials & Qualifications ............................................................................................................. 285
534.03
P300.236
534.04
534.05
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 287

Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 287
SECTION 535 FORCE ACCOUNT FOR EMERGENCY & ROUTINE ROADWAY AND BRIDGE REPAIRS ................. 287
535.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 287
535.02
Materials ......................................................................................................................................... 289
535.03
535.04
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 289
535.05
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 289
Division 600 - Electrical ........................................................................................................................................ 291
SECTION 601 - COMMON ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS ............................................................................................ 291
601.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 291
601.02
Materials ......................................................................................................................................... 291
601.03
General Conditions.......................................................................................................................... 291
601.05
Conduit............................................................................................................................................ 292
601.06
Foundations, Boxes, Manholes And Bases ...................................................................................... 294
601.07
Cables and Wires ............................................................................................................................. 294
601.11
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 295
601.12
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 295
SECTION 602 - ROADWAY LIGHTING ................................................................................................................... 296
602.01
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 296
602.04
Lighting Standards.......................................................................................................................... 296
602.05
Luminaire Installation .................................................................................................................... 296
602.07
Power Distribution and Control Equipment .................................................................................. 297
602.08
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 298
602.09
Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 298
Division 700 - Landscaping .................................................................................................................................. 299
SECTION 706 SOIL STABILIZATION MATTING ................................................................................................... 299
706.01
Description. ..................................................................................................................................... 299
706.02
Materials. ........................................................................................................................................ 299
706.03
706.04
Measurement. .................................................................................................................................. 300
706.05
Payment. ......................................................................................................................................... 300
Division 800 - Traffic Control .............................................................................................................................. 301
SECTION 801 TRAFFIC CONTROL ON AUTHORITY ROADWAYS ....................................................................... 301
801.01
Description. ..................................................................................................................................... 301
801.02
Materials. ........................................................................................................................................ 301
801.03
801.04
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 333
801.05
Payment. ......................................................................................................................................... 336
SECTION 802 STANDBY WRECKER SERVICE ...................................................................................................... 340
802.01
Description. ..................................................................................................................................... 340
802.02
Materials. ........................................................................................................................................ 340
802.03
802.04
Measurement. .................................................................................................................................. 341
802.05
Payment. ......................................................................................................................................... 341
SECTION 803 STATE, COUNTY AND LOCAL ROADWAYS.................................................................................. 342
803.01
Description. ..................................................................................................................................... 342
P300.236
803.03
803.04
803.05

Measurement. .................................................................................................................................. 348
Payment. ......................................................................................................................................... 348
Division 900 - Materials........................................................................................................................................ 350

SECTION 902 - AGGREGATES ................................................................................................................................ 350
902.04
Fine Aggregate ................................................................................................................................ 350
902.08
Soil Aggregate ................................................................................................................................. 350
902.09
Table ................................................................................................................................................ 352
SECTION 903 - HOT MIX ASPHALT (HMA) ......................................................................................................... 353
903.01
Composition of Mixtures ................................................................................................................. 353
903.02
Grading Requirements .................................................................................................................... 353
903.03
Job Mix Formula ............................................................................................................................. 353
903.04
Sampling and Testing ..................................................................................................................... 353
903.05
Tables............................................................................................................................................... 353
SECTION 904 - BITUMINOUS MATERIAL ............................................................................................................... 353
904.02
Tack Coat ......................................................................................................................................... 354
904.10
Inverted Emulsified Asphalts .......................................................................................................... 354
SECTION 905 - CONCRETE, MORTAR AND GROUT .............................................................................................. 354
905.01
Portland Cement ............................................................................................................................. 354
905.05
Portland Cement Concrete .............................................................................................................. 354
905.15
Non-Shrink, High Early Strength Mortar. ..................................................................................... 355
905.21
Quality Acceptance Limits for Portland Cement Concrete Pay Adjustments ................................ 355
905.22
Quality Acceptance Testing, Sampling, and Inspection for Portland Cement Concrete Pay
Adjustment ..................................................................................................................................... 355
905.23
Adjustments to Contract Compensation. ........................................................................................ 356
SECTION 906 - CONCRETE ADMIXTURES, CURING MATERIALS, AND FILM EVAPORATORS ............................... 357
906.07
Curing Materials ............................................................................................................................. 357
SECTION 907 JOINTS ........................................................................................................................................... 357
907.07
Strip Seal Expansion Joints. ............................................................................................................ 357
SECTION 908 - REINFORCEMENT STEEL................................................................................................................ 357
908.01
Reinforcement Steel for Structures ................................................................................................. 357
SECTION 909 - STRUCTURAL STEEL AND OTHER FERROUS MATERIALS ............................................................. 358
909.01
Structural Steel ............................................................................................................................... 358
909.02
Fasteners.......................................................................................................................................... 358
SECTION 912 SIGN MATERIALS.......................................................................................................................... 359
912.01
Aluminum Sheet Sign Panels and Incidental Hardware. ............................................................... 359
912.02
Sign Copy and Background. ............................................................................................................ 359
SECTION 913 - PAINTS AND COATINGS ................................................................................................................ 360
913.01
Paint System A ............................................................................................................................... 360
913.02
Coating System B ............................................................................................................................ 360
913.03
Coating System C ............................................................................................................................ 361
913.04
Water Tower Paint .......................................................................................................................... 362
913.05
Traffic Paint and Marking .............................................................................................................. 362
SECTION 914 - FENCE............................................................................................................................................ 363
914.01
Chain Link Fence ............................................................................................................................. 363
SECTION 915 - GUARD RAIL ................................................................................................................................. 363
SECTION 915 - BEAM GUIDE RAIL ........................................................................................................................ 363
P300.236
915.01
915.02
915.03
915.04
915.05
915.06
Rail Element .................................................................................................................................... 363

Posts and Recycled/Synthetic Blockouts ......................................................................................... 364
Miscellaneous Hardware ................................................................................................................. 364
Sampling and Testing ..................................................................................................................... 364
Rub Rail .......................................................................................................................................... 365
Circular Reflectors........................................................................................................................... 365
SECTION 916 - MASONRY UNITS .......................................................................................................................... 365

916.01
Concrete Blocks ............................................................................................................................... 365
SECTION 917 - PIPE365
917.08
High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe....................................................................................... 365
SECTION 918 - ELECTRICAL MATERIAL ................................................................................................................ 365
918.01
General ........................................................................................................................................... 365
918.07
Cable and Wire ............................................................................................................................... 366
918.08
Conduit and Fittings ....................................................................................................................... 371
918.24
Rodent Blocking .............................................................................................................................. 372
SECTION 919 - LANDSCAPING MATERIALS .......................................................................................................... 372
919.10
Seed ................................................................................................................................................. 372
SECTION 920 - TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES ........................................................................................................ 373
920.01
Traffic Cones ................................................................................................................................... 373
920.03
Safety Vests ..................................................................................................................................... 375
920.08
Concrete Barrier .............................................................................................................................. 375
920.10
Preformed Temporary Pavement Marking Material ...................................................................... 375
920.10
Removable Wet Weather Pavement Marking Tape ......................................................................... 375
920.11
Arrow Board .................................................................................................................................... 376
920.15
Temporary Impact Attenuator. ....................................................................................................... 377
920.17
Modular Glare Screen System......................................................................................................... 377
920.18
Truck Mounted Attenuator. ............................................................................................................ 378
920.19
Portable Variable Message Signs. ................................................................................................... 378
920.20
Non-Gating, Re-Directive Impact Attenuator. ............................................................................... 379
SECTION 923 - MISCELLANEOUS .......................................................................................................................... 380
923.02
Bearing Pads ................................................................................................................................... 380
923.06
Dampproofing and Waterproofing .................................................................................................. 380
923.18
Reflectors ......................................................................................................................................... 382
923.22
Epoxy Resin System ........................................................................................................................ 382
923.27
Pot and Disc Bearings ..................................................................................................................... 383
923.30
Silt Fence ......................................................................................................................................... 383
923.37
Fly Ash ............................................................................................................................................ 384
923.38
Hydrated Lime ................................................................................................................................. 384
923.42
Geotextile ......................................................................................................................................... 384
923.43
Sediment Control Bags .................................................................................................................... 385
SECTION 924 - SUPERPAVE HOT MIX ASPHALT (HMA) ..................................................................................... 385
924.01
Composition .................................................................................................................................... 385
924.02
Job Mix Formula ............................................................................................................................. 385
924.04
Tables............................................................................................................................................... 386
SECTION 990 METHODS OF TESTS...................................................................................................................... 386
990.11
A-7 Rapidly Determining The Breakdown In Sizes Of Soil Aggregate ........................................... 386
990.12
NJDOT B-15 Determining Job Mix Formula for Open-Graded Friction Course ........................ 387
990.13 NJDOT B-16 Determining Asphalt Binder Content for Open-Graded Friction Course ................ 391
P300.236
990.14
990.15
NJDOT B-17 Determining Rotational Viscosity of Asphalt Rubber Binder .................................. 394
NJDOT B-18- Determining Gradation of Crumb Rubber For Asphalt Modification ....................... 397
APPENDIX A - AFFIRMATIVE ACTION MANDATORY LANGUAGE............................................................................ 1

Appendix B - Requirements of Public Law 2005, Chapter 51 (Executive Order 134) and Executive Order
117 ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
Appendix C - Lane Closing Request Form............................................................................................................ 1
Appendix D - Escort, Slowdowns Request Form ................................................................................................. 1
Appendix F - State Police Supplemental Patrol Construction Request Form ................................................ 1
APPENDIX H - GEORGIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION TEST NO. 78 ........................................................... 1
APPENDIX I - NJDPES STORMWATER PERMIT PROGRAM....................................................................................... 1
APPENDIX J - DISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT ON PUBLIC WORKS................................................................... 1
APPENDIX W - NEW JERSEY TURNPIKE AUTHORITY OPERATIONS VIDEO ATTENDANCE SHEET......................... 1
APPENDIX X - NEW JERSEY TURNPIKE AUTHORITY REQUIREMENTS FOR SMALL BUSINESS ENTERPRISE
SUBCONTRACTORS AND SET-ASIDE PROGRAM FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS .......................................... 1
APPENDIX Y - TRAFFIC PERMIT APPLICATION .......................................................................................................... 1
APPENDIX Z COST-PLUS WORK FORMS.................................................................................................................. 1
P300.236
PREQUALIFICATION RECAPITULATION
The undersigned hereby affirms that our firm is prequalified by the New Jersey Turnpike
Authority in the classification of _________________________________________ and rating of
__________________________________ and there has been no material change in our prequalification
subsequent to the latest contractor's Qualifying Statement ________________________ (dated) as required by
the Procedure for Prequalification and Award on New Jersey Turnpike Authority Construction
Contracts.
DISCLOSURE STATEMENT
The undersigned firm name of Bidder, in compliance with N.J.S.A. 52:25-24.2, does hereby state
and declare the following list of stockholders or partners in this corporation or partnership, as the case
may be, with 10 percent or greater interest therein.
Number of Shares of Stock,
Corporation or % of
Interest in Partnership
Name
Address
_________________
___________________________________
____________
_________________
__________________________________
____________
_________________
__________________________________
____________
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
The undersigned being duly sworn according to law on my oath depose and say that I am the
bidder making this Proposal for the above named project, and that I execute this Proposal with full
authority so to do; that said bidder has not, directly or indirectly, entered into any agreement,
participated in any collusion, or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free, competitive bidding in
connection with the above named project; and that all statements contained in this Proposal and in this
affidavit are true and correct, and made with full knowledge that the New Jersey Turnpike Authority
relies upon the truth of the statements contained herein and in any statements requested by the Authority
showing evidence of qualifications in awarding the contract for said project.
I further warrant that no person or selling agency has been employed or retained to solicit or
secure such contract upon an agreement or understanding for a commission, percentage, brokerage or
contingent fee, except bona fide employees or bona fide established commercial or selling agencies
maintained by our firm.
Subscribed and sworn to before me

This__________________day of_______________, 20________.
____________________________________
Name of Contractor
____________________________________
Affiants Name
____________________________________
Affiants Signature
____________________________________
Affiants Title
______________________________________________________
Notary Public of the State of_____________________________
My commission expires_______________, 20______________.
Proposal - 1
Firm Name of Bidder _____________________
P300.236
ADDENDA
Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following Addenda:
Accompanying this Proposal is a Proposal Guaranty providing for an amount of money which the
undersigned agrees to pay as liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, if the Contract is awarded to the
undersigned and the undersigned shall fail to execute and deliver the Contract and the Contract Bond and
furnish satisfactory evidence of all required insurance coverage, all within the stipulated time; otherwise,
the Proposal Guaranty will be void or returned to the Bidder. It is agreed that the New Jersey Turnpike
Authority may collect such damages in the full amount of money provided for in the Proposal Guaranty.
an Individual)
The undersigned is a Partnership) under the laws of the
a Corporation)
State of ______________________________________________________having principal
Office at _____________________________________________________________________
________________________________
________________________________
________________________________
________________________________
(Corporate Seal)
(Signature)
________________________________
Witness or Attest
(Address) ________________________________
______________________
(Date)
Proposal - 2
_______________________, 20_____
Firm Name of Bidder _____________________
P300.236
PROPOSAL BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the undersigned
___________________________________________________________ as PRINCIPAL: and
____________________________________________________________as Surety and duly
qualified to transact business in the State of New Jersey, are hereby held and firmly bound unto the New
Jersey Turnpike Authority in the sum of
________________________________________________________________Dollars and
__________________________________________Cents ($__________) for the payment
of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors,
administrators, successors and assigns.
Signed, this_____________day of_________________A.D.
two thousand and_________________________________________________.
THE CONDITION OF THE ABOVE OBLIGATION IS SUCH that whereas the Principal has
submitted to the New Jersey Turnpike Authority a certain Proposal, attached hereto and hereby made a
part hereof, to enter into a Contract in writing for Contract No. _________________of the New Jersey
Turnpike Authority;
NOW, THEREFORE,
(a)
If said Proposal shall be rejected by the New Jersey Turnpike Authority, or in the alternative,
(b) If said Proposal shall be accepted by the New Jersey Turnpike Authority, and the Principal
shall duly execute the Contract Agreement and furnish the required Contract Bond, within the stipulated
time,
Then this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect; it being
expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall in
no event, exceed the amount of this obligation as herein stated.
The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligation of said Surety and
its bond shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Authority
may accept such proposal; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension.
Proposal Bond -1 (Std. 1/97 Rev. 1/00)
P300.236
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals, and such
of them as are corporations have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be
signed by their proper officers, the day and year first set forth above.
_____________________________________
[Corporate Seal]
_____________________________________
WITNESS OR ATTEST
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
______________________________________
Principal
_____________________________________
[Corporate Seal]
_____________________________________
WITNESS OR ATTEST:
_____________________________________
____________________________________
_____________________________________
Surety
Proposal Bond -2 (Std. 1/97 Rev. 1/00)
P300.236
LETTER OF SURETY
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the undersigned
_______________________________________________________as PRINCIPAL: and
_______________________________________________________as Surety and duly qualified to transact
business in the State of New Jersey, are hereby held and firmly bound unto the New Jersey Turnpike
Authority in the sum by which the amount of the Contract, covering the attached proposal, properly and
lawfully executed by and between the New Jersey Turnpike Authority and some third party, may exceed
the amount bid by the Principal for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly
and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns.
Signed, this_____________day of_________________A.D.
two thousand and_________________________________________________.
THE CONDITION OF THE ABOVE OBLIGATION IS SUCH that whereas
the Principal has submitted to the New Jersey Turnpike Authority a certain
Proposal, attached hereto and hereby made a part hereof, to enter into a
Contract in writing for Contract No. _________________of the New Jersey
Turnpike Authority;
NOW, THEREFORE,
(a)
If said Proposal shall be rejected by the New Jersey Turnpike Authority, or in the alternative,
(b) If said Proposal shall be accepted by the New Jersey Turnpike Authority, and the Principal
shall duly execute the Contract Agreement and furnish the required Contract Bond, within the stipulated
time,
Then this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect; it being
expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in
no event, exceed the amount of this obligation as herein stated.
The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligation of said Surety and
its bond shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Authority
may accept such Proposal; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension.
Letter of Surety-1
P300.236
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals,
and such of them as are corporations have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these
presents to be signed by their proper officers, the day and year first set forth above.
_____________________________________
[Corporate Seal]
_____________________________________
WITNESS OR ATTEST:
_____________________________________
___________________________________
_____________________________________
Principal
____________________________________
[Corporate Seal]
____________________________________
WITNESS OR ATTEST:
_____________________________________
____________________________________
_____________________________________
Surety
Letter of Surety-2
P300.236
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
CONTRACT NO. P300.236
Borough of Paramus
Bergen County
THIS AGREEMENT made this ________________ day of ___________________
in the year of our Lord, two thousand and ______________________
between the New Jersey Turnpike Authority, party of the first part, sometimes
hereinafter called Authority, and _____________________________________________
part____ of the second part, sometimes hereinafter called Contractor.
WITNESSETH, that the Said Contractor, in consideration of the payments hereinafter specified,
hereby covenants and agrees to furnish and deliver all the materials, to do and perform all the work and
labor required to be furnished and delivered, done and performed for, and to do and perform all things
necessary or proper for, or incidental to the completion of Contract No. P300.236 in strict and entire
conformity with the Specifications, attached hereto, and the Plans which consist of 624 drawings
numbered 1-624 bearing the general title:
INTERCHANGE 163 IMPROVEMENTS
MILEPOST 162.2 TO 163.9
and other Contract Documents which are hereby made a part of this Agreement as fully and with the
same effect as if the same had been set forth at length in the body of this Agreement.
All work under the Contract shall be performed and completed on or before May 15, 2017.
Contract Agreement-1
P300.236
If the Contractor fails to complete fully, entirely and in conformity with the provisions of the
Contract, the Project and each and every part and appurtenance thereof, within the time stated above, or
any portion for which a completion date is stipulated within such further time as may have been granted
in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, then the Contractor shall and hereby agrees to pay the
Authority for each and every calendar day that he is in default on time to complete the entire Project,
$6,500 which said amount per calendar day is agreed upon by the parties hereto to be liquidated damages
and not a penalty.
The Contractor agrees to make payment of all proper charges for labor and materials required in
the aforementioned work, and to defend, if so directed by the Authority, and to indemnify and save
harmless the Authority, its officers, employees and agents against and from all damages and liabilities,
threatened, pending or completed actions, proceedings or suits of every kind and all costs incurred in the
defense, settlement or satisfaction thereof (including attorney's fees and court costs), including damages
and liabilities, actions, proceedings, suits, costs, claims and judgments of officers, employees or agents of
the Contractor and of its subcontractors, and from all damages, liabilities, actions, proceedings, suits,
costs, claims, or judgments to which the Authority or any of its officers, employees, or agents may be
subjected by reason of injury to the person or property of others resulting from the performance of the
Project; or the acts or omissions, whether negligent or not, of the Contractor, its officers, employees or
agents, and of its subcontractors; or of the Authority, its officers, employees and agents, or of third
persons; or through any improper or defective machinery, implements or appliances used in the Project;
and the Contractor shall further defend, if so directed by the Authority, indemnify and save harmless the
Authority, its officers, employees and agents from all damages, liabilities, actions, proceedings, suits,
costs or claims of any kind, which may be brought or instituted by any subcontractor, material man or
laborer who has performed work or furnished materials in or about the Project or by, or on account of,
any claims or amount recovered for any infringement of patent, trademark or copyright. So much money
due to the Contractor under and by virtue of the Contract as shall be considered necessary by the
Authority may be retained by the Authority and held until such suits, proceedings, actions, claims or
amounts shall have been settled, and suitable evidence to that effect furnished to the Authority. The
obligations of this paragraph shall survive the expiration, termination or rescission of this Contract.
In consideration of the premises, the Authority hereby agrees to pay, as sole compensation for the
performance of the Project, payments for the actual quantity of authorized work performed, as provided
in the Specifications, at the prices for the Scheduled Items of Work in the Proposal.
The Contractor shall maintain all documentation related to products, transactions, or services
under this Contract for a period of five years from the date of final payment. Such records shall be made
available to the New Jersey Office of the State Comptroller upon request.
P300.236
This Contract is to be binding upon the Authority, its successor or successors, and upon the
contractor and _____________ heirs, executors, administrators, successor or successors, and is voidable
and may be terminated by the Authority, in accordance with the Provisions of the Specifications, or if the
provisions of the statutes relative thereto are not complied with.
Relevant records of private vendors or other persons entering into contracts with covered entities
are subject to audit or review by the New Jersey Office of the State Comptroller pursuant to N.J.S.A.
52:15C-14(d). The Contractor shall maintain all documentation related to products, transactions or
services under this contract for a period of five years from the date of final payment. Such records shall be
made available to the New Jersey Office of the State Comptroller upon request.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have duly executed this
Agreement the day and year first above written.
Attest:
_________________________________
Secretary of the New Jersey
Turnpike Authority
__________________________________________
Executive Director
(Corporate Seal)
Witness or Attest
_________________________________
______________________________________
Name of Contractor
(Corporate Seal)
______________________________________L.S.
______________________________________L.S.
P300.236

CONTRACT BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That we,
,
(An individual, a partnership, a corporation)
duly organized under the Laws of the State of______________________________________________
and having a usual place of business at____________________________________________________
as Principal, and
a corporation duly organized under the Laws of the State of
and duly
authorized to do business in the State of New Jersey and having a usual place of business at
, as Surety, are holden and stand firmly

bound and obligated unto the New Jersey Turnpike Authority, as Obligee, in the sum of
lawful money of the United States of America, to and for the

true payment whereof we bind ourselves and each of us, our heirs, executors, administrators,
successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
The condition of the above obligation is such that whereas, the above named
Principal did on the
day of
, 20
, enter into a contract with the
Obligee, New Jersey Turnpike Authority generally described as follows:
which said contract is made part of this Bond the

same as though set forth herein.
Contract Bond-1
P300.236
Now, if the said Principal shall well and faithfully do and perform the things agreed by the
Principal to be done and performed according to the terms of said contract, and shall pay all lawful
claims of laborers and other beneficiaries as defined by N.J.S.A. 2A:44-143 for labor performed or
materials, provisions, provender of other supplies, or teams, fuels, oils, implements or machinery
furnished, used or consumed in the carrying forward, performing or completing of said contract, we
agreeing and assenting that this undertaking shall be for the benefit of laborers and any beneficiary as
defined in N.J.S.A. 2A:44-143 having a just claim, as well as, for the Obligee herein, then this obligation
shall be void; otherwise, the same shall remain in full force and effect; it being expressly understood and
agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall in no event exceed the penal
amount of this obligation as herein stated.
The said Surety hereby stipulates and agrees that no modifications, omissions or additions in or
to the terms of the said contract or in or to the plans or specifications therefore shall in anywise affect the
obligation of said Surety on its bond, and the Surety hereby waives notice of same.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, we have hereunto set our hands and seals
this
day of
in the year 20
WITNESS OR ATTEST:
PRINCIPAL
[CORPORATE SEAL]
WITNESS OR ATTEST:
SURETY
[CORPORATE SEAL]
Contract Bond-2
P300.236
POWER OF EXECUTION
The undersigned, a ____________________________________________________
corporation, partnership, individual
under the laws of the State of ____________________________________________, having
principal office or registered agent in New Jersey at ________________________________,
street
_______________________________________, hereby nominates, constitutes and appoints
town
_____________________________________ with full power to act ________________________,
alone or in
_____________________________________, on behalf of _________________________________
conjunction with another person
name of company
to make, execute, seal and deliver on its behalf as contractor and as its act and deed, any and all contracts,
change orders, monthly and final payment certificates and other like instruments.
Such contracts, change orders, monthly and final payment certificates and other like instruments
shall be binding upon said company as fully and to all intents and purposes as if such instruments had
been duly executed and acknowledged and delivered by the authorized officers of the company when
duly executed, as indicated above, by either one of the aforementioned.
WITNESS OR ATTEST:
NAME OF COMPANY
________________________________________
BY: ____________________________
Signature
SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED PERSONS

TO ACT ON BEHALF OF ABOVE COMPANY
________________________________________
________________________________
Address
________________________________________
________________________________
Date
________________________________________
Corporate Seal:
Power of Execution-1
P300.236

Borough of Paramus
Bergen County
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
The Standard Specifications of the New Jersey Turnpike Authority (Authority), Sixth Edition, dated 2004,
copies of which are issued separately, as amended and augmented by the Supplementary Specifications,
shall govern the construction of this Project and the execution of the Contract.
The attention of the Bidders is specifically directed to the provisions of such Standard Specifications,
which are hereby made a part hereof, as if fully set forth at length herein.
SUPPLEMENTARY SPECIFICATIONS
The following clauses represent modifications to the corresponding subsections of the Standard
Specifications and Sections and Subsections added to the Standard Specifications, all relating exclusively
to the above Contract. Any applicable provision in the Standard Specifications not amended by and not
in conflict with the Supplementary Specifications shall be understood to be in full effect.
Supplementary Specifications - 1
P300.236
DIVISION 100 - GENERAL PROVISIONS

SECTION 101 - GENERAL INFORMATION
101.02
DEFINITIONS
B.
Terms
The following term is replaced:
Proposal
The Authority issued Electronic Bidding form

which has been completed, executed, and
submitted by the Bidder as a bid for the
performance of the Project.
The following terms are added:

Electronic Bidding
The means of producing a Proposal using the

Authoritys approved software that has been
downloaded from the Authoritys website.
Owner
Is defined as the New Jersey Turnpike Authority.

Whenever in Subsection 106.20 the approval,
consent, concurrence or permission of the Owner
or Authority is required or authorized (an
Approval), the approval of the Chief Engineer
or his designee shall be deemed the approval of
the Owner.
Third Party Contractor
Shall mean all persons, firms, partnerships or

corporations entering into the contract with the
Owner to assist Owner in Owners responsibilities
Insured
Includes Owner, Contractor, any Third Party

Contractor retained by Owner as applicable,
Subcontractors, and Sub-Subcontractor named in a
policy or a Certificate of Insurance signed by a duly
authorized representative of the Insurer
Insurance Broker
Shall mean an individual or organization

representing the Owner in soliciting, negotiating
or buying coverage and rendering services
related to these functions.
Insurer
Shall mean the insurance carrier providing any or

all of the insurance to be provided by Owner.
Site
Shall mean the location described in the Contract

Documents.
P300.236
Employees
Shall include all laborers, craftspersons,

superintendents and executive officers engaged
in wage paid employment at the Site in
connection with the Work.
Payroll
Shall mean all wages of subject employees

earned for hours worked for the above Contract
subject to the standard exclusions provided by
the applicable New Jersey law.
OCIP or Wrap-up
Shall mean Owner provided and paid insurance

program with the insurance coverages and limits
described in Subsection 106.20.
Safety Representative
The term refers to the person hired by the

Contractor to be responsible for the management
of all the Contractors safety matters. The Safety
Representative shall possess appropriate
credentials as determined by the Authority and
shall have successfully completed the 30-hour
course given by OSHA in Construction Safety
and Health. The Chief Engineer or his designee
may accept other safety certifications or safety
training in lieu of the above.
Excluded Parties
a. Excluded Parties are contractors,

subcontractors, and other individuals who are
hazardous materials removal and/or transport
companies, vendors, suppliers, fabricators,
material dealers, drivers, or others whose function
is solely to supply materials, personnel, parts or
equipment to and from the Site. This includes but
is not limited to vendors, suppliers, fabricators,
material dealers, drivers, truckers and crane
owner/operators whose on-site employees are
engaged solely in the delivery, loading, hauling,
and/or unloading of material to or from the Site.
Contractors and Subcontractors not working at
the Project Site (such as deliverymen, truckers,
haulers, etc.) and others who occasionally
work/visit the Site are also excluded.
Determination of who is an Excluded Parties shall
be made by the Authority in consultation with the
Contractor and the Insurance Broker.
b. Notwithstanding any apparent limits to the
definition of "Excluded Parties" described above,
Owner reserves the right, in its sole discretion to
remove or exclude (after first being included) any
Contractor or Subcontractor from the OCIP,
P300.236
notwithstanding such partys apparent eligibility
for same.
c. "Excluded Parties" shall not be included under the
OCIP. All Excluded Parties, subcontractors and
individuals as defined herein may be required to
provide evidence of their own insurance to the
Owner before access to the Site is allowed. The
specific requirements are detailed in Subsection
106.20D.
OCIP
Administrator
Is defined as a representative of the Insurance

Broker who is located at the Site or at Authoritys
Headquarters in Woodbridge, or in their
specified office, and handles insurance
enrollment, claims and other matters relating to
the Owner Controlled Insurance Program.
OCIP Manual
Is the document which details all of the

parameters of the OCIP. The OCIP Manual is a
Contract Document and is hereby incorporated
by reference in the contract. The failure of the
Owner to include the manual in the Bid
Documents shall not relieve Contractor of any of
the obligations contained therein. The OCIP
Manual is available on the Authoritys Web Site
(www.state.nj.us/turnpike/professionalservices.html) under the Engineering Guides and
Information Section. Follow the link entitled
Owner Controlled Insurance Program (OCIP)
Manual Turnpike Widening Contracts for
Turnpike 6 to 9 Widening Contracts and Owner
Controlled Insurance Program (OCIP) Manual
All Other Contracts for all other Contracts
New Jersey
Turnpike Authority
Health and Safety
Plan (NJTA-HASP)
Requirements
Guidelines and minimum requirements for the

development and implementation of the
Contractors Health and Safety Plan for the
Authoritys OCIP Program. The NJTA-HASP
Requirements is available on the Authoritys
Web Site
(www.state.nj.us/turnpike/professionalservices.html) under the Engineering Guides and
Information Section. Follow the link titled
NJTA Minimum Guidelines for Contractors
OCIP Health and Safety Plan (HASP)
Health and Safety

Plan
A written plan or plans that outline the safety

management systems that will be used by the
P300.236
contractor to control losses at their job sites.
SECTION 102 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONDITIONS

102.03
PROPOSALS
Delete the first paragraph and replace with the following:
The Bidder shall submit a Proposal via Electronic Bidding.
Electronic Bidding information is available on the Authoritys Electronic Bidding
website. Registration and a subscription fee are required to access the Proposal
documents. The Bidder shall download the bidding software. When installing the bid
program, the Bidder enters its vendor code assigned by the Authority. The Bidder shall
not alter or in any way change the software.
The Bidder shall download all Proposal documents, including any and all Addenda,
from the Authoritys Electronic Bidding website.
The Authority assumes no
responsibility for errors or omissions in the downloaded Proposal documents. The
Bidder shall direct questions or problems with downloading or using the electronic files
to the contacts identified on the website.
The Bidder shall specify a price in figures for each Pay Item. For lump sum items, the
price shall appear solely in the box provided for the lump sum item under the column
designated as Amounts. For unit price items, the per unit price shall appear under the
column designated Unit Price in the appropriate box, and the product of the respective
unit price and the approximate quantity for that item shall appear under the column
designated Amounts. The Total Contract Price is the sum of all figures of the
Scheduled Items of Work shown in the column designated Amounts and shall appear
at the location provided therefore. Determination of the low bidder, for purposes of price
comparison will be made on the basis of the correct total price.
The only entries permitted in the Proposal will be the unit or lump sum prices for items
that must be bid. The Electronic Bidding software will perform all extensions of the unit
or lump sum prices, and calculate the total bid amounts.
The Bidder shall check its bid prior to submission using the Electronic Bidding software.
The Bidder shall select Tools and then select Check Bid and assure there are no
errors prior to submitting the electronic bid.
For bids submitted by Joint Ventures, the bidder shall follow the software instructions to
indicate their electronic bid as a joint bid.
102.04
FAMILIARITY WITH WORK

The following language is added:
The NJTA Standard Drawings are not included in the Contract Plan documents provided
to registered Plan Holders. The NJTA Standard Drawings are available at:
P300.236
www.state.nj.us/turnpike/standard-drawings.html.
The following reference material will be available electronically (*.pdf format) on the
Authoritys Electronic Bidding or Secure FTP website. Instructions for accessing the
Secure FTP website, if necessary, will be displayed on the Electronic Bidding website.
Structure Foundation and Roadway Geotechnical Engineering Report, OPS No.
P3339, Garden State Parkway Interchange 163 Improvements, MP 162.7 to 163.7,
Borough of Paramus, Bergen County, NJ
New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection, Division of Land Use
Regulation Permit No. 0246-12-0005.1
New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection, Division of Land Use
Regulation Freshwater Wetlands Letter of Interpretation: Line Verification; File
No.: 246-12.005.1; Activity number: FWW120001
Bergen County Soil Conservation District, Soil Erosion and Sediment Control
Certification
Work Order No. 1510-P, G4S Technology, LLC
Utility Order No. 1493-P, PSE&E Gas
Utility Order No. 1494-P, PSE&E Electric
Utility Order No. 1495-P, PSE&E Electric
Utility Order No. 1496-P, United Water
Utility Order No. 1497-P, Verizon
Utility Order No. 1498-P, Borough of Paramus, Public Works
Utility Order No. 1499-P, Cablevision
The following list of Reference Drawings is not found on the Title Sheet and is provided
for assistance in identifying relevant Contracts and Drawing Numbers. It is the
responsibility of all prospective bidders to utilize the information on these Reference
Drawings in order to prepare a contract bid.
Location
(i.e., Str. No.)
Structure
Nos.
162.3,
162.4, 162.6 &
162.7
Structure
Nos. 163.3N,
163.4N,
163.5S
&
163.6S
Structure No.
163.2S
Structure
Nos. 163.0N
& 163.3S
Structures
Contract Name
Drawing Nos.
Grading, Paving & Bridges
113 of 144 thru

144 of 144
Garden State Parkway Bergen

Widening
214 of 315 thru

271 of 315
90-588
Bridge Repairs, 1990 M.P. 154.3 to

M.P. 164.9
Bridge Repairs North 1992 (MP
148.7 to MP 168.4)
35 of 44
84-845
26 of 79 thru
28 of 79
84-930
Bridge Repairs 1993, M.P. 154.0 to
22 of 41
84-974
Contract
Number
182
P300.236
Nos. 163.2S &
163.1N
Structure
Nos. 163.0N
& 163.3S
Structures
Nos. 163.1N
& 163.2S
168.0
Bridge Parapet Rehabilitation
M.P. 160.2 to M.P. 171.7
12 of 28 & 13
of 28
84-1098
Northern Bridge
140.2 to MP 171.6
45 of 67 thru
48 of 67
84-1284
Repairs
MP
The Contractor shall review these Reference Drawings, which include information
required for the prosecution of the contract work.
It is the Contractors sole responsibility to research, obtain, and review available
documentation, within the Contracts and Drawings cited above. The Authority does not
guarantee the accuracy of available as-built documentation.
The Contractor is advised that copies of relevant as-built drawings, as well as any and all
field notes prepared by the contractor are required to accompany all shop drawing
submittals. Refer to Subsection 104.08, Shop and Working Drawings, for shop drawing
submittals.
102.05
EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Delete the first paragraph and replace it with the following:
Prospective bidders must examine the Contract Documents carefully before bidding and
must request, electronically, for any interpretation or correction of any apparent
ambiguity, inconsistency or error therein. Any requests for interpretation or correction
shall be submitted electronically through the Authoritys website Public Bidders Portal
by
logging
in
and
following
the
instructions
at
https://capexweb.turnpike.state.nj.us/strategicsourcing/login.
If necessary, an
interpretation or correction shall be issued by the Chief Engineer as an Addendum. It is
the obligation of the Bidder to check the Authoritys Electronic Bidding website for an
Addendum. Such Addendum shall become a part of the Contract Documents. Requests
for interpretations and/or corrections shall be considered only if received at least five (5)
business days prior to the established submission deadline for Proposals.
102.07
PROPOSAL GUARANTY
The last sentence of the first paragraph is deleted and replaced with the following:
In the event Bidder supplies either (i) or (ii), Bidder must utilize the form provided in the
Authoritys Electronic Bidding software.
102.09
SUBMITTING PROPOSALS
The Bidder shall submit a Proposal via Electronic Bidding. An authorized representative
P300.236
of the Bidder is required to digitally sign the Proposal. The Authority may reject
Proposals that are not digitally signed by the authorized representative of the Bidder
with an approved digital signature. More information on digital signatures are found on
the Authoritys Electronic Bidding website.
The Bidder is solely responsible for any and all errors and for timely submission of the
bid, all components thereof, and all attachments thereto, through the Electronic Bidding
system; the Authority assumes no responsibility for any claim arising from the failure of
any Bidder or of the electronic delivery system to cause any bid, bid component, or
attachment to not be delivered to the Authority on or before the time set for the opening
of bids.
The following documents shall be submitted with the Proposal:
Following the first paragraph replace the third bullet item document on the list with the
following:
Filed copy of Public Records Filing for New Business Entity, evidencing filing with the
New Jersey Department of Treasury, Division of Revenue (if prequalification not
required).
Replace the fourth bullet item document on the list with the following:
Acknowledgment of compliance of the Contractors Business Registration as required
pursuant to N.J.S.A 52:32.
Replace the eighth bullet item document on the list with the following:
Acknowledgment of compliance of the Public Works Certification as required pursuant
to P.L.2003, C.91, N.J.S.A 34:11-56:48.
Add the following bullet to the required document list:
Acknowledgment of compliance with the Disclosure of Investment Activities in Iran
form provided by the Authority, pursuant to N.J.S.A. 52:32-58.
102.11
CAUSES FOR REJECTION

Replace reason (d) with the following:
(d) if the Proposal Guaranty is not verified on the internet by one of the Surety Registry
Agencies listed in the Authoritys Electronic Bidding software.
102.13
PREVAILING WAGE RATES

The following is added:
State wage rates may be obtained from the New Jersey Department of Labor &
Workforce Development (Telephone: 609-292-2259) or by accessing the department of
Labor & Workforce Developments web site at:
P300.236
http://lwd.dol.state.nj.us/labor/wagehour/wagehour_index.html
102.15
PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION ACT

Replace the 3rd sentence with the following:
The Authority requests that Bidders submit a copy of their certificate of registration with
the New Jersey Department of Labor and Workforce Development prior to bid.
102.16
BUSINESS REGISTRATION ACT

Replace the 2nd and 3rd paragraphs with the following:
Proof of valid business registration with the State of New Jersey Department of Treasury,
Division of Revenue shall be submitted by the successful Bidder in the form of a valid
BRC in compliance with N.J.S.A. 52:32-44. No contract shall be awarded without proof of
business registration with the Division of Revenue. Any questions with regard to
obtaining a BRC can be directed to the Division of Revenue at (609) 292-1730.
Alternatively, further information is available on the internet at:
http://www.state.nj.us/treasury/revenue/gettingregistered.shtml
No subcontract shall be entered into by the Contractor unless the Subcontractor first
provides proof of valid business registration.
The Authority requests that all Bidders submit a copy of the Bidders BRC prior to bid.
The Contractor shall submit to the Authority a copy of the Contractors list of
Subcontractors and their addresses and any updates that take place during the
performance of the Contract. The Contractor shall submit a complete and accurate list of
Subcontractors to the Authority before final payment is made for goods provided or
services rendered or for construction of a construction project under the Contract.
The following subsection is added:
102.17
PUBLIC LAW 2005, CHAPTER 51 AND (EXECUTIVE ORDER 134) AND
EXECUTIVE ORDER 117
In order to safeguard the integrity of State government procurement by imposing
restrictions to insulate the award of State contracts from political contributions that pose
the risk of improper influence, purchase of access, or the appearance thereof, Executive
Order 134 was signed on September 22, 2004 (EO 134). The Order is applicable to all
State agencies, the principal departments of the executive branch, any division, board,
bureau, office, commission within or created by a principal executive branch department,
and any independent State authority, board, commission, instrumentality or agency.
Executive Order 134 was superseded by Public Law 2005, c.51, signed into law on March
22, 2005. In September 2008, Executive Order 117 was signed and become effective
November 15, 2008. It applies to the same government contracting entities subject to
Executive Order 134, but extends the political contribution restrictions by expanding the
P300.236
definition of business entity to include, for example, more corporate shareholders and
sole proprietors. Executive Orders 134 and 117, and Public Law 2005, c.51 contain
restrictions and reporting requirements that will necessitate a thorough review of the
provisions. Pursuant to the requirements of Public Law 2005, Chapter 51, (EO 134) the
terms and conditions set forth in this subsection and in Appendix B are material terms of
any contract resulting from this bid solicitation.
The required certification forms shall be submitted by the intended awardee only who
will be notified in writing and sent the required forms by the Authority.
The required certification forms must be submitted to the Authority within 48 hours of
Notice by the Authority.
Please note that more than one Certification and Disclosure may be required from
your firm
See Appendix B for Compliance Requirements.
102.18
DISCLOSURE OF INVESTMENT ACTIVITIES IN IRAN

New Jersey Public Law 2012, c.25 requires all parties seeking to enter into a contract with
the Authority to certify that it is not providing goods or services of $20,000,000 or more in
the energy sector of Iran. Each Bidder shall certify under penalty of perjury, date and
return to the Authority the completed form entitled Disclosure of Investment Activities
in Iran as set forth in the Proposal. Failure to include the completed form, certified and
dated, may be grounds for rejection of Bidders Proposal.
SECTION 103 - AWARD AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT

103.04
SUBLETTING AND ASSIGNING CONTRACT

The following is added after the second paragraph:
The specialty items under this Contract are:
Highway Lighting
Wick Drains
Settlement Monitoring
SECTION 104 - CONTROL OF WORK

104.01
INTENT OF CONTRACT
The following is added before the first paragraph:
The Contract involves the realignment of the Garden State Parkway mainline into the
P300.236
existing median, creating right side exit ramps, construction of six new structures,
superstructure replacements for four existing structures, deck replacement for one
existing structure, four retaining walls, seven new overhead sign structures, four storm
water management basins, new interchange lighting, signing, striping and related
drainage improvements
104.04
CHANGE OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS.

Delete the tenth paragraph and replace it with the following:
Change Orders may also include appropriate changes in the terms of the Contract, such
as extensions of time and adjustment of quantities. Change Orders may also include
specifications and drawings that may be necessary to cover the additional work.
104.06
CONTRACTORS ORGANIZATION
The following is added after the first paragraph:
All contractor personnel shall wear photo identification at all times on Authority work
sites. The photo identification shall have the individuals name, company name and
company telephone number.
The following is added after the fourth paragraph:
Ensure the Contractors Designee for Deck Rideability QC has a minimum of five years
highway and/or bridge construction experience with a minimum of three years of
relevant experience performing Ride Quality Tests using the equipment specified herein,
or approved equal. Do not begin deck or approach slab Ride Quality Tests as defined in
Subsection 401.12 (F) (1) until the qualifications of the Contractors Designee have been
approved by the Engineer. The Ride Quality Tests shall be performed under the on-site
supervision of the Contractors Designee, or an individual that meets the experience
qualifications stated herein. If an individual other than the Contractors Designee will
supervise the Ride Quality Tests, the qualifications of that person shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval.
104.07
COOPERATION BY CONTRACTOR
The Contractor is advised that other contracts with the New Jersey Turnpike Authority
for work on or adjacent to the Turnpike roadways may be in progress simultaneously
with the work to be done under this Contract, either within, or adjacent to, the limits of
this Contract. These contracts include, but are not necessarily limited to the following:
GSP Bridge Repairs and Resurfacing, Contract No. P100.267
Roadwide Guide Sign Improvements on the GSP, Contract No. P600.320
Safety Improvements at Traversable Medians along the New Jersey Turnpike
and Garden State Parkway, Construction Contract No: A200.301 Description:
GSP Bridge Repairs and Resurfacing, Contract No. P100.317
P300.236
GSP Bridge Deck Reconstruction, Milepost 143 to 154, Contract No. P100.233
The Contractor is advised that the work will be performed over railroads, roadways and
utilities and that during construction and rigging operations, he will be required to
comply with the provisions of Subsections 106.16 and 106.18 and shall provide approved
means for safely preventing any objects and debris resulting from his operations from
falling to the ground or onto the roadway below. The Contractor shall be responsible for
protection of railroad and utility properties. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
for review, details of the means he proposes to catch and collect materials.
104.08
SHOP AND WORKING DRAWINGS

Shop and working drawings shall be submitted for the following items of work including
but not limited to:
Pollution collection and control plan (each structure)
Working platform plan (each structure)
Emergency management plan
Paint system samples, data sheets and specifications
Lead health and safety plan
Temporary Sheeting
Catch Systems - Interior and Fascia
Temporary Shielding
Reinforcement Steel
S-I-P Metal Forms
Structural Steel including operations and equipment for installation
Drilled Shafts
Equipment for Drilled Shafts and Drilled Holes
Strip Seal Expansion Joints
Modular Expansion Joints
High Performance Concrete (HPC)
Bearings
MSE Abutments
MSE Retaining Walls
Temporary Shoring
Pile Submittal (Driving Equipment, WEAP, PDA/CAPWAP, and Qualifications)
Wick Drains (Material, Equipment and Qualifications)
Settlement Monitoring (Instrumentation, Materials, Equipment, and Qualifications)
Sign Structures including operations and equipment for installation
Demolition Plans specific to each structure signed and sealed by N.J.P.E.
Pile Removal Plan
Median Barrier Reconstruction - field measurements, demolition methods, formwork
Precast concrete construction barrier
Conduits, cables and wires
Cables connector kits
Grounding and termination devices
Joint Reconstruction Type 1P, 1P Modified and F
P300.236
Pavement riser repair
Temporary Lighting
Sign Panel Layout and Legend
Sign Panel Overlays and Coverings (sheeting sample and catalog cuts of the sheeting,
to be supplied separately from the Sign Panel Layout and Legend Submission)
Sign Panel Sheet (Contractor shall submit a 24x24 sample sign with the approved
sheeting sample mounted on an aluminum sheet with typical background colors and
white lettering)
Shop and Working drawings and design calculations for catches and temporary flooring
platforms shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of
New Jersey, and submitted for review and approval to the Engineer.
104.09
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
Prior to the start of construction, the Contractor shall field verify the location, elevation,
dimensions, etc. of all existing superstructure and substructure components to remain or
to be modified in anyway. A copy of this survey shall be submitted to the Engineer for
their review and use. The contractor shall also verify that the location, elevation,
dimension, etc. of the superstructure and substructure components are as shown on the
plans, and any discrepancy shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Engineer.
Field verification of the dimensions of the existing structure shall be completed prior to
the preparation of shop drawings and fabrication of the new structural steel.
The Engineer will provide the Contractor with the outlines of the limits of spalled areas,
bridge deck surface removal, joint reconstruction limits, safety walk, parapet and curb
repairs and other work areas to be repaired and reconstructed.
The use of pilot holes will be required to accurately determine the lateral limits of deck
replacement. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a schedule of his test crews.
He shall give written notice to the Engineer 48 hours in advance of commencement of
such work, advising him of the times, number of test crews working and locations where
he proposes to start work. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer in providing
whatever men and equipment that may be required to provide these pilot holes and the
cost of this work shall be included in the unit prices bid for the Concrete Deck
Replacement items.
The Contractors layout shall also include providing regularly spaced guide markers and
continuous string line between markers on the finished pavement for the application of
reflectorized striping.
For areas requiring resurfacing, the Contractor shall furnish the control for proper profile
and cross slope and install all necessary materials and devices, such as screed rails on
adjustable chairs or piano wire strung between drive pins at 25 foot centers, for
spreading the asphalt surfacing. Such screed rails or piano wire shall be set to be able to
P300.236
provide required compacted pavement thickness. The vertical alignment of the screed
rails or piano wire shall be adjusted to a smooth profile meeting the bridge armor joints
within the tolerances specified in subsection 302.05(K) or as directed by the Engineer.
The cross slope of the screed for all lifts shall be set to provide a smooth transition as
directed by the Engineer from the cross slope of the existing pavement surface and the
armored joint or the abutment headblock cross slope.
Screed controls shall employ approved compensating devices to adjust the grade line so
that minor changes in grade elevations will not be reflected immediately in the finished
surface.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to confirm/field verify the existing ground
elevation prior to the stripping of topsoil and start of earthwork operations.
Nighttime operations shall be illuminated by a lighting system which shall provide the
construction area with a minimum illumination intensity of 5 foot candles and shall be
positioned and operated to preclude glare to approaching traffic. The lighting system
shall not include incandescent lights.
The cost of the lighting system for nighttime operations will not be paid for separately
but shall be included in the prices bid for the various scheduled pay items.
All equipment used for nighttime operations shall have a minimum of 72 square inches
of high intensity reflective sheeting toward the extremities of each side of the equipment.
A minimum of 144 square inches of the sheeting shall be visible from each direction. The
color of the reflective sheeting shall be orange.
Within 24 hours of the beginning of the lane closing, the Contractor shall remove the
headblock material at abutment locations or the overlay material at sealed deck joint
locations to determine the extent of repair work required.
The amount of allowable If and Where Directed by the Engineer quantities and
estimated quantities shown on the plans shall be performed within the stipulated lane
closing time frames listed in Division 800.
Additional commensurate lane closing time may be allowed as determined by the
Engineer in cases where the amount of If and Where Directed by the Engineer
quantities exceed considerably the quantities stipulated in the Contract. For If and
Where Directed by the Engineer work on bridges currently not scheduled in the
Contract, commensurate, allowable lane closing hours will be established by the
Engineer.
In stages where two lanes or similar are closed and inclement weather or other
circumstances may impact the stipulated lane closing pick-up time, the Contractor shall
concentrate his work effort on the lane adjacent to the active traffic lane. He shall be
prepared to complete work in this lane ahead of the work in the remaining area in order
to allow this lane to be opened to traffic, at the time requested by the Engineer. This
approach may require a non-contiguous paving operation. The Contractor shall allow in
P300.236
his bid for any additional cost, which may result for the various items involved.
The Contractor shall allow in his bid for the above stipulated requirements and
provisions.
104.11
NOISE CONTROL
Construction operations for the demolition of existing structures that creates impulse or
impact noise shall not be performed during overnight hours.
All construction activities, including pile driving operations shall conform to Local Noise
Ordinances. No additional costs will be considered for payment by the Authority for
restrictions imposed by these ordinances.
104.13
SANITARY, HEALTH AND SAFETY PROVISIONS

Add the following to the beginning of the subsection:
The Contractor shall have a Full-Time Safety Representative (SR) per the NJTA Minimum
Guidelines for Contractors OCIP Health and Safety Plan (HASP), Page 10, Item
3.03(A)(3). The Full -Time SR working hours shall be defined as 40 hours per week.
Add the following after the 2nd paragraph:
(A) TOILET FACILITIES
The Contractor shall ensure privacy to all employees and Authority personnel assigned
to the Project by providing on site separate toilet facilities for male and female
employees. These facilities shall be portable toilets and clearly marked MEN and
WOMEN. They are in addition to the facilities provided in the field office.
The total number of facilities shall be determined from the chart listed below. A facility
is defined as one unit. A facility site is defined as a location that provides at least one
facility for each sex. The maximum distance between the location of facility sites and
workers shall be no more than one-half mile.
All toilet facilities shall be in compliance with OSHA Regulation 1926.51(c) with the
exception that the Authority will require that separate toilet facilities be provided for
males and females. The sewage disposal method shall not endanger the health of
employees and shall be in compliance with all State and Federal regulations.
Toilet facilities shall be cleaned and sanitized a minimum of once per week except from
May 15 through September 15 in which these facilities shall be cleaned and sanitized a
minimum of twice per week.
Number
of Male
Employees
Minimum No.
of
Facilities
Number
of Female
Employees
Minimum No.
of
Facilities
P300.236
for Male Use
1
2
3
4
5
6
6+(1)
1 - 15
16 - 35
36 - 55
56 - 80
81 - 110
111 - 150
Over 150
1 - 15
16 - 35
36 - 55
56 - 80
81 - 110
111 - 150
Over 150
for Female Use

1
2
3
4
5
6
6+(1)
(1) - One additional facility for each additional 40 employees of

each sex.
No ground intrusive activities shall be performed by the Contractor without prior
approval from the Engineer.
:
(B) TEMPORARY FLOORS AND CATCH PLATFORMS.
Workers who are working on temporary floors or catch platforms on bridges and
viaducts shall be instructed concerning the safe use of these systems. The contractor shall
review the following items with their employees and subcontractors as part of a PreConstruction Safety meeting prior to the installation of the system:
1) Design
(a)
The elements of the system, including planks and plywood (or other
material) top cover, and the purpose of each element.
(b) Identification of areas allowed for catching demolished concrete.
(c)
A description of acceptable planking material.
2) Fall Protection
(a) Fall protection procedures that apply to installing or removing
temporary floors and catch platforms.
(b) The necessity and methods of fall protection when planks are
temporarily removed for any purpose.
(c) The necessity of fall protection when repairing damaged temporary
floors or catch platforms.
3) Inspection and Maintenance
(a) Signs of damage to planks or covering and the need to replace
damaged
materials promptly.
(b) Instruction to immediately report signs of damage to the shield to any
supervisor.
(c) Instruction that sheeting must be promptly replaced if shifted or
moved.
(d) Instruction that planks that have been removed or shifted must be
replaced in their proper positions.
The following subsections are added:
P300.236
104.14
CONSTRUCTION SAFETY
Contractors shall be required to insure that all employees, subcontractors and their
suppliers, while on the job site and in conduct of Authority contracts, comply with all
provisions of the NJTA-HASP Requirements and any other project specific Health
and Safety Plan(s). The Contractor shall familiarize himself with the contents
appropriate to his operations. The provisions of the Health and Safety Plans will be
strictly enforced. Non-compliance with safety specifications will be treated in the same
manner as non-compliance with any Contract item. Willful or repeated non-compliance
could result in the shutdown of the job or the suspension of a portion thereof.
The Contractor's personnel in any work area shall wear a vest at all times as specified in
Subsection 920.03.
The Federal Occupational Safety and Health Standards, 29 C.F.R. 1910 and 1926 (and all
future revisions or additions) are required by law to be followed on all work.
The NJTA -HASP Requirements and any other project specific Health and Safety
Plan(s) are supplementary documents to this law, and do not negate, abrogate, alter or
otherwise change any provisions of OSHA, or any other applicable laws.
Where other provisions in the Specifications conflict with provisions in the NJTA-
HASP Requirements and any other project specific Health and Safety Plan(s), the
more stringent requirements, as determined by the Engineer, shall govern.
104.15
ACCESS TO WORKING SITES

Delivery of materials and other work required for the Project shall not interfere with
Turnpike traffic.
Construction access depicted on the contract plans may need to be staged and/or moved
to accommodate embankment construction as required by the means and methods of the
contractor. Cost for staging and/or moving access locations and construction of
temporary access ramps, temporary shored fills, temporary retaining systems ramps, or
any other means that may be required to access the work site to complete the required
work, including equipment and material delivery shall be included in the prices bid for
the various scheduled pay items.
104.17
PROTECTION OF WETLANDS AND TRANSITION AREAS DURING

CONSTRUCTION
(A).
Prior to the commencement of all work, the Contractor shall locate and clearly
stake out the boundaries of all wetland areas and transition areas delineated on
the Contract Plans, which are outside the limits of construction, with temporary
orange plastic fence. KEEP OUT signs shall be placed at intervals of not less
than 100 feet around perimeter of all staked out areas. Should the marking be
damaged during construction, the Contractor shall repair it within one working
day.
P300.236
104.18
(B).
Entry into or physical disturbance of a designated wetland area and transition

area is prohibited, unless it is in accordance with the Contract Plans and
Specifications or prior approval has been obtained from the Engineer. Such
approval shall not be unreasonably refused.
(C).
Temporary roads shall not be placed in designated wetlands or transition areas

outside the limits of construction shown on Contract Plans. Where the entry of
vehicles into designated wetland or transition area is required and permitted, the
Contractor shall take measures to protect the wetland and transition area from
gouging, cutting or other damage by the use of appropriate protective measures
such as travel mats.
(D).
No fill shall be placed in wetland and transition areas either temporarily or

permanently beyond the limits of construction shown in the Contract Plans.
(E).
Storage of materials or equipment or parking of vehicles on wetlands and

transition areas is prohibited beyond the limits of construction shown in the
Contract Plans.
(F).
No construction wastes, excess fill, petroleum products or cut vegetative

materials shall be placed on any wetland or transition area beyond the limits of
construction shown in the Contract Plans.
(G).
No buildings or sanitary facilities, whether temporary or permanent, shall be

placed on any wetland or transition area.
(H).
Where construction is being carried out in adjoining areas or in portions of

wetland or transition areas, silt fences shall be placed along the edge of the
wetland or transition area so as to prevent silt running onto the wetland or
transition area beyond the limits of construction shown in the Contract Plans.
(I).
No borrow material shall be taken from a designated wetland or transition area

beyond the limits of construction shown in the Contract Plans.
NIGHTTIME OPERATIONS
A.
General
All operations that are performed during the non-daylight hours shall be
properly illuminated to allow for the complete performance and inspection of the
work. This work shall consist of furnishing, installing, operating, maintaining,
moving, and removing portable light towers and equipment-mounted fixtures
for nighttime construction operations, for the duration of the nighttime work on
the Contract. Nighttime operations consist of work specifically scheduled to
occur after sunset and before sunrise. Before nighttime operations may begin,
the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer that its nighttime operation
meets the light level requirements.
B.
Light Levels and Illumination Requirements
P300.236
A minimum of 50 lux shall be maintained throughout the entire area of
operation. Area of operation is a work area that is a minimum of 65 feet ahead
and behind the employee, where an employee is on or near the roadway.
Specific tasks should meet the minimum illumination levels shown in the
following table:
Minimum
Illumination
Level
50 lux
Description of Tasks
Embankment, fill, and compaction
Excavation regular, lateral ditch and
channel
Landscape, grassing and sodding
Maintenance of earthwork embankment
Mechanical sweeping and cleaning
Reworking shoulders
Subgrade stabilization and construction
50 lux
Bituminous concrete milling*

Bituminous concrete paving operation*
50 lux
Bituminous concrete roller operation*
Areas of
Illumination
General
illumination
throughout area
of operation
General
illumination
throughout area
of
operation.
Minimum of 200
feet ahead and
200 feet behind
equipment.
General
illumination
throughout area
of
operation.
Minimum of 100
feet ahead and
100 feet behind
equipment.
P300.236
Minimum
Illumination
Level
100 lux
200 lux
Description of Tasks
Barrier walls and traffic separators
Base course construction
Bituminous concrete paving operation*
Bituminous concrete roller operation*
Bridge decks
Bridge painting
Concrete pavement
Drainage structures, culverts, and storm
sewers
Guide rail and fencing
Highway
signs
and
permanent
installation
Removal of pavement
Other concrete structures
Painting stripes and pavement markers
Pot hole filling
Repair of concrete pavement
Resetting guide rail and fencing
Sidewalks
Surface treatment
Waterproofing and sealing
Any other operation not listed in this
table
Crack filling, sawcutting, and sealing
joints
Electrical work
Highway street lighting
Traffic signals
Intelligent transportation systems
Areas of
Illumination
General
illumination of
tasks
and
around
equipment.
Minimum of 25
feet ahead and
25 feet behind
equipment.
Illumination
shall
be
provided on the
sides
of
the
equipment.
Illumination on
task.
*Both requirements of 50 lux and 100 lux for these operations must be met.
Light meter readings shall be taken horizontally to the roadway surface facing
the light source. If the Contractor fails to meet the minimum illuminate levels at
any time, the Contractor shall cease its nighttime operations until such time that
required light levels are attained. The uniformity of illuminance, defined as the
ratio of the average illuminance to the minimum illuminance over the work area,
shall not exceed 5:1. Construction operations shall be deemed to include all
work operations by the Contractors personnel, including layout and
measurements ahead of the actual work.
1.
Equipment
Materials and/or equipment shall be in good operating condition and in
compliance with applicable OSHA, NEC, and NEMA codes.
The Contractor shall furnish, for use by the engineer, two light meters
P300.236
capable of measuring the level of illuminance in lux. These light meters
shall be supplied to the Engineer for use as necessary to check the
adequacy of illumination throughout the nighttime operations. The light
meters will become the property of the Contractor after acceptance.
The Contractor shall provide suitable brackets and hardware to mount
lighting fixtures and generators on machines and equipment. Mountings
shall be designed so that lights can be aimed and positioned as necessary
to reduce glare and to provide the required illuminance. Mounting
brackets and fixtures shall not interfere with the equipment operator or
any overhead structures and shall provide for secure connection of the
fixtures with minimum vibration.
Portable and trailer-mounted light towers shall be sturdy and freestanding without the aid of guy wires or bracings. Towers shall be
capable of being moved as necessary to keep pace with the construction
operation. Portable towers and trailers shall be positioned to minimize
the risk of being impacted by traffic on the roadway or by construction
traffic or equipment.
Light towers mounted on paving and milling machines, rollers, and
other paving equipment shall not exceed the height of vertical
underclearances, such as trees, aerial utilities, or bridge underclearances.
Lights shall be aimed and adjusted to provide uniform illumination with
a uniformity ratio 5:1. The hopper, auger, and screed areas of pavers
shall be uniformly illuminated. The operators controls on all machines
shall be uniformly illuminated.
Conventional vehicle headlights shall not be permitted as the means of
illumination while working. All moving equipment used for nighttime
operations shall have a lighting system consisting of a minimum of two
lights directed in each direction of travel of the equipment. The
equipment shall also have a minimum of 0.5 square feet high intensity
retroflective sheeting toward the extremities of each side of the
equipment. A minimum of 1 square foot of the sheeting shall be visible
from each direction. All workers shall, during the hours of darkness,
wear reflectorized garments as specified for traffic directors.
Existing street and highway lighting shall not eliminate the need for the
Contractor to provide lighting. Consideration may be given to the
amount of illumination provided by existing lights in determining the
wattage and/or quantity of lights to be provided.
The Contractor shall provide sufficient fuel, spare lamps, generators, and
qualified personnel to ensure that all required lights operate
continuously during nighttime operations. Each generator shall have a
fuel tank of sufficient capacity to permit operation of the lighting system
for a minimum of 12 hours. In the event of any failure to the lighting
system, the operation shall be discontinued until the required level of
P300.236
illumination is restored. Hydraulic generator system shall be used in
residential areas and areas designated to minimize noise pollution. If
hydraulic generator systems are unavailable, other generator-powered
systems may be used with the approval of the Engineer.
A supply of emergency flares shall be maintained by the Contractor for
use in the event of emergency or unanticipated situations.
2.
C.
104.19
Glare Control
All lighting provided under this item shall be designed, installed, and
operated to avoid glare that interferes with traffic on the roadway or that
causes annoyance or discomfort for residences adjoining the roadway.
The Contractor shall locate, aim, and adjust the lights to provide the
required level of illuminance and uniformity in the work area without
the creation of objectionable glare. The Engineer shall be the sole judge
of when glare is unacceptable, either for traffic or for adjoining
residences. The Contractor shall provide screening such as shields,
visors, or louvers on lights as necessary to reduce objectionable levels of
glare.
Payment
Separate payment will not be made for lighting for nighttime operations, but all
costs thereof shall be included in the prices bid for the various pay items as
scheduled in the Proposal.
ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY.

(A)
DESCRIPTION.
To minimize the potential risk of exposure of on-site personnel to hazardous substances

or other hazards during the work, the Contractor shall take the appropriate health and
safety measures during all site work, specifically including the excavation, handling,
stockpiling, sampling, loading, transportation, storage, reuse and disposal/recycling of
regulated materials.
Contact specific tasks may include, but are not limited to, the excavation handling and
disposal of ID-27 soils, extraction, management and disposal of contaminated
groundwater, asbestos and lead based paint surveys and/or abatement, and
management/disposal of asbestos and/or lead containing building materials.
The Contractor shall assume full responsibility and liability for compliance with all
applicable codes and regulations pertaining to the health and safety of personnel during
the execution of the work.
(B)
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS.
(1)
Submittals and Notices.

(a)
General.
To properly protect its on-site workers, the Contractor shall
P300.236
conduct a workplace hazard assessment to determine whether
physical, chemical and/or biological hazards are present and to
determine whether a site-specific Health and Safety Plan (HASP)
is required to comply with all applicable Federal, State and/or
local regulations. The Contractor shall employ a Certified
Industrial Hygienist (CIH) or Certified Safety Professional (CSP)
to develop and oversee the workplace hazard assessment and
implementation of the HASP.
Before the start of work, the successful bidder shall submit the
following items listed below to the Engineer, unless otherwise
stated, for review. No work shall begin until these submittals
are returned by the Engineer with indication that the submittal is
returned for unrestricted use or final-but-restricted use.
i.
Telephone numbers and location of emergency services.
ii.
Copy of notification sent to other entities at the work

site.
iii.
A list of the Contractors principal staff assignments,

including the Superintendent and other personnel in
attendance at the site. The list shall identify individuals,
duties and responsibilities, their addresses and
telephone numbers.
iv.
Current Physicians Written Opinion as required by

OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910.1101 and 1910.134, for all
workers.
v.
A description of the means, methods, techniques and

procedures to be used for:
(a) Site characterization; description of site activities;
task-specific
and
operation-specific
hazard
assessment.
(b) Workers safety and health training program
(including an appendix containing employee
training certifications).
(c) Workers medical surveillance program (including
an appendix containing employee medical
surveillance records).
(d) Frequency and types of air monitoring, personnel
monitoring and environmental sampling techniques
and instrumentation to be used, including methods
of maintenance and calibration of monitoring and
sampling equipment to be used.
(e) Names and qualifications of health and safety
supervisory personnel.
P300.236
(f) Personal protective equipment to be used by
employees.
(g) Site control measures.
(h) Hazard
communication
and
Right-to-Know
program.
(i) Decontamination procedures.
(j) Emergency response plan (including route to
hospital map and emergency contact numbers).
(k) Confined space entry procedures.
(l) Spill containment program.
(m) Excavation safety.
(n) Hot work (including welding and cutting).
(b)
vi.
If the means, methods, techniques and procedures

established by the Contractor must be changed, the
Contractor shall notify, in writing, the Engineer, the
Authority, and appropriate regulatory agencies of the
alternate to be used.
vii.
Any additional applicable Federal, State, and local

worker certifications/licenses for performing asbestos
related work.
viii.
The Contractor shall provide the draft HASP to the

Engineer for review and comment. After the Contractor
has satisfactorily addressed all comments, the final
version of the HASP shall be submitted to the Engineer
for review and approval.
ix.
Agricultural Lands: Various project work areas require

excavation of former agricultural lands.
Pesticide
residues may be present in the soils within the
construction area resulting from the application of
pesticides. Compounds from pesticides that may be
present include but are not limited to arsenic, lead, DDT
and Aldrin. The Contractor may acquire field data or
information at the Contractors expense, but will be
provided to the Authority, upon request.
Pollution Control.
i.
It shall be the Contractor's ultimate responsibility to

ensure the health and safety of all the Contractor's
employees and subcontracting personnel. The
Contractor shall develop a pollution control system for
the complete capture, containment, collection, and
disposal of the waste generated by the work. The system
and the Contractor's reclamation operation shall be in
compliance with all USEPA, NJDEP, OSHA, and other
P300.236
regulatory agencies with jurisdiction, rules, regulations,
standards and guidelines in effect at the time that the
work is in progress. The Contractor shall be liable for
any fines or cost incurred as a result of his failure to be
in compliance with all Federal, State and local laws.
ii.
If at any time during the execution of the work, the

pollution control system fails to function at the required
level of efficiency, the Contractor shall immediately
suspend such operations and shall not resume work
until the necessary corrective modifications have been
made to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If the failure is
due to adverse weather conditions such as high winds,
the Contractor shall immediately suspend the affected
operations until the weather conditions become
favorable. No additional payment will be made for any
corrective actions required. The Contractor or his
representative shall conduct initial project monitoring
and air quality testing as required to monitor the
effectiveness of his pollution control systems. He shall
make those results available to the Engineer. Additional
testing to monitor the effectiveness of the pollution
control systems employed on the project shall be as
directed by the Engineer if results of initial monitoring
are judged by the Engineer to be inadequate. If it is
determined that pollution of the environment adjacent
to the site has occurred, the Contractor shall cease all
operations immediately and shall deploy the emergency
management plan, as required. The Contractor shall be
responsible for all costs for mitigating and corrective
actions.
iii.
The Contractor shall comply with 40 CFR, Part 50,

Appendix G "National Ambient Air Quality Standard
for Lead".
iv.
The Contractor shall obtain all permits that are required

for the handling and disposal of the debris and material
collected during the course of the work. All material
shall be reclaimed/disposed of at an approved site(s) by
the Contractor or his authorized representative. The
Contractor shall present the proper documentation
and/or permits as part of the hazardous waste storage
and transport plan, demonstrating that he has made the
necessary preliminary arrangements to reclaim/dispose
of the materials at an approved site(s). The Contractor
shall not begin cleaning or blasting operations until he
has submitted final documentation substantiating that
he has secured an approved reclamation/disposal site(s)
P300.236
for the disposal of materials from the job and all
required permits for handling and storing the waste.
v.
The contained waste materials shall be removed, stored

in sealed steel drums and disposed of at regular
intervals (once each working day minimum) during the
execution of the work, as required in accordance with
the pollution control plan, field conditions, and at the
direction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall comply
with the applicable sections of the Code of Federal
Regulations.
vi.
The Contractor shall continuously monitor the quantity

of waste captured, contained, collected, stored and
disposed of. The Contractor's records shall be kept
current and be available at all times on site. The
Contractor shall incorporate, as part of the pollution
control plan, an emergency management plan outlining
specific procedures to be followed in the event of
primary containment system failure. Details including
equipment, materials and methods to be employed in
the event of environmental contamination shall be
provided. The necessary components along with the
emergency management plan shall be available on site
while surface preparation operations are in progress.
Also included shall be an outline of those persons to be
notified in the event of such failure. The emergency
management plan shall comply with all rules and
regulations of the applicable agencies, as stated herein.
The emergency management plan should be especially
detailed where work is primarily over a body of water
or adjacent to populated areas.
vii.
The review and acceptance of the pollution control plan

will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for
attaining the required degree of capture, containment,
collection and disposal, or the required degree of
protection
of
the
operating
equipment
and
appurtenances, or to comply with all the laws, rules,
regulations, standards or guidelines in effect during the
execution of the work.
viii.
After receipt of written approval of the pollution control

plan and approval of a reclamation/disposal site(s), the
Contractor may commence cleaning operations. The
pollution control system, as detailed in the pollution
control plan, shall be securely installed and properly
maintained while the work is in progress. The
Contractor shall not deviate from the approved
P300.236
pollution control plan without written approval by the
Engineer.
(2)
Codes, Regulations and Standards.

(a)
General Applicability of Codes, Regulations and Standards.

The Contractor shall be responsible for acquiring any
construction permits or approvals required by the administrative
authority or authorities having jurisdiction or any other
regulatory agency having jurisdiction, including those pursuant
to N.J.A.C. 5:23-2.
Additionally, the Contractor shall be
responsible for obtaining any Certificates of Approval or any
other approvals at the completion of the project.
Except to the extent more explicit or more stringent
requirements are written directly into the contract documents,
all applicable codes, regulations, and standards have the same
force and effect are made a part of the contract documents by
reference.
(3)
Health and Safety Program.

The Contractor shall prepare and implement the Contractors own
HASP.
The Contractors HASP, at a minimum, shall meet all
requirements as required by law, and be submitted to the Engineer for
information and not for approval.
The Contractor agrees to complete and submit to the Engineer the
Medical Fitness and Statement of Training form for all employees
performing fieldwork hereunder. It will be the duty of the Contractor to
submit a revised Statement of Medical Fitness and Training form within
5 days prior to utilizing any such employee for fieldwork hereunder to
the Engineer. Contractor further agrees to require any of their employees
who are to be engaged in field work hereunder to submit similar
statements of medical fitness and training for the information and record
keeping of the Engineer, on such forms as may be prescribed by the
Authoritys Health and Safety Officer.
The Contractor agrees to comply with all applicable requirements set
forth at 29 CFR Parts 1910 and 1926, including but not limited to such
requirements set forth at 29 CFR 1910.120(b); 29 CFR 1910:120(e); 29 CFR
1910.132; 1910.122 and 1910.134. Furthermore, the Contractor shall not
permit any of their employees to participate in or supervise field
activities until they have been trained to the level required by their job
function and responsibility as required by 29 CFR 1910(3)(3)(i)(ii).
The Contractor is most familiar with his operation and maintains
responsibility for the activities of his officers, agents, employees, and/or
Sub-Contractors.
P300.236
The Contractor agrees to permit the Engineer or his representative to

monitor and inspect Contractors activities. Adherence to all safety and
health requirements is the full responsibility of the Contractor.
None of the above shall be construed to remove health and safety
responsibility from the Contractor and impose upon the Engineer and
Authority any general supervision duty over or responsibility for the
activities of the Contractors officers, agents, employees, and/or SubContractors. The Contractor acknowledges that there may be potential
health hazards associated with the work to be performed hereunder, and
agrees at a minimum to abide by their respective companys health and
safety program. Further, the Contractor and Sub-Contractors, if any,
acknowledge that it is solely their respective responsibility to institute a
medical surveillance program as required by 29 CFR 1910, including, but
not limited to 29 CFR 1910.120(f), and that the instituting of any such
program shall be solely at the Contractors expense.
(4)
Training of Personnel.
(a)
The following are minimum requirements:

The Contractor's on-site representative in charge (Project
Manager, Project Engineer or Project Superintendent) and the
Safety Officer must have completed:
(5)
i.
40 hour hazardous material safety and health course as

stipulated in 29 CFR 1910.120 e(3), and
ii.
An eight hour refresher course per year after 1) above

has been met, as per 29 CFR 1910.120 e(8), and
iii.
A 30 hour construction safety course as administered by

OSHA or an accredited OSHA training facilitator.
(b)
On site management and supervisory personnel shall receive at

least 8 hours of specialized management and supervisory
training on site-specific health and safety topics, CFR 1910.120 e
(4), prior to working at the site.
(c)
Records to demonstrate such training shall be retained by the

Contractor on site and shall be submitted to the Construction
Manager for review and acceptance of the competent personnel.
Worker Protection.
(a)
General.
i.
Worker protection shall be provided as specified in

applicable sections of 29 CFR 1910, Occupational Safety and
P300.236
Health Standards for general industry, and 29 CFR 1926,
Safety and Health Regulations for construction.
(b)
Personal Protective Equipment.

i. Modified Level D PPE is anticipated for this work, which
includes hard-hat, steel-toe work boots, safety eyewear, and
work clothes prescribed by weather. Protective clothing shall
meet requirements specified in applicable OSHA standards in
29 CFR 1910, Subpart L. When dealing with asbestos, PCBs,
lead-based paint, or other contaminants, the Contractor shall
modify worker level of protection as required.
(C)
EXECUTION.
(1)
Development of the Health and Safety Plan.

The Contractor shall develop its site-specific Health and Safety Plan in
compliance with the references cited in Subsection 104.16.
(2)
Adherence to the Contractor Developed Health and Safety Plan.

The Contractor shall follow their approved site-specific Health and
Safety Plan.
(D)
MEASUREMENT.
(1)
Preparation of Health and Safety Documentation.

Preparation and revisions, as necessary, of the workplace hazard
assessment and the Site-Specific Health and Safety Plan as described in
Subsection 104.16, shall include all incidental costs.
The preparation of the health and safety documentation, including the
workplace hazard assessment and the Site-Specific Health and Safety
Plan, shall be measured on a lump sum basis. All other costs related to
Health and Safety shall be included in the various Contract work item(s)
and associated activities.
In addition, all work associated with
complying with the approved site-specific Contractor Health and Safety
Plan shall be included with the Environmental Health and Safety Plans
item.
(E)
PAYMENT.
Payment will be made under:
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
Environmental Health and Safety Plans ................................................ Lump Sum
Payment for 10 percent of the Lump Sum pay item Environmental Health and
Safety Plans will be made upon approval of the Safety Officers resume and the
site-specific Contractor Health and Safety Plan. The remaining sum will be paid in
P300.236
equal monthly payments for the anticipated duration of construction upon
satisfactory implementation of the Health and Safety Plan as approved and
recommended by the Engineer. The anticipated duration of construction shall be
determined from the Contractors initial approved construction schedule. Should
the Contractor receive an extension of time for any reason, no additional payment
will be made.
104.20
DIESEL EQUIPMENT OPERATION

(A)
Each Contractor performing work pursuant to this Contract shall ensure the use of
ultralow sulfur fuel in the non-road and off road diesel equipment operated on the
job site.
(B)
Each Contractor shall adopt a formal written policy to limit unnecessary idling of
diesel equipment on the job site, and ensure that every equipment operator and
site superintendent has received a copy of the policy and has been instructed on its
implementation.
SECTION 105 - CONTROL OF MATERIALS

105.01
MATERIALS
Add the following after the second paragraph:
The Authority will not approve the use of any materials as fill material for the project
exhibiting the following characteristics unless specifically provided for in the contract
documents: any waste or combination of waste, including toxic, carcinogenic, corrosive,
irritating, sensitizing, radioactive, biological infectious, explosive, or flammable waste or
otherwise determined to be unsuitable by the Authority which poses a present or
potential future threat to human health, living organisms, or the environment. Such unapproved materials also include all hazardous or toxic substances defined as such by the
New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection (NJDEP) and/or the United States
Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA).
The Authority will not approve the use of any materials that are contaminated as defined
by N.J.A.C. 7:26E-1.8 and NJDEPs most recent version of the Solid and Hazardous Waste
Management Program Guidance Document on Contaminated Soil.
Replace the third paragraph with the following:
Within ten (10) days after the date of execution by the Authority of the Contract, the
Contractor shall inform the Engineer in writing from whom and where the Contractor
proposes to obtain the materials required for the Project, and thereafter advise the
Engineer of proposed changes provided, however, the location of proposed borrow pits
and / or quarries shall be submitted within ten (10) days of receipt of Notice of Award,
as specified in Subsection 103.02. The location of proposed borrow pits and / or quarries
shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use for the Project. Said borrow pits and / or
quarries shall be limited to borrow pits and / or quarries already in use. The source of
supply of each of the materials to be incorporated into the Project shall be approved by
P300.236
the Engineer before delivery is started. The approval of the Engineer may be withdrawn
at any time when it appears to the Engineer that the materials have deteriorated
subsequent to the giving of such approval. Subsequent to the submission of the initial
list of sources of supply the Contractor shall notify the Engineer of all new sources of
supply at least thirty (30) calendar days in advance of the proposed shipment of
materials from such new sources.
105.02
LOCAL MATERIAL SOURCES

(A)
Sources Provided by the Authority
Replace the second paragraph with the following:

If the Contractor desires to use material from sources other than those designated, the
Contractor shall first receive pre-approval from the Authority; and then acquire the
necessary rights to take materials from the sources and shall pay all costs related thereto,
including any which may result from an increase in length of haul. All costs of exploring
and developing such other sources shall be borne by the Contractor. The use of material
from other than designated sources will not be permitted until such preliminary samples
as may be required by the Engineer have been obtained, tested and approved, and the
Contractor receives approval of the source of such materials.
105.06
FOREIGN MATERIALS
The Contractor shall comply with N.J.S.A. 52:32-1 and N.J.S.A. 52:33-1, et seq., which
prohibits the use by the Contractor or subcontractors of farm products or materials
produced or manufactured outside of the United States on public work. The Authority
may allow exceptions if its enforcement would be inconsistent with the public interest,
where the cost of enforcing the prohibition would be unreasonable, or where the material
in question is not of a class or kind mined, produced, or manufactured in the United
States.
105.07
STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND STAGING AREAS

The following is added after the fourth sentence of the first paragraph:
Storage/Staging areas for this Contract within the Garden State Parkway right-of-way
are not currently available and therefore locating and acquiring any storage/staging
areas is the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor will be required to maintain
areas in a clean and neat condition.
The following requirements are mandated as part of the NJDEP Highway Agency
Stormwater General Permit (Highway Agency Permit) for discharge to surface water and
groundwater. Documents and forms listed herein and additional instructions are
included in Appendix I NJDPES Stormwater Permit Program.
P300.236
1.
The Contractor shall operate storage/staging areas within the Authoritys right
of way in accordance with the REQUIRED PRACTICES FOR FUELING
OPERATIONS, VEHICLE MAINTENANCE, AND GOOD HOUSEKEEPING
STATEWIDE BASIC REQUIREMENTS.
2.
The Contractor shall complete the form entitled NEW JERSEY TURNPIKE
AUTHORITY STAGING AREA INVENTORY/INSPECTION FORM within 30
days of occupying any staging area and update every six (6) months. It should be
submitted to the Authoritys Engineering Department, Environmental Section as
outlined in Appendix I. A copy of the form shall also be submitted to the
Engineer for each submission.
3.
The Contractor shall provide two weeks written notice to the Authoritys
Engineering Department, Environmental Section prior to vacating the staging
area. A copy of the notice should also be submitted to the Engineer.
4.
All above ground fuel storage tanks utilized for onsite vehicle or equipment
fueling must be placed on an impervious surface other than asphalt. The
material utilized must be resistant to gasoline and diesel fuel and the limits of the
impervious material must encompass the area within which fueling operations
are conducted. The surface of the impervious material shall be sloped such that
any fuel spills are contained and do not migrate onto adjacent pervious
pavement.
105.14
TIMBER GRADING AND CERTIFICATION

All timber used in the design and construction of catches, and/or temporary flooring
platforms shall be graded timber and certified by Sawn Lumber Grading agencies
certified by American Lumber Standard Committee Board of Review.
The National Design Specifications (NDS) for Wood Construction and the Supplement
shall be used for timber design of temporary floors or catch platforms.
Timber plank systems shall meet the following requirements:
1.)
105.15
All timber planking systems will require an overlay.

plywood or other approved material.
The overlay may be
MATERIAL HANDLING PLAN

1.
The Contractor shall prepare and implement a Materials Handling Plan (MHP)
for dealing with materials and potentially regulated materials encountered
during work activities. The MHP shall set forth requirements for the excavation,
stockpiling, sampling and analysis, measurement, transportation and
disposal/recycling of regulated materials in accordance with all applicable
P300.236
Federal, State and/or local regulations. In addition, the MHP shall be done so as
to protect site workers, visitors and the general public from uncontrolled
exposure to regulated materials (if encountered), and to prevent uncontrolled
releases of regulated materials to the environment. The Contractor shall submit
the MHP to the Engineer for review and acceptance.
a.
At a minimum, the MHP should include the following to the extent that
they are applicable:
Details of current certifications, permits, insurance types and
levels of coverage;
Details of stockpiling procedures;
Qualifications of the transportation and receiving facilities;
Types of equipment to be used in transporting regulated waste;
Proposed route(s) to disposal/recycling facilities and weighing
facilities;
Air monitoring procedures;
Qualifications of the environmental testing laboratories;
Waste characterization forms, sampling logs and analyses reports;
Documentation of the disposal facility's acceptance of the
regulated material prior to transporting any material off-site;
Transport manifests
Waste disposal/recycling documentation forms from the
receiving facility.
b.
The Contractor shall provide the Materials Handling Plan to the Engineer
for review and approval.
c.
The Contractor shall ensure that all operations associated with the
handling, loading, transportation and disposal of materials are in
compliance with applicable Federal and State Department of
Transportation regulations, as well as all local applicable requirements.
Applicable regulations include, but are not limited to NJAC 7:26 - New
Jersey Solid and Hazardous Waste Regulations that govern waste handler
responsibilities, vehicle placard requirements, container requirements,
manifest requirements, and responsibilities and requirements for collectors
and haulers of hazardous and non-hazardous solid waste; posted weight
limitations on roads and bridges; and other local restrictions on storage
and transportation of waste/debris.
d.
Prior to any disposal activities taking place, the Contractor shall identify
proposed waste transporter(s) including a commitment letter(s) from
properly licensed and insured hauler/transporter(s) for the Engineer's
review and approval. This information shall include, but not be limited to,
the name and USEPA identification number of the hauler/transporter,
address, name of responsible contact for the hauler, telephone number for
the contact, list of types and sizes of all transport vehicles and equipment
to be used, a description of proposed transportation methods and
procedures for hauling waste materials, including type of vehicles that will
P300.236
be used for each type of waste, any and all necessary permit
authorizations for each type of waste transported, and previous experience
in performing the type of work specified herein.
e.
Prior to any disposal activities, the Contractor shall also specify the
proposed transportation/storage/disposal (TSD) facility, including a
commitment letter from the TSD facility indicating that it has the capacity
to accept the volume of waste material and stating that it will be open for
business during the Contract duration to accept the volume of waste
materials. The Contractor shall also submit a list of permitted alternative
TSD facilities to be utilized in the event the approved facility ceases to
accept waste materials generated under this Contract.
f.
The Contractor shall submit, for the Engineer's approval, the following
information on the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA)
approved off-site disposal facilities where the Contractor is proposing to
dispose of the waste removed from the site. All information shall be
furnished at the Contractor's expense. This information shall include, but
not be limited to, the facility name, location and USEPA identification
number, the name of responsible contact for the facility, telephone number
for the contact, and a signed letter of agreement to accept waste as
specified in this contract. Also included as part of the submittal shall be a
listing of all permits, licenses, letters of approval and other authorizations
to operate that have been applied for by the proposed facility but not yet
granted or issued. Provide dates of application(s) submitted. Planned
submittals shall also be noted. The Contractor shall specify and describe
the disposal /containment unit that the proposed facility will use to
manage the waste and provide dates of construction and beginning of use,
if applicable. The Contractor shall identify the capacity available in the
units and the capacity reserved for the subject waste.
SECTION 106 - LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY

106.02
LAWS AND ORDINANCES

Add the following subparagraph
(C) Catch and Temporary Flooring.
Catch and Temporary flooring used as working platforms must comply with OSHA
29CFR, Part 1926-Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, Subpart L Scaffolds.
106.10
PERMITS, LICENSES AND TAXES

The Contractor's attention is called to the following permits that have been obtained or
the Contractor shall obtain that may also be required on this Contract:
(A). NJDEP
P300.236
Request for Authorization (RFA) NJDPES General Permit for Stormwater
Discharge Associated with Construction Activities. The Contractor should be
aware of the permit requirements associated with this permit approval
including:
1.
the need to post the RFA and the approved Soil Erosion and Sediment
Control Plans at the project site;
2. the need to install and maintain all soil erosion and sediment control
measures;
3. the need to maintain a Stormwater Log to track maintenance of all soil
erosion and sediment control measures as well as Best Management
Practices (see
www.epa.gov/npdes/pubs/sw_swppp_inspection_form.doc);
4. completion of an Annual Certification Sheet;
5. the proper handling and disposal of on-site solid waste debris;
6. the need for the proper handling and disposal of on-site hazardous waste
materials;
7. the need to have Spill Kits on-site;
8. the need for a Concrete Washout area;
9. the need to stabilize soil stockpiles; and,
10. the need to prepare, and have available for review, a Stormwater Pollution
Prevention Plan (see Developing Your Stormwater Pollution Prevention
Plan. A Guide for Construction Sites. EPA 833-R-06-004 May 2007).
The Authority will not make separate payment for the Stormwater Log, the
Annual Certification Sheet, and the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan.
These items are incidental to the Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Plan
measures.
(B). Well Drilling Permit
The Contractor shall apply for and obtain a Well Drilling Permit from the NJ
Department of Environmental Protection's (NJDEP) Division of Water
Resources, Bureau of Water Allocation, when the drilling, boring, coring or
excavation of any hole that is > 25 feet in-depth or that enters the
groundwater table at an elevation above 25 feet in depth is anticipated. No
well drilling shall be permitted until such permit is obtained. Each permit
covers all wells within a sq. mi. area.
(C). Dewatering Permit
The Contractor shall apply for and obtain a Dewatering Permit from the
NJDEP's Division of Water Resources, Bureau of Water Allocation, when the
pumping or lowering of any groundwater at an average rate of 100,000
gallons per day, over a 30-day period, within a 2 sq. mi. area is anticipated.
No pumping of groundwater shall be permitted until such permit is obtained.
(D). NJDEP Permits
0246-12-0005.1 FHA130001
0246-12-0005.1 FHA130002
0246-12-0005.1 FWW13001
FHA Individual Permit

FHA Verification
FWW Individual Permit
P300.236
Water Quality Certificate
Issued: December 18, 2013
Expiration: December 17, 2018
(E). Bergen County Soil Conservation District Soil Erosion and Sediment Control
Plan Certification
FILE NO. 14-B11919
The following is added after the last paragraph:
Pursuant to N.J.S.A. 54:49-19, and notwithstanding any provision of the law to the
contrary, whenever any taxpayer, partnership, or S corporation under contract to provide
goods or services or construction projects to the State of New Jersey or its agencies or
instrumentalities, including the legislative and judicial branches of State government, is
entitled to payment for those goods or services or construction projects and at the same
time the taxpayer, or the partner or shareholder of that entity, is indebted for any State
tax, the Director of the Division of Taxation shall seek to set-off that taxpayers, partners
or shareholders share of the payment due to the taxpayer, partnership, or S corporation.
The amount of set-off shall not allow for the deduction of any expenses or other
deductions which might be attributable to a partner or shareholder subject to set-off
under this act. No payment shall be made to the taxpayer, the provider of goods or
services or the contractor or subcontractor of construction projects pending resolution of
the indebtedness.
The Director of the Division of Taxation shall give notice to the set-off to the taxpayer, the
provider of goods or services, or the contractor or subcontractor of construction projects
and provide an opportunity for a hearing with thirty (30) days such notice under the
procedures for protests established under R.S. 54:49-18. No requests for conference,
protest or subsequent appeal to the Tax Court from any protest under this section shall
stay the collection of the indebtedness. Interest that may be payable by the State pursuant
to P.L. 1987, c. 184 (c.52:32-32 et seq.) to the taxpayer, the provider of goods or services, or
the contractor or subcontractor of construction projects shall be stayed.
106.18
UTILITIES
As directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall mark and identify the perimeter of the
proposed site of the ground intrusive activities with white paint, flags, stakes, or a
combination thereof prior to notifying the New Jersey One Call System of the Contractors
intent to engage in excavation or demolition. The proposed site shall be the minimum size
necessary to safely accommodate the planned excavation or demolition (e.g. small sites, nonlinear excavations, spot excavations such as soil borings, sign posts, or guide rail) to avoid
unnecessary marking and locating by the Authority in accordance with N.J.A.C. 14:2-3.2.
The following is added after the sixth paragraph:
New Jersey High Voltage Proximity Act, codified at N.J.S.A. 34:6-47 to 47.10,
concerning precautions to be taken when working in the proximity of high
P300.236
voltage wires. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA) and of
Subpart N, Paragraph 1926.550 of the Rules and Regulations codified at 29
CRF 1926.550, which, in part, requires different working clearances than the State
Law.
The following Paragraph (C) is added:
(C)
OTHER NON-AUTHORITY OWNED UTILITIES.

The Contractor is also advised that the following utility companies/agencies
have facilities that are located within the project limits as follows:
PSE&G-Electric has overhead and underground facilities

(Transmission and Distribution Electric Facilities)
PSE&G-Gas has underground facilities.
Verizon-NJ, Inc. has overhead facilities.
Cablevision of New Jersey has overhead and underground facilities.
Borough of Paramus, Public Works has underground facilities.
G4S Technology, LLC has underground facilities.
United Water has underground facilities.
New Jersey Department of Transportation has ITS facilities.
(1)
PSE&G - Electric. (Utility Order No. 1494 P and 1495 P)

Overhead and underground facilities for PSE&G-Electric exist along
Route 17 NB and SB and along the Garden State Parkway entrance and
exit ramps. Existing 26kV aerial lines are proposed to be relocated to
buried conduit duct bank between Route 17 SB sta. 254+74 and sta.
268+92 under Utility Order No. 1494 P. In addition, approximately
forty eight (48) wood light poles and overhead distribution electric
facilities are proposed to be removed under Utility Order No. 1495 P.
Contact:
Mr. Jim Lizer, Senior Engineering Plant Supervisor
Public Service Electric & Gas Company
325 County Road
Secaucus, NJ 07094
Telephone: (201) 330-6582
Fax: (973) 643-1658
E-mail: james.lizer@pseg.com
(2)
PSE&G - Gas. . (Utility Order No. 1493 P)

Underground facilities for PSE&G-Gas exist along Route 17 NB and SB.
There are no anticipated impacts to gas facilities.
P300.236
Contact:
Jorge Silva
Project Manager
Delivery Projects & Construction
Public Service Electric & Gas Company
4000 Hadley Road, M/C 430
South Plainfield, NJ 07080
Telephone: (908) 412-7047
Cell: (973) 418-5988
Fax: (973) 643-1658
E-mail: Jorge.Silva@pseg.com
(3)
Verizon-New Jersey, Inc. (Utility Order No. 1497 P)

Overhead facilities for Verizon-New Jersey, Inc. exist along Route 17 NB.
One (1) utility pole located at Route 17 NB sta. 271+08 is proposed to be
removed by Verizon-NJ, Inc.. The Verizon-NJ, Inc. facilities attached to
this pole are proposed to be relocated to a proposed pole at Route 17 NB
sta. 270+85.
Contact:
Mrs. Sandra Rowe
Verizon Communications - NJ
114 Paterson St
Paterson NJ 07501
Floor 3 Engineering
Telephone: 973-925-1480
Cell: 201-394-0517
E-mail: sandra.l.cruger@verizon.com
(4)
Cablevision of New Jersey (Utility Order No. 1499 P)

Underground and overhead cable facilities for Cablevision of New Jersey
exist along Route 17 NB and SB. Cablevision of New Jersey facilities
attached to the utility pole located at Route 17 NB sta. 271+08 are
proposed to be relocated to a proposed pole at Route 17 NB sta. 270+85.
Contact:
Mr. Dennis Haney, Utility Coordinator
Cablevision
159 Windermere Avenue
Greenwood Lake, NY 10925
Telephone: (845) 395-0244
Fax: (845) 395 0252
E-mail: dhaney@cablevision.com
P300.236
(5)
Borough of Paramus, Public Works (Utility Order No. 1498 P)

Borough of Paramus Public Works has underground facilities along
Garden State Parkway. There are no anticipated impacts to Borough of
Paramus, Public Works facilities.
Contact:
Mr. Guy Picone
Director of Public Works and Fleet Operations
Borough of Paramus
1 Jockish Square
Paramus, NJ 07652
Telephone: (201) 265- 2100, Ext. 673
Cell: (201) 213-5861
E-mail: gpicone@paramusborough.com
(6)
G4S Technology, LLC (Utility Order No. 1492 P)

G4S Technology, LLC has underground facilities within the vicinity of
Route 17 NB and SB. Refer to Utility Order No. 1492 P for proposed
relocation of G4S Facilities. Relocation of facilities between Sta. N363+00
and N379+00 is to be coordinated with G4S Technology as detailed on
the plans.
Contact:
Mr. James Guarino, Construction Manager
G4S Technology LLC
910 Oak Tree Road
Suite L
South Plainfield, NJ 07080
Telephone: (908) 756-1181 Ext. 220
Fax: (908) 756-1182
E-mail: james.guarino@usa.g4s.com
(7)
United Water (Utility Order No. 1496 P)

United Water has underground facilities within the vicinity of Route 17
NB and SB. There are no anticipated impacts to United Water facilities.
Contact:
Mr. Kevin Bamburak, Senior Project Liason
United Water New Jersey
650 From Road
Suite 255
Paramus, NJ 07652
Telephone: (201) 986-4982
Fax: (201) 225-5125
P300.236
E-Mail: kevin.bamburak@cunitedwater.com
.
106.20
INSURANCE
Replace this Subsection in its entirety with the following:
The Contractor is advised that this Contract is entered into solely on the basis that
insurance will be provided through an Owner Controlled Insurance Program (known as
OCIP or Wrap-up Program) with only some insurance such as, but not limited to,
Automobile Liability, to be provided by the Contractor. The Bidders attention is
directed to this entire Subsection 106.20 which has been modified to implement the
OCIP or Wrap-up Program for this solicitation.
The Contractor, for informational purposes only, within days after award of the Contract,
may be required to provide their insurance costs that would have been submitted with
the bid if the OCIP had not provided for the following coverages:
Workers Compensation Statutory and Employers Liability limits of not less
than One Million Dollars ($1,000,000. 00).
General Liability Two Million Dollars ($2,000,000.00) per occurrence/Two
Million Dollars ($2,000,000.00) annual general aggregate and Two Million Dollars
($2,000,000.00) annual products and completed operations aggregate.
Excess/Umbrella Liability Three Million Dollars ($3,000,000.00) per occurrence,
subject to a Three Million Dollars ($3,000,000.00) annual aggregate, in excess of
underlying limits and terms.
(A) INSURANCE TO BE PROVIDED BY OWNER

The Owner, prior to the commencement of the Work, will provide and maintain
at its own expense the following insurance coverages for the benefit of the
Contractor and Subcontractor and Third Party Contractor(s) as applicable
performing Work at the work site. Except as otherwise provided below, such
insurance coverages will continue in force until acceptance of the Work by the
Owner. Insurance provided by the Owner applies only to operations of and for
each Insured at the Site. It does not apply to the operations of any Insured in his
regularly established main or branch office, factory, warehouse, fabrication shop
or similar place or any other work site.
(1)
Workers Compensation Insurance in compliance with the laws of the

State of New Jersey, including Employers Liability Insurance (with
limits of not less than One Million Dollars ($1,000,000.00) covering the
Owner, Contractor and Contractor's designated subcontractors for
operations performed in connection with the Work at the Project site.) A
separate policy will be issued for each insured. Policies will be renewed
and continued until Acceptance of the Work.
P300.236
(2)
Commercial General Liability Insurance (excluding Automobile), in the

Owners name in the standard ISO form or its equivalent approved by
the Authority, with all Contractors, Subcontractors, and Third Party
Contractor(s), as applicable, named as insureds and all other
indemnified parties under the contract as additional insureds.
Bodily Injury and Property Damage:
Total combined per occurrence Limit of Liability for all insureds is Two
Million Dollars ($2,000,000.00) subject to a Four Million Dollars
($4,000,000.00) general aggregate and a Four Million Dollars
($4,000,000.00) products and completed operations aggregate. Coverage
terms will be provided upon request.
Coverage Details:
Standard Commercial General Liability Form
Employee Exclusion Removed
Blanket Contractual Liability
Broad Form Property Damage Including Completed Operations
Independent Contractors Coverage
Products/Completed Operations extending 6 years after project
completion (The limits for products/completed operations shall
apply as a one time separate aggregate limit for the entire extension
period.)
Blanket Underground, Explosion and Collapse (X,C,U) Liability
Non-Owned Watercraft
Employees as Additional Insureds
Broadened Notice of Occurrence
Broadened Knowledge of Occurrence
Incidental Medical Malpractice
Severability of Interest
(3)
Excess Liability Insurance shall have a minimum limit of One Hundred

Million Dollars ($100,000,000.00) each accident or occurrence, subject to a
minimum limit of One Hundred Million Dollars ($100,000,000.00)
aggregate, in excess of the underlying limits and terms as set forth in
coverage items above.
(4) All Risk Builders Risk/Installation Floater Insurance Policy. The Authority
will not provide Builders Risk insurance
(5)
Contractors Pollution Legal Liability Insurance in the amount of Twentyfive Million Dollars ($25,000,000.00) per occurrence and in the aggregate,
with respect to any operation of the Contractor or any of its
Subcontractors, including the transportation endorsement. This policy or
policies will be purchased by the Owner on behalf of all Contractors and
will name the Owner as an Additional Insured.
P300.236
(6)
(B)
If the Contractor or Subcontractor is engaged in any operation requiring

a permit from a Railroad Company located within the work site, the
Owner will provide Railroad Protective Insurance.
NOTES AND ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS

(1)
All Contractors and Subcontractors will be furnished a copy of certificate

of insurance as evidence of coverage.
(2)
All premiums for the insurance set forth in Section A above, will be paid
by the Owner, and any and all adjustments, including return premiums
and dividends for Workers Compensation Insurance, General Liability
Insurance and Builders All Risk Insurance shall be paid to and belong to
the Owner. Contractor and all Subcontractors will execute any
instruments of assignment necessary to permit Owner receipt of these
adjustments.
(3)
Loss, if any, covered by the Builders All Risk Insurance policy is to be

adjusted by and payable to the Owner.
(4)
With respect to Workers Compensation, Employers Liability and

General Liability, all Contractors and Subcontractors should inform their
insurance broker or agent not to include rating data from work at the Site
in their reporting procedures for the calculation of premiums or
otherwise.
(5)
Waiver of Subrogation - To the extent Contractor or its Subcontractor(s)

are insureds under a policy of insurance provided under the OCIP, they
each hereby waive their right and the right, if any, of their insurers, to
obtain subrogation against others insured by the OCIP. In addition, the
OCIP underwriters hereby waive their right of subrogation against the
named insureds.
(6)
The Contractor and Subcontractors shall cooperate with and assist, in

every possible manner, the representatives of the Owner, the insurance
brokerage representatives and insurers with respect to:
(7)
(a)
Accident Prevention and Claims Procedures.
(b)
The adjustment of all claims arising out of operations within the

scope of the Contract, including litigation of such claims.
(c)
The Reporting of Claims. All incidents must be reported within

24-hours of injury or damage using methods as provided for by
the OCIP Administrator.
The Owner will provide each participant in the OCIP with an OCIPManual (which includes summaries of the insurance coverages, loss
control procedures, claim procedures, reporting requirements and
P300.236
enrollment forms) and a Safety Advisory (which overviews health and
safety good practices and regulatory requirements). Enrollees shall
familiarize themselves, incorporate them into their contracts with other
Enrollees and comply with the requirements contained in the OCIP
Manual. The OCIP Manual is available on the Authoritys Web Site.
(8)
Contractor agrees to allow workers to be tested post-injury for Alcohol

and illegal drugs at the Owners cost.
(9)
The Contractor shall participate in safety site visit(s) by the OCIP

Administrator and the insurance carriers providing the OCIP coverages.
The Contractor shall keep minutes of all such site visits, noting any items
identified as safety issues as well as the recommendations and actions of
the Contractor to address such issues.
(10)
The Contractor agrees to report payroll to the OCIP Administrator on a

Monthly or Weekly basis (TBD) per their Internet-Based reporting
system.
(11)
The Contractor agrees to comply with all requirements and complete

and submit all forms required in the OCIP Manual in a timely manner.
(12)
The Contractors and Subcontractors shall cooperate with and assist all
insurance companies issuing any of the policies of insurance mentioned
above in the preparation of all necessary pertinent payroll audits for the
purposes of developing and determining all premiums hereunder and
shall keep their records relating to the contract in such a manner that
said records can readily be separated from other Work the Contractors
and Subcontractors are doing.
(13)
The Contractor and Subcontractors shall cooperate with any audit and
inspection requests.
(14)
Owner shall have no obligation to provide insurance other than that

referred to in this Contract and in the OCIP Manual. Contractor will
review the coverage, limits of liability and insurance policies to satisfy
itself that the coverage meets the needs of the Contractor and its
Subcontractors. Nothing contained herein shall be deemed to place any
responsibility on Owner for ensuring that the insurance required herein
is sufficient for the conduct of Contractors or Subcontractors business.
Owner assumes no responsibility for providing coverage in excess of the
policy limits. Owner reserves the right to furnish other insurance
coverage of various types and limits provided that such coverage will
not be less than that specified in this Contract. The furnishing of
insurance by Owner through the OCIP shall in no way relieve or limit or
be construed to relieve or limit Contractor or any Subcontractor of any
responsibility or obligation whatsoever otherwise imposed by this
Contract, including any indemnity obligation which Contractor or any
Subcontractor has to Owner pursuant to other sections of this Contract.
P300.236
Contractor acknowledges that Owner is not an agent, partner or
guarantor of the OCIP insurance carriers and is not responsible for any
claims or disputes between Contractor and the insurance carriers. Any
type, quality or quantity of insurance coverage or increase in limits not
provided by the OCIP which the Contractor requires for its own
protection or on account of statute will be the responsibility of
Contractor at its own expense.
(15)
While it is the intent of the Owner to keep the OCIP in force until the
Completion Date and Acceptance of the work, the Owner reserves the
right to exclude a Contractor or Subcontractor or terminate or modify the
OCIP or any portion thereof at any time. To implement this right to
terminate or modify the OCIP, the Owner shall provide at least 45 days
advance written notice to all Contractors or Subcontractors covered
under the OCIP.
In the event Owner elects to exclude a Contractor or Subcontractor or
otherwise terminate or modify the OCIP, the affected Contractors and
Subcontractors shall immediately be required to obtain replacement
insurance coverage and the reasonable cost of such replacement
insurance will be reimbursed by the Owner in accordance with the terms
herein. Written evidence of such replacement insurance coverages shall
be provided to the OCIP Administrator, as directed by the Chief
Engineer or his designee. All insurance secured by Contractor or its
Subcontractors pursuant to this section shall be in policies subject to
Owners reasonable approval as to form, content, limits of liability, cost
and issuing company.
(16)
The Contractor shall incorporate into all subcontract agreements and

ensure that its Subcontractors incorporate in Sub-subcontract agreements
all of the relevant provisions regarding Subcontractor requirements and
obligations. Contractor shall be responsible for providing each
Subcontractor with a copy of the OCIP Manual and the NJTA-HASP
Requirements and requiring contractually that each Subcontractor
comply with the provisions contained therein and this entire section of
the contract.
(17)
No Property Insurance Coverage is provided for personal or business

property, equipment, and office equipment, owned or used by the
Contractor or Subcontractor other than as described herein. In the event
the Contractor or Subcontractor maintains such insurance, such
insurance shall include an insurer's waiver of subrogation in favor of the
Owner.
(18)
The Contractor or Subcontractor may purchase such additional

coverage(s) as it deems necessary for its own account, at its own expense
and through its own efforts for exposures not covered by the OCIP.
P300.236
The Contractor shall promptly notify the Insurance Administrator

at the completion of each Subcontractors Work at the Site.
(19)
(20)
The insurance coverages referred to in this Section 106.20 are set forth in
full in the respective insurance policy forms, and the descriptions of such
policies contained in this Subsection 106.20 or in the OCIP Manual are
not intended to be complete or to alter or amend any provision of the
actual insurance policies and in matters, if any, in which the description
may be conflicting with such instruments, the provisions of the actual
insurance policies shall govern.
CONTRACTORS MUST EXCLUDE THE INSURANCE COSTS FOR

CONTRACTOR AND ITS SUBCONTRACTORS IN THEIR BID FOR THOSE
COVERAGES THAT ARE PROVIDED BY THE OCIP.
The Owner reserves the right to request a certification of insurance coverages
of the Contractor and any of its Subcontractors to ensure that the cost of
OCIP coverages have been excluded from the bid.
(C)
INSURANCE TO BE PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR AND

SUBCONTRACTORS
As directed by the Chief Engineer, the Contractor and each of its Subcontractors
shall procure, at its sole cost and expense, and shall maintain in force at all times
during this Contract until Final Acceptance, policies of insurance as herein below
set forth, written by companies approved and otherwise reasonably acceptable
by the Owner or it designee and shall deliver to the Authority evidence of such
policies. These policies must:
Be written in accordance with the requirements of the subparagraphs

below, as applicable;
Be endorsed in form acceptable to the Authority to include a provision that
the policy will not be canceled, materially changed, or not renewed without
at least thirty (30) days prior written notice to the Authority, attention OCIP
Insurance Administrator, by Certified mail, return receipt requested;
State or be endorsed to provide that the coverage afforded under the policies
shall apply on a primary and not on an excess or contributing basis with any
policies which may be available to the Owner.
State or be endorsed to provide Waiver of Subrogation for General Liability,
Automobile Liability and Workers Compensation coverage;
Name as Additional Insured, The Authority, its commissioners, officers,
employees and agents.
Policies written on a claims-made basis are not acceptable.
P300.236
At least thirty (30) days prior to the expiration of the policies, evidence of
renewal or replacement policies or insurance, with terms and limits no less
favorable as the expiring policies, shall be delivered to the Authority.
Deductibles or self-insured retentions above $25,000 will require approval
from the Authority.
(1)
Special Insurance to be provided by Applicable Contractors and

Subcontractors as defined below:
(a)
As respects any watercraft (Boats, Barges, etc.) used during the

performance of this contract, Marine Protection and Indemnity
Insurance covering all marine hazards arising from this contract;
including injuries to crew members, if not provided through
other insurance; Bodily Injury to third parties and Property
Damage to wharves, piers and other structures and loss or
damage to other vessels not caused by collision. The policy shall
be subject to a limit of liability of not less than $5,000,000 per
occurrence and $10,000,000 in the aggregate. If the policy is
subject to an aggregate limit, replacement insurance will be
required if it is likely such aggregate will be exceeded.
(b)
If the project includes transportation of Hazardous Waste/Material

from the project site, the Contractor or Subcontractor who
transports the hazardous waste/materials from the work site
which requires a Hazardous Waste Manifest, and such transport
is related to the Work, coverage for bodily injury or property
damage including liability for environmental restoration
resulting from negligence in the operation, maintenance or use
of any motor vehicle involved in the transportation of hazardous
waste pursuant to all applicable Federal, State and local laws,
rules and regulations, MCS-90 Endorsement must be attached to
the policy and supplied on a primary basis with a $5,000,000
limit of liability.
Said Environmental Liability Insurance shall be in effect from the
time the Owner permits the asbestos abatement, lead abatement
or other environmentally regulated substances and materials
work to begin through the completion of the work.
(c)
Upon award or upon selection of the Subcontractor, the

Contractor shall additionally furnish evidence to the Engineer
that the disposal facility chosen has the minimum
Environmental Liability Insurance required by applicable
Federal, State and local regulations for the duration of the Work.
Any additional insurance policies necessary to obtain required
permits or otherwise comply with applicable law, ordinances or
regulations regarding the performance of the Work will be
provided upon request of the Chief Engineer.
(d)
Aircraft Liability Insurance
P300.236
If the Contractor or subcontractor is engaged in any operations

utilizing aircraft, it shall maintain aircraft liability insurance in
an amount not less than $10,000,000, written on an occurrence
basis.
This policy shall name the Authority, its commissioners, officers,
employees and agents as additional insured.
(2)
Specific Insurance Policies to be provided by All Contractors and

Subcontractors:
(a)
Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance policy in

Contractors name with the Owner and all other Indemnified
Parties under the Contract named as additional insureds with
limits of liability in the amount of $2,000,000 each occurrence on
a combined single limit basis for injuries to persons (including
death) and damage to property arising out of the ownership,
maintenance or use of any owned, hired or non-owned motor
vehicle. If the policy is subject to an aggregate limit, replacement
insurance will be required if it is likely such aggregate will be
exceeded.
(b)
To the extent required by law Statutory Workers Compensation

Insurance and Employers Liability Insurance including Maritime
Coverage, if appropriate, for operations AWAY FROM THE
SITE. Employers Liability Limits shall be at least $1,000,000 each
accident.
(c)
Commercial General Liability for operations AWAY FROM THE

SITE for each Contractor and all Subcontractors. The limits shall
be $2,000,000 each occurrence including Products/Completed
Operations with a $2,000,000 Aggregate. If the policy is subject to
an aggregate limit, replacement insurance will be required if it is
likely such aggregate will be exceeded. Each liability policy shall
contain an Additional Insured Endorsement naming the Owner
and any other entity designated by Owner as Additional
Insured, equivalent to the latest ISO Form CG 2010 and will state
that the coverage provided to the Additional Insureds is primary
and non-contributing with any other insurance available to the
Additional Insured.
(d)
Umbrella Liability Insurance for operations AWAY FROM SITE

for each Contractor and all Subcontractors. The limits shall be
$3,000,000 Each Occurrence and Annual Aggregate in excess of
those underlying policy limits referenced in 2 a ,b and c above.
(e)
Contractor waives, and will require any and all Subcontractor(s)

to waive, all rights of recovery under subrogation, because of
deductible clauses, inadequacy of limits of any insurance policy
or otherwise (including, but not limited to, property damage to
equipment, materials and any loss due to business interruption)
against the Owner and all other Indemnified Parties under the
P300.236
Contract are included in the Contract and any Contractor or
Subcontractor performing work or rendering services in
connection with the project, and agrees to effect a waiver of
subrogation in favor of the above entities on all policies of
insurance, including, but not limited to, property insurance
policies covering personal property of any kind, any loss due to
business interruption, equipment, materials, owned, hired or in
the care, custody or control of the Contractor or such
Subcontractor(s). Contractor shall require that all insurance
policies related to the Work secured by Contractor or its
Subcontractors include clauses providing that each insurance
carrier shall also waive all of its rights of recovery by
subrogation, or otherwise, against Contractor together with the
same parties referenced immediately above in this Section.
Contractor shall require similar written express waivers and
insurance clauses from each of its Subcontractors. This provision
shall apply to each Contractor and Subcontractor performing
work or rendering services on behalf of Owner in connection
with the planning and development of the Project irrespective of
whether or not it is enrolled in the OCIP. A waiver of
subrogation shall be effective as to any individual or entity even
if such individual or entity (a) would otherwise have a duty of
indemnification, contractual or otherwise, (b) did not pay the
insurance premium directly or indirectly, and (c) whether or not
such individual or entity has an insurable interest in the
property damaged.
(f)
In addition to the requirements contained elsewhere in this

agreement, all Excluded Contractors and excluded
subcontractors shall, at a minimum, separately procure and
maintain the insurance required in this section. Additionally all
Contractors shall require, and monitor for compliance, their
respective excluded subcontractors, to maintain the following
insurance:
(1)
Workers Compensation Insurance with statutory limits

as required in the State(s) where any operations are
being performed, including Maritime coverage, if
appropriate, and Employers Liability limits of not less
than $1,000,000 each accident.
(2)
General Liability Insurance covering claims for personal

injury, bodily injury and property damage arising out of
the Work and in a form providing coverage not less than
that of a standard Commercial General Liability
Insurance policy (Occurrence Form). Such insurance
shall provide coverage for all operations and include
independent contractors, products completed operations
for two (2) years after final Acceptance of the Work and
final payment has been made contractual liability,
explosion, collapse, and underground hazards. The
policy shall include an additional insured endorsement
P300.236
in accordance with Paragraph c above. The policy shall
include an additional insured endorsement in
accordance with Paragraph c above. The limits of such
insurance shall not be less than $2,000,000 per
occurrence, $2,000,000 general aggregate limit and
$2,000,000 aggregate for products and completed
operations. If the policy is subject to an aggregate limit,
replacement insurance will be required if it is likely such
aggregate will be exceeded. Each liability policy shall
contain an Additional Insured Endorsement naming the
Owner and any other entity designated by Owner as
Additional Insured, equivalent to the latest ISO Form
CG 2010 and will state that the coverage provided to the
Additional Insureds is primary and non-contributing
with any other insurance available to the Additional
Insured.
(3)
Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance covering all

owned, non-owned and hired automobiles, trucks and
trailers. Such insurance shall provide coverage not less
than the Standard ISO Commercial Automobile
Liability policy with limits not less than, $2,000,000
Combined Single Limit and naming the Owner and all
other Indemnified Parties under the Contract as
additional insureds.
(4)
Umbrella Liability Insurance with limits of $3 million

per occurrence and annual aggregate in excess of those
policies listed in (1), (2) and (3) above. If the policy is
subject to an aggregate limit, replacement insurance will
be required if it is likely such aggregate will be
exceeded.
(D) NOTIFICATION OF CONTRACT AWARD AND REQUEST FOR

INSURANCE
When the Owner advises a successful bidder of the award of a Contract, the
Owner will also notify the Insurance Broker. Notification to the Insurance Broker
is required of all Contractors and Subcontractors.
(1)
Any work sublet by a Contractor must be reported to and approved by

the Owner.
(2)
The Contractor and his Subcontractors are required to complete the

Contractor Insurance Information and enrollment forms as set forth in
the Authoritys OCIP Manual and return it to the designated OCIP
Administrator. Upon receipt of this completed information, the
designated OCIP Administrator will arrange for and send to the eligible
Contractors or eligible Subcontractors:
P300.236
(a)
A Certificate of Insurance evidencing Workers Compensation

and Employers Liability coverage. The original policy
providing coverage will be sent as soon as practicable.
(b)
A Certificate of Insurance evidencing Commercial General

Liability coverage.
(c)
A Certificate of Insurance evidencing Umbrella Liability

Insurance, if requested.
(d)
A Certificate of evidencing All Risk Builders Insurance (if

applicable).
(E) INSURANCE TO BE PROVIDED BY CONTRACTORS AND

SUBCONTRACTORS IN THE EVENT OF TERMINATION OF THE
OCIP
In the event that the OCIP is terminated for any reason, the Contractor shall
procure and maintain, until acceptance by the Authority of the Project, insurance
for liability for damages imposed by law and assumed under this contract, of the
kinds and in the amount hereinafter provided. All insurance companies must be
authorized to do business in the State of New Jersey, and must carry an A.M.
Best Rating of A-VII or better. Before commencing any services hereunder, the
Contractor shall furnish to the Authority a certificate or certificates of insurance
(together with declaration pages if requested by the Authority) in form
satisfactory to the Authority showing that it has complied with this article. The
certificate or certificates and declaration pages shall provide that the policies
shall not be canceled or restrict any coverage until 30 days prior written notice
has been given the Authority. All certificates and notices of cancellation of
change shall be mailed to: Chief Engineer, New Jersey Turnpike Authority, P.O.
Box 5042, Woodbridge, NJ 07095-5050. Upon request, the Contractor shall furnish
the Authority with a certified copy of each policy itself, including the provision
establishing premiums.
In the event that the Contractor fails to provide or refuses to renew any insurance
policy required to be maintained herein, or if such policy is canceled or modified
so that the insurance does not meet the requirements contained herein, the
Authority may refuse to make payment of monies due under this Contract. The
Authority in its sole discretion may use such monies to purchase insurance on
behalf of the Contractor.
The types and minimum limits of insurance shall be:
(1)
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE.

The minimum limits of liability for this insurance shall be as follows:
P300.236
Bodily Injury and Property Damage
(Each occurrence combined single limit)
$2,000,000
Personal Injury Each Occurrence

General Aggregate
Products Aggregate
Fire Damage Legal Liability
Medical Payments
$2,000,000
$2,000,000
$2,000,000
$ 100,000
$
5,000

employees and agents as additional insureds.
The coverage to be provided under this policy shall be at least as broad
as the standard basic unamended and unendorsed ISO Commercial
General Liability policy.
This insurance policy shall include, Personal Injury, Broad Form
Property Damage, Contractual Liability including the deletion of the
coverage restriction related to work conducted within fifty (50) feet of a
railroad, products, completed operation, X.C.U., and independent
contractors coverages. With respect to products, completed operations
coverage shall remain in force for a period of two (2) years following the
completion and/or termination of the contract.
(2)
BUSINESS AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE.

The Comprehensive Automobile Liability policy shall cover owned, nonowned and hired vehicles with minimum limits as follows:
Combined Single Limit of Liability for Bodily Injury or
Property Damage any one accident;
$2,000,000

The Contractor and any subcontractors, who will be transporting any
hazardous materials, hazardous substances, hazardous wastes and
contaminated soils as part of the work under this contract, shall provide
the Authority with evidence of levels of financial responsibility as
required by the Motor Carrier Act of 1980 and 49 C.F.R., Part 387.
The Contractor and/or subcontractor, as the case may be, shall provide
the Authority with one of the following: (1) an Endorsement for Motor
Carrier Policies of Insurance for Liability under Sections 29 and 30 of the
Motor Carrier Act of 1980 (Form MCS-90) issued by an insurer, (2) a
Motor Carrier Surety Bond for Public Liability under Section 30 of the
Motor Carrier Act of 1980 (Form MCS-82) issued by a surety, or (3) a
written decision, order or authorization of the Interstate Commerce
Commission authorizing the Contractor or subcontractor to self-insure
P300.236
pursuant to 49 C.F.R., Part 1043.5.
(3)
WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY

INSURANCE.
Workers Compensation Insurance shall be provided in accordance with
the requirements of the laws of the State of New Jersey and shall include
an all-states endorsement to extend coverage to any state which may be
interpreted to have legal jurisdiction. Employers' Liability Insurance
shall be provided with a limit of liability of $1,000,000 for each accident
as required by New Jersey law.
(4)
CONTRACTORS POLLUTION LIABILITY (CPL) INSURANCE.

With regard to services rendered by Contractors and/or their
Subcontractors for this project, a Contractor's Pollution Liability Policy
(CPL) shall be provided.
The CPL shall include, but not be limited to, coverage for on-site
cleanup, bodily injury and/or property damage to third parties,
contractual liability, and automobile liability for the transportation of
materials to and from the project site, completed operations and a
severability of interest clause.
The policy shall be issued on a project specific and occurrence basis
dedicated exclusively to the project for the services rendered hereunder.
The policy shall be renewed annually for the duration of the project and
for a period of two (2) years following termination of the contract or the
completion of the project. The minimum limits of liability dedicated to
this project shall be as follows:
Each Occurrence $5,000,000
Annual Aggregate $10,000,000
The policy shall name the Authority, its commissioners, officers,
(5)
UMBRELLA LIABILITY INSURANCE

Umbrella liability insurance is required with limits in excess of those
underlying policies stated under parts (a) (b) and (c) with minimum
limits as follows:
Minimum limit each occurrence and annual aggregate
$3,000,000

(6)
OWNER'S PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE.
P300.236
The contractor shall obtain and maintain a separate Owner's Protective

Liability policy with minimum limits as specified below. This policy
shall name the New Jersey Turnpike Authority, its commissioners,
officers, employees and agents as named insured. The policy shall
remain in force until completion of the project.
Minimum limits of liability for bodily injury and property damage
combined C/S/L each occurrence and aggregate - $5,000,000.
(7)
MARINE LIABILITY INSURANCE.

If the Contractor or subcontractor is engaged in any marine operation, it
shall maintain marine liability insurance in a minimum limit of
$10,000,000, written on an occurrence basis.
(8)
AIRCRAFT LIABILITY INSURANCE.

If the Contractor or subcontractor is engaged in any operations utilizing
aircraft, it shall maintain aircraft liability insurance in an amount not less
than $10,000,000, written on an occurrence basis.
(9)
RAILROAD PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE.

If the Contractor or Subcontractor is engaged in any operation requiring
a permit from a Railroad Company located within the worksite, the
Contractor will provide Insurance in such amounts and such limits as
required by the individual Railroad Company.
(10)
INSURANCE, CERTIFICATE AND ENDORSEMENT REQUIREMENTS.

Each of the above required policies shall contain the endorsements as
stated below:
Thirty (30) days notice of cancellation or any restriction in
coverage by registered mail to the New Jersey Turnpike
Authority.
All policies, except Workers Compensation and Employer's
Liability Insurance, shall contain a waiver of subrogation clause
in favor of the New Jersey Turnpike Authority.
P300.236
With respect to policies (1),(2),(4) and (6), the other insurance
clause under each policy shall be amended to read as follows:
"This policy will act as primary insurance and not contribute
with policies issued to the New Jersey Turnpike Authority."
Insurance coverage in the minimum amounts provided for herein shall
not relieve the Contractor or subcontractor of any liability which might
exceed that amount, nor shall it preclude the Authority from taking such
other actions as are available to it under any other provisions of this
contract, or otherwise in law.
In the event that the Contractor or subcontractor fails or refuses to renew
any insurance policy required to be maintained herein, or if such policy
is canceled or modified so that the insurance does not meet the
requirements contained herein, the Authority may refuse to make
payment of monies due under this contract. The Authority, it its sole
discretion, may use such monies to purchase insurance on behalf of the
Contractor or subcontractor, or it may default the Contractor and direct
the surety to complete the project. The Authority may waive or modify
and requirement set forth in the insurance program set forth herein.
During any period when the required insurance is not in effect, the Chief
Engineer may suspend performance of the Contract. If the contract is so
suspended, no additional compensation or extension of time shall be due
on account of such suspension.
The Contractor shall also require all subcontractors to comply with the
insurance requirements stated above, including providing evidence of
such insurance coverages in the same manner as stated above. If any
subcontractor cannot comply with this requirement, then such
subcontractor shall be added under the Contractor's policies as an
additional insured.
Notwithstanding that minimum amount of insurance coverage carried or
required to be carried by the Contractor are specified herein, the liability
of the Contractor shall not be limited to the amounts so specified and
shall extend to any and all liability in excess of the insurance coverages
so provided nor shall these minimum limits preclude the Authority from
taking any action available to it under the provisions of the contract or
otherwise in Law.
(11)
ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS
(a)
Contractor and all Subcontractors shall not violate or knowingly

permit to be violated any conditions of the policies of insurance
provided by Owner under the terms of this Paragraph 106.20.
All requirements and obligations imposed on the Contractor by
this Paragraph 106.20, the OCIP Manual or the insurance policies
referred to herein shall likewise, by Contractor or otherwise, be
P300.236
imposed on, assumed and performed by each of the
Subcontractors.
(b)
The Contractor agrees and will require each Subcontractor to

agree to keep and maintain an accurate and classified record of
its payroll data and information in accordance with the
requirements of the insurance company or companies and as
required in the OCIP Manual. The Contractor and its
Subcontractors agree to permit its books and records to be
examined and audited periodically by the Insurer, Owner or
their respective representatives. Prior to start of work, the
Contractor shall furnish and cause its Subcontractors to furnish
to Owner or its designee, in a form satisfactory to Owner as set
forth in the OCIP Manual, an estimate of direct labor cost (listed
by Standard Workers Compensation Insurance classification) to
be incurred in connection with the work at the Site, and the total
price due each Subcontractor under its contract. Contractor shall
provide Owner as requested or required, with certified payrolls
for all on-site labor performed by Contractor and its
Subcontractors. Failure by the Contractor to provide certified
payrolls may, at Owners option, be cause to withhold payment
until compliance.
(c)
Contractor shall deliver to the designated OCIP Administrator

prior to the commencement of the work, satisfactory evidence of
insurance coverage for Contractor on a standard ACORD form
or other form as required by Owner. Sample ACORD certificate
is included in the OCIP Manual. Upon request, copies of the
actual insurance policies or renewals or replacements thereof
shall be submitted to Owner. All policies of insurance the
Contractor or Subcontractor are required to secure and maintain
in accordance with this Contract will be placed with A.M. Bestrated VII or better insurance companies satisfactory to Owner
and shall provide sixty (60) days written notice of cancellation,
non-renewal or reduction of coverage. Contractor will be
responsible to pay all insurance premiums including any
charges for required waivers of subrogation or the endorsement
of Additional Insureds. All Insurance furnished by Contractor
or its Subcontractors will be in full force and effect during
contractors performance under the Contract or as otherwise
required by the Contract. The coverage and limits of insurance
required in this Contract will not be construed as a limitation of
liability to Owner or in any way modify the Contractors or its
Subcontractors obligations to indemnify Owner. Contractors
failure to deliver satisfactory evidence of coverage shall not be
construed as a waiver of Contractors obligation to provide the
required insurance coverage. Contractor shall be responsible for
obtaining satisfactory evidence of insurance coverage from each
P300.236
of its Subcontractors prior to commencement of Subcontractors
work.
Nothing contained in this Paragraph 106.20 shall relieve the Contractor
and/or its Subcontractors of their respective obligations to exercise due
care in the performance of their duties in connection with the Work and
complete the Work in strict compliance with the Contract.
(12)
ENVIRONMENTAL OBLIGATIONS AND INDEMNIFICATION

In fulfilling its obligations under the Contract, the Contractor and all
Subcontractors shall comply with any and all applicable Federal, State
and local laws, rules and regulations governing the handling,
transportation, disposal and abatement of asbestos, asbestos containing
materials, asbestos contaminated materials, lead paint materials,
petroleum, petroleum constituents, and all other environmentally
regulated substances and hazardous materials. The Contractor shall
indemnify and hold harmless, without limitation, the indemnified
parties from any and all fines, penalties and assessments levied against
or imposed upon the Indemnified Parties as a result of the Contractors
failure to comply with any and all applicable federal, state and local
laws, rules and regulations governing the handling, transportation,
disposal and abatement of asbestos, asbestos containing materials,
asbestos contaminated materials, lead paint materials, petroleum,
petroleum constituents, and all other environmentally regulated
substances and hazardous materials.
The liability of the Contractor under this section shall in no way be
limited by the amount of insurance coverage provided and shall
continue beyond the expiration of the Contract for claims, losses,
expenses, fines, penalties and assessments which arise out of the
Contractors or its Subcontractors performance during the term of the
Contract.
106.24
SMALL BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PROGRAM

In accordance with Executive Order No. 84 signed by Governor Jim Florio on March 5.
1993 and Executive Order No. 71 signed by Governor James E. McGreevey on October 2,
2003, it is the policy of the New Jersey Turnpike Authority (the Authority or NJTA)
that Small Business Enterprises (SBE), as determined and defined by the State of New
Jersey, Department of Treasury, Division of Minority and Women Business Development
(Division) and the Department of the Treasury (Treasury) in N.J.A.C. 17:13-1.1 et seq
and N.J.A.C. 17:14-1.1 et seq., respectively, have the opportunity to compete for and
participate in the performance of contracts for the purchase of goods and services and for
construction services required by the Authority. The Authority further requires that its
contractors shall agree to take all necessary and responsible steps, in accordance with the
aforementioned regulations, to ensure that SBEs have these opportunities.
P300.236
In the second and third paragraphs, change Commerce Commission: to Division.

In the third paragraph, the third sentence is replaced as follows:
Bidders are required to complete and submit within 7 days after Notice of Award,
Authority Form entitled Proposed Schedule of Small Business Enterprise Participation,
which is included in the proposal and attached to Appendix X.
106.25
WARRANTIES MADE BY CONTRACTOR

The Contractor represents and warrants:
A.
That he is financially solvent, that he is experienced in and competent to perform

the type of services contemplated by this Contract, that the facts stated or shown
in any papers submitted or referred to in connection with his Proposal are true,
and, if the Contractor be a corporation, that it is authorized to perform this
Contract;
B.
That he has carefully examined and analyzed the provisions and requirements of
this Contract and inspected the construction site, that from his own
investigations he has satisfied himself as to the nature of all things needed for the
performance of this Contract, the general and local conditions and all other
matters which in any way affect this Contract or its performance, and that the
time available to him for such examinations, analysis, inspection and
investigation was adequate;
C.
That the Contract is feasible of performance in accordance with all its provisions
and requirements and that he can and will perform in strict accordance with such
provisions and requirements;
D.
That no Commissioner, officer, agent or employee of the Authority is personally

interested directly or indirectly in this Contract for the compensation to be paid
hereunder, and;
E.
That, except only for those representations, statements or promises expressly

contained in this Contract, no representation, statement or promise, oral or in
writing, of any kind whatsoever by the Authority, its Commissioners, officers,
agents, employees or consultants has induced the Contractor to enter into this
Contract or has been relied upon by the Contractor, including any with reference
to: (1) the meaning, correctness, suitability, or completeness of any provisions or
requirements of this Contract; (2) the nature, existence or location of materials,
structures, obstructions, utilities or conditions, surface or subsurface, which may
be encountered at the construction site; (3) the nature, quantity, quality or size of
the materials, equipment, labor and other facilities needed for the performance of
this Contract; (4) the general or local conditions which may in any way affect this
Contract or its performance; (5) the price of the Contract; or (6) any other matters,
P300.236
whether similar to or different from those referred to in (1) through (5)
immediately above, affecting or having any connection with this Contract, the
bidding thereon, any discussions thereof, the performance thereof or those
employed therein or connected or concerned therewith.
Nothing in the Contract Documents or any other part of the Contract is intended
as or shall constitute a representation by the Authority as to the feasibility of
performance of this Contract or any part thereof. Moreover, the Authority does
not warrant or represent either by issuance of the Contract Documents or by any
provisions of this Contract as time for performance or completion or otherwise
that the Contract may be performed or completed by the times required herein or
by any other times.
The Contractor further represents and warrants that he was given ample
opportunity and time and by means of this subsection was requested by the
Authority to review thoroughly all documents forming this Contract prior to
opening of Proposals on this Contract in order that he might request inclusion in
this Contract of any statement, representation, promise or provision which he
desired or on which he wished to place reliance; that he did so review said
documents, that either every such statement, representation, promise or
provision has been included in this Contract or else, if omitted, that he expressly
relinquishes the benefit of any such omitted statement, representation, promise
or provision and is willing to perform this Contract without claiming reliance
thereon or making any other claim on account of such omission.
The Contractor further recognizes that the provisions of this Subsection, (though
not only this Subsection) are essential to the Authoritys consent to enter into this
Contract and that without such provisions, the Authority would not have
entered into this Contract.
106.26
DISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT ON PUBLIC WORKS

All contractors and subcontractors must comply with the requirements of N.J.S.A. 10:2-1
Discrimination in Employment on Public Works bound hereinafter as Appendix J.
SECTION 107 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS

107.02
PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
The second paragraph is deleted and replaced with the following:
The Contractor, his superintendent, or his authorized agent shall be present at the
conference and shall present a list of proposed subcontractors, if any, a list of suppliers
from whom materials are anticipated to be purchased, an executed application for a
Traffic Permit to begin work at the site, two (2) copies of the Health and Safety Plan
(HASP) and Safe Work Plans (SWP) that comply with the minimum guidelines in New
Jersey Turnpike Authority Health and Safety Plan Requirements (available via the
P300.236
Authoritys Web Site, www.state.nj.us/turnpike/professional-services.html, by
following the link titled NJTA Minimum Guidelines for Contractors OCIP Health and
Safety Plan (HASP) under the Engineering Reference Material section) with all requests
required of a satisfactory HASP and SWP as set forth elsewhere in the contract
documents, and other data as required by the Authority. The information so presented
shall be on forms submitted to the Contractor with the notice of this preconstruction
conference. Separate Safety Kickoff Meeting, utility meeting, pre-concrete conferences,
and/or other meetings may be scheduled when required by these Supplemental
Specifications, or as needed.
107.03
COMMENCEMENT OF WORK.
The first paragraph is deleted and replaced with the following:
Upon execution of the contract by the Authority, a fully executed copy thereof together
with a Notice to Proceed will be forwarded to the Contractor. Receipt of the executed
Contract and Notice shall constitute the Contractor's authority to enter upon the site of
the work, provided the Contractor has prior thereto submitted to the Engineer, and he
has accepted, the insurance certificates required under Subsection 106.20 and applied for
and received a Traffic Permit required under Section 801. Construction operations shall
not begin until the Contractor has supplied, and the Engineer has accepted, the HASP
and SWP, the progress schedule and other certifications, forms, schedules, and any other
documents required by the Contract Documents prior to the beginning of construction
operations and established a field office as required by the Supplementary Specifications.
Furthermore, no construction operations shall begin until the Safety Kickoff Meeting has
been held and the contractor has satisfied all requirements thereto.
107.04
PROGRESS SCHEDULE.
(E) TYPES OF PROGRESS SCHEDULES
(1) When the Progress Schedule is a Pay Item.
The following is added to the second paragraph:
Activities with a duration less than 5 days or greater than 20 days shall be avoided.
The Contactors CPM schedule will not contain more than 25% of its total activities
with a duration of less than 5 days unless approved by the Engineer prior to initial
submission.
107.11
LANE AND ROADWAY OCCUPANCY CHARGES

The Contractor is advised that severe impacts are experienced by the traveling public
occasioned by having a lane or lanes closed beyond the allowable lane closure hours
listed in the Authoritys Manual for Traffic Control in Work Zones. In the event that the
Contractor fails to open a lane or lanes or make the lane or lanes fully available for use by
Authority Maintenance crews, according to the allowable lane closure hours, the
Authority will have the right to collect a Lane Occupancy Charge for the use and
P300.236
occupancy of each such lane or lanes beyond the allowable lane closure hours until such
time that the lane or lanes are reopened to traffic or made fully available for use by
Authority Maintenance crews. Therefore, the contractor will be assessed a Lane
Occupancy Charge for a delay in the reopening of the lane closing(s), premised upon
road user costs and costs incurred by the Authority for engineering, inspection, and
administration (including overhead). The Lane Occupancy Charges shall be collected by
deducting the appropriate Charges, as determined in accordance with the Authoritys
Road User Cost Manual and Lane Occupancy Charge Worksheet, from the Contractors
partial payments.
The Authoritys Road User Cost Manual and Lane Occupancy Charge Worksheet are
available on the Authoritys Web Site (www.state.nj.us/professional-services.html)
under the Engineering Reference Material section.
The Lane Occupancy Charges for lane closings in this Contract are shown in the table
below, and they will be assessed after the expiration of the permissible lane closing
periods specified in the Authoritys Manual for Traffic Control in Work Zones, until such
time as the lane is fully available for use by Authority patrons or Authority Maintenance
crews, as applicable, for each location of work in this Contract.
Reopening Of Lane Lane Occupancy Charge
Is Late By:
Assessed:
1 to 15 minutes
$700
16 to 30 minutes
$2,200
31 to 45 minutes
$4,400
46 to 60 minutes
$20,000
$20,000
61 to 75 minutes
$20,000
76 to 90 minutes
$20,000
91 to 105 minutes
$20,000
106 to 120 minutes
Notes:
Every 15 minutes late after 2 hours is an additional
charge of $5,000 to a maximum total daily charge of
$20,000.
Note that the charges above shall not be added together.
The Lane Occupancy Charge to be assessed is the single
value in the right-hand column corresponding to the
lateness of work zone pick up found in the left-hand
column.
SECTION 108 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

108.03
PARTIAL PAYMENTS
The first and fourth paragraphs are deleted and replaced with the following:
P300.236
At monthly intervals, or semi-monthly when the work accomplished in a two-week
period amounts to a minimum of $250,000, the Engineer will prepare a "Certificate for
Payment to Contractor," which shall be executed by the Contractor, showing the
approximate quantities of work completed and all permanent materials and equipment
furnished but not incorporated in the work, up to the date of such certificate, and the
value of such materials and equipment as security for the fulfillment of this contract by
the Contractor until the completion of the contract. The Authority will pay monthly or
semi-monthly to the Contractor while carrying on the Work, the balance not retained
after deducting there from all previous payments. In connection with the value of the
approximate quantities of work completed, an amount equivalent to two (2) percent of
the amount due will be deducted and retained from the partial payments pending
substantial completion. In the first estimate following substantial completion, the
Authority will reduce the amount retained to one (1) percent of the total value of the
contract. No additional retainage will be withheld provided that the work is proceeding
satisfactorily and timely on the basis of approved construction schedules. Ten (10)
percent of the value of permanent materials and equipment furnished but not
incorporated in the work will be deducted and retained at all times. This will be in
addition to any amount retained in connection with the total value of the approximate
quantities of work completed. The total value of the contract will be considered to mean
the original total Awarded value of the Contract, adjusted by the total value of all
approved Change Orders.
If it becomes evident on the basis of the approved progress schedule or otherwise that the
completion date for the Contract will not be met, the Authority reserves the right to
retain four (4) percent of the total value of the approximate quantities of work completed
throughout the entire Contract period and to make additional retention in the amount of
the liquidated damages as specified in the contract.
In accordance with N.J.S.A. 2A:30 A-2, regarding the prompt payment of construction
contracts, the required 30-day payment period shall begin when the Certificate for
Payment to Contractor has been approved in the Authoritys contract management
system (CapEx Manager) by the Assistant Chief Engineer of Construction.
As a result of the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act as well as the State of New
Jersey Stimulus Initiatives, Contractors and Subcontractors are required to submit
monthly employment and wage data to the State via an automated web based
application using electronic Form CC-257R through the New Jersey Portal at
http://www.state.nj.us/transportation/business/civilrights/pdf/cc257.pdf
All employment and wage data must be accurate and consistent with the certified payroll
records. The contractor is responsible for ensuring that their subcontractors comply with
these reporting requirements. Within five (5) business days of submitting the required
data each month, the Contractor shall provide a written statement to the Authority
certifying that he and his subcontractors have submitted the required information to the
State.
108.04
PAYMENT FOR COST-PLUS WORK
P300.236
This Subsection is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:
Where the Contractor and the Engineer cannot negotiate an agreement for extra work or
for work designated as cost-plus work elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Chief
Engineer may direct and require the Contractor to do such work on a cost-plus basis to
be compensated as provided in this Subsection.
The total costs for labor, materials, equipment, bonds, insurance and tax as provided in
the following Subparts, together with applicable markups shall constitute full
compensation for all direct and indirect costs, including overhead, and profit, and shall
be deemed to include all items of expense not specifically designated.
(A)
LABOR.
Labor shall mean:
(1) Actual hourly wages, as set forth and substantiated by the Contractors Certified
Payroll Records, paid to and received by foremen, shop stewards, surveyors,
laborers, mechanics and other employees below the rank of superintendent,
exclusive of timekeepers, as dictated by union contract and directly employed at
the construction site, whether employed by the Contractor or by the
subcontractor, subject to the Engineer's authority to determine what employees
of any category are "required for Extra Work" and as to the portion of their time
allotted to Extra Work.
(2) A pro rata portion of:
(a)
Vacation allowances and union dues and assessments which the

employer actually pays, as set forth and substantiated by the
Contractors Certified Payroll Records, pursuant to contractual
obligation upon the basis of such wages, and
(b)
Taxes actually paid by the employer (such as Social Security Tax, Federal
and State Unemployment Compensation Contributions and State
Temporary Disability Benefits Contributions), as set forth and
substantiated by the Contractors Certified Payroll Records, pursuant to
law upon the basis of such wages and as shown in the Notice of
Employer Contribution Rates issued by the New Jersey Department of
Labor
(c)
Holiday pay actually paid by the employer during the performance of

the work.
"Employees" as used herein shall mean only the employees of one employer.
(B)
M ATERIALS.
Actual cost of all material used and incorporated into the permanent construction,
P300.236
including freight and delivery charges as shown on original receipted bills. For all
materials not incorporated into the permanent construction but necessarily involved
in the performance of the work, the Contractor shall receive an amount equal to the
actual cost of such materials, less a reasonable allowance for the salvage value of
such materials when they are no longer required for the performance of the work
except as follows: (Fuels and lubricants consumed by equipment shall be included
in the Equipment and Plant described below.)
The Authority is exempt from the Sales and Use Tax pursuant to Subsection 106.10.
The Contractor will not be reimbursed for taxes for which the Authority is exempt.
(C)
INSURANCE.
Actual additional cost of Workmans Compensation, Contractor's Commercial
General Liability Insurance, Owners Protective Liability Insurance, Contractors
Pollution Liability (CPL) Insurance, Umbrella Liability Insurance, and other types of
Insurance which may be required for the performance of the work, provided the cost
of such insurance is increased due to an increase in the cost of the work. Calculations
for these additional costs shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the completion
of the cost plus work.
Cost of bonds, property damage, liability, and workers compensation insurance
premiums; unemployment insurance contributions; and social security taxes shall be
supplied to the Engineer prior to the start of cost plus work.
(D)
OVERHEAD.
Ten (10) percent of the cost of Labor (A), Materials (B) and Insurance (C), and five (5)
percent of the cost of Equipment and Plant (E) and Sublet Work (I) shall be added as
full compensation for all general superintendents (other than Foremen),
administration and overhead, bonding expenses, general safety items and equipment
including personal protection equipment (PPE) and the use of small tools.
(E)
EQUIPMENT AND PLANT.
(1) Contractor Owned Equipment and Plant.

An hourly rate determined as set forth below of all equipment, other than small
tools, actually owned by the Contractor and used in the performance of the work,
limited to the periods that such equipment is actually required and engaged in the
performance of the work.
The Rates shall be derived from the monthly rate, as set forth in the
recommendations of the Rental Rate Blue Book " published by EquipmentWatch,
(a unit of Penton Media, Inc.) 6151 Powers Ferry Rd. Suite 200, Atlanta, Georgia
30339.
P300.236
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
The ownership hourly rate will be determined by dividing the monthly

rate by 176. The weekly, hourly, and daily rates will not be used.
The number of hours to be paid will be the number of hours that the
equipment or plant is actually used on a specific cost-plus activity.
The current revisions will be used in establishing rates. The current
revision applicable to specific cost-plus work is as of the first day of
work performed on that cost-plus work and that rate applies throughout
the period the cost- plus work is being performed.
Area adjustment and equipment life adjustment will not be made.
Overtime shall be charged at one-half the rate indicated in Part (a) above.
The estimated operating costs per hour will be used for each hour that
the equipment or plant is in operation on the work. Such costs do not
apply to idle time, regardless of the cause of the idleness.
Idle time for equipment will not be paid for, except where the equipment
has been held on the project site on a standby basis at the direction of the
Engineer and, but for this direction, should have left the project site.
Such payment will be made at one-half the rate established in
Subparagraph (1) above.
The rates established above include the cost of fuel, oil, lubrication,
supplies, small tools, necessary attachments, repairs, overhaul and
maintenance of any kind, depreciation, storage, profit, insurance, all
costs (including labor and equipment) of moving equipment or plant to,
on, and away from the site. The only exception shall be the cost to move
such equipment if the use of such equipment was not required as part of
the contract scope at the time the contractor is directed to proceed with
cost plus work.
Operator costs will be paid only as provided in (A) Labor above. There
will be no payment for operator cost when the equipment is idle.
All equipment shall, in the opinion of the Engineer, be in good operating condition.
Equipment used by the Contractor shall be specifically described and be of suitable
size and suitable capacity required for the work to be performed. In the event the
Contractor elects to use equipment of a higher rental value than that suitable for the
work, payment will be made at the rate applicable to the suitable equipment. The
equipment actually used and the suitable equipment paid for will be made a part of
the record for cost-plus work. The Engineer will determine the suitability of the
equipment. If there is a differential in the rate of pay of the operator of oversize or
higher rate equipment, the rate paid for the operator will be that for the suitable
equipment.
If a rate is not established in the Rental Rate Blue Book for a particular piece of
equipment or plant, the Contractor shall obtain a rate from Equipment Watch for the
Engineers review and approval.
The above provisions apply to the equipment and plant owned directly by the
Contractor or by entities which are divisions, affiliates, subsidiaries, or in any other
way related to the Contractor or its parent company.
(2) Rented Equipment and Plant
P300.236
Rented Equipment and Plant. In the event that the Contractor does not own a specific
type of equipment or plant and must obtain it by rental, the Contractor shall inform
the Resident Engineer of the need to rent the equipment and of the rental rate for that
equipment prior to using it on the Work. The Contractor will be paid the actual
rental for the equipment for the time that the equipment is actually used to
accomplish the work, provided that rate is reasonable as determined by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide a copy of the paid receipts and canceled checks for the
rental expense incurred.
(F)
PROFIT.
Ten (10) percent of the cost of Labor (A) and Materials (B) as described above, as full
compensation for profit and for all other items of cost and expense to the Contractor
not specifically provided for herein.
(G)
TOLLS.
Tolls for Authority roadways or any other roadways will not be reimbursed.
(H)
SUBLET WORK.
In the event any portion of the work ordered on a cost-plus basis is sublet, the
Contractor will be paid for the actual cost of the work performed in accordance with
the provisions as specified above.
(I)
RECORDS.
The Contractor shall maintain its records in such a manner as to provide a clear
distinction between the direct costs of work paid for on a cost-plus basis and the
costs of other operations.
From the above records, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer the completed
Daily Schedule of Labor, Equipment and Material charges reports using the forms
provided herein the appendix of the supplementary specifications for each days
work. Said daily cost-plus work reports shall be signed by the Contractor and
submitted daily for the Engineers review and approval.
The Contractors final cost plus work reports shall be submitted using the schedule of
forms provided in Appendix Z herein and shall be listed as follows:
Standardized Schedules for Cost-Plus Work
Schedule A: Summary of Charges
Schedule B: Daily Schedule of Labor Charges
Schedule B-1: Calculation of Hourly Labor Rates
Schedule C: Daily Schedule of Equipment Charges
Schedule C-1: Calculation of Hourly Equipment Rates
Schedule C-2: Calculation of Rented Equipment
Schedule D: Daily Schedule of Material Charges
Schedule E: Daily Schedule of Subcontractor Charges
P300.236
Schedule F: Inspector Report
Material charges shall be substantiated by valid copies of vendor's invoices. Such
invoices shall be submitted with the daily cost-plus work reports, or if not available,
they shall be submitted with subsequent daily cost-plus work reports. Should said
vendor's invoices not be submitted within 60 days after the date of delivery of the
material, or within 15 days after the completion, whichever occurs first, the
Authority reserves the right to establish the cost of such materials at the lowest
current wholesale prices at which said materials are available, in the quantities
concerned, delivered to the location of work.
The Contractor will not be paid until all of the above records are provided to the
Authority as outlined above, and reviewed and approved by the Engineer and
Authority.
The Chief Engineer may direct a Contractor to perform work which would require
the paying of premium time wages not anticipated in the original scope of the
project. The premium portion of all wages will not receive a mark-up for profit;
however, a 10% overhead allowance will be paid on the premium portion of wages.
The Contractor's cost records pertaining to work paid for on a cost-plus basis shall be
open to inspection or audit by representatives of the Authority, during the life of the
contract and for a period of not less than three years after acceptance thereof, and the
Contractor shall retain such records for that period. Where payment for materials or
labor is based on the cost thereof to forces other than the Contractor, the Contractor
shall ensure that the cost records of such other forces are open to inspection and
audit by representatives of the Authority on the same terms and conditions as the
cost records of the Contractor. In case all or a part of such records are not made so
available, the Contractor understands and agrees that any items not supported by
reason of such unavailability of the records will not be allowed, or if payment
therefore has already been made, the Contractor shall refund to the Authority
amount so disallowed.
Should the Contractor refuse or fail to prosecute the work as directed, the Chief
Engineer may withhold the payment of all current estimates until the Contractor's
refusal or failure is eliminated.
108.08
FUEL PRICE ADJUSTMENT

The Authority will make monthly price adjustments for fuel usage for Items listed in
Table 108-1. The Authority will calculate fuel price adjustments based on the monthly
pay quantities of listed Items using the fuel usage factors listed in Table 108-1.
Price adjustments may result in an increased payment to the Contractor for increases in
the price index and may result in a reduction in payment for decreases in the price index.
If the as-built quantity of an Item listed in Table 108-1 differs from the sum of the
P300.236
quantities in the monthly Estimates, and the as-built quantity cannot be readily
distributed among the months that the Item listed in Table 108-1 was constructed, then
the Authority will determine fuel price adjustment by distributing the difference in the
same proportion as the Items monthly Estimate quantity is to the total of the items
monthly estimates.
Table 108-1 Fuel Price Adjustment
Item
No.
Items
Roadway Excavation, _____
Embankment, _____
Foundation Excavation
Aggregate Base Course,_____ Thick
Superpave Hot Mix Asphalt ________ Surface Course
Superpave Hot Mix Asphalt ________ Intermediate Course
Superpave Hot Mix Asphalt ________ Base Course
Bridge Approach Slab
Pavement Removal, ________" Depth
Open-Graded Friction Course
Concrete In Substructure Above Footings
Concrete In Footings
Concrete In Backwall
Concrete in Retaining Walls Above Footings
Concrete in Headblock, HPC
Concrete in Parapet, HPC
Concrete in Deck, HPC
Fuel Usage Factor

.5 Gallons per Cubic Yard
1.0 Gallons per Cubic Yard
.5 Gallons per Cubic Yard
0.30 Gallons per Square Yard
2.50 Gallons per Ton
Retaining Wall (Mechanically Stabilized Earth OR Prefabricated

Modular Walls)
.10 Gallons per Square Foot
The Authority will calculate fuel price adjustment on a monthly basis using the following formula:
F = (MF BF) x G
Where:
F = Fuel Price Adjustment
MF = Monthly Fuel Price Index
BF = Basic Fuel Price Index
G = Gallons of Fuel for Price Adjustment
The Authority will use the monthly fuel price index every month from the New Jersey Department of
Transportations website, www.state.nj.us/transportation/business/trnsport/PriceIndex.shtm.
The basic fuel price index is the most recent months fuel price index before the date of receipt of bids. The
Authority will use the fuel price index for the month before the regular monthly estimate cut off date as
the Monthly Fuel Price Index. If the Monthly Fuel Price Index increases by 50 percent or more over the
Basic Fuel Price Index, do not perform any work involving Items listed in Table 108-1 without written
P300.236
approval from the Engineer.
Fuel price adjustment will be on a lump sum basis, and an estimated amount to cover the fuel price
adjustment will be included in the Proposal. Payments for increases will be made from this amount.
Fuel Price Adjustment (No Bid Item)..Lump Sum
Pay Items not listed within Table 108-1 will not be subject to the Fuel Price Adjustment.
P300.236
DIVISION 200 - EARTHWORK

SECTION 201 - CLEARING AND GRUBBING
201.01
DESCRIPTION.
The third paragraph is deleted.
The following is added to the end of this subsection:
Removal of existing signs and posts not within the limits of roadway excavation is
included under clearing and grubbing.
201.03
METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION.
The following added before the first paragraph:
No tree clearing operations are permitted to commence prior to June 10, 2014.
The following is added after the third paragraph:
Once a tree has been cut, it shall be removed from the Project Site within ten (10) working
days.
The following is added to the end of this section:
(C)
SEALING ABANDONED WELLS

Fill and seal abandoned wells within the limits of clearing and grubbing or as
shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. Fill dug wells as specified in
Section 203. Seal drilled wells according to N.J.A.C. 7:9D et seq. Provide a copy
of the well abandonment records submitted to NJDEP to the Engineer.
If proposing an alternate method to seal the abandoned wells, obtain written
approval from the NJDEP and from the Engineer.
201.04
MEASUREMENT.
The third paragraph is deleted.
The following is added to the end of this section:
Sealing abandoned wells will be measured by the number of each abandoned well sealed in
accordance with the Plans, and as directed by the Engineer.
Removal of existing Regulatory, Warning and Service ground mounted signs on timber
or u-channel posts will not be measured separately for payment.
201.05
PAYMENT.
P300.236
The following item is added:
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
Sealing of Abandoned Well ..................................................................................... Each

No separate payment will be made for preparing and submitting well abandonment
records but shall be included in the unit price bid for the item Sealing of Abandoned
Well.
No separate payment will be made for the removal of existing Regulatory, Warning and
Service ground mounted signs on timber or u-channel posts.
SECTION 202 - ROADWAY EXCAVATION

202.01
DESCRIPTION
Roadway Excavation shall also consist of the removal of all existing signs encountered
within the limits of the Roadway Excavation, which are not specified to remain in place
or are not specified to be removed under other pay items scheduled in the Proposal.
202.03
METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION
In the first paragraph, delete the fourth sentence and replace it with the following:
Stripped topsoil, in excess of the quantity required for the Project, shall be disposed of
outside the Right of Way by the Contractor.
Delete the fifteenth paragraph and replace it with the following:
Earth and rock materials for embankment construction, in excess of that required for
embankment construction under the Contract, shall be disposed of outside the Turnpike
Right of Way by the Contractor.
The following is added after the sixteenth paragraph:
If the Contractor discovers potential environmental contamination during construction
activities (Area of Concern (AOC) defined in accordance with N.J.A.C. 7:26E-1.8), which
was not previously identified (unexpected discovery) in the contract documents, the
Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately.
The Contractor shall not perform any sampling of the materials associated with the AOC
without prior approval of the Engineer. If the Engineer determines that it is necessary for
the Contractor to undertake material sampling, the Contractor shall provide a sampling
plan to the Engineer for review and shall not initiate sampling until said plan is
approved. All sampling must be performed in accordance with N.J.A.C. 7:26E.
If construction activities caused the AOC (i.e. discharge), the Contractor will take
P300.236
corrective measures immediately to contain the AOC and notify the Engineer
immediately. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer prior to reporting any unexpected
discovery or discharges to the NJDEP Hotline (1-877-WARNDEP (927-6337)).
Delete Subparagraph Header (B) and replace with the following:
(B)
Disposal of Muck, Unsuitable and Excess Materials

Environmental testing for off-site disposal of onsite materials may be required
by the applicable regulatory agencies or by the disposal facility. In such
circumstances, prior to the start of any sampling activity, the Contractor must
obtain the disposal facilitys specific disposal analytical/procedural
requirements in writing. At a minimum, such information shall include:
Site-specific in-situ and/or stockpile sampling requirements
Analytical parameters (i.e. VOCs, SVOCs, Metals, PCBs, etc.) to be
tested and specific laboratory list requirements
Number of grab/composite samples required for collection within
a specific grid area designated by the disposal facility
Size of area to be sampled (i.e. 500 cubic yards, 1,000 cubic yards,
etc.)
Sample depths and sampling methodology
Sampling equipment requirements
Possible alternate sampling criteria and analysis based upon onsite material (frequent analysis of a specific analytical parameter
or selection of an unusual analytical parameter)
The above described documentation shall be provided to the Authority upon the
Contractors receipt of the documentation from the disposal facility. The
Contractor shall then prepare a site specific sampling plan (Plan) to satisfy the
sampling requirements outlined by the disposal facility. Said Plan shall be
provided to the Authority for review prior to the Plan being provided to the
disposal facility or any other outside entity for their review. A two week period
shall be anticipated by the Contractor for the Authoritys review. After the
Authority has accepted the Plan the Contractor shall schedule the
implementation of the Plan, giving the Authority a minimum of a 5 working day
notice prior to the initiation of any sampling. The Contractor shall not undertake
any material sampling until the Authority has completed its review of the subject
documentation and the Authority has authorized the Contractor to proceed, in
writing.
Material sampling shall be conducted in strict accordance with the most recent
versions of the Technical Requirements for Site Remediation (N.J.A.C 7:26E),
NJDEP Field Sampling Procedures Manual, NJDEP Guidance Document on
Contaminated Soil, and NJDEP Guidance Document for Waste Classification,
and other local, State and federal requirements.
Should the disposal facility reject transported on-site material, and said material
P300.236
is returned to the project site, the material shall be separately stockpiled in an
area that does not cross contaminate other materials, compromise construction
activities or violate existing permits and approvals. The Contractor, in
consultation with the Authority, shall assess said stockpiled material for disposal
options.
202.04
MEASUREMENT
The following is added to the first paragraph:
Cross section and end area calculations with quantities are to be prepared by the
Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for review, verification and subsequent
payment.
Environmental Testing for Unsuitable and Excess Materials (No-Bid) provides a Lump
Sum value for reimbursement to the Contractor for direct costs associated with
environmental testing. The only reimbursable costs permitted will be those charges for
testing approved by the Engineer.
202.05
PAYMENT
The following pay item is added:
PAY ITEM
Environmental Testing for Unsuitable and Excess Materials (No-Bid)
PAY UNIT
Lump Sum

Payment will solely be made on the amount of material actually excavated in accordance
with the contract documents and as measured and accepted by the Engineer in
accordance with Subsection 202.04.
SECTION 203 - EMBANKMENT

203.01
DESCRIPTION.
This work shall also include the construction of impermeable clay liner for the
stormwater management basins as depicted on the Plans and Details.
This work shall also consist of the installation of sand blankets and wick drains.
Maintenance, protection, periodic measuring and reporting of periodic measurements of
settlement plates at the locations and elevations indicated on the plans and as directed by
the Engineer shall be in accordance with Section 212.
P300.236
203.02
MATERIALS
Add the following after the first paragraph:
Asphalt millings generated from on-site activities may be used as embankment material.
If utilized, asphalt millings cannot be placed less than 2 feet above the highest seasonal
ground water table or within 2 feet of any underground utility. In addition, asphalt
millings cannot be placed within 2 feet of the final subgrade.
The following paragraphs are added:
(E) SAND BLANKET
Material used for Sand Blanket shall be free draining, frost resistant material, free
from ashes, muck, wood, brush, roots, sod, rubbish, garbage, and any other
deleterious material . Sand blanket material shall have a plasticity index less than
3, and shall satisfy the following gradation requirements when tested in
accordance with AASHTO T27 and T11:
Sand Blanket Grade C
Sieve Size
% Passing
1 inch
100
inch
80 to 100
No. 8
35 to 100
No. 16
25 to 90
No. 50
5 to 50
No. 100
0 to 8
No. 200
0 to 2
(F)
VERTICAL WICK DRAINS

The vertical wick drain shall be a prefabricated type and consist of a corrugated
polymer core enclosed within an external non-woven filter jacket, be capable of
resisting all bending, punching and tensioning subjected during installation and
the design life of the drain. The core shall be made of continuous plastic
fabricated to facilitate drainage along the axis of the drain.
The vertical wick drain shall have sufficient strength to withstand the stresses of
mechanical insertion, and have the following minimum properties.
Drain: Width
Thickness
Discharge Capacity
4.0 inches
0.136 inches
1.8 gpm
ASTM D4716
Core:
200 lb
ASTM D4632 (mod.)
145 lbs
100 %
70 lbs
50 lbs
150 psi
ASTM D4632
ASTM D4632
ASTM D4533
ASTM D4833
ASTM D3786
Tensile Strength
Fabric: Grab Tensile Strength

Elongation at Break
Trapezoidal Tear
Puncture Strength
Mullen Burst Strength
P300.236
Flow Rate
Permeability
A.O.S
80 gal/min/ft2
0.01 in/sec
No. 70-90 Sieve
ASTM D4491
ASTM D4491
ASTM D4751
The Contractor shall submit samples of vertical wick drains and indicate the
source of the proposed materials at least four weeks prior to delivery to the site
for approval by the Engineer.
(G)
GEOSYNTHETIC CLAY LINER.

The clay liner shall be a geosynthetic clay liner material comprised of sodium
bentonite with nonwoven geotextile. The material liner shall meet the following
properties:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
203.03
Installed on slopes >3:1

Bentonite Swell Index of 24mL/2g min based on ASTM D5890
Bentonite Fluid Loss of 18mL max based on ASTM D 5891
Bentonite Mass/Area of 0.75lb/ft2(3.6kg/m2) min based on ASTM D
5993
Geosynthetic clay liner Grab Strength of 50 lbs/in(88N/cm) MARV
based on ASTM D 6768
Geosynthetic clay liner Peel Strength of 3.5 lbs/in (6.1N/cm) min. based
on ASTM D 6496
Geosynthetic clay liner Index Flux of 1x10-8 m3/m2/sec max. based on
ASTM D 5887
Geosynthetic clay liner Hydraulic conductivity of 5X10-9 centimeters per
second maximum based on ASTM D 5887.
Geosynthetic clay liner Hydrated Internal Shear Strength of 500psf
(24kPa)typ @ 200 psf based on ASTM D5321 & D6343
(F) BORROW.
Add the following after the second paragraph:
The Contactor shall provide documentation of testing to support the requirement for
use of clean fill or certified clean fill for borrow material, as required, under
Subsection 203.03. The Contractor shall be responsible for environmental testing of
borrow material.
Add the following after the fifth paragraph:
Material composition, quality, and structural characteristics will be approved by the
Authoritys Engineer prior to acceptance of any borrow material. The Contractor
shall utilize clean fill as defined in N.J.A.C. 7:26-1.4.
Certified Borrow Material
If the Contractor obtains clean fill from a certified supplier of borrow material,
appropriate documentation, consisting of a statement that to the best of the affiants
P300.236
knowledge and belief, the fill being provided is not contaminated and a description
of the steps taken to confirm such, must be obtained. If the Contractor obtain borrow
material from a non-certified supplier, the Contractor must satisfy the following
Non-Certified Supplier of Borrow Material requirements.
Non-Certified Borrow Material
To minimize the potential of introducing contaminated borrow material onto a project site, the
Contractor shall verify that the material meets the requirements outlined herein by
performing due diligence inquiries and/or having the borrow material analyzed for
potential contaminants based on the location and history of the source area.
Undesirable sources of borrow material include former and/or existing commercial
and/or industrial sites where hazardous materials were used, handled or stored as
part of the business operations, or unpaved parking areas where petroleum
hydrocarbons could have been spilled or leaked into the soil. Agricultural areas with
former waste processes and/or historical pesticide/herbicide use are also considered
an undesirable source.
The Contractor must be aware that borrow material proposed form undesirable
source areas will require testing to demonstrate that the material is clean material as
defined by the NJDEP. If the use of material from undesirable sources is proposed
by the contractor, documentation requirements will be more stringent than would be
necessary for material from other courses.
Documentation required to be provided relative to all off-site non-certified borrow
material shall include information obtained by the contractor base don due diligence
investigations. Due diligence may include, but not limited to, interviews with past
and present owners, operators and occupants, reviews of historical sources of
information, reviews of federal, state, tribal and local government records, visual
inspections of the facility and adjoining properties, commonly known or reasonably
ascertainable information, and degree of obviousness of the presence or likely
presence of contamination at the property and the ability to detect the contamination.
A due diligent inquiry shall be performed by the Contractor consisting of the
following:
1) Conducting a diligent search of all document which are reasonably likely to
contain information related to the object of the inquiry, which documents are in
such persons possession, custody, or control, or in the possession, custody, or
control of any other person from whom the person conducting the search has a
legal right to obtain such documents; and
2) Making reasonable inquired of current and former employees and agents whose
duties include or included any responsibility for hazardous substances,
hazardous wastes, or pollutants, and any other current and former employees or
agents who may have knowledge or documents relevant to the inquiry.
Documentation to be provided relative to off-site non-certified borrow material shall
include detailed information on the previous use of the land from where the borrow
material is proposed to be taken; a statement as to whether an environmental site
P300.236
assessment was performed and its findings; and the results of any testing performed.
If such documentation is not available or is determined to be inadequate by the
Authority, analytical testing protocols in accordance with applicable NJDEP
Guidance documents shall be utilized by the Contractor to confirm the suitability of
the borrow material. The level of analysis of the borrow material required by the
Authority shall be base dont he source of the borrow material and knowledge of the
prior land use.
If determined to be necessary by the Authority, the Contractor shall provide
documentation and/or a site-specific sampling plan for the analytical testing of
borrow material for Authority review an acceptance before sampling. All borrow
material sample collection and analysis shall be performed din accordance with the
most recent versions of the N.J.A.C. 7:26E Technical Requirements for Site
Remediation, NJDEPs Field Sampling Procedures Manual, NJDEP Guidance
Document on Contaminated Soil, NJDEP Guidance Document for Waste
Classification, and any other local, State and federal requirements.
Bills of Lading
Bills of lading shall be provided to document the source(s) of all borrow material in
accordance with N.J.A.C. 7:26E-6.4 (b) 2 vi. 1-2.
The following paragraphs are added:
(G) SAND BLANKET.
Use with Wick Drains
After stripping and/or pavement removal and prior to installation of vertical
wick drains, a sand drainage blanket shall be constructed on the ground surface
for the removal of water from the underlying compressing soils via the vertical
wick drains and as a working platform for installation of the vertical wick drains.
The sand blanket shall have a minimum thickness of 2 ft. and shall be compacted
to the requirements in other areas of this Section.
Any low points in the sand blanket which cannot be made to drain by gravity
shall be maintained in a mostly dry condition by pumping or other means of
removing the accumulated water which rests atop the sand blanket.
Use with Clay Liner
After stripping and excavation for stormwater management basins a sand
blanket shall be constructed as detailed on the plans.
(H) VERTICAL WICK DRAINS.
After excavation to bottom of the sand blanket and subsequent placement of the
sand blanket, as shown on the plans, vertical wick drains shall be installed.
The vertical wick drains shall be installed with equipment of a type which will
cause a minimum of disturbance to the subsoil during the installation operation.
The vertical wick drain shall be installed using a mandrel or sleeve that will be
P300.236
advanced through the soil to the required depth. Static constant load or constant
rate of advancement methods are the preferred methods. A vibrator with an
eccentric moment of at least 500 in-lbs shall be available for use in areas where
constant load or constant rate of advancement methods cannot install the vertical
wick drain to the design depths. The vertical wick drains which cannot be
installed to the design penetration using only static methods shall be advanced
with the use of the vibrator. The vibrator shall not be used except in cases where
design penetration cannot be achieved by using the full static push force
available to the mandrel. Jetting or the use of falling weight impact hammer will
not be permitted. The mandrel shall protect the vertical wick drain material from
tears, cuts and abrasion during installation and shall be withdrawn after
installation of the drain. The mandrel shall have a cross sectional area not to
exceed 10 square inches. The mandrel shall be of such design as to prevent the
intrusion of soil into the base of the wick during installation.
Prior to the installation of vertical wick drains within the designated area, the
Contractor shall demonstrate that their equipment, methods and materials
produce a satisfactory installation in accordance with these specifications. For
this purpose, the Contractor will be required to install trial vertical wick drains at
locations designated by the Engineer. Payment will be at the bid price per linear
foot for the vertical wick drains. Payment will not be made for installing
unsatisfactory trial vertical wick drains.
Approval by the Engineer of the method and equipment used to install the trial
vertical wick drains shall not constitute, necessarily, acceptance of the method for
the remainder of the project. If at any time the Engineer considers that the
method of installation does not produce a satisfactory vertical wick drain, the
Contractor shall alter their method and/or equipment as necessary to comply
with these specifications.
Vertical wick drain locations shall be staked out and numbered by the
Contractor. Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to preserve the
stakes. The location of the vertical wick drains shall not vary by more than six (6)
inches from the locations indicated on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
Vertical wick drains shall be installed from the working surface through the sand
blanket material and through the underlying silt and clay materials down to the
elevations shown on the drawings, 1 foot into hard or dense underlying soils, or
to such depth where the soil resists a reasonable effort to further penetration.
Pre-existing fill materials may also exist which shall be penetrated by the vertical
wick drains as ordered by the Engineer. Where the tip elevations achieved by the
vertical wick drains differ significantly from the estimated tip elevations shown
on the drawings, this occurrence shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer
for evaluation. The Engineer may order that the Contractor alter their method
and/or equipment, as indicated above.
The Engineer may vary the depths, spacing, or the number of vertical wick
drains to be installed, and may revise the plan limits for this work as they deems
P300.236
necessary in their sole opinion.
The equipment shall be carefully checked for plumbness prior to advancing each
wick, and shall not deviate more than inch per foot from the vertical.
Vertical wick drains that are out of their proper location by more than six (6)
inches, vertical wick drains that are damaged in construction, or vertical wick
drains that are improperly completed will be rejected by the Engineer, and no
compensation will be allowed for any materials furnished or for any work
performed on such vertical wick drains.
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with suitable means of making a
linear determination of the quantity of vertical wick drain material used. During
installation of the vertical wick drains, the Contractor shall provide suitable
means of determining the depth of the vertical wick drains.
Splices or connections of the vertical wick drain material shall be done so as to
ensure continuity of the wick material. There shall be a minimum six (6) inch
length of wick material protruding above the working surface at each wick
location. The wick material shall be cut neatly at its upper end.
Where stiff or dense upper soils which cannot be penetrated using normally
accepted procedures are encountered, drilling or other acceptable methods may
be used to loosen such soils prior to the installation of the wick at the direction of
the Engineer, and provided that such drilling does not extend more than 2 feet
into the underlying compressible soils. The Contractor will be paid for all
drilling or other accepted methods associated with penetrating dense upper soils
at the contract unit price of obstruction drilling.
Where obstructions are encountered below the working surface which cannot be
penetrated using drilling or other normal or accepted procedures, the Contractor
shall complete the vertical wick drain from the obstruction to the working
surface and notify the Engineer. At the direction of the Engineer, the Contractor
shall then install a new drain within eighteen (18) inches from the obstructed
drain. The Contractor will be paid for all obstructed wicks at the contract unit
price of length installed unless the vertical wick drain is improperly completed.
Areas where vertical wick drains have been installed shall not be traveled over
by construction equipment until a minimum embankment material cover of ten
(10) inches has been placed.
The Contractor shall observe precautions necessary for protection of settlement
monitoring devices and other instrumentation devices that have been installed.
The Contractor shall replace, at no other cost to the Authority, all devices that are
damaged or become unreliable as a result of their work.
I) GEOSYNTHETIC CLAY LINER
This work shall include the placement of a geosynthetic clay soil to form a low
P300.236
permeability barrier (liner) in the bottom of proposed stormwater management
basins. The clay liner shall be installed according to the manufacturers
recommendations and details included in the plans.
203.04
MEASUREMENT
payment.
Sand blanket will be measured by the cubic yard placed.
Geosynthetic Clay Liner will be measured by the square yard installed.
Vertical wick drains will be measured by the linear foot installed.
Clearing of wick drain obstructions will be measured by the linear foot installed.
203.05
PAYMENT
The following items are added:
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
Vertical Wick Drains ..................................................................................Linear Foot
Sand Blanket ...............................................................................................Cubic Yard
Vertical Wick Drain Obstruction Clearance ...........................................Linear Foot
Geosynthetic Clay Liner ............................................................................Square Yard
Payment will solely be made on the amount of material actually placed in accordance
Separate payment will not be made for any dewatering required as a result of water
collection in low areas of the sand blanket which cannot be made to drain by gravity. All
labor, equipment, furnishing and placing of materials and other required activities/
appurtenances for the removal of this water shall be included in the pay item Sand
Blanket.
Separate payment will not be made for labor, equipment, furnishing and placing
materials and other required activities/appurtenances for the construction of the vertical
wick drains, all costs shall be included in the pay item Vertical Wick Drains.
Payment for foundation excavation associated with the construction of wick drains and
sand blankets beneath structures will be made in accordance with Subsection 205.05.
Separate payment will not be made for labor, equipment, furnishing and placing
P300.236
materials, compaction and other required activities/appurtenances for the construction
of the clay liner; all costs shall be included in the pay item Geosynthetic Clay Liner.
There will be no separate payment for the testing and/or due diligence efforts associated
with borrow material.
SECTION 205 - FOUNDATION EXCAVATION

205.01
DESCRIPTION.
Foundation excavation shall also include the dewatering of excavated areas to allow for
the construction of structural elements in the dry.
205.02
MATERIALS.
Any sheeting used in the Contractors design that is designated by the Contractor to
remain, shall be sheet piles conforming to Subsection 909.05(D). Sheeting to remain in
place shall be cut off two feet below finished grade or three feet below paved surfaces
after the excavation has been completely backfilled to the cut off elevation of the
sheeting.
205.03
In the fifteenth paragraph, delete the second sentence and replace it with the following:
If suitable materials obtained from Foundation Excavation is in excess of that required for
the embankment construction under the Contract, or if the work on the Project does not
include construction of embankments, such suitable material shall be disposed of outside
the Turnpike Right of Way by the Contractor.
205.04
MEASUREMENT
payment.
205.05
PAYMENT
Payment will solely be made on the amount of material actually placed in accordance
P300.236
SECTION 208 - TEMPORARY SOIL EROSION AND DUST CONTROL

208.02
MATERIALS
The following materials are added:
Course Aggregate...902.05
Geotextiles923.42
Sediment Control Bag923.43
208.03
(D) DUST CONTROL.
1.
At a minimum, wet suppression shall be used to provide temporary control of

dust. Several applications per day may be necessary to control dust depending
upon meteorological conditions and Work activity.
2.
Apply wet suppression on a routine basis as necessary to control dust. Wet

suppression consists of the application of water or a wetting agent in solution
with water. Ensure wetting agent is not used on plantable soils. Wet suppression
equipment shall consist of sprinkler pipelines, tanks, tank trucks, or other
devices capable of providing regulated flow, uniform spray, and positive shutoff.
3.
Provide wind-screens and wind barriers in locations where they would be

effective in minimizing wind erosion and spread of dust. Keep wind-screens and
barriers in good repair for the life of the Contract.
4.
As necessary, limit on-site equipment to operating speeds of 5 MPH to eliminate

dust and particulate matter pollutants from tires and brakes. Control dust
through the spraying of a suppressing agent on any stockpiles. Water or
appropriate liquids shall be utilized for dust control during demolition, land
clearing, grading, and on materials stockpiled, as necessary.
5.
All sediment barriers and other soil erosion control measures shall be installed
prior to commencing any clearing, grading or construction onsite, and shall be
maintained in proper working condition throughout the entire duration of the
project.
6.
Dust suppression shall be performed to meet a maximum of 0.5mg/m3 of dust.
Use the following measures to control dust on public roadways:

1.
For trucks hauling soil or rock (muck), the truck bed shall be completely covered
with a tarp or similar protective cover before the truck leaves the site. The truck
bed shall remain covered until the truck reaches the disposal site.
P300.236
2.
Before any vehicle leaves the Work Site, the vehicle body and/or wheels shall be
cleaned of mud and dirt to control tracking. Gravel cover shall be applied to soil
(unpaved) surfaces where they will be regularly traveled at egress and ingress
routes from/to Work sites.
3.
Vehicle mud and dirt carryout, material spills, and soil washout onto public
roadways and walkways and other paved areas shall be cleaned up immediately.
4.
The Contractor is responsible for daily clean up of public roadways and

walkways affected by Work of this Contract. A wet spray power vacuum
sweeper or similar equipment shall be used on paved roadways. Dry power
sweeping is prohibited.
Use the following methods to control dust and wind erosion of active and
inactive stockpiles:
1.
Wet suppression without wetting agent during active stockpile load-in, load-out,
and maintenance activities.
2.
Soil stabilizers shall be applied to the surface of inactive stockpiles.
3.
Plastic tarps on stockpiles, secured with sandbags or an equivalent method to

prevent the cover from being dislodged by the wind. Repair or replace covers
whenever damaged or dislodged.
Use the following measures to minimize dust from earthwork activities:

1.
During batch drop operations (i.e., earthwork with front-end loader, clamshell
bucket, or backhoe), the free drop height of excavated or aggregate material shall
be reduced as practical to minimize the generation of dust.
2.
To prevent spills during transport, freeboard space shall be maintained between

the material load and the top of the truck cargo bed rail.
(I) SILT FENCE.

Install heavy duty silt fence with geotextile securely buried in the existing soil. Join
sections of the geotextile so that they work effectively as a continuous fence. Install fence
posts at a slight angle toward the anticipated runoff source. Install black color heavy
duty silt fence in locations as shown in the Plans. Do not substitute the colors orange for
black.
The following subparagraphs are added:
(N) INLET FILTERS.
P300.236
Provide Type 2 Inlet Filters as follows:
1.
Type 2. Remove the inlet grate and place the inlet filter in the opening, holding
out approximately 6 inches of the filter outside the frame. Replace the inlet grate
to hold the filter in place. Empty the filter according to the manufacturers
recommendations. When removing the filter, ensure that sediment does not enter
into the drainage system. Clean out the filter, dispose of the sediment, rinse and
return the filter to its original shape, and replace the filter inside the inlet.
(O) CONSTRUCTION DRIVEWAYS

To minimize tracking of dirt and other materials onto existing roadways, provide a
construction driveway at each location where vehicles exit the work site as
approved by the Engineer. Construct driveways using temporary stone, Grade B
placed on geotextile. Ensure that the driveway is at least 15 feet wide. The
Contractor may make driveways wider if approved by the Engineer. Maintain the
driveway by top dressing or by excavating and top dressing, as directed by the
Engineer, with additional temporary stone, Grade B. When the driveway is no
longer required, remove the driveway, backfill to the adjacent ground elevation,
and restore the disturbed area to the original condition.
(P) SEDIMENT CONTROL BAGS
At least 10 days before installation, submit to Engineer for approval a plan detailing
size, location, details of aggregate base, anticipated discharge flow, and
manufacturers catalog cuts. Install and maintain sediment control bags according
to the manufacturers recommendations. Size sediment control bags to
accommodate anticipated sediment and flow rates. Place the sediment control bag
on the slope to allow water to flow downhill through the bag. Place the discharge
hose into the neck of the sediment control bag and fasten to ensure that water does
not leak at the connection. To increase the efficiency of filtration, place the bag on
the aggregate bed to maximize water flow through the surface area of the bag. Size
aggregate to prevent puncture of sediment control bags. Ensure that the discharge
from the sediment control bag does not cause erosion to, or scour of, the area to
which the water is being discharged. When the sediment control bag is 90 percent
full, and can no longer efficiently filter sediment, or does not allow water to pass at
a reasonable rate, remove and replace. Remove sediment control bags according to
manufacturers recommendations and restore the disturbed area to original
condition.
208.04
MEASUREMENT
Heavy duty silt fence, black will be measured by the linear foot.
Sediment Control Bags will measured by the number of each
Inlet Filters, Type 2 will be measured by the number of each.
P300.236
Construction Driveway will be measured by the weight of the stone furnished and
placed.
Water for dust control will not be measured for payment.
208.05
PAYMENT
The following pay item is removed:
PAY ITEM
Heavy Duty Silt Fence
PAY UNIT
Linear Foot
The following pay items are added:

PAY ITEM
Sediment Control Bags
Heavy Duty Silt Fence, Black
Inlet Filter, Type 2
Construction Driveway
PAY UNIT
Each
Linear Foot
Each
Ton

Separate payment for water will not be made; costs shall be included in the prices bid for
the various bid items.
SECTION 210 - DEMOLITION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

210.01
DESCRIPTION
The following is added after the first paragraph.
Demolition of existing structures shall also include the removal and proper disposal of
decks and associated appurtenances including, but not limited to, parapets, railing, poles
mounted on parapets, deck joints, shear connectors and spirals; superstructures; portions
of abutments, wingwalls, and retaining walls; portions of approach slabs; portions of
abandoned conduits, (including capping of remaining conduit after removal); and
existing catch, as prescribed herein below to the limits shown in the Plans, or as directed
by the Engineer. Removal limits of abandoned conduits will be as directed by the
Engineer.
The work shall also include the complete superstructure and partial substructure
demolition at the existing Bridge Structure Numbers 163.0N, 163.1N, 163.2S and 163.3S
within the limits and stages detailed on the Plans. This includes the stage removal of
existing deck slabs, bridge joints, approach slabs, scuppers, parapets, steel framing,
abutment backwalls, abutment stems, wingwalls, piers, foundations, footings and
existing piles within the limits of footing removals and as shown on the Plans. The work
P300.236
also includes retaining and cleaning existing reinforcements from existing abutments and
piers and incorporating these existing reinforcements in the new construction as shown
on the Plan or as directed by the Engineer.
This work shall also consist of the removal and disposal of all non-friable and potentially
friable asbestos-cement encountered during demolition, including, but not limited to,
asbestos-cement abutment sleeves, as shown in the Plans or the existing drawings and as
directed by the Engineer, as specified herein. Asbestos-cement removal shall conform to
Section 534.
The work shall include the design, furnishing of all labor, materials and equipment,
installation and removal of temporary overhang support system.
The work shall also include the installation of catches and shielding systems. The
shielding systems shall include vertical shielding systems to prevent debris from falling
onto existing roadways. Vertical shielding system shall be designed by the Contractor
using materials subject to the approval of the Engineer. All debris shall be swept up
promptly and legally disposed of off Authority Right-Of-Way.
The work shall also include disconnecting any line wire from the deck and providing
temporary protection of all under-deck conduits.
210.02
For Existing Structure Numbers 163.0N, 163.1N, 163.2S and 163.3S, all staged demolition
of existing concrete structures prior to the last stage and all existing concrete that are
indicated to be partially demolished shall be sawcut as shown on the Plans or directed by
the Engineer prior to the start of the concrete demolition work. The Contractor shall
exercise caution during the substructure sawcutting operations so that existing
reinforcing bars that are designated to remain and serve as dowels in the new concrete
are not cut or damaged. If existing steel that are meant to remain is damaged or cut by
the contractors operations, he shall be required to either drill and grout replacement bars
or provide couplers to splice the existing bars to the new bars, as determined by the
Engineer, at no additional cost to the Authority.
For all staged demolition of the superstructure prior to the last stage, only equipment
detailed in Subsections 417.03 and 417.04(A) shall be used at Existing Structure Numbers
163.0N, 163.1N, 163.2S and 163.3S.
The contractors working drawings shall also include details of the proposed equipment
that will be used for the demolition of all bridge superstructures and substructures. The
use of the proposed equipment will be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
After the removal of substructure concrete, the surfaces of the remaining concrete shall
be cleaned of all loose concrete, dust and other foreign materials and the exposed
reinforcement bars in contact with the concrete shall be cleaned of adhering particles of
concrete, rust and scale by sandblasting or using other suitable methods acceptable to the
P300.236
Engineer.
If existing piles obstruct the proposed pile driving or construction, the existing piles will
be removed or cut off as required to eliminate the obstruction. The Contractor may
choose means and methods to remove piles provided they do not disturb the adjacent
works and are acceptable to the Engineer. Jetting with air or water shall not be used to
remove piles. If the piles are removed, any voids remaining shall be backfilled
immediately with sand. The Contractor shall exercise care when removing or cutting
existing piles so as not to damage portions of the existing structures to remain, the newly
driven piles or new construction.
The contractor is hereby advised that the existing coating system on the previously
painted bridges contain red lead canvas and/or basic lead silico chromate paints as
components. Activities such as bolt removal, torch or mechanical cutting, welding of
structural steel and other activities related to the work described herein may cause lead
to be emitted. The Contractor shall include provisions in the Pollution Control Plan, Lead
Health and Safety Plan, and Emergency Management Plan as required to be submitted in
Subsection 411.04 of the Specifications to address other lead exposure activities as
described above. .
Use of demolition equipment that generates impulse or impact noise will not be
permitted for use during the overnight hours.
210.03
DISPOSAL OF DEBRIS.
The disposal of material and debris accumulated by demolition is regulated under the
Solid Waste Management Act (NJSA 13:1 E-1) and is governed by NJAC 7:26 et. seq. The
Contractor shall dispose of the material and debris according to the solid waste
management plan developed by the solid waste management district of origin.
All material and debris removed as part of the work for this project shall not be reused
and shall become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor must dispose of any
unwanted material and debris in a legal fashion and outside the Garden State Parkway
Right-of-Way.
210.04
MEASUREMENT.
This subsection is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:
Demolition of Existing Structures No. ____(Str. No. ____) will be measured for payment
on a lump sum basis.
Removal of existing steel H plumb and steel H battered piles and the sand backfill
required to backfill the voids will be measured by the linear foot of pile removed.
Removal of asbestos-cement will not be measured for payment.
Removal and handling of conduits of any type will not be measured separately for
P300.236
payment.
210.05
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
Demolition of Existing Structures No.__ (Description)
Pile Removal
PAY UNIT
Lump Sum
Linear Foot

The partial demolition of the existing Bridge Structure Numbers 163.0N, 163.1N, 163.2S
and 163.3S will be paid for under the pay item Demolition of Existing Structures
No.___ for each structure. At these structures, the pay item Demolition of Existing
Structures No.___ shall include the complete demolition within the limits shown on the
Plans, including sawcutting, the complete removal/demolition of the concrete and
structural steel superstructure, the partial removal/demolition of substructure concrete,
and the pile cut offs, as needed, for all construction stages as shown on the Plans
No separate payment will be made for the removal and disposal of existing catch, debris,
and demolition plan preparation for demolition. The costs thereof will be included in the
lump sum prices bid for the demolition pay items.
No separate payment will be made for the removal and disposal of existing materials
containing heavy metals. The costs thereof will be included in the lump sum prices bid
for the demolition pay items.
No separate payment will be made for the removal of asbestos-cement. The costs thereof
will be included in the lump sum prices bid for the demolition pay items.
No separate payment will be made for removal and handling of conduits of any type, but
the costs thereof will be included in the lump sum price bid for the pay item Demolition
of Existing Structures No. ____.
No separate payment will be made for the detailing, furnishing, and installing caps on
the ends of abandoned conduits to remain after removal.
No separate payment will be made for the cutting off of existing piles in accordance with
the Plans and these Specifications. The costs thereof will be included in the lump sum bid
for the pay item Demolition of Existing Structures No. _____.
Payment for the removal/pulling of existing pile, where directed by the Engineer will be
included in the pay item Pile Removal.
Payment for temporary catches and shielding associated with the demolition of the
existing structures, including vertical shielding, will be made under the pay item
Furnishing, Installation and Removal of Temporary Shielding
P300.236
Payment for temporary deck supports will be made in accordance with Subsection
434.05.
Payment for removal and disposal of guide rail shall be made under the pay item
Removal of Beam Guide Rail.
Payment for removal of vegetation to access the work site will be made in accordance
with Subsection 201.05.
The following sections area added:
SECTION 212 GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING

212.01
DESCRIPTION.
This work shall include furnishing labor, transportation, equipment, materials, and
incidentals necessary for installing and maintaining instrumentation required to observe
ground movements and pore pressure levels during embankment, placement, preload
and/or surcharge operations.
212.02
RESPONSIBILITIES.
The responsibilities of the Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
212.03
1.
Furnish components of instrumentation that are to be installed during

construction.
2.
Furnish portable readout units.
3.
Install and monitor all installed instrumentation. All initial readings shall be
taken jointly with the Engineer.
4.
Perform and report the results of pre-installation and post installation

measurements.
5.
Protect instruments from damage and maintain instruments installed, both by

Contractor and existing instruments installed by others. Repair or replace
damaged or inoperative instruments at no cost to the Authority.
6.
Maintain and calibrate probes and portable readout units for the Engineers
use.
7.
Provide access to the Engineer for data collection.
8.
Coordinate with the Engineer to verify consistency of collected data.
INSTRUMENTS.
P300.236
No instrumentation installation shall take place before review by the Engineer of
instrumentation submittals. The Contractor shall protect and maintain all instrumentation
throughout the Contract, or until directed otherwise by the Engineer.
212.04
1.
Settlement platforms are surface displacement reference platforms placed on the

prepared ground surface as shown on the Plans after grubbing and placement of
the sand blanket, common embankment, Embankment, Grade A, with or without
any high strength geotextile/geogrid (if shown on plans) and before placement
of the preload fill. A settlement platform consists of a square steel plate to which
risers are attached. The riser(s) will be extended as the embankment, preload,
and/or surcharge is placed to maintain the top of the settlement platform
between 2 and 5 ft. above the average surrounding ground. Settlement platforms
will be monitored by optical survey methods to determine vertical displacements
occurring during and after embankment, preload and surcharge fill placement.
2.
Inclinometers consist of an inclinometer casing installed and grouted within

vertical boreholes or horizontally in the in-situ soil materials. A probe inserted
within the casing is used to monitor horizontal or vertical soil displacements
occurring during construction. The inclinometer casings are extended as the fill
is placed to maintain the top of the inclinometer casing between 2 and 5 ft. above
the average surrounding ground..
3.
Vibrating wire piezometers consist of one or more vibrating wire pore pressure
transducers placed in a borehole at designated depths to monitor changes in pore
pressures within compressible soils during construction. A signal cable is
extended to a readout terminal beyond the limits of all fill placement to facilitate
readings.
4.
Control stakes consist of alignment and displacement reference stakes placed at

the toe of fills where shown on plans, before placement of the fill. A control
stake consists of a wood cross-marked with graduated vertical and lateral
reference scales. Control stakes are monitored by optical survey methods to
determine vertical and lateral displacements occurring during and after fill
placement.
5.
Open standpipe piezometers consist of PVC riser pipes with slotted bottom
sections embedded in a zone of granular (sand) filter medium. Open standpipe
piezometers are installed within a vertical borehole to measure groundwater
levels. The open standpipe piezometer riser pipe is extended as the fill is placed,
to maintain the top of the open standpipe piezometer casing between 2 and 5 ft.
above the average surrounding ground.
6.
Survey monitoring points shall be -inch diameter expansion anchors installed

in existing structures or objects and which are suitable for survey operation.
INSTRUMENT MONITORING.
Instrument monitoring is the reading and/or measuring of installed instruments at
defined time intervals; calculating elevations, changes from initial elevations, lateral
P300.236
displacements, vertical displacements, and changes in pore pressure ; and recording and
plotting all instrument readings. Survey control consists of precise field measurements as
specified herein, taken by qualified personnel using approved methods and equipment for
accurately determining elevations, coordinates, and distances essential for the prosecution
of this Section's work. The purpose of instrument monitoring is to accomplish some or all
of the following:
212.05
1.
To provide baseline data for the Engineer prior to the commencement of

Embankment construction,
2.
To provide reliable information for the Engineer to assess the fill performance
and embankment stability, ground movements, and pore pressures resulting
from Embankment construction .
3.
To permit timely implementation of proper remedial measures when and as

required to prevent slope stability failures and/or damage to existing structures,
roadways, equipment and utilities.
4.
To provide reliable information for the Engineer to determine the rate(s) of

settlement and pore pressure dissipation and evaluate the performance of the
Embankment construction.
5.
To permit the Engineer to evaluate the actual time period for which any
surcharge, as indicated on the Plans, is required to achieve the desired degree of
consolidation of the underlying compressible soil.
6.
To document ground movements and preload performance.
7.
To document the possible movement of existing abutment elements during pile

driving.
QUALITY ASSURANCE.
A. Reference Standards:
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
ASTM A36
Carbon Structural Steel.
ASTM A53
Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and
Seamless.
ASTM C109
Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars Using 50
millimeter Cube Specimens.
ASTM C827
Early Volume Change of Cementitious Mixtures.
ASTM D1557 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures
using 4.5 kg Rammer and 457 millimeter Drop.
ASTM D1556 Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone
Method.
ASTM D1586 Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils.
ASTM D1785 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and
120.
ASTM D2487 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil
P300.236
ASTM D6230
ASTM D6598
Classification System).
Monitoring Ground Movement using Probe-Type Inclinometers.
Installing and Operating Settlement Platforms for Monitoring
Vertical Deformations.
B. Control of Materials:
1.
The Engineer reserves the right to approve each of the materials to be used in
fulfilling the requirements of instrumentation work. Approval of the materials to
be used for instrumentation shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility to
provide instrumentation in accordance with these Specifications.
2.
The Engineer reserves the right to inspect, test and approve the workmanship of
the instrumentation equipment and materials.
3.
A final quality assurance inspection shall be made by the manufacturer before

shipment. During the inspection, a checklist shall be completed to indicate each
inspection and test detail. A completed copy of the checklist shall be supplied
with each instrument.
C. Field Monitoring:
1.
The Engineer reserves the right to approve, disapprove, modify or change the
method of installation and maintenance of monitoring devices. Approval of the
method of installation and maintenance of monitoring devices shall not relieve
the Contractor of the responsibility to install and maintain the instruments in
conformance with the Specifications.
2.
The Engineer shall be notified of monitoring devices that become damaged or

inoperable within 12 hours of the time the Contractor becomes aware of such
conditions.
3.
Installation and monitoring of all settlement monitoring devices will be under

the full time, on-site supervision of a geotechnical engineering consulting firm
which has previous experience in supervising installation and monitoring of
similar instrumentation devices. The firm and/or the individual who will
actually be performing the field supervision for both installation and monitoring
will be retained by Contractor. The instrumentation personnel shall include a
Supervising Engineer, who shall be a Professional Engineer registered in the
State of New Jersey, with at least four years of direct field experience in the
installation and monitoring of the types of instruments specified herein to
supervise and be responsible for instrumentation installation. Responsibilities
of the geotechnical engineering consulting firm shall include, but not be limited
to the following:
a. Prepare detailed step-by-step procedures and installation schedule for all
instruments specified herein.
b. Review and approve all data submittals.
c. Be on-site and supervise the installation of each geotechnical monitoring
instrument.
P300.236
d. Conduct the following tasks for each instrument specified herein: preinstallation acceptance tests, post-installation acceptance tests, field
calibration, initial reading and data collection, and data reduction,
processing, plotting, and reporting.
4.
The geotechnical engineering consulting firm shall assign a Supervising Engineer

who will be in full-time, responsible charge on-site during all instrument
installations, pre-installation acceptance tests, post-installation acceptance tests,
field calibrations, and initial readings The Supervising Engineer shall have at
least four years of direct field experience in the supervision of installation and
monitoring of the types of instrumentation specified herein, and they shall have
supervised instrumentation programs of similar magnitude in similar subsurface
conditions. Up to one junior geotechnical engineer with a minimum of 2 years of
instrumentation installation supervision and/or geotechnical boring inspection
shall be allowed to monitor a second instrumentation installation crew, provided
the geotechnical engineering firm's Supervising Engineer maintains sufficient
oversight of the second installation crew via proxy. The Supervising Engineer
shall be on-site to conduct the baseline readings and the first two readings of
each instrument following the start of fill placement and, following a training
period acceptable to the Engineer, the junior geotechnical engineer may continue
to obtain such readings. All data reduction, processing, plotting, and reporting
shall be performed by the Supervising Engineer.
5.
The person in responsible charge of the surveyors shall be a qualified land

surveyor registered in the State of New Jersey, with a minimum of four years of
experience in deformation measurements of the types and accuracies specified
herein. The field survey party chief shall have a minimum of one year of
experience in deformation survey measurements of the types and accuracies
specified herein.
6.
The driller responsible for drilling instrumentation boreholes shall be licensed in

the State of New Jersey, be on-site full-time during the drilling program, and
have at least four years of direct field experience in drilling boreholes for the
types of instruments specified herein.
7.
The Contractors instrumentation personnel and surveyors, including the

geotechnical instrumentation engineer, the superintendent, the driller, the field
survey party chief and all other field and office personnel shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer. Resumes for all such personnel associated with the
review, approval, calibration, installation, monitoring and/or remediation of any
geotechnical monitoring instrument shall be supplied prior to their start of work
on the project. No substitutions are allowed without prior notice and submission
and approval of that person's resume.
8.
All survey monitoring points shall be monitored by optical survey method to

determine vertical displacements, if any, occurring during construction.
D. Calibration:
P300.236
A factory calibration shall be conducted on all instruments at the manufacturer's
facility before shipment. Each factory calibration shall include a calibration curve
with data points clearly indicated, and a tabulation of the data. Calibration sheets for
each instrument shall be provided to the Engineer prior to installation. Each
instrument shall be marked with a unique identification number.
212.06
1.
Factory calibrations of vibrating wire piezometers shall be made against a

pressure gauge traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology.
The accuracy of the pressure gauge shall not be less than twice the specified
accuracy of the piezometers. Calibrations shall be made to full scale in two
complete cycles, recording the reading in 10 equal increments during two
loading and unloading cycles. The thermal factor of each piezometer shall be
determined in a precision test chamber, at 32, 50, 68, and 86 degrees F. The
calibration record shall include gauge factor, thermal factor, and zero reading
with corresponding temperature and barometric pressure.
2.
Factory calibrations of inclinometers shall include comprehensive calibrations of

the force balance accelerometers before assembly in the probe. A final calibration
shall include measurements made at 18 degree intervals from minus 22 degrees
to plus 86 degrees with respect to vertical, and a comprehensive repeatability
check over a smaller zone near vertical.
SUBMITTALS.
(A) No instrumentation shall be delivered or installed on the site before review and
approval by the Engineer of the materials, products and installation procedures. At
least 30 calendar days before proceeding with the work, the Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer for review the following:
1.
Schedule and Procedures: Proposed schedule and procedures for

instrumentation installation and performance of initial reading monitoring for
the instruments. Detailed step-by-step procedure for installation, together with a
sample installation record sheet. The procedures shall be bound and indexed.
The installation procedures shall include, but not be limited to:
a. Drill casing type and size.
b. Sample depths.
c. The method to be used for cleaning the inside of casing.
d.
e. Depth increments for backfilling boreholes with sand and bentonite
pellets.
f. Method for overcoming buoyancy of instrumentation components
during grouting.
g. Method for sealing of joints in pipes and inclinometer casing to prevent
ingress of grout.
h. Detailed step-by-step procedures for conducting all optical survey
measurements to obtain initial readings to the specified accuracys,
including types of surveying equipment, all as specified herein.
i. Method and equipment for mixing and placing the grout.
P300.236
2.
Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts, shop drawings, material

specifications, installation and maintenance instructions, and other data
pertinent to the work of this Section.
3.
Within two workdays of receipt of each instrument at the site, the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer, copy of factory calibration, manufacturer's test
equipment certification, and completed copy of quality assurance checklist.
4.
Grout Mix: Material specifications and mix design for grout required for
inclinometer, piezometer and/or settlement indicator installations, as indicated
on plans, along with verification from a certified testing laboratory that this mix
is in accordance with the requirements specified. The information shall include
specifications for proposed grout mixes, including commercial names,
proportions of admixtures and water, mixing sequence, mixing methods and
duration, pumping methods and tremie pipe type, size and quantity.
5.
Qualifications: Resumes for all supervisory personnel, technicians and drillers

performing the instrumentation work.
(B) Shop Drawings:

1.
Survey Control Layout: Show survey bench marks and baselines. Show
proposed location of benchmarks to permit surveying with sight distances less
than 200 feet.
2.
Instrumentation Layout and Installation Details: Within two days of installing

each instrument, the Contractor shall submit an installation record sheet,
including the appropriate items from the following list.
a. Project name.
b. Contract name and number.
c. Instrument type and number including readout unit.
d. Planned location in horizontal position and elevation.
e. Planned orientation.
f. Planned lengths and volumes of backfill.
g. Personnel responsible for installation.
h. Plant and equipment used including diameter and depth of any drill
casing or augers used.
i. Date and time of start and completion of installation.
j. Spaces on record sheet for necessary measurements or readings required
at hold-points during installation to ensure that all previous steps have
been followed correctly including instrument readings made during
installation.
k. A log of subsurface data indicating the elevations of strata changes
encountered in the borehole. Soil strata nomenclature shall conform to
the Burmister Classification System.
l. Type(s) and depth(s) of backfill used to fill instrumentation boreholes.
m. As-built location in horizontal position, adjacent ground elevation, top of
instrument elevation for settlement platform risers, middle of instrument
elevation for piezometers, and bottom of borehole elevation.
P300.236
n. As-built orientation.
o. As-built lengths and volumes of various backfill materials placed in the
instrumentation borehole.
p. Result of post-installation acceptance test.
q. Weather conditions at the time of installation.
r. Notes of importance on the installation including problems encountered,
delays, unusual features of the installation, and details of any events that
may have a bearing on instrument behavior.
212.07
JOB CONDITIONS.
A. Protection: Protect from damage due to construction operations, weather, traffic, and
vandalism, survey reference and control points, instruments and appurtenant
fixtures, instrument leads, connections, and other components of the instrumentation
systems. Replace any monitoring probes, cables, or readout units that may be
damaged or, in the opinion of the Engineer, are not functioning properly or
consistently.
B. Scheduling: Except where otherwise specified, maintain access to instruments.
Temporary stoppage or interruption of certain portions of the work may be required
to enable the geotechnical engineering consulting firm to monitor, take readings
and or remediate instrumentation. The geotechnical engineering consulting firm will
perform such monitoring and measurement in a manner not to delay the work
unnecessarily. The Contractor's schedule shall include time for such monitoring and
measuring, and shall allow for remediation/reinstallation of replacement
instruments in the event of damage or inoperability, due to any cause whatsoever.
C. The Contractor shall provide 7 feet by 7 feet minimum level area around the
instrument for personnel to operate from while monitoring instruments.
D. When in the Engineer's judgment, the instrumentation data indicate potentially
damaging ground displacements the Contractor shall modify the construction rate
and sequence as directed by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Authority, and
take other action as approved by the Engineer to reduce further excess ground
displacements to an amount acceptable to the Engineer.
212.08
MATERIALS.
General
A. The Contractor shall provide products, materials, and equipment in conformance
with the Plans and Specifications so as to fulfill the requirements of this Section.
B. Whenever any product is specified by brand name and model number, such
specifications shall be deemed to be used for the purpose of establishing a standard
of quality and facilitating the description of the product desired. The term or
approved equal shall be understood to indicate that the approved equal product
is the same or better than the product named in the Specifications in function,
performance, reliability, durability, quality, accuracy, and general configuration.
This procedure is not to be construed as eliminating from use other suitable products
P300.236
of equal quality by other manufacturers. In such cases, the Contractor may submit
complete comparative data to the Engineer for consideration of another product.
Substitute products shall not be used in the work unless accepted in writing by the
Engineer. The Engineer will be the sole judge of the suitability and equivalency of
the proposed substitute product.
C. Any request from the Contractor for consideration of a substitution shall clearly state
the nature and amount of any deviation(s) from the product specified.
D. For each instrument type, provide an instruction manual which shall include the
following:
1.
A description of the purpose of the instrument.
2.
Theory of operation.
3.
Step-by-step procedures for:

a. Pre-installation acceptance test when instruments are received on site, to
ensure the instruments are functioning correctly before installation.
b. Calibration of readout units.
A list of calibration equipment required, and recommended frequency of
calibration, for inclinometers only .
4.
5.
Step-by-step instrument installation procedure including materials, tools, spare

parts and any borehole requirements, and post-installation acceptance tests.
6.
Maintenance procedures.
7.
Step-by-step data collection procedures.
8.
Data reduction, processing, and plotting procedures.
E. All graduations shall be in English Units

1.
Settlement Platforms
a. The telltale pipe shall be standard weight (Schedule 40) carbon steel
meeting ASTM A53, Grade B standards. The protective floating casting
shall be Schedule 80 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) meeting ASTM D1785
standards.
b. Base plate shall be steel conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 36.
c. Sand base and sand fill shall be Embankment, Grade A conforming to
Section 901 of Standard Specifications.
2.
Inclinometers
a. Provide inclinometer casing, probe, control cable, readout unit, and
accessories.
b. Inclinometer Casing: ABS plastic in 10 feet lengths and with adequate
wall thickness to withstand external ground pressures but with
flexibility enough to reflect horizontal ground movement. The casings
P300.236
shall have four broached internal keyways equally spaced 90 degrees
apart, with twist-tolerance better than one degree per 10 feet of length,
and shall be compatible with other components of the inclinometer.
c. Bottom Caps: ABS semi-rigid plastic to form a watertight seal.
d. Top Caps: ABS semi-rigid plastic to prevent dirt from entering the
casing.
e. Special Sealing Grout: Portland cement, bentonite, and water as specified
in Subsection 6 below.
f. Inclinometer Probe: Probe shall be suited for vertical inclinometers and
or horizontal inclinometers as required. Probe shall be supplied in a
carrying case. Probe shall be biaxial consisting of two force balance
accelerometers mounted at 90 degrees, with a 20 inches wheelbase.
g. Control Cable: The control cable shall be compatible with sensor and
readout unit, 150 feet long (or less as approved by Engineer), sheathed
with neoprene or polyurethane, with vulcanized rubber markers, and an
internal wire rope.
h. Inclinometer Readout Unit: Readout unit shall be capable of stabilizing
to within plus or minus one unit of display within eight seconds between
recordings 2 feet apart. The readout unit shall be compatible with
inclinometer probe.
i. Pulley Assembly: The pulley assembly shall be directly mountable to the
inclinometer casing and shall have a control cable hold.
j. Pull Cable: A stainless steel pull cable shall be installed at each
horizontal inclinometer to pull the probe to the far end of the casing. The
pull cable shall be longer than the casing to allow easy handling and the
length shall be doubled when a dead-end pulley is used. The pull cable
shall be stored inside the casing after each survey.
k. Dead-End Pulley: When the far end of the casing is closed in a horizontal
inclinometer, a dead-end pulley and cable return pile shall be installed to
operate the pull cable. Dead-end pulley is optional when both ends are
open.
l. Software: Provide copy of title page of inclinometer software.
3.
Vibrating Wire Piezometers

a. Vibrating Wire Pressure Transducer: Vibrating wire piezometers shall
be new and obtained from one of the following manufacturers, or an
approved equal:
Durham Geo Slope Indicator

2175 West Park Court
Stone Mountain, GA 30087
Tel: 770-465-7557
Fax: 770-465-7447
b.
Geokon, Inc.
48 Spencer Street
Lebanon, NH 03766
Tel: 603-448-1562
Fax: 603-448-3216
Geonor, Inc.
P.O. Box 903
109 Greenwood Circle
Milford, PA 18337
Tel: 570-296-4884
Fax: 570-296-4886
Vibrating wire piezometers shall have a pressure range of 50 psi, an

over-range rating of twice the rated pressure, plus or minus 0.2 percent
P300.236
full scale accuracy, 0.025 percent full scale resolution, and be fitted with a
low air entry filter.
c. Electrical Cable and Splice Kit: Electrical cable for individual
piezometers. Each cable shall be attached to the appropriate piezometer
and permanently marked with the number of the instrument to which it
is attached. Cable shall be attached to the piezometer through an
integral bulk head seal consisting of an interior waterstop seal and a
cable entry seal. Seals shall be either o-rings or hermetic seals. The seals
shall have been tested and certified for water-tightness over the specified
pressure range of the piezometers.
d. Protective conduit: Conduit for protection of buried electrical cables shall
be 4 inches diameter corrugated polyethylene pipe, Model ADS N-12, as
manufactured by Advance Drainage Systems, Inc., or approved equal
e. Readout unit: Vibrating wire readout unit shall be compatible with
supplied piezometers.
f. Special Sealing Grout: Portland cement, bentonite, and water as specified
in Subsection 6 below.
g. Readout Station: Each readout station shall consist of a lockable readout
terminal box raised above ground on a pedestal, pole or other suitable
rigid support. The readout terminal box shall be aluminum or other
approved non-corroding material and shall contain a switch type panel
for selecting the output of up to twelve (12) vibrating wire piezometers
plus one dummy piezometer. A surge protector board shall be
provided for each vibrating wire piezometer and shall be installed in the
terminal box. Instrument identification labels shall be placed on the
panel at locations such that when the switch is pointing to the label, it
corresponds directly to the piezometer being read. Terminal boxes shall
have sufficient opening at the bottom to allow for entry of all instrument
cables and ground wire. A ground cable shall be attached to the top of a
10 feet long 0.55 inch diameter copper clad ground installation rod
installed near the base support for the terminal box.
h. Terminal Box: The readout terminal box shall be compatible to the
accepted system.
i. Surge protector: The surge protector board shall be adequately sized for
the accepted system.
j. Filter Sand: Filter sand shall be Standard Ottawa sand, as defined by
ASTM D 1556.
k. Bentonite Pellet Seal: Pelletized bentonite shall have an approved watersoluble coating for forming a seal above the piezometer filter sand and
canvas bag. Size pellets to permit placing without difficulty or bridging
at the desired elevation(s) before their hydration. The Contractor shall
demonstrate that the bentonite pellets are compatible with the insitu
groundwater for hydrating, and shall be subject to approval by the
Engineer.
4.
Open standpipe piezometers

a. Riser Pipe: Riser pipe shall consist of 2.0 inch inside diameter Schedule
40 rigid PVC pipe conforming to ASTM D 1785. Riser pipe shall be
clean, straight, and free of obstructions. Pipe sections shall be joined by
P300.236
watertight, flush threaded couplings to ensure a straight, water tight and
unobstructed inside diameter.
b. Slotted PVC Well Screen Pipe: Slotted PVC well screens shall consist of 2
inch inside diameter Schedule 40 PVC pipe conforming to ASTM D 1785
fitted with machine cut slot openings of 0.01 inch. The slots shall be
arranged in three rows and the spacing between the individual slots
measured along the pipe shall not exceed 6 millimeter. The screen shall
be 5 feet long and shall be capped at the bottom. The well screen shall be
joined to the riser pipe with watertight, flush threaded couplings.
Alternate screens shall be allowed provided they have a minimum 2
inch inside diameter.
c. Filter Sand: Filter sand shall be clean, unweathered, durable, natural
(non-crushed), uniform sand. The sand shall be washed and graded
such that 90 percent or more will be retained by the slotted well screen.
Filter sand that is contaminated with soil, organic debris, or other
deleterious materials shall not be used. The Contractor shall provide the
Engineer with a grain size analysis from the manufacturer or other
testing laboratory of the proposed material for approval before use.
d. Bentonite Pellet Seal: Use pelletized bentonite with an approved water
soluble coating for forming a seal above the well screen. Size pellets to
permit placing without difficulty at the required elevation before
hydration.
e. Special Grout: Portland cement, bentonite, and water as specified in
Subsection 6 below.
f. Water Level Meter: Water level meter shall be model No. 101 as
manufactured by Solinst Canada Ltd., or approved equal.
g. Protective standpipe shall be 4 or 6 inch diameter (as required) Schedule
40 steel pipe. The exposed casing shall be painted fluorescent orange.
Locking covers shall be provided. All locks shall be keyed alike.
5.
Terminal Boxes and Covers

a. For all instruments except vibrating wire piezometers and inclinometers,
surface protection shall consist of a Tyler Pipe Model 26T-6855 LF toponly roadway box with a plain 5.3 lock lid, or a Bresnahan Foundry
Model 00068 roadway box with matching lock-lid cover, or approved
equal. Roadway boxes for inclinometers shall either have a diameter
adequate to allow attachment of cable support assembly or shall allow
for attachment of an inclinometer casing extension while readings are
being taken.
6.
Cementitious Materials
a. Special Grout Mix: The special grout required for installation of
instrumentation shall be a cement-bentonite material that is non-shrink
and non-metallic. The special grout shall not contain calcium chloride or
other salts, or aluminum or other harmful metals. When tested in
accordance with ASTM C827, the material shall show no shrinkage in the
plastic state. For soft soils (SPT N4), when tested in accordance with
ASTM C109, the special grout mix shall have a 7 day strength of no less
than 2 psi and a 28 day strength of approx. 4 psi as measured on 2 inches
P300.236
b.
c.
7.
212.09
cubes. For harder soils (SPT N>4) and/or rock, the special grout mix
shall have a 7 day strength of no less than 70 psi and a 28 day strength of
approx. 100 psi.
Water: Water shall conform to ACI 301, Chapter 2, Paragraph 2.3.
Lean Concrete: The concrete required for installation of protective
terminal boxes shall have a minimum compressive strength of 500 psi.
Control Stakes
a. The vertical post of the control stake shall be sound untreated Number 2
southern pine, and shall be painted at the bottom. The horizontal and
vertical cross members shall be sound untreated Number 2 southern
pine, dressed at least on one face. The dressed face shall be painted
white. The face painted white shall also have black markings as shown
on the Plans. The members shall be spiked together as shown on the
Plans.
Embankment, Grade A placement, vertical wick drain installation, embankment fill
placement, retaining wall construction, and any other modification to the existing ground
shall not take place until geotechnical instrumentation installation has been completed
and approved by the Engineer and baseline readings taken for each instrument.
1.
Pre-Installation Acceptance Tests

a. When instruments are received at the site, the Contractors instrumentation
personnel and geotechnical engineering consulting firm shall perform preinstallation acceptance tests to ensure that the instruments and readout units
are functioning correctly before installation. Pre-installation acceptance tests
shall include relevant items from the following list.
1. Check that the model, dimensions, materials, etc. are correct.
2. Check that quantities received correspond to quantities ordered.
3. Check all components for signs of damage in transit.
4. Examine factory calibration curve and tabulated data to verify
conformance with this Section and completeness.
5. Examine manufacturers final quality assurance inspection checklist
to verify completeness.
6. Check cable length.
7. Check that tag numbers match on instrument/cable sets
8. At point of connection to instrument, bend cable back and forth
while reading the instrument to verify connection integrity.
9. Perform resistance and insulation testing in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations using a gauge insulation or circuit
tester that applies no more than two volts.
10. Verify that all components fit together in the correct configuration.
b. During pre-installation acceptance testing of each instrument, the
Contractors instrumentation personnel shall complete a pre-installation
acceptance test record form.
P300.236
c.
2.
Any instrument that fails the specified pre-installation acceptance test shall be
repaired such that it passes a subsequent pre-installation acceptance test, or it
shall be replaced by a new instrument at no additional cost to the Authority.
General
a. All instrumentation shall be furnished and installed at the locations and in
accordance with the details shown on the Plans, and in accordance with the
requirements of these Specifications, or as directed by the Engineer.
b. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 10 working days prior to
installing each instrument.
c. Instrumentation shall include maintaining instrumentation throughout the
Contract, or until directed by the Engineer that readings may cease. This shall
include, but shall not be limited to the raising and lowering of settlement
platform risers, inclinometers and open standpipe piezometer risers, as
required, to enable access to and measurement of monitoring instruments
from the top of the fill. Locations where instrumentation protrudes through
the fill or extends out beyond the toe of the fill shall be barricaded and clearly
flagged with brightly colored flagging. Barricading shall consist of nominal 2
in. x 4 in. lumber risers and horizontals, extending a minimum of 4 feet above
ground, or other methods approved by the Engineer. The barricades shall be
placed at least 2 feet in all directions from monitoring devices. Each barricade
shall be flagged so it's highly visible to equipment operators and others. The
Contractor shall maintain barricades and flagging throughout the period of
the Contract, or until the Engineer determines the instrumentation may be
abandoned and removed.
d. Installation procedures for instruments in boreholes shall be such that all
steps in the procedure can be verified and recorded during installation and
reviewed by the Engineer. Volumes of each increment of backfilling with
sand and bentonite shall be small enough such that no bridging occurs, and
the depth to the top of each increment shall be checked and recorded after
placement.
e. Specifications and Plans refer to depth of boreholes for inclinometers.
Minimum depths are specified and estimated bottom elevations are shown on
the Plans. Boreholes shall be drilled to the specified minimum depths into
dense sand or bedrock, or to the specified bottom elevations, whichever are
deeper.
f. Whenever withdrawing drill casing during instrument installation in a
borehole, care should be taken to minimize the length of unsupported
borehole and the rate of drill casing withdrawal. Collapse of the borehole
shall not be allowed to occur. Backfill material shall not be allowed to build
up inside the drill casing, such that the instrument is lifted as the casing is
withdrawn. The drill casing shall be withdrawn without rotation.
g. Specimens of grout shall be obtained from each batch of grout mix prepared
for instrument installation for testing by a certified laboratory to verify that
the 28 day compressive strength of the batch is as specified. Specimens shall
either be 2 inches cubes or cylindrical specimens with a diameter of 3 inches
and a length of 6 inches, or as approved by the Engineer. One specimen shall
be taken immediately before initial placement of each batch of grout in the
ground (the "initial" specimen) and another specimen (the "final" specimen)
P300.236
shall be recovered after at least two-thirds of the batch has been placed or at
the completion of grouting if less than two-thirds of the batch has been used.
The Engineer may order additional ("intermediate") specimens be prepared
following delays or stoppage of the work, or at other times as deemed
necessary. Each specimen shall be labeled with the time and date at which it
was prepared and whether it is an initial, final, or intermediate specimen.
h. An instrument that fails the specified post-installation acceptance test shall be
replaced by an identical instrument at no additional cost to the Authority.
i. Initial readings shall be taken daily at approximately the same time for 3
successive days following installation to establish baseline readings.
j. All readings of geotechnical instrumentation monitoring devises shall be
transmitted to the Engineer by noon of the following day for each reading to
allow for review on a daily basis.
k. Damaged instrumentation that has not already been abandoned and is still
needed shall be repaired or replaced with identical instrumentation, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and at no expense to the Authority. All
earthwork operations within a specified distance shall cease until the
damaged instrumentation is repaired or replaced. The Engineer shall make
the sole determination as to the specified distance to which earthwork will
cease. The repair or replacement shall occur within one week of notification
of damage by the Engineer, unless otherwise specified.
3.
Settlement Platforms
a. Settlement platforms shall be fabricated and installed as shown on the Plans
and Details. Settlement platforms shall consist of a square plate installed on a
sand base on the original ground surface with a vertical pipe marked to
indicate distances above the plate, extending up through the embankment.
b. Settlement platforms shall be placed on a sand base. After filling in any
depressions and grading the platform subgrade, . The sand base shall be
tamped using a vibratory smooth-plate tamper to provide a firm, unyielding
and level bearing surface for the settlement platform. The compacted surface
shall not be more than 1/8 inch per foot from level in all directions. For
settlement platforms placed on or near original ground, all vegetation shall be
stripped and a minimum of 6 in. of Embankment, Grade A shall be
constructed to provide a level base for the settlement platform. For
settlement platforms placed atop a sand blanket, install the settlement
platform after installing the vertical wick drains by leveling the sand blanket.
The vertical pipes shall have a maximum length of 4 feet for each section.
Centralizers shall be provided between the riser pipe and casing pipes at
maximum intervals of 4 feet to ensure verticality. A container, as shown on
the plans, shall be placed around the initial length of casing pipe to the edges
of the platform. This container shall be backfilled with tamped clean sand or
gravel to support the pipe in a vertical position during fill placement until the
fill is carried above the platform as shown on the plans.
c. The fill surrounding the settlement platform riser shall be placed in a
controlled manner so as to prevent damaging or moving the riser pipe. The
outer protective casing shall not be more than 1/8 inch per foot from vertical
in all directions at all times while placing the surrounding fill. The verticality
P300.236
of the outer casing shall be checked periodically while placing the fill to
assure this result.
d. As the height of fill above the settlement platform changes, the casing and
riser shall be increased or decreased in maximum 4 feet increments to
maintain the top of the pipe and casing above the embankment. As each
additional length of pipe is added or removed, the pipe cap on the casing
shall be immediately transferred to the top section on the settlement platform
to prevent fill material from entering the casing.
e. If rock is used as embankment material, all rock backfill shall be kept at least
5 feet away from the settlement platform, with sufficient soil backfill placed
evenly around the settlement platform in advance of placing rock backfill, to
prevent disturbance or damage to the platform.
f. Each settlement platform shall be marked with barricades as described above
under General. Additionally, the casing pipe shall be painted fluorescent
orange or yellow. The Contractor shall maintain the paint during the
Contract.
g. The Contractor and/or the Engineer shall jointly take the initial settlement
platform readings immediately after the settlement platform is installed, and
before any fill is placed. The Contractor will survey the position and
elevation of the settlement platform risers at least twice per week until one
month after completion of placement of the embankment fill or surcharge,
whichever is later, and then at least once every week until the surcharge is
removed.
h. The settlement platform risers shall at no time rise above 4 feet over the
surrounding ground surface elevation. Sections shall be added or removed as
necessary during filling or removal of fill to maintain the tops of the pipes at
least 1 foot above the surface of the fill.
i. The settlement platform risers shall be surveyed by the Contractor
immediately before and after additional extensions are added or removed.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least two working days before
extension or removal of the settlement platform risers.
j. Upon completion of final readings, and once the Engineer has determined a
settlement platform may be abandoned, the platform shall be cut off at an
elevation determined by the Engineer and disposed of, and the remaining
settlement platform shall be left in place.
4.
Inclinometers
a. Install inclinometer casing as shown on the Plans, as approved by the
Engineer, and according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
Inclinometer(s) shall be installed within a cased borehole having a minimum
diameter of 6 in. Inclinometers shall be installed before any earthwork
begins. The Engineer reserves the right to modify the locations, number, and
depth of the instrument(s) based on the materials encountered in the
boreholes during installation. The bottom 10 feet of the inclinometer shall be
installed within a stratum that will provide fixity, such as dense sand.
b. Three split spoon samples shall be taken of the material assumed to provide
base fixity, one at the bottom of the borehole, others at 5 feet and 10 feet above
the bottom of the borehole, and submitted to the Engineer before installation
of the instrument.
P300.236
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
Place protective cap on the bottom of the vertical inclinometer casing and seal
with ABS solvent cement to provide a waterproof seal.
Install vertical inclinometer casing to the depths specified, or as directed by
the Engineer, in a minimum 6 inch diameter borehole. The boring shall be
advanced and cleaned by rotary wash boring methods. Stabilize the borehole
with temporary drilling casing as the borehole is advanced. The inclinometer
casing shall be installed within one degree of proposed orientation for the
entire length. After installation, the casing groove spiral shall not exceed one
degree per 10 feet of length and the orientation of the grooves at the top of the
casing shall be within ten degrees of the planned orientation.
Assemble additional sections of inclinometer casing using appropriate
couplings, and lower them into the hole. Fully extend telescoping casing
sections and ensure that seals are watertight.
Add clean water to inside of inclinometer casing to facilitate lowering
inclinometer through water or drilling mud in the borehole and minimize
floatation of casing
Position vertical inclinometer casing so that the orthogonal grooves are
parallel and perpendicular to the centerline of the embankment, or as directed
by the Engineer. Position the horizontal inclinometer casing with one pair of
grooves oriented vertically. If the grooves are not aligned correctly, remove
and reinstall the casing to re-align. Do not rotate the casing to re-align, as this
may result in spiraling of the casing.
Grout annulus between inclinometer casing and borehole with special grout
mix proportioned to match the strength of the formation, and as approved by
the Engineer. Place grout with a detachable, flexible tremie pipe or grout pipe
attached to the bottom of the inclinometer casing. Ensure an intimate
soil/grout contact. Recover grout specimens for testing, as required, from the
return flow of clean grout with proper consistency.
Immediately after grouting, jet and flush inclinometer casing with clean
water.
Install horizontal inclinometer casing to the depths specified or as directed by
the Engineer, on a minimum 18 inches wide and 6 inches thick layer of
Embankment, Grade A material.
For horizontal inclinometer installation, install dead-end pulley and cable
return pipe, if required, at the "inaccessible" end of the inclinometer pipe.
Place, without solvent cement, protective cap on the "accessible" end of the
horizontal inclinometer casing.
Casing groove orientation shall be maintained throughout installation.
After completion of installation, but before the grout, if used, has set, a postinstallation acceptance (probe passage) test shall be performed to verify there
is no grout in the inclinometer casing, that groove orientation is correct, and
that the inclinometer probe tracks correctly in all four orientations. After the
grout has set, a check shall again be made to verify that the inclinometer
probe tracks correctly in all four orientations.
Install protective terminal box with locking cover over the top or "accessible"
end of the inclinometer casing. Lock the cover.
Each inclinometer installation shall be marked with barricades as described
above under General.
The Contractor's geotechnical engineering consultant and/or the Engineer
shall jointly take the initial inclinometer readings immediately after the
inclinometer is installed, and before any fill is placed. The Contractors
P300.236
r.
s.
5.
geotechnical engineering consultant will take readings at least once a week

thereafter for the duration of the Contract.
The Contractor is responsible for protecting and maintaining the
inclinometers in working order during the period of this Contract. This
includes adding or removing inclinometer casing sections, as necessary, to
maintain the top of the inclinometer casing between 1 ft and 5 feet above the
surface of the surrounding ground.
Upon completion of final readings, and once the Engineer has determined an
inclinometer may be abandoned, the inclinometer casing shall be filled with
special sealing grout, installed from the bottom up using a tremie pipe. The
casing shall then be cut off at an elevation or location determined by the
Engineer and disposed of, and the remaining inclinometer shall be left in
place.
Vibrating Wire Piezometers

a. The Contractor shall furnish and install vibrating wire piezometers as
specified herein and as shown on the Plans. The piezometers shall be
installed at the locations and sensor elevations indicated on the Plans. The
piezometers shall be installed, and piezometer readings shall stabilize, before
any earthwork commences. The Engineer reserves the right to modify the
locations and sensor elevations based on the materials encountered in the
boreholes during installation. The piezometer sensor shall be located within
the compressible stratum, as determined by the Engineer.
b. The piezometer shall be installed within a cased borehole having a minimum
diameter of 4 in., or as recommended by the manufacturer, whichever is
greater. The borehole shall be advanced using rotary drilling methods with
temporary casing and using water as the drilling fluid. The use of drilling
mud will not be permitted. The casing shall be installed to a depth of 5 feet
above the sensor elevation shown on the Plans, or as directed by the Engineer.
The casing shall be advanced 6 feet by driving while kept full of water.
c. Continuous split spoon samples shall then be obtained for the final 6 feet (to
the bottom of the casing). Each soil sample shall be field identified according
to D.M. Burmister, and representative samples stored and labeled in
minimum 8 ounce glass jars and submitted to the Engineer or the Contractor's
geotechnical engineering consulting firm before installation of the instrument
to confirm that the sensor will be installed within the compressible soil
stratum. The soil within the casing shall then be washed out using clean
water and a side discharge bit. Drilling below the casing shall not be allowed.
d. Before placing the piezometers in the hole, a 1 foot layer of filter sand shall be
placed in the bottom of the hole, the casing raised 1 foot, and additional filter
sand added to maintain the 1 foot thickness. Provide a measuring device
approved by the Engineer to check that the required filter sand level is
achieved.
e. Take zero pressure transducer and temperature sensor readings in a
controlled temperature environment prior to taking instrument into the field.
Once in field, allow calibration instrument to thermally stabilize for at least 10
minutes prior to taking reading. Take barometric pressure reading and
compare to reading of piezometer when held in air. Record all readings.
f. Piezometers shall be saturated before placement in the hole and saturation
shall be maintained throughout installation.
P300.236
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
Lower the piezometer sensor and cable assembly to top of filter sand in the
borehole. Alternatively, the piezometer may be placed in a cloth bag then the
cloth bag filled with sand filter material and tied. The piezometer in cloth bag
is then lowered into the borehole. As the piezometer is lowered into the hole,
readings shall be taken to confirm the equipment accuracy. After insertion of
the piezometer on top of the sand layer, check to ensure that the piezometer
reading agrees with the water head. Record the elevation of the diaphragm.
Fill the borehole with filter sand to 1 foot above the top of the sensor.
Measure the depth to the top of the sand in the borehole for verification. The
casing shall then be raised to a level of 1 foot above the final elevation of the
top of the piezometer sensor. Refill the annulus between the piezometer
assembly and the wall of the hole with filter sand to maintain a height of 1
foot above the top of the piezometer sensor.
Place coated bentonite pellets in the hole and tamp in place with the
cylindrical sounding hammer to produce a bentonite seal a minimum of 3 feet
thick above the top of the filter sand. The pellets shall be placed in layers,
taking care not to form a plug within the casing bottom. The length of the
seal shall be checked with a cylindrical sounding hammer.
Partially withdraw the casing in increments after placing each layer of coated
bentonite pellets to avoid lifting the bentonite seal.
Fill the remainder of the hole with special grout from the bottom up.
Remove remainder of casing, keeping the grout level within 5 feet of the
ground surface at all times.
No vertical movement of the piezometer is allowed as the casing is
withdrawn. A lockable, steel protective standpipe shall be installed upon
completion of piezometer installation.
Record the volume of grout and collect samples of grout for testing, as
specified.
Take initial piezometer readings following installation.
Take and record subsequent piezometer readings following installation until
readings stabilize.
Cables from the piezometers shall be routed to the toe of the embankment or
outside the limits of retained fill, or as directed by the Engineer. The cables
shall be protected from damage by placing in conduit installed in trenches.
The trench shall be at least 20 inches in width and shall be excavated to a
minimum depth of 20 inches. Upon completion of the trench, the conduit
shall be placed on the bottom of the trench, taking care to remove any sharp
objects or stones larger than 4 inches. The trench shall not be backfilled until
the cable has been installed in the conduit and the Engineer has verified that
the instrument is functioning properly.
The cable shall be installed in the conduits leaving at least 16 feet of slack
within the conduit to prevent the cable from tensioning as a result of
settlement
After the cable has been installed in the conduit, and the Contractor's
geotechnical consulting engineer and the Engineer have verified that the
instrument is functioning properly, the trench shall be backfilled using the
excavated material.
A readout station consisting of a readout terminal box supported a minimum
of 3 feet above grade, shall be provided at the location of each vibrating wire
piezometer array, or group of nearby arrays. The station shall be located so
P300.236
u.
v.
w.
x.
t.
u.
v.
y.
6.
as not to interfere with construction activities and shall be barricaded as

described above under General.
The support for the readout terminal box shall be rigid. Both the exterior of
the terminal box and the support shall he painted fluorescent orange or
yellow.
The ends of the piezometer cables shall be routed into the readout terminal
box and attached as per the manufacturer's recommendations. Label all cables
of vibrating wire piezometers. Instrument designation number shall appear
on each instrument sensor and at the manual readout terminal to which each
cable is connected.
Grounding shall be provided by installing a grounding rod into the ground
next to the readout station, and connecting to the rod with a grounding wire.
After completion of installation, a post-installation acceptance test shall be
performed to verify that all piezometers function correctly.
Each inclinometer installation shall be marked with barricades as described
above under General.
The Contractor's geotechnical engineering consultant and/or the Engineer
shall jointly take the initial piezometer readings immediately after the
piezometer is installed, and before any fill is placed. The Contractors
geotechnical engineering consultant will then take the remainder of the
baseline readings and additional readings at least once a week thereafter for
the duration of the Contract.
The Contractor is responsible for protecting and maintaining the
piezometer(s) in working order during the period of this Contract.
Upon completion of final readings, and once the Engineer has determined a
vibrating wire piezometer may be abandoned, the cable shall be cut off at an
elevation or location determined by the Engineer and disposed of, and the
remaining piezometer shall be left in place.
Control Stakes
a. Control stakes shall be furnished and installed as specified herein and as
shown on the Plans. Control stakes shall be installed before placement of the
fill begins. Each settlement platform shall be marked with barricades as
described above under General, except that greater offset may be required to
maintain clear line-of-sight to the control stake.
b. The Contractor shall maintain and keep in good order control stakes and shall
take whatever precautions are necessary to prevent any alterations,
movement, or disturbance of them. Control stakes shall be reset or replaced
by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense when and as directed by the
Engineer. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, damage has been done to any
control stake, the Contractor shall stop work at and near its location until the
stake is reset or replaced, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Toe stakes shall
be resurveyed upon reinstallation at no expense to the Authority.
c. Each line of stakes shall be installed along a survey line established by at least
two fixed reference points. The exact location for each line of control stakes
will be determined jointly by the Engineer and the Contractor in order to use
the most convenient reference points while providing the required project
control. Reference points shall be located at least 300 feet beyond the work
limits so they are not affected by embankment construction. Control stakes
shall be installed such that the center of each stake is not more than 0.1 inches
on either side of the line established by the two reference points. The
P300.236
Contractor shall notify the Engineer when each line has been installed. The
Contractor and/or the Engineer shall then take the initial readings along each
line of control stakes. The Engineer will review the alignment before
approval and acceptance of the control stake installation.
d. The Contractor will survey the position and elevation of the control stakes at
least twice per week until one month after completion of placement of any
embankment fill, surcharge and/or preload, and then once every week until
any surcharge is removed. Any and all movement indicated by the control
stakes shall be assumed to have been caused only by movement in the ground
around the control stake, and not due to any other source or cause, including,
but not limited to, impact by any object, vehicle or person, ground vibrations
from pile installation or any other source, and vandalism.
e. The Engineer shall make the sole determination as to when excessive ground
movement is indicated by the control stakes. When so determined, all
earthwork shall cease within a specified distance of the indicating control
stake(s). The Engineer shall make the sole determination as to the specified
distance to which earthwork will cease, and will determine when and how
earthwork operations should resume to minimize future movement.
7.
Open standpipe piezometers

a. Open standpipe piezometers shall be installed from existing ground to the
elevations shown on the plans, with such elevations indicating the middle of
the slotted/screen length. Open standpipe piezometers shall be installed in a
drill hole using water as a drilling fluid and using temporary casing to
maintain the hole. The minimum diameter of the borehole shall be 6 in. The
Contractor's geotechnical consulting engineer shall keep a log of soils
encountered during drilling and submit it to the Engineer as part of the
piezometer installation record.
b. Full length steel casing shall be used to maintain boreholes for piezometer
installation. Casing may be advanced by any means to an elevation 5 feet
above the piezometer elevation. Any drilling mud used shall then be
removed from the casing and the casing shall be advanced 6 feet by driving
while kept full of water. Continuous split spoon samples shall then be
obtained for the final 6 feet. Each soil sample shall be field identified
according to D.M. Burmister, and representative sample(s) stored and
labeled in minimum 8 ounce glass jars.
c. The soil within the casing shall then be washed out using water and a side
discharge bit. Drilling below the casing shall not be allowed. Sand filter
material shall then be poured into the casing to fill the bottom 1 foot below
the piezometer.
d. The piezometer shall be fitted with centralizers located as follows: one at the
bottom of the piezometer, the second no more than 2 ft. above the slotted
length, then as needed at maximum 20 foot intervals to the ground surface.
The fully assembled piezometer shall then be lowered into the open hole.
e. Fill the annulus between the well assembly and the wall of the hole with filter
sand to 2 feet above the top of the well screen. Using the cylindrical sounding
hammer, check that the required level of filter sand to be placed in the hole
has been achieved. The temporary casing shall be carefully withdrawn to the
top of the filter sand as the filter sand is being placed to prevent caving of the
borehole around the filter sand or riser pipe.
f. The Contractor shall then grout the rest of the hole from the bottom up.
P300.236
g.
The casing shall then be removed, keeping the grout level within 5 feet of the
ground surface at all times. No vertical movement of the piezometer is
allowed as the casing is withdrawn. A lockable, steel protective standpipe
shall be installed upon completion of piezometer installation.
h. When installation is completed, develop the well by baling or pumping out
the riser pipe until the water runs clear.
i. Survey the open standpipe piezometer to establish its horizontal location, top
of protective steel collar elevation, top of PVC riser pipe elevation, and
surrounding ground elevation. Prepare and submit a well installation log for
the completed open standpipe piezometer.
j. Each open standpipe piezometer shall be marked with barricades as
described above under General. Additionally, the steel standpipe shall be
painted fluorescent orange or yellow. The Contractor shall maintain the paint
during the Contract.
k. The Contractor's geotechnical engineering consultant and/or the Engineer
shall jointly take the initial piezometer readings immediately after the
piezometer is installed, and before any fill is placed. Determine that each
piezometer is functioning properly by adding or removing water, measuring
rates at which water level rises and falls, and comparing the final water level
with pre-test level. The Contractors geotechnical engineering consultant will
then take the remainder of the baseline readings and additional readings at
least once a week thereafter for the duration of the Contract. The Contractors
geotechnical engineering consultant shall also periodically demonstrate
continued proper functioning of each piezometer by performing rising and
falling head tests on a schedule as approved or directed by the Engineer.
l. The Contractor is responsible for protecting and maintaining the
piezometer(s) in working order during the period of this Contract. This
includes adding or removing riser pipe sections and resetting the steel
standpipe, as necessary, to maintain the top of the piezometer between 1 ft.
and 5 ft. above the surface of the surrounding ground.
m. Upon completion of final readings, and once the Engineer has determined an
open standpipe piezometer may be abandoned, the standpipe shall be
removed and disposed of. The piezometer pipe shall then be abandoned in
conformance with NJDEP regulations and requirements. Generally, the
piezometer pipe shall be grouted from the bottom up using a tremie pipe, the
pipe shall then be cut off at an elevation or location determined by the
Engineer and disposed of, and the remaining pipe shall be left in place.
8.
Survey Monitoring Points

a. Survey monitoring points shall be installed as per the plans. The exact
locations of the survey monitoring points shall be determined by the Engineer
in conjunction with the Contractor to accommodate survey operations. A
minimum of two survey monitoring points shall be established.
b. The survey monitoring point shall be a -inch diameter expansion anchor,
consisting of an outer lead alloy sleeve, an inner lead alloy wedge nut, and a
one-inch long, -inch, 20 stainless steel hexagonal head bolt positioned to
receive survey level rod on edge of head or a similar configuration approved
by the Engineer. A detail of the proposed survey monitoring point shall be
submitted for approval.
c. The Contractor is responsible for maintaining the survey monitoring points in
working order during the Contract. Survey monitoring points damaged by
P300.236
the Contractor's construction operation shall be repaired or replaced by the
Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, within three calendar days after being
damaged.
d. Initial readings of the survey monitoring points shall be performed by the
Contractor after the points have been set, by conducting at least three
separate and complete set of readings and yielding consistent results.
Subsequent readings shall be performed by the Contractor on a daily basis
during the construction.
9.
Instrumentation Monitoring
a. All initial readings shall be taken jointly with the Engineer. The Contractors
geotechnical engineering consultant will take the remaining baseline
readings, and all subsequent readings.
b. Baseline Readings:
1. Obtain baseline readings for all instruments before any
embankment, surcharge and/or preload material is placed.
2. Determine baseline readings by conducting at least three separate
and complete sets of readings on each instrument, at similar time
over a minimum 3 day period, which yield consistent results.
3. The Contractor's geotechnical engineering consultant shall forward
the baseline reading results to the Engineer for approval prior to the
start of fill placement.
10. Tolerances
a. Establish the elevation of benchmarks to 0.04 inch.
b. Establish the initial elevation of settlement platform (top of riser), vibrating
wire piezometers (pressure sensor), open standpipe piezometers (top of PVC
riser pipe), and inclinometers (top of inclinometer casing) to 0.1 inch.
c. Establish the initial coordinates of each instrument installation to 0.1 feet.
d. Install inclinometer casing within one degree of orientation for the entire
length. After installation, the casing groove spiral shall not exceed one
degree per 10 feet of length and the orientation of the grooves at the top of
the casing shall be within ten degrees of the planned orientation.
e. Establish the initial position of control stake points to 0.1 inch.
11. Survey Control
a. Before the start of construction, establish bench marks for use by monitoring
instruments using bench marks installed as part of this Contract, to the
tolerances specified herein.
b. Establish the elevation of bench marks by running level circuits started and
closed at the specified existing benchmarks.
1. Establish turning points during leveling so that foresight and backsight distances are approximately equal.
2. Use well-defined surface points of solid objects or masonry nails
driven into pavement for turning points.
3. Do not exceed sight distances of 200 feet.
4. Establish an error of closure less than 0.1 inch for level circuit
closures. If an error of closure greater than 0.1 inch is achieved for
any level circuit, resurvey the circuit.
5. Prove the established elevations of benchmarks by obtaining
consistent results on at least three separate and complete level
P300.236
c.
circuits. If an inconsistent elevation for any bench mark results,

resurvey the level circuit until correct and repeatable elevations are
obtained.
Check elevation of bench marks every month or when directed by the
Engineer.
12. Protection and Maintenance

a. Protect and maintain instrument systems throughout the entire Contract.
Maintenance shall include draining or flushing protective terminal boxes,
repairs to damaged or missing components of systems, and raising and
lowering instrumentation, as required, during general excavation and fill
placement and removal. Damaged or missing instrumentation shall be
repaired or replaced by the Contractor within seven days, unless otherwise
specified, at no expense to the Authority.
b. The Contractor shall furnish and install protective steel standpipes as
specified and as shown on the Plans, or an approved equal. Such standpipes
shall be installed at the locations indicated on the Plans. The standpipes
shall be installed outside and concentrically with the instrument casings, and
as approved by the Engineer. The standpipes shall extend to a maximum of
4 feet above the final grade and shall penetrate at least 2 feet below the
ground surface, and as approved by the Engineer. Ensure intimate soil-tostandpipe and standpipe-to- instrument casing contact using lean concrete as
specified.
13. Disposition of Instruments.
a. All instruments shall remain in place except those that may be removed or
abandoned, as directed by the Engineer, because of interference with
planned or possible future construction. When directed by the Engineer,
remove and dispose of those portions of all instruments, including
standpipes and covers that are readily accessible. Grout all remaining open
portions of boreholes, open standpipe piezometers and inclinometer casings,
backfill the area an/or patch asphalt and concrete surfaces in like kind, and
restore to the Engineers satisfaction. Grout shall be cement grout consisting
of Type III Portland cement and water. No instrumentation shall be
demolished, abandoned, removed, or disposed of without prior approval of
the Engineer.
b. All surfaces affected by installation of instruments shall be restored to the
original condition prior to completion of the work.
212.10
MEASUREMENT.
Settlement platforms will be measured by the unit installed, maintained and read
throughout the length of the Contract, or until readings are discontinued by the Engineer.
No separate measurement will be made for periodic extension and/or shortening of the
instruments.
All other incidental items, labor, equipment and supplies necessary for the installation of
the instruments and removal of instruments no longer required, disposition of
instruments, will not be measured separately for payment, but all costs therefore will be
considered incidental to these items of work.
P300.236
212.11
PAYMENT.
Pay Item
Pay Unit
Settlement Platforms ......................................................... Each
Payment for the items specified above will be made at the Contract prices for the quantities
as determined above. Prices shall include the cost of furnishing all permits, labor,
materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to satisfactorily fabricate, calibrate, test,
furnish, install, protect, maintain, and monitor the instrumentation and to remove
instruments no longer required as shown on the Plans and specified herein, including
labor for assistance to the Engineer in monitoring instruments.
Any settlement platform that becomes damaged or inoperable shall be repaired or

replaced by the Contractor at no cost the Authority.
Seventy five percent of the unit price of settlement platforms shall be paid upon acceptable
installation of the device, with the remainder paid upon completion of monitoring.
SECTION 213 - PROTECTION OF NJDEP REGULATED AREAS

213.01
DESCRIPTION.
NJDEP regulates various environmentally sensitive areas within, and adjacent to, the
Project limits. These regulated areas include, but are not limited to:
(1)
Freshwater wetlands
(2)
Freshwater wetlands transition areas
(3)
State open waters
(4)
Flood Hazard Areas
(5)
Riparian Zones
These regulated areas are the subject of NJDEP Land Use Regulation Program Permit
#0264-12-0005.1 which has imposed a number of critical conditions including but not
limited to the following:
A. The Contractor must notify the NJDEPs Project Manager Becky Mazzei in writing at
least seven (7) days before beginning any work approved under NJDEP Permit 026412-0005.1. Ms. Mazzeis address is State of New Jersey Department of Environmental
Protection Division of Land Use Regulation, 501 East State Street, Station Plaza 5, 2 nd
floor, P.O. Box 420, Mail Code 501-02A, Trenton, New Jersey 08625-0439, e-mail
Becky.Mazzei@dep.state.nj.us.
B. The contractor and its subcontractors shall comply with all conditions of the permit,
supporting documents and approved drawings. Any noncompliance with the
permit constitutes a violation and is grounds for enforcement action, as well as
suspension and/or termination of the permit. The permit approval does not in any
P300.236
way affect the right of the State to seek and collect monetary penalties or to take
other enforcement action should it be determined that a violation has occurred.
C. The contractor shall take any and all reasonable steps to prevent, minimize, or correct
any adverse impact on the environment resulting from activities conducted pursuant
to the permit and/or from activities conducted that are not in compliance with the
permit.
D. A copy of the permit and other authorizing documents, including all approved plans
and drawings, shall be maintained at the authorized site at all times and be made
available to NJDEP representatives or their designated agents immediately upon
request.
i.
The contractor shall also furnish to the Authority/NJDEP within a

reasonable time any information that the NJDEP requests to determine
compliance with this permit or to determine whether cause exists for
suspension or termination of this permit; and
ii.
The contractor shall also furnish to the Authority/NJDEP, upon request,

copies of records required to be kept as a result of this permit.
E. For development that requires soil disturbance, the creation of drainage structures,
or changes in natural contours, the contractor shall conduct operations in accordance
with the latest revised version of "Standards for Soil Erosion Sediment Control in
New Jersey," promulgated by the New Jersey State Soil Conservation Committee,
pursuant to the Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Act of 1975, N.J.S.A. 4:24-42 et
seq. and N.J.A.C. 2:90-1.3 through 1. 14.
F.
While the regulated activities are being undertaken, the contractor shall not cause or
permit any unreasonable interference with the free flow of a regulated feature by
placing or dumping any materials, equipment, debris, or structures within or
adjacent to the regulated area. Upon completion or abandonment of the work, the
contractor shall remove and dispose of in a lawful manner all excess materials,
debris, equipment, silt fences, and other temporary soil erosion and sediment control
devices from all regulated areas. Only clean non-toxic fill shall be used where fill is
necessary.
G. All excavated material and dredged spoils shall be disposed of in a lawful manner,
outside of any flood hazard area, riparian zone, regulated water, freshwater/coastal
wetland, and adjacent transition area, and in such a way as to not interfere with the
positive drainage of the receiving area.
H. All sediment barriers and other soil erosion control measures shall be installed prior
to commencing any clearing, grading or construction onsite, and shall be maintained
in proper working condition throughout the entire duration of the project.
I.
In order to protect warmwater fisheries resource within Sprout Brook and its tributaries,
no grading, construction or clearing is permitted within any watercourse onsite
between April 1 and June 30. Fu1thermore, any activity outside a watercourse,
P300.236
which would likely introduce sediment into the watercourse and/or increase its
turbidity, is also prohibited during this period. The NJDEP reserves the right to
suspend all regulated activities onsite should it be determined that the applicant has
not taken proper precautions to ensure continuous compliance with this condition.
J.
Vegetation within 50 feet of the top of the bank shall only be disturbed in the areas
specifically shown on the approved drawing/s. No other vegetation within 50 feet of
the top of any stream bank onsite shall be disturbed for any reason. This condition
applies to all channels onsite regardless of the contributory drainage area.
K. Upon completion of the project, all temporarily disturbed areas within 50 feet of the
top of any stream bank onsite shall be restored to original topography and replanted
with indigenous, non-invasive vegetation in accordance with N.J.A.C. 7:13-10.2(u).
L. All temporarily disturbed transition areas shall be replanted with indigenous, noninvasive vegetation at the conclusion of the project.
M. All temporarily disturbed areas of the channel shall be restored to pre-construction
conditions at the conclusion of the project.
N. The riprap proposed within the channel shall be carefully imbedded into the channel
substrate and contoured to mimic the original physical characteristics of the channel
(such as its shape, slope, thalweg and meander) in order to provide low-flow aquatic
passage throughout the entire disturbed area. Furthermore, any void spaces within
the riprap shall be filled with native substrate from the channel.
O. The existing migration patterns of aquatic life in the watercourse shall not be
inhibited as a result of this project. This includes the maintenance and/or creation of
a low aquatic fish passage within the disturbed channel and throughout any
proposed in-channel structure wherever possible. In addition, any disturbed areas of
the channel shall be restored using native, non-acid producing soils and indigenous,
non-invasive vegetation.
P. Raw or unset concrete shall not come in contact with any surface waters onsite, since
such contact can be toxic to aquatic biota.
213.02
MEASUREMENT.
Compliance with all requirements of this Section, NJDEP permit conditions and protection
of wetlands will not be measured separately for payment.
213.03
PAYMENT.
No separate payment will be made for compliance with the requirements of this Section,
NJDEP permit conditions and for the protection of wetlands, but the costs thereof will be
included in the bid prices for the various pay items in the Contract.
SECTION 214 NON-HAZARDOUS MATERIAL HANDLING
P300.236
214.01
DESCRIPTION
This Section shall address the management of regulated materials at the site. Regulated
materials include both waste materials generated during roadway, channel, stormwater
management basins and swales, foundation and trench excavation, as well as materials
normally present on-site. Regulated materials include, but are not limited to, the
following:
Soils and Concrete for Disposal
Contaminated Soils
Dry Industrial Waste
Cleaners and Solvents
Recycled Materials
Reused Materials
Fuels
Raw Materials (including paints, cement, etc.)
Explosives (also refer to Subsection 106.13)
Agricultural soils with pesticides exceeding applicable NJDEP criteria
214.02
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
(A)
GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools and
appurtenances required to complete the work of staging, testing, and disposing of
excavated soil and construction debris required as the result of the construction
operations under this Contract, as shown and specified.
(1)
Applicable Regulations
(a)
(b)
(2)
In order to prevent environmental pollution arising from the

construction activities related to the performance of this
Contract, the Contractor and his Sub-Contractors shall comply
with all applicable Federal, State (NJDEP) and local laws, and
regulations concerning material handling, waste classification
and disposal as well as the specific requirements stated in this
Section and elsewhere in these Specifications.
The Contractor is advised that the stockpiling/staging of
excavated materials and construction debris at unauthorized
locations or facilities is strictly prohibited, even if the permission
of the property or facility owner is obtained. Any violation of
this restriction by the Contractor or any person employed by the
Contractor will be brought to the immediate attention of the
responsible regulatory agencies, with a request that appropriate
action be taken against the offending parties.
Definitions
(a)
ID-27 Waste Non-hazardous solid waste as defined by NJAC

7:26-2.13.
(b)
Off-Site Disposal Disposal of materials outside of the Garden

P300.236
State Parkway Interchange 163 Improvement project.
(3)
Agricultural Lands
Various project work areas require excavation of former agricultural
lands where pesticides and herbicides were historically applied. If any
of this material requires off-site disposal, the Contractor shall perform all
required testing. If the soil for off-site disposal has parameters that
exceed applicable NJDEP criteria to categorize it as a non-hazardous
waste, then the Contractor shall handle these soils in accordance with
Section 214. The Engineer must approve the off-site removal of this
material.
(B)
SUBMITTALS
(1)
Testing Of Materials To Be Disposed

Testing of material shall be in accordance with Subsection 202.03 (B).
(2)
Disposal
(a)
Materials Handling Plan.

(i)
(C)
MATERIALS
(1)
Hay Bales.
(a)
(b)
(2)
Salt hay shall be of salt meadow grasses, free from decayed

matter and organic matter soluble in water, or equal material as
approved.
Hay shall be furnished in bales of standard sizes, free from
weeds or other foreign matter.
Polyethylene Sheeting
(a)
214.03
The Contractor shall prepare and implement a Materials

Handling Plan (MHP) as specified in Subsection 105.15.
Conform to ASTM D 2103, Standard Specifications for

Polyethylene Film and Sheeting.
EXECUTION
(A)
STOCKPILING/STAGING.
(1)
ID-27 Materials and Construction Debris.

(a)
(b)
If the Contractors operations require temporary stockpiling or

storage, all excavated material and construction debris identified
as potentially ID-27 shall be stockpiled/staged in locations
approved by the Engineer.
Stockpiles shall be surrounded by hay bales.
P300.236
(c)
(d)
(e)
(2)
Materials shall be stockpiled/staged on asphalt, concrete, or

other approved firm surface, on layers of plastic sheeting. The
sheeting shall consist of 2 layers of polyethylene sheet, each layer
10 mils thickness. The sheeting shall be continuous over the
entire stockpile area. Hay bales shall be placed to form a
continuous barrier around the stockpile. Each hay bale shall be
anchored with 2 No. 4 steel reinforcing bars, 2" x 2" wood stakes,
or steel pickets driven a minimum of 2 feet into the ground.
Separate stockpiles, staging areas shall be provided for ID-27
materials.
Stockpiles shall be completely covered with a single layer of
polyethylene sheeting 10 mils in thickness. The cover shall be
inspected daily, and damaged areas shall be repaired or replaced
as directed by the Engineer. The cover shall be sufficiently
anchored to prevent displacement by wind.
Uncontaminated Materials And Construction Debris.

(a) If the Contractors operations require temporary stockpiling or
storage, all excavated material and construction debris identified as
uncontaminated shall be stockpiled/staged in locations approved by
the Engineer. All stockpiles shall be protected and stabilized as
specified. Rubble staging areas containing concrete, wood, metal,
piping, etc., shall be kept separate from other stockpiles. These areas
shall be used as staging and processing areas prior to removal and
disposal.
(B)
DISPOSAL
(1)
No material shall be removed from the site until all required submittals
for testing and disposal have been submitted and approved by the
Engineer.
(2)
The Contractor shall assure that the waste hauler's appropriate choice of
vehicles and operating practices shall prevent spillage or leakage of
material from occurring in route.
(3)
The Contractor shall provide, install, and maintain any temporary

loading facilities on-site as required until completion of material
handling activities. The location and design of any facilities shall be
included in the material handling plan and be approved by the Engineer.
(4)
The Contractor shall document the handling, sampling, manifesting,

transportation, and disposal of ID-27 waste. The Contractor shall
organize and maintain the material shipment records/manifests
required by the Federal Resource Conservation and Recovery Act
(RCRA), the State of New Jersey, and the State where the
treatment/disposal facility is located.
The Authority or its
representative will sign the manifest as the generator. The Contractor
P300.236
shall obtain manifest forms, obtain material code numbers, and complete
the shipment manifest records as required by the appropriate agencies
for verifying the material type (code number) and quantity of each load
in units of volume and weight. Copies of each manifest shall be
submitted to the Engineer within 4 business days following shipment,
and within 3 business days after notification of receipt at the disposal
facility. Any manifest discrepancies shall be reported immediately to the
Engineer and be resolved by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. The Engineer will notify the appropriate environmental
agencies such as NJDEP, of the manifest problem and the ultimate
resolution of the problem.
(5)
The Contractor shall not deliver waste to any facility other than the
disposal facility(-s) listed on the shipping manifest. The Contractor shall
coordinate manifesting, placarding of shipments, and vehicle
decontamination. All quantities shall also be measured and recorded
upon arrival at the disposal facility. If any deviation between the two
weight records occurs, the matter is to be reported immediately to the
Engineer.
(6)
The Contractor shall only use the transporter(s) identified in its material
handling plan. Any use of substitute or additional transporters must
have previous written approval from the Engineer at no additional cost
to the Authority. The Contractor shall not combine ID-27 materials from
other projects with material from the Project site.
(7)
All trucks containing bulk solid materials that leave the site shall be
weighed on a portable certified truck scale provided by the Contractor or
at a nearby certified facility approved by the Engineer. Bulk solid
materials include bulk ID-27 wastes that are being hauled for off-site
disposal. The Contractor shall ensure that trucks are protected against
ID-27 substances by properly covering and lining them prior to any use
other than hauling materials that contain ID-27 substances. Liquidcontaining trucks shall be sealed by the Contractor in a manner such that
tampering with the contents cannot occur. The Contractor shall inspect
all vehicles leaving the Project site to minimize adherence of ID-27
substances to the wheels or undercarriage.
(8)
The Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting the access routes for
road conditions, overhead clearance, and weight restrictions. The
Contractor shall periodically inspect routes that the vehicles take from
the job site to the disposal facility to ensure that no leakage or tracking of
mud has occurred. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any and
all actions necessary to remedy situations involving material spilled in
transit or mud and dust tracked off-site. This cleanup shall be
accomplished at the Contractor's expense.
(9)
The Contractor shall coordinate the schedule for truck arrival and
material deliveries at the disposal site to meet the approved Project
P300.236
schedule. The schedule shall be compatible with the availability of
equipment and personnel for material handling operations at the
disposal site.
214.04
(10)
The Contractor shall use only the disposal facility(-s) identified in its
material handling plan. Substitutions or additions shall not be permitted
without prior approval from the Engineer, and if approved, their usage
shall be at no extra cost to the Authority.
(11)
The Engineer reserves the right to contact and visit the disposal facilities
to verify the agreement to accept the stated material and to verify any
other information provided. This does not in any way relieve the
Contractor of its responsibilities under this Contract.
(12)
In the event that the identified and approved facility(-s) ceases to accept
the stated materials or the facility(-s) ceases operations, or if the facility(s) is otherwise rejected by the Engineer, it is the Contractor's
responsibility to locate an alternate approved and permitted facility for
accepting materials. The Contractor is responsible for making the
necessary arrangements to utilize the facility(-s), and the alternate
facility(-s) must be approved in writing by the Engineer in the same
manner and with the same requirements as for the original facility(-s).
This shall be done at no extra cost or delay to the Authority.
MEASUREMENT
Off-Site Disposal of ID-27 Waste will be measured by the weight, in tons, of material
legally disposed of using certified weight tickets. Soil testing that may be required by the
disposal facility will not be measured separately for payment.
Soil Erosion and Sediment Control measures will be measured separately for payment in
accordance with Section 208.
Preparation of requisite submittals or revisions thereto, acquisition of necessary permits,
polyethylene sheeting, activities required for weighing, transporting or disposing of
regulated waste, or restoration of stockpile areas to their original condition will not be
measured separately for payment.
214.05
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
Off-Site Disposal of ID-27 Waste ............................................................
PAY UNIT
Ton
No separate payment will be made for soil testing required by disposal facility, but the
costs thereof will be included in the unit price bid for the pay item Off-Site Disposal of
ID-27 Waste.
P300.236
No separate payment will be made for preparation of requisite submittals or revisions
thereto, acquisition of necessary permits, polyethylene sheeting, activities required for
weighing, transporting or disposing of regulated waste, or restoration of stockpile areas
to their original condition, but the costs thereof will be included in the various soil
disposal and testing pay items in the Contract.
Payment for Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Measures will be made in accordance
with Section 208.
P300.236
DIVISION 300 - PAVEMENT

SECTION 302 - HOT MIX ASPHALT [HMA] PAVEMENTS
302.02
MATERIALS
SUPERPAVE HOT MIX ASPHALT 12.5H76 SURFACE COURSE
Replace the sixth paragraph with the following:
H the third field in the Pay Item description designates the high design compaction
level as for the job mix formula based on traffic forecasts as listed in Table 924-2 (other
levels may be L=low, and M=medium).
The HMA Bridge Surfacing mixture to be used for Temporary Surfacing and the Force
Account for Emergency and Routine Roadway and Bridge Repairs shall be Superpave
Hot Mix Asphalt 12.5H 64.
At the Contractors option and subject to the approval of the Engineer, the Contractor
may use a higher grade Superpave HMA Surface Course for the Temporary Surfacing
and the Force Account for Emergency and Routine Roadway and Bridge Repairs at no
additional cost to the Authority
302.03
CONTRACTORS QUALITY CONTROL

Prior to the commencement of any paving operations, the Engineer shall conduct a job
meeting with the Contractor and Subcontractor, if one is used for paving, in order to
review intended methods of grade control proposed by the Contractor, to highlight job
requirements and criteria; to insure adequate plant production and number of trucks for
material delivery in order to permit continuous placement; and to review specific
requirements of any special asphalt or additive.
302.04
ASPHALT PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

(D)
M ATERIAL TRANSFER VEHICLE.

Replace the first two paragraphs with the following:
A Material Transfer Vehicle (MTV) shall be used for the placement of all HMA
on continuous wedge or leveling, intermediate and surface courses to be placed
on the traveled way, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. The MTV shall
P300.236
independently deliver a uniform mixture from the hauling equipment to the
paver and shall not be used as a haul unit between the plant and paver. A paver
hopper insert shall be installed in the hopper of conventional paving equipment
when an MTV is used.
At a minimum, the MTV shall have a high capacity truck unloading system
which will receive mixtures from the hauling equipment. It shall have a storage
bin with an auger system to continuously blend the mixture prior to discharging
to a conveyor system.
302.05
(F)
Storing or Holding the Mixture

The Contractor shall have at his disposal a portable heated asphalt storage unit
with a minimum four ton capacity for the purpose of having hot mix available
for the emergency pavement replacement and emergency concrete deck
replacement items when material is not available from the asphalt plant. The
asphalt storage unit shall be of triple wall construction heated with infrared
propane gas burners that supply no more than 45,000 BTU per hour. The unit
shall be capable of holding hot asphalt at the proper laydown temperatures for a
minimum of 48 hours. The temperature of the inside skin of the storage unit
shall not exceed 280F. Any associated cost shall be included in the unit prices
bid for HMA items.
(H)
PLACING LIMITATIONS.
Leveling and/or surface courses must be completed in its entirety for the fulllength of the paving section attempted that work day. No vertical drop-offs will
be allowed at the time the lane or roadway is open to traffic.
All paving equipment including rollers, pavers, water trucks and tack coat trucks
to be utilized for resurfacing during non-daylight hours shall be equipped with a
minimum of two (2) lights directed in each direction of travel of the equipment
and powered with portable generators. Lights shall not interfere with an active
lane or roadway and must be adequate to allow for complete inspection of the
paved roadway by the Engineer both before and after compaction.
The following is added after the seventh paragraph:
Emergency and Routine Repairs
(1)
In the event that the HMA bridge surfacing cannot be placed at areas of
deck slab replacement due to adverse weather conditions or other unforeseen
P300.236
events, the Contractor shall place temporary asphalt surfacing over the spall
area, bridge resurfacing area or deck slab replacement area, when so directed by
the Engineer, to allow the closed lane to be opened to traffic.
Just prior to placement of the temporary surfacing, the Contractor shall apply an
approved bond breaker to the surface of the membrane waterproofing in order to
facilitate subsequent removal of the temporary surfacing. Placement and
compaction of the temporary surfacing shall be as specified herein for asphalt
pavement courses.
After the affected lane can again be closed, the Contractor shall remove the
temporary surfacing, being careful so as not to cause damage to the
waterproofing membrane. Saw cutting shall be performed, as may be required,
to properly and safely remove the temporary surfacing and to provide vertical
faces in the existing adjacent asphalt surfacing. Any damage caused to the
concrete deck slab shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer prior to
placement of the HMA bridge surfacing. Any damage to the membrane
waterproofing shall be repaired or the membrane replaced as directed by the
Engineer. Repairs or replacement of membrane and/or repairs to concrete deck
slabs shall be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Authority.
Superpave HMA 12.5H64 Surface Course laydown temperatures shall be within
limits shown on the following table:
Table of HMA Bridge Resurfacing, Special Mixture,
Laydown Temperature (In Deg. F)
For Given Base Temperature and Course Thickness
Base Temperature in
Course Thickness in Inches
Degrees F
1-1/2
2
20-30
31-40
330
330
41-50
320
320
51-60
320
320
61-70
320
320
71-80
320
320
81-90
310
310
91 & Over
300
300
(I)
Spreading and Finishing

The following is added after the ninth paragraph:
In situations where paving is completed shortly before opening of the lane to
traffic and the newly placed asphalt surfacing has not sufficiently cooled, the
Contractor shall, upon direction by the Engineer, water down the pavement to
accelerate the cooling off process. Any associated cost shall be included in the
Superpave HMA items bid in the Proposal
(K)
Compaction
P300.236
(1)
Compacted Thickness
Replace the third row of the table after the first paragraph with the
following:
Leveling Course
3 inches minimum

HMA paving mixture placed for bridge surfacing or for approach
roadway surfacing shall be placed in one layer to the compacted
thickness prescribed in the Standard Specifications which will achieve a
smooth profile using the bridge armor joints and/or the bridge profile
for control, or as directed by the Engineer. The details shown on the
plans shall be followed for transitioning the new pavement to the
existing pavement.
The Contractor shall pave so that in the final compacted state, the asphalt
surfacing meets top of armoring or if there is no armor joint the surfacing
meets joint headers or abutment headblocks with an allowable tolerance
of + inch to + inch. In order to achieve the desired grades, a smooth
profile and a smooth riding pavement surface, the Contractor shall
employ string lining to take elevations to establish pavement lift control
points at the appropriate spacing, as necessary, to develop a profile that
meets the aforementioned requirements.
(2)
Rolling.
The use of vibrating rollers on bridges will not be permitted.
(L)
Sampling and Testing

(3)
Conformance to Job Mix Formula

The average of test results for the five samples or less for a lot shall
conform to the job mix formula within the applicable tolerances of
Sections 924.
(4)
Conformance to Volumetric Requirements

Replace the first sentence with the following:
Provisions of Sections 924 and the following shall apply for control only.
The following paragraphs (M and N) are added:
P300.236
(M)
EMERGENCY TEMPORARY SURFACING.

Emergency Temporary Surfacing shall consist of placing temporary asphalt
surfacing over the spall area, bridge resurfacing area or deck slab replacement
area.
When spall repairs are required, within the Temporary Surfacing area, these
repairs shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Section
417.06(F) Spall Repair, Type 5 as directed by the Engineer.
(N)
Cleaning of Shoulders.
The Contractor shall utilize equipment that can remove debris deposits from the
edges of shoulders or closed lanes without restricting the use of active adjacent
lanes. The debris removal equipment shall only travel in the direction of traffic
and shall be equipped with dust control.
The Contractor shall clean the right shoulders no more than two days prior to
shifting traffic on to the shoulder for construction. During the following stages
the Contractor shall perform cleaning of traffic lanes (during lane closing) as
directed by the Engineer.
All closings for the cleaning of shoulders or lanes shall be performed by the
Contractors forces.
The Contractor shall submit his plan for cleaning of shoulders or lanes to the
Engineer for review and approval 30 days after Contract is awarded. The plan
shall detail the Contractors methods for removal of debris deposits, including
the work force and number and type of equipment to be used.
Disposal of dirt, debris, and all other products collected during the cleaning of
shoulders shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be legally
disposed of off the Turnpike property.
302.07
AIR VOIDS ACCEPTANCE PLAN

(B)
Acceptance Plan
Replace the second sentence of the second paragraph with the following:
Air voids content will then be determined from five drilled cores (6 in
diameter), taken at random locations from each lot, and tested according to
Subsection 924.03 (G) for Superpave HMA.
302.09
MEASUREMENT
Replace the first paragraph with the following:
Superpave Hot Mix Asphalt____ _____Course will be measured by the total
weight of mixture, placed as prescribed, as determined from certified scale
weights.
P300.236
Replace the seventh paragraph with the following:
The basic asphalt price index is the asphalt price index for the month before the
opening of bids. The Authority will use the asphalt price index for the month
before the regular monthly estimate cut-off date as the monthly asphalt price
index.
Replace the fifteenth paragraph with the following:
Cleaning Inside Shoulders and Cleaning Outside Shoulders will be measured by
the length of each shoulder cleaned, measured separately, regardless of width as
directed by the Engineer. Preparation of shoulder cleaning plan, and removal
and disposal of debris, will not be measured for payment.
Replace the sixteenth paragraph with the following:
Sealing Cracks in Bituminous Surface will be measured by the linear foot.
Preparation and cleaning of cracks will not be measured separately for payment.
Temporary Surfacing will be measured by the total weight of the asphalt
concrete mixture required, placed as prescribed in the Plans, or otherwise
directed by the Engineer, and as determined from certified scale weights.
Temporary Surfacing will not be measured for payment when temporary
surfacing is applied because the Contractor is not able to finish work within
allowable lane, roadway, shoulder and/or ramp closing durations (see Division
800). Removal and disposal of temporary surfacing will not be measured
separately for payment. Labor equipment and materials required for furnishing
and applying bond breaking agent to the membrane waterproofing will not be
302.10
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
Temporary Surfacing .................................................................................
Ton
No separate payment will be made for the labor, equipment and materials required for
the removal and disposal of temporary surfacing, or for the furnishing and applying the
bond breaking agent placed on the membrane waterproofing, but the costs thereof will
be included in the unit price bid for the pay item Temporary Surfacing. No payment
will be made for temporary surfacing that is installed because the Contractor is not able
to finish work within allowable lane, roadway, shoulder and/or ramp closing durations
(see Division 800).
No separate payment will be made for the preparation of shoulder cleaning plan, and
P300.236
removal and disposal of debris, but the costs thereof will be included in the unit price bid
for the pay items Cleaning Inside Shoulders and Cleaning Outside Shoulders.
Payment for all closings required for the cleaning of shoulders shall be in accordance
with Section 801.
SECTION 303 SHOULDER AND BERM SURFACING

303.01
DESCRIPTION.
This work shall also include the construction of berm areas with crushed stone where
called for on the plans.
303.02
MATERIALS.
Material shall conform to the following Subsection:
Crushed stone shall be aggregate size No. 24.
Pre-emergent herbicide shall be a glyphosate based herbicide.
herbicide shall be in accordance with N.J.A.C 7:301 et seq.
Application of the
Filter fabric shall be non-woven and conform to Subsection 923.21 for use with Stone,
Grades B, C and D.
303.03
All areas to receive a crushed stone berm area shall be free from all vegetation. A preemergent herbicide shall be applied to the area prior to placing any other materials.
Filter fabric shall be placed in accordance with the manufactures recommendations.
Crushed stone shall be spread in a uniform layer to the thickness specified.
303.04
MEASUREMENT.
Measurement of crushed stone berm surfacing will be made by the total area placed,
without deductions of areas occupied by guardrail posts, manholes, lighting standard
bases and similar structural elements.
Bern surfacing work shall be included for asphalt price adjustment as specified in
Subsection 302.09.
303.05
PAYMENT.
P300.236
PAY ITEM
Berm Surfacing, Crushed Stone, ___Inches Thick ...............................
PAY UNIT
Square Yard
No separate payment will be made for excavation, pre-emergent herbicide or filter fabric.
All associated cost will be included in the price bid for the item Berm Surfacing, Crushed
Stone, ____ Inches Thick.
SECTION 305- PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND SURFACE MILLING

305.01
DESCRIPTION.
This work shall also include the milling of existing rumble strips and placing HMA Surface
Course, Mix I-4 in the milled area to facilitate passage of traffic.
This work shall also include the removal of the Raised Pavement Markers castings in the
proposed work area.
305.03
The following paragraph is added:
a.
REMOVE EXISTING RUMBLE STRIP.

Milling for Remove Existing Rumble Strip shall be a minimum of 2 inches
deep by a width wide enough to remove the existing rumble strip extending 2
beyond the edge of the existing strip on each side for the length designated on
the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. The minimum width of removal shall
be 16. All debris shall be removed from the milled channel with compressed
air or other suitable means.
The Contractor shall apply a uniform tack coat to the cavity after all debris has
been removed in accordance with Subparagraph 302.05(A)(1). HMA Surface
Course, Mix I-4, shall be placed in the cavity and placement shall conform to lay
down temperatures between 300 and 325 degrees. Tack coat shall conform to
the requirements of Subsection 302.02.
Immediately after placement of the HMA Surface Course, Mix I-4, strike off and
adjust surface irregularities and compact thoroughly and uniformly by rolling
with a roller a minimum weight of 500 pounds.
Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional compensation for the
incidental over milling of existing rumble strips.
P300.236
305.04
MEASUREMENT.
Remove Existing Rumble Strip will be measured by the linear foot running along and
parallel to the roadway. Milling of existing rumble strip, debris removal, furnishing and
placing tack coat, and furnishing and placing HMA Surface Course, Mix I-4, will not be
Remove Existing Rumble Strip will not be measured for payment in areas where
shoulder reconstruction is planned or areas of over-milling.
No measurement shall be made for removal of Raised Pavement Markers (castings). This
work is to be considered incidental.
305.05
PAYMENT.
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
Remove Existing Rumble Strip ..................................................................
LinearSquare
Foot Yard
No separate payment will be made for milling of existing rumble strip, debris removal,
furnishing and placing tack coat, and furnishing and placing HMA Surface Course, Mix
I-4, but the costs thereof will be included in the unit price bid for the pay item Remove
Existing Rumble Strip.
No separate payment shall be made for removal of Raised Pavement Markers (castings).
This work is to be considered incidental to Superpave Hot Mix Asphalt Surface Course
pay items.
SECTION 309 HOT ASPHALT FRICTION COURSE

309.01
DESCRIPTION
This Section describes the requirements for constructing Asphalt Rubber Open-Graded
Friction Course (AR-OGFC) pavement at locations shown on the Plans, in these
Specifications or as directed by the Engineer.
AR-OGFC compacted within pavement removal areas and at locations shown on the
Plans will be 2 inches.
309.02
MATERIALS
Mix AR-OGFC in a plant that conforms to the requirements for HMA plants as specified
in 302.04.
309.03
COMPOSITION OF MIXTURES
A.
Composition of Mixtures.
P300.236
Composition of mixture for AR-OGFC is coarse aggregate, fine aggregate and
asphalt-rubber binder. Ensure that the mixture conforms to the following
requirements:
1.
Aggregate. For AR-OGFC aggregate, do not use RAP, CRCG, GBSM, or

RPCSA. Use aggregates that conform to Section 902.02, 902.03 and 990,
A-4. Use fine aggregate that is manufactured stone sand.
2.
Asphalt-rubber binder.
following:
a.
(1)
Use asphalt-rubber that conforms to the
Materials. Use the following materials:
Ground Crumb Rubber. The ground crumb rubber shall have a specific
gravity of 1.15 0.05, be free of wire or other contaminating materials,
and contain not more than 0.5 percent fabric. Use crumb rubber that is
ambient ground and conforms to the gradation requirements specified in
Table 309.03-1. Ensure that the moisture content is less than 0.75 percent.
The Contractor may add up to four percent calcium carbonate by weight
of the granulated rubber, to prevent the particles from sticking together.
Table 309.03-1 Ground Crumb Rubber Gradation
Sieve Size
1.
2.
Gradation1, 2
No. 8
100
No. 16
65 100
No. 30
20 100
No. 50
0 45
No. 200
05
Perform gradation according to AASHTO T 27 using a minimum 50 gram sample.

Ensure that the gradation is performed as specified in NJDOT B-18 (See Subsection
990.15).
The Contractor shall submit Certificates of Compliance as specified in
105.04. In addition, the certificates shall confirm that the rubber is a
crumb rubber, derived from processing whole scrap tires or shredded
tire materials; and the tires from which the crumb rubber is produced are
taken from automobiles, trucks, or other equipment owned and operated
in the United States. The certificates shall also verify that the processing
does not produce, as a waste product, casings, or other round tire
material that can hold water when stored or disposed of above ground.
(2) Binder. Use asphalt binder that conforms to AASHTO M 320, Table 1,
PG 64-22.
The asphalt binder producer shall provide the asphalt binder quality
control plan annually to the Engineer for approval. Ensure that the
quality control plan conforms to AASHTO R 26.
Submit to the Engineer a certification of compliance, as specified in
105.04, for the asphalt binder. The Engineer will perform quality
P300.236
assurance sampling and testing of each asphalt binder lot as defined in
the approved quality control plan.
b.
Mixing. The asphalt-rubber binder shall contain at least

20 percent ground rubber by the weight of the asphalt cement.
Ensure that the temperature of the asphalt cement is between
350 and 400 F at the time of addition of the ground rubber. No
agglomerations of rubber particles in excess of two inches in the
least dimension shall be allowed in the mixing chamber.
The Contractor shall document that the proportions are accurate
and that the rubber has been uniformly incorporated into the
mixture. Ensure that the crumb rubber and asphalt-cement are
thoroughly mixed before beginning the one-hour reaction
period. Rubber floating on the surface or agglomerations of
rubber particles is evidence of insufficient mixing. Maintain the
temperature of the asphalt-rubber binder immediately after
mixing between 325 and 375 F. Maintain the temperature of the
asphalt-rubber binder for one hour before using.
c.
Properties. Prepare asphalt-rubber binder using the wet

process.
Physical properties shall comply with the
requirements of ASTM D 6114, Type II, except for the properties
specified in Table 309.03-2.
Table 309.03-2 Asphalt-Rubber Binder Properties
Property
Rotational
Viscosity1
350 F; cP
Resilience: 77 F; %, minimum
1.
Test Procedure
Requirement
NJDOT B-17 (See

Subsection 990.14)
1500 4000
ASTM D 5329
15
The viscotester used must be correlated to a Rion (formerly Haake) Model VT-04 viscotester
using the No. 1 Rotor. The Rion viscotester rotor, while in the off position, shall be
completely immersed in the binder at a temperature from 350 to 355 F for a minimum heat
equilibrium period of 60 seconds, and the average viscosity determined from three separate
constant readings ( 500 cP) taken within a 30 second time frame with the viscotester level
during testing and turned off between readings. Continuous rotation of the rotor may
cause thinning of the material immediately in contact with the rotor, resulting in erroneous
results.
d.
Handling and Testing. Once the asphalt-rubber binder has been

mixed, thoroughly agitate during periods of use to prevent
settling of the rubber particles. During production, maintain
asphalt-rubber binder between 325F and 375 F. Ensure that
asphalt-rubber binder is not held at 325 F or higher for more
than 10 hours. Allow asphalt-rubber binder held for more than
10 hours to cool. To reuse, gradually reheat to between 325 and
375 F. Do not cool and reheat more than one time. Do not store
asphalt-rubber binder above 250 F for more than four days.
P300.236
For each load or batch of asphalt-rubber binder, the Contractor shall provide the
Engineer with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
The source, grade, amount, and temperature of the asphalt cement before the
addition of rubber.
The source and amount of rubber and the rubber content expressed as percent by
the weight of the asphalt cement.
Times and dates of the rubber additions and resultant viscosity test.
A record of the temperature, with time and date reference for each load or batch.
The record shall begin at the time of the addition of rubber and continue until the
load or batch is completely used. Take readings and record every temperature
change in excess of 20 F, and as needed to document other events that are
significant to batch use and quality.
Mix Design. Submit a mix design including JMF for each mixture on forms
supplied by the Department. Include a statement naming the source of each
component and a report with the results for the criteria specified in Table 309.033. Include a report detailing the rotational viscosity of the asphalt-rubber binder
at 60, 90, 135, 240, and 1440 minutes.
Design the mix to meet the criteria in Table 309.03-3.

Table 309.03-3 JMF Master Ranges and Mixture Requirements AR-OGFC
Mixture Designations (% Passing1)
Sieve Sizes
AR-OGFC
1/2"
100
3/8"
90 100
No. 4
20 40
No. 8
5 10
No. 200
0 3.0
Minimum asphalt-rubber binder, %1
8.0
Minimum % Air Voids, design
15
1. Aggregate percent passing to be determined based on dry aggregate weight. Asphalt-rubber binder
content to be determined based on total weight of mix.
In the JMF for each mixture, establish the percentage of dry weight of aggregate passing each
required sieve size and an optimum percentage of asphalt-rubber binder based upon the weight
of the total mix. Ensure that the JMF is within the master range specified in Table 309.03-3.
Prepare compacted test specimens for submittal to the Engineer at least 30 days before the initial
production date. Prepare these specimens from material mixed according to the final JMF, using
50 gyrations of the Superpave gyratory compactor according to AASHTO T 312.
The Engineer will test 2 specimens to verify that the final JMF produces a mixture that has a
minimum void content as specified in Table 407.02-8. The Engineer will determine percent air
voids according to AASHTO T 209 and AASHTO T 331.
The Engineer will test 2 test specimens for abrasion and impact resistance using a modified L.A.
Abrasion Test according to NJDOT B-15 (See Subsection 990.12). The maximum allowable loss as
calculated by this method is 30 percent.
P300.236
Do not modify, which includes changing the asphalt cement supplier, the JMF unless the
Engineer approves the modification.
C.
Sampling and Testing

1.
General Acceptance Requirements. The Engineer may reject and

require disposal of any batch or shipment that is rendered unfit for its
intended use due to contamination, segregation, improper temperature,
lumps of cold material, or incomplete coating of the aggregate. For other
than improper temperature, visual inspection of the material by the
Engineer is considered sufficient grounds for such rejection.
For asphalt-rubber binder, ensure that the temperature of the mixture at
discharge from the plant or surge and storage bins is at least 290 F.
Combine and mix the aggregates and asphalt-rubber binder to ensure
that at least 95 percent of the coarse aggregate particles are entirely
coated with asphalt-rubber binder as determined according to AASHTO
T 195. If the Engineer determines that there is an on-going problem with
coating, the Engineer may obtain random samples from 5 trucks and will
determine the adequacy of the mixing on the average of particle counts
made on these 5 test portions. If the requirement for 95 percent coating
is not met on each sample, modify plant operations, as necessary, to
obtain the required degree of coating.
2.
Quality Control Testing. The HMA producer shall provide a quality

control (QC) technician who is certified by the Society of Asphalt
Technologists of New Jersey as an Asphalt Technologist, Level 2. The
QC technician may substitute equivalent technician certification by the
Mid-Atlantic Region Technician Certification Program (MARTCP).
Ensure that the QC technician is present during periods of mix
production for the sole purpose of quality control testing and to assist
the Engineer. The Engineer will not perform the quality control testing
or other routine test functions in the absence of, or instead of, the QC
technician.
The QC technician shall perform sampling and testing according to the
approved quality control plan, to keep the mix within the limits specified
for the mix being produced. The QC technician may use acceptance test
results or perform additional testing as necessary to control the mix.
To determine the composition, perform ignition oven testing according
to AASHTO T 308. For fully automated plants, the QC technician may
determine composition using hot bin analysis according to NJDOT B-5.
Use only one method for determining composition within a lot.
For each acceptance test, perform maximum specific gravity testing
according to AASHTO T 209 on a test portion of the sample taken by the
Engineer. Sample and test coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, and mineral
filler according to the approved quality control plan for the plant.
3.
Acceptance Testing. During production, the Engineer will take one

random acceptance sample from each 500 tons of production to verify
P300.236
composition. Conduct air voids and draindown tests as directed by the
Engineer.
If the composition testing results are outside of the production control
tolerances specified in Table 309.03-4 for an acceptance sample,
determine if a plant adjustment is needed and immediately run a quality
control sample. If the quality control sample is also outside of the
control tolerances in Table 309.03-4, immediately take corrective action to
bring the mix into compliance. Take additional quality control samples
after the corrective action to ensure that the mix is within the production
control tolerances. If 2 consecutive acceptance samples are outside the
tolerances specified in Table 309.03-4, immediately stop production.
Obtain Engineers approval of a plant correction plan before resuming
production. Upon restarting production, do not transport mixture to the
Project before the results of a QC sample from the mixture indicate that
the mixture meets JMF tolerances. The Engineer will reject mixture
produced at initial restarting that does not meet tolerances.
Table 309.03-4 Production Control Tolerances for AR-OGFC Mixtures
Production Control
Tolerances from JMF1
Sieve Sizes
1/2"
6.0
3/8"
5.5
No. 4
5.5
No. 8
4.5
No. 200
2.0
Asphalt-rubber binder, % (AASHTO T 308)
0.40
Asphalt-rubber binder, % (NJDOT B-5)
0.15
Minimum % Air Voids

1.
1.0% less than design requirement
Production tolerances may fall outside of the wide band gradation limits in Table 309.03-4.
The Engineer will perform sampling according to NJDOT B-2 or ASTM D 3665, and will
perform testing for composition according to AASHTO T 308 or NJDOT B-5. Perform testing
for air voids and drain-down according to NJDOT B-15 (See Subsection 990.12).
309.04
EQUIPMENT
Provide equipment conforming to section 302 and the following:
1.
Materials Transfer Vehicle (MTV). The use of the MTV is mandatory

for AR-OGFC.
2.
HMA Plants. Conform to Section 302.04 and the following:

(1)
Equipment for Preparation of Asphalt-Rubber Binder. Ensure

that the unit is equipped with a crumb rubber feed system
capable of continuously supplying the asphalt cement feed
system, and is capable of fully blending the individual crumb
rubber particles with the asphalt cement. Use an asphalt-rubber
P300.236
binder storage tank that is equipped with a heating system
capable of maintaining the temperature of the binder between
325 F and 375 F during the reaction. Ensure the asphalt-rubber
binder storage tank is also equipped with an internal auger
mixing device, oriented horizontally in the tank, capable of
maintaining a uniform mixture of the asphalt-rubber binder.
Ensure that the tanks for storage of asphalt-rubber binder are
equipped to uniformly heat the material to the required
temperature under effective and positive control at all times.
Ensure that heating is accomplished so that no flame comes in
contact with the heating tank.
Provide a circulating system of sufficient capacity for the binder
to ensure continuous circulation between the storage tank and
proportioning units during the entire operating period. Ensure
that the discharge end of the binder circulating pipe is
maintained below the surface of the binder in the storage tank to
prevent discharge of hot binder into the open air.
Ensure that pipe lines and fittings are steam or oil jacketed,
electrically or otherwise heated, and insulated to prevent heat
loss.
Provide valves according to AASHTO T 40, except ensure that a
sampling valve is also located in the lowest third of each storage
tank.
(2)
309.05
Automated Release Agent System. Install and use a system that

automatically sprays the truck bed with a release agent to
prevent the build-up of AR-OGFC in the bed. Ensure that the
equipment sprays a thin, even coat of release agent over the
entire interior surface. Supply a non-petroleum based release
agent to the system.
CONSTRUCTION
Tack Coat
Clean the surface where the AR-OGFC is to be placed of foreign and loose material.
Immediately before beginning paving operations, ensure that the surface is dry. Do not
place tack coat unless the weather restrictions, as specified in 407.03.03.B, are met. When
precipitation has occurred within 24 hours before application, the Engineer will
determine when the surface is completely dry.
Apply tack coat RS-1 to curbs, gutters, manholes, and other similar structures. Clean the
exposed surfaces of these structures and apply a uniform coating to contact surfaces
before paving.
In areas inaccessible to distributor spray bars, use hand spraying equipment for tack coat.
Do not allow traffic or construction vehicles on tack coated surfaces.
Only apply tack coat that can be paved over in the same day. Apply tack coat RS-1 at a
rate of 0.10 to 0.14 gallons per square yard and at a spraying temperature of 70F to
P300.236
140F. Adjust the spraying temperature and application rate to produce a uniform
coating, with no excess material.
Installing AR-OGFC
A.
Paving Plan. At least 20 days before beginning placing the AR-OGFC, submit a
detailed plan of operation to the RE for approval that includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Asphalt paving construction technologist (APCT), certified by the

Society of Asphalt Technologists of New Jersey, Inc. The Authority will
accept the equivalent certification by the Mid-Atlantic Regional
Technician Certification Program.
Size and description of crew.
Number, type, and model of equipment.
Lighting for nighttime operations shall in accordance with Subsection
104.18.
Method of locating and maintaining joint locations if sawing and sealing.
Manufacturers recommendations for heating and applying joint sealant.
Paving procedures for maintaining continuous operation as specified in
309.05D.
Manufacturers recommended laydown temperature for modified
binders.
Paving sequence. Ensure that the AR-OGFC is constructed for the full
width of the traveled way, shoulder, and auxiliary lanes as a single
paving operation.
Schedule, hours of operation, and production rates for the Project.
Plant locations.
Method of maintaining AR-OGFC temperature during transportation.
Method of constructing and compacting joints as specified in 309.05E.
Quality control plan outlining the use of the thin lift nuclear density
gauge, quality control cores, and the control of the compaction process.
Do not begin paving until the Engineer approves this plan. Submit an adjusted
pavement plan before making adjustments to the paving operation.
B.
Weather Limitations. If within the 12 hours before paving the National Weather
Service locally forecasts a 60 percent chance or greater of precipitation during the
scheduled placement, postpone the placement of AR-OGFC. Do not place AROGFC if it is precipitating and do not allow trucks to leave the plant when
precipitation is imminent. The Contractor may resume paving operations when
the chance of precipitation is less than 60 percent and the surface is dry.
Do not pave if the surface temperature of the underlying pavement is below 60 F.
C.
Test Strip. Construct a test strip for contracts with more than 5,500 tons of AROGFC. Test strips are not necessary for temporary pavement. Ensure that the
tack coat has been placed as previously specified here-in, before placing AROGFC. Transport and deliver, spread and grade, and compact as specified in
309.05D, 309.05E, and 309.05F, respectively, and according to the approved
paving plan. Construct a test strip for the first 700 to 1,200 square yards placed
for each job mix formula. While constructing the test strip, record the following
information and submit to the Engineer:
P300.236
1.
Ambient Temperature. Measure ambient temperature at the beginning

and end of each days paving operation.
2.
Base Temperature. Measure the surface temperature of the existing base

before paving.
3.
AR-OGFC Temperature. Measure the temperature of the AR-OGFC

immediately after placement.
4.
Roller Pattern. Provide details on the number of rollers, type, and

number of passes used on the test strip.
Upon completion of the test strip, the Contractor may continue paving. If the
Contractor does not continue paving, the Department will accept the test strip as
1 lot regardless of size.
If the test strip does not meet requirements, make adjustments and construct a
second test strip. If the second test strip does not meet requirements, suspend
paving operations until written approval to proceed is received.
Before making adjustments to the paving operations, notify the Engineer in
writing.
D.
Transportation and Delivery of AR-OGFC. Deliver AR-OGFC using HMA

trucks in sufficient quantities and at such intervals to allow continuous
placement of the material. Do not allow trucks to leave the plant within 1 hour
of sunset unless nighttime lighting is provided in accordance with the
Specifications. The Engineer will reject AR-OGFC if the HMA trucks do not meet
the requirements as previously specified here-in. The Engineer will suspend
construction operations if the Contractor fails to maintain a continuous paving
operation. Before the truck leaves the plant, obtain a weigh ticket from a fully
automatic scale. Before unloading, submit for each truckload a legible weigh
ticket that includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Name and location of the HMA plant.

Project title.
Load time and date.
Truck number.
Mix designation.
Plant lot number.
Tare, gross, and net weight.
A certified weighmaster shall sign and affix a seal to the weigh tickets.
In the event of breakdown of an automatic printer system, the Engineer will
accept weigh tickets showing the tare, gross, and net weight of each truck, as
entered and certified by a weighmaster for a period not exceeding the necessary
repair time as certified by a licensed repairman.
When using an automated batching plant, obtain weigh tickets from the printer
used in conjunction with an automated batching and mixing system. The
printed ticket shall show the individual weights of the various components of the
AR-OGFC in a batch, the total weight of each batch, and the sum of all batch
weights in the truckload. At the completion of each days work, a producers
P300.236
representative shall certify that the total net weight supplied to each Contract
was correct.
E.
Spreading and Grading. If using a stringline reference system, ensure that the
system is in place and approved by the Engineer before placing AR-OGFC. The
Engineer will check elevations within the roadbed limits using a stringline
drawn taut between Contractor established grade stakes set outside the
pavement box and at breaklines. Ensure that grade stakes indicate the vertical
cut or fill measurement referenced to the finish grade. The Engineer will check
elevations longitudinally every 50 feet and transversely at the edges, breaklines,
and the center of each lane and shoulder. The Engineer may direct additional
grade stakes in areas with rapid changes in grade so that intermediate
longitudinal checks can be made.
Before placing AR-OGFC, ensure that the tack coat has been placed as previously
specified here-in. Obtain Engineers approval of the underlying surface far
enough in advance of spreading AR-OGFC to allow 1 days paving operations.
Ensure that the certified APCT is present during paving operations.
Ensure that an MTV independently delivers AR-OGFC from the HMA trucks to
the HMA paver.
Before beginning, ensure that the temperature of the screed on the HMA paver is
heated to at least the laydown temperature of the AR-OGFC. Ensure that the
AR-OGFC meets the thickness and tolerance requirements specified in Table
309.03-4. Place AR-OGFC at a minimum laydown temperature of 275 F. Using
the MTV and HMA paver, construct a surface course lift in accordance with the
Plans and these Specifications. Ensure that the grade and profile are maintained.
Construct joints as follows:
1.
Longitudinal Joints. Perform paving with the spring-loaded end plates

of the paver in the down position. The longitudinal joint in 1 lift shall
offset that in the lift immediately below by approximately 6 inches.
Offset the joint in the surface course from the lane lines by 6 inches.
When constructing a joint between lanes of opposing traffic, offset the
joint by 6 inches into either lane.
a.
Cold Joint Paving. If echelon paving is not possible, construct

the pavement using cold longitudinal joints. When constructing
the first lane, compact so the line and grade of the edges of the
AR-OGFC are not displaced. Construct longitudinal joints
parallel to the centerlines within a tolerance of 3 inches per 100
linear feet. If this tolerance is not met, trim or mill the edge of
the AR-OGFC mat as necessary. Before paving the abutting
lane, ensure longitudinal joints are free from dust and debris.
When compacted, ensure that the new mat at the joint is even or
slightly higher (maximum 1/8 inch) than the previously placed
adjoining mat. If the newly compacted mat results in a
depression at the joint of 1/8 inch or more lower than the
previously placed adjacent AR-OGFC lift, suspend all paving
P300.236
operations until
reoccurrence.
F.
corrective
action
is
taken
to
prevent
2.
Transverse Joints. Construct transverse joints to provide a smooth

riding surface. When using a bulkhead to form the joint, ensure that the
bulkhead forms a straight line and vertical face. If a bulkhead is not
used to form the joint, make the joint by sawing the compacted AROGFC for a sufficient distance behind the end of the placement to ensure
full thickness and a smooth surface at the joint. Remove the full lift
thickness of AR-OGFC ahead of the sawed joint. Unless prohibited by
field conditions, cross roll to obtain thorough compaction of these joints.
3.
Unsupported Pavement Edge. To prevent sharp, steep pavement edge

drop-offs the Contractor shall utilize a device attached to the paving
machine that produces a 30 to 35 angle asphalt wedge. The device shall
be utilized along areas of the roadway where asphalt concrete berm
surfacing, asphalt concrete lip curb, concrete vertical curb and/or
concrete barrier curb is not present or scheduled to be constructed
immediately adjacent to the new lane or shoulder pavement.
Compacting. Immediately after spreading and strike-off, compact AR-OGFC

with a minimum of 1 pass of a non-vibratory, 2-axle roller. The Engineer may
direct additional passes to eliminate roller marks. The Contractor may use a
vibratory roller if it is operated in static mode.
Orient the drive axles of the roller towards the paver during the compaction
operation. Operate rollers at a slow, uniform speed not exceeding 2-1/2 miles per
hour. If necessary to prevent adhesion of the AR-OGFC to the rollers, keep the
wheels moistened with water mixed with very small quantities of detergent.
Remove and replace AR-OGFC that becomes loose, broken, or otherwise
defective or that shows an excess or deficiency of asphalt-rubber binder material.
When compacting the butt joint, while paving the adjacent lane, place the roller
on the newly placed AR-OGFC and overlap the joint by approximately 6 inches.
Do not take core samples from the new pavement mat for determining
conformance with draindown requirements. All samples for determination of
draindown shall be prepared at the asphalt production plant prior to production
paving. Core samples shall be prepared and tested by the Authoritys
designated testing laboratory.
G.
309.06
Opening to Traffic. Remove loose material from the traveled way, shoulder,
and auxiliary lanes before opening to traffic. Open AR-OGFC courses to traffic
or construction equipment, including paving equipment, only after the surface
temperature is less than 140 F.
MEASUREMENT
ASPHALT-RUBBER OPEN-GRADED FRICTION COURSE will be measured by the ton as
indicated on the certified weigh tickets, excluding unused material.
TACK COAT will be measured for payment as specified in Section 302.10.
The use of a pavement wedge device will not be measured for payment.
P300.236
309.07
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
ASPHALT-RUBBER OPEN-GRADED FRICTION COURSE
TON
P300.236
DIVISION 400 - STRUCTURES

The following is added after the division table of contents and before Section 401
Concrete Structures:
Where reference is made to the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges
for design and construction throughout Division 400, the reference shall be replaced with
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications and AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications respectively.
SECTION 401 - CONCRETE STRUCTURES

401.01
DESCRIPTION.
The work shall also consist of the construction of strip seal joint systems and modular
joint systems.
The work shall also include supplying and installing reinforcement bar couplers for
reinforcement bars, including threaded reinforcing bars, and installing and removing
plugs/bolts in the couplers during the various stages of work. The couplers shall be in
accordance with Section 5, Article 5.11.5.2.2 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications.
The work shall also consist of furnishing and installing methacrylate crack sealer for
sealing of newly constructed exposed cold joints, the interface between new concrete and
steel materials and at locations in the Plans.
401.02
MATERIALS.
Support Bars for Reinforcement ........................................................................ 908.01(K)
Reinforcement Bar Couplers .............................................................................. 908.01(L)
Concrete Penetrating Sealer ............................................................................... 923.06(G)
Polyester Resin or Epoxy Resin Grout ............................................................. 923.33
Reinforcement bar couplers (Mechanical Couplers) shall be used at the locations
indicated on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer and shall be epoxy coated where the
spliced reinforcement bars are epoxy coated and uncoated where the spliced
reinforcement bars are uncoated. The reinforcement bar couplers shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Reinforcement bar couplers shall
be capable of developing 125% of the yield strength of the ASTM A615 reinforcement
bars and meet the applicable requirements of AASHTO. Certificates of Compliance shall
be submitted in accordance with Subsection 105.04.
401.04
CONTRACTORS QUALITY CONTROL

P300.236
The following is added to the table of tests to be performed at the concrete plant:
Test Method (ASTM

Designation)
Coarse Aggregate
Alkali-Silica
Reactivity
Tests
Frequency
(Minimum)
C1260
Once per mix
Acceptance
< 0.10 percent

expansion after 14
days in solution **
** If acceptance parameters are not met for alkali-silica reactivity, mitigation measures
involving fly ash, slag, or low-alkali cement shall be performed in accordance with
Paragraph 905.05(B).
401.12
MACHINE FINISHING OF BRIDGE DECK

(A)
Machine Finishing of Structural Slab

Delete paragraphs twelve through fifteen.
(F)
Deck Surface Requirements.

Delete this subsection in its entirety and replace with the following:
Bridge deck slabs and approach slabs must meet a 1/8 inch in 10 feet straightedge check
made longitudinally and transversely. After the final strike-off of the concrete and as
close behind the final strike-off as possible, the Engineer will check the surface with a 10
foot straightedge.
The deck slab shall be struck and finished with a self-propelled finishing machine, as
specified in Subsection 401.12 (A), and shall be so constructed that, when tested as
specified herein, the tolerances specified herein are not exceeded.
Regardless of the overall surface conformity of the bridge deck and approach slab
concrete, if surface deviations have a detrimental effect on deck drainage or
reinforcement steel cover, appropriate remedial measures to restore any or all of the
deck slab surface to the required grades and surface tolerance will be ordered at no
additional cost to the Authority. When such remedial procedures are ordered, a plan
shall be submitted, setting forth the intended limits of the surface restoration and a
complete description of the methods, equipment and materials proposed for use.
Following satisfactory completion of the surface restoration measures to the bridge deck
slab and/or the approach slab, the affected area shall be retested.
Additional compensation, Extension of Contract Time or other concessions will not be
granted for any surface restorations ordered by the Engineer for compliance with the
specification.
(1)
Ride Quality Test.
P300.236
After the bridge decks and approach slabs are completed, a qualified Deck
Rideability QC Contractor shall perform a Ride Quality Test using the Ames
Engineering Lightweight Road Profiler, or approved equal,and a profile index
value determined according to GDT 78 which is provided in this specification.
The Deck Rideability QC Contractor shall meet the requirements stated in
Subsection 104.06.
High speed profilographs and simulated profilographs will not be permitted as
an approved equal.
The QC Contractor will conduct the test as follows:

a) Obtain Profile Index Values for bridge deck slabs and approach slabs.
b) Obtain profiles in each wheel path (2 feet off lane line) of each lane and in
shoulder areas to within 12 inches of the barrier parapet.
c)
Average the profile index values for the bridge deck slab including the
approach slabs for each of the left and right wheel path for each lane. The
average value must not exceed 15 inch/mile (as computed by the test
equipment) for each lane.
d) Localized Slab Requirements - After the test is complete, correct individual
bumps or depressions that exceed 2/10 inch from the blanking band on the
profilograph trace. (These are localized areas that the trace has defined
during the full length test on the deck and approach slab.)
The deck surface must then meet a 1/8 inch in 10 feet straightedge check made
longitudinally and transversely.
The Engineer shall witness all profilograph measurements and review/approve
all index calculations.
Correct the major and localized areas of the bridge deck and approach slabs
identified above that do not pass the Ride Quality Test, as described in
Subsection 401.12 (F) (2) Corrective Work, presented below.
(2)
Corrective Work.
After the test described in Subsection 401.12 (F) (1) Ride Quality Test has been
performed, complete the corrective work, if required, at no cost to the Authority
and before doing the final saw cut grooving.
Complete corrective work as follows:
Plane the deck according to Subsection 401.12 (F) (3) Grind Bridge Deck.
a)
b)
c)
Limit concrete removal by planning so that the final bar cover is not less
than the Plan cover minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
If the final bar cover limits cannot be met, perform the corrective work as
Ensure that the final riding surface complies with this Specification and the
requirements for a saw cut grooving finish per Subsection 401.17(F) (3).
P300.236
d)
e)
(3)
If necessary, use a hand grinder to correct bumps with a profile base line of
5 feet (1.5 m) or less.
Have planed surface retested as described in Subsection 401.12 (F) (1) Ride
Quality Test, to ensure that the ride quality meets the requirements of this
Specification.
Grind Bridge Deck.

This work includes grinding concrete bridge decks and approach slabs to
provide proper drainage and riding characteristics to the pavement surface.
Perform the work according to these Specifications and the Plans. Sawcut
grooved finish shall be performed after all of the bridge deck slab and approach
slabs have been checked for conformance to the specification, and all corrective
work has been completed.
(a)
(b)
(c)
Referenced Documents
Georgia Department of Transportation Test No. 78 (See Appendix H).
Personnel
Deck Rideability QC Contractors personnel shall meet the requirements
set forth under Subsection 104.06.
Equipment
(1)
Grinding Equipment
Use power driven, self-propelled grinding equipment with these
characteristics:
Diamond blades designed to smooth and texture Portland
Cement concrete pavement
Effective wheel base of at least 12 feet
Pivoting tandem bogey wheels at the front of the machine
Rear wheels arranged to travel in the track of the freshly cut
pavement
Grinding head with the center no further than 3 feet forward
from the center of the back wheels
Ensure that the equipment:
Cuts or planes at least 3 feet wide
Operates without encroaching on traffic movement outside
the work area
Grinds the surface without causing spalls at cracks, joints, or
other locations
Periodically check the equipment to ensure that it is in proper
working order, especially the wheel roundness on the grinding
equipment. Immediately correct out-of-round wheels.
(2)
(d)
Profilograph
Use the profilograph to test the ride quality of the surface of
concrete bridge decks and approach slabs.
Construction
P300.236
Grind the deck slab and approach slab surface areas that do not conform
to smoothness requirements defined under Subsection 401.12 (F)(1)
Ride Quality Test, or as required to promote drainage.
Grind the surface areas as follows:
(1)
Maintain a constant cross slope between grinding extremities in
each lane to ensure that grinding provides positive lateral
drainage.
(2)
Grind the entire area designated by the Engineer until the deck
slab surfaces of the adjacent sides of transverse joints are in the
same plane.
(3)
Texture the deck surface, but do not grind extra depth to eliminate
minor depressions.
(4)
Remove grinding residue before it is blown by traffic action or wind. Do
not allow residue to flow into gutters, drainage facilities, or across lanes
used by public traffic.
(5)
Regrinding
To regrind areas to meet the smoothness or final surface finish:
Regrind the entire lane width in the area to be corrected. Regrinding
of just a portion of the lane width, such as the wheel paths only,
will not be permitted.
H)
Acceptance Testing.
Delete this subsection in its entirety and replace with the following:
Acceptance Testing is covered under Subsection 401.12 (F) (1) Ride Quality Test.
401.16
TEST SPECIMENS
Delete the paragraph in its entirety and replace with the following:
This Subsection specifies the requirements for the preparation, testing and evaluation of
Portland Cement Concrete specimens. Final quality acceptance testing shall be in
accordance with Section 905. In order that the Engineer can maintain a record of the
strength gain of all concrete placed, the Engineer will make standard test specimens: 6" x
12" concrete test cylinders for compressive strength, 4 x 8 cylinders for AASHTO T277
and 6 x 6 x 3 molds for AASHTO T259/T260 permeability testing, and beams for
flexural strength testing. The Contractor shall provide the concrete and molds for the test
specimens, shall be responsible for the handling and protection of the specimens on the
job site and shall arrange for delivery of the specimens to the designated Testing
Laboratory between 24 and 48 hours after casting.
(B)
STANDARDS AND FREQUENCY OF TESTING PRIOR TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING.

Delete the third paragraph in its entirety and replace with the following:
(2)
Coulomb Test (AASHTO T277) and Ponding Test (AASHTO

T259/T260).
The Coulomb Test (AASHTO T277) and Ponding Test (AASHTO
T259/T260) are used to evaluate the permeability of concrete. For each
truckload (Sublot) of LMC and silica fume concrete the Engineer will cast
two (2) 4 x 8 cylinder specimens for AASHTO T277 testing. For LMC,
P300.236
two (2) 6 x 6 x 3 specimens will be cast for AASHTO T259/T260
testing. Two-inch thick samples will be cut from the center of each
cylinder for AASHTO T277 testing, with a maximum of two slices per
cylinder utilized. Samples shall be wet cured in water storage containers
per ASTM C31 for 2 days, and air cured at the site for 3 days, prior to
pickup for testing. For LMC, the two (2) 4 x 8 cylinders will be tested
for 28 day and 56 day permeability in accordance with AASHTO T277
and the two (2) 6 x 6x 3 molds will be tested for permeability in
accordance with AASHTO T259/T260. For silica fume concrete, the two
(2) 4 x 8 cylinders will be tested for 28 day and 56 day permeability in
accordance with AASHTO T277.
Delete the last paragraph in its entirety and replace with the following:
Refer to Subsection 401.18(I) Acceptance Testing, for requirements for
LMC and silica fume concrete overlays prior to final acceptance. Refer to
Subsections 905.21, 905.22 and 905.23, including modifications made in
the supplementary specifications, for requirements of Quality
Acceptance limit, testing, sampling and pay adjustment.
401.17
SURFACE FINISH
Delete the second paragraph in its entirety and replace with the following:
The final surfaces of Latex Modified Concrete (LMC) overlays, Silica Fume Concrete
overlays and High Performance Concrete (HPC) shall be finished in accordance with
Subsection 401.17 (F) (3) unless specified otherwise in the contract documents.
401.18
CURING
(D)
General.
Delete the first paragraph in its entirety and replace with the following:
All new bridge deck and overlay concrete shall be wet cured. No curing
compound will be permitted.
401.19
PROTECTIVE COATINGS FOR CONCRETE SURFACES

(A)
GENERAL.
Add the following after the first paragraph:

Application of the concrete penetrating sealer will not be required on precast concrete
parapet sections for MSE or PM retaining walls if the concrete mix design proposed has
been certified as meeting the requirements for Chloride Permeability at 56 days as per the
NJTA Standard Supplemental Specification for High Performance Concrete (HPC).
Documentation from an accredited AASHTO testing agency must be provided to
validate the certified properties. Concrete core sampling associated with testing the
concrete penetrating sealer application will not be required for parapets where the sealer
P300.236
is not applied.
At the end of the third paragraph add the following:
Sandblasting will be required to remove acrylic based curing compounds (nondissipative types).
Delete the seventh paragraph and replace it with the following:
Latex Modified Concrete and High Performance Concrete (HPC) surfaces shall not be
sealed.
(B)
SEALER APPLICATION.
Delete the first and second paragraphs and replace them with the following:
Application of the penetrating sealer materials shall be made by the methods and at the
rate of coverage as recommended by the manufacturer and not exceeding 225 sq. ft./gal.
Prior to sealer application, the Contractor shall submit product application specifications
for approval by the Engineer.
In the fourth paragraph, delete the first sentence and replace it with the following:
The concrete surfaces shall be cleaned of dirt, oil, grease, laitance, curing compound or
curing compound residue, form release agents and other contaminants which may retard
or prevent penetration of the surface treatment material into concrete.
At the end of the fourth paragraph add the following:
Surfaces which have been cured using an acrylic based, non-dissipative type curing
compound shall first be cleaned by sandblasting.
In the fifth paragraph, delete the first sentence and replace it with the following:
The concrete penetrating sealer shall be applied with low pressure (15 psi) airless spray
equipment at a rate not exceeding 225 sq. ft./gal. and shall be applied.
(C)
ACCEPTANCE.
In the fourth paragraph, delete the first sentence and replace it with the following:
The treated concrete cores will be tested for water absorption in accordance with
Subsection 923.06 paragraph (F) or (G) as appropriate and as specified below.
Delete the fifth, sixth and seventh paragraphs, and replace them with the following:
When the minimum requirements for water absorption are not met, the lot shall be
retreated at no cost to the Authority, or the lot may be accepted on written request
provided that payment for the lot is reduced in accordance with the treatment payment
schedule.
P300.236
Delete the Concrete Penetrating Sealer Treatment Payment Schedule Treatment

Characteristics Table and replace it with the following:
Concrete Penetrating Sealer Treatment Payment Schedule

Treatment Characteristics
Lot Acceptance Water Absorption
Pay Factor
Percent
1.00 or Less (Minimum requirement)
1.00
1.01 to 1.05
0.95
1.06 to 1.10
0.90
1.11 to 1.15
0.85
1.16 to 1.20
0.80
1.21 to 1.25
0.75
1.26 to 1.30
0.60
1.31 to 1.35
0.55
1.36 to 1.40
0.50
1.41 to 1.45
0.45
1.45 to 1.50
0.30
Over 1.50
0.00
In the eleventh paragraph, delete the second sentence and replace it with the following:
When the minimum requirements for water absorption are not met after said
retreatment, the payment for the lot will be determined by the penetrating concrete sealer
treatment payment schedule.
401.23
MEASUREMENT
The seventh paragraph is deleted in its entirety and replaced by the following:
Strip Seal Expansion Joints, 4 Movement and Modular Expansion Joint, 6 Movement
will be measured along the total length of the newly installed deck joint. Temporary seals
and cleaning of deck joints steelwork prior to installation of seals will not be measured
for payment.
Add the following to the end of the subsection:
Sawcut Grooved Deck Surface will be measured by the square yard of deck that is sawcut
with grooves in accordance with Subsection 401.17(F)(3).
Reinforcement Bar Coupler will be measured by the number of each furnished and
installed in cast-in-place concrete construction where shown on the Plans or as directed
by the Engineer.
Riding quality testing of cast-in-place bridge decks will not be measured separately for
payment.
P300.236
Furnishing and installing methacrylate sealer will not be measured separately for
payment.
The services of a manufacturers representative when required will not be measured
separately for payment.
401.24
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
Reinforcement Bar Coupler..
Sawcut Grooved Deck Surface ........................................................................
Strip Seal Expansion Joints, 4 Movement ....................................................
Modular Expansion Joint, 6 Movement ......................................................
Concrete Penetrating Sealer .............................................................................
PAY UNIT
Each
Square Yard
Linear Foot
Linear Foot
Square Foot
The following paragraphs are added to the end of the Subsection:

No separate payment will be made for preparation of shop/working drawings, studs,
field drilling of holes, welding, cleaning of deck joint steelwork prior to installation of
temporary or permanent seals, furnishing and installation temporary seals, or for the
furnishing and installation of structural steel for strip seal joints and modular joints
including plates, support plates and connecting hardware for expansion joint
installations as shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer, but the costs thereof
will be included in the unit price bid for the pay items Strip Seal Expansion Joints, 4
Movement and Modular Expansion Joint, 6 Movement:.
No separate Payment shall be made for the QC testing of the surface. Costs associated
with the testing shall be included in the bid price for the respective bridge deck slab and
approach slab items.
Any adjustment to the concrete mix design specified in the contract documents to allow
for the elimination of the requirements for the Concrete Penetrating Sealer and Concrete
Core Sampling shall be made at no additional cost to the Authority.
No separate payment will made for the preparation of reinforcement steel to be spliced
with reinforcement bar couplers.
Threaded reinforcement steel required for reinforcement bar coupler will not be
measured and shall be included in the price bid for reinforcement bar coupler.
SECTION 403 - STEEL STRUCTURES

403.01
DESCRIPTION
Steel Structures shall also include design, installation and removal of catches and
P300.236
protective shielding.
This work shall also include the furnishing and installation of new shear studs on
existing stringers.
Materials and Construction operations not specifically covered in the Plans and
Specifications shall be in accordance with AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway
Bridges or AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications as applicable, based on the
design code noted on the Plans.
403.02
MATERIALS
Delete the Materials reference for Pot Bearings and Disc Bearings.
Delete the last paragraph of this Subsection in its entirety.
403.03
INSPECTION AND TESTING

In the third paragraph, delete the first bulleted item and replace it with the following:
Simple Steel Bridge Structures. Includes highway sign structures, parts for
bridges (such as cross frames for straight bridges with skews of less than 30
degrees), and un-spliced rolled beam bridges.
In the third paragraph, delete the third bulleted item and replace it with the following:
Fracture Critical Members Endorsement. Familiarity with procedures required to produce
critical members in accordance with a fracture control plan as defined by AASHTO or
AREMA.
Delete Paragraph (A) and replace it with the following:
Shop Inspection.
The Engineer shall be notified by the Contractor in writing 15 calendar days in advance of the date
of beginning of work at the shop so that arrangements for inspection may be made. Any work
done prior to inspection may be rejected.
The Contractor shall furnish facilities for the inspection of material and workmanship in the shop.
The inspectors shall be allowed free access to the necessary parts of the works.
Inspectors shall have the authority to reject any material or work which does not meet the
requirements of the Specifications. In case of dispute, the Contractor may appeal to the Engineer,
whose decision shall be final. The acceptance of any material or finished member by the Engineer
shall not be a bar to its subsequent rejection, if found defective. Rejected material and
workmanship shall be replaced promptly or corrected by the Contractor at his expense.
The Contractor shall furnish certified mill test reports showing ladle analysis of the chemical
composition of the steel used in fabricating the various members. Certified mill reports shall be
submitted, in accordance with Subsection 105.03, showing chemical and physical properties of the
P300.236
materials to be used. Samples and test pieces shall conform to Subsection 105.03 and 105.12.
Delete Paragraph (C) and replace it with the following:
(C)
Fracture Control Plan.

Steel bridge members or member components designated as Fracture Critical Members
(FCM's) on the plans shall be subject to the provisions of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Specifications and ANSI/AASHTO/AWS D1.5 Bridge Welding Code, Chapter
12.
The following Paragraph (D) is added:

(D)
Shop Preassembly And Survey.

(1) General Shop Preassembly Requirements.
All structures which utilize field splices shall be preassembled at the steel
fabricators shop, unless noted otherwise in this specification or in the
contract documents. All methods of preassembly shall be clearly shown on
the Shop Drawings. All other methods of fabrication and fitment not defined
in this section shall be as per the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications, 2004 Edition with current interims.
For the Purposes of Section 403.03(D), the following definitions shall apply:
Section a portion of a girder between field splices and/or end bearing
locations.
Line the plan alignment of a girder as defined in the contract plans from
girder end bearing to girder end bearing.
Complete Assembly a method of preassembly by which the fabricator
completely assembles a girder to line and camber. All girders which are less
than 150 feet in length, or are comprised of less than three sections shall be
completely assembled in the fabricators shop.
Progressive Assembly a method of preassembly by which the fabricator
assembles a minimum of three sections or 150 feet of a girder (whichever is
greater) to line and camber beginning at one end of the girder line. The
fabricator shall remove previously assembled sections from the beginning
end of the girder line and add additional sections to the advancing end while
maintaining a minimum 3 sections or 150 feet in the progressive assembly at
all times. Progressive assemblies shall consist of at least one section of the
previous assembly (repositioned if necessary and adequately pinned to
assure accurate alignment) at all times.
Full Component Assembly a method of preassembly by which the
fabricator fully assembles specific portions of a bridge superstructure to lines
and cambers. When girders are continuous because of their attachment to
transverse structural steel supporting beams, (framed-through connection),
regardless of cross section, full component assembly of these elements is
mandatory. All structural steel work through the first girder to girder field
P300.236
splice on both sides of framed-through transverse structural steel supporting
beams shall be preassembled. The framed-through transverse box girders
within these portions of the structures shall be included in the preassembly.
False work that accurately represents the structural steel bearing locations
and elevations as shown on the contract plans shall be constructed and used
for all full component assemblies. One hundred percent of the bolt holes
within the full component assembly shall be reamed to size and checked for
bolt fitment. Other portions of a superstructure may be required for full
component assembly as specifically called for in the contract plans.
Complete Structural Assembly - a method of preassembly by which the
fabricator assembles a complete bridge superstructure in its entirety to lines
and cambers in order to verify proper fit and alignment. False work that
accurately represents the structural steel bearing locations and elevations as
shown on the contract plans shall be constructed and used for all complete
structural assemblies. No other points of support shall be permitted. The
structural steel shall be fully assembled in the sequence(s) and stages as
depicted on the contract plans. Fifty percent of the bolt holes (every other
bolt hole) within the complete structural assembly shall be reamed to size
and checked for bolt fitment. Completely assembled structural steel shall be
surveyed by a Licensed Surveyor. In accordance with Section 104.08, the
Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings indicating the coordinate locations
and elevations of all bearing locations, field splice locations, and tenth (10th)
point locations of each span of each girder at the centerline of the girder.
Discrepancies from the contract plans shall be clearly noted in all Shop
Drawings. This method of assembly will not be required unless specifically
called for in the contract plans.
CNC Fabrication a method of fabrication that utilizes Computer
Numerical Controlled (CNC) automated machinery to cut or drill
components of bridge structure elements to finished size and shape. CNC
Fabrication is typically employed for (but not necessarily limited to)
fabrication of cut-cambered girder webs, swept flange plates for curved
girders, and hole arrays for bolted connections. Where CNC Fabrication is
permitted in Section 403.03(D)2, preassembly requirements described in
403.03(D)2.a and 403.03(D)2.b shall be revised as follows:
1. The fabricator must demonstrate ability to accurately utilize CNC
Fabrication methods to construct superstructure elements meeting
the dimensions and tolerances published within the Contract
Documents. This ability shall be demonstrated by preassembling.
For straight girders, a single full length girder line of any
continuous multi span unit shall be preassembled to line and
camber as outlined in Section 403.03(D)2.a. For curved girders,
two full length girder lines, with diaphragms, of any continuous
multi span unit shall be preassembled to line and camber as
outlined in Section 403.03(D)2.b. Progressive Assembly, as defined
in 403.03(D)1, may be used for both straight or curved girders.
Selection of girder lines shall be subject to the approval of the
P300.236
Engineer. The fabricator shall clearly indicate on the submitted
Shop Drawings which girder line(s) from the overall bridge
superstructure are to be preassembled. The sequence of
component preassembly in the shop shall match, as much as
practicable, that defined on the Contractor's Erection Plan working
drawings, including intermediate false work points of support, if
applicable. Successful preassembly of the girder lines shall obviate
the need for further Progressive Assembly requirements as they
pertain only to the subject bridge. Bridge structures containing
multiple independent superstructure units shall not require
multiple preassemblies unless otherwise directed.
2. Requirements for Full Component Assembly as described in
403.03(D)2.c will remain in effect. Each bridge structure contained
within the Plans utilizing a framed through transverse box girder
shall be subject to these requirements. Where girders are
supported on a transverse box girder and are not framed through
it, only the provisions of 403.03(D)2.a or b, depending on
curvature, shall apply. Anticipated steel only dead load deflections
of the supporting transverse box girder shall be accounted for
when performing the progressive assembly for line and camber.
3. The fabricator shall submit a Quality Control Plan, which shall
clearly outline the means and methods exercised to maintain
accurate fabrication production. This Quality Control Plan shall, at
a minimum, describe procedures and chain of responsibility to be
used throughout the fabrication process to transfer relevant
information contained in the Contract Documents to the CNC
production equipment, including method(s) of verification that
final fabrications have been accurately produced. Only one
Quality Control Plan shall be submitted for the contract, regardless
of the number of bridge structures contained within the Contract.
4.
Failure to preassemble the selected girder line(s) without misfits or

the need to ream out-of-alignment bolt holes will be held as basis
for disallowing use of reduced preassembly requirements via CNC
Fabrication methods by the fabricator for all structures in the
Contract. Additional preassembly attempts may be considered by
the Authority at the discretion of the Engineer, if the following
conditions are met:
A letter shall be submitted to the Engineer describing the failed
mechanism or procedure causing the failed preassembly
attempt.
A revised Quality Control Plan shall be submitted which shall
include a clear method of identifying the cause and preventing a
recurrence of the previous failed preassembly.
Additional preassembly attempts shall be performed on newly
fabricated girders using the revised Quality Control Plan.
P300.236
(2) Structure Type Specific Preassembly Requirements.

The completeness of preassembly required for each structure type shall be
performed as defined below. The sequence of assembly shall mimic the
Contractors proposed sequence of erection as closely as is practicable:
(a) Straight Girder Structures Skewed Less Than 30 Degrees
As a minimum, the preassembly procedure for straight girder structures
with field splices and all bearing lines skewed less than 30 degrees shall
consist of either complete assembly or progressive assembly as defined
above. Webs of girders may be oriented in the horizontal plane or the
vertical plane. Girders shall be fully supported during assembly. CNC
Fabrication and associated preassembly requirements as described in
403.03(D)1 may be utilized for structures meeting the requirements of this
Subsection unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Plans. Straight girder
structures without field splices and with all bearing lines skewed less than 30
degrees are exempt from the provisions of Section 403.03(D) unless explicitly
noted otherwise in the contract documents.
(b) Structures Curved in Plan and/or Skewed 30 Degrees or More
As a minimum, structures which are curved in plan as defined in Section
4.6.1.2 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications and/or with any
bearing line skewed 30 degrees or more shall meet the provisions of
403.03(D)2.a., and shall be assembled with webs oriented vertically. For
multi-girder structures, each complete or progressive assembly shall consist
of a minimum of two adjacent girder lines including diaphragms or cross
frames as per the contract plans. Girder lines assembled by progressive
assembly shall consist of at least two sections of an adjacent girder line which
has been previously assembled, plus two more sections added to the
advancing ends of the girder lines. CNC Fabrication and associated
preassembly requirements as described in 403.03(D)1 may be utilized for
structures meeting the requirements of this Subsection unless otherwise
indicated on the Contract Plans.
(c) Portions of Structures with Complex Framing Elements
Portions of structures explicitly noted as Complex on the Plans shall be
preassembled via full component assembly. When girders are continuous
because of their attachment to transverse structural steel supporting beams
(framed-through connection), regardless of cross section, full component
assembly of these elements is mandatory. Other portions of the structure
may be assembled via complete or progressive assembly, as appropriate.
(d) Special Structures to be Completely Preassembled
As a minimum, special structures which have been explicitly designated on
the contract plans to be preassembled via compete structural assembly shall
meet the provisions of 403.03(D)2.b. The complete and entire steel structure
with all secondary framing members shall be preassembled at the
fabricators shop as a complete structural assembly.
P300.236
403.05
WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH

The following Paragraph (E) is added:
(E)
NEW ASTM A709 HPS GRADE 50W STEEL - PAINTED.
The exterior surfaces of the new ASTM A709 HPS Grade 50W steel box girders shall be
cleaned and painted to the limits shown on the Plans in accordance with the applicable
provisions of Section 411 and any applicable Supplementary Specifications. The insider
surfaces of the box girders shall also be cleaned in accordance with Section 411 and shall
not be painted.
403.06
FABRICATION AND WELDING

Delete the second paragraph and replace it with the following:
Welding shall conform to the current ANSI/AASHTO/AWS D1.5 Bridge Welding Code.
Electro-slag welding will not be permitted for use on fracture critical members or High
Performance Steel (HPS) Grade 70 or above. All electro-slag weldments shall be 100%
tested as per AWS D1.5 Section 6.7.1.1.
403.08
SHIPPING, HANDLING AND ERECTION

(B)
ERECTION
When erecting structures over existing buildings, structures, utilities, active roadways,
walkways, railroads, navigable waterways, recreational and storage areas, catches or
protective shielding shall be installed at the locations designated on the plans or as
directed by the Engineer before any further operations may proceed over these areas.
Design, installation and removal of catches or protective shielding shall meet the
requirements of Subsection 417.04 (A) (1) Catches and Section 417.09(B), Methods of
Construction. All work shall be done in accordance with the applicable portions of
Subsections 104.08, 104.13, 105.14 and 417.04, the contract plans, and as specified herein.
403.09
SETTING ANCHOR BOLTS AND EXPANSION BEARINGS

Delete the second paragraph of Paragraph (B) and replace it with the following:
The anchor bolts shall be set in a bonded epoxy or resin conforming to the requirements
of Subsection 923.22 and in accordance with the epoxy or resin manufacturers
recommendations and the provisions of the Plans. Anchor bolts shall not be placed in
oversized drilled or preformed holes in bearing applications where the bearings are
subject to net uplift or tension as indicated on the Plans.
In Paragraph (B), delete the 7th to last paragraphs in their entirety
Where shown on the Plans, the Contractor shall be required either to jack the
P300.236
superstructure in order to relieve the shear deformation in bearing pads caused by the
application of girder self-weight and dead load of the deck or to block the bearings prior
to steel erection in order to prevent the shear deformation in bearing pads. If jacking of
superstructure is performed, all girders need to be jacked and jacking cannot occur
earlier than 7 days after the deck is poured. If bearing blocks are used, they must remain
in place until 7 days after the deck is poured.
Contractor shall submit superstructure jacking or bearing blocking Plans to the Engineer
for approval. Superstructure jacking and bearing blocking shall be in accordance with
the requirements of Sections 418.03 and 418.07, except for payment.
403.12
HIGH-STRENGTH BOLTS.
Contact surfaces for all bolted connections shall be Class B in accordance with Section 6,
Article 6.13.2.8 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
403.18
MEASUREMENT
Catches or protective shielding as required by Subsection 403.08(B) will not be measured
for payment.
Delete the 2nd paragraph in its entirety.
Replace the 3rd paragraph with the following:
Under contracts containing an item for structural steel, all metal parts, including
structural steel, steel expansion dams, stud shear connectors, bridge drainage metal
work, and all other metalwork necessary for the complete fabrication, erection and
completion of the structure will be paid for as structural steel unless otherwise noted,
stipulated or listed as separate pay items in the Proposal.
403.19
PAYMENT
The following pay items are deleted:
PAY ITEM
Pot Bearing, ( ) Kips ( ) Kips
Disc Bearing, ( ) Kips ( ) Kips
PAY UNIT
Each
Each

PAY ITEM
Structural Steel Structure No. ______ .............................................................
PAY UNIT
Lump Sum
P300.236
No separate payment will be made for catches or protective shielding, but costs thereof
shall be included in the price bid for the pay item Structural Steel Structure No.____.
The following is added to the end of the subsection:
Should the Authority permit the Contractor to order and store raw materials for the
purposes of fabricating structural steel for bridges, partial payment for the materials will
be made as follows:
Payment of up to a maximum of 25% of the total lump sum bid amount of the Structural
Steel Pay Item will be made to the Contractor upon confirmed delivery of raw materials
to the approved storage facilities, not to exceed the raw materials quantities shown on
bills of materials in approved shop drawings.
No payment will be made without substantiating documentation in the form of the
following:
Bill(s) of lading for the receipt of the material delivery to the approved
storage facility.
All required material certifications.
Proof of insurance for the materials stored at the approved storage facility.
Payment will only be made as a direct reimbursement for costs of materials ordered. No
payment will be made for related or unrelated expenses or any other premiums over and
above the direct cost of bill(s) of lading from materials vendor(s). No further payments
for any work performed as part of the overall contract will be made until proof of
payment to the raw materials vendor has been submitted and approved by the Engineer.
No payment will be made for any materials until delivery to the approved storage facility
has been confirmed by the Engineer.
When the approved storage facility is on property not belonging to the Authority, the
material shall be stored in a fenced area with access limited to the Authority and the
Contractor. The stored material shall be covered, or otherwise protected from the
elements to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Additionally, the Contractor shall post a sign
at the location clearly identifying that the materials are without encumbrances and are to
be solely used for this Contract.
Payment for materials does not constitute Authority approval or acceptance of the
materials or work. If materials paid for are damaged, stolen or prove to be unacceptable,
the Authority retains the right to recover the costs from the Contractor.
Payment for the balance of the total value for each of the Structural Steel Pay Items will
be made upon complete fabrication and erection, shop and field welding, nondestructive quality control testing of welds, galvanizing, and shop and field painting less
any retainage as specified in Subsection 108.03.
No separate payment will be made for storage of the material at the approved storage
facility.
P300.236
No separate payment will be made for the insurance required for the storage of the
material at the approved storage facility.
SECTION 405 - PILES

405.03
EQUIPMENT.
Steel H piles shall not be driven with vibratory equipment to supplement the work of the
hammer. Any reference to the use of vibratory or sonic drivers is removed from this
contract with regards to steel H piles.
405.04
PREPARATION FOR DRIVING.

E)
Splices.
The fourth sentence is changed to the following:

Splicing of steel piles shall be performed by using approved full penetration butt welding
of the continuous section and sufficient to fully develop the full strength of the pile.
Subject to the Engineers approval, alternate pile splice may be used provided it is
designed and constructed to develop the full axial, shear and moment capacities of the
pile section.
405.06
METHODS OF DRIVING.
The Contractor shall control their operations to prevent movement or damage to any
existing structures and utilities such as settlement, cracking or other adverse conditions.
Preventive measures shall include, but are not limited to, selecting construction methods
and procedures that will prevent such damage, monitoring and controlling the vibrations
from construction activities.
The installation of piles within a horizontal distance of 100 feet of any commercial or
residential structure requires seismic monitoring at the nearest point of said structure,
and a ground vibration limit of 2 inches per second peak particle velocity (ppv) shall not
be exceeded. Such structures shall also be visually inspected and their condition
recorded prior to the start of any work. No adjustment in Contract Time resulting from
any suspension(s) of work to comply with these requirements will be allowed.
Monitoring will be completed by the Engineer.
405.07
DETERMINATION OF BEARING VALUES.

B)
Loading Tests.

P300.236
Case Wave Pile Analysis Program (CAPWAP) analysis shall be performed on all test
piles initial drive and all re-strikes.
405.14
PAYMENT.
All costs resulting from the control of work to record and prevent all damages due to pile
installation shall be included in the Pay Item "Furnishing Equipment for Driving Piles".
No separate payment shall be made.
SECTION 406 - SIGN SUPPORT STRUCTURES

406.01
DESCRIPTION
Work under this section also includes the removal and disposal of existing overhead sign
structures and the demolition of abandoned sign structure foundations, as directed in the
Specifications or as shown on the Plans.
406.05
ERECTION OF SIGN SUPPORT SYSTEMS

Prior to removing an existing sign structure or installing a new one, the Contractor shall
submit details of the operation to the Engineer for approval at least 72 hours in advance.
The following existing overhead sign structures shall be removed as a part of this
Contract:
Span Sign Structure No. 1 located at approximately MP 162.2N
Span Sign Structure No. 2 located at approximately MP 162.85N
Span Sign Structure No. 3 located at approximately MP 163.35S
Cantilever Sign Structure No. 1 located at approximately MP 163.1S
Cantilever Sign Structure No. 2 located at approximately MP 163.2N
Cantilever Sign Structure No. 3 located at approximately MP 165.35S
These existing sign structures shall not be removed until they are no longer necessary
and only when authorized by the Engineer. Any existing sign panels that conflict with a
new traffic pattern shall immediately be removed from the sign structure and the sign
illumination (if any) shall also be disconnected.
Any non-salvageable items shall be disposed of in a satisfactory manner off Turnpike
property by the Contractor.
Existing sign structure footings shall be removed to a depth two (2) feet below finished
P300.236
grade and backfilled. Removal of the sign structures and footings shall be performed
with extreme care so as to avoid damage to the facilities of the NJ Turnpike and to
prevent any needless interference or delays to Garden State Parkway patron traffic.
406.07
MEASUREMENT
Removal of overhead sign structures will be measured on a lump sum basis for each
span, cantilever or butterfly type sign structure, and shall also include the removal of the
existing footings.
Concrete in Structures, Pedestals will be measured by the volume of concrete in place.
406.08
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
Remove Existing Span Sign Structure No. _____
........................................ Lump Sum
Remove Existing Cantilever Sign Structure No. _____ ...................................... Lump Sum
Concrete in Structures, Pedestals ...................................................................... Cubic Yard
Payment for demolition of median barrier will be made in accordance with Section 210.
Payment for construction of median barrier will be made in accordance with Section 508.
Payment for restoration of berm and/or shoulder pavement will be made in accordance
with Sections 303 and 310, as applicable.
Payment for drilled shafts for sign structures will be made in accordance with Section
430.
Separate payment will not be made for reinforcement steel in drilled shafts. All costs
thereof shall be included in the pay item __Drilled Shaft for Sign Structures.
No separate payment will be made for Substructure Membrane Waterproofing, the costs
of which shall be included in other associated foundation items.
SECTION 407 TFE EXPANSION BEARINGS

This Section is deleted in its entirety.
SECTION 408 - ELASTOMERIC BEARING PADS

This Section is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:
SECTION 408 LAMINATED ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS
P300.236
408.01
DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of furnishing, fabricating, and installing Laminated Elastomeric
Bearings.
This work shall also include the furnishing, fabrication, and installation of
polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)/stainless steel sliding surfaces, masonry plates, sole
plates, anchor bolts, hardware, and bearing pads as shown on the Plans, described
herein, recommended by the Manufacturer, or otherwise required to furnish completely
installed and functioning Laminated Elastomeric Bearings.
Where applicable, this work shall also include the bearing seat preparation including
existing anchor bolt removals, as indicated on the Plans or as otherwise required to
install the new Laminated Elastomeric Bearings.
Materials, testing, and fabrication/construction operations not specifically denoted on
the Plans and in these Specifications shall be in accordance with the current AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications.
For information regarding replacement of existing bearings (field measurements,
removal of existing, jacking, temporary support, etc.) see Section 418.
408.02
MATERIALS
Unless otherwise specified on the Plans, steel used for the fabrication of bearing
assemblies shall conform to ASTM A709, Gr. 36, Gr. 50, Gr. 50W, or an approved
equivalent.
Stainless steel sliding surfaces, where specified, shall conform to ASTM A240 type 304
and have a minimum thickness of 16 gage.
Materials not otherwise specified in this Section or shown on the Standard Drawings,
including PTFE sliding surface requirements shall conform to AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Construction Specifications and the following Subsections:
Bolts and Bolting Materials .................................................... 909.02
Caulking Compound .............................................................. 923.05
Anchor Bolt Epoxy Systems................................................... 923.22(B)
408.03
QUALIFIED MANUFACTURERS
Where Laminated Elastomeric Bearings are noted on the Plans for use, approved
products from any Qualified Manufacturer may be provided. The following
Manufacturers are qualified for use:
(1)
The D.S. Brown Company

North Baltimore, OH
Telephone: 419-257-3561
(2)
AMSCOT Structural Products Corp.

P300.236
Dover, NJ
Telephone: 973-989-8800
408.04
(3)
Cosmec, Inc./Dynamic Rubber

Athens, TX
Telephone: 903-677-2871
(4)
Tobi Engineering
Glenview, IL
Telephone: 847-724-7880
(5)
Scougal Rubber
Reno, NV
Telephone: 775-284-8500
(6)
Seismic Energy Products

Athens, TX
Telephone: 903-675-8571
SHOP AND WORKING DRAWINGS

Shop and Working drawings shall be furnished to the Engineer in accordance with
Subsection 104.08. The following information shall be included. Items noted with an *
shall only be required for bearings with TFE sliding surfaces:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
The total quantity of each kind of bearing required (fixed, guided, or non-guided,
guided with TFE sliding surface , or non-guided with TFE sliding surface),
grouped according to load range.
Plan view and section elevation including all dimensions required for
fabrication.
Details of all components and sections showing all materials incorporated into
the bearing.
All ASTM, AASHTO, and other applicable material designations.
The coefficient of friction for all sliding surfaces, where required.
Details of any welding process used in the bearing manufacture that does not
conform to the approved processes of the current ANSI/AASHTO/AWS D1.5
Bridge Welding Code or the ANSI/AWS D1.6 Structural Welding Code
Stainless Steel.
Vertical, horizontal, rotation, movement, and load capacities.
A schedule of all bearing offsets, where required, to ensure proper bearing
alignment under full dead load.*
Paint or coating requirements, as required.
Installation scheme with blocking or jacking schemes, as required.
Anchorage details.
Location of the fabrication plant.
The Manufacturers name and the name of its representative responsible for
coordinating production, sampling, and testing.
The Manufacturers certification package, according to Subsection 105.04, that
shall contain the following:
a.
Material test reports for all steels used.
P300.236
b.
c.
d.
e.
15.
Certificate of Compliance for all non-ferrous metals.

Material test reports for elastomeric components.
Certificate of Compliance for PTFE and any adhesive used.*
A Certificate of Compliance for the Laminated Elastomeric Bearings,
executed by an officer of the Manufacturer.
f.
Certificate of Compliance for any dowels or bolts supplied.
g.
Test reports for the performance tests.
Completed as-built elastomeric bearing table.
The shop and working drawings must be approved by the Engineer before fabrication of
the bearings begins. Such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility
under the contract for the successful completion of work.
408.05
FABRICATION OF LAMINATED ELASTOMERIC BEARING ASSEMBLIES

(A) FABRICATION
Section 18 Bearings of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications
shall be followed for the fabrication of laminated elastomeric bearing assemblies
with additional provisions as noted below:
Laminated Elastomeric Bearings shall be fully vulcanized to the sole plates and
masonry plates during the fabrication process. Where size or geometry of the
sole or masonry plates make vulcanization impractical, at the permission of the
Engineer, the Laminated Elastomeric Bearings may be vulcanized to load plates
which may then be shop welded to the sole and masonry plates, as shown on the
Standard Drawings. The use of optional load plates, associated welding, and any
required adjustment to the substructure bearing seat elevation(s) shall be at no
additional cost to the Authority.
The Contractor shall have a minimum 10% of all welds tested by magnetic
particle method. Testing shall be performed by an independent laboratory
procured by the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit test reports to the
Engineer.
(B) COATING OF STEEL SURFACES
All surfaces, except those defined below shall be coated. The surfaces to be
coated shall be shown on the working drawings. Coatings shall not impair the
clarity of the bearing identification markings. All flame cut edges of the bearing
plates shall be ground to reduce hardness and facilitate blast cleaning. All
corners of the sole plate shall be rounded to a 1/16 inch radius. All exposed
plain steel surfaces shall be blast cleaned to a near white finish in accordance
with SSPC SP-10.
Sliding surfaces shall not be coated.
Elastomeric bearing pads and steel reinforcement shall not be coated.
(1) Bearings for Steel Superstructures:
Laminated Elastomeric Bearing steel shall be painted in accordance with
P300.236
Specification Section 411. Quality assurance inspection of coatings will be in
accordance with Specification Section 411. Only the prime coat shall be
applied in the shop. All final coats shall be field applied after the installation
of the bearings.
(2) Bearings for Concrete Superstructures:
Bearing steel shall either be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A-123 or
ASTM A-153, as appropriate, or zinc metalized in accordance with AWS C2.2
to a finished coating minimum thickness of 10 mil. Quality assurance
inspection will be performed by using magnetic thickness gauges.
(C) TESTING
Testing shall be performed by the manufacturer prior to installation of the
bearings, and in the presence of the Engineer or designated testing laboratory
inspector.
Elastomeric materials and Laminated Elastomeric Bearings shall be tested in
accordance with Section 18.2.5 of the latest AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications. For the purposes of testing procedure selection, bearings shall be
assumed to have been designed using Method B unless otherwise specified on
the Contract Plans or elsewhere in these Specifications.
Sampling, testing and acceptance consideration will be made on a lot basis. A lot
shall be defined as a group of no more than fifty (50) bearings with the same size
elastomeric pad and design load rating manufactured in a reasonably continuous
manner from the same batch of elastomer, and cured under the same conditions.
This definition supersedes Section 8.2 of the AASHTO M-251 Specification.
(D) PACKING AND SHIPPING
(1) Bearings shall be securely banded together, as units, by the Manufacturer.
They shall be shipped to the project site and stored without disassembly.
The bearings shall be wrapped in moisture resistant and dust resistant
material to protect them against shipping, weather, job site conditions, and
all other normal hazards.
(2) Each bearing shall be marked in a permanent fashion that will be visible after
application of any paint coatings. The marking shall consist of the letters
N.J.T.A., the location, orientation, order number, lot number, bearing
identification number, bridge number, and month and year of manufacture.
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the marking shall be
on a face which is visible after erection of the bridge.
(3) The bearings shall be inspected within one week after arriving on the project.
Following the inspection, they shall be re-wrapped and kept clean until
installation.
(4) When installed, bearings shall be clean and free of all foreign substances.
P300.236
(5) With each shipment, a copy of the materials, fabrication and testing
compliance certifications shall be enclosed along with a certificate of
compliance for the bearing as a whole, and for all anchor bolts, dowels or
other accessories, as required.
408.06
MEASUREMENT
Laminated Elastomeric Bearings of the various sizes and types will be measured by the
number of each type and size installed and accepted.
All labor and equipment necessary to obtain field measurements will not be measured
for payment.
Shop and/or field painting, galvanizing/metalizing, welding, and testing of welds will
not be measured for payment.
408.07
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
Laminated Elastomeric Bearing ___x___........Each

No separate payment will be made for additional Laminated Elastomeric Bearings or
bearing materials furnished or otherwise consumed for testing purposes. The cost for
these bearings or bearing materials shall be considered as incidental to the Laminated
Elastomeric Bearing pay item.
No separate payment will be made for grout/leveling pads, fabric pads, TFE sliding
surface, masonry plate, sole plate, load/leveling plates, anchor bolts, caulk, elastomeric
bearing pads, welding, coatings, or any other materials and hardware required to
furnish and install fully functional and accepted Laminated Elastomeric Bearings. The
cost for these materials shall be considered as incidental to the Laminated Elastomeric
Bearing pay item.
No separate payment will be made for installation including the jacking or supporting of
the superstructure. These costs shall be considered as incidental to the Laminated
Elastomeric Bearing pay item.
No separate payment will be made where bracing, blocking or jacking of Laminated
Elastomeric Bearings is required to set them to final deformations as indicated on the
Plans. These costs shall be considered as incidental to the Laminated Elastomeric Bearing
pay item.
No separate payment will be made for coatings or repair of damaged coatings. The costs
of coatings or repair of damaged coatings shall be considered as incidental to the
Laminated Elastomeric Bearing pay item.
P300.236
SECTION 411 - PAINTING AND REPAINTING STEEL STRUCTURES

411.01
DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of partial or complete paint removal, cleaning and preparing the
steelwork surfaces of new and previously painted structures including, but not limited
to, those previously painted with basic lead-silico chromate coating systems AN and AE,
basic lead-silico coating systems B and C, unpainted new or existing weathering steel
structures, and furnishing of all paints and other materials (and equipment) for the
specified paint system, and the application thereof on the prepared surfaces to the limits
designated.
Areas to be cleaned in accordance with Paragraph 411.05(F) and painted in accordance
with Paragraph 411.05(H) will be limited to the components of various structural steel
elements damaged in the course of work under other pay items, including connection
areas at new diaphragms and repair plates, the underside of the top flange damaged by
S.I.P. pan installation, catch or shielding installation, and top flanges exposed by deck
removal as shown in the Plans and where directed by the Engineer.
Top flanges exposed by deck replacement work shall be cleaned and painted (prime coat
only), including shear connectors.
411.02
MATERIALS
Delete the first paragraph and replace with the following:
The Contractor shall use hand (SSPC-SP2) and power tools (SSPC-SP3) for existing
steelwork; the containment level to be used for hand and power tool cleaning shall be
Level 4 as described in Paragraph 411.04(B). The Contractor may use an abrasive blast
medium for cleaning areas along the top flanges of stringers and diaphragms within deck
removal limits. If abrasive blast is utilized for cleaning structural steel, the Contractor
shall provide a containment system meeting the requirements of Level 2 as described in
Paragraph 411.04(B).
The blast cleaning medium shall be an abrasive capable of providing the specified anchor
profile. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for his approval, samples of the
materials to be used as blast cleaning mediums. The samples shall be submitted at the
same time as the Shop Drawing submission.
Delete the second paragraph in its entirety and replace with the following:
Finish coat color for existing painted steelwork shall be guided by Federal Standard 595B,
P300.236
July, 1994:
Interior Stringers and Bays .................................................................................Color No. 14672
Exterior Fascia Stringer .......................................................................................Color No. 14090
Weathering Steel ..................................................................................................Color No. 20062
Recertification of paint samples, by the manufacturer, after completion of the Authoritys
independent testing, will not be accepted. Paint, which has a shelf life that expires prior
to the Contracts scheduled completion date, will not be accepted.
All paint applicators shall demonstrate proficiency on a test patch to the satisfaction of the
Engineer prior to commencing full-scale application. If, in the Engineer's opinion, the
applicator cannot demonstrate an acceptable level of proficiency, he/she shall be relieved
of this responsibility.
411.03
THICKNESS OF PAINT
Replace the fifth and sixth paragraphs, including the table between them, with the
following:
The paints for the various coats of the Systems listed, conforming to Section 913, shall be
applied to yield the following dry film thickness ranges.
System A
Spot Prime
Intermediate Coat
Finish Coat
Total DFT Range For System A*
System B
Primer
Intermediate Coat
Finish Coat
Total DFT Range For System B*
System C
Primer
Intermediate Coat
Finish Coat
Total DFT Range For System C*
4.0 6.0 mils

4.0 6.0 mils
3.0 5.0 mils
11.0 17.0 mils
3.0 5.0 mils
4.0 8.0 mils
3.0 5.0 mils
10.0 18.0 mils
3.0 4.0 mils
4.0 6.0 mils
3.0 5.0 mils
10.0 15.0 mils
* Individual coats shall not be less than specified minimum nor greater
than specified maximum values to satisfy the Total DFT Ranges for
each System.
411.04
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
(A) POLLUTION CONTROL
Replace the second through seventh paragraphs, including the table following the fourth
paragraph, with the following:
P300.236
The Contractor is advised that the existing coating systems on previously painted
structures, excluding weathering steel structures, designated in the contract may
contain red lead and/or basic lead-silico chromate paints as components. All
material removed, including, but not limited to, the blasting residue, spent blasting
medium, rust, paint particles, and dust associated with the surface preparation
operations and any other material contaminated in the cleaning process shall be
designated and handled as hazardous waste. The handling, storage, and disposal of
such waste products shall be in compliance with all requirements of the USEPA,
NJDEP, OSHA, and other regulatory agencies with jurisdiction promulgating rules,
regulations, standards, and guidelines in effect during execution of the work.
(B)
LEVEL OF CONTAINMENT
Re-designate the heading for Part 411.04(B)(4)(f) to the following Paragraph heading:
(C)
411. 05
TEMPORARY STORAGE AND DISPOSAL OF SURFACE PREPARATION W ASTE.
CLEANING AND PAINTING STEEL STRUCTURES

(A) GENERAL
For the surfaces of all welds made both in the shop and in the field, and the metal
immediately adjacent, the cleaning shall include thorough abrasive blasting or other
approved methods which will insure complete removal of slag.
(C) SHOP CLEANING
Replace the fourth paragraph with the following:
The inside of box members shall be abrasive blasted before assembly. After
completion of fabrication and bolting or welding of the member, the inside surface
shall be hand scraped as necessary to remove all rust, dirt, and other foreign
substance which may have accumulated since the surfaces were abrasive blasted; the
outside surfaces shall be abrasive blasted; all surfaces shall be swept and dusted so as
to be free of loose particles and dust immediately before painting; and then the
member shall be painted within the required limits.
411. 06
CLEANING AND PAINTING OF NEW WEATHERING STEEL

Include the following after the first paragraph:
This work shall also include the shop cleaning, preparing and painting of new ASTM
A709 HPS Grade 50W steel box girders, furnishing of all paints and other materials for
the specified paint system, and application thereof to the properly prepared surfaces to
the limits designated on the Plans.
P300.236
(F) NUMBER OF COATS AND FILM THICKNESS.
Replace the second through last paragraphs with the following:
The Dry Film Thickness of paint shall be within the ranges provided in Subsection
411.03.
The dry film thickness of the prime coat at the contact surfaces or bolted friction
splices on main members, and the top of top flanges where stud shear connections are
to be welded shall be within the range of 1 to 2.5 mils. All other contact surfaces and
surfaces to be in contact with concrete shall be within the normal primer dry film
thickness range provided in Subsection 411.03.
The dry film thickness for each coat will be determined by the use of a magnetic dry
film thickness gage. The gage shall be calibrated and used in accordance with
SSPCPA 2. A Tooke film thickness gage shall be used in accordance with ASTM D
4138 to verify the coating thickness when requested by the Engineer. If the Tooke
gage shows that the primer coat is not within the specified thickness range, the total
coating system will be rejected even if the total dry film thickness exceeds the
minimum mil thickness for the three-coat system provided in Subsection 411.03.
411.07
MEASUREMENT
Delete the second paragraph in its entirety.
Delete the first sentence of the sixth paragraph and substitute with the following:
Repainting Existing Steelwork, which includes cleaning and painting the top of the
exposed top flanges including shear connectors, will be measured by the square foot.
Steel elements other than the top of the top flanges damaged by the Contractors
activities shall be cleaned and painted at no additional cost to the Authority and will not
be measured for payment.
Development and implementation of the Lead Health and Safety Plan, Pollution
Collection and Control Plan, and Emergency Management Plan addressing the potential
lead emitting activities associated with torch cutting, bolt removal, welding, and removal
of existing coatings will not be measured for payment.
411.08
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
Repainting Existing Steelwork ........................................................................
PAY UNIT
Square Foot
No separate payment will be made for the development and implementation of the Lead
Health and Safety Plan, Pollution Collection and Control Plan, and Emergency
P300.236
Management Plan; and all other work plans, tasks and/or incidentals, but the costs
thereof will be included in the unit prices bid for the various pay items in the Contract.
No separate payment will be made for painting or galvanizing of new steelwork, but the
costs thereof will be included in the unit prices bid for the various pay items in the
Contract.
SECTION 413 - UNDERBRIDGE SLOPE PROTECTION

413.02
MATERIALS
Portland cement concrete shall conform to Section 905 except that water shall be omitted
for concrete bag slope protection. Other materials shall conform to the following
Subsections:
Riprap Stones ....................................................................................................................... 902.06
Emulsified Asphalt, Grade RS-1 ....................................................................................... 919.15
Curing Materials ................................................................................................................. 906.07
Preformed Expansion Joint Filler ...................................................................................... 907.03
Joint Sealer............................................................................................................................ 907.02
Granite Paving Block .......................................................................................................... 923.39
Mortar ................................................................................................................................... 905.11
Grout ..................................................................................................................................... 905.10
Reinforcement Steel ............................................................................................................ 908.04
Bags ....................................................................................................................................... 923.40
Geotextiles ............................................................................................................................ 923.21
Tremie Concrete shall be Class S concrete and shall conform to Subsection 905.
Common Embankment shall conform to Subsection 203.02.
Fine aggregate for the top 2-inch layer of base course for the granite block slope
protection shall conform to Subsection 902.04.
Granite paving blocks to replace the missing blocks shall conform to Subsection 923.39.
Existing dislocated granite blocks shall be reused, where possible. Mortar and grout
shall conform to Subsections 905.10 and 905.11.
Coarse aggregate for riprap stone slope or channel protection shall conform to Subsection
902.05.
Fine aggregate for the base course used with concrete or granite block slope protection
shall conform to Subsection 902.04.
According to the provisions of Subsection 902.06, the required d50 riprap stone size shall
be stated in the appropriate riprap stone Pay Item listed below.
P300.236
413.03
PREPARATION OF SLOPES
Change the title of this Subsection as follows:
413.03
PREPARATION OF SLOPES OR CHANNELS

Immediately before the construction of the slope or channel protection, the slopes or
ground surface shall be trimmed conforming to the lines and grades and shall be
thoroughly compacted by mechanical or vibrating tampers or rollers.
Where directed, remaining granite block from the existing slope protection shall be
removed. Granite blocks not to be reused on this project shall be disposed of in
The undermined areas below the existing abutment footings shall be filled in with tremie
concrete in accordance with Section 401 to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The eroded areas of the slopes shall be filled with Common Embankment, regraded and
thoroughly compacted by the use of mechanical or vibrating tampers or rollers, so that
the original grade of the slope is attained.
Existing blocks surrounding the eroded areas to be repaired as well as dislocated blocks
shall be removed as required in order to regrade and compact the slope.
SECTION 415 TEMPORARY SHEETING

415.02
MATERIALS.
References made to Subsection 909.05(C) in the first two paragraphs are changed to
909.05(D).
415.04
The Contractor shall control their operations to prevent movement or damage to any
and procedures that will prevent such damage, monitoring and controlling the vibrations
from construction activities.
The installation of temporary sheeting within a horizontal distance of 100 feet of any
commercial or residential structure requires seismic monitoring at the nearest point of
said structure, and a ground vibration limit of 2 inches per second peak particle velocity
(ppv) shall not be exceeded. Such structures shall also be visually inspected and their
condition recorded prior to the start of any work. No adjustment in Contract Time
resulting from any suspension(s) of work to comply with these requirements will be
P300.236
allowed. Monitoring will be completed by the Engineer.
415.05
MEASUREMENT.
No measurement will be made for furnishing the equipment required to install and or
remove the various types of sheeting.
415.06
PAYMENT.
No separate payment will be made for furnishing the equipment required to install and
or remove the sheeting. All costs thereof shall be included in the item Temporary
Sheeting to Remain in Place.
All costs resulting from the control of work to record and prevent all damages due to
temporary sheeting installation shall be included in the temporary sheeting pay items.
No separate payment shall be made.
SECTION 417 - BRIDGE DECK REHABILITATION

417.01
DESCRIPTION
This work shall also consist of sawcutting the edges of existing pavement overlay and
approach pavement to the depth shown on the Plans or as required by the manufacturer
of the new deck joints; the removal and disposal of existing materials encountered within
the limits of the new joint system including the cutting and removal of the existing steel
armoring and plates, and the removal of the existing joint sealers, concrete deck and
concrete headers; and the furnishing and installation of the complete joint system
including new caulk, sealer, and steel plate as shown on the Plans or as directed by the
Engineer. Replacement of joints and joint material at barrier curbs, parapets and
sidewalks with an elastic joint sealer is considered to be part of this item of work.
(A)
CONCRETE DECK REPLACEMENT.

The following is added at the end of the first paragraph:
Work shall include furnishing, placing and removing concrete construction
barrier and temporary attenuators, installing and removing catches for concrete
deck removals, furnishing and placing stay in place forms and epoxy coated
reinforcement steel, construction of new diaphragms as required, membrane
waterproofing and asphalt concrete bridge surfacing, providing heating and
thermal protection, and all else necessary to complete the concrete deck
replacement.
P300.236
(D)
JOINT RECONSTRUCTION.
Joint Replacement, Type 1P is similar to Joint Reconstruction, Type 1P except the
existing joint to be removed is a Type 1P joint.
(G)
HEADBLOCK REPAIR.
Work shall also consist of removal and legal disposal of steel armor as indicated
on the Plans, or as directed by the Engineer.
(M)
EMERGENCY CONCRETE DECK REPLACEMENT.

Delete the second sentence in the first paragraph in its entirety and replace with
the following:
Work shall include furnishing, placing and removing concrete construction
barrier and temporary attenuators, installing and removing catches for concrete
deck removals, furnishing and placing stay in place forms and epoxy coated
reinforcement steel, construction of new diaphragms as required, providing
heating and thermal protection, and all else necessary to complete the emergency
concrete deck replacement within 60 hours of Notice to Proceed.
(N)
EMERGENCY PAVEMENT REPLACEMENT.

In the second line of the fifth paragraph delete subparagraph (D) (7) herein
above and substitute with subparagraph 417.04(D) (7) described herein
below.
The following Paragraphs (O) through (S) are added after Paragraph (N):
(O)
Removal of Existing Non-Composite Deck Slabs

The work shall consist of removal of existing non-composite reinforced concrete
decks and SIP Forms where present.
(P)
EMERGENCY SPALL REPAIRS.

Emergency Spall Repairs shall consist of sawcutting, removal of deteriorated
concrete or previously placed patching materials and replacement of
deteriorated deck concrete with the specified materials required for the various
emergency types of spall repairs designated. Emergency spall repairs shall be
constructed flush with the top of the surrounding asphalt or concrete surfaces
and the perimeter of the repair area sealed with AC-20.
(Q)
EMERGENCY HEADBLOCK REPAIRS.

Emergency Headblock Repairs shall consist of removing deteriorated concrete;
cleaning and retaining existing reinforcement, joint armor anchors and joint
steelwork; addition of new reinforcement steel; doweling in additional
reinforcement as directed by the Engineer; replacement of anchor bolts with
adhesive anchors; and placing new high early strength blended cement patch
mix to the depths specified in the plans and up to proper grade lines. Work shall
P300.236
also consist of removal and legal disposal of steel armor as indicated on the
Plans, or as directed by the Engineer.
(R)
EMERGENCY JOINT RECONSTRUCTION.

Emergency Joint Reconstruction of various types shall consist of removing
deteriorated existing concrete deck, concrete headers, abutment headers, steel
armor, and steel riser bars and replacement thereof with new repair material as
specified herein.
Emergency Joint Reconstruction, Type 1A shall be constructed using non-shrink,
high early strength mortar. Emergency Joint Reconstruction, Type 1P shall be
constructed using rubber asphalt concrete.
(S)
EMERGENCY JOINT REPLACEMENT, TYPE 1P.

Emergency Joint Replacement, Type 1P shall consist of sawcutting, removing
deteriorated existing asphalt and rubber asphalt concrete and replacement
thereof with new repair material.
Emergency Joint Replacement, Type 1P is similar to Joint Reconstruction, Type
1P except the existing joint to be removed is a Type 1P joint.
417.02
MATERIALS
Portland Cement Concrete.. .................................................... 905.05
Field Anti-Corrosion Coating of Existing Reinforcement Steel ............. 908.01(B)
Joint Sealer..................................................................................................... 907.02
Asphalt Cement ............................................................................................ 904.01
At the discretion of the Engineer the Contractor may be required to use non-shrink, high
early strength mortar for various repair items when setting/curing time of concrete may
be impacted due to limited staging durations. The Contractor shall not plan or perform
his work assuming this material will be allowed for use.
In the first line of the second paragraph delete Epoxy for field coating and replace with
Field anti-corrosion coating.
Joint Reconstruction and Headblock Reconstruction areas require use of a Class A
concrete mix. A High Early Strength Concrete mix will be required for use in areas as
noted or with lane closing durations of less than four days (exclusive of overnight
closings) and in areas where unforeseen events require its use (as determined by the
Engineer) to allow lanes to be reopened to traffic on-time. Class A, High Early Strength
Concrete may be used at other areas at the Contractors option or otherwise specified
herein and subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Class A, High Early Strength
Concrete shall be that which achieves a compressive strength of 3,000 psi in 12 hours.
Joint Reconstruction and Headblock Repairs that are required to be performed during
overnight closings shall be constructed using a Non-Shrink High Early Strength Mortar
P300.236
(Rapid Set or Set-45).
See Subsection 417.06 for spall repair materials.
The Contractor shall submit mix designs for Class A and Class A, High Early Strength
Concrete mixes.
Asphaltic Plug Joints:
Elastomeric asphaltic plug joint systems shall be any or all of the following:
Wabo Expandex Joint System as manufactured by
Watson Bowman ACME Corp.
95 Pineview Drive
Amherst, New York 14228
Telephone: 716-691-7566
http://www.wbacorp.com
Thorma Joint System as manufactured by
Dynamic Surface Applications, Ltd.
373 Village Road
Pennsdale, PA 17736
Telephone: 800-491-5663
http://www.dsa-ltd.com/thormajoint.htm
No substitutes for the systems or components of the systems are permitted for the above
proprietary deck joint systems.
The elastic joint sealer for the open joints in barrier curbs, parapets and sidewalks
adjacent to asphaltic plug joints shall be:
Dow Corning 888 Silicone Joint Sealant as supplied by:
Kenseal Construction Products Corporation
1702 Industrial Highway
Cinnaminson, NJ 08077
Telephone: 877-849-9400
or approved equal.
To be considered for approval, an alternate elastic joint sealer must be compatible with
the asphaltic plug joints, bond to asphaltic plug joints, and be capable of accommodating
thermal movements of two (2) inches between temperatures of 120 degrees F and -30
degrees F.
417.03
EQUIPMENT
(A) SURFACE PREPARATION EQUIPMENT EMERGENCY
REPLACEMENT SHALL BE OF THE FOLLOWING TYPES:
1)
Sawing and Sealing Deck Joints

CONCRETE DECK
P300.236
Equipment used for sawing and sealing joints in bituminous concrete
overlay over deck joints shall conform with the following:
Sawing equipment shall conform to the requirements of
Section 401. The blades shall be of such size and configuration
that the desired dimensions of the sawcut are achieved in one
pass.
Sealing equipment shall consist of a kettle, or melter, and
applicator wand. The melter shall be constructed as a double
boiler, with the space between the inner and outer shells filled
with oil or other heat transfer medium. The melter shall
include positive temperature control, mechanical agitation,
recirculation pumps, and thermometers for continuous
reading of the temperature of both the sealing compound and
the heat transfer medium. The applicator wand shall be
heated or insulated to maintain the pouring temperature of the
sealant during the placing operation. Pouring pots or similar
devices shall not be used to fill sawed joints.
6)
Demolition Equipment
Demolition equipment must be approved by the Engineer for each
structure as detailed by the Contractors demolition plan.
417.04
CONCRETE DECK REHABILITATION

(A)
REMOVAL OF DECK SLABS.

After the first paragraph, the following is added:
The procedures and methods for removal of existing concrete deck and parapets
shall be submitted for review in accordance with the requirements of Subsection
104.08. All procedures shall be thoroughly detailed and include types of
equipment proposed, a sequence of operations, methods of protection for
existing steel work and other bridge components to remain in place, design
calculations for lifting operations, and calculations demonstrating structural
adequacy of the existing bridge superstructure components during demolition
and details for protection of all areas of the bridge that will continue to carry
traffic. These submissions are in addition to those required for catches and
temporary support systems.
For structures with deck replacement work, the Contractor shall obtain
elevations by accurate field survey along the underside of the top flange of
stringers prior to removal of any load (except pilot holes) from the bridge deck or
installation of catches. After removal of the existing surfacing, deck slab,
concrete parapet, median barrier and all material from the catches, the
Contractor shall resurvey the top of the stringers; all construction debris and
equipment shall be removed from the spans during the survey. All survey
P300.236
points shall be at the same location and shall use the same datum. At a
minimum, survey points shall be taken at the tenth point between piers and at
each deck joint along each stringer. Elevations shall be used by the Contractor to
calculate haunch values. The elevations, calculated haunch values, and shear
stud heights shall be submitted to the Engineer for review a minimum of 14 days
in advance of setting the deck forms. The Contractor will be responsible for
determining the haunch depths, shear stud heights and properly setting the stayin-place forms to achieve the required deck slab thickness.
(1)
Catches.
Delete the fifth paragraph in its entirety and replace with the following:
Catches and shielding shall be in place prior to handrail, fencing,
parapet, safetywalk removal, deck removal, bridge formwork
installation, and the placement of new concrete deck and parapet.
All catches and shielding required to protect buildings, structures,
utilities, active roadways, walkways, railroads, navigable waterways,
recreational and storage areas located beneath the work site shall remain
in place until the newly placed concrete has cured in accordance with the
specifications or until directed by the Engineer. Fascia catches and
shielding for these areas shall also remain in place until any fencing,
light standards and other parapet mounted appurtenances have been
properly installed. Catches in all other areas shall remain in place until
all demolition debris has been removed to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and the installation of the Stay In Place (SIP) form have been
completed . However, these areas shall be restricted from public access
until the bridge deck has been placed.
Delete the first sentence of the eighth paragraph and replace with the following:
Details of all catch and protective shielding systems shall be designed by
the Contractor. All timber catch or temporary flooring systems shall be
in accordance with Subsection 105.14.
Catch and Temporary flooring used as working platforms must comply
with OSHA 29CFR, Part 1926-Safety and Health Regulations for
Construction, Subpart L Scaffolds.
The following is added after the ninth paragraph:
Catch and Temporary flooring used as working platforms shall comply
with OSHA 29CFR, Part 1926-Safety and Health Regulations for
Construction, Subpart L Scaffolds in accordance with Subsection
106.02(C) of these Specifications shall be subject to the following
provisions:
For the purposes of design, Section 1926.451(a)(1) of Subpart L is further
P300.236
defined as follows:
Each scaffold and scaffold component shall be designed to resist the
following load case:
1.0DL + 4.0MIL < Failure
Where:
DL = Self Weight of Scaffold System
MIL = Maximum Intended Load applied or transmitted to the Scaffold,
including personnel, collected debris, construction materials, equipment,
or any other load which will be placed on the Scaffold.
Failure = Yielding Strength or Stress of the Scaffold System. For timber
applications, Failure shall be defined as the allowable timber stresses,
as determined by the National Design Specifications for Wood
Construction (NDS), current edition.
This load case shall be considered in addition to and independent of load
cases as required by the AASHTO Guide Design Specifications for
Bridge Temporary Works. Final Scaffold design shall be based upon the
controlling load case.
The following Subsection (3) is added:
(3)
Removal of Existing Non-Composite Deck Slabs.

Reinforced concrete deck slab sections that are non-composite with the
stringers, floorbeams, diaphragms, or girders may be removed by saw
cutting directly over the supporting members that are to remain. This
work shall include removal of decks with and without stay in place
forms. The method shall be allowed on a trial basis. The trial section
shall include deck areas from the original construction and deck areas
that were replaced via other contracts where stay in place forms and
carrier bars were installed, if both exist. The selection of the trial section
shall be approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall locate the top
flange of the supporting steel members at each transverse cut that is
made over a member directly supporting the deck, and at a maximum
spacing of 10 feet when longitudinal cuts are made over and along the
length of a member directly supporting the deck. The Contractors
proposed methods for locating the top flange of the supporting steel
members shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer prior to
conducting the work. This shall be done in order to verify the existing
deck thickness at each cut location over a structural member for both the
trial section and for production. The Engineer shall observe the trial
sections, shall determine if the proposed method is producing
satisfactory results, and that the structure is not being damaged in any
way from the saw cutting operation. The Authority shall have the sole
P300.236
discretion as to whether to allow the Contractor to proceed with this
method. If the Contractor does not show the capabilities to conduct the
saw cutting over the steel members without damaging them either
during the trial section or at any time thereafter during the execution of
the Contract, the Contractor shall be required to follow the procedure
defined in the Standard Specification under Subsection 417.04 (A)
REMOVAL OF DECK SLABS, second paragraph. The Contractor shall
repair any damage to the structural steel or other bridge members
caused by the deck removal operation. The Contractor shall also be
responsible for any design required to develop repair details for
damaged steel or other members caused by the saw cutting operation.
The design and repairs shall be done at no additional cost to the
Authority and no adjustment to time of completion for any stage of work
will be made. All repair plans shall be signed and sealed by a licensed
New Jersey Professional Engineer. The cost of the trial sections shall be
considered incidental to the work items and no separate payment shall
be made for them.
(E)
EMERGENCY CONCRETE DECK REPLACEMENT.

Delete this Subsection in its entirety and substitute with the following:
When directed to make emergency concrete deck replacements under the
limitations specified in Subsection 417.01(M) above, the Contractor shall begin
work immediately after the necessary lane closings have been installed by the
Contractor or by the Authoritys maintenance forces and shall perform and
complete all work required to remove and replace the concrete deck slab and
have the lane available for opening to traffic within 48 hours of the notice to
proceed.
All deck slab replacement work shall be constructed in accordance with the
requirements specified in paragraphs (A) through (D) above except that the
curing shall not be less than 3 hours.
417.06
SPALL REPAIRS.
Delete all rows in the table after the first paragraph, beginning with the fourth row after
the heading row, and substitute the following:
Type 4
Type 5
Type 5A
Removal of full depth concrete deck slab adjacent to filled or armored

deck joint and replacement with Class A concrete mix capable of
obtaining a 3,000 psi minimum compressive strength within 12 hours and
which contains a water reducing admixture conforming to Subsection
906.03. The concrete shall be mixed, placed, finished and cured in
Removal of concrete in deck and replacement with non-shrink, high early
strength mortar (Section 905.15: Rapid Set or Set-45). Spall Repair Type 5
shall be used only where called for or expressly authorized in writing by
the Engineer.
P300.236
Type 5B
Type 6
strength mortar (Subsection 905.15: Rapid Set or Set-45). Spall Repair,

Type 5A shall be used only where called for or expressly authorized by
the Engineer. Spall Repair, Type 5A shall be constructed flush with the
top of adjacent asphalt concrete wearing surface. Required for limited
duration (overnight) lane closings.
strength mortar (Subsection 905.15: Pavemend Products by Ceratech).
Spall Repair, Type 5B shall be used only where called for or expressly
authorized by the Engineer. Spall Repair, Type 5B shall be constructed
flush with the top of adjacent riding surface (asphalt concrete wearing
surface, LMC overlay, or bare concrete deck). Required for all bare deck
and LMC overlay deck, partial depth spall repairs.
Removal to full depth of concrete slab and replacement with Class A
concrete mix capable of obtaining a minimum compressive strength of
3,000 psi within 12 hours, and which contains a water-reducing
admixture. The type of admixture, as directed by the Engineer, shall
conform to the requirements of Subsection 906.03. The concrete shall be
mixed, placed, finished and cured in accordance with Section 401.

At areas designated by the Engineer, the Contractor will be required to install a
temporary catch system prior to performing spall repairs. Temporary catches shall be in
accordance with Subparagraph 417.04(A)(1). Shop drawings for temporary catch
systems shall be submitted to the Engineer in accordance with Subsection 104.08.
(E)
SPALL REPAIR, TYPE 4.

The following is added at the end of the fourth paragraph:
After cleaning the existing reinforcement steel, the Contractor shall apply a field
anti- corrosion coating.
(F)
SPALL REPAIR, TYPE 5.

The first sentence is deleted and replaced with the following;
The lateral limits of each Type 5 spall repair area to be removed and replaced on
asphalt surfaced bridge decks within areas of the bridge deck from which the
existing surfacing has been removed, will be delineated by the Engineer and
suitably marked. Written approval by the Engineer to use Type 5 spall repairs
on asphalt surfaced bridge decks is required.
(H)
HEADBLOCK REPAIR.
Delete the first sentence of the first paragraph in its entirety and replace with the
following:
Where the concrete, concrete repair mortar or elastomeric concrete of the existing
header has failed or deteriorated, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall chip out and remove the existing concrete, concrete repair mortar or
elastomeric concrete to sound concrete or to a minimum depth as defined in the
P300.236
plans below top of the roadway, whichever produces the greater depth.
Delete the last sentence of the first paragraph in its entirety and replace with the
following:
Type 1 repairs will vary in depth from a minimum depth of 1 in. below
reinforcement steel to a maximum depth of 4 in.
The new preformed joint material shall be properly cut and installed in proper
alignment with the existing joint, shall conform to the roadway profile and cross
slope and set one inch below the roadway surface to allow for one inch wood
nailer to be installed along the top. The wood nailer shall be removed prior to
the paving operations. After the paving, the asphalt concrete bridge surfacing
shall be sawcut and removed from the area above the preformed joint filler
material. The recess shall be filled with hot poured joint sealer. The finished
surface in the transverse headblock direction shall follow the profile of the
roadway. The finished surface in the longitudinal headblock direction shall
follow the cross slope of the existing joint.
At all headblock reconstruction areas (regardless of construction staging
duration), the Contractor is required to furnish and apply field anti-corrosion
coating to all exposed reinforcement steel, anchor straps, riser bars, and joint
support steelwork that is to remain.
(1)
Type 1 Repairs.
This subparagraph is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the
following:
Type 1 repairs shall be performed in accordance with Headblock Repair,
Type 2 and Type 3 except that the repairs shall be performed using a
Class A concrete mix capable of obtaining a minimum compressive
strength of 3,000 psi within 12 hours and which contains a waterreducing additive. The type of additive shall conform to the
requirements of Subsection 906.03. The concrete shall be mixed, placed,
finished and cured in accordance with Section 401. Vehicular traffic will
not be permitted to travel over the newly placed concrete until the
concrete has attained a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 pounds
per square inch, unless otherwise authorized in writing by the Engineer.
For repairs made within overnight closings, the repair material shall be
Pavemend TR or SLQ by CERATECH, Inc. (Subsection 905.15).
(2)
Type 2 and Type 3 Repairs.

The following is added after the third sentence of the first paragraph:
The concrete for the Type 2 and Type 3 repairs shall be a Class A High
Early strength concrete mix capable of obtaining a minimum
P300.236
compressive strength of 3,000 psi within 12 hours when the work is to be
completed during a Stage with a duration of less than four (4) days.
(J)
EMERGENCY SPALL REPAIR, TYPE 5.

Emergency Spall Repair, Type 5 at locations where no pavement removal is
required, shall be constructed flush with the top surface of the adjacent concrete
or asphalt surfaces. The perimeter of all repair areas shall be sealed with AC-20.
(K)
EMERGENCY SPALL REPAIR, TYPE 6.

Emergency Spall Repair, Type 6 at locations where no pavement removal is
required, shall be constructed flush with the top surface of the adjacent concrete
or asphalt surfaces. The perimeter of all repair areas shall be sealed with AC-20.
(L)
EMERGENCY HEADBLOCK REPAIR.

After the sixth paragraph add the following:
The new preformed joint material shall be properly cut and installed in proper
alignment with the existing steel joint, shall conform to the roadway profile and
cross slope and set one inch below the roadway surface to allow for one inch
wood nailer to be installed along the top. The wood nailer shall be removed
prior to the paving operations. After the paving, the HMA surfacing shall be
sawcut and removed from the area above the preformed joint filler material.
This area shall be filled with a hot poured joint sealer. The finished surface in the
transverse headblock direction shall follow the profile of the roadway. The
finished surface in the longitudinal headblock direction shall follow the cross
slope of the existing joint.
The following Paragraphs (M) and (N) are added:

(M)
SPALL REPAIR, TYPE 5A.

Spall Repair, Type 5A shall conform to Paragraph 417.06(F) for Spall Repair,
Type 5 except that the repair shall be flush with the top of the adjacent bridge
surfacing.
(N)
SPALL REPAIR, TYPE 5B.

Spall Repair, Type 5B shall conform to paragraph 417.06(F) for Spall Repair, Type
5 except that the repair shall be flush with the top of the adjacent bridge
surfacing (asphalt concrete wearing surface, LMC overlay, or bare concrete
deck). The concrete replacement material shall be Pavement TR. The
replacement material shall completely fill the opening in the concrete deck and
the adjacent bridge surfacing (asphalt concrete wearing surface, LMC overlay, or
bare concrete deck). The Pavement TR shall be installed monolithically from the
lower limit of the concrete deck repair to the top of the adjacent riding surface.
The top surface of the repair shall be flush with adjacent top of roadway and
shall be finished in accordance with Paragraph 401.12(C).
P300.236
417.07
JOINT RECONSTRUCTION
THE CONTRACTOR IS HEREBY ADVISED THAT THE EXISTING COATING
SYSTEMS ON THE PREVIOUSLY PAINTED BRIDGES MAY CONTAIN RED LEAD
AND/OR BASIC LEAD SILICO CHROMATE PAINTS AS COMPONENTS. Activities
such as structural steel removal, bolt removal, torch cutting, welding on structural steel
and other activities related to the items described herein may cause lead to be emitted.
The Contractor shall include provisions in the Pollution Control Plan, Lead Health and
Safety Plan and Emergency Management Plan as required to be submitted in Subsection
411.04 of the Specifications to address other lead exposure activities as described above.
Welding of bar reinforcement, where shown or directed, shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the most current AWS D1.4. Suitable ventilation shall be provided when
welding epoxy coated reinforcement bars.
At all joint reconstruction areas (regardless of construction staging duration), the
Contractor is required to furnish and apply field anti-corrosion coating to all exposed
reinforcement steel, anchor straps, riser bars, and joint support steelwork that is to
remain.
(H)
JOINT RECONSTRUCTION TYPE I P.

The following is added to the beginning of this paragraph:
All procedures for the removal of the existing joints, including staged construction,
shall be as directed by the Engineer and as recommended by the manufacturer of
the asphaltic plug joint system. The joint system shall be installed in strict
accordance with the following specifications and the manufacturers instructions.
In the event that there are discrepancies between these specifications and the
manufacturers instructions, with the approval of the Engineer, the manufacturer's
requirements shall govern. Two weeks prior to the first scheduled installation, two
copies of written installation procedures and material certifications shall be
submitted to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall arrange with the manufacturer of the joint system to assign a
representative to the Project. The representative shall be completely
knowledgeable and competent in all aspects with the joint systems materials and
installation procedures.
The representative shall be present during each joint systems installation to assure
proper preparation, mixing, installation and curing. The representative shall be
responsible to advise the Engineer and the Contractor that the correct installation
methods are being followed; certify to the Engineer that all materials are being
used in accordance with the manufactures requirements; train assigned personnel
in the correct methods of installation; and certify to the Engineer that the joint
system has been properly installed.
P300.236
All certifications from the manufacturer's representative to the Engineer shall be in
writing.
The asphaltic plug joints shall not be installed when the temperature is below 55
degrees F.
The joint installation shall be centered over the existing expansion joint gap to the
width determined by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. Variation
in the width of the joint may be necessary to accommodate site conditions as
determined by the manufacturer and/or the Engineer.
Saw cut the pavement transversely at the determined width along the joint.
Remove all material, including wearing surface, waterproof membrane, concrete
header, and any old joint material between the saw cuts and to a depth which will
allow the new joint system to be properly installed. The trench shall be cut to a
minimum depth of two (2) inches. This will form the blockout for the asphaltic
plug joint. The bottom surface of the blockout, called the joint table, shall be
parallel with the plane of the roadway surface (true and flat).
Concrete removal shall be by means of hand held tools only. Care shall be taken
when removing existing materials so as to prevent damaging existing sound
concrete to remain. Damage to sound concrete shall be repaired by the Contractor
in accordance with Section 401, as directed by the Engineer, at no additional cost to
the Authority.
The joint blockout area shall be prepared by cleaning free of dust and drying the
blockout area and a minimum 6 inches on either side of the blockout. To
accomplish this, use a hot compressed air lance capable of producing 3,000 degrees
F and a directional velocity of 3,000 fps.
Heat the bridge joint binder to a minimum of 350 degrees F in a double oil jacketed
melter. The melter must be equipped with a continuous agitation system,
temperature controls, and calibrated thermometers to maintain the binder at the
manufacturer's recommended temperature.
Coated hemp or backer rod shall be placed into the joint opening at a minimum
depth of one (1) inch. Pour the binder into the bridge joint gap, overfilling the joint
opening to allow the binder to be spread onto the joint table. The binder will form
a bond breaker between the joint table and the closure plate.
The closure plate shall be mild steel plate, minimum 1/4 inch thick by eight (8)
inch wide, cut in four (4) foot lengths. Actual plate dimensions shall be as per
manufacturer's recommendations. Spike holes shall be drilled, on a longitudinal
centerline, at one (1) foot intervals.
The closure plate shall be centered and placed over the entire length of joint
opening. The plate shall be secured by placing spikes through the pre-drilled plate
sections or locating plugs (for openings greater than two (2) inches), or by welding
as detailed on plans and/or recommended by manufacturer. Welding shall
P300.236
conform to the ANSI/AASHTO/AWS D1.5-88, Bridge Welding Code. The closure
plate shall sit flush on the bottom of the joint blockout effectively preventing joint
material from entering the joint opening.
All exposed areas of the blockout area shall be coated on the horizontal, vertical
and closure plate surfaces with binder to form a monolithic waterproofing
membrane.
The manufacturer's recommended aggregate shall be heated to a minimum of 300
degrees F in a rotating drum mixer until all visible signs of dust and moisture are
removed. The temperature of the aggregate shall be controlled by using a hand
held, calibrated, digital temperature sensor. Blend the binder into the aggregate at
the manufacturer's specified ratio. The specified aggregate must be totally precoated prior to installation.
The time after completion of the joint material placement that the joint can be
opened to traffic shall be as recommended by the joint manufacturer.
The preparation and installation of the elastic joint sealer (including primers) at
barrier curbs, parapets and sidewalks shall conform to the manufacturers
installation procedures and recommendations.
(1)
Thorma Joint System.

For installing the Thorma Joint System the Contractor shall use the
manufacturer's specified aggregate premixed with the BJ200 binder. The
joint blockout shall be filled with precoated mix in one layer for joints up to
a three (3) inch depth, or two (2) or more layers as required for deeper
joints. Compaction should take place after the joint has cooled to 160
degrees F using a vibratory plate or roller and the joint made flush with the
existing road surface. The compacted joint surface must be heated with a
heat lance to a tack consistency. A final thin membrane of binder shall be
installed followed immediately by a broadcast application of clean, dry
sand.
Subparagraph (2) is deleted and replaced with the following:

(2)
Wabo Expandex Joint System.

For installing the Wabo Expandex Joint System the Contractor shall use the
manufacturer's specified aggregate premixed with the modified elastomeric
binder (EBJ material). The joint blockout shall be filled with precoated mix
and shall be compacted level with the roadway to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. Sand or small aggregate shall be broadcast over the top to
eliminate tackiness.
P300.236
The following Paragraphs (M) and (N) are added:
(M)
JOINT REPLACEMENT, TYPE 1P.

When directed by the Engineer, existing Type 1P deck joints shall be
reconstructed by removing the newly placed asphalt surfacing to the limits
shown, modifying the existing joint and installing hot poured rubber asphalt
concrete joint headers and replacing the steel plate spanning the joint opening.
The existing Type 1P deck joint shall be removed by saw cutting as shown on the
Plans or as directed by the Engineer, and not through use of a milling machine.
(N)
EMERGENCY JOINT RECONSTRUCTION, TYPE 1A.

The Contractor may be directed to perform Emergency Joint Reconstruction,
Type 1A, at any time including night time and weekends, while the contract is in
force (date contract is awarded to date of execution of final estimate by the Chief
Engineer).
When directed to make Emergency Joint Reconstruction, Type 1A, the Contractor
shall begin work immediately after the necessary lane closings have been
installed and shall perform and complete all work required to performed the
Joint Reconstruction, Type 1A as directed by the Engineer and have the lane(s)
open to traffic within 12 hours of the notice to proceed or within the time frame
predetermined by the Engineer which, in general, is limited to the hours between
11 PM and 5 AM.
Emergency Joint Reconstruction, Type 1A shall be performed in conformance
with the requirements of Paragraph 417.07(F) except that the repairs shall be
made utilizing non-shrink, high early strength mortar.
417.09
INSTALLATION OF FASCIA CATCH/DECK SUPPORT SYSTEMS

(A)
DESCRIPTION.
The first paragraph is replaced with the following:
This work shall consist of the design, furnishing, fabricating, installation and
removal of all fascia catches and deck support metal work required for deck
construction on bridges. All work shall be done in accordance with the
applicable portions of Subsections 104.08, 104.13, 105.14 and 417.04, the contract
plans, and as specified herein.
(B)
The eighth paragraph is replaced with the following:
Permissible girder loads and stresses shall be in conformance with the latest
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
All cantilevered deck form support systems shall be designed in accordance with
the current edition AASHTO Guide Design Specifications for Bridge Temporary
P300.236
Works, with the modifications as follows:
Design wind loads as defined in Section 2.2.5 and Appendix C of the above noted
guide specification shall also be applied vertically on the horizontal plan area of
the fascia catch, and horizontally on the vertical elevation area of side enclosure
system, whether it be open handrail, partially open snow fence, closed plywood,
or of any other construction. The design loads on these elements shall be used for
consideration of uplift due to wind conditions on cantilevered deck form support
systems. An uplift restraint system shall be furnished and installed where
calculated wind uplift forces due to either vertical or horizontal wind forces
exceed the dead load of the cantilevered deck form support system. All uplift
restraint systems shall be positively attached to the bridge superstructure via
cables, clamps or other devices as approved by the Engineer. Additionally, all
uplift restraint systems that rely solely on cable tie down systems shall be
supplemented with an intermediate uplift restraint system spaced at no more
than 16 feet on center and shall be positively attached to the bottom flange of the
fascia girder. For the purposes of wind uplift design only, a factor of safety of 1.0
shall be utilized and live load shall not be considered.
The effective loading combination as shown below is added to Table 2.3 of the
AASHTO Guide Design Specifications for Bridge Temporary Works. Group V
loading shall be considered for cantilevered deck form support system designs:
Group
Group V
Where:
Table 2.3 Load Combinations

Percentage of Basic
Load Combination
Allowable Stress or
Load
DL + DP + Wu
100%
DL = design dead load

DP = dead load of supported permanent structure (where applicable)
Wu = uplift force due to wind load
417.10
MEASUREMENT
Removal of existing Non-Composite deck Slabs will not be measured for payment. All
costs for the removal of the Non-Composite deck slabs shall be included in the price bid
for the item Demolition of Existing Structures No. ____
Temporary catches and shielding, including vertical shielding, installed for the
demolition of the existing structures under Section 210 will be measured by the surface
area, complete and in place. All other catches and shielding, including catches installed
for the construction of deck slabs, for the item Concrete Deck Replacement with
Catches, and catches installed for fall protection, work platforms or for the Contractors
convenience will not be measured for payment.
P300.236
417.11
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
Furnishing, Installation and Removal of
Temporary Shielding .......................................................................................
Square Foot
Temporary catches and shielding, including vertical shielding, installed for the
demolition of the existing structures under Section 210 will be paid for under the pay
item Furnishing, Installation and Removal of Temporary Shielding.
No separate payment will be made for temporary catches and shielding required for the
construction of the deck slabs, catches installed for fall protection and catches installed as
work platforms or for the Contractors convenience.
Removal of existing deck slab, approach slabs, bridge joints, parapets, steel framing,
abutments, piers, foundations and footings will be included in the pay item Demolition
of Existing Structures No.___, under Section 210.
SECTION 418 - BRIDGE STRUCTURAL REPAIR

418.01
DESCRIPTION
The following is added.
This work shall include constructing temporary supports at the piers of existing Structure No.
163.1N in accordance with these specifications and the Plans. The temporary support is required
to permit a portion of each existing five-column reinforced concrete pier to continue supporting a
temporary traffic lane on part of the existing superstructure while the remaining portion of the
existing superstructure and pier cap beam are demolished and replacement cap beam and new
superstructure are constructed. The temporary supports will subsequently be removed after the
replacement superstructure and pier caps have been constructed and traffic shifted onto the new
structure.
418.02
MATERIALS
Under the materials list, change Subsection reference for Non-Metallic, Non-Shrink
Mortar or Grout to 905.13. Add the following to the Materials List:
Non-shrink High Strength Mortar....................................... 905.12
Substructure Membrane Waterproofing ............................. 923.06
Steel used for Temporary Supports shall conform to the requirements of the projects Specifications
418.03
REPAIR SUBSTRUCTURE CONCRETE

(A)
Removal of Spalled Concrete
Replace the 2nd paragraph with the following:

P300.236
Deteriorated, damaged, and loose concrete shall be removed to sound concrete by

chipping or other approved methods and to depths determined by the Engineer. The
minimum depth of removal shall be as shown on the plans; however, if reinforcement
bars are exposed, the removal shall continue until at least 1 beyond the bars. The limits
of the cavity for deep, narrow repairs (depth equals or exceeds twice the width) shall be
undercut to lock the repair in place. All exposed reinforcing steel shall be cleaned and
protected from damage and shall remain in place.
418.04
SIDEWALK, PARAPET AND CURB SURFACE REPAIRS

Replace the second and third paragraphs with the following:
The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing the design proportions of cement, fine
aggregate, coarse aggregate, water, air entraining and admixture and water reducing
retarder admixture (when used), which will produce a workable Class B concrete mix.
Coarse aggregate shall consist of broken stone only and shall not exceed inch in size.
Exposed reinforcement steel shall be cleaned of all adhering concrete and of any rust and
scale. Any exposed existing steel reinforcement to remain, which becomes damaged,
shall be replaced or repaired by welding as directed by the Engineer at no cost to the
Authority. All exposed existing steel reinforcement to remain in the new construction
shall be field epoxy coated. Existing reinforcement to remain, projecting from remaining
existing concrete section, which exhibits section loss due to rusting shall be replaced, as
determined by the Engineer, with new epoxy coated reinforcement drilled and grouted
in accordance with Section 401.09(A) above.
The cementitious material for parapet surface repairs shall be workable Class B concrete
mix as described above for safetywalk and curb surface repairs.
When repairing sidewalks the Contractor shall utilize the adjacent top of parapet profile
in order to establish a uniform and even top of sidewalk profile.
(A)
Removal of Damaged and Deteriorated Concrete

The fifth paragraph is replaced with the following:
The catch shall be of an outrigging type of temporary shielding which encloses
the deck slab overhang and parapet. The catch shall be designed to withstand a
load of at least 120 pounds per square foot or greater if heavier loads are
anticipated. Field welding of the catch to any structural component to the bridge
shall not be permitted. Any materials dropped on the catch shall not be allowed
to accumulate and shall be removed promptly, in an approved manner, off
Garden State Parkway property. The selection of sizes, materials, their
arrangements and details shall be the Contractors option and responsibility, but
subject to the approval of the Engineer. All work shall be done in accordance
with the applicable portions of Subsections 104.08, 104.13, 105.14 and 417.04, the
contract plans, and as specified herein.
P300.236
The eight paragraph is replaced with the following:

Deteriorated, damaged and loose concrete shall be removed to sound concrete by
chipping or other approved methods and to depths determined by the Engineer.
The minimum depth of removal shall be as shown on the Plans or referenced
Standard Drawings. Contractor shall provide means for preventing or catching
broken concrete and debris from falling through the open joints.
Delete the last paragraph and replace with the following:
Exposed reinforcement steel shall be cleaned of all adhering concrete and of any
rust and scale. Any exposed steel reinforcement to remain in the new
construction, which becomes damaged, shall be replaced or repaired by welding
as directed. All exposed existing steel reinforcement to remain in the new
construction shall be field epoxy coated.
(B)
Concrete Repairs
Vehicular traffic will not be permitted to travel immediately adjacent to the
repair areas until the concrete has attained a minimum compressive strength of
3,000 pounds per square inch, as indicated by test specimens, but in no case less
than 48 hours, unless otherwise authorized in writing by the Engineer.
(C)
Water Repellent Treatment

The application of the water repellant treatment shall be as specified for
Subsection 401.19. The treatment shall be applied to the new exposed concrete
surfaces and shall overlap the existing concrete as directed by the Engineer.
418.06
SUBSTRUCTURE WATERPROOFING
Include the existing provisions of this Subsection in a new Paragraph (A) entitled
Substructure Waterproofing as follows:
(A)
Substructure Waterproofing

Adjacent roadways, waterways, sidewalks, and ROW of others shall be protected
during the cleaning operations through the use of a containment system. The
Contractor shall contain, collect and dispose of all materials off NJTA ROW at
completion of the cleaning operations. The Contractor is alerted to the fact that
abutment bridge seats and pier caps may be covered with debris and bird
droppings which may be considered as hazardous waste. Proper handling and
disposal of such waste shall be part of the work of cleaning concrete surfaces for
waterproofing and will not be measured for payment. Contractor shall clean
P300.236
entire bearing areas, pier top and abutment seats prior to preparing concrete
surfaces for waterproofing.
Delete existing Paragraphs (A) and (B), and add the following Subparagraphs (1) and (2):
(1) Pier
The waterproofing material shall be applied to the pier cap seat, exposed
concrete bearing pads and extend down the vertical surface one foot below the
seat elevation, or to the limits shown on the Plans.
(2) Abutment
The waterproofing material shall be applied for the full height of the front face of
the abutment backwall and headblock, the abutment seat and drainage trough,
exposed concrete bearing pad surfaces and the vertical front face for the
abutment extended one foot below the seat elevation or to the limits shown on
the Plans.
The following Paragraph (B) is added:
(B)
Substructure Membrane Waterproofing

Concrete placed for repair of spalls, as specified in Subsection 418.03, shall be
fully cured and all other work in the vicinity of the substructure unit shall be
completed before waterproofing material is applied. The concrete surfaces to
receive the waterproofing membrane system shall be thoroughly cleaned by
sandblasting to remove all existing coatings, laitance, grease, rust, waxes, algae,
slime and pollutant coatings. Masonry plates to be waterproofed shall be
cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP3. Cleaning shall include the removal of
existing waterproofing materials which are peeling or otherwise deteriorated by
cutting, scraping and sandblasting. Existing asphalt and concrete spillage shall
be removed. If waterblasting is used, the equipment must be capable of a
minimum of 4,000 psi.
The Contractor is alerted to the fact that abutment bridge seats and pier caps may
be covered with debris and bird droppings which may be considered as
hazardous waste. Proper handling and disposal of such waste shall be part of
the work of cleaning concrete surfaces for waterproofing and will not be
measured for payment. Contractor shall clean entire bearing areas, pier top and
abutment seats prior to preparing concrete surfaces for waterproofing.
The Contractor shall provide a containment system to prevent blasting medium
and debris from falling from pier caps. The system shall be approved, by the
Engineer, prior to beginning work. Adjacent roadways, sidewalks, and ROW of
others shall be protected during the cleaning operations through the use of
temporary shielding or other containment measures. The Contractor shall
contain, collect and dispose of all materials off NJTA ROW at completion of the
cleaning operations.
After thorough cleaning of the substructure unit, any depression deeper than
inch on the horizontal surfaces shall be filled with non-shrink high strength
P300.236
mortar.
Prior to application of the waterproofing membrane, the perimeter of the steel
masonry plate at the interfaces with the concrete substructure shall be sealed. .
Material, air and surface temperature shall range between 32 degrees F and 85
degrees F during application and cure, unless a special formulation is being used
and the manufacturer has been consulted and issues a written approval. The
maximum application/substrate/material temperature shall be 104 degrees F.
Material shall not be placed when rain is forecast within 24 hours. Relative
humidity at the time of application in the specific location of the application shall
be less than 85 percent and the surface temperature shall be at least 5 degrees
above the dew point.
Sufficient material to place the entire membrane system shall be in storage at the
site prior to any field preparation, so that there shall be no delay in procuring the
material for each days applications.
The material shall be stored so as not to be damaged from the elements and to
insure the preservation of their quality and fitness for the work. The storage
space shall be kept clean and dry, shall contain a recording high-low
thermometer, and the temperature of the storage space shall not fall below or rise
above that recommended by the manufacturer. Every precaution shall be taken
to avoid contact with flame.
Stored materials, even though accepted before storage, shall be inspected by the
manufacturer prior to their use in the work and shall meet the requirement of the
Contract at the time of use. Any material which is rejected because of failure to
meet the required tests or that has been damaged so as to cause rejections shall
be immediately replaced at no additional cost to the Authority.
The entity (applicator) performing the work of this section shall submit proof
of having the skill and experience necessary for the installation of the specified
membrane system placed on jobs of equal complexity to this Contract. Such
proof shall include but not be limited to the name and resume of the individual
superintendent who will be responsible for the field work. The resume shall list
experience with such installation, including the project name, the name of the
owner for whom the work was performed and the scope of the work performed,
and shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer prior to commencing
these operations. A Technical Representative from the material manufacturer
must be on site for such time until the applicator has demonstrated competence
in material application as determined by the Engineer.
All handling, mixing and addition of components for the primer and waterproof
coating shall be performed in a safe manner to achieve the desired results in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations as approved or directed
by the Engineer. The system shall not be applied when weather or surface
conditions are such that the material cannot be properly handled, sprayed, and
cured within the specified requirements.
P300.236
418.07
REPAIR BEARINGS, RESET ROCKERS, RESET BEARINGS AND REPLACE

MASONRY PLATES
(C)
Repair of Structural Steel.

The following is added at the end of this Paragraph:
Where required to complete steel repairs, removing and replacing deteriorated
rivets with new high strength bolts shall be performed at the locations shown on
the plans or as directed by the Engineer. Repairs shall be constructed as shown
on the plans and approved Shop Drawings, as required.
Where directed on the Plans, the Contractor shall inspect riveted connections and
replace deteriorated rivets with new high strength bolts. The Engineer will
approve all proposed rivet replacements prior to starting the removal process.
Rivets shall be considered as deteriorated and suitable for replacement when
the following conditions are noted:
1.
2.
3.
The rivet is missing or sheared.

50% or more of the rivet head is missing or where it has corroded to the point
where 50% or more of the head can be removed with a 2 lb ball-peen hammer.
The rivet can be moved or turned by hand.
Where rivets cannot be clearly identified as deteriorated, the Engineer will
visually inspect the rivets and determine their condition.
The contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval their proposed method
for rivet removal in accordance with subsection 104.08 of the Specifications.
Rivet removal will not be permitted until the removal method has been
approved and demonstrated successfully in the judgment of the Engineer. In the
event that the Engineer determines that rivet removal work is resulting in
damage to the existing steel, the Contractor shall cease rivet removal operations
until a new proposed method has been demonstrated and approved by the
Engineer.
Rivets to be removed shall have their heads removed with a rivet-buster, by
cutting, air-arc gouging, or grinding and the shank driven, drilled, cored, or
jacked out as required.
Special provisions shall apply where air-arc gouging methods are to be used:
1.
All air-arc equipment operators shall be certified welders. Air-arc gouging

procedures shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.5 C-3.2.6. In the
presence of the Engineer, each operator shall demonstrate the ability to remove
the heads from four (4) button head ASTM F-1852 bolts mounted in a vertically
oriented 12 x 12x thick plate without visibly damaging the plate, or raising
the temperature of the plate to a temperature of greater than 150 degrees
Fahrenheit. Operators which have not operated the air-arc equipment for 30
P300.236
2.
3.
calendar days or more shall be required to re-demonstrate their ability as

outlined above.
50% of all rivets scheduled for removal shall be circled and crossed on the rivet
head to remain using a 150 degree Fahrenheit Tempilstik heat sensitive chalk
before air-arc gouging of the opposite rivet head. These rivets shall be submitted
to the Engineer for review. Air-Arc operators who submit rivets with melted
chalk shall be subject to recertification or expulsion from the worksite at the
discretion of the Engineer.
The Engineer reserves the right to request recertification of any Air-Arc operator
at any time at his discretion.
The method employed by the Contractor shall minimize damage to connected
components. Care shall be taken not to enlarge rivet holes. Unless otherwise
noted, all bolts shall be the same diameter as the rivets being replaced. If the
bolts will not fit the existing rivet holes, the holes shall be carefully reamed to
accommodate the bolts. High-strength bolts shall be installed after the nicks,
burrs, and foreign substances that might interfere with seating of the bolt head
and nut washers are removed. Light grinding may be ordered by the Engineer.
At locations where surrounding material has been damaged as a result of the
Contractors operations, the surrounding material shall be repaired at
Contractors expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer. When reaming of more
than 1/16-inch in diameter greater than the original hole diameter shown on the
plans and installing an oversize bolt is required for the repair, the reaming,
furnishing and installing of oversized bolts shall be at the Contractors expense.
The Contractor shall submit a Quality Control Plan for all rivet removal
operations in accordance with subsection 104.08 of the Specifications.
High strength bolt installation shall be in accordance with Section 403.
Bolts shall be installed in vacated rivet holes as soon as is practicable. Only one
vacant rivet hole per connection may be present at any time.
Where additional plates prohibit removing only one rivet at a time and replacing
it with a new high strength bolt, the Contractor may, at the permission of the
Engineer, temporarily occupy vacated rivet holes with drift pins.
Threads in bolts are to be excluded from all shear planes. The Contractor shall be
responsible for maintaining an adequate inventory of bolt sizes and lengths such
that rivet replacement operations may proceed in a timely fashion. After all bolts
have been installed and fully tightened, the Contractor shall test all bolts for full
torque via calibrated Skidmore type wrench.
The following Subsection is added:

(E)
Temporary Supports.
The Contractor shall construct the work and remove portions of the existing
structure in such sequence and by such methods that will maintain the stability
P300.236
of members until all members have been re-supported and removed. The
Contractor shall provide adequate temporary false work if and where necessary
to maintain the stability of the structures under all conditions.
Upon completion of the temporary support, and transfer of all load to the new
support has occurred, the existing concrete column and footing shall be
removed. All materials removed from the existing bridge structures shall become
property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of off the project site unless
noted or approved otherwise by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit design calculations and drawings of the Temporary
Support signed and sealed by a New Jersey Professional Engineer to the
Engineer for review a minimum of 4 weeks prior to beginning the work. The
submittal shall include the following:
A detailed construction plan showing the proposed operations, methods,
sequence, schedule and equipment to be used.
Details of any required false work
A Temporary Support Preconstruction Conference shall be held at least 7 days
prior to the start of the work. The Engineer, the Contractor, the subcontractor for
the removal work, the Contractors Health and Safety Officer and the
Contractors Traffic Control Supervisor shall attend the preconstruction
conference. The Temporary Support Construction Plan shall be finalized at this
Conference.
Submittal of the final Temporary Support Construction Plan to the Engineer, and
field inspection performed by the Engineer, will in no way relieve the Contractor
of full responsibility for the work and procedures.
The Contractors attention is directed to the fact that it is of extreme importance
to safeguard the temporary supports. It shall be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor to provide and maintain adequate protection of the temporary
supports for the duration of their use.
Should an unplanned event occur during the work or load transfer, or the work
deviate from the Temporary Support Construction Plan, the work shall
immediately cease after performing any work necessary to ensure worksite
safety. Suspension of the work shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility under the terms of the Contract. Operations shall not resume until
modifications have been made to correct the conditions that are resulted in the
suspension, and a written notice to resume work has been issued by the
Engineer.
418.08
MEASUREMENT
Substructure membrane waterproofing will be measured by the total area of concrete
P300.236
surfaces actually covered with the two coats of waterproofing material system.
Furnishing and applying elastomeric sealant for sealing around masonry plates will not
be measured separately.
Replace Structural Steel Diaphragm will be measured by number of structural steel
diaphragm replaced.
Steel Repair, Type 1 will be measured by Linear Foot of beam repaired.
The item Temporary Support will be measured by the number of temporary supports
installed for the existing substructures as called out on the Plans or as directed by the
Engineer.
The removal/replacement of rivets shall be incidental to the repair item and no separate
measurement will be made.
418.09
PAYMENT
Delete the following:
PAY ITEM
Replace Structural Steel Diaphragm
PAY UNIT
Lump sum

PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
Replace Structural Steel Diaphragm..
Each
Substructure Membrane Waterproofing .......................................................
Square Foot
Temporary Support.
Each
Steel Repair, Type 1. Linear Foot
Payment for substructure membrane waterproofing will include the cost for cleaning and
preparing surfaces, furnishing and applying all materials required for waterproofing
substructures and sealing around bearings.
Payment for Replace Structural Steel Diaphragm shall include all cost of labor and
material including all structural steel for diaphragm and connections, nuts, bolts, any
other hardware and painting.
Payment for Steel Repair, Type 1 shall include all cost of labor and material including all
structural steel, nuts, bolts, any other hardware, painting, cleaning and removing any
deteriorated areas required for this repair.
No separate payment shall be made when rivets are replaced as part of a larger structural
repair as designated on the plans or directed by the Engineer. All costs thereof shall be
P300.236
included in the larger structural repair item (s).
No separate payment will be made for the removal of the temporary supports after they
are no longer required.
SECTION 426 - ANTI-GRAFFITI PROTECTIVE COATING

Delete this Section in its entirety.
The following Section is added:
SECTION 428 - MECHANICALLY STABILIZED EARTH (MSE) WALLS

428.01
DESCRIPTION
This work shall include the design and construction of mechanically stabilized earth
(MSE) wall structures composed of precast concrete facing panels, cast-in-place and/or
precast parapets, moment slabs, copings, concrete leveling pads, soil reinforcement
elements, joint materials, fasteners, Select Backfill, and all other appurtenant items of
construction within the Common Structure Volume as shown on the Plans, included as
part of the selected MSE Wall System, or as specified herein.
Design and construction of MSE walls shall be in accordance with AASHTO LRFD
Design and Construction Specifications with modifications herein and in accordance
with the NJTA Design Manual wherein:
Load Factor Design (LFD): Internal Strength and Stability for Barrier Parapet and
Moment Slab System
Allowable Stress Design (ASD): External Stability for Moment Slab and Leveling Pad.
All labor, materials, equipment, and tools as required to prepare the site, construct the
leveling pad, construct the wall, place and compact the Select Backfill, and construct the
coping and traffic barrier shall be supplied by the Contractor.
Where an MSE wall is constructed supporting a roadway that will be subjected to
chemical deicing, installation of a High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) geo-membrane
liner system, as shown on the Plans and specified in 428.02(C), shall be included. All
labor, materials, transportation, handling, storage, supervision, tools and other
equipment that may be necessary to install and test the HDPE liner system shall be
included.
428.02
MATERIALS
Materials shall conform to the current editions of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications with Interims and AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications with
Interims with modifications herein and the provisions of the wall system selected for
construction in this contract.
Bearing pads shall conform to the requirements of the wall manufacturer.
P300.236
Filter fabric shall conform with Subsection 923.21.
Where select backfill may be inundated with chemically aggressive tidal, flood or
ground water, the use of soil reinforcements of stainless steel Grade 316L may be
considered. In such a case, minimum corrosion rates shall be 0.5 mil/year for the
first 10 years and 0.2 mil/year for subsequent years. The wall system supplier shall
make recommendations regarding the corrosion rates that shall provide the
required 75 or 100 year service life. The determination of corrosion rates shall be
based on data presented in the most recent edition of Underground Corrosion, by
Melvin Romanoff.
(A) MSE Wall Systems
The following MSE Wall Systems are permissible for use in this Contract:
Sine Wall MSE Panel System
Sine Wall, LLC
7162 Liberty Centre Drive, Suite 105
West Chester, Ohio 45069
www.sinewall.com
513-759-2345 Office
513-297-7930 Fax
Reinforced Earth as manufactured by
Reinforced Earth Company
8614 Westwood Center Drive, Suite 1100
Vienna, VA 22182-2233
Telephone Number: 703-749-9246
Retained Earth as manufactured by
Reinforced Earth Company
8614 Westwood Center Drive, Suite 1100
Vienna, VA 22182-2233
SSL MSE Plus Retaining Wall System as manufactured by
SSL
4740 Scotts Valley Drive, Suite E
Scotts Valley, CA 95066
Fax Number: 831-430-9340
Isogrid Retaining Wall System as manufactured by
The Neel Company
8328-D Traford Lane
Springfield, VA 22152
Tricon Retained Soil Wall System
Tricon Precast, Ltd.
P300.236
Main Office
15505 Henry Rd.
Houston, Tx 77060
Info@Triconprecast.Com
281-931-9832 Office
281-931-0061 Fax
877-387-4266 Toll Free
Earth Tec Retaining Wall System
EarthTec, Inc.
413 Browning Court
Purcellville, VA 20132
703-771-7305 (tel)
703-771-7306 (fax)
Use of extensible soil reinforcement for MSE walls shall not be permitted.
Selection of only one (1) wall system will be permitted for use on this Contract. The
Contractor shall make its own arrangements to purchase the materials and services
from one of the manufacturers of a permissible MSE Wall Systems listed herein.
An on-site technical representative from the selected MSE Wall Systems
manufacturer shall be present to assist and instruct during the installation of the
first two-panel courses, as a minimum.
Except as may be modified within this Section, all applicable provisions of Sections
400 and 900 shall apply in furnishing MSE Wall Systems.
(B) Select Backfill Material
Unless otherwise noted on the Plans, Select Backfill conforming to the requirements
herein shall be used within the Common Structure Volume as shown on the Plans and
specified in Subsection 428.06 and may be procured from off-site sources or from on-site
borrow excavation.
Select Backfill used in the MSE Common Structure Volume shall be reasonably free from
deleterious materials, shale or poor durability particles and shall conform to the
following gradation limits as determined by AASHTO T 27:
Sieve Size
4 inches
inch
No. 4
No. 40
No. 200
Percent Passing
100
30-100
5-85
0-60
0-10
Material that is composed primarily of gravel (material having less than 40 percent
passing a in sieve) should be considered to be a coarse backfill. When such material is
used, a Class 1 high survivability geotextile filter, in accordance with AASHTO M 288
P300.236
designed for filtration performance following the guidelines in FHWA NHI-07-092
(Holtz et al., 2008), should encapsulate the coarse graded backfill to within 3 ft (1 m)
below the wall coping. Adjoining sections of separation fabric should be overlapped by a
minimum of 12 in. (0.30 m). Additionally, the upper 3 ft (1 m) of fill should contain no
stones greater than 3 in. (75 mm) in their greatest dimension, and should be composed of
material not considered to be gravel backfill, as defined herein.
Recycled concrete shall not be permitted to be used as select backfill material.

Select Backfill shall meet the following electrochemical limits:
Property
PH
Organic Content
Standard
Greater than 3,000
at 100% saturation
Acceptable Range of 5 - 10
1.00% Maximum
Chloride
Less than 100 ppm
Sulfates
Less than 200 ppm
Magnesium Sulfate Loss

Sodium Sulfate Loss
Less than 30% after 4 Cycles

Less than 15% after 5 Cycles
Resistivity, - cm
Test Procedure
AASHTO T 288
AASHTO T 289
AASHTO T 267
AASHTO T 291 or
ASTM D 4327
AASHTO T 290 or
ASTM D 4327
AASHTO T 104
AASHTO T 104
Prior to any construction (Preconstruction), the Contractor shall take the specified
number of test samples from all proposed Select Backfill material sources and submit the
results to the Engineer for review and approval. For the design of the wall including soil
reinforcing elements, the wall system supplier shall use:
the friction angle determined from test results
an appropriate unit weight
the electrochemical limits for select backfill specified herein
No materials shall be delivered to the site until approved by the Engineer.
Test sampling shall be performed throughout the course of the MSE wall construction
(During Construction) as materials are delivered to the site and at the prescribed rates.
Except as noted below, sample tests that fail to meet the specified requirements may be
repeated at the Contractors option. Repeated sample tests shall be averaged with the
failing sample test to determine the final tested soil properties. A maximum of two (2)
repeated sample tests will be permitted.
The frequency of sampling and testing shall be performed as described below for all
limits noted above. A minimum of two samples per structure shall be taken.
Additional samples shall be taken whenever the appearance or behavior of the Select
Backfill changes and as directed by the Engineer.
Select Backfill Test Sampling Frequency:
P300.236
Range of
Resistivity
(-cm)
>10,000
5,000 to
10,000
<5,000
General
Description
Crushed
rock and
Gravel
<10%
passing No.
10 sieve
Sandy
Gravel and
Sands
Silty sands
and Clayey
sands
screenings
Preconstruction
No.
Samples
1/31
During
Construction
Sample
Interval (yd3)
4000 / 20001
3/61
20001
4000 /
5/101
2000 / 10001
# resistivity tests / # tests for pH, Cl, and SO4
Comments
A. pH outside the
specified limits is not
allowed for any
sample.
B. Backfill sources shall
be rejected if resistivity
measured for any one
sample is less than 700
-cm, chloride content
> 500 ppm or sulfate
content > 1000 ppm.
C. For materials with
resistivity <5000 -cm,
Chloride and Sulfate
testing requirements
shall apply.
If the resistivity is greater or equal to 5,000 ohm-cm the chloride and sulfates
requirements may be waived.
The angle of internal friction for the Select Backfill, as determined by the direct shear test
in accordance with AASHTO T 236 or the tri-axial compression test in accordance with
AASHTO T 234-85, shall not be less than 30 degrees.
Where greater than 75% of the particles of the Select Backfill are retained on the sieve,
the direct shear and tri-axial compression test requirements may be waived in lieu of an
assumed 34 degree soil angle of internal friction.
The Plasticity Index (PI) of the Select Backfill, as determined by AASHTO T 90 shall not
exceed 6.
AASHTO T-267 shall report the organic content as a percent by weight of the total soil
fraction and not only what is passing the number 10 sieve. Organic content of select
backfill shall be limited to 1 percent by weight of the total soil fraction.
ASTM G187 may be substituted for AASHTO T 288 in instances where insufficient
material passing the number 10 sieve is present. This test shall be completed on materials
passing the number 4 sieve with an appropriately sized resistivity box utilized.
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer a Certificate of Compliance certifying that
the Select Backfill complies with this Subsection prior to the installation of the wall.
P300.236
A copy of all test results performed by the Contractors Testing Agency which are
necessary to ensure compliance with these Specifications shall also be furnished prior to
delivery and placement of the select backfill.
(C) High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
HDPE geo-membrane liner systems shall have a nominal thickness of 30 mils. The
geo-membrane shall be manufactured of new, first quality resin and shall be
compounded and manufactured specifically for the intended purpose. The resin
manufacturer shall certify each batch for the following properties:
Property
Specific Gravity
Melt Index
Carbon Black Content
Test Method
ASTM D 792
ASTM D 1238
ASTM D 1603
Requirements
> 0.940
< 0.4g/10 min.
2% - 3%
The HDPE supplier shall submit this certification for the Engineers verification of
the material.
The surface of the HDPE geo-membrane liner system shall not have striations,
roughness, pinholes or bubbles and shall be free of holes, blisters and any foreign
matter, such as soil or oil accumulation.
428.03
Methods of Construction shall conform to the current editions of AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Specifications with Interims and AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications with Interims with modifications herein and the provisions of the
permitted wall system selected for construction in this contract.
(A) Precast Panel Unit Production/Tolerances
All units shall be manufactured within the following tolerances:
(1) All dimensions within 3/16 inch.
(2) Deviation from vertical or horizontal, 1/8 inch per 5 feet.
Units shall be rejected because of failure to meet any of the requirements specified
above. In addition, any or all of the following defects as assessed by the Engineer
shall be sufficient cause for rejection:
(1) Defects that indicate imperfect molding.
(2) Defects indicating honeycombed or open texture concrete.
(3) Defects in the physical characteristics of the concrete units, such as:
(a) Stained front face due to excess form oil or other reasons.
(b) Signs of aggregate segregation.
(c) Broken or cracked corners.
(d) Tie strips bent or damaged.
(e) Lifting inserts not usable.
(f) Exposed reinforcing steel.
(g) Cracks at the PVC pipe or pin.
P300.236
(h) Insufficient concrete compressive strength.
(i) Panel thickness in excess of 3/16 inch from that shown on the plans.
(j) Deviation from flatness of exposed surface in excess of 1/8 inch per 5 feet
An additional inspection shall be made prior to erection to determine any damage
which may have occurred during storage.
The Engineer will determine whether spalled, honeycombed, chipped, or otherwise
defective concrete shall be repaired or be cause for rejection. Repair of concrete, if
allowed, shall be done in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer at no additional cost
to the Authority.
Repair to concrete surfaces which will be exposed to view after completion or
construction shall be approved.
(B) Wall Construction/Tolerances
Finished MSE walls shall be erected within the following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The overall vertical alignment tolerance, or plumbness, from top to bottom of

the structure, shall not exceed 1/2 inch per 10 foot of wall height.
Deviation from horizontal alignment shall not exceed inch.
Vertical and horizontal alignment tolerance, or plumbness, shall not exceed
in. when measured with a 10 ft. straight edge on a selected wall section.
The maximum allowable offset between any two panels shall not exceed inch.
Soil reinforcement shall be uniformly tensioned to remove any slack in the material
or in the connections to the facing panels. Where an individual soil reinforcement
element has multiple connections to a facing panel, a minimum of two connections
per layer per panel shall be in full contact upon tensioning the element with
maximum gaps of 1/16 inch at remaining connections.
The compacted density of the Select Backfill shall be determined by taking one test
series for each half height of wall panel of elevation, to a maximum of 3 feet, placed
in accordance with AASHTO T310 Method B. Select Backfill shall be compacted to a
minimum of 95% maximum density or greater if specified by the MSE wall system
manufacturer. Optimum Select Backfill moisture content to achieve minimum
required compacted soil density shall be as determined by AASHTO T99.
The specified compaction of the Select Backfill shall be accomplished by use of large,
smooth drum, vibratory rollers with the exception of the 5 foot zone directly behind
the facing panels. No sheepsfoot rollers shall be used.
Within the 5 foot zone, small, single or double drum, hand operated, walk-behind
vibratory rollers, or walk-behind vibrating plate compactors shall be used, and at
least three passes shall be made.
When there is evidence of wall displacement or disturbance, compaction shall be
accomplished by use of a smooth drum static roller.
P300.236
The compaction equipment shall be capable of providing uniform density
throughout the depth of the layer of the Select Backfill being compacted with no
disturbance to the vertical or horizontal alignments of the previously placed panels.
Settlement is expected at MSE Abutments and Wingwalls at Structure Numbers
163.0S, 163.0N, 163.1S, 163.1N, 163.2S and 163.2N, and MSE Retaining Wall Numbers
163-1,through 163-4. These walls should be evaluated by the contractor for the
estimated amount and time rate of settlement. Based on this evaluation, the
Contractor shall make the appropriate provisions in the layout, scheduling and
design of the walls especially the coping and moment slab. The anticipated total
amounts of settlement due to consolidation of the underlying soils are shown on the
Plans.
Also at the aforementioned MSE Abutments, Wingwalls and Retaining Walls,
construction of the first panel immediately below the moment slab, moment slabs,
coping, parapets and pavement box shall not begin until a waiting period of at least
90 days or a duration directed by the Engineer to allow the settlement process to end.
This time is assumed to begin when the wall and adjacent embankment are
constructed to the limits stated above. The placement of the leveling pad/footing
shall be such that the minimum embedment as published on the contract plans is
achieved prior to commencing the retaining wall backfill and associated
embankment construction. The Engineer will evaluate actual settlements based on
field instrumentation data to determine when settlement is complete. The Engineer
will be the sole judge to determine that the settlements have ended and the next stage
of construction may begin, including construction of the wall panel immediately
below the moment slab, moment slabs, coping, parapets and pavement box.
For the MSE walls, ensure that the wall coping system will accommodate the full
range of settlement, including zero settlement, differential settlement between stages
and anticipated long term settlement, without requiring cutting of any precast panels
or units.
(C) High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Construction
Before liner installation, it shall be assured that the area that is to be lined shall be
smooth and free of sharp objects or debris of any kind. Atmospheric exposure of
geo-membrane to the elements following lay down shall be a maximum of fourteen
(14) days. The Contractor shall install HDPE geo-membrane liner free of holes and
tears.
The HDPE shall be placed below the pavement, above the first row of reinforcements
and over the parapet moment slab (where present) and over specified areas as shown
on the plans. The HDPE shall be sloped to drain away from the facing panels.
HDPE shall not be installed during periods of precipitation or in conditions of
excessive moisture such as fog or dew in accordance with the HDPE manufacturers
recommendations and as approved by the Engineer.
P300.236
All seams of the HDPE geo-membrane liner system shall be, as per the
manufacturers specifications, sealed or overlapped to prevent leakage. Seams shall
be oriented parallel to the line of maximum slope. Seams shall have a minimum
finished overlap of 4 inches unless a greater overlap is specified by the HDPE
manufacturer.
Field testing of seams, according to the manufacturers specifications, shall be
conducted to verify satisfactory seaming conditions.
When backfilling, care shall be taken to prevent damage to the HDPE system. Any
tears, punctures or holes incurred during the installation process shall be assessed by
the Engineer and the membrane shall either be repaired in accordance with
recommendations of the membrane manufacturer or replaced at the Engineers
discretion at no additional cost to the Authority.
Perforations through the liner shall be limited. Where penetrations are necessary, the
Contractor shall provide details demonstrating the method(s) of sealing the
penetration for approval by the Engineer.
(D) Construction Stormwater Management
At the end of each construction period, the Contractor shall slope the last placed level
of backfill away from the wall facing to direct runoff or rainwater away from the wall
face. Surface runoff shall not be allowed to enter the wall construction site from
adjacent areas.
428.04
WORKING DRAWINGS
Working drawings shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with the requirements
specified under Subsection 104.08. The Common Structure Volume shown on the Plans is
anticipated to envelop the majority of potential wall system reinforced earth volume
requirements. However, should the limits of structure volume for the proposed wall
system extend beyond the limits of the Common Structure Volume, the wall system shall
be submitted as a Substitution in accordance with subsection 428.05. The Substitution must
be approved prior to submitting working drawings. At a minimum, working drawings
shall include the following:
(A) Design calculations, signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State
of New Jersey, in conformance with current edition of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
and Construction Specifications with Interims and modifications herein and the
provisions of the approved wall system selected for construction in this contract. MSE
walls shall be designed for a minimum 75 year design life. MSE walls which support
embankments under bridge abutments shall be designed for a 100 year design life.
All MSE wall components shall be designed for the 100-year flood elevation and the
project environment. Walls shall be designed for rapid drawdown conditions to
account for the differences in hydrostatic pressure for a 100-year design flood; and/or
rapid draining embankment material can be used as select backfill.
(B) General notes, design parameters, soil characteristics of Select Backfill, and factors of
safety and/or load and resistance factors.
P300.236
(C) An elevation view of the wall showing:
(1) Elevations along the top of the wall, at beginning and end of wall, at 25 foot
intervals, at changes in grade, at changes in Common Structure Volume limits;
and at precast panel unit joints where indicative of wall geometry.
(2) Elevations and step locations for leveling pads and/or footings.
(3) The location of the final ground line.
(4) Number and type of precast panel units.
(5) A numbered panel layout for fabrication and erection purposes.
(6) Designation of breaks in vertical alignments and elevations.
(7) Locations and elevations/inverts of any utilities or drainage which passes
through the retaining wall or the Common Structure Volume.
(D) A plan view of the wall showing:
(1) The offset from the construction baseline to the face of precast wall units at all
changes in horizontal alignment.
(2) ROW limits and their relationship to the wall with offsets and stations to wall
corners and ends.
(3) Locations of piles, drilled shafts, noise walls, sign structures, or other
appurtenant items which are supported by the wall or its parapet/coping.
(4) Locations and alignments of any utilities or drainage which passes through the
retaining wall or the Common Structure Volume.
(5) The offset from the construction baseline to limits of Common Structure
Volumes at all changes in horizontal alignment and offsets of CSV limits.
(E) Typical sections of walls showing:
(1) Limits of cut and fill work.
(2) Limits of Select Backfill, retained backfill behind the Common Structure
Volume, and drainage materials.
(3) Limits of Common Structure Volume and associated appurtenant items such as
drainage features and soil reinforcing elements.
(4) Location of final ground lines.
(F) Precast panel unit details for all panel types, including non standard panels, with all
dimensions necessary to construct the panels with locations in the member of all
appurtenant items such as reinforcement steel, soil reinforcing element attachment
points, and lifting devices.
(G) Details for footings, leveling pads and footing or leveling pad step details, where
required.
(H) Details for precast barriers, copings, connections to all appurtenant items such as
railings, fences, lighting standards, and noise barriers.
(I) Details for wall construction and soil reinforcing element placement to accommodate
any obstructions such as piles, drilled shafts, utilities, acute corners, slip joints,
highway lighting systems, drainage structures and any other obstructions.
(J) Details for any cast in place elements with all dimensions necessary to construct the
elements with locations in the member of all appurtenant items such as reinforcement
steel.
(K) Detail for any architectural treatments such as facing finish, texture, and color.
(L) The manufacturer's installation manual including sequence of construction. Two
bound copies of the approved manual shall be furnished to the Engineer.
428.05
SUBSTITUTIONS
P300.236
Wherever requirements for wall components, proprietary components, or Methods of
Construction are specified, it is intended to establish a standard of quality and shall not
be interpreted to preclude substitutions by Contractors subject to conditions given
hereinafter.
Substitution will be considered when such proposed substitution equals or exceeds that
specified with respect to quality, workmanship, service, maintenance, economy,
reliability of operation, code compliance, and aesthetics.
When the Contractor requests substitution, it shall first thoroughly investigate its
proposed substitution and certify to the Engineer, in writing, that said proposed
substitution is equal to that specified. It shall include with said certification all required
data, samples, reports and tests to substantiate its findings. The Engineer will decide if
such substitution is equal to that specified; and if found to be so, may then approve the
substitution. The Engineer's decision will be final and binding to all parties.
Where proposed substitution requires modifications to the Common Structure Volume
shown on the Plans or the selected wall system extends beyond the limits of the Common
Structure Volume shown on the Plans, the Contractor shall quantify all impacts and
adjustments to affected item quantities such as but not limited to excavation, backfill, and
sheeting and the Project schedule as a part of its substitution request. Additional costs
which arise from quantity or schedule impacts of the substitution shall be borne solely by
the Contractor. Approval of the disposition of the pay limits and quantities to
accommodate the substitution shall be part and parcel to the approval of the substitution.
Approved substitutions shall be at no additional cost to the Authority. Rejection of a
requested substitution shall not be considered as a basis for a claim against the
Authority.
428.06
MEASUREMENT
Mechanically Stabilized Earth Walls will be measured by the total number of square feet
of retaining wall face area. The area measured will be the product of the average vertical
height between final rear face and front face ground lines and the total lengths of the wall
as given on the Plans. Within the Common Structure Volume or except as may otherwise
be provided for, no quantity other than the square foot wall area as defined above will be
measured for payment.
Common Structure Volume
The Common Structure Volume (CSV) is the volume that contains all components of all
retaining wall systems considered for construction at a given site. The limits of the CSV
are defined as:
End Limit Planes: Vertical planes, normal or radial to the wall alignment, at
begin and end stations of the wall system.
Forward Limit Plane: Vertical plane(s) two feet or other designated distance
shown on the Plans forward of the fascia. The fascia is defined as the forward
limit of wall coping or barrier parapet face, wall panel or unit face or other
physical feature as shown on the plans
P300.236
Rear Limit Plane: Vertical plane(s) at the rear limits of the Select Backfill. For the
purposes of defining the CSV, this limit will be located parallel to the Forward
Limit Plane and at minimum distance of 70% of the average vertical dimension
between the Bottom Limit Plane and the Top Limit Plane, plus one (1) foot and
will include any porous fill, all wall appurtenances such as drainage systems,
pertinent retained fill and any work to be included in the wall pay item.
Bottom Limit Plane: Horizontal Plane(s) at the lower elevations of the wall to
include the leveling pad(s)/footing(s), the undersides of the select backfill or
modular units and excavations required for the construction of the select backfill
or modular units, extending between the Forward and Rear Limit Planes of the
CSV.
Top Limit Plane: Plane(s) defining the configuration (slope, roadway, pavement
box, etc) at the top of the wall extending between the forward and rear limits of
the CSV. Where finished grade of an MSE wall is defined by a pavement system,
the CSV Top Limit Plane shall be defined as the underside of the pavement
system subgrade material as noted in the Plans.
Unless otherwise noted in the Plans or Specifications, all components of the wall system
and all components, elements or appurtenances , such as copings, parapets, barriers,
moment slabs, wall underdrains, geo-membrane liner systems, etc., founded on or
located within the CSV or attached to any component of the wall system within the CSV
shall be included in the CSV.
428.07
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
MSE Retaining Wall No. ___
MSE ___ Abutment
PAY UNIT
Square Foot
Square Foot
No additional payment will be made for Substitutions under Subsection 428.05.

No additional payment will be made for costs resulting from submission, approval or
rejection of Substitutions under Subsection 428.05.
Separate payment for control of groundwater, from whatever source including wick
drain conveyance, and lighting standard bosses, will not be made. All costs thereof shall
be included in the unit price bid for MSE Retaining Wall No.___ or MSE
______Abutment as applicable
Payment for electrical items will be made in accordance with Division 600 unless
otherwise noted on the Plans.
P300.236
SECTION 429 - HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE (HPC)

429.01
DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of the construction of portland cement concrete deck slabs,
headblocks, closure pours, and cast-in-place parapets with the use of High Performance
Concrete (HPC). HPC is defined as concrete that meets special performance and
uniformity requirements that cannot always be obtained by using conventional
ingredients, normal mixing procedures and typical curing practices. Construction shall be
as specified in Sections 304 and 401 except as modified herein.
This work shall also consist of furnishing and installing methacrylate crack sealer for the
sealing of cold joints and the interface between new concrete and metal such as scuppers
or deck joints as shown on the Plans.
429.02
MATERIALS
Materials shall conform to the following Sections and Subsections:
Aggregates ..................................................................................................................902
Concrete, Mortar and Grout ....................................................................................905
Portland Cement Concrete ......................................................................................905.05
Concrete Admixtures Curing Materials and film Evaporators.........................906
Joint Materials ............................................................................................................907
Reinforcement Steel ..................................................................................................908.01
Permanent Metal Bridge Deck Forms ....................................................................909.07
Concrete Penetrating Sealer ....................................................................................923.06(G)
Epoxy Bonding Compound .....................................................................................923.08
Epoxy Mortar .............................................................................................................923.09
Waterstops ..................................................................................................................923.17
Methacrylate Crack Sealer .......................................................................................923.06(I)
Materials, admixtures and Methods of Construction not specifically covered in the Plans
and these Specifications shall conform to the latest edition of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Specifications and the Standard Specifications of the New Jersey Turnpike
Authority, Sixth Edition, dated 2004.
The ratio of coarse aggregate to fine aggregate shall be a minimum of 1.5 with a total coarse
aggregate content not lower than 1800 lbs.
The total amount of cementitious material should be limited to 700 lbs./cu.yd.
In order to achieve the desired resistance to chloride penetration, an appropriate
proportion of pozzolanic material of silica fume and fly ash shall be provided in the mix
design.
Proportions of pozzolanic materials shall be such that silica fume will replace a maximum
of 5% of the total cementitious material by weight and fly ash a maximum of 20% of the
total cementitious material.
P300.236
Silica Fume. Prior to submitting a mix design, a sample of the silica fume admixture
shall be submitted to the Authoritys testing laboratory and tested for conformity against
the requirements of the latest AASHTO M 307 or ASTM C 1240 standard and shall be
accompanied by a copy of the manufacturers recommendations. Silica fume admixture
shall be approved by the Engineer prior to its use on the Contract. Only one brand of
silica fume admixture shall be used for the entire duration of the Contract. Silica fume
admixture may be supplied either in dry or in slurry form. If the slurry form is used, it
shall be homogeneous and agitated to prevent separation. The Contractor shall submit a
procedure for the introduction of the silica fume into the mix for the Engineers approval.
Fly Ash. Fly ash for HPC shall conform to ASTM C 618, Class F except that the loss on
ignition shall not be more than 2.5 percent. Fly ash used to control alkali-silica reactivity
shall be Class F and shall contain not more than 1.5 percent available alkali in accordance
with ASTM C 618, Table 1A. Before each source of fly ash is approved, certified results
of tests conducted by a testing agency shall be submitted to and verified by the Engineer.
Accompanying the certification shall be a statement from the supplier listing the source
and type of coal, the methods used to burn, collect, and store the fly ash, and the quality
control measures employed. Fly ash, Class C will not be permitted for use.
Conformance to the requirements for loss on ignition and fineness shall be determined by
the supplier for each truck load of fly ash delivered to the mixing site. The test values
determined shall be included on the delivery ticket. The Engineer may require that the fly
ash not be used until the Authority has performed tests for loss on ignition and fineness.
429.03
MIX DESIGN AND FABRICATION OF THE HPC

Fabrication Requirements. For the construction of the HPC item of work, the HPC shall
be fabricated in accordance with the requirements of Section 401, or as stated within this
Section.
Mix Design Verification. In the development of the HPC mix design, the following
performance requirements, in accordance with the indicated test method, shall be
achieved. The verification mix shall be produced in the batching plant using those
materials and equipment to be used for production. A minimum of 8 cubic yards shall be
produced for each of the two (2) required mix designs for verification of the HPC. The
Authoritys testing laboratory shall cast samples from each of the two concrete batches.
A report to document these results shall be provided to the Engineer. The Contractor
shall obtain the results of these standard tests from an AASHTO accredited testing
agency, that is approved for the portland cement concrete testing methods specified in
the below table. The Contractor shall submit a list of their testing laboratorys
accreditations.
The mix design verification testing shall be accomplished by the Contractor at no cost to
the Authority.
The Authoritys testing laboratorys lab results will govern the acceptance of the mix
design.
P300.236
Performance
Characteristic
Scaling Resistance
(x = visual rating of the surface
after 50 cycles)
Freeze-Thaw Durability
(x = relative dynamic modulus
of elasticity after 300 cycles)
Chloride Permeability
56 days (coulombs)
Standard Test
Method
ASTM C 672
Performance
Required
x = 3 maximum
12 x 12 x 3
AASHTO T 161
ASTM C 666
Proc. A
X = 80% minimum
3 x 3 x 10
1,000 maximum
4 x 8 cylinder
0.55 maximum
3 thick min. 28
in.2 min. surface
area
(6 x 6 x 3)
4 x 4 x 11
prism
6 x 12 cylinder
90 day ponding
AASHTO T 277,
ASTM C 1202
AASHTO T259/T260
56 days Free Shrinkage
ASTM C 157
28 day Compressive Strength

(Verification Strength)
Early Age Concrete
AASHTO T 22
ASTM C 39
AASHTO T 22
ASTM C 39
Flexural Strength
ASTM C 78
450 microstrains
maximum
5,000 PSI minimum
Mold Size
6 x 12 cylinder
3,500 PSI minimum
700 PSI minimum
See ASTM C 78
Notes:
1.
For the Scaling Resistance performance testing, as prescribed in the Standard Test
Method, specimens shall be moist cured for 14 days and then air cured for 14 days.
a.
If the chloride permeability requirement has been achieved in 28 days,

the chloride permeability shall be considered acceptable. If the required
chloride permeability is not achieved in 28 days, the HPC sample shall
be tested at 56 days. Final acceptance of the HPC sample for chloride
permeability will be determined by the results of AASHTO T259/T260.
b.
A minimum of two (2) mix designs shall be submitted for approval and
verification in accordance with Subsection 905.05 at the preconstruction
conference. To expedite the approval procedure, the Authority will
perform verification testing and review concurrently with that
conducted by the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit all required
samples to the Authority for independent mix design verification testing.
If the mix designs are not approved by the Authority, the mix designs
shall be modified and resubmitted for approval.
c.
In accordance with the above referenced AASHTO T277 test, at 28 and 56

day intervals (cure time prior to test), and AASHTO T259/T260 test, the
P300.236
Authority will perform chloride permeability testing to document the
quality of the HPC mix design and to verify the results submitted in the
above referenced report.
2.
429.04
d.
d.
The Contractor may contact personnel at Rutgers
University to obtain guidance in developing the HPC mix design
for the project. Dr. Hani Nassif, telephone number 732-445-4414,
may be contacted for such guidance.
e.
The Early Age Concrete strength performance tests shall be required for
bridge decks that are placed under staged construction with live load.
For the Free Shrinkage Test (ASTM C157) the curing method and duration should be
consistent with the NJTA specifications. The test is to be performed on specimens that
are cured using a modified curing procedure as per NJTA Specifications by applying wet
burlap for 14 days instead of the 28 days cure specified in the ASTM C157 procedure. The
following readings as specified by ASTM C157, which is hour after de-molding,
another reading at 14 days of curing, and in air storage after curing 4, 7, 14, 28 days and
8, 16, 32 and 64 weeks.
PRODUCTION OF THE HPC

1.
As per the provisions of Subsection 401.11, Subpart C, a plan of operation for

placement of the HPC items shall be submitted for review and approval by the
Engineer at least 20 days prior to the proposed start of placing bridge deck
concrete. In addition to the requirements of Subsection 401.11, Subpart C, the plan
shall also include a description of the HPC batching and mixing facilities, a
description of the HPC transport equipment, the method of HPC placement, an
outline of the curing procedures to be used for the production units and test
samples and the quality control tests and procedures that the fabricator will
perform.
When HPC decks are being placed under staged construction with live load, the
Contractor is required to provide a lane closure adjacent to the HPC bridge deck
being constructed, where available. The lane closure shall be scheduled for the
duration of the HPC placement and shall remain in place for a minimum of six
(6) hours after the concrete placement is complete. The six (6) hour cure time
shall be completed by 6:00 a.m. regardless of what day of the week. The plan of
operation for placement of HPC bridge decks shall depict conformance with the
lane closure requirements.
All deck pours utilizing HPC under staged construction with live load shall be
performed during nighttime hours. Supplementary lane closings specifically
permitted for placing HPC shall be in accordance with Section 801.
Construction vehicles are not permitted to travel on the new decks until fourteen
(14) calendar days of wet-curing is complete. Construction vehicles will not be
permitted in the adjacent lane until six (6) hours after concrete placement has
been completed.
P300.236
The plan shall also include the procedures for reducing the atmospheric
evaporation rate below 0.75 kilograms per square meter per hour through a
combination of monomolecular evaporation retarders and fog misting, wind
shields or other methods.
The following is added to the requirements of Subsection 401.11, Subpart C:
Cast-in-place parapets on deck slabs and at retaining walls shall be constructed
using the alternate panel method. Following placement of conduits, lighting
standard anchorage, reinforcement and deck joints, alternate parapets shall be
poured. The remainder of the panels shall be poured once the initial panels have
cured a minimum of 24 hours. Slip forming for placing concrete parapets will not
be permitted.
The measurements for air temperature, relative humidity and wind speed shall be
taken at the location of the concrete placement. Concrete temperatures shall be
taken from the sample used for slump and air content tests. These measurements
and calculations shall be performed at least once per hour, beginning with the
initial concrete placement and whenever, in the opinion of the Engineer, changes in
the atmospheric condition merit such. The Contractor shall supply all the
instruments necessary to take these measurements, subject to approval by the
Engineer, including two (2) battery operated psychrometers, two (2) concrete
thermometers and two (2) wind gauges. These instruments shall become the
property of the Contractor after final Acceptance. All instruments shall be certified
by an independent laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer. The
instruments shall be certified to be in good working order and as having been
calibrated within the two months immediately prior to use. No separate payment
will be made for providing these instruments.
Placement shall not begin, or shall be discontinued, in the event of rain. The
Contractor shall provide a sufficient number of approved covers and take
adequate precautions to protect freshly-placed concrete from rain. The Engineer
may order the replacement of any material damaged by rain.
2.
The Contractor is advised that curing of the HPC shall be performed in accordance
with the provisions of Subsection 401.18. Furthermore, wet burlap, for the curing
of the deck slab concrete, shall be placed within ten (10) minutes after the concrete
is struck off.
If it is anticipated that the ten (10) minute limitation will not be met, the concrete
placement operation shall be stopped. A cold joint shall be formed and the
Contractor shall submit a revised plan of operation for review and approval by the
Engineer before resumption of the HPC placement.
The curing by wet burlap and white polyethylene sheets shall be for a minimum
period of fourteen (14) calendar days for the bridge decks, headblocks, sidewalks,
bridge approach slabs and integral abutment relief and sleeper slabs. The curing
by wet burlap and white polyethylene sheets shall be for a minimum period of
P300.236
seven (7) calendar days for cast-in-place bridge and retaining wall parapets. The
contractor shall contain water runoff from the wet burlap curing of parapets over
active facilities.
a.
The finishing machine equipment shall be set up so that the HPC is placed
only 5 to 8 feet ahead of the machine.
b.
To demonstrate that the Contractor can place, finish and cure the HPC, a
trial HPC placement of a minimum of 6 cubic yards of the HPC shall be
placed at the project site at a location that is acceptable to the Engineer. A
9.25-inch thick and minimum 15-foot wide slab, cast into structurallysupported stay-in-place forms, shall be constructed to simulate the
placement of the HPC bridge deck.
The location shall not be a structural element that is to remain in place.
The trial HPC shall be placed, finished and cured in accordance with these
Specifications at least 7 calendar days prior to the start of the HPC
placement. No separate payment will be made for the HPC trial
placement.
429.05
c.
Technical Representative(s) of the Contractors ready-mix concrete

supplier/manufacturer shall participate in the meetings between the
Contractor and the Authoritys Engineer as part of the planning process
and prior to concrete placement operations. The Technical
Representative(s) shall be on-site for trial slab placement and at least the
initial two (2) bridge deck casting operations. The need for further
involvement by the Technical Representative(s) shall be as determined by
the Engineer.
d.
The Contractor shall have personnel on-site certified through the ACI
Inspector Certification Program with the certification level of Concrete
Construction Special Inspector whom are experienced with HPC and
shall be responsible for all quality control measures related to curing and
placing the HPC. The Contractors designee for all HPC quality control
measures shall be a single point of contact.
e.
Application of Concrete Penetrating Sealer is not required for HPC decks,

parapets, sidewalks, bridge approach slabs, relief slabs or sleeper slabs.
HPC ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS

1.
The requirements specified in Subsection 401.16 for control and acceptance testing
of Class B concrete shall be adhered to in the fabrication of the HPC elements.
2.
Acceptance testing performance measures for production HPC shall consist of the
following parameters:
Performance Characteristic
Percent Air Entrainment *
Standard Test Method
Performance Required
6.0 1.5 (#57 Aggregate)
P300.236
6.0 1.5 (#67 Aggregate)
7.0 1.5 (#8 Aggregate)
3 1
Slump *
Chloride Permeability **
56 days (coulombs)
90 day ponding
AASHTO T 277, ASTM

C 1202
AASHTO T 259/T 260
56 days Free Shrinkage***
ASTM C 157
AASHTO T 22
ASTM C 39
1,100 maximum
0.65 maximum. Total integral
chloride to 1.6 in depth.
450 microstrains maximum
4,500 PSI minimum
Early Age Concrete****

AASHTO T 22
ASTM C 39
3,150 PSI minimum
When concrete pumping is used for placement, the percent air entrainment and
slump testing shall be performed at the discharge of the truck chute as well as at
the discharge end of the concrete pump.
* As per the guidance stated in Subsection 401.02, and in accordance with
Subsection 905.03 and Subsection 905.05, Subparts B and C, when a
Superplasticizer (Type F admixture) is used, the Slump and Air Content values for
the HPC shall be as follows:
Slump:
Air Content:
6" 2".
Increase both the target value and tolerance percentages by 0.5.
** For chloride permeability testing, additional cylinders shall be provided in

accordance with Subsection 905.22 for AASHTO T259/T260 testing to the
Authority.
*** For the Free Shrinkage Test (ASTM C157) the curing method and duration
should be consistent with the NJTA specifications. The test is to be performed on
specimens that are cured using a modified curing procedure as per NJTA
Specifications by applying wet burlap for 14 days instead of the 28 days cure
specified in the ASTM C157 procedure. The following readings as specified by
ASTM C157, which is hour after de-molding, another reading at 14 days of
curing, and in air storage after curing 4, 7, 14, 28 days and 8, 16, 32 and 64 weeks.
****The Early Age Concrete strength performance tests shall be required for bridge
decks that are placed under staged construction with live load.
3.
For quality acceptance limits, testing, sampling and pay adjustments see
P300.236
Subsections 905.21, 905.22 and 905.23.
429.06
4.
Retarder admixtures shall not be permitted for the Stage 3A bridge deck pour at
Structure No. 163.0N.
5.
Superplasticizers (Type F water reducing, high range admixtures) and mid-range

water reducing admixtures shall be permitted, but the use of such admixtures may
not delay the set time beyond 4 hours.
MEASUREMENT
Measurement for the bridge deck, headblocks, sidewalks, bridge and parapets shall be
made as described in Subsection 401.23.
Reinforcement steel will be measured separately for payment, where applicable, in
Sawcutting of concrete bridge decks will be measured separately for payment in
Furnishing and placing methacrylate sealer will not be measured separately for payment.
429.07
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
PAY
UNIT
Concrete in Deck, HPC. Cubic Yard
Concrete in Headblock, HPCCubic Yard
Concrete in Parapet, HPC..Cubic Yard
Concrete in deck joint area closure pours shall be included in the pay item Concrete in
Deck, HPC
No separate payment will be made for the methacrylate sealer, but all the cost thereof
shall be included in the unit price bid for the bid item Concrete in Deck, HPC.
Payment for reinforcement steel, where applicable, will be made in accordance with
Subsection 401.24.
Payment for sawcutting of concrete bridge decks will be made in accordance with
Subsection 401.24.
SECTION 430 DRILLED SHAFTS FOR SIGN STRUCTURE FOUNDATIONS

430.01
DESCRIPTION.
P300.236
This work shall consist of the construction of drilled cast-in-place concrete shafts for Sign
Structure foundation where indicated on Plans. The work shall include furnishing all
equipment, materials and labor necessary for constructing drilled shafts in accordance
with these specifications and as directed by the Engineer. The work shall include
excavation, installing and removing temporary casing, installing permanent casing if
directed by the engineer, drilling slurry, soil and rock drilling to penetrate whatever the
materials and obstructions encountered, installing reinforcement, concrete, finished shaft
top preparation and disposal of excavated soils.
430.02
MATERIALS.
Materials shall conform to the following Sections and Subsections:
Admixtures and Curing Materials ...................... 906
Portland Cement Concrete. .................................... 905.05
Reinforcement Steel for Structures ........................ 908.01
Structural Steel (casings) ....................................... 909.01
Casings (if required) shall be smooth, non-corrugated, clean, be of watertight steel, and of
ample strength to withstand both handling and driving stresses, pressures of concrete,
pressure of fluids and of the surrounding earth materials. Casings shall have inside
diameters not less than indicated shaft sizes.
430.03
SHOP DRAWINGS.
Shop, erection, and other drawings necessary for the drilling and construction of sign
structure foundations shall be furnished in accordance with Subsection 104.08. As a
minimum, the following items shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 30 calendar
days prior to the start of work for approval:
(A) Contractor Qualifications.
The installation of drilled shaft foundations shall be performed by personnel who
specialize in drilled shaft construction. The Contractor performing the work described in
this specification shall have successfully installed drilled shafts of similar diameter,
length, capacity and complexity to those shown on the Plans for a minimum of five (5)
projects and five (5) years. Experience shall be relevant to the anticipated subsurface
materials, groundwater conditions, and any special construction techniques required.
The Contractors drilled shaft supervisory personnel in charge of daily operations or the
Subcontractors personnel in charge of daily operations shall have a minimum of five (5)
years of work experience on at least five (5) projects in the installation of drilled shaft
foundations. The drilled shaft supervisor with at least this minimum requirement shall
be on the site during the entire construction process of all drilled shafts (i.e. drilling,
coring, placing of reinforcement, concreting, etc.) to troubleshoot any problems that may
arise during the construction process. Experience must include the direct supervisory
responsibility for the on-site construction operations for drilled shafts utilizing:
Temporary Casing
Mineral Slurry
P300.236
Permanent Casing
The Contractors drill operators shall have at least shall a minimum of three (3) years of
work experience on at least three (3) projects experience in the construction of drilled
shaft foundations.
The Contractor shall submit a list to the Engineer for approval identifying the on-site
supervisors and drill rig operators assigned to the project and the companies experience
relevant to the project. The Contractor shall submit descriptions of the drilled shaft
construction projects as described to serve as evidence of the capability to construct
drilled shafts. The descriptions of the drilled shaft projects shall contain names and
telephone numbers of owners' representatives who can verify the Contractor's direct
participation on those projects. Drilled shafts installed by subcontractors or personnel
not employed directly by the contractor submitting for qualification approval shall not be
accepted. These descriptions shall be submitted with the Installation Plan and will be
evaluated by the Engineer.
(B) Installation Plan.
This plan shall provide information on the following items as applicable:
1.
Name and experience record of the drilled shaft superintendent in charge of drilled
shaft operations.
2. List and size of proposed equipment to be used including cranes, drills, augers,
bailing buckets, final cleaning equipment, de-sanding equipment, slurry pumps, core
sampling equipment, tremies, concrete pumps, etc.
3. Details of the overall anticipated construction operation sequence and the proposed
sequence of shaft construction
4. Details of planned shaft excavation methods; including removal of loose rock and
sediment from the shaft bottom.
5. Details of the methods to be used to insure shaft stability (i.e. prevention of caving,
bottom heave, etc., using temporary casing, slurry or other means) during excavation
and concrete placement. This shall include a review of method suitability to the
anticipated site and subsurface conditions. If casings are proposed or required,
casing dimensions and detailed procedures for permanent casing installation,
temporary casing installation and removal shall be provided.
6. When use of slurry is required or proposed, details of the methods for mixing,
placing, circulating and de-sanding the slurry.
7. Method of monitoring and continuously maintaining the slurry level.
8. Details of methods to clean the shaft excavation. This will include removal of loose
rock and/or sediment from the shaft bottom.
9. Details of reinforcement placement including support and centralization methods.
10. Mix design of the concrete and documentation from an independent laboratory
certified by the State and approved by NJTA showing that the mix design conforms
to the approved mix and that it meets the strength requirements set by the Engineer.
11. Details of concrete placement method required or proposed including operational
procedures for free fall, tremie or pumping as appropriate.
12. The method used to fill or eliminate all voids between the plan shaft diameter and
excavated shaft diameter, or between the shaft casing and surrounding soil, if
permanent casing is specified.
P300.236
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Methods to determine deviation from vertical for the entire depth of the drilled shaft.
Details of proposed methods to check shaft bottom cleanliness.
Procedures for control and removal of spoils on land and/or over water.
Details of steel reinforcement lifting, splicing if necessary in a hanging position,
insertion and securing, including support and centralization methods.
Details of concrete batching and/or delivery to the site, and concrete placement
including proposed operational procedures for concrete pump or tremie including
initial placement, raising tremie pipe(s) during placement, and overfilling of the shaft
concrete, method to accurately monitor the volume of concrete being placed at all
times during the pour and provisions to prepare the completed shaft top at its final
shaft top elevation.
The qualification records of the testing organization to perform the Osterberg Cell
Load Test and the Crosshole Sonic Logging of the Drilled Shafts.
Details of procedures and equipment for performing the Osterberg Cell Load Test
and the Crosshole Sonic Logging of the Drilled Shafts.
Concrete core drilling equipment and procedures that may have to be used to
retrieve the core specimens that may be required to determine the integrity of
concrete placed in the drilled shaft.
Details of the material, equipment, and procedures proposed to accomplish the
required load testing and Cross Hole Sonic Logging.
The Engineer will evaluate the drilled shaft installation plan for conformance with the
Plans and these specifications. A review meeting between the Contractor, SubContractor, Designer, and NJTA will be required after review of the working drawings,
and shall take place at least 15 days prior to start of drilled shaft demonstration shaft
installation.
The meeting, arranged by the Resident Engineer, will discuss the drilled shaft installation
plan. Within 30 calendar days after receipt of the plan, the Engineer will notify the
Contractor of any additional information required and/or changes that may be necessary
in the opinion of the Engineer to satisfy the Plans and these specifications.
Any part of the plan that is unacceptable will be rejected and the Contractor shall submit
changes agreed upon for reevaluation. The Engineer will notify the Contractor within
seven working days after receipt of proposed changes of their acceptance or rejection.
All approvals given by the Engineer shall be subject to trial and satisfactory performance
in the field.
Shaft construction shall not begin until the Installation Plan has been approved by the
Engineer. Approval of the Installation Plan shall not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility to satisfactorily complete the work as detailed on the Plans and in these
Specifications.
(C) Protection Of Existing Structures And Utilities.
The Contractor shall control his operations to prevent movement or damage to any
and procedures that will prevent caving of the shaft excavation, monitoring and
controlling the vibrations from construction activities such as the driving of casing or
P300.236
sheeting, drilling of the shaft, or if permitted, from blasting. In the event the certified
work plan cannot be followed without adversely impacting existing structures and
utilities the Contractor shall submit a revised work plan and perform a
demonstration/test shaft installation if deemed necessary by the engineer at no
additional cost to the Authority. Additional costs resulting from the suspension of work
due to the change of installation methods as a result of impacts to existing structures and
utilities will be the Contractors responsibility, and no adjustment in Contract Time
resulting from the suspension of work will be allowed.
430.04
INSTALLATION OF DRILLED SHAFTS.

The following requirements shall apply to all installations of Drilled Shafts for Sign
Structures:
(A) Equipment.
Drilled shafts shall be installed with approved drilling equipment. The proposed drilled
shaft installation equipment and methods shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer
and approval shall be secured before mobilization. Approval by the Engineer shall not
relieve the Contractor or drilled shaft subcontractor of his responsibility to provide
equipment with sufficient power, downward thrust and torque, materials, and methods
to adequately perform the work in a safe, timely, workmanlike manner. Approval shall
not be reason to hold the Authority and/or the Engineer responsible for the Contractors
or drilled shaft subcontractor's failure to perform the work.
Drilled shaft installation equipment shall be capable of installing drilled shafts with the
use of temporary casing. Wet rotary drilling using the slurry displacement method shall
employ sufficient fluid pressure to provide complete removal of the cuttings from the
hole. The Contractor shall provide a weighted bar with slender tip and attached to a thin
cable with calibrated depth marker, metal tape, or other approved equipment suitable for
confirming the completeness of the final cleaning operations.
The Contractor or his specialized subcontractor shall provide all equipment, including
concrete pumps or tremie pipes required for the placement of concrete into the drilled
shafts in accordance with the Plans and specifications. The minimum inside diameter of
concrete pump lines or the tremie pipe shall be greater than six times the maximum
aggregate size.
(B) Shaft Drilling.
The Contractor shall perform the excavations required for the shafts through whatever
materials are encountered, to the dimensions and elevations shown in the Plans or
otherwise required by these specifications. The Contractor's methods and equipment
shall be suitable for the intended purpose and whatever the materials encountered. The
Contractor shall provide equipment capable of constructing shafts to a depth equal to the
deepest shaft shown in the Plans plus 15 feet or plus three times the shaft diameter,
whichever is greater, except when the Plans instruct the Contractor to provide equipment
capable of constructing shafts to a greater depth.
P300.236
The use of a fixed template, adequate to maintain shaft position and alignment during all
excavation and concreting operations, is optional. Templates shall be provided for any
drilled shaft requiring its use.
The use of a suitable temporary casing installed for the full depth of the drilled shaft is
optional, however casing shall be used for any drilled shaft which can not be drilled and
maintained using uncased methods.
The top center of each drilled shaft shall not vary from the plan location by more than 3
inches. At the top of the drilled shaft, reinforcing bars shall not vary in plan distance
from the plan shaft by more than 1 inch. The top elevation of the drilled shaft shall have
a tolerance of plus I inch or minus 3 inches from the plan top-of-shaft elevation. After all
the concrete is placed, the top of the reinforcing steel cage shall be no more than 6 inches
above and no more than 3 inches below the plan elevation. The plumbness shall be
checked by plumbing the Contractor's extended Kelly bar with a full size drill bucket
when it is down to the bottom of the drilled shaft with an accurate carpenter's level
placed against the exposed part of the Kelly bar, followed by measurements of offset
from the Kelly bar to the permanent casing, if used, in four compass directions. The
drilled shaft shall not vary from the vertical by more than one percent of its length.
The Contractor or their drilled shaft subcontractor shall protect existing utilities to
remain within the drilled shaft installation work zone in accordance with the
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction over same. The Contractor shall repair or
replace any construction-induced damage to the satisfaction of the governing authority
and utility owner at the Contractor's expense.
The Contractor or their drilled shaft subcontractor shall employ within his contract bid
price, a licensed registered Land Surveyor, experienced in this type of work, who shall
establish lines and grades. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct location of
drilled shafts and keeping a record of drilled shafts installed.
Drilled shafts shall be located and staked by the Contractor prior to the start of
installation work. The Contractor shall maintain all location stakes and shall establish all
elevations required.
Unless the accuracy and precision of other methods are demonstrated to the satisfaction
of the Engineer, the plan position of the center of each shaft shall be determined by
optical survey measurements to a minimum of four points arranged around the shaft
casing perimeter at the four compass directions. These measurements are to be
geometrically averaged to calculate the best-fit mathematical center of the shaft at the
measurement elevation. Then the calculated center of the shaft at the measurement level
shall be reduced to calculate the mathematical center of the shaft at the proposed final
shaft top elevation by adjustment using the shaft plumbness measurement information.
(C) Placing Concrete.
The handling, measuring, proportioning, mixing, and placing of concrete shall conform
to Section 401 and this section. Concrete shall be placed only in the presence of the
Engineer.
P300.236
Concrete shall be placed using concrete pump or a tremie pipe from the bottom of the
excavation upward so as to avoid segregation. Concrete shall be allowed to fall freely
only in a dry shaft excavation. Neither air, water, nor slurry shall be injected into the
shaft concrete during placement. A disposable foam or rubber plug shall be introduced
at the top of the concrete pump line or tremie pipe to separate the fresh concrete from the
slurry at the start of concrete placement. The plug shall be inserted so that the first flow
of concrete pushes the plug out of the pipe and prevents slurry mixing and
contamination as the concrete placement commences. The concrete pump line or tremie
shall consist of a tube constructed in section having flanged couplings fitted with gaskets.
The means of supporting the concrete pump line or tremie shall be such as to permit free
movement of the discharge end over the entire top of the concrete and to permit its being
lowered rapidly when necessary to choke off or retard the flow. The tremie, if used, shall
be filled by a method that prevents dilution of the concrete with drilling fluid. The
discharge end shall be set on the bottom and raised approx. 6 in. at the start of concrete
placement operations. Following this, the discharge pipe shall remain at least 5 ft. below
the top of the concrete at all times and the concrete line shall contain sufficient concrete to
prevent any water entry.
If concrete flow is halted and the concrete lines discharge end is raised out of the shaft
concrete for any reason, flow shall be reinitiated only after fully recharging the concrete
line with fresh concrete by 1) inserting a foam or rubber plug or pig into the concrete line
at the concrete hopper end, 2) placing the discharge end approximately 6 inches above
the top of the shaft concrete, 3) resuming concrete flow, recharging the pump or tremie
line and depositing what will be classified as waste concrete on the top of the previously
placed shaft concrete, 4) discharging waste concrete until the line is fully recharged with
fresh concrete and the pig is pushed completely through the line, 5) without halting the
flow of fresh concrete plunging the discharge end of the concrete line into the shaft
concrete to within 6 inches or less of the shaft bottom or to a level as directed by the
Engineer, 6) continuing concrete placement without further interruption, and 7) placing
a final volume of additional concrete in the shaft no less than the volume of waste
concrete placed to recharge the line in the process of resuming concrete flow. This
procedure shall be applied without exception as necessary to avoid injecting any air, any
water, any slurry, or any concrete that has flowed through a line filled with air, water, or
slurry into the shaft concrete.
Maintain the concrete level at the top of the drilled shaft until the concrete has set. Final
concrete placement elevation details shall be as specified herein for shaft top preparation.
A hole shall not be progressed within five drilled shaft diameters of a previously
installed drilled shaft until the concrete has been in place for a minimum of 2 days.
(D) Shaft Construction Timing.
Every effort shall be made by the Contractor in planning, coordinating, and carrying out
the work to minimize the time between the start of excavation and completion of shaft
concrete placement. Each step in the process of drilling, cleaning the shaft bottom,
placing reinforcing steel, and completing concrete placement shall be coordinated to
avoid delays during or between each work step. In general, the time between shaft
excavation and completion of concrete placement is expected to be eight (8) continuous
hours or less.
P300.236
For cases where two (2) or more continuous hours elapse between completion of
excavation and commencement of concrete placement, any reinforcing steel already
placed in the shaft shall be removed, the shaft bottom shall be recleaned and slurry
checked for cleanliness, reinforcing steel replaced in the shaft, and concrete placement
immediately commenced.
(E) Shaft Reinforcing Steel.
Reinforcing steel shall be set at the proper elevation and with the proper clearance to the
sidewall prior to the start of concrete placement. The cage shall be either hung or
supported on precast concrete or plastic feet so that the proper clearance from the bottom
of the shaft is maintained. Commercial, plastic centralizers shall be used around the
circumference of the shaft at a maximum vertical spacing of 10 feet, with the bottom and
top rows of centralizers installed within 5 ft. of the ends of the cage. A minimum of 3
centralizers shall be used for shafts less than 48 inches in diameter, and a minimum of 4
centralizers shall be used for shafts larger than 48 inches. Additional centralizers are
required for larger shafts to maintain proper clearance.
Where shafts are extended at the direction of the Engineer to final authorized tip
elevations lower than the estimated minimum tip elevations, no fewer than one-half of
the vertical reinforcing steel bars (every other bar around the circumference) shall be
extended to the authorized tip elevation by lap splicing or mechanical splicing. Lap
splices shall be tied firmly enough to support the full weight of the reinforcing cage
above the lap zone. Horizontal reinforcing bands shall be added in the bottom extension
zone at a vertical spacing no more than 6 inches center to center.
(F) Shaft Top Preparation.
If tremie concrete is used, the top-most concrete placed in the shaft shall be considered
waste concrete and shall be either: (A) pushed upward and ejected completely out of the
top of the casing and wasted as final concrete is placed or, alternatively, or (B) pumped
upward to a level at least 2 feet clear distance above the plan shaft top level and allowed
to cure in place for removal later. Waste concrete shall be considered to be the top 2 feet
of initial concrete placed, plus the height of any additional volume of waste concrete
deposited in the shaft where concrete placement was halted and restarted, plus any
additional amount necessary to produce full strength, non-segregated concrete at the
plan shaft top level.
Where waste concrete alternative (A) is selected, waste concrete must be allowed to
evenly overflow the full top circumference of the casing, and may not be channeled or
bleed off by notches or holes cut in the casing top. Any fresh concrete in the casing at a
level above the plan shaft top level after ejecting all waste concrete may be dipped or
pumped out to the plan top elevation while still plastic by methods and equipment
approved by the Engineer, or allowed to cure in place for removal later.
Final shaft top preparation may commence only once the drilled shaft concrete obtains an
average unconfined compression strength of at least 2466 psi, or, in lieu of concrete
strength testing, beginning seven (7) full days after completion of concrete placement.
Final top preparation steps shall consist of (A) cutting off any extra casing above the top
of casing elevation, (B) cutting off any cured over-pour concrete to the plan shaft top
elevation by approved methods, (C) dressing the final shaft top surface, (D) verification
P300.236
by the Engineer that the exposed concrete consists of full strength concrete with a typical,
non-segregated mortar and aggregate distribution, (E) approved non-destructive
strength testing by the Contractor where required by the Engineer to verify that concrete
has full design strength, (F) removal of additional concrete below the plan shaft top level
as necessary to reach full-strength, non-segregated concrete, and (G) preparation of the
shaft top key recess.
(G) Shaft Acceptance.
Deviation of drilled shaft location from plan location data shall be submitted to the
Engineer within one working day after a drilled shaft is installed. Drilled shaft
subcontractor shall provide the Engineer's on-site representative with written tabulations
of the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Deviation of drilled shaft location from plan location.

Elevation of bottom of drilled shaft measured to the nearest 1 inch.
Elevation of top of drilled shaft measured to the nearest inch.
Deviation from design plan location measured to the nearest inch.
Plumbness (deviation from vertical).
Within five working days after the completion of installation of all the drilled shafts, and
before removing the drilled shaft installation equipment from the site, the Contractor
shall provide the Engineer with a plan certified by a land surveyor registered in the State
of New Jersey showing the as-installed location of all drilled shafts installed to the
tolerances indicated in these specifications and as shown on the Plans.
A comparison of the computed volume of the excavation (theoretical) with the volume of
concrete placed (actual) shall be made. A plot of depth versus volume shall be
computed. The contractor shall provide cooperation and whatever assistance necessary
to accurately monitor the volume of concrete placed at all times during the pour.
Unaccepted drilled shafts are drilled shafts that are rejected by the Engineer because of
damage, failure to advance through obstructions, mislocation, misalignment, or failure to
install the drilled shaft to the proper bearing stratum, or the results of the CSL testing
indicate defects. Rejection of a shaft based on the shaft integrity testing shall require
conclusive evidence that a defect exists in the shaft which will result in inadequate or
unsafe performance under service loads. If the CSL records are complex or inconclusive,
the Engineer may require additional testing to confirm the location of the defect. The
Engineer may also require coring or excavation of the shaft to verify shaft conditions.
For any problems or defects identified by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit a
written plan of action to the Engineer for approval, showing how to correct the problem
and prevent its reoccurrence. The drilled shaft shall be repaired, augmented or replaced
to the satisfaction of the Engineer. To mitigate and/or to remedy unaccepted drilled
shafts, the Contractor may be required to provide additional drilled shafts or supplement
drilled shafts to meet specified requirements at no cost to the Authority. Partial or full
removal and replacement of defective shafts or portions thereof may also be required.
When otherwise acceptably installed drilled shafts exceed the specified tolerances, the
drilled shaft subcontractor shall provide an accurate as-built survey to the Design
P300.236
Engineer. The Design Engineer will then analyze the total loads on individual drilled
shaft based on the survey data. If the load on any drilled shaft exceeds 110 percent of the
specified load capacity, corrections shall be made in accordance with a design provided
by the Design Engineer.
430.05
CROSSHOLE SONIC LOGGING OF DRILLED SHAFTS.

Crosshole Sonic Logging (CSL) shall be used on all production and demonstration drilled
shafts forty-eight hours after the placement of all concrete in a shaft and must be
completed within 20 calendar days after the concrete placement. The Engineer may
specify a longer minimum time if concrete mix designs or other factors result in slower
setting concrete. The CSL tests shall be conducted by an experienced independent testing
Consultant approved by the Engineer prior to testing.
(A) Preparation for Testing.
A number of tubes shall be installed in each shaft to permit access for CSL. The number
of tubes installed shall be the greater of 3 or the nearest integer value of the diameter of
the drilled shaft measured in feet. The tubes shall be 1.5 inch to 2.0 inch inside diameter
schedule 40 steel pipe. The pipes shall have a round, regular internal diameter free of
defects or obstructions, including any at pipe joints, in order to permit the free,
unobstructed passage of a 1.3 inch diameter source and receiver probes. The tubes shall
be watertight and free from corrosion with clean internal and external faces to ensure
passage of the probes and a good bond between the concrete and the tubes.
Each pipe shall be fitted with a watertight shoe on the bottom and a removable cap on
the top. The pipes shall be securely attached to the interior of the reinforcement cage,
located midway between adjacent, longitudinal reinforcing steel. The tubes shall be
installed in each shaft in a regular, symmetric pattern such that each tube is equally
spaced from the others around the perimeter of the cage. The Contractor shall submit to
the testing organization the selected tube size, along with the proposed method of
attaching the tubes prior to construction. The tubes shall be as near to parallel as
possible.
The tubes shall extend from 6 inches above the shaft bottoms to at least 3 feet above the
shaft tops. Any joints required to achieve full-length tubes shall be made watertight.
Care shall be taken during reinforcement cage installation so as not to damage the tubes.
Any damaged tubes shall be repaired or replaced, as necessary, prior to continuing
installation of the reinforcement cage. After placement of the reinforcement cage and
prior to the start of concrete placement, the tubes shall be filled with clean water. After
the tubes are filled with water, the tube tops shall be capped or sealed to keep debris out
of the tubes prior to testing. The pipe caps or plugs shall not be removed until the
concrete in the shaft has set. Care shall be exercised in the removal of caps or plugs from
the pipes after installation so as not to apply excess torque, hammering, or other stresses
which could break the bond between the tubes and the concrete.
(B) CSL Testing.
CSL tests shall be conducted between pairs of tubes. The approved testing organization
shall test two principle diagonals through the center and between each tube pair around
the perimeter of all tested shafts. Additional logs shall be conducted at no additional cost
P300.236
in the event anomalies are detected. The CSL tests shall be carried out with the source
and receiver probes in the same horizontal plane unless test results indicate potential
defects in which case the questionable zone may be further evaluated with angled tests
(source and receiver vertically offset in the tubes).
CSL measurements shall be made at depth intervals of 0.2 feet or less, and shall be done
from the bottom of the tubes to the top of each shaft. The probes shall be pulled
simultaneously, starting from the bottoms of the tubes, over a depth measuring device.
Any slack shall be removed from the cables prior to pulling to provide for accurate depth
measurements of the CSL records. Any defects indicated by longer pulse arrival times
and significantly lower amplitude/energy signals shall be reported to the Engineer and
further tests shall be conducted as required to evaluate the extent of such defects.
(C) CSL Test Results.
The CSL results shall be presented to the Engineer in a report. The report shall include
recommendations as to the acceptability, unacceptability, soundness, etc., of the drilled
shaft. The report shall be checked, stamped approved, and signed by a Professional
Engineer registered in New Jersey. The report shall be submitted directly to the
Engineer. The test results shall include CSL logs with analyses of:
a.
b.
Initial pulse arrival time versus depth

Pulse energy/amplitude versus depth
A CSL log shall be presented for each tube pair tested with any defect zones indicated on
the logs and discussed in the test report as appropriate.
(D) Evaluation of CSL Test Results.
The Engineer will evaluate the CSL test results and determine whether or not the drilled
shaft construction is acceptable. If the Engineer determines that the drilled shaft is
acceptable, the CSL tubes shall be dewatered and grouted. The grout shall be of the same
strength or higher than the strength of the concrete used in the original drilled shaft. The
Contractors grout mix shall not include calcium chloride based additives. If the
Engineer determines that the drilled shaft is unacceptable, the shaft shall be cored to
allow further evaluation of the shaft. Cores shall be taken without additional
compensation.
(E) Further Evaluation.
If the CSL records are inconclusive or show an anomaly, the Engineer may require coring
or the performance of Crosshole Tomography to verify the shaft condition. The details of
the Crosshole Tomography, if directed by the Engineer, shall be submitted for review
and approval. The Crosshole Tomography analysis shall include the development of
three dimensional volumetric images for the entire shaft. This shall be presented in color
and coded to indicate variations in sonic velocity. The images and complete discussion
of the data shall be presented in the report by the testing firm.
430.06
MEASUREMENT.
Drilled shafts will be measured by the linear feet. The limits for payment for drilled
shafts will be as shown on the Plans. Furnishing equipment, mobilization for drilled
P300.236
shaft installation, CSL testing or any further evaluation will not be measured, and all
costs shall be included in drilled shaft.
430.07
PAYMENT.
PAY ITEM
___ Drilled Shaft for Sign Structures
PAY UNIT
Linear Feet
No separate payment will be made for reinforcement steel, steel pipe for CSL testing, and
concrete within the drilled shaft limits shown on Plans. The costs thereof shall be
included in the above drilled shaft pay item.
No separate payment will be made for obstructions, rock material, or whatever the
material is encountered.
No separate payment will be made for CSL testing and/or further evaluation associated
with determining the integrity of the drilled shaft.
The contract items and unit price bids set forth in the bid schedules shall include all
services, permits, labor, equipment, transportation, materials, testing, and supplies for
the complete work, including, without limitation, mobilization and demobilization for
completion of the work. No payment will be made for drilled shafts abandoned because
of defects in the work or other fault of the Contractor or his drilled shaft subcontractor.
SECTION 431 - SEISMIC ISOLATION BEARINGS

431.01
DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of the design, furnishing, testing, and installation of seismic isolation
bearing systems (Isolators), and the removal and disposal of the existing bearing assemblies.
The Isolators shall meet the dimensional limits and performance requirements as shown on
the Plans and specified herein.
The subject structures have been analyzed and designed in accordance with the 2010
AASHTO Guide Specifications for Seismic Isolation Design. Approved Manufacturers are not
required to perform additional analyses provided Isolator characteristics are within 10% of
those published within this Specification and on the Plans.
This work shall also include the bearing seat preparation including existing anchor bolt
removals, as indicated on the Plans or as otherwise required to install the new Isolators.
This work shall also include the final detailing, furnishing, fabrication, and installation of
masonry plates, sole plates, anchor bolts, hardware, and bearing pads as shown on the
Plans, described herein, recommended by the Manufacturer, or otherwise required to
furnish completely installed and functioning Isolators.
This work shall also include on-site supervision and technical support furnished by the
P300.236
Manufacturer to assist the Contractor with the installation of the Isolators.
431.02
431.03
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
(A)
The Isolator is a key structural component which must successfully function in a

seismic event at any time throughout the life of the bridge. Isolators must perform
reliably under service loads with little or no maintenance.
(B)
Temperature Performance - The entire State of New Jersey is located in the

Moderate Climate (refer to AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 5th
Edition, Section 3.12.7.1) which corresponds to a 50 Year low temperature of -30F
and a maximum period of 14 days where temperatures do not rise above 32F. The
load factor for the calculation of thermal movements shall be 1.20 as per Subsection
3.4.1 of the same specification. The performance of Isolators in such temperature
conditions shall be taken into account in the design. Low temperature moduli for
grade 3 Natural Rubber, Lead, and polyurethane as well as low temperature static
coefficients of friction for PTFE shall be conservatively estimated or verified by
prototype testing.
(C)
Long Term Performance - Expected variation in Isolator performance over the

lifetime of the bridge shall be incorporated in the Isolator design. Design
considerations for bearings due to variations in long term performance shall
incorporate all anticipated changes over the life of the bearings, including
consideration of key Isolator system parameters as described in Section C8.1.2 of the
2010 AASHTO Guide Specifications for Seismic Isolation Design.
(D)
The ability to select Isolators is dependent upon performance matching. Isolators

must possess similar performance characteristics under service and seismic loads.
Performance requirements of the Isolators at each isolation location are specified in
the Contract Documents and within this Specification. These performance
requirements include: force-deflection/energy dissipation characteristics, dead load
and live load forces, maximum horizontal force and displacement due to AASHTO
Group Loadings in transverse and longitudinal directions, and maximum force and
displacement from seismic loads in transverse and longitudinal directions. Failure
of an isolation system to adequately match the performance of the system specified
in the Contract documents and within this specification shall be cause for the
rejection of the Isolator.
QUALIFIED ISOLATOR MANUFACTURERS

The following Isolator Manufacturers have been approved for use.
Lead-Rubber Seismic Isolation Bearings manufactured by:
Dynamic Isolation Systems, Inc.
885 Denmark Drive, Suite 101
McCarran, Nevada 89434
Telephone: (775) 359-3333
Fax: (775) 359-3985
P300.236
Seismic Energy Products, L.P.
518 Progress Way
Athens, Texas 75751
Telephone: (903) 675-8571
Fax: (903) 677-4980
EradiQuake Seismic Isolation Bearings manufactured by:
R.J. Watson, Inc.
11035 Walden Avenue
Buffalo, New York 14004
Telephone: (716) 901-7020
Fax: (716) 901-7015
Friction Pendulum Isolation Bearings manufactured by:
Earthquake Protection Systems, Inc.
451 Azuar Drive, Building 759
Mare Island, Vallejo, California 94592
Telephone: (707) 644-5993
Fax: (707) 644-5995
Substitution of an alternate isolation system not shown above may be acceptable provided
all revisions necessary to accommodate this substitution are completed by the Contractor to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. All such revisions shall be performed at no additional cost to
the Authority. Reanalysis of the global seismic behavior of the structure will not be required
that the provided performance requirements described in this Specification and as shown on
the Plans are met by the alternate system.
Where furnished Isolator height varies from dimensions shown on the Plans, the Contractor
shall be responsible for adjusting the dimensions of the masonry/sole plates, shims,
concrete pedestals or bearing seat elevations. Changes in Isolator Plan dimension (i.e. width
and/or length) shall take into consideration the physical limits of the existing abutment
seats and/or pier tops. All Isolators shall be centered directly beneath the girder webs.
Modifications to existing bearing seats to accommodate Isolator installation, beyond the
removal of existing anchor bolts, installing of new anchor bolts, and intentional roughening
of the surface to accommodate new grout pads shall only be performed with the approval of
the Engineer.
The Isolator properties shown on the Plans have been selected to limit the forces
transmitted to substructure units. The bearing characteristics shown on the Plans are for
forces and displacement demands computed using the acceleration response spectra with
a 7% probability of exceedance in 75 years.
431.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Quality assurance shall be performed by the Manufacturers representative. Tests on
materials and completed Isolators shall be supervised by the Manufacturer or its appointed
representative. Two (2) copies of the Manufacturers quality assurance manual shall be
P300.236
submitted to the Engineer for review and approval as Shop Drawings in accordance with
Section 104.08 of the Specifications.
431.05
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, SHOP AND ERECTION DRAWINGS

Calculations conforming to Sections 14.2, 16, and 18.1 of the 2010 AASHTO Guide
Specifications for Seismic Isolation Design and the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications
5th Edition demonstrating that seismic and service/strength design requirements have been
satisfied shall be submitted. Assumptions with regard to Isolator long-term performance
and behavior under adverse conditions (thermal, creep, etc.) shall be clearly stated and
included in the calculations. Appropriate tests results or studies that verify these
assumptions shall also be included. Acceptance of these test results or studies shall be
deemed adequate at the sole discretion of the Engineer.
Shop and erection drawings, materials certificates, and testing records necessary or required
for the fabrication, testing, and installation of Isolators shall be furnished in accordance with
Subsection 104.08 and shall as a minimum consist of the following:
(A)
Drawings clearly showing the external dimensions of the Isolators and the
mechanisms for substructure and superstructure connections.
(B)
Certificates of compliance with material and Isolator test criteria as specified herein
or as approved by the Engineer.
(C)
Manufacturers installation instructions, including handling and storage directions.
(D)
Manufacturers Quality Assurance Manual.
(E)
Complete record of installed bearings, referenced by serial number.
Where Isolators are specified for installation on an existing structure, no fabrication of any
materials including Isolators, masonry plates, sole plates, anchor bolts, hardware, and
bearing pads and all other appurtenances required to install a complete and functioning
bearing assembly shall be fabricated until such time as all shop drawings for these items
have been approved by the Engineer.
431.06
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

The Isolators are to be delivered in protective packaging for freight and handling purposes.
All Isolators shall be stored at the work site in a shelter that provides protection from
physical and environmental damage and in the original packaging until installation.
Disassembly of the Isolators is not permitted unless approved by the Engineer and
supervised by the Manufacturer.
431.07
MARKINGS
Both the packaging and Isolator itself shall bear markings to identify (as a minimum) its
installed orientation, order number, Isolator identification number, and lot number. Isolator
markings shall be permanent and placed such that they are visible after installation and after
coating.
P300.236
431.08
MATERIALS AND MATERIALS TESTING

Testing shall be performed in accordance with the below. Testing means and methods not
governed by the below shall be as per the AASHTO Guide Specifications for Seismic Isolation
Design, the 2010 AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications.
Certificates of compliance with material test criteria as specified herein shall be provided
to the Engineer.
(A)
Lead-Rubber Seismic Isolation Bearings

(1)
The elastomer of the Isolators is to be natural rubber, Type NR Grade 3

[Low Temperature Elastomer Grade less than 3 shall not be permitted] per
ASTM D4014-89 and conforming to the following requirements:
(a)
Heat Resistance - ASTM D573 (158F for 7 days)

Change in Durometer Hardness: 10 Shore A points maximum
Change in Tensile Strength: maximum of -25%
Change in Ultimate Elongation: maximum of -25%
(b)
Compression Set - ASTM D395 Method B (158F for 22 hours)

Permissible set: 25% maximum
(c)
Ozone Resistance - ASTM D1149

100 hours mounting procedure ASTM D518 Procedure A
505 pphm ozone in air by volume, 20% strain 100F 2F
No visible cracks at 7X magnification.
(d)
Low Temperature Properties

Low Temperature Compression set ASTM D1229
Compression Set at 14F for 7 days @ 25% compression:
Permissible set 65% maximum.
Low Temperature Brittleness ASTM D746 Procedure B
Brittleness at -40F; No Failure permitted
Instantaneous Thermal Stiffening ASTM D1043
Stiffness at -40F shall not exceed 4 times the stiffness measured at 73F.
Low Temperature Crystallization Annex A ASTM D4014
Quad Shear Test at -15F for 14 days
Stiffness shall not exceed 4 times the stiffness measured at 73F.
(e)
Bond of Elastomer to Steel Laminate ASTM D429 Method B

Peel strength: 40 lb/in minimum.
(f)
Tensile Strength and Ultimate Elongation of Elastomer ASTM D412

Tensile Strength: 2250 psi minimum.
Ultimate Elongation: 550% minimum
(g)
Shear Modulus at 50% Shear Strain of Elastomer ASTM D4014

Shear modulus of the elastomer at 50% shear strain is to be determined.
P300.236
(2)
(B)
All steel plates incorporated in the seismic isolation devices shall conform
to the following requirements:
(a)
Steel laminates used for reinforcement shall be made from rolled mild
steel conforming to ASTM A36, A1011 or equivalent. The laminates
shall have a minimum nominal thickness of 12 gauge. Plates shall be
sandblasted and cleaned of all surface coating, rust, dirt, and mill scale
to an SSPC SP-6 level surface preparation before bonding.
(b)
All edges on surfaces to be bonded to the elastomer (including

perimeter of the central hole) will be deburred and made smooth to
remove any sharpness. All corners (in plan) will have a 1/4 - inch
minimum radius.
(3)
Purity of Lead: The purity of Lead shall be established by chemical analysis

from a sample of that used in the Isolators and shall possess a minimum
purity of 99%. Lead shall also conform to ASTM B29.
(4)
Structural steel mounting, sole, and masonry plates are to conform to

ASTM A709 grade 36 or 50 and all requirements of Section 403 - STEEL
STRUCTURES.
EradiQuake Seismic Isolation Bearings

(1)
Polyether Urethane Rotational Element shall conform to the following

requirements in:
Physical Properties
ASTM Test
Min
Max
D2240
60
64
at 100% elongation
D412
2000
----
at 200% elongation
D412
3700
----
Tensile Strength (psi)
D412
5000
----
Ultimate Elongation (%)
D412
220
----
D395
----
40
Hardness (Durometer D)
Tensile Stress (psi)
Compression set (%)

22 hrs @ 158oF
(2)
Stainless Steel shall conform to ASTM A167 Type 304 or ASTM A240 Type
304. Stainless steel in contact with PTFE sheet shall be polished to a No. 8
bright mirror finish. The minimum thickness of the stainless steel shall be
as per Section 16.3.2 of the 2010 AASHTO Guide Specifications for Seismic
Isolation Design
P300.236
(C)
431.09
(3)
Polytetraflourethylene (PTFE) Sheet shall be as per Section 16.2.2 of the

2010 AASHTO Guide Specifications for Seismic Isolation Design
(4)
Mass Energy Regulator (MER) spring material shall be manufactured by a

method that limits variations in the performance of this material over its
design life and expected temperature performance range. Variations in
material behavior shall be verified by appropriate test or time history
studies and incorporated in the design. Acceptance of these test results or
studies shall be deemed adequate at the sole discretion of the Engineer.
(5)
Structural steel mounting, sole, and masonry plates are to conform to

ASTM A709 Grade 36 or 50 and all requirements of Section 403 of the
Specifications.
(6)
Connections of the MER shall be corrosion resistant and shall perform

without binding throughout the 75-year design life of the Isolator.
Friction Pendulum Isolation Bearings

(1)
The material for the stainless steel for the main concave spherical sliding
surfaces shall conform to ASTM Designation A240, Type 304 or 316
stainless steel, equal or better.
(2)
The compressive yield strength of the Isolator material shall be at least two
times the maximum design bearing pressure.
(3)
Other structural components shall conform to ASTM Designation A36,

A576, A572, A536, equal or better.
FABRICATION
Fabrication shall be performed in accordance with the below. Fabrication means and
methods not governed by the below shall be as per the AASHTO Guide Specifications for
Seismic Isolation Design, the 2010 AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications.
All steel surfaces exposed to the atmosphere, except stainless steel or low friction surfaces,
shall be coated in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. The surfaces to be coated
shall be shown on the working drawings. Coatings shall not impair the clarity of the bearing
identification markings. Prior to coating, the exposed steel surfaces shall be cleaned in
accordance with the recommendations of the coating manufacturer. Metal surfaces to be
welded shall be given a coat of clear lacquer, or other protective coating as approved by the
Engineer, if the time of exposure before welding is to exceed three months. The coating shall
be removed at the time of welding. No coating will be done to these surfaces prior to
welding
Bearings for Steel Superstructures shall be painted in accordance with Specification Section
411. Quality assurance inspection of coatings will be in accordance with Specification Section
411.
P300.236
Bearings for Concrete Superstructures shall either be galvanized in accordance with ASTM
A-123 or ASTM A-153, as appropriate, or zinc metalized in accordance with AWS C2.2 to a
finished coating minimum thickness of 10 mil. Quality assurance inspection will be
performed by using magnetic thickness gauges.
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with written notification thirty (30) days prior to
the start of Isolator fabrication. This notification shall include all of the information required
as a part of the shop drawing submission(s).
Where indicated in the Plans, preformed fabric pads used as bedding shall conform to the
requirements of Section 923.02.
(A)

(1)
The tolerances of the Isolator dimensions shall be as follows:
Dimension
Tolerance
Thickness of Individual Rubber Layers
+20% of design Value

no more than + 1/8 inch
Thickness of Top and Bottom Cover

Rubber
Rubber Bearing External Plan
Dimensions and Shim Plan Dimensions
Masonry and Sole Plate External Plan
Dimensions
Flatness of Exterior Top and Bottom
Surfaces of Completed Bearing
Variation from Plane Parallel to the
Theoretical Surface
Top
Sides
Overall Bearing Height with masonry
and sole plates
Diameter of Central Core
(B)
+0, -1/16 inch

+ 1/8inch
+ 1/4inch
+ 1/32 inch from mean surface
Slope relative to the bottom of no more

than 0.005 radians or not to exceed
dimensional tolerances, whichever
controls.
+ 1/8inch
+ 1/4
+ 1/32 inch

(1)
The finish of the mold used to produce the polyether urethane element for
disk bearings shall conform to best machine shop practices. The shear
restriction mechanism shall be connected to the bearing plate by welding or
other acceptable means.
(2)
Stainless steel sheets shall be attached to their steel substrates with a

continuous seal weld.
P300.236
(C)
431.10
(3)
All welding shall conform to, and all welders shall be qualified in
accordance with, the requirements of the ANSI/AASHTO/AWS D1.5
Bridge Welding Code.
(4)
Except as noted, all bearing surfaces of steel plates shall be finished to

machine flat within 0.010 inches per foot. Out-of-flatness of greater than
0.010 inches per foot on any plate shall be cause for rejection. The bottom
surfaces of lower bearing plates (masonry plates) designed to rest on
bearing pads shall not exceed an out-of-flatness value of 0.0625 inches.
Oxygen cut surfaces shall not exceed a surface roughness value of 1000
microinches, as defined by ANSI B46.1.
(5)
After assembly including sole plates and masonry plates, Isolator

components shall be held together with steel strapping, or other means, to
prevent disassembly until time of installation. Packaging shall be adequate
to prevent damage from impact as well as from dust and moisture
contamination during shipping, storage, and installation.

(1)
The manufacturing methods and quality control shall be in conformance

with Section 17 of the 2010 AASHTO Guide Specifications for Seismic Isolation
Design
(2)
An approved self-lubricating bearing liner material shall be attached via

approved means to the articulated slider and housing.
(3)
All structural welding shall conform to, and all welders shall be qualified in
accordance with, the requirements of the ANSI/AASHTO/AWS D1.5
Bridge Welding Code.
(4)
The external Isolator Plan dimensions shall be within + of the values

shown in the bearing drawings.
(5)
The Isolator height shall be within + of the values shown in the Isolator
drawings.
ISOLATOR TESTING
Certificates of compliance with Isolator test criteria as specified herein shall be provided to
the Engineer.
The deformation characteristics and damping values of the Isolators used in the design and
analysis shall be based upon prototype tests conducted to meet the requirements in Section
13 of the 2010 AASHTO Guide Specifications for Seismic Isolation Design. Such tests must
validate design properties that may be extrapolated to the actual sizes used in the design.
In addition, prototype testing described in Sections 13.2.2.5 of the 2010 AASHTO Guide
P300.236
Specifications for Seismic Isolation Design shall be performed at standard room temperature
and at -5 degrees Fahrenheit for elastomeric bearing designs. Material Friction Testing for
sliding surfaces as described in Section 18.1.5.2.3 of the 2010 AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Construction Specifications shall be performed at standard room temperature and at -5
degrees Fahrenheit for bearing designs with sliding surfaces. Acceptable system property
variations in the prototype tests shall be +/- 10% of the design properties.
Note that prototype tests are to be conducted on the assembled Isolator (not individual
Isolator components) and that these prototype tests are in addition to the tests specified
below.
Quality control tests, as defined in the 2010 AASHTO Guide Specifications for Seismic Isolation
Design shall be carried out on all bearings to be installed on the bridge. For combined
compression and shear quality control tests, a continuous plot of the shear load and shear
deflection will be recorded to permit an evaluation of the hysteretic performance of the
Isolators.
(A)

Quality control tests shall be performed on each Isolator in accordance with Section
15.2 of the 2010 AASHTO Guide Specifications for Seismic Isolation Design with the
following added provisions:
(1)
(B)
Combined Compression and Shear Tests - Each Isolator will be loaded in

compression to the maximum applied dead load plus 50% live load for the
particular Isolator type. The compression load will be maintained while the
Isolator is deflected in shear. Each Isolator shall be visually inspected both
during and after testing. Any resultant defects, such as bond failure,
physical destruction, or permanent deformation shall be cause for rejection.
Defects such as torn or deformed elastomer or laminate fault shall also be
cause for rejection.

Quality control tests shall be performed on each Isolator in accordance with Section
17.2 of the 2010 AASHTO Guide Specifications for Seismic Isolation Design with the
following added provisions:
(1)
Compression Capacity Tests - Each Isolator will be loaded in compression

to the 1.5 times the maximum applied dead load plus 50% live load for the
particular Isolator type. Each bearing shall be visually examined both
physical destruction, or cold flow of PTFE to the point of debonding shall
be cause for rejection. Defects such as extruded or deformed elastomer or
cracked steel shall also be cause for rejection.
(2)

compression to the maximum applied dead load plus 50% live load for the
particular Isolator type. The compression load will be maintained while the
P300.236
Isolator is deflected in shear. Upon review of the load deflection curves, if
there is any indication of binding or other undesirable response the MER
shall be rejected. Each Isolator shall be visually inspected both during and
after testing. Any resultant defects, such as bond failure, physical
destruction, or cold flow of PTFE to the point of debonding, shall be cause
for rejection. Defects such as extruded or deformed elastomer or cracked
steel shall also be cause for rejection.
(C)

Quality control tests shall be performed on each Isolator in accordance with Sections
17.2 and 18.4 of the 2010 AASHTO Guide Specifications for Seismic Isolation Design
with the following added provisions:
431.11
(1)
Compression Capacity Tests - Each Isolator will be loaded in compression

to the 1.5 times the maximum applied dead load plus live load for the
particular Isolator type. Each bearing shall be visually examined both
physical destruction, or cold flow of low friction material to the point of
debonding shall be cause for rejection.
(2)

compression to the maximum applied dead load plus live load for the
particular Isolator type. Each Isolator shall be visually inspected both
physical destruction, or cold flow of low friction material to the point of
debonding, shall be cause for rejection.
(3)
Wear test data for sliding surface materials shall be submitted for review
and approval. Only sliding surface materials which have been previously
used in a bridge bearing application for no less than 10 years may be
submitted for approval. The wear data shall support an anticipated bearing
service life of a minimum of 75 years.
INSTALLATION
Where Isolators are to be installed on existing structures, final location of anchor bolts shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor. Existing bearing seat reinforcing bars shall be
avoided when installing Isolator anchor bolts. Locations of new anchor bolts and existing
bearing seat reinforcing bars shall be submitted as part of the Isolator shop drawings. Where
steel reinforcing bars cannot be avoided for new anchor bolt installations, the Contractor
shall contact the Engineer immediately.
The Contractor shall furnish the services of a competent technical representative of the
Manufacturer at no additional cost to the Authority. The technical representative shall be
present at the work site prior to the start of any installation of Isolators to instruct the
Contractor and the Engineer on installation and inspection procedures. The Manufacturer's
technical representative shall supply detailed instructions supplementing those specified
herein to for use in installing the Isolators. The Contractor shall be thoroughly familiar with
P300.236
the procedures recommended by the Manufacturer before installation of the system. The
Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a copy of the Manufacturer's printed installation
procedures.
Bearing surfaces located at improper elevations or not set level or true to plane shall require
either grinding of the surface, grout pack of bearing seats, or modification of the Isolator
such that the intended Isolator placement is as originally designed with the least amount of
Isolator modification.
The Isolators shall be installed level and normal to the gravity loads. Superstructure
gradients or tilted girder flanges shall be accommodated with beveled sole plates. Isolators
shall be placed on surfaces that are plane to within 1/16 of an inch and horizontal to within
0.001 radians. Any lack of parallelism between the top of the Isolator and underside of the
girder shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
There shall be no obstructions, including bolt extensions, which prevent the Isolators from
deforming horizontally in any direction. The area around each Isolator shall be cleaned of
debris and construction materials prior to acceptance of the installed Isolator.
Any welding performed on steel in contact with or near the Isolator shall be performed in
such a manner as to not damage the Isolator. Caution shall be taken to ensure that the steel
temperature directly adjacent to the rubber or polyether urethane elements does not exceed
212oF. Rubber or polyether urethane elements must not be exposed to direct flame or sparks.
Upon completion of all bearing installations, the Contractor shall provide a complete record
of the location of each installed Isolator, referenced by serial number, to both the Engineer
and the Manufacturer.
431.12
CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE
The Isolator Manufacturer shall submit Certificates of Compliance for the Isolators
indicating that the materials, fabrication, testing, and installation meet the requirements of
the Specifications.
431.13
MEASUREMENT
Seismic Isolation Bearing, Type __ shall be measured by the actual number of each type
of Isolator installed.
431.14
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
Seismic Isolation Bearing, Type __ ................................................................. Each

Payment for Seismic Isolation Bearings shall include all work associated with design,
fabrication, delivery, and construction support required to install the bearings and
associated hardware. No separate payment will be made for bedding material, anchor bolts,
P300.236
sole plate, masonry plate, coatings, or field welds required to install the bearings.
No separate payment will be made for costs required to provide on-site construction
support to the Contractor.
No separate payment made for additional seismic isolation bearings and bearing material
required for testing.
Removal and disposal of existing bearings and anchor bolts shall be incidental to the
Demolition of Existing Structures No. _____ items.
Removal, handling, and disposal of asbestos shall be incidental to the Demolition of
Existing Structures No. _____ items.
SECTION 432 HIGH-LOAD MULTI-ROTATIONAL BEARINGS

432.01
DESCRIPTION
High-Load Multi-Rotational (HLMR) bearings shall be defined as bearings that consist of
an element that allows rotation about any horizontal axis, and may in addition have
sliding surfaces to accommodate translation. Translation may be constrained to a
specified direction by guidance mechanisms. Bearings may be furnished by any of the
Qualified Manufacturers. However, only one type of bearing from one Qualified
Manufacturer (Manufacturer) shall be used on a structure.
This work shall consist of the design, furnishing, and fabrication of HLMR bearings,
masonry plates, sole plates, anchor bolts, hardware, and bearing pads as shown on the
Plans, described herein, recommended by the Manufacturer, or otherwise required to
furnish completely installed and functioning HLMR bearings.
Special attention shall be given to placement of shop drawing layout of anchor bolts so that
they clear existing reinforcing bars in the piers and also clear above girder flanges, diagonal
bracing, diaphragm /floorbeam elements, or other superstructure features which may
restrict anchor bolt drilling equipment headroom.
Installation of the bearings shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, in accordance
with the Manufacturers recommendations. Bearings shall be designed based on the
loads and movements as described on the Plans. All designs for all elements shall
conform to the latest editions (with interims) of the AASHTO-LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications, the NJTA Design Manual and these Specifications.
Where applicable, this work shall also include the bearing seat preparation including
existing anchor bolt removals, as indicated on the Plans or as otherwise required to
install the new HLMR bearings.
This work shall also include on-site supervision and technical support furnished by the
Manufacturer to assist the Contractor with the installation of the HLMR bearings.
P300.236
Materials, testing, and fabrication /construction operations not specifically denoted on
the Plans and in these Specifications shall be in accordance with the current AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications.
432.02
MATERIALS
Steel used for the fabrication of bearing assemblies shall conform to ASTM A709, Gr. 50,
or an approved equivalent, except for steel that is used for guidance or shear restriction
mechanisms. The guidance and shear restriction mechanisms shall be in accordance with
the Manufacturers specifications as approved by the Engineer.
Materials not otherwise specified in this Section shall conform to the following
Subsections:
Bolts and Bolting Materials .................................................... 909.02
Preformed Fabric Reinforced Elastomeric Bearing Pads ... 923.02(C)
Anchor Bolt Epoxy Systems................................................... 923.22(B)
432.03
QUALIFIED MANUFACTURERS
Where High-Load Multi-Rotational bearings are noted on the Plans for use, approved
products from any Qualified Manufacturer may be provided. The following
Manufacturers are qualified for use:
432.04
(1)
R.J. Watson, Inc.

11035 Walden Ave.
Buffalo, NY 14004
Telephone: 716-901-7020
Fax: 716-901-7015
(2)
The D.S. Brown Company

300 East Cherry Street
North Baltimore, OH 54872
Telephone: 419-257-3561
Fax: 419-257-2200
(3)
AMSCOT Structural Products Corp.

241 East Blackwell Street
Dover, NJ 07801
Telephone: 973-989-8800
Fax: 973-989-5651
(4)
Earthquake Protection Systems

451 Azuar Drive; Building 759
Mare Island, Vallejo, CA 94592
Telephone: 707-644-5993
Fax: 707-644-5995
WORKING DRAWINGS
P300.236
Working drawings, including design calculations, shall be furnished to the Engineer in
accordance with Subsection 104.08. The following information shall be included:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
The total quantity of each kind of bearing required (fixed, guided expansion, or
non-guided expansion), grouped first according to load range and then by
design capacity.
Plan view and section elevation including all dimensions required for
fabrication.
Details of all components and sections showing all materials incorporated into
the bearing.
All ASTM, AASHTO, and other applicable material designations.
The maximum design coefficient of friction for all sliding surfaces.
Details of any welding process used in the bearing manufacture that does not
conform to the approved processes of the current ANSI/AASHTO/AWS D1.5
Bridge Welding Code or the ANSI/AWS D1.6 Structural Welding Code
Stainless Steel.
Vertical, horizontal, rotation, movement, and load capacities.
Paint or coating requirements, as required.
Installation scheme.
Complete design calculations verifying conformance with the provisions of this
Section.
Anchorage details.
Bearing pre-set details.
Location of the fabrication plant.
The Manufacturers name and the name of its representative responsible for
coordinating production, sampling and testing, and field supervision of bearing
installation(s).
The Manufacturers certification package, according to Subsection 105.04, that
shall contain the following:
a.
Material test reports for all steels used except AISI C1018 and C1020
for which a mill conformance certificate is acceptable.
b.
Certificate of Compliance for all non-ferrous metals.
c.
Material test reports for any elastomeric components.
d.
Certificate of Compliance for PTFE and any adhesive used.
e.
A Certificate of Compliance for the bearings, executed by an officer
of the Manufacturer.
f.
Certificate of Compliance for any dowels or bolts supplied.
g.
Test reports for the performance tests.
Completed as-built bearing table.
The design calculations and working drawings shall be signed and sealed by a
Professional Engineer licensed in the State of New Jersey. The working drawings must
be approved by the Engineer before fabrication of the bearings begins. Such approval
shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility under the contract for the successful
completion of work.
432.05
FABRICATION OF HLMR BEARING ASSEMBLIES

(A) FABRICATION
P300.236
Section 18 Bearings of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications
shall be followed for the fabrication of HLMR bearing assemblies. For pot type
bearings, the provisions of AASHTO Specification M-251, Table X1 shall be
followed for elastomer material fabrication and testing where the Shore A
Durometer hardness shall be 50+/10 points and samples for compression set
tests shall be prepared using a Type 2 die.
(B) COATING OF STEEL SURFACES
All surfaces, except those defined below shall be coated. The surfaces to be
coated shall be shown on the working drawings. Coatings shall not impair the
clarity of the bearing identification markings. All flame cut edges of the bearing
plates shall be ground to reduce hardness and facilitate blast cleaning. All
corners of the sole plate shall be rounded to a 1/16 inch radius. All exposed
plain steel surfaces shall be blast cleaned to a near white finish. For all bearings,
the pot cavity and all sliding surfaces shall not be coated.
(1) Bearings for Steel Superstructures:
Bearings shall be painted in accordance with Specification Section 411.
Quality assurance inspection of coatings will be in accordance with
Specification Section 411.
(2) Bearings for Concrete Superstructures:
Bearings shall either be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A-123 or
ASTM A-153, as appropriate, or zinc metalized in accordance with AWS C2.2
to a finished coating minimum thickness of 10 mil. Quality assurance
inspection will be performed by using magnetic thickness gauges.
(C) TESTING
Testing shall be performed in accordance with the LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications prior to installation of the bearings, and in the presence of the
Engineer. The following provisions shall also apply:
(1) The Long Term Deterioration Testing:
(a) Bearing Design Configurations- Testing shall be conducted on two
full size bearings placed back-to-back. Bearing design configurations
which comply with these provisions based on prior testing will be
considered as prequalified for use without the need for further long
term deterioration testing.
(b) Bearing Materials Testing shall be conducted on samples of
materials used in the fabrication of each lot of 25 or less bearings.
(D) PACKING AND SHIPPING
(1) Bearings shall be securely banded together, as units, by the Manufacturer.
They shall be shipped to the project site and stored without relative
movement of the bearing parts or disassembly at any time. The bearings
shall be wrapped in moisture resistant and dust resistant material to protect
them against shipping, weather, job site conditions, and all other normal
hazards.
(2) Each bearing shall be marked in a permanent fashion that will be visible after
application of any paint coatings. The marking shall consist of the letters
P300.236
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
432.06
N.J.T.A., the location, orientation, order number, lot number, bearing

identification number, bridge number, and month and year of manufacture.
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the marking shall be
on a face which is visible after erection of the bridge.
The bearings shall be inspected within one week after arriving on the project.
They shall not be disassembled unless the Manufacturers representative is
present. Following the inspection, they shall be re-wrapped and kept clean
until installation.
The services of an on-site technical representative, to assist and provide
guidance prior to the initial installation of the bearing assembly, shall be
provided by the Manufacturer.
When installed, bearings shall be clean and free of all foreign substances.
The sole and top plates of the bearings shall not be removed for separate
attachment to the structure except under the direct supervision of the
Manufacturer.
With each shipment, a copy of the materials, fabrication and testing
compliance certifications shall be enclosed. For all materials used, the
Manufacturer shall supply certification data consisting of test reports on the
bearing performance tests, for any forgings, castings, or hardened material,
mill certificates for all other steels used, a certificate of compliance for the
bearing as a whole, and for all anchor bolts, dowels or other accessories, as
required.
The Manufacturer shall supply a separate sheet showing the materials,
critical dimensions, and clearances for each bearing.
MEASUREMENT
High-Load Multi-Rotational (HLMR) bearings of the various sizes and types will be
measured by the number of each type and size completely installed and fully functional
units accepted.
HLMR bearings destroyed or consumed for testing purposes will not be measured for
payment
HLMR bearings set on a common masonry plate shall be measured as two individual
HLMR bearings.
432.07
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
HLMR Bearings, ___ Kips ___ Kips, Type E ..................................................
HLMR Bearings, ___ Kips ___ Kips, Type EG ...............................................
HLMR Bearings, ___ Kips ___ Kips, Type F ..................................................
PAY UNIT
Each
Each
Each
Payment for HLMR bearings shall include all work associated with design, fabrication,
delivery, and construction support required to install the bearings and associated
P300.236
hardware. No separate payment will be made for bedding material, anchor bolts, sole
plate, masonry plate, coatings, or field welds required to install the bearings.
No Separate payment will be made for costs required to provide on-site construction
support to the Contractor.
No separate payment will be made for additional bearings or bearing materials furnished
or otherwise consumed for testing purposes. The cost for these bearings or bearing
materials shall be considered as incidental to the HLMR Bearing pay item.
No separate payment will be made for installation including the jacking or supporting of
new or replacement stringers and girders. These costs shall be considered as incidental to
the HLMR Bearing pay item.
No separate payment will be made where bracing or jacking of HLMR Bearings may be
required to set them to final thermal deformations. These costs shall be considered as
incidental to the HLMR Bearing pay item.
No separate payment will be made for coatings or repair of damaged coatings. The costs
of coatings or repair of damaged coatings shall be considered as incidental to the HLMR
Bearing pay item.
SECTION 433 TEMPORARY RETAINING STRUCTURES

433.01
DESCRIPTION.
This work shall consist of the complete construction of a temporary earth retaining system
at the designated locations as shown on the Plans or specified. The temporary earth
retaining system will be left in place, and/or buried in place prior to use, and will be
exposed/utilized under a stage of the work. Portions of the temporary earth retaining
system may also need to be subsequently removed as shown in the Plans or as directed by
the Engineer. The retaining system shall be designed to support the full design load for a
minimum of 5 years and be compatible with the adjacent permanent construction.
433.02
MATERIALS.
The Contractor may use any type of temporary earth retaining system that is approved
by the Engineer and is adequate and effective in safely withstanding the forces to be
sustained during and after the construction is completed.
Temporary earth retaining system shall project above the original or proposed ground a
minimum of 6 inches and remain in place, as shown on the Plans. Portions of the
temporary earth retaining system that are in conflict with subsequent proposed works
shall be removed by the Contractor at the designated time and sequence as detailed on
the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
433.03
WORKING DRAWINGS.
P300.236
The temporary earth retaining system shall be designed to accommodate the height of the
embankment as shown on the Plans along with a live load surcharge in accordance with
the latest edition of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications including current
interims. The temporary earth retaining system shall be designed and constructed to
support a full height face as measured from the top of proposed grade behind the system to
the original ground line or proposed grade at base of the system, whichever is lower.
Detailed shop drawings shall be furnished in accordance with the requirements of
Subsection 104.08. Design calculations shall be included and signed by a Professional
Engineer licensed to practice in the State of New Jersey.
433.04
MEASUREMENT.
Temporary earth retaining system will be measured by the square foot of exposed area.
The area measured will be determined as the product of the average height measured from
the existing or proposed ground at the bottom of the system and the final ground lines at
the top of the system in a vertical plane, and the total length of wall indicated.
433.05
PAYMENT.
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
Temporary Retaining System. ........................................................................... Square Foot
No separate payment will be made for labor, furnishing equipment for installation
and/or removal of the temporary retaining system, removal of materials, furnishing and
placing materials and other required activities/appurtenances for construction of the
temporary retaining system. All costs thereof shall be included in the unit price bid for
the item Temporary Retaining System.
Separate payment for control of groundwater, from whatever source including wick
drain conveyance, will not be made. All costs thereof shall be included in the unit price
bid for Temporary Retaining System.
Payment for stripping of topsoil will be made in accordance with Subsection 202.05.
SECTION 434
434.01
TEMPORARY SUPPORTS FOR CONCRETE DECK
DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of the design, fabrication, installation,
monitoring/maintenance, and removal of temporary supports for the existing
bridge deck for use during the existing deck demolition and installation of new
decks/superstructures
The purpose of the temporary supports is to support dead load, HS-20 live load,
and anticipated construction loads considering the Contractors means and
P300.236
methods during existing deck/superstructure removal and replacement.
Provide temporary deck supports so that in the temporary condition the existing
deck continues to function as originally intended. Transfer the deck load reaction
to a structurally sound portion of the abutment, pier, or ground.
434.02
MATERIALS
Materials shall be in accordance with the applicable Subsections of the
Specifications for the means and methods for the temporary support operation
selected by the Contractor.
434.03
The Contractor shall use his selected means and methods for temporary support
operations and provide calculations, procedures, plans, and details to the
Engineer for review and approval prior to fabrication or performing deck work.
The Contractor shall conduct field measurements prior to the design and
fabrication of temporary deck support systems.
Bolted connections or field welding between the temporary supports and the
bridge members designated as FCM in the Contract Drawings and tension zones
of stringers shall not be permitted. No drilling or bolting to the existing deck
will be permitted.
The temporary supports shall be designed by the Contractor in accordance with
the current edition of the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges
as modified by the Design Manual of the New Jersey Turnpike Authority and the
current edition of the AASHTO Guide Design Specifications for Bridge
Temporary Works.
The temporary supports shall be designed for the existing deck dead loads and
HS-20 live load. The Contractor shall determine the construction loads that he
may apply to the bridge during the deck/superstructure removal and
replacement operations and utilize those loads in the design of the temporary
supports.
For purposes of design of the temporary supports, the allowable friction
coefficient between the existing pier/abutment concrete and structural steel of a
support system shall be 0.30. The allowable friction coefficient between the
concrete components shall be 0.65. The allowable friction coefficient between
structural steel components shall be 0.06. The maximum bearing pressure on the
ground/sidewalk/roadway shall be 3,000 psf. The maximum bearing pressure
on the concrete bridge seat shall be 900 psi. No temporary supports will be
permitted to bear on the surface of unsound concrete, or within the zone of
influence of unsound concrete.
Submit temporary support plans, details, procedures, and calculations to the
Engineer, at least 30 days prior to the start of temporary support operations, for
P300.236
review and approval of the Engineer in accordance with Section 104.08 prior to
system fabrication and installation. All temporary support systems shall be
designed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of New Jersey. All
drawings and calculations for temporary supports are to be signed and sealed by
a Professional Engineer registered in the State of New Jersey.
Approval of the temporary support systems shall be at the sole discretion of the
Engineer. The Engineer's review and written approval shall in no way relieve
the Contractor of the responsibility to ensure the safety, adequacy, and operation
of the temporary support systems throughout their period of use.
No materials shall be ordered and no work shall be performed on the temporary
support schemes until the Engineers written approvals have been obtained.
Submitted plans, procedures, and calculations shall demonstrate that the existing
bridges are not overstressed by the temporary supports and that a safe loading
condition exists at all times during construction. The existing structures shall be
maintained in a stable condition at all times.
The Contractor is responsible for monitoring his operations in a manner that
insures compliance with the design of any temporary supports. The Contractor
must provide a means to constantly measure the possible deflection or yielding
of the temporary supports and shall continuously monitor this at all times. This
precaution is important because the deflection, shifting or yielding of the
temporary supports will induce permanent residual stresses into the structure or
may be an indication of the introduction of unanticipated loads. The Contractor
shall immediately notify the Engineer of any such condition. Any yielding
and/or deflection of the temporary support systems shall be immediately
corrected by the Contractor. The Contractors attention is directed to the fact that
it is of extreme importance to safeguard the temporary support systems. It will
be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to provide and maintain adequate
protection of the temporary support systems for the duration of the Contract.
Any damage to any portion of the existing structures to remain in place resulting
from the Contractors misuse of the temporary systems shall be repaired by him
to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer, all at the Contractors sole expense.
The temporary support system, when no longer required, shall be removed and
relocated and installed at another appropriate location or removed from the site
and disposed of by the Contractor.
All work shall be performed in accordance with the reviewed working drawings
and no deviation there from will be allowed without written approval from the
Engineer.
434.04
MEASUREMENT
Temporary support of existing decks necessary to permit the reconstruction of
decks/superstructures will be measured for payment on a lump sum basis, and
P300.236
shall be inclusive of all design, labor, materials, equipment, etc. necessary to
support the existing decks.
434.05
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
Temporary Supports for Concrete Deck, Location No. ____ ............. Lump Sum
No separate payment will be made for the design calculations, detail drawings,
shop drawings or work associated with gaining necessary approvals regardless
of the temporary support system used.
P300.236
DIVISION 500 - INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 501 - UNDERDRAINS
501.02
MATERIALS.
Rodent Blocking ...................................................................................................... 918.24
501.05
PAYMENT.
No separate payment will be made for rodent screens at pipe ends, but the costs thereof
will be included in the unit costs for the various underdrain and outlet pipes in the
Contract.
No separate payment will be made for filter fabric required for underdrains and bleeder
drains, but the costs thereof will be included in the unit costs for the various underdrain
and bleeder drain items in the Contract.
SECTION 502 - STORM DRAINS

502.02
MATERIALS
High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe ............................ 917.08
502.03
(J)
HDPE PIPE.
Installation shall be in accordance with ASTM D2321, and as per the manufacturers
latest installation guidelines.
502.05
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
__ Corrugated Metal Pipe Arch ...................................................................... Linear Foot
SECTION 503 MANHOLES AND INLETS

P300.236
503.01
DESCRIPTION
This work shall also include capping of existing drainage structures
This work shall also include steel shims and tack welding of existing roadway inlet grates
to the supporting frames to prevent traffic from dislodging the inlet grate as shown on
the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
This work shall also consist of constructing reinforced concrete collars and associated
reinforcement steel around inlets as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
This work shall also include the construction of outlet control structures as described at
the designated locations to the prescribed lines, grades and dimensions, in accordance
with the Plans, Specifications and the Construction Details. The stormwater vortex valve
shall be manufactured as detailed on the plans or an approved equal.
This work shall also consist of the construction of Inlet Chambers as specified in the
contract plans.
503.02
MATERIALS
Materials shall conform to the following Subsections:
Curing Materials ................................................................................... 906.07
Aluminum bars for trash racks shall conform to Subsection 911.01. Welding of the bars
shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code Aluminum.
503.03
The following Paragraphs (I) through (M) are added:
(I)
CONCRETE INLET COLLARS.

The underlying material shall be shaped and compacted to a firm, even surface.
Unstable material shall be removed and replaced with acceptable material that
shall be compacted.
Concrete shall be constructed according to Section 401, except that the collars
shall have a fine-hair brush finish and shall be finished to an even, smooth
surface at a specified grade. Joints between the concrete and pavement shall be
sealed with Asphalt Cement, Viscosity Grade 20 (AC-20).
(J)
WELD EXISTING INLET GRATE.

Where lane or shoulder closings are associated with traffic shifts that result in
traffic loading on inlets, the grates shall be welded to the frames as directed by
P300.236
the Engineer. The Contractor shall grind grate and frame and/or fill with weld
material to ensure grate sits flush on the scupper or inlet frame such that the
grate is fully supported and in full contact with the frame so there is even
bearing. Contractor shall fill in the gap between the frame and grate with steel
shims that are flush with the top of the grate to prevent any movement. Contract
shall field weld the full widths of the grate at both edges. High nickel alloy
(AWS A5.15 EN1-CL) shall be used for all field welds. When directed by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall remove the welding from the inlet grates and
frames by grinding to restore the grates and frames to their original condition.
(K)
CLEANING EXISTING DRAINAGE STRUCTURES.

In the presence of the Engineer, the Contractor shall inspect all existing drainage
inlets at the locations shown on the Plans. The Contractor shall clean the inlet
grate and the roadway area around the grate as directed by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall remove the inlet grate and proceed with cleaning the drainage
inlet.
Drainage inlets designated for cleaning shall be cleaned of all silt, sand and
debris at each location. Cleaning of inlets shall be performed in such a manner,
using approved methods and equipment, to permit proper drainage and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
Damage to an existing drainage inlet, as a result of careless or improper cleaning
operations, shall be repaired at no additional cost to the Authority. All materials
removed from existing inlets shall become the property of the Contractor and
shall be properly disposed of off the Authority Right-Of-Way at the Contractors
expense.
(L)
OUTLET CONTROL STRUCTURE.

Outlet Control Structures shall be constructed in accordance with the details
shown on the Plans.
Only hand compacting equipment (e.g., plate compactor, jumping jack, etc.)
shall be used within the footprint of the outlet control structures. Beyond the
footprint of the outlet control structures, compaction of subgrade soils within the
retention basin shall conform to Section 206.03.
The Contractors Professional Engineer, licensed to practice in the State of New
Jersey, shall prepare design calculations for the outlet control structures for the
minimum requirements outlined in the Contract Plans. Shop drawings shall be
submitted for Engineer approval in accordance with Subsection 104.08 prior to
construction.
(M)
INLET CHAMBER.
Inlet chambers shall be constructed in accordance with Paragraph (C) or (D) of
Subsection 503.03.
(N)
CAPPING EXISTING DRAINAGE STRUCTURES.

P300.236
Capping existing drainage shall be constructed in accordance with Paragraph (A)
and (B), of Subsection 503.03.
503.04
MEASUREMENT
Outlet control structures of the various types shall include the frame, grate, trash racks,
flow control device (vortex valve), and all associated materials.
Inlet chambers of various types will be measured by the number of each.
Weld Existing Inlet Grate, Roadway will be measured by the number of each inlet grate
welded in accordance with the Plans and Specifications and at the acceptance of the
Engineer. Grinding, welding, furnishing and installing shim plates, will not be measured
separately for payment. Removing the welds will not be measured for payment.
Rewelding will not be measured for payment.
Outlet Control Structure will be measured by the number of each structure installed to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. The frame, grate, vortex valve, trash racks, and
connections, will not be measured separately for payment.
Excavation of inlets and manholes within the limit of retaining walls and embankments
will not be measured separately for payment.
Capping of existing drainage structures will be measured by the number of each.
Cleaning Existing Drainage Structures will be measured by the number of inlets or
manholes cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Debris disposal will not be
Concrete Inlet Collar will be measured by the number of each furnished and installed.
Reinforcement steel in the concrete inlet collar will not be measured separately for
payment.
503.05
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
Outlet Control Structure..................................................................................... Each

Inlet Chamber, Type __ ..................................................................................... Each
Concrete Inlet Collar ........................................................................................... Each
Weld Existing Inlet Grates, Roadway............................................................... Each
Cleaning Existing Drainage Structures ............................................................ Each
Capping Existing Drainage Structures ............................................................. Each
No separate payment will be made for the legal disposal of existing castings.
P300.236
No separate payment will be made for the vortex valve and all associated materials, but
the cost thereof will be included in the cost of the outlet control structure.
SECTION 506 - CONCRETE CURB

506.01
DESCRIPTION.
This work shall also consist of construction of Portland cement concrete islands.
506.02
MATERIALS.
Welded Wire Fabric .......................................................................................... 908.01(C)
506.04
MEASUREMENT.
Concrete Island, 4 Thick shall be measured by the square yard installed. Furnishing and
placing welded wire fabric will not be measured separately for payment.
Excavation and backfill will not be measured separately for payment.
506.05
PAYMENT.
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
Concrete Island, 4 Thick .......................................................................... Square Yard
No separate payment will be made for furnishing and placing welded wire fabric, but the
cost thereof will be included in the unit price bid for Concrete Island, 4 Thick.
No separate payment will be made for excavation and backfilling at curbs and islands,
but the costs thereof will be included in unit prices bid for the various curb and concrete
island pay items in the Contract.
SECTION 508 - CONCRETE MEDIAN BARRIER

508.01
DESCRIPTION
The work shall also include the construction of concrete roadway barrier with moment
slab and removal of existing median barrier.
508.03
P300.236
(C)
Extrusion of Slip-Form Construction - Roadway Section.

Variable height concrete median barrier will require site specific different forms
than those normally associated with this work. Special extrusion (slip-form)
equipment and techniques will be required for molding the variable height
median barrier. The narrower median work zone width in some areas of the
proposed variable height barrier may also restrict the Contractors choice of
equipment.
508.04
MEASUREMENT
Removal of concrete median barrier will be measured by the length to be removed along
the top of the centerline of the barrier.
Labor, equipment and materials required to construct concrete closure walls associated
with median barriers will not be measured separately for payment.
508.05
PAYMENT
The following pay items are added:
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
CONCRETE ROADWAY BARRIER WITH MOMENT SLAB .........................................
LINEAR FOOT
CONCRETE MEDIAN BARRIER REMOVAL, ROADWAY...........................................
LINEAR FOOT
15 X 41 CONCRETE BARRIER CURB ....................................................................
LINEAR FOOT
No separate payment will be made for coarse aggregate, and any additional roadway
excavation required to construct the roadway barrier with moment slab. All costs thereof
shall be included in the Concrete Roadway Barrier with Moment Slab Pay Item.
No separate payment will be made for labor, equipment and materials required to
construct concrete closure walls associated with median barriers, but the costs thereof
will be included in the unit prices bid for the various median barrier pay items in the
Contract.
SECTION 509 - SIGN PANELS

509.01
DESCRIPTION.
With the exception of delineators, mile markers and signs mounted on concrete barrier, all
ground mounted signs to be installed on Parkway right-of-way shall be mounted on
properly sized, pressure treated timber sign supports.
P300.236
The work also includes the fabrication, installation, relocation, maintenance and removal
of temporary guide signs, including ground-mounted sign support systems, as specified
in the Maintenance and Protection of Traffic Plans under this Contract and where
509.02
MATERIAL.
Timber posts shall conform to subsection 910.05.
509.03
Ground Mounted Sign Panels located within NJTA Property, shall be installed in
accordance with the sign support details provided in the Construction Details of the
Contract Plans.
(F)
Aluminum Sheet Sign Panels.

Where shown on the plans and where directed by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall install regulatory and warning signs, in accordance with the current
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and Plan details.

(Q)
Timber Posts.
Timber sign posts shall be so erected that the signs to be attached thereto will be
at the locations, elevations, and spacing called for on the Plans. Posts shall be
excavated to the prescribed depth by either hand or mechanical devices. Any
posts bent or otherwise damaged, to the extent that they are in the opinion of the
Engineer unfit for use in the finished work, shall be removed from the site and
replaced by the Contractor at his own expense. Signs shall be attached after posts
are installed. Any signs that are bent or otherwise damaged, to the extent that
they are in the opinion of the Engineer unfit for use in the finished work, shall be
repaired or replaced by the Contractor at his own expense as directed by the
Engineer.
(R)
Temporary Guide Signs.

Temporary Guide Signs shall be fabricated as noted elsewhere in this section.
Guide Signs detailed on Sheet MPT-8 in the Plans are considered to be
Temporary Guide Signs. Sign support systems for these Temporary Guide Signs
shall be in accordance with the details shown in the Maintenance and Protection
of Traffic Plans.
509.04
MEASUREMENT.
P300.236
Delete the fourth paragraph in its entirety and replace with the following:
Temporary Guide Signs are measured by the total square footage of sign panel used
temporarily during construction under this Contract. Sign support systems for
Temporary Guide Signs will not be measured separately for payment.
Relocation of Temporary Guide Signs will not be measured separately for payment.
The removal of existing overhead sign panels will be measured by the number of sign
panels removed on existing structures to remain. The removal of existing overhead sign
panels will not be measured when the existing sign structure is to be removed but shall
be included in the respective sign structure removal item.
Timber Posts will be measured by linear feet.
509. 05
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
Timber Posts ............................................................................................ Linear Foot
Removal of Existing Ground-Mounted Sign ........................................
Each
Temporary Guide Signs .......................................................................... Square Foot
No separate payment will be made for relocation and the sign support systems for
Temporary Guide Signs, but the costs thereof will be included in the unit price bid for the
pay item Temporary Guide Signs.
SECTION 510 - GUIDE RAIL

Delete this Section in its entirety and replace with the following:
510.01
DESCRIPTION
Guide Rail shall consist of steel rail elements mounted on steel posts and
recycled/synthetic blockouts, with terminal anchorages, end treatments and connections
in accordance with the Plans. Work shall include removal, furnishing and installing,
realigning, raising, salvaging existing single-face and double-face beam guide rail, and
resetting guide rail with salvaged material.
When applicable, this work shall also include the installation of end terminals in
accordance with manufacturers recommendations. The Contractor and Subcontractor (if
applicable) will be required to have their foremen and superintendents (at a minimum)
attend a mandatory training session presented by the manufacturer, prior to the start of
construction.
P300.236
510.02
MATERIALS
Materials shall conform to the following Subsections:
Rail Element
Posts
Blockouts
Rub Rail
Miscellaneous Hardware
Circular Reflectors
Expansion Anchors
Adhesive Anchors
915.01
915.02
915.02
915.05
915.03
915.06
909.02 (E)
909.02 (F)
Portland cement concrete for anchorages and post foundations shall conform to Section
905, Class B.
All metal components along the Turnpike shall be galvanized in accordance with
Subsection 909.11. All metal components along the Garden State Parkway shall be
weathering steel in accordance with Section 915.
Use the latest non-gating, guide rail end treatments that are NCHRP 350 tested, test level
3 (TL-3), approved. Ensure that the components of the end treatment comply with the
NCHRP 350 approved end treatment details.
510.03
Prior to installing posts, the location of underground electrical conduits and other
utilities, which may conflict with the posts, shall be determined. The Contractor must call
(800) 272-1000 for a utility markout in accordance with Subsection 106.18. Post spacing
may be adjusted by 6 inches or double brackets may be used, as approved, to eliminate
such conflicts. The Contractor's attention is directed to Subsection 106.18, pertaining to
utilities. Test pits, as directed, shall be made as specified in Section 522.
The rail elements shall be constructed with the top edge in a straight line or smooth curve
parallel to or concentric with the roadway. Where a vertical transition is required, the top
edge of rail elements shall form the chords of a smooth vertical curve. Attach the beam
guide rail element to the blockout at every post.
No punching, drilling, reaming, or cutting of the rail elements will be permitted in the
field unless specifically approved by the Engineer. Neither torchcutting nor welding of
rail elements will be permitted. All new material shall be furnished, except where
resetting, realigning, raising, or salvaging is called for. Damaged galvanized surfaces
shall be repaired in accordance with Subsection 403.16.
The installation shall be made in such a manner that no unprotected end is exposed to
approaching traffic.
(A) Beam Guide Rail.
Within the same working day, replace all existing beam guide rail that is removed.
Where possible, install new beam guide rail exposed to approaching traffic before the
P300.236
removal of the existing system.
If it is suspected that conduit is present, the Engineer may require tests. Locate and
repair damage to the electrical conduit due to construction operations.
Drive beam guide rail posts to the required position. Ensure that posts are driven
plumb, properly spaced, and to the line and grade shown.
Install the required bridge attachment type as shown on the Plans. Mount bridge
beam guide posts as shown on the Plans.
Repair damage to the galvanized coating, if applicable, according to ASTM A 780.
For beam guide installations on the Garden State Parkway, install side mounted
circular reflectors in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. The
guide rail reflector spacing criteria to be used on the Parkway is as follows:
1. Mainline:
Spacing = 100 feet on-center
2. Plazas and Ramps:
Spacing = 25 feet on-center
3. Initial Spacing:
Regardless of whether on mainline or ramp/plaza, the first reflector
shall be at the first post at the start of the guide rail run. The 2 nd reflector
shall follow at 12.5 feet. The 3rd reflector shall follow at 25 feet from the
2nd reflector (i.e. for total of 37.5 feet). After this, the reflector spacing
will either continue at 25 feet on-center for ramp/plaza or go to 100 feet
on-center if on the mainline. If conditions in the field differ from above,
the Engineer is to develop a reflector spacing configuration.
4. Ramps:
For the purpose of placing reflectors, a ramp will begin at the start of the
transition to the deceleration ramp. A ramp will end at the end of the
transition at the end of an acceleration ramp.
5. Plaza:
For the purpose of placing reflectors, a plaza will begin at the start of the
pavement widening transition from the mainline to the plaza. A plaza
will end at the end of the pavement widening transition from a widened
plaza to the mainline roadway.
6. Reflector Color:
The color of the reflector is to match the color of the adjacent roadway
pavement line stripe color.
(B) Safety Walk and Parapet Connections.
Safety Walk and Parapet connections of the types required shall consist of terminal
connector, back-up plate(s), rail element(s), posts, and blockouts. Bolt holes through
the parapets shall be core drilled through existing parapets or formed through new
parapets using non-corrosive sleeves for each bolt.
(C) Post Weldments.
Post Weldments shall consist of a base plate, welded to a modified guide rail post
P300.236
with bracket, and bolted to a concrete anchorage. The Post Weldment shall be set
plumb, properly spaced, and to the prescribed line and grade.
The holes for anchor bolts shall be drilled with a masonry drill. Drill bit sizes for
anchor bolt holes shall conform to ANSI Standards. Holes shall be properly spaced
and located. Anchor bolts shall be as called for in Subsection 909.02(E) or (F).
Precautions shall be taken, so that concrete is not damaged during drilling for
anchor bolts. Any damage to the existing concrete shall be repaired without
additional compensation. Any alternate concrete anchorages shown on the plans
may be substituted with the Engineers approval, provided sufficient depth is
available.
Welding shall conform to the ANSI/AASHTO/AWS D1.5 Bridge Welding Code,
with the exception that the welding of the tubular structures shall be done in
accordance with the ANSI/AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code.
With Post Weldment installations on the Garden State Parkway, the base plate and
post shall be painted brown to match the color of the weathering steel beam guide
rail element in accordance with Subsection 913.03, Coating System C.
(D) Rub Rail.
When rub rail is required, bolt rub rail consisting of a steel channel or a bent plate to
the beam guide rail posts.
(E) Terminals and Anchorages.
At least 10 days before beginning the work, submit the manufacturers
recommendations to the Engineer. Install terminals and anchorages according to the
manufacturers recommendations.
Excavate for post holes and concrete anchorages as specified in Subsection 206.03.
Backfill and compact using the directed method as specified in Subsection 206.03.
(F) Reset Beam Guide Rail.
Reset Beam Guide Rail consists of using salvaged material to construct the specified
item.The salvaged material shall be carefully loaded at the location specified and
transported to the area where it is to be installed. Available salvaged material shall
consist of beam guide rail elements, posts, blockouts, nuts, bolts, washers and
plates, unless otherwise specified. Any salvaged material damaged due to
carelessness, shall be replaced without additional compensation.
In areas designated on the plans, salvaged beam guide rail shall be reset using
recycled/synthetic blockouts in place of the existing steel or wooden blockouts.
New hardware shall be supplied, as required. For galvanized steel beam guide rail
elements and galvanized posts, the bolt holes for the recycled/synthetic blockouts
shall be treated in accordance with Subsection 403.16. Posts damaged during the
drilling of bolt holes shall be replaced at the contractors expense.
(G) Removal of Beam Guide Rail.
P300.236
Removal of Beam Guide Rail shall consist of dismantling, removing and disposal of
guide rail elements, posts, blockouts and hardware. Work shall include cutting
existing anchor bolts flush with concrete surfaces and refilling and patching post
holes with material similar to that of the adjoining area.
After removing beam guide rail, backfill the post holes and compact the area to the
elevation of the adjacent surface. Materials and debris shall be disposed of in
accordance with all applicable Federal, State and Local laws.
(H) Beam Guide Rail Element.
Beam Guide Rail Element shall consist of the installation of new rail element on to
existing beam guide rail blockouts in accordance with Subsection 510.03(A).
510.04
MEASUREMENT
Beam Guide Rail will be measured by the length in place along the top of rail between
centers of end posts, excluding the pay limits for parapet connections, safety walk
connections, anchorages and end terminals. Dual-faced rail items will be measured by
the linear foot along the face of one rail excluding end terminals. Posts are included in
respective item and will not be measured separately.
Beam Guide Rail Element and Rub Rail will be measured by the linear foot along the face
of the rail.
Beam Guide Rail Anchorages, Safety Walk Connections, Parapet Connections, Beam
Guide Rail Buried End Terminals, Flared Guide Rail Terminals, Tangent Guide Rail
Terminals, Telescoping Guide Rail End Terminals, Beam Guide Rail Posts (, Controlled
Release Terminal, Controlled Release Terminal Anchorage, Beam Guide Rail Post
Weldments and Beam Guide Rail Blockouts will be measured by the number of each
installed.
Reset Beam Guide Rail will be measured as specified above for Beam Guide Rail.
Removal of Beam Guide Rail will be measured by length of existing beam guide rail
removed, including end treatments, as shown on the plans, and as directed by the
Engineer.
510.05
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
Beam Guide Rail.................................................................... Linear Foot
Beam Guide Rail, Dual-Faced ............................................. Linear Foot
Beam Guide Rail Element ................................................... Linear Foot
Reset Beam Guide Rail ......................................................... Linear Foot
Beam Guide Rail Anchorage ............................................... Each
Parapet Connection, Type A ............................................... Each
Parapet Connection, Type B ................................................ Each
Flared Guide Rail Terminal ................................................. Each
P300.236
Tangent Guide Rail Terminal .............................................. Each
Beam Guide Rail Post ........................................................... Each
Beam Guide Rail Post Weldment ........................................ Each
Removal of Beam Guide Rail ............................................. Linear Foot
Rub Rail .................................................................................. Linear Foot
Controlled Release Terminal ............................................... Each
Controlled Release Terminal Anchorage ........................... Each
Reset Beam Guide Rail with Existing Posts ....................... Linear Foot
No separate payment shall be made for reflectors attached to the face of the beam guide
rail element.
SECTION 515 - DELINEATORS

515.02
MATERIALS
Delete the second and third paragraphs of paragraph 515.02(C), and replace them with
the following:
The nominal marker width shall be 3.75 inches in order to accommodate a four-inch wide
reflector and provide adequate daytime delineation.
The marker shall be of such length to provide the required height above the road surface
with a minimum embedment of 24 inches.
SECTION 516 - PAVEMENT STRIPES AND MARKINGS

516.01
DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of striping or painting bituminous or concrete surface courses
with the following materials, in accordance with the Contract documents: extruded or
preformed thermoplastic traffic stripes and markings, epoxy resin traffic stripes or
markings, latex traffic paint, pliant polymer rubber preformed traffic stripes or markings,
and the application of glass beads when applicable. Unless otherwise indicated in the
Contract documents, the type of material for traffic stripes and markings shall follow the
Standard Striping Materials & Procedures table from the Authoritys Pavement Marking
Standard Drawings.
Traffic stripes is defined as the various widths and colors of lines used to
designate lanes and shoulders on roadways.
Traffic markings, lines is defined as the various types and materials for
diagonal gore lines, crosswalks, stop lines, or other pavement lines not
covered under Traffic stripes.
P300.236
Traffic markings, symbols is defined as the various types and materials

for words, arrows, or other pavement symbols.
The work also includes the placement and removal of temporary pavement stripes and
markings. Temporary pavement stripes and markings may be latex, thermoplastic, epoxy
resin, or removable wet weather pavement marking tape as shown on the Contract
documents or as directed by the Engineer.
In addition, this work includes the removal of existing traffic stripes and markings
consisting of the removal of white or yellow stripes or solid areas, letters, arrows, and
other symbols from bituminous concrete and concrete bridge deck surfaces. Removal
shall be, in accordance with the contract documents, via mechanical means (grinding or
sandblasting) or hydromilling. The work shall also consist of any required placing of
removable black line mask or black paint (only if specifically permitted) to cover existing
stripes to be temporarily obliterated.
The work shall also consist of diamond grinding concrete bridge deck surfaces for
contrast striping recessing and applying contrast stripes.
516.02
MATERIALS.
The following is removed:
TEMPORARY STRIPING
920.10

PREFORMED CONTRAST MARKING TAPE .............................. 913.05(H)
BLACK PAINT .................................................................................... 913.05(G)
REMOVABLE WET WEATHER PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE .... 920.10
516.04
(A) NEW PAVEMENT STRIPING.
The following is added after the eighth paragraph:
Methods of Construction for contrast striping shall be in accordance with
516.04(I).
The first sentence of the last paragraph is replaced with the following:
The Contractor shall apply latex traffic stripes or traffic markings to thoroughly
dry surfaces and during dry weather when the ambient and surface
temperatures are as specified for that particular material.
Delete subparagraph (2) in its entirety.
Rename Subparagraph (B) to Long-Life Thermoplastic Traffic Markings and Stripes
P300.236
(B) LONG-LIFE THERMOPLASTIC TRAFFIC M ARKINGS AND STRIPES.

(2)
Extruded Thermoplastic
The following is added prior to the first paragraph:
Thermoplastic traffic markings and stripes shall not be placed on newly
constructed pavement until the pavement is a minimum of twenty-four
(24) hours old. Refer to 516.04(G) for temporary striping requirements on
pavement less than twenty-four (24) hours old.
Delete Subparagraph (C) in its entirety.

Subparagraphs (C) thru (J).
Redesignate Subparagraph (D) thru (K) as
(C) LONG-LIFE EPOXY RESIN TRAFFIC STRIPES.

The following is added to the beginning of the subparagraph:
Methods of Construction for Epoxy Resin Contrast Stripes shall be in accordance
with 516.04(I).
(F) REMOVAL OF PAINTED PAVEMENT STRIPES.
Replace the second sentence of the first paragraph with the following:
Obliterating stripes or markings by painting over them with black paint shall not
be permitted except where specifically called for in the contract documents or as
directed by the Engineer. Obliterating gore area markings with black paint will
be permitted only as called for in the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
Replace the sixth paragraph with the following:
The Contractor shall employ mechanical (grinding or sandblasting),
hydromilling, or black line mask for obliterating painted stripes as shown on the
Plans. Striping removal operations will not be permitted until the removal
method has been tested and approved by the Engineer.
Grinding or Sandblasting shall only be performed on pavement and concretewearing surfaces which are scheduled to be replaced.
Hydromilling shall be used in the removal of existing or temporary painted
stripes on pavement and concrete-wearing surfaces which are scheduled to
remain. This shall be performed by use of a high-pressure water jetting system
such as the Starjet system manufactured by NLB Corporation, 159 Harmony
Road; Mickleton, NJ; (856) 423-2211; or an approved equal. Hydromilling of
painted striping shall be performed with a truck mounted mobile system and
shall not damage the existing pavement. The area of removal includes the area of
the stripe plus 1 inch on all sides. Hydromilling shall not be used when the
temperature is 35F and falling.
Replace the first and second sentence of the seventh paragraph with the
P300.236
following:
When black painting of existing painted lines is permitted, the existing lines
shall be kept obliterated for the duration of the work under that stage. Black
paint used for obliteration of existing epoxy or latex painted striping shall not be
removed and new painted pavement striping will be installed over the black
paint. Black paint shall not be used over existing Thermoplastic traffic striping.
The following is added to the eleventh paragraph:
Black Line Mask shall be used for temporary obliteration of existing pavement
stripes for staged construction with durations of fifteen (15) days or less.
Removable Black Line Mask shall not be overlapped. Only butt splices shall be
used. Continuous runs shall be scored at 50 foot intervals.
Replace the twelfth paragraph with the following:
For lane shifts or traffic detours, when a portion or all of the right shoulder is to
be used as a traffic lane, the Contractor shall obliterate existing pavement stripes
as called for in the plans or as directed by the Engineer and place temporary
striping. At the deceleration and acceleration lanes when a portion or all of the
right shoulder is used as a traffic lane, the Contractor shall remove the pavement
stripes delineating the auxiliary lane. Allowable hours for striping changes shall
be as per the Traffic Manual. Upon completion of the work, the lanes shall be
restriped in accordance with the details shown on the Standard Drawings, unless
shown differently on the contract plans.
(G) TEMPORARY PAVEMENT STRIPING.
Subparagraph is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:
Temporary pavement striping shall be provided by the Contractor when
required per the Plans, provisions of Subsection 516.04(G), or when stripes or
markings are to be placed on intermediate pavement layers, or on new pavement
less than twenty four (24) hours old, to be opened to traffic due to staged
construction.
Temporary striping shall be applied in construction work areas, at the locations
shown on the Plans, to clean dry surfaces in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations and the required primer or a method approved by the
Engineer.
The following types of temporary pavement striping shall be acceptable,
adhering to the below conditions:
(1)
Removable Wet Weather Pavement Marking Tape.

This shall be used for applications of seven (7) days or less.
Removable Wet Weather Pavement Marking Tape, meeting the
requirements of Subsection 920.10, shall be installed at designated
locations under the guidance and in the presence of the manufacturers
P300.236
representative, in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
Primers, if required, shall be used to promote tape adhesion to the
wearing surface in accordance with the tape manufacturers
recommendations. The tape shall be white or yellow and shall be
installed in single or double lines, as designated.
Removable Wet Weather Pavement Marking Tape shall not be
overlapped. Only butt splices shall be used and continuous runs of tape
shall be scored at 50 foot intervals.
Tape shall be removed when no longer required for traffic control. Tape
shall be removed manually, intact or in large pieces, by scraping if
necessary, without the use of solvents, burning, grinding, or sand/shot
blasting.
(2)
Latex Traffic Paint.

This may be used for applications that will remain in place for longer
than seven (7) days.
(3)
Thermoplastic Paint.
This may be used in lieu of latex traffic paint, based on temperature
constraints, as noted on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
Temporary thermoplastic traffic stripes shall not be placed on newly
constructed concrete decks until the decks are a minimum of 24 hours
old. Thermoplastic Paint shall not be placed on top of latex traffic paint.
(4)
Epoxy Resin Paint.

This may be used in lieu of latex traffic paint, based on temperature
constraints, as noted on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
Prior to reopening the lanes to traffic, lane lines shall be reestablished with
temporary pavement striping on all newly paved areas less than twenty four (24)
hours old. Temporary pavement striping must be maintained in a serviceable
condition in accordance with the various provisions contained herein and subject
to the satisfaction of the Engineer until such time as the permanent traffic
striping is constructed.
(H) REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE TRAFFIC STRIPES.
The contractor must, at all times, have immediately available in his yard an
amount of replacement tape equal to the tape applied and be prepared to respond
within two hours to close lanes, and repair/replace tape that has become damaged.
Removable Wet Weather Pavement Marking Tape that has become damaged, and
is no longer serviceable, in the sole opinion of the Engineer, shall be replaced
P300.236
immediately. Damaged tape that is not replaced immediately may be replaced by
the Authority and the costs shall be charged to the Contractor in accordance with
Subsection 106.23.
The following Subparagraph is added:
(I)
CONTRAST STRIPING.
Diamond grinding shall be performed to prepare the concrete deck surface for
the contrast striping. The transverse deck grooving shall be completed before the
diamond grinding. Equipment shall include a free-floating cutting or grinding
head to provide a consistent recess depth over irregular pavement surfaces. The
grinding or cutting head shall be equipped with diamond saw blades. Diamond
saw blades shall be used on the cutting head to provide a smooth surface in the
bottom of the recess. Immediately prior to the application of the contrast
striping, the recess shall be cleaned with high-pressure air to remove debris and
dust generated during the cutting operation. The groove must be clean and dry
for proper application of the contrast striping. Refer to the manufacturers
technical specifications for recess cleaning and dry time prior to product
application.
The recess dimensions are as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Width. The recess shall exceed the width of the marking material by 1
inch.
Depth. 100 mils 10 mils.
Position. The edge of the recess shall be constructed a minimum of 2
inches from the edge of concrete joints.
The total stripe width (black stripe), from outer edge to outer edge shall be 9
inches. The white stripe shall be 6 inches wide. For epoxy resin contrast stripes,
white paint shall be applied within 24 hours of black paint but not less than the
minimum requirement as recommended by the epoxy resin manufacturer.
Existing striping shall be removed prior to application of contrast striping.
The type of contrast striping system (Epoxy Resin or Preformed Contrast Marking
Tape) to be used shall be as noted on the Contract Plans.
(1) Preformed Contrast Marking Tape.
Apply P-50 adhesive per the manufacturers recommendations.
Contrast striping tape and its application shall conform to the
manufacturers technical bulletins and specifications.
(2) Epoxy Resin Contrast Stripes.
Black epoxy resin contrast stripes shall be applied in the recess and
applied 12 mil 2 mils thick. Black aggregate shall be used to remove any
P300.236
sheen. Black contrast stripes shall dry completely before proceeding to
the reflective media.
Contrast striping materials and application shall conform to the
manufacturers specifications.
Applied markings shall have a uniform 302 mils total thickness
reflective media distributed across the width of the line. The markings
shall have crisp distinct edges and clean cutoff at the end of each line.
All applied markings shall be protected from traffic and potential
tracking while the epoxy cures. Markings may be saturated with glass
beads to help prevent tracking.
The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer the application of the
broken white lines for a distance of 150 feet. The Engineer shall approve
the test strip before the contractor continues striping operations.
516.05
MEASUREMENT.
Delete the second and third paragraphs in their entirety and replace with the following.
Temporary Pavement Striping will be measured by the length of Latex Traffic Paint
which is applied. Thermoplastic Paint used as temporary pavement striping will be
measured and paid under Traffic Stripes, Long Life, Thermoplastic. Epoxy Resin used
as temporary pavement striping will be measured and paid under Traffic Stripes, Long
Life, Epoxy Resin. Temporary pavement stripes which are replaced because of damage
or excessive wear, as determined by the Engineer, will be measured for payment.
Removable Wet Weather Pavement Marking Tape will be measured by the linear foot
based on a 6-inch wide strip.
Striping and Marking Removal, Hydromilling will be measured by the linear foot of
permanent or temporary striping removed by hydromilling.
Striping and Marking Removal, Mechanical will be measured and paid by the linear
foot of permanent or temporary striping removed by mechanical means (grinding or
sandblasting).
Diamond Grinding will be measured by the total length of contrast striping tape or paint
within the recess. The distance between the trailing and lead ends of the skip stripes that
are not ground will not be measured for payment.
Preformed Contrast Marking Tape will be measured by the length of tape actually
installed.
516.06
PAYMENT.
THE FOLLOWING IS REMOVED:
P300.236
PAY ITEM
Pavement Striping.....
Pavement Striping, White, ____ Wide
..
Pavement Striping, Yellow, ____ Wide ...
Striping and Marking Removal...
Preformed Pavement Marking, White, 6 Inches Wide
Preformed Pavement Marking, Yellow, 6 Inches Wide
Temporary Pavement Marking, White, 6 Inches Wide
Temporary Pavement Marking, Yellow, 6 Inches Wide
Removable Black Line Mast, 8 Inches Wide..
PAY UNIT
Linear Foot
Linear Foot
Linear Foot
Linear Foot
Linear Foot
Linear Foot
Linear Foot
Linear Foot
Linear Foot
THE FOLLOWING IS ADDED:

PAY ITEM
Removable Wet Weather Pavement Marking Tape.
Diamond Grinding
Preformed Contrast Marking Tape.
Striping and Marking Removal, Hydromilling
Striping and Marking Removal, Mechanical.....
PAY UNIT
Linear Foot
Linear Foot
Linear Foot
Linear Foot
Linear Foot

No separate payment will be made for black traffic paint used to temporarily obliterate
traffic stripes, but the costs thereof shall be included in the pay item(s) for the removal of
striping.
Removable Wet Weather Pavement Marking Tape that has become damaged and is no
longer serviceable shall be replaced immediately without additional compensation and
will not be measured for payment. Tape that is damaged by construction operations
shall also be replaced immediately without additional compensation and will not be
measured for payment. Damaged tape, not replaced immediately, may be replaced by
the Authority and the costs shall be charged to the Contractor in accordance with
Subsection 106.23.
No separate payment will be made for the removal of Removable Wet Weather
Pavement Marking Tape or Removable Black Line Mask, 8 Wide, but the costs thereof
shall be included in their respective pay items for application.
Temporary pavement striping constructed on new pavement less than twenty four (24)
hours old, necessary to re-open a staged work area to traffic, shall not be measured for
payment but shall be considered incidental to the placement of pavement.
SECTION 517 FIELD OFFICE

517.01
DESCRIPTION
Delete the first paragraph in its entirety and replace it with the following:
This work shall consist of providing a field office. The Authority has identified
P300.236
Interchange 165 within the Authoritys Right of Way as a potential location for a field
office complex but does not guarantee its availability. Providing offsite office space at a
separate single location equivalent to a Type E field office is also acceptable. The exact
field office location will be subject to the approval of the Engineer, but in general, the site
will be located within close proximity of the Contract limits. Should a trailer complex be
used, the Contractor may have to secure the property for the field office trailers, outside
the Authoritys Right of Way. In addition should a trailer complex is to be used as a field
office, a repeater system shall be installed to ensure proper cellular signal inside the
trailer for cell phones and hotspots. This field office shall be utilized as the project field
office for use by the Engineer and other representatives of the Authority. Specific
requirements for the office shall be as further specified herein.
Setting up the field office shall consist of furnishing the office complete with furniture,
bookcases, wall clocks, computer and associated equipment, office supplies, electricity,
water, heating, air-conditioning, installation and activation of telephone lines, telephone
sets (touch tone and cellular), wireless internet, sanitary facilities, and lavatory supplies.
(C)
M AINTAIN FIELD OFFICE

Delete this paragraph in its entirety and replace with the following:
The work to be performed under this Contract shall involve maintaining a field
office for the exclusive use of the Engineer and other representatives of the
Authority and a field office to be utilized as the main widening program field
office for use by the Widening program Project Manager and Construction
Inspection team. The work shall include furnishing all labor and materials and
the payment of all expenses necessary for proper maintenance of the field office
for the duration of the Contract or Widening Program, as applicable. The
Contractor will also be required to provide electrical power and telephone hookup. No electrical power is to be provided by emergency backup generators.
At all times, the maintenance of the Field Office shall be the sole and full
responsibility of the Contractor for the duration of the Contract.
517.03
Replace the first paragraph with the following
The Contractor shall provide and maintain in good condition one or more construction
field offices for the exclusive use of the Engineer at a location or locations approved by the
Engineer. The field office or offices shall be ready for use not later than ten days after the
date of mailing of the fully executed Contract to the Contractor and before construction
operations begin. The field office or offices shall be maintained until no longer required
by the Engineer and then removed. It is estimated that the field office or offices is/are
required for three months after Completion. Any building scheduled to be demolished
under the Contract shall not be used as a field office.
Replace the first sentence in the second paragraph with the following:
The trailer, furnished by the Contractor shall be installed at the location and in the
P300.236
position designated by the Engineer.
Delete the fifth paragraph in its entirety.
Delete the ninth paragraph which starts with the words, When the trailer is to remain
in its entirety.
Replace the tenth paragraph with the following:
The trailer is to be removed from the site at the completion of the work under the
Contract, utility and sewage services shall be disconnected and terminated in a manner
satisfactory to the Engineer and the site restored to the original condition.
The types of field offices are as follows:
1.
Construction Field Offices.

a.
Type A. Type A field office shall be of weatherproof construction located

on or in the immediate vicinity of the Project, having a floor area of not less
than 576 square feet and a ceiling height of not less than 7 feet, and having
partitions and doors providing three communicating rooms, one with a
floor area of not less than 288 square feet and two with a floor area of not
less than 144 square feet each.
The field office shall be provided with sufficient natural and artificial light
and shall be adequately insulated, heated, and air-conditioned. Doors and
windows shall be equipped with adequate locks, and all keys shall be in the
possession of the Engineer.
The field office shall have one or more clothes closets of ample size for
maximum office requirements, and all stairs shall have safety rails installed.
Sanitary conveniences suitable for use by male and female employees of the
Authority shall be provided in the field office or offices and shall be stocked
with lavatory and sanitary supplies at all times during the life of the
Contract. All toilet facilities shall be in compliance with OSHA Regulation
1926.51(c) with the exception that the Authority will require that separate
toilet facilities be provided for males and females. The sewage disposal
method shall not endanger the health of employees and shall be in
compliance with all State and Federal regulations. Toilet facilities shall be
cleaned and sanitized a minimum of once per week except from May 15
through September 15 in which these facilities shall be cleaned and
sanitized a minimum of twice per week.
The contractor shall satisfy all state and local rules and regulations.
The contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all State and/or local
permits.
P300.236
The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of the field office
complex and its contents to the satisfaction of the engineer at all times.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing snow removal at the stairs
and doorway of each field office.
Adequate free parking shall be provided and maintained for the field office.
The office shall be equipped with the following for the exclusive use of the
Engineer, however, the Contractor shall not be responsible for the
replacement of equipment that is lost or damaged due to misuse:
1.
a.
b.
2.
a.
b.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Five (5) multi-line touch-tone telephones and Three (3) telephone

lines for use with the telephones installed as directed and
operational in the Field Office and other facilities specified.
One (1) dedicated, operational telephone line(s) for Fax machine(s).
One (1) telephone answering machine or voice mail service as
provided with Comcast or Verizon services.
Two (2) like new desks and swivel chairs with casters and arm rests
for each room.
HON
Metro
Classic
60"
Double
Pedestal
Desk,
Charcoal/Mahogany or approved equal.
Staples Belmore Leather Manager's Chair or approved equal.
Drafting table with high swivel stool with casters and sufficient
drawers for 22" x 36" plans, either attached to the table or in cabinet
form, for each room.
Folding tables and chairs for the use of 16 personnel.
Two (2) supply cabinets.
Plan racks sufficient enough to hold two (2) sets of full size Contract
Plans.
Four like new fire-resistant, four-drawer, legal-size file cabinets with
lock and two keys meeting fire underwriters approval for not less
than a one-hour test.
Two (2) Class ABC fire extinguishers, or one Class A and one Class B
fire extinguisher, meeting fire underwriters approval.
Water cooler with bottled water having both hot and cold water
dispensers.
Counter height refrigerator and microwave.
One electronic calculator, ten-key, with trigonometric function
capability and printout tape.
Two (2) Dry-Erase white boards, minimum of 3x4 and One (1) large
dry-erase board for conference room, minimum 4 x 6.
Two Cork boards, minimum of 3x4.
One Ricoh Aficio Multifunction Color MP C6501SP copy machine
wirelessly networked for all users or approved equal. Printer toner
and 8 X 11, 8 X 14 and 11 X 17 inches size paper (500 sheets per
ream, weight: 22 ounces per square yard, color: white, grain: long,
for laser printers and copiers) for the duration of the construction
project.
P300.236
15. Six (6) Canon Powershot ELPH 530HS black digital cameras with 8
GB San Disk Extreme III SD memory card or approved equal and
camera case.
16. Six (6) Apple iPhones, latest model, smart phones or approved equal
with voice, text, and data plans for the duration of the contract. (Ex.
AT&T business plan with shared minutes, unlimited mobile to
mobile, free nights and weekends, rollover minutes, unlimited text
messaging and 3GB data plan). Phones shall come with car charger,
carrying holster and hands free Bluetooth.
17. First-aid box, which shall be restocked as necessary, containing the
following list of supplies:
Quantity
32
20
4
2
2
1
1
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
10
1
1
Size
" by 3"
1" by 3"
Medium
2"
51"
" by 180"
oz.
8 oz.
100 caplets
fl.oz .
0.33 ml
350 ml
350 ml
Item
Brand sheer bandages
Brand fabric bandages
Non-stick pads
Soft-gauze bandages
Oval eye pads
Triangular bandage
Hypo-allergenic first-aid tape
Antiseptic wipes
Burn cream, foil pack
First-aid cream
Tylenol Extra-Strength caplets
Scissors
Tweezer
First-aid guide
Ophthalmic irrigation solution
Contents cards
Large Latex Disposable gloves
Ammonia inhalants
Sterile water
Sterile hydrogen peroxide
18. Paper shredder, commercial cross cut capable of shredding cds,

staples and paper clips. Minimum of 24 sheet capacity, 20 minute
continues run time and 8 gallon capacity.
19. A microcomputer system compatible with the Authoritys Capital
Soft Program
Management system. The microcomputer
system shall include the following:
a.
Eight (8) HP Envy 17t-j100Mobile Workstation laptop

computers or approved equal. Each with the following:
docking station, 24 widescreen LCD monitor, wireless
keyboard and mouse, speakers, hi-capacity battery and latest
editions of MS windows and MS Office Professional. Each
laptop shall be provided with a carrying case, auto charger
P300.236
adapter, notebook wireless mouse and 32 GB high speed
USB flash drive, mobile hotspot on broadband cellular
network with monthly service for the use of the hotspot
wireless paid by the contractor.
b. Internet Service Provider with high speed broadband
wireless
connection
and
electronic
mail
(e.g
Comcast/Verizon). This account shall be maintained for the
duration of the Contract.
c. Two (2) 1 TB Western Digital Passport external hard drives
or approved equal.
d. Two (2) HP Officejet Pro 8600 Premium e-All-in-One
Printers or approved equal.
i. Printer toner / ink cartridge for the duration of the
construction project.
ii. 8 X 11, 8 X 14 and 11 X 17 inches size paper (500
sheets per ream, weight: 22 ounces per square yard,
color: white, grain: long, for laser printers and
copiers) for the duration of the construction project.
e. Software package to be included with each computer
system, on CD-ROM with documentation, including:
i. Microsoft Windows, latest version with future
upgrades.
ii. Microsoft Office Professional, latest version.
iii. Helix Nuts and Bolts Advanced Utilities for Windows,
latest version, or compatible software package.
iv. Anti-Virus software, latest version with monthly
updates (e.g., Nortons, McAfee or Dr. Solomon's).
v. Visio Professional Graphics Software for Windows,
latest version.
vi. Primavera Project Planner, latest version.
vii. Adobe Professional.
viii. CD and DVD Burning Software, latest version. (e.g.,
Nero, Roxio, Windows Media Player, etc.)
f. Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) - APC-1000 or
approved equal (e.g., Tripplite, Cyberpower, etc.)
g. Surge protector for the entire computer workstation to be
used in conjunction with the UPS (e.g., Zero Surge Power,
Inc. - Point of Use - 2R-15 amp/120 volts).
h. Static mat, floor type, 4 by 5 feet or larger with grounding
capabilities.
At the time of installation, the Contractor shall ensure that the equipment is
fully operational and meets all requirements of the Authority. All software
listed above shall be new and shall be installed. The Contractor shall
configure the software to work with the hardware provided. Any
accessories for the computers shall be compatible with the computer
system. The Contractor shall forward all manuals, instruction, and literature
received with the computer equipment to the Engineer. The Contractor is
responsible to maintain the computer equipment in good working
P300.236
condition. Any part of the computer equipment which becomes inoperable
or defective shall be replaced within 48 hours. The Contractor will not be
permitted to use this computer equipment at any time. It is being supplied
solely for the Authority's use. The computer equipment shall be removed
and retained by the Contractor when no longer required. The equipment
shall be in new condition. The Contractor will not be responsible for the
replacement or repair of equipment that is lost or damaged due to misuse.
The following additional equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor
for the exclusive use of the Resident Engineer. This equipment shall
conform to the applicable ASTM designation, when appropriate, and be in
good working condition. The Contractor shall repair or replace damaged
equipment throughout the duration of the Contract. The equipment shall
become the property of the Contractor after Acceptance:
1.
One Digital Video Recorder with LCD color display, expandable

SD/SDHC memory card slot, USB cable, tripod, extra battery,
battery charger and 1-50 pack 16x 4.7GB DVD-R or greater.
2. Four digital infrared remote read thermometers.
3. Two smart levels.
4. Three concrete thermometers.
5. Three asphalt thermometers.
6. Two illuminated measuring wheels.
7. Two 100 steel measuring tapes.
8. Two 100 cloth measuring tapes.
9. Concrete testing equipment to include (one each): wheelbarrow,
square tipped shovel, concrete scoop, slump cone and base set
(rod, slump cone, base and funnel), tamping rod (12 inches long,
3/8-inch diameter with hemispherical ends), tamping rod (24
inches long, 5/8-inch diameter with hemispherical ends), 12
ruler, Forney air meter (complete set) or equivalent, sponge and
long handled scrub brush, rubber or rawhide mallet (2.25
lb.0.50lb.), pointed trowel and five gallon bucket, concrete
cylinder curing items in accordance with governing
specifications.
10. Six sets of safety equipment consisting of: 360 degree
reflectorized vests, hard hats, fall protection, eye and ear
protection, which meets all OSHA requirements. Safety vests are
to be replaced semiannually for the duration of the project.
11. Six Whelen LED dash/deck mount amber and white strobes.
b.
c.
Type B. Type B field office shall conform to the requirements for Type A
except that it shall have a floor area of not less than 432 square feet and shall
be divided into two communicating rooms, one with a floor area of not less
than 288 square feet and one with a floor area of not less than 144 square
feet, and equipped with tables and chairs for the use of 12 personnel.
Type C. Type C field office shall conform to the requirements for Type A
except that it shall consist of one room having a floor area of not less than
288 square feet and be equipped with tables and chairs for the use of eight
P300.236
d.
e.
f.
personnel.
Type D. Type D field office shall conform to the requirements for Type A
be divided into four communicating rooms, one with a floor area of not less
than 288 square feet and three with a floor area of not less than 144 square
feet each, and equipped with tables and chairs for the use of 20 personnel.
Type E. Type E field office shall conform to the requirements for Type A
be divided into four communicating rooms, two with a floor area of not less
than 288 square feet each and two with a floor area of not less than 144
square feet each, and equipped with tables and chairs for the use of 24
personnel.
Type F. Type F field office shall conform to the requirements for Type A
except that it shall have a floor area of not less than 1,008 square feet and
shall be divided into five communicating rooms, two with a floor area of
not less than 288 square feet each and three with a floor area of not less than
144 square feet each, and equipped with tables and chairs for the use of 28
personnel, four additional fire resistant file cabinets as per part (7) and two
additional calculators as per part (10) specified under Type A Construction
field office.
Instead of the field office or offices specified above, the Contractor may provide
equivalent office space, equipment, and facilities subject to approval of the Engineer.
Maintenance of the Field Office, for the time required, shall consist of maintaining the
furniture, equipment, utilities, providing lavatory supplies, janitorial and waste disposal
services weekly, restocking of the first aid box, snow removal services, Maintenance of
the field office shall also include the monthly rent. The fax machine, telephone sets,
cellular telephone sets, computer and related equipment shall be repaired or replaced
within 24 hours of becoming inoperable or defective.
517.04
MEASUREMENT.
Furnish Field Office, Type _ will be measured for payment on a lump sum basis.
No separate payment will be made for procuring the field offices, furnishing utility
and/or sanitary service, or for any supplies listed in Subsection 517.03, but all costs
thereof shall be included in the lump sum price bid for the pay item Furnish Field
Office, Type _.
Maintain Field Office, Type _ shall include furnishing all labor and materials, and the
payment of all expenses necessary for proper maintenance of the field office for the
duration of the Contract.
517.05
PAYMENT
The list of pay items is deleted.
P300.236
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
Furnish Field Office Type _..............................................................Lump Sum

Maintain Field Office, Type _............................................................Month
SECTION 524 IMPACT ATTENUATOR

This Section is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:
524.01
DESCRIPTION.
This work shall consist of the furnishing, and installing of telescoping, non-gating, redirective (TNR) impact attenuators. For TNR impact attenuators installed in a
construction zone on a temporary basis, work shall also include the maintenance of the
attenuator during construction, repair or replacement during construction, relocation to a
different area, removal upon completion and the restoration of pavement after removal.
524.02
MATERIALS.
Materials shall conform to the following subsections:
Non-Gating, Re-directive Impact Attenuator................................................. 920.20
Foundation concrete for the permanent systems shall be at least 4,000 psi. Reinforcement
steel shall be epoxy coated. Concrete and reinforcement steel shall conform to Subsection
401.02.
Installation and additional material requirements shall be in accordance with the
Reflective sheeting which appears at the blunt end of temporary and permanent impact
attenuators shall conform to Subsection 912.02.
524.03
For TNR impact attenuators installed on a temporary basis, the Contractor shall have
spare unit parts for repair or replacement on site. If the attenuator is damaged from
vehicular impact, the Contractor shall repair/replace any damaged unit within 48 hours
of notification from the Authority. Repairs or replacement of TNR impact attenuators
due to damage caused by Contractor actions shall be immediately repaired at no
additional cost to the Authority. The Contractor shall be certified in accordance with the
manufacturers requirements to perform installation, maintenance, repair and
replacement of TNR impact attenuators.
Repair of TNR impact attenuators includes all of the labor and materials necessary to
meet the requirements for a working unit in accordance with the manufacturer. This
includes but is not limited to replacement of nose units, cartridges, diaphragms,
hardware, realignment or total replacement.
P300.236
524.04
MEASUREMENT.
Quadguard Impact Attenuator, ___Bays, ___ Wide are TNR Impact attenuators installed
on a permanent basis and shall be measured by the number constructed. Each unit shall
consist of a total energy absorbing system composed of the required number of bays and
required width.
Impact Attenuator, Type_____ will be measured by the number of each installed.
Bullnose Thrie Beam Attenuator will be measured by the number of each installed.
Furnishing Temporary Impact Attenuator, Quadguard ___Bays, ___Wide will be
measured by the number of each complete unit installed to the maximum number
provided in the Proposal that which are installed simultaneously.
Placing and Removing Temporary Impact Attenuator, Quadguard will be measured by
the total number of complete units placed in each location as prescribed. Removal of
temporary impact attenuators will not be measured for payment.
Repair Temporary Impact Attenuators, Quadguard will be measure by the number of
bays to be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
524.05
PAYMENT.
PAY ITEM
Quadguard Impact Attenuator, ___Bays, ___ Wide .......................................
Impact Attenuator, Type _____ ...........................................................................
Bullnose Thrie Beam Attenuator .........................................................................
Furnishing Temporary Impact Attenuator, Quadguard ___Bays,
___ Wide ............................................................................................
Placing and Removing Temporary Impact Attenuator, Quadguard .............
Repair Temporary Impact Attenuator, Quadguard .........................................
PAY UNIT
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
No separate payment will be made for the restoration of pavement involved with the
removal of impact attenuators installed on a temporary basis, but the costs thereof will be
included in the lump sum price bid for the pay item Furnishing Traffic Control Devices
in accordance with Subsection 801.05.
No separate payment will be made for concrete, anchors, concrete foundations, or epoxy
coated reinforcement, but the costs thereof will be included in the unit prices bid for the
various temporary or permanent impact attenuator pay items in the Contract.
No payment will be made for repair or replacement of permanent or temporary impact
attenuators damaged by the Contractor operations.
SECTION 530 RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS
P300.236
530.02
MATERIALS
Raised pavement markers used on State owned roadway shall conform to the following:
Use raised pavement markers (RPMs) made of ductile iron castings with a 2-way, snowplowable, replaceable prismatic reflector conforming to the following requirements:
1.
Castings. Provide a ductile iron casting conforming to ASTM A 536, hardened to

between 52 and 54 Rockwell "C". Ensure that the castings provided are between 9.25
and 10 inches long, 5.5 and 5.85 inches wide, and 1.70 and 1.92 inches high, and
weigh approximately 5.5 pounds. Ensure that each casting is permanently marked
with the manufacturer's name and model number.
2.
Epoxy Resin Adhesive. Set castings in the pavement surfaces using an epoxy resin
adhesive conforming to AASHTO M237, Type IV.
3.
Lenses. Provide a lens conforming to ASTM D 4383 and Table 912.03.03-1.

Table 912.03.03-1 Requirement for Lenses
Property
Requirement
Nominal Dimensions
Slope of reflecting surface
Area of each reflecting
surface
4 x 2 x 0.5 inch
30 to 35 degrees
1.44 to 1.87 square inches
Ensure that the lens has a thin untempered glass bonded to the front surface of the
prismatic retroreflective lens face.
4.
Lens to Casting Adhesive. Attach the reflector to the casting with an adhesive
according to the reflector manufacturer's recommendations.
Submit a certification of compliance as specified in 105.04.
530.03
(B)
INSTALLATION OF RAISED PAVEMENT M ARKERS

Raised pavement markers used on State owned roadway shall conform to the following:
Lay out the locations of all RPMs before installing to ensure proper placement. Place
RPMs as follows:
1.
Place RPMs on the travel lane side of solid paint lines at a distance of 2
inches from the near edge of the paint line to the near edge of the RPM.
P300.236
2.
3.
4.
Place amber RPMs between double yellow paint lines when there is no
conflict with a longitudinal joint.
Place RPMs located along skip lines on the line's longitudinal center axis and
at the midpoint of the unpainted gap between each dash.
When placing RPMs near longitudinal joints, place at least 2 inches
from the joint.

Obtain RE approval of RPM locations before beginning sawcutting operations. If
the pre-installation layout determines that a RPM is to be placed at a transverse
joint or at a location that shows evidence of cracking, checking, spalling, or the
failure of underlying base material, relocate the RPM longitudinally. Obtain RE
approval of the proposed relocation. Ensure that the center-to-center RPM
distance does not deviate from the specified distance by 4 feet. If the center-to
center distance for the proposed relocation deviates from the specified center-tocenter distance by 4 feet, do not install the RPM.
Sawcut roadway grooves to the depth, width, and diameter specified by the
RPM manufacturer. Sawcut only those grooves for RPMs that will be installed
during the same workday.
Ensure that roadway grooves are free of dirt, dust, oil, grease, moisture, curing
compounds, loose or unsound pavement, or other material that may interfere
with bonding of the epoxy compound. Sand blast grooves where necessary.
Ensure that the grooves are dry where installing RPMs.
Apply epoxy compound according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Do
not apply epoxy compound when either the pavement surface or ambient air
temperature is less than 50F at the time of application.
Install RPMs according to the manufacturer's recommendations. RPM leveling
lugs shall rest on the pavement surface. Do not allow lugs to drop below the
pavement surface. The tips of each RPM's snow plow deflecting surface must
remain below the roadway surface.
Use reflector adhesive to bond each RPM lens to its casting. The RE will reject a
RPM if visible buildup of epoxy compound or reflector adhesive affects its
optical performance.
(C)
REMOVAL OF RAISED PAVEMENT M ARKERS

Remove existing raised pavement markers lenses in areas where markers conflict
with maintenance and protection of traffic staging using methods that do not
damage the raised pavement marker casting.
530.04
MEASUREMENT.
P300.236
Removal of raised pavement markers will be measured by the number of each removed.
530.05
PAYMENT
The following pay item is added::
PAY ITEM
Raised Pavement Markers Mono Directional White Lens ..............
Raised Pavement Markers Mono Directional Amber Lens .............
Removal of Raised Pavement Markers .................................................
PAY UNIT
Each
Each
Each
SECTION 531 - PIPE JACKING

531.01
DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of the installation of pipes and/or casings under existing
embankments and paved roadways using the jacking method.
531.02
MATERIALS
Sleeves or casings shall be new welded steel pipe with a minimum wall thickness of 0.50
inches and shall be a minimum 36-inch diameter. Sections of steel casing shall be welded
or joined by other means such as the PERMALOK jointing system or approved equal.
Reinforced-concrete pipe or other alternate pipe materials shall be the required strength
and construction to withstand the required jacking forces and shall be approved by the
Engineer. Materials and equipment for sheeting, bracing, shoring, jacking frame and
other items incidental to the jacking procedure shall be approved by the Engineer.
531.03
The hydraulic jacking method shall be used for all installations. Boring, jetting and cable
machines are prohibited.
Details of the proposed methods and equipment to be used for jacking operations shall
be submitted for approval prior to starting the work. This shall include detail drawings
of the jacking pit, receiving pit and jacking equipment. The contractor shall bear full
responsibility for methods used and for any damage occurring while performing the
work. Jacking operations shall be conducted to ensure that there is no interference with
the continuous operation of traffic.
Jacking must continue on a 24-hour schedule to prevent pipes from freezing up. The
work shall be continuous until completion in the area between the outer edges of the
paved shoulders. Provisions shall be made to have sufficient materials, equipment and
qualified technicians available to deal with any situation which might otherwise result in
an interruption of operations.
P300.236
Pits will not be allowed closer than 10 feet from the outer edge of the paved shoulder.
The jacking pit shall be sheeted, braced, and shored when the jacking pit and/or
receiving pit is 10 to 30 feet from the outer edge of the paved shoulder. The jacking pit
shall be designed to maintain the stability of the embankment and to provide for proper
operation of the jacks. The force of the jacks shall be transmitted uniformly to the end
face of the end pipe or casing. End sections of pipes or casings which are damaged
during jacking shall be replaced without additional compensation.
Temporary sheeting used to construct jacking or receiving shall conform to Section 415.
The minimum allowable cover under roadways is 6 feet measured between the top of
pipe or casing to top of pavement. Minimum cover under ditches is 3 feet measured
from top of casing or pipe to invert of ditch. Pretreatment of soils or other soil
stabilization techniques intended to reduce the minimum cover shall be approved by the
Engineer.
Jacking pits located beyond 30 feet from the outer edge of paved shoulders may have
unsheeted sides provided a 1 to 1 slope can be maintained in accordance with the latest
OSHA standards. The front face of the pit must be sheeted. Excavated material shall be
placed on the side of the pit facing traffic to provide additional protection. Surplus and
waste materials are to be disposed off Turnpike property in accordance with Section 206.
Jacking or Receiving pits in the Turnpike median area are prohibited.
All work areas must be enclosed with orange plastic fencing to maintain Turnpike
security and safety of the work site.
Excavation and backfilling of the jacking pit shall conform to Section 206.
When jacking pit is located between 10 and 30 feet from the outer edge of paved
shoulder, a standard Turnpike shoulder closing is required for the duration of the
operation. In addition, a minimum of 30 feet of temporary concrete barrier is required in
accordance with Turnpike standard drawings and in accordance with Section 802 of the
Standard Specifications. If the jacking pit is constructed behind existing guard rail which
meets Turnpike current standards, temporary concrete barrier curb is not required.
The leading section of the pipe/casing shall be provided with a shield or cutting edge
covering a minimum of the upper third of the pipe/casing perimeter which projects
beyond the end of the pipe/casing and supports the embankment material above.
Excavation of materials within the jacked pipe shall be performed by hand methods only.
Augers will not be permitted unless approved by the Engineer. Conveyor systems will
be permitted for removing the soil being dug by hand. Excavation beyond the end of the
shield or cutting edge is strictly prohibited.
If a mucking auger or hand excavation is performed, the cutting edge must be kept a
minimum of one (1) diameter of the casing behind the cutting edge of the casing.
If a jacking machine is used with an auger to remove excavated materials, the machine
must be able to jack independently of the auger.
P300.236
When jacking concrete pipe, before each section is placed against a previously jacked
section, a 0.5 inch diameter manila rope or approved equal shall be inserted around the
entire groove of the joint and set into place with asphalt cement. Alternate joint materials
must be approved by the Engineer. This procedure will reduce joint spalling due to
jacking and will provide an opening on the inside of the pipe for final mortaring.
If an immovable obstruction is encountered ahead of the leading pipe or casing, or
jacking progress is halted due to the compactness of the soil, or the direction has deviated
from the proposed alignment, the contractor shall submit his proposed method to make
corrections and complete the required work.
If it is determined that the tunneling method is required, the contractor shall submit his
proposed method of operation to the Engineer for approval. Excavation beyond the end
of the jacked pipe/casing shall proceed by hand methods only and shall not advance
beyond the end of the jacked pipe, shield, or previously placed tunnel liner plate more
than the length (along the drain) of the liner plate to be placed.
An alternate method, other than jacking or tunneling, may be employed if submitted and
approved by the Engineer. If such approval is granted and the alternate method does not
provide the desired results, use of such alternate method shall be discontinued and
installation shall be completed by the jacking or tunneling method.
In the event an obstruction or other condition prevents the completed installation, a
concrete plug shall be installed at the end of the pipe or casing and the remaining void
shall be filled in a manner approved by the Engineer. Removal or withdrawal of a jacked
pipe, sleeve or casing will not be permitted.
It is the contractors responsibility to continually monitor the line and grade of the pipe
or casing to detect abnormal horizontal and/or vertical movements. Necessary controls
shall be provided to ensure proper horizontal and vertical alignment. The alignment
shall be verified at any time at the request of the Engineer.
Delays and/or inconvenience resulting from the presence of water or the pumping of
water shall not be considered for additional compensation or extension of time but shall
be considered incidental to the pipe or casing or sleeve being installed.
All welding must be performed by a certified welder.
The work area shall be restored to its original condition upon completion of the
installation subject to inspection and acceptance by the Authority. Care should be taken
to protect adjacent trees and shrubs from injury during the progression of work.
531.04
MEASUREMENT
Casings, Sleeves, and pipe of various size and material, installed by the jacking method,
will be measured by the linear foot. Separate payment will not be made for the
excavation, backfill, restoration of existing work area, construction and restoration of the
jacking and receiving pits and other incidental items, but the cost thereof shall be
P300.236
included in the cost of pipe jacking.
531.05
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
____________ Inch (Type) Pipe Jacking ...............................................................Linear Foot
Payment for jacking drainage pipe includes excavating, dewatering, permanent sheeting
at test pit locations and sheeting at jacking or boring pits including sheeting left in place;
furnishing and installing jacket or bored ; disposal of spoil materials; all else incidental to
complete the work of slope and ditch.
SECTION 532 - FORCE ACCOUNT FOR SNOW REMOVAL

532.01
DESCRIPTION
This work shall include the removal of accumulated snow adjacent to temporary
construction barrier and existing barrier parapet through the work zone of the Milepost
162.2 to 163.9resulting from the snow plowing operations of the Authoritys
maintenance. forces or its agents during all stages of construction. The snow removal
shall include disposal of the snow by the Contractor at areas clear from active traffic
lanes approved by the Engineer
532.02
The Contractor shall utilize snow removal equipment that can remove the plowed snow
deposits from the edges of the roadways without restricting the use of adjacent lanes. The
snow deposits shall be displaced into hauling equipment or into the work areas of the
roadways. The snow removal equipment shall only travel in the direction of traffic. The
Contractor may be directed to perform snow removal at any time while the Contract is in
force. The Contractor shall initiate snow removal operations within four hours after
notification by the Authority. The failure to commence work within a 2-hour notification
timeframe will result in back charges for all costs incurred by the Authority to remove
snow from travel lanes within work limits. In addition the Contractor will be charged a
$1,000.00 per hour penalty for each hour over the above X-hour notification timeframe up
to $4,000.00 for each event.
All lane closings for the snow removal work under force account item shall be performed
by the Contractors forces. The Contractor shall place temporary barrier mounted sign
supports prior to the storm as directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit his plan for snow removal to the Engineer for review and
approval within 30 days after Contract is awarded. The plan shall detail the Contractors
methods for removal of plowed snow deposits, including the work force and number
and type of equipment to be used. A meeting with NJTA Maintenance will be required to
P300.236
review the plan regarding manpower, equipment, response time, etc.
The removal of snow deposited in the Contractors work areas by Authority plowing
operations or the Contractors snow removal operations shall not be eligible for payment.
532.03
MEASUREMENT
Force Account for Snow Removal will not be measured for payment but measurement
will be made on a Cost Plus basis for the time and material used in accordance with
Subsection 108.04.
532.04
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
Force Account for Snow Removal (No-Bid) ........................................................

Cost Plus
Payment for Force Account for Snow Removal including lane closings will be made on a
Cost Plus basis in accordance with SubSection 108.04.
SECTION 533 TEMPORARY SEDIMENT BASIN RISER

533.01
DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of the installation and removal of the temporary sediment basin
risers.
533.02
MATERIALS
Corrugated Metal Pipe.917.05
533.03
Temporary sediment basin risers shall be fabricated and installed as per the contract
plans and / or the manufacturers recommendations. Shop drawings shall be submitted
in accordance with Subsection 104.08 of the Standard Specifications.
533.04
MEASUREMENT
Temporary sediment basin riser will be measured by the number furnished and installed.
533.05
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
P300.236
Temporary Sediment Basin Riser .........................................................
Each
No separate payment shall be made for fabrication, elbows, grouting, welding, and other
appurtenances; all costs shall be included in the pay item Temporary Sediment Basin
Riser.
SECTION 534 ASBESTOS REMOVAL

534.01
DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of the removal and disposal of all non-friable and potentially
friable asbestos-cement encountered during demolition, including, but not limited to,
asbestos-cement abutment sleeves, as shown in the Plans or the existing drawings and as
directed by the Engineer, as specified herein. This work shall also include the hand
excavation, as required, and the proper disposal of asbestos waste, including handling
equipment without the excessive release of airborne fibers or debris.
534.02
MATERIALS & QUALIFICATIONS

(A)
MATERIALS
All materials used in the performance of the work shall comply with all applicable
regulatory standards. Respirators and filters shall comply with NIOSH and MSHA
standards. Respiratory protection shall be in accordance with all applicable OSHA
Regulations 29 CFR 19 10.34 and ANSI Z88.2- 1980. HEPA filtration systems shall
comply with ANSI Z9.2- 79.
The Contractor shall supply all respiratory protection equipment and protective clothing,
including disposal coveralls, hoods, and shoe covers. The Contractor shall also supply
construction fencing, visual screening, and the decontamination enclosure for the
asbestos work area and all equipment required for removal and proper disposal.
(B)
QUALIFICATIONS
The persons conducting the removal shall be adequately trained in the hazards of
asbestos and proper work procedures. The Contractor shall demonstrate prior experience
in working with asbestos. The Contractor has the responsibility of informing himself
fully of the requirements of these agencies and shall satisfy these Specifications and all
referenced regulations including, but not limited to, the following:
(A) EPA
(B) OSHA
(C) OSHA
(D) NJDCA
(E) NJDOL
(F) NJDOH
(G) NJDEP
40 CFR61 Part M
29 CFR 19 10.34
29 CFR 1926.110
NJAC 5:23-8
NJAC 12:120
NJAC 8:60
NJAC 7:26
NESHAPS
Respiratory Protection Standard
Asbestos Construction Standard
Asbestos Hazard Abatement Subcode
Asbestos Licenses and Permits
Asbestos Licenses and Permits
Solid Waste Transport and Disposal
P300.236
(H) DOT
49 CFR
Transportation.
Prior to starting work, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with documentation
from the abatement firm, stating that the abatement firm and its employees and all
persons to work within the asbestos work area are properly certified and are familiar
with the regulations of the U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health
Administration, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, and the New Jersey
Department of Community Affairs relating to the removal, disposal, and treatment of
asbestos.
534.03
(A) PERMITS
The Contractor shall obtain all necessary licenses and permits and shall comply with all
Federal, State, and local laws, Code Regulations and notification procedures in
connection with the performance of the work. The Contractor shall assure that proper
notification of work beginning on the asbestos project has been given to the EPA (if
applicable, depending on the size of the project).
(B) WORK AREA
The portion of the roadway in which the asbestos-cement is to be removed shall be
considered to be the asbestos work area. Delineation of the asbestos work area shall
consist of construction fencing and visual screening with only a single clearly marked
entrance/exit. Asbestos work areas shall be internal to the necessary traffic control.
Asbestos warning signs must be posted around the work area to warn others of the
potential asbestos dust hazard.
Uncertified persons shall not-be permitted within the work area from the start of the
work area preparation until satisfactory clearance air monitoring results have been
achieved. Protective clothing is not to be worn outside the work area. A personnel
decontamination enclosure system at the entrance/exit shall be provided for workers to
remove their protective clothing and decontaminate any contaminated tools or
equipment.
(C) REMOVAL
The Contractor shall supply, for review, a detailed project site specific procedure for the
management, removal, transport and disposal of asbestos containing materials. This
procedure shall include, as a minimum, the requirements as specified herein. The
Contractor shall conduct all operations in accordance with the submitted abatement
procedure. Any changes to the procedure shall be submitted, for review, by addendum
in advance of any work requiring alternative procedures.
The Contractor can excavate over the asbestos-cement abutment sleeves using
mechanical means to within close proximity of the sleeves. The Contractor shall hand
excavate in the vicinity of the sleeves to expose all sides of the sleeves to be removed.
Asbestos containing material must be thoroughly wetted with a continuous spray of
amended water prior to any removal work to reduce dust generation. After wetting,
materials to be removed must be handled gently and immediately placed into a 6 mil
P300.236
polyethylene double bag or wrapped in two layers of 6 mil polyethylene sheeting and the
bags or sheets must be sealed airtight with duct tape. If materials are likely to tear or
puncture bags, rigid containers such as fiber drums must be used. The bags and drums
containing the material shall be considered asbestos waste. Asbestos warning and
generator labels shall be placed on the bags and containers.
(D) DISPOSAL
Disposable coveralls, hoods, and shoe covers shall be disposed of properly as asbestos
waste upon completion of the job. Any asbestos contaminated soil shall also be disposed
of as asbestos waste. Asbestos containing material and asbestos waste shall be disposed
of in accordance with 40 CFR 61 Part M and all requirements and laws, rules, and
regulations of Federal, State, or local agencies.
(E) AIR QUALITY MONITORING
The Contractor shall arrange and pay for all air quality monitoring including air
sampling, monitoring, and analysis required for regulatory compliance. The firm and
persons engaged shall be properly licensed, certified, and must be properly insured.
If air sampling results indicate any airborne-asbestos fiber concentrations not within
acceptable limits, work shall stop immediately and not resume until methods are altered
to reduce the airborne asbestos fiber concentrations to acceptable levels.
534.04
MEASUREMENT
Removal of asbestos-cement will not be measured for payment.
534.05
PAYMENT
No separate payment will be made for the removal of the asbestos-cement; its associated
removal procedures, air monitoring, and transport/disposal; and any potential
contaminated soil removal, but the costs thereof will be included in the lump sum price
bid for the pay item, Demolition of Existing Structures No.__.
SECTION 535 FORCE ACCOUNT FOR EMERGENCY & ROUTINE ROADWAY AND
BRIDGE REPAIRS
535.01
DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of Force Account for Emergency & Routine Roadway and Bridge
Repairs that will be required to be performed by the Contractor on an emergency or
routine basis during the duration of the Contract, as directed by the Engineer within the
limits of the Contract.
The Contractor may be directed to perform emergency or routine repair work under the
Force Account item during scheduled or non-scheduled daytime, nighttime or weekend
lane closings between MP162.2 and MP 163.9 .
Force Account for Emergency & Routine Roadway and Bridge Repairs work shall
include the following items as described in the Specification Section noted for each item.
P300.236
EMERGENCY & ROUTINE ROADWAY AND BRIDGE

REPAIRS
HMA Surface Course
Temporary Surfacing
Emergency Temporary Surfacing
Sealing Cracks
Furnishing and Placement of High Performance Cold
Patch Material
Pavement Removal, Variable Depth
Emergency Pavement Removal, Variable Depth
Concrete Deck Replacement with Catches
Emergency Concrete Deck Replacement
Headblock Repairs, Type 1, 2, and 3
Emergency Headblock Repairs, Types 1, 2, and 3
Spall Repairs, Types 1, 4, 5, 5A, 5B, and 6
Emergency Spall Repair, Types 5, and 6
Joint Reconstruction, Type 1A
Emergency Joint Reconstruction, Type 1A
Joint Reconstruction, Type 1P
Emergency Joint Reconstruction, Type 1P
Joint Replacement, Type 1P
Emergency Joint Replacement, Type 1P
Vertical Spall Repair
Repair Inlet
Reset Frames
Reset Beam Guide Rail
Beam Guide Rail Element
Beam Guide Rail Post
SPECIFICATION
SECTION
302
302
302
302
302
305
305
417
417
417
417
417
417
417
417
417
417
417
417
417
503
503
510
510
510
When directed to perform any of the above described items of work or any other work
deemed necessary on an emergency basis under the Force Account item, the Contractor
shall begin the work immediately after the necessary lane closings have been installed or
when directed by the Engineer, and shall perform and complete all work required and
have the lane available for opening to traffic within the time frame stipulated hereafter or
determined by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall prepare a plan describing the availability of the necessary labor,
equipment and material to perform the emergency repair work within the time frames
stipulated for the various repairs. The Plan shall be submitted to the Engineer for review
and approval within two weeks of receiving Notice To Proceed.
For allowable daytime, nighttime and weekend closing hours see Division 800 and the
Manual for Traffic Control. All lane closings for the repair work under the Force
Account pay item shall be performed by the Contractors forces or the Authoritys
Maintenance forces as directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall supply Concrete Repair Materials as specified for the performance
P300.236
of the various emergency repairs as described herein and as directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall furnish and deliver the repair materials within one month of Notice
to Proceed as follows:
(A)
Materials to be Stock Piled in Contractors Staging Area.

The Contractor shall furnish and deliver to his yard the following materials for
the performance of the various emergency repairs as described herein and as
directed by the Engineer:
Material
High Early Strength Cement Patch Mix (Set 45,
Rapid Set, or approved equal) with at least one
year shelf life, to yield 1.5 C.Y. Each
Epoxy tie wire
#5 Epoxy Coated Reinforcement Bars (25 ft.
Length)
#6 Epoxy Coated Reinforcement Bars (20 ft.
Length)
High Performance Permanent Cold Patch
Quantity
1 Each
1 Case
100 Each
50 Each
10 Tons
All materials to be removed as part of the Emergency & Routine Roadway and Bridge
Repairs work shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be properly disposed
of by him off Parkway property unless otherwise authorized in writing by the Engineer
or otherwise directed to be salvaged.
535.02
MATERIALS
Materials to be used shall be as specified in Subsections 302.02, 417.02, 503.02 and 510.02
or as directed by the Engineer.
535.03
Methods of Construction to be used shall be as specified in Sections 302, 305, 417, 503,
and 510 or as directed by the Engineer.
535.04
MEASUREMENT
Measurement for Force Account for Emergency & Routine Roadway and Bridge Repairs
will be made on a Cost Plus basis for the time and material used in accordance with
Subsection 108.04.
Measurement for Lane Closings for the performance of Emergency & Routine Roadway
and Bridge Repairs, installed by the Contractors forces will be made on a Cost Plus basis
for the time and material used in accordance with Subsection 108.04.
Measurement for Concrete Repair Material will be made on a Cost Plus basis for the
material furnished and delivered to the designated locations identified in Paragraphs
535.01 (A).
535.05
PAYMENT
P300.236
PAY ITEM
Force Account for Emergency & Routine Roadway and Bridge
Repairs (No Bid) .......................................................................................
PAY UNIT
Cost Plus
The Cost Plus payment shall include Emergency & Routine Roadway and Bridge
Repairs, Lane Closings for emergency and routine repairs, and Concrete Repair Material
delivered to the Contractors staging area as specified above.
Payment for work under Force Account for Emergency & Routine Roadway and Bridge
Repairs will be made on a Cost Plus basis in accordance with Subsection 108.04.
P300.236
DIVISION 600 - ELECTRICAL

SECTION 601 - COMMON ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
601.01
DESCRIPTION
The nature and extent of electrical work within and adjacent to each work area, as
indicated on the Plans are based on the best available information. However, no
guarantees are made as to the accuracy or completeness of this information. The
Contractor is hereby advised that it shall be his responsibility to verify such information
and obtain the approval of the Engineer before proceeding with the work in each work
area.
The Contractor shall obtain approval from the Authority's Electrical Maintenance
Department, through the Engineer, to disconnect the electric service for the roadway
lighting and sign feeder circuits, prior to commencing with any work either directly
related to or within the close proximity of the existing electrical facilities. The Contractor
is responsible for Tagging-Out all circuits he will be working with. At the end of the
outage and prior to darkness, the Contractor is to remove his tag and restore the circuit.
The Authority will not remove a Contractors Tag. The Contractor will be responsible
to restore service.
The Contractor shall furnish and install all temporary cables and ground wire, where
required, to accommodate the removal and reinstallation of any existing 24-hour
changeable message sign or navigational lighting power circuits which shall be
maintained as operational at all times.
601.02
MATERIALS
Rodent Blocking ....................................................................................................
918.24
601.03
GENERAL CONDITIONS
(E)
Shop Drawings
Items for which shop drawings and catalog cuts shall be submitted shall include
but not be limited to the following:
Conduits, Cables and Wires
Cable Connector Kits
Grounding and Termination Devices
P300.236
(F)
Connection with Utility Service

The Contractor shall comply with all utility company requirements for electric
meter, disconnect, and current transformer and cabinet, where required. Should
deviations from the details shown on the Plans be required, the Contractor shall
make all necessary design modifications and obtain the approval of the Engineer
prior to construction through the Shop Drawing process. The Contractor shall
perform coordination with the Authority, obtain all utility and third-party
inspections and approvals, and perform work as shown on the Plans to obtain
connection by the utility. Any delay(s) in obtaining the approval(s) shall not be
considered as the basis of extra(s)
601.05
CONDUIT
All conduits entering signs and cabinets shall be sealed with rodent blocking material after
installation of all wires and cabling.
(A)
Flexible Metallic Conduit

Length of flexible metallic conduit sections used shall be no longer than 6 feet.
Two sections of flexible metallic conduit shall not be connected together.
If connected to PVC coated galvanized conduit, the color of flexible metallic
conduit shall match that of the connecting coated conduit. Color shall be integral
to the flexible metallic conduit, and shall not be applied in the field by use of
paint or other methods.
(B)
Rigid Metallic Conduit

The end of the existing conduit at the face of concrete removal shall be cut square
and smooth. Enough concrete around the conduit in that portion of the
safetywalk to remain shall be carefully hand chiseled to permit the installation of
a coupling-adaptor to connect the existing conduit to new steel conduit. During
safetywalk and curb surface repairs, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care so
as not to damage any existing galvanized steel conduit(s) embedded in concrete.
Should any conduits be damaged during the construction or any deteriorated
conduits found, as determined by the Engineer, the damaged or deteriorated
portion of the conduit(s) shall be replaced as follows:
(1)
Existing lighting cables and ground wire shall be disconnected at both

ends, removed and reinstalled for temporary service, as prescribed in
Subsection 601.07.
P300.236
(2)
Temporary cables and ground wire for 24 hours circuits shall be

provided and connected as prescribed in Subsection 601.07, where
required, to maintain the continuous operation of these circuits.
(3)
Damaged or deteriorated section of the steel conduit shall be removed

from coupling points and replaced with new galvanized steel conduit
section(s). This work shall be accomplished by providing temporary
service, as prescribed in Subsection 601.07.
Conduit (s) damaged by the Contractor's operation during safetywalk and curb
surface repair construction shall be repaired by replacement of the damaged
section(s) of the conduits to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Upon completion of
the conduit repair work, each conduit run shall be rodded throughout its entire
length with a mandrel in conformance with Subsection 601.07, and new cables
and ground wire shall be installed between the junction boxes connected by the
repaired conduit run(s). All costs for the prescribed conduit repairs and new
cable and ground wire installation shall be borne by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Authority.
In addition, the Contractor shall connect the new steel conduit (s) to existing
expansion couplings at all expansion joints, where required. If the existing
expansion coupling(s) are judged to be nonfunctional, in the opinion of the
Engineer, then the Contractor shall replace such expansion couplings with new
units, equal to O-Z Gedney Type AX with Type BJ bonding jumper.
Installation of the expansion couplings shall be made in accordance with the
manufacturer's installation instructions and the Authority=s standard electrical
drawings. The Contractor shall insure that the conduit entering the fitting at the
expansion-contraction end is completely free of any concrete or other obstruction
within the open joint which may otherwise prevent the fittings from performing
properly.
(D)
PVC COATED GALVANIZED CONDUIT.

Paragraph (D) is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:
PVC coated galvanized conduit shall be used in all permanent exposed, above
ground conduit installations, except where flexible metallic conduit is called for,
or otherwise noted on the Plans or directed by the Engineer.
PVC coated conduit shall be installed using the methods in Paragraph 601.05(B),
as modified by manufacturer installation methods or industry best practices
specific to PVC Coated Galvanized Conduit.
Where PVC coated galvanized conduit transitions from an exposed installation
to underground installation, the length of PVC coated shall be extended a
minimum of 24 inches underground, where it will be acceptable to connect to
another type of conduit where shown on the Plans.
All fitting, conduits, and boxes for wiring devices, shall be PVC coated
galvanized construction, as manufactured by the same manufacturer as the PVC
P300.236
coated conduit provided. Unless otherwise noted or approved, mounting clamps
for PVC coated conduit shall be PVC coated. Where PVC coated galvanized
conduit runs through the wall of junction boxes or enclosures the conduit shall
be terminated with a PVC coated knockout/Myers-type hub.
Should a field cut of the PVC coated galvanized conduit be required the
Contractor shall trim the conduit ends of excess PVC, mechanically clean the
surface, coat the threads with a rust inhibitor. When the conduit is completed
the Contractor shall coat exposed threads with a manufacturer approved PVC
replacement coating. The coating shall match the color of the PVC conduit
601.06
FOUNDATIONS, BOXES, MANHOLES AND BASES

The junction boxes, located within the proposed area of the safetywalk repairs, shall be
reconstructed, and in the area of approach sidewalk replacement, shall be raised to meet
the proposed elevation of the new sidewalk, where shown on the plans and in
conformance with the details shown on Standard Drawing E-5 and/or as directed by the
Engineer. The existing frames and covers shall be salvaged and reused, with the
following provisions.
The bolt holes in the frame, which is to be reused, shall be retapped. The existing screws
for covers shall be replaced with new matching stainless steel flat head screws. The
existing gaskets between the frame and cover shall be replaced with new " thick
neoprene gaskets.
In addition, upon completion of junction box reconstruction and resetting, all debris
therein shall be removed to assure that the drain holes or pipes are thoroughly clear and
free of any obstruction.
Existing concrete junction boxes, junction box foundations and manholes requiring a
greater than 6 inch adjustment to final grade shall be replaced.
601.07
CABLES AND WIRES

New cables and ground wire shall be installed in all replaced conduits, between junction
boxes, as a result of damage caused by the Contractors operations.
No splicing of communications cable shall be allowed. All terminations shall occur
above ground in cabinets or equipment as shown on the Plans.
Provide cable identification tags on all proposed cables within all junction boxes and
cabinets. Brass tags shall be provided for lighting circuits. Identify phase of each
conductor. Tags for power wiring shall be configured to indicate the load center
designation, circuit, and phase. Tags for communication cables shall indicate the
designation of the communications cabinet where the cable originates and the purpose of
P300.236
the communication cable. Cable identification tags shall be attached to the cables using a
minimum of two nylon cable ties.
601.11
MEASUREMENT
Temporary service facilities, as prescribed, will not be measured for payment.
Installation of tracer wire will not be measured separately, but the cost thereof shall be
incidental to the Duct Bank item.
Retapping and replacement of the bolts for existing junction box frames and covers, as
prescribed, will not be measured for payment.
601.12
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
Linear
Foot
Communication Cable ...........................................................................................
Replace the first paragraph after the Pay Item table with the following:
No separate payment will be made for excavation and backfill. All costs associated with
this work shall be included in the various pay items bid requiring excavation and
backfill.
Replace the last paragraph after the Pay Item table with the following:
No separate payment will be made for incidental electrical work, such as removing the
existing cables and ground wire, installing the same for temporary service including the
furnishing and installation of the necessary new cable and ground wire lengths for this
purpose, and furnishing and installation of temporary cables, conduits, and conduit
support systems where required to maintain/provide power to existing or proposed
electrical devices throughout the duration of construction. All costs thereof shall be
included in the prices bid for the various electrical items scheduled in the Proposal.
Payment for cables and wiring for temporary lighting systems only will be made under
Section 602.
The furnishing and installation of Rigid Non-Metallic conduit, spacers, concrete,
excavation and backfill material shall include all labor, material and equipment necessary
for the construction of duct banks as configured per plan, conduit support, termination at
junction boxes, all as shown on plans and as directed by the Engineer.
No separate payment will be made for furnishing and installing structural steel and
hardware.
P300.236
No separate payment will be made for couplings, condulets, fittings, or other devices
required to provide a connected, bonded conduit system in accordance with the stated
requirements.
No separate payment will be made for Flexible Metallic conduit installations. Such
lengths of conduit shall be measured and paid under the Pay Item of the conduits they
are connected to.
SECTION 602 - ROADWAY LIGHTING

602.01
DESCRIPTION
The work shall consist of furnishing and installing permanent and temporary roadway
lighting standards, luminaires, lamps, ballasts, power and control equipment, and other
items and appurtenances required to provide illumination for roadways, toll plazas, and
service areas.
The Contractor shall furnish and install new wiring and cables.
602.04
LIGHTING STANDARDS
(B)
LIGHTING STANDARD INSTALLATIONS.

Lighting Standards provided for pole-mounted ITS devices shall be provided
without bracket arms and bracket arm openings, and shall be provided with a
pole cap. Dimensions and construction of lighting standards used for ITS
devices shall conform to those used for standard Authority lighting standards.
The Contractor shall verify and determine by accurate field measurements all dimensions
which will in any way affect fabrication and installation of the lighting standard. All
dimensions shall be shown on the shop drawings and noted as to which were
determined by field measurements. Field dimensions and data shall be submitted with
the shop drawings. Discrepancies between field dimensions and Plan or reference
drawing dimensions shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Engineer and
noted as such on the submission of field measurement data. The Contractor shall submit
shop drawings and Methods of Construction in accordance with Subsection 104.08.
602.05
LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION
The following is added to the end of this subsection:
TEMPORARY LIGHTING SYSTEMS
P300.236
At least 30 days before beginning the work, submit working drawings for approval that
include the following:
1.
2.
Structural design calculations signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer.

Calculations in IES electronic format that are signed and sealed by a Professional
Engineer, Electrical with 3 years experience in design of lighting systems
according to the Authoritys design manuals.
3. Luminaires and ballasts.
4. Lighting mast arms and standards.
5. Temporary, lighting, ground, and tether wire.
6. Method of splicing cable and wire.
7. Method of tagging and clearly identifying items.
8. Junction boxes and foundations.
9. Conduit.
10. Meter cabinets and lighting circuitry.
11. Method of electrifying the system.
12. Other items necessary to provide a complete system for the Project.
Ensure that the lighting system is designed according to the Authoritys design manuals.
Ensure the temporary highway lighting system is operational before removing existing
lighting and/or opening temporary ramps to traffic.
The Contractor may use the existing above-ground highway lighting material designated
for removal for the temporary highway lighting system that is not required. It is noted
that portions of the existing lighting system is owned, operated and maintained by
PSE&G and the contractor shall coordinate with PSE&G regarding this system
Obtain and pay electric current cost for new temporary electric service if required to
maintain the existing highway lighting system in operation during construction.
Obtain electric service for the temporary system from the Utility in the name of the
Contractor. Before energizing the temporary highway lighting system, provide the
Engineer with the contact information of the Contractors personnel should a failure
occur. Provide only individuals who are familiar with highway lighting construction and
operation.
Upon removal of the temporary highway lighting system existing above-ground
materials shall become the property of the Contractor.
602.07
POWER DISTRIBUTION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT

Install Load Center Cabinets and Meter Cabinets at locations as shown on the Plans. The
work shall consist of furnishing and installing the cabinets, appurtenances, mounting
hardware, and all internal and attached external components as shown on the Plans
including but not limited to circuit breakers, meter pans, contactors, transformers,
panelboards, photocells, thermostats, heaters, receptacles, and surge protectors. Furnish
and install wiring between devices within the cabinet and terminate all wiring to field
P300.236
devices. Perform grounding work as required by the National Electric Code. For Meter
Cabinets, coordinate with local utility to ensure that details used comply with local
requirements. Perform all coordination and work, and obtain inspections necessary to
provide a complete, connected power service, including any temporary work necessary
to keep existing electrical systems operational.
602.08
MEASUREMENT
Temporary lighting will not be measured, payment shall be lump sum.
602.09
PAYMENT
PAY ITEM
Load Center Cabinet, Type _______, Voltage _______
Meter Cabinet, Type _______, Voltage _______
Temporary Lighting Systems
PAY UNIT
Each
Each
Lump Sum
No separate payment will be made for mounting hardware and required accessories for
installation and testing. Payment shall be included within the appropriate item cost.
No separate payment will be made for utility coordination, but all costs thereof shall be
included in the prices bid for the various Meter Cabinet and Load Center Cabinet Items.
No separate payment will be made for concrete sidewalks installed adjacent to Load
Center Cabinets and Meter Cabinets. All costs for this work shall be included in the cost
of Load Center Cabinet and Meter Cabinet installation.
No separate payment will be made for concrete foundations for Load Center Cabinets
and Meter Cabinets.
No separate payment will be made for incidental electrical work except as required for
temporary roadway lighting. Temporary roadway lighting shall be a lump sum and
shall include all design, materials and labor required to design, install, maintain and
remove any and all temporary roadway lighting. Existing roadway lighting equipment
may be used as part of the temporary lighting system, but once used for this purpose
shall be maintained by the contractor.
No separate payment will be made for incidental electrical and ITS work, such as
removing the existing cables and ground wire, installing the same for temporary service
including the furnishing and installation of the necessary new cable and ground wire
lengths for this purpose, and furnishing and installation of temporary cables, conduits,
and conduit support systems where required to maintain/provide power to existing or
proposed electrical devices throughout the duration of construction. All costs thereof
shall be included in the prices bid for the various electrical items scheduled in the
Proposal.
P300.236
DIVISION 700 - LANDSCAPING

SECTION 706 SOIL STABILIZATION MATTING
706.01
DESCRIPTION.
Permanent Soil Stabilization Matting shall include furnishing, placing, anchoring,
securing and stapling matting for erosion control on prepared and seeded surfaces as
designated on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
706.02
MATERIALS.
Permanent Soil Stabilization Matting:
Permanent soil stabilization matting is a composite turf reinforcement mat (C-TRM)
consisting of a machine-produced mat of 70% straw / 30% coconut fiber matrix
incorporated into a permanent three-dimensional turf reinforcement matting.
The matrix shall be evenly distributed across the entire width of the matting and stitch
bonded between a heavy duty UV stabilized bottom net with 0.50 x 0.50 inch openings,
an ultra heavy duty UV stabilized, dramatically corrugated (crimped) intermediate
netting with 0.50 x 0.50 inch openings, and covered by a heavy duty UV stabilized top
net with 0.50 x 0.50 inch openings. The middle corrugated netting shall form prominent
closely spaced ridges across the entire width of the mat. The three nettings shall be
stitched together on 1.50 inch centers with UV stabilized polypropylene thread to form
permanent three-dimensional turf reinforcement matting.
The (C-TRM) shall meet requirements established by the Erosion Control Technology
Council (ECTC) Specification and the U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal
Highway Administration's (FHWA) Standard Specifications for Construction of Roads
and Bridges on Federal Highway Projects, FP-03 2003 Section 713.18 as a Type 5A, 5B,
and 5C: Permanent Turf Reinforcement Mat.
Installation staple patterns shall be clearly marked on the turf reinforcement matting
with environmentally safe paint. All mats shall be manufactured with a colored thread
stitched along both outer edges (approximately 2-5 inches from the edge) as an overlap
guide for adjacent mats.
The composite turf reinforcement mat shall be the North American Green SC250, or
equivalent. The (C-TRM) shall have the following physical properties:
Material Content
Matrix:
70% Straw Fiber

(0.35lb/yd2)
P300.236
30 % Coconut Fiber
(0.15Ib/yd2)
706.03
Netting:
Top and Bottom - Heavy Duty UV Stabilized

Polypropylene (5.0 lbs/1,000 ft2
approximate weight)
Thread:
Mid - Corrugated Ultra Heavy Duty UV Stabilized

Polypropylene (24 lb/1,000 ft2 approximate weight)
Thread UV Stabilized Polypropylene
The slopes shall be properly compacted and fine graded to a smooth profile and free
from all weeds, clods, stones, roots, sticks, crusting and caking. Apply any necessary of
lime, fertilizer, and seed, before installing Permanent Soil Stabilization matting. The
Contractor shall submit an installation plan for review and approval. The installation
procedures should be based on soil conditions, Manufacturers recommendations, and
the Guidelines for Installing Rolled Erosion Control Products published by the Erosion
Control Council. The installation plan should include the specifications for the C-TRM,
staples and stakes. For the initial 1000 square feet of placement, a representative from the
C-TRM should be on site to supervise and to assist the Contractor to ensure that proper
installation procedures are being followed. After Permanent Soil Stabilization Matting is
completely laid, anchored and secured, spread and rake fine topsoil into the Matting to
completely fill its thickness. Seed shall be reapplied as necessary to establish vegetation
over the entire area of the matting, to the satisfaction of the Soil Conservation District
and the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Authority.
706.04
MEASUREMENT.
Permanent Soil Stabilization Matting will be measured by the surface area covered with
matting.
706.05
PAYMENT.
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
Permanent Soil Stabilization Matting .................................................... Square Yard
P300.236
DIVISION 800 - TRAFFIC CONTROL

SECTION 801 TRAFFIC CONTROL ON AUTHORITY ROADWAYS
801.01
DESCRIPTION.
The work includes furnishing and/or placing traffic protection devices for short-term
and long-term work zone and high-intensity construction cycle (HICC) closings which
include ramp (half-width), mainline lane and shoulder closings; furnishing personnel
immediately and solely employed for the maintenance of the devices and protection of
the traveling public; the transportation of devices to and from the site of the Project;
moving devices from one position to another as required; and the continual maintenance
and subsequent removal of all devices. Work shall also include providing, maintaining
and replacing truck-mounted, temporary and quad-guard attenuators. Unless otherwise
noted, all traffic protection devices shall be furnished, installed, maintained and removed
by the Contractor.
The work shall also include furnishing, placing/installing, removing and maintaining
traffic protection devices at locations not shown on the Plans that may be required for
completion of If and Where Directed by the Engineer, Force Account, and
Emergency work as determined by the Engineer.
801.02
MATERIALS.
Materials shall conform to the following subsections:
Aluminum Alloys .............................................................................................. 911.01
Arrow Board ....................................................................................................... 920.11
Batteries ................................................................................................................ 920.05
Concrete Barrier .................................................................................................. 920.08
Flags ..................................................................................................................... 920.09
Flashing Lights ................................................................................................... 920.04
Folding Sign Stands ........................................................................................... 920.07
Impact Attenuators (Quadguard) ..................................................................... 524
Modular Glare Screen System .......................................................................... 920.17
Portable Variable Message Signs ...................................................................... 920.19
Reflectors .............................................................................................................. 923.18
Safety Vests ........................................................................................................ 920.03
Signs and Overlay Panels ................................................................................. 920.06
Removable Wet Weather Pavement Making Tape ......................................... 920.10
Traffic Cones ....................................................................................................... 920.01
Temporary Impact Attenuator .......................................................................... 920.15
Truck Mounted Attenuator................................................................................ 920.18
Vehicle Lights ...................................................................................................... 920.13
Sign Stand (Type III) for mounting on concrete median barrier or guide rail shall conform
to the associated Standard Drawing.
P300.236
801.03
All lane, ramp and shoulder closings (including traffic shifts) required for the
construction of the work for this Contract shall be installed, maintained and removed by
the Contractor unless specifically called for on the Plans. It is the Contractors
responsibility to become familiar with the location and use of the devices described in
these Specifications and on the Plans.
(A)
GENERAL PROVISIONS.
The attention of the Contractor is specifically directed to the provisions of the Authoritys
Manual for Traffic Control in Work Zones (heretofore referred as the Manual), which
will be part of this contract and is available electronically on the Authoritys Web Site
(http://www.state.nj.us/turnpike/professional-services.html) under the location
Engineering Reference Material. In case of conflicting requirements, the following
order of precedence shall be adhered to: Plans, Supplemental Specifications, Standard
Drawings, Standard Specifications, and Manual.
The Lane Closing Request Form for each roadway, available electronically on the
Authoritys Web Site (http://www.state.nj.us/turnpike/professional-services.html)
under the location Engineering Reference Material, shall be submitted to the Engineer
when requesting any lane, roadway, or ramp closure.
The Escort, Slowdowns Request Form, available in the Appendices of the
Supplementary Specifications, shall be submitted to the Engineer when requesting any
escort or slowdown.
The State Police Supplemental Patrol Construction Request Form, available in the
Appendices of the Supplementary Specifications, shall be submitted to the Engineer
when requesting State Police patrols.
The Authoritys roadways are in continuous operation 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
The work under this Contract has been planned to cause as little interference to
Authority traffic as possible. The Contractor shall, therefore, plan his operations to
permit the continuous flow of traffic along the roadways, ramps, toll plazas, and service
areas.
It is the intent of the Contract to limit lane and shoulder closings to an absolute minimum
and that work requiring closings is to be carried out in an expeditious manner.
No signs except traffic protection signs and traffic direction signs specified herein, on the
Plans or as directed by the Engineer shall be erected by the Contractor or his
subcontractors on or near Authority right-of-way.
The Contractor will be issued a copy of the "Lane Closure and Construction Safety
Video" at the Preconstruction meeting. The Contractor will not be permitted to engage in
lane and shoulder closing operations on Authority roadways and ramps until the "Lane
Closure and Construction Safety Video" has been viewed and acknowledged by all
employees, Subcontractors, suppliers and vendors as noted on the attendance sheet, a
P300.236
copy of which is found in the Appendices of the Supplementary Specifications. The
completed Attendance sheet shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the first lane
closing request submission. The Engineer shall provide the attendance sheet to the
Authoritys Operations Department with the first lane closing request submission. The
Contractor shall submit additional attendance sheets as necessary throughout the course
of the project to account for change in personnel. Any exceptions to the specified
personnel viewing the Lane Closing and Construction Safety Video will be only as
approved by the Engineer.
The safety measures outlined and prescribed shall be considered basic and in certain
instances additional safety measures may be appropriate and required. Compliance with
the safety measures and precautions prescribed in the Specifications and on the Plans
shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for taking all additional and appropriate
safety measures for all persons and property. Full responsibility for adequate safety
measures for the protection of all persons and property on and adjacent to the work site
shall rest with the Contractor.
The Contractor shall furnish for review and approval, a minimum of twenty (20)
calendar days prior to implementation of staged construction, a complete schedule of
operations including, but not limited to, manpower, numbers and types of equipment,
and procedures for installing, modifying, and/or removing, each stage of construction in
each roadway, and all operations related thereto. The Contractor is advised that he will
be required to attend review meetings as part of the plan review process covering each
stage of construction. The Contractor will also be required to attend coordination
meetings which shall be called for and scheduled by the Engineer, as he deems
appropriate.
The Contractor shall furnish a schedule each week outlining all closings and other traffic
protection activity required during the following two weeks. Said schedule shall be
available to the Engineer on the time and date as directed. The Contractor shall provide
the Engineer forty-eight (48) hours notice of any proposed changes in his schedule.
(1)
State Police Authority.
Traffic on Authority roadways is under the direct supervision and control of the
New Jersey State Police who will enforce all statutory laws including the
Authority's established Regulations under the Subchapter titled Traffic Control
on New Jersey Turnpike, as they pertain to the Contractor as well as to the
traveling public. The regulations can be found on the Authoritys Web Site
http://www.state.nj.us/turnpike/policies-rules-and-regulations.html.
The
Contractor shall familiarize himself with and adhere strictly to the requirements
of these Regulations.
The State Police have the authority to advise the Contractor of hazardous
conditions or violations connected with the Contractor's operations and to order
immediate remedial action. Upon such notification, the Contractor shall
immediately discontinue work as required and correct the hazardous condition
or violation. The Contractor shall then advise the Engineer of the State Police
directive and the remedial action taken.
P300.236
If the Authority or State Police declare that an emergency condition exists, the
Contractor shall immediately respond with the required manpower and
equipment to remove a closing in the shortest possible time, day or night,
including weekends and holidays. This requirement shall not be considered as a
basis for claim against the Authority.
All communication from the Contractor to the State Police shall be directed via
the Engineer or Liaison Engineer. `
(2)
Traffic Permit.
The Contractor shall apply for a Traffic Permit at least ten (10) working days
prior to the time the Contractor intends to start any operations at the Project site.
The Contractor shall complete the applicable portion of the Traffic Permit
application form as described in the Manual, and return the completed
application to the Engineer. A Traffic Permit Application can be found on the
Authoritys
Web
Site
http://www.state.nj.us/turnpike/professionalservices.html. The Traffic Permit will be issued only to the Prime Contractor, but
will be deemed to apply to all suppliers and Subcontractors engaged in the
prosecution of this work. It is the responsibility of the Prime Contractor to
inform all such suppliers and Subcontractors of the provisions of the Traffic
Permit and to take all necessary measures to assure that they abide by its
provisions. Copies of transmittals that furnish the Subcontractors with the Traffic
Permit and its provisions shall be submitted to the Engineer. All applicants for
Traffic Permits shall adhere to the requirements set forth in the Manual.
The Contractor's Traffic Permit application shall include complete information,
data and/or sketches covering the following:
(a)
The nature and location of the work.
(b)
The proposed obstructions or other hazards to traffic, including all

operations across the roadway cross-section.
(c)
The length of time during which it is anticipated that hazards or

obstructions to traffic will exist.
(d)
The means proposed by the Contractor for the protection of the public
and his own personnel and equipment, including layouts and schedules
showing the anticipated lane and shoulder closings, truck access points,
guide rail openings, locations of all devices for lane and shoulder
closings and for protection of traffic, and anticipated dates and rates of
work.
(e)
The names, and day and night telephone numbers of the Contractor's
Superintendents.
(f)
Anticipated impacts to railways, if any.

P300.236
(g)
Other information as requested by the Engineer.
The information will be reviewed by the Engineer and when satisfactory,

approved and advanced to the Authority. Upon approval by the Authoritys
Traffic Engineer or Operations Department a Traffic Permit will be issued to the
Contractor through the Engineer.
An Addendum to the Traffic Permit will be required each time any of the above
items (a) thru (g) are revised or when insurance certificates require renewal
during the Contract Period.
The Contractor shall furnish a schedule each week outlining all requested
closings, as approved by the Engineer, and other traffic protection activity
required during the following week. Said schedule shall be available to the
Engineer on the time and date as directed. The Contractor shall provide the
Engineer 48 hours notice of any proposed changes in this schedule.
If the approved methods of operation are not strictly adhered to by the
Contractor, the Engineer has the right to direct that any work which, in the
Engineer's opinion is not approved under the Traffic Permit, be immediately
discontinued. Such work shall not be resumed until the Engineer is assured and
determines that the work will be performed in conformity with the approved
methods of operation. The Contractor shall have no claim against the Authority
for losses or delays caused by such stoppage of work, including but not limited
to stoppages caused by inclement weather.
(3)
Movement of Contractors Vehicles, Equipment and Personnel.
The Contractor's employees shall not walk across or along, nor occupy any active
Authority roadway except within areas coned off or otherwise closed to the
traveling public, or as specified herein for traffic control purposes.
The Contractor's personnel in any work area shall wear a vest at all times as
specified in Subsection 920.03.
Personal vehicles will not be permitted to park anywhere within Authority rightof-way except in areas designated by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for transporting all his personnel to and from
enclosed or closed off work areas in accordance with NJSA 39:4-69, Riding on
Part Not Intended for Passengers Prohibited. Personal vehicles will not be
permitted anywhere within Authority right-of-way or private properties, except
in areas designated by the Engineer.
Contractor vehicles operating on any Authority roadway or shoulder which is
open to traffic shall travel with, and not across or against, the direction of traffic.
Vehicles shall not park or stop on roadways or shoulders except within areas
P300.236
coned off or otherwise closed to traffic. Unless otherwise specified, or permitted
by the Authoritys Engineer or Operations Department, the Contractor's vehicles
shall not travel via Z-turns, U-turns, or at the point at which the roadway is
coned off. Any vehicle making any illegal movement will be subject to a
summons by the State Police.
Contractor vehicles shall enter and exit the work area via the nearest
Interchange.
Whenever the Contractor intends to transport oversize or slow moving
equipment on active Authority roadways, he may do so only under State Police
escort and must follow the requirements of Subparagraph 801.03(B)(7).
Contractor vehicles and equipment operating in a closed roadway shall always
stay to the right in the direction of travel and observe a speed limit of 35 miles
per hour. Conspicuous, overhead, amber flashing lights in accordance with
Subsection 920.13, visible from a 360 degree viewing angle shall be required and
activated for all vehicles traveling or operating in a closed roadway.
For major traffic shifts as determined by the Engineer, and for structure erections
or demolitions, a 2-week notice is required for the Operations Department and
the State Police.
(4)
Vehicle Access to Work Areas.
Contractor's vehicles entering or leaving a work area via Authority roadways

shall be operated in a safe manner. They shall leave and enter the Authority
roadway traffic stream only at designated points. Delivery of materials or
personnel, and movement of vehicles and equipment into and out of a work area
via Authority roadways shall be made only after lane or shoulder closings are in
place, or with the use of an escort and/or approved slowdowns.
The use of emergency access gates by the Contractors vehicles is prohibited
unless otherwise specified, or permitted by the Authoritys Engineer or
Operations Department. Where an operation of the Contractor would permit
unauthorized entry or exit from Authority property, the Contractor shall take
immediate measures to restore the security of the Authority right-of-way. Toll
evasion is subject to a summons by the State Police.
The Contractor shall, through the Engineer, coordinate his access points with
those of the adjacent contracts to ensure proper spacing. Points for leaving and
re-entering Authority roadway traffic flow shall be, in general, at the respective
beginning and end of a closing.
Uniformed flagmen or Flaggers shall be provided by the Contractor for
protection within the work zones at appropriate locations and as directed by the
Engineer. Each flagger shall be properly trained, instructed, and experienced in
flagger duties, and shall be uniformed as specified in Subsection 920.12. Flaggers
must be English-speaking. Any flagger not satisfactory in the opinion of the
P300.236
Engineer shall be immediately replaced by an approved flagger. Flags shall be
provided by the Contractor for each flagger as specified in Subsection 920.09.
It shall be the responsibility of the flagger to assist and direct construction
vehicles into and out of the work area. He shall observe approaching traffic and
warn Contractor personnel of vehicles entering the work site. He shall observe
the flow of traffic and direct vehicles leaving the work site so that they may
safely merge into active lanes of Authority roadways. Under no circumstances
shall the flagger attempt to slow or otherwise direct Authority roadway traffic.
During permissible times for lane or shoulder closings when a flagger is not on
duty, automobiles operated solely for the transportation of supervisory
personnel, flaggers, or approved inspectors will be allowed access to the work
site provided such vehicles are operated in a safe manner.
Whenever vehicular access to a work area requires the removal of existing guide
rail, the guide rail shall be reinstalled during all times when a shoulder closing
with vehicle access points is not allowed and during non-working hours. The
opening shall be closed using an approved barrier immediately in front of the
line of the guide rail and extending at least five feet beyond the opening in each
direction. The blunt end of the guide rail shall be protected at all times by a
Truck Mounted Attenuator, approved end treatment, or a Temporary Impact
Attenuator. The guide rail shall be properly lapped and attached to the barrier
using a terminal connector.
During non-working hours and/or on any day when an access point is not in
use, the access signs associated with that location shall be left in place and
covered, or removed and stored in a manner which will not soil the face. If
covers are used they shall be securely fastened, top and bottom, to prevent the
cover being blown aside by the wind.
Equipment delivery on lowboys or other similar equipment carrying vehicles
that are not overweight or oversized are not permitted to access an interior lane
shift without an escort. An escort is required for the delivery of materials or
equipment on lowboys or similar transport vehicles to access an interior lane
shift when an interior lane shift is determined to be necessary or called for on the
Contract Plans.
(5)
Maintenance of Existing Traffic Control Devices.
All existing guide, warning, and regulatory signs for the control of Authority
roadway traffic must be maintained erect and unobstructed until such time as
their use may be discontinued by direction of the Engineer. Existing panels and
legends which become damaged as a result of the Contractor's operations shall
be restored or repaired at the Contractor's own expense. In order to permit
construction at the present location of these signs, the panels may be mounted on
such temporary supports and at such locations as approved by the Engineer.
Existing directional and regulatory signs which cannot be maintained in place or
P300.236
temporarily mounted on channels are to be supported by temporary supports.
Electrical service, power, and other incidental work for such temporary-mounted
signs shall be as specified, and shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance
with Subsection 104.08.
Existing roadway delineators are to be maintained unless directed by the
Engineer to discontinue their use.
The Contractor shall temporarily mount any existing mile marker that will be
removed because of construction, on the top of construction barrier or postmount at the outside edge of the shoulder as may be necessary. The relocated
mile markers shall be mounted in accordance with the associated Standard
Drawing, and as approved by the Engineer. The Contractor will be responsible
for maintaining and, if necessary, replacing all mile markers within the limits of
work during the course of construction.
Sign covers, for the purpose of obscuring installed but inactive temporary and
permanent signs, shall be large enough to obscure the entirety of the sign, be
non-reflective, opaque, and easy to install and remove. The use of plastic bags
with duct tape, or similar method, is prohibited. The Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer, for approval, his means and methods for covering signs.
(6)
Traffic Control Coordinator.
The Contractor shall assign a supervisory level employee to be the Traffic

Control Coordinator (TCC). The name and telephone number(s) of the TCC shall
be submitted to the Engineer with the Traffic Permit Application. The Engineer
shall be notified as to the name and telephone number(s) of the TCC on a 24 hour
basis. The TCC shall have a TCC Designation Card as issued by Rutgers
Center for Advanced Infrastructure and Transportation (CAIT), and have the
ability to communicate fluently in English. Information on CAITs Traffic
Control Coordinator Program may be found on the web at
http://cait.rutgers.edu/cait/tcc-program.
The Traffic Control Coordinator shall perform daily inspections, including
weekends and holidays, and inspections at night as required, and take all
corrective action to ensure compliance with the Traffic Control Plan and other
approved standards. The Engineer shall be advised of the schedule of these
inspections and be given the opportunity to join in the inspection. In addition,
the duties of the Traffic Control Coordinator shall include, but shall not be
limited to, the responsibility for ensuring the following:
Setup and removal of all traffic control devices in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
Correction of deficiencies of traffic control devices within 2 hours of
discovery or notification by the Engineer.
Repositioning traffic control devices displaced by traffic or construction
P300.236
equipment.
Covering or uncovering signs as appropriate.
Repairing and/or replacing damaged traffic control devices.
Replacing batteries, light bulbs, control panels and other electrical
components.
Keeping all traffic control devices clean.
Adding fuel and oil to power units for traffic control devices.
That all Contractor equipment and vehicles are properly stored and
parked so as not to create a traffic hazard.
Properly store traffic control devices when not in use.
That all excavations or drop-offs greater than 2 inches deep are protected
in accordance with the Manual.
(7)
Traffic Protection Patrol.
The purpose of this patrol is to guarantee that traffic protection devices remain
functional during the periods when the Contractors personnel are not actively
engaged at the site. When work is active at a site, the responsibilities for
guaranteeing that traffic protection devices remain functional is then covered
under the pay item Installation, Maintenance, and Removal of Lane Closing.
Traffic protection patrol may be full-time, part-time, or may not be required. The
Traffic Control Coordinator may fulfill some or all of the duties of the
patroller(s).
The Contractor will be required to provide a traffic protection patrol at all times
when lane, ramp, or partial ramp closings are in place.
The type of patrol (full-time, part-time or no patrol) shall be as stated in
Paragraph 801.03(D). If no type is specified, it shall be assumed that no patrol is
required.
(a) Full-time Patrol.
The Contractor shall provide a traffic protection patroller for the
entire work area and maintain in-place devices as necessary,
during all times and hours when no workmen are actively
engaged at the site. The Contractor shall also provide a
minimum of three (3), twenty-four (24) hour emergency contact
names and telephone numbers to the Engineer. One of the three
(3) emergency contact names shall be the Traffic Control
Coordinator.
P300.236
The Contractor shall provide the patroller with a suitable vehicle

for patrolling the work area. The vehicle shall be equipped with
approved vehicle lights as specified in Subsection 920.13.
Patrols shall be made at least once per hour during the
patroller's tour of duty. In reversing direction at each end of his
patrol, the patroller shall exit at an interchange beyond the limits
of the Project and then re-enter.
The traffic protection patroller shall be an employee of the
Contractor and not of a subcontractor, Authority, or other
transportation agency. The patroller shall be thoroughly familiar
with all of the provisions of these Specifications for Maintenance
and Protection of Traffic. The traffic protection patroller shall be
English speaking and equipped with a cell phone capable of
direct contact at all times.
The patrollers duties in regard to maintenance of devices shall
include maintaining the proper position and alignment of all
devices, washing sign faces and the lenses of flashing lights,
replacing dead batteries and defective bulbs and lights, aligning
lights properly, and any other maintenance of devices deemed
essential by the Engineer to sustain the full effectiveness of all
in-place devices.
In addition to providing a traffic protection patrol for periods
when directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide
traffic protection patrol in the event of any incident occurring
during hours when the Contractors personnel are not engaged
at the site and an incident occurs which causes damage or
relocation to traffic protection and control devices. During these
incidents, the Authority, State Police, or the Engineer will call
the Contractor's supervisor who shall respond within one hour
and correct any deficiencies or damage within three hours. A
non-response by the Contractor within the stipulated time
frames will result in a one thousand dollars ($1,000) assessment
for each occurrence as determined by the Engineer, and be
deducted from the Contractors partial payments.
In the event of an incident causing damage to the in-place traffic
protection and control devices beyond the repair capability of
the patroller, he shall immediately call the superintendent
and/or the Traffic Control Coordinator who shall make himself
available at the site of the work within four (4) hours of being
requested, and with such additional workmen as may be
required to make the necessary repairs. If damaged traffic
control devices are within tapers, State Police assistance shall be
required for the resetting of the devices.
P300.236
Should an incident occur which causes damage to in-place

devices and the Contractor's patroller is unable or otherwise fails
to perform the specified duties, the Engineer will call the
Contractor's superintendent and/or the Traffic Control
Coordinator who shall make himself available at the site and
effect repairs as specified in the preceding paragraph.
The patroller shall maintain the cone line of an entire work area,
particularly in the area of the pavement removal, resurfacing
and line striping operations. When a cone or cones are struck by
a vehicle, they must be picked up and placed in proper
alignment immediately. Once the operation proceeds through
an area, the cone line must be brought back to the proper
configuration to reduce the re-occurrence of cones being struck
by passing vehicles.
Lengths of closings and complexities of both the operation of
paving and proximity to interchanges require a 2-person patrol
for all paving operations.
(b) Part-time Patrol.
Part-time patrol shall be as specified above for full time patrol
except that the patrol shall be made during the time periods
specified (such as weekends, certain Holiday periods, etc.) or as
otherwise directed or ordered by the Engineer. The Engineer
reserves the right however to require the Contractor to provide
the services of such patroller more frequently than specified
and/or at such other times when the devices are in-place and
none of the Contractor's workmen are engaged at the site (such
as long periods of inclement weather), as the Engineer in his sole
judgment may deem necessary.
(c) No Patrol Required.
In the event of an incident occurring during hours when no
workmen are engaged at the site and causing damage to traffic
protection and control devices that are in-place, the Engineer
will call the Contractor's superintendent and/or Traffic Control
Coordinator who shall make himself available at the site of the
work within a reasonable length of time, as determined by the
Engineer, and with such additional workmen as may be required
to make the necessary repairs.
(B)
CLOSINGS, SLOWDOWNS, AND ESCORTS.
The Contractor will be issued a copy of the "Lane Closure and Construction Safety
P300.236
Video" at the Preconstruction meeting. The Contractor will not be permitted to engage in
lane and shoulder closing operations on Authority roadways and ramps until the "Lane
Closure and Construction Safety Video" has been viewed and acknowledged by all
employees, Subcontractors, suppliers and vendors as noted on the attendance sheet, a
copy of which is found in Appendix W. The completed attendance sheet shall be
submitted to the Engineer prior to the first lane closing request submission. The
Engineer shall provide the attendance sheet to the Authoritys Operations Department
with the first lane closing request submission. The Contractor shall submit additional
attendance sheets as necessary throughout the course of the project to account for change
in personnel. Any exceptions to the specified personnel viewing the "Lane Closing and
Construction Safety Video" will be only as approved by the Engineer.
All lane, ramp and shoulder closings (including traffic shifts) required for the
construction of the work for this Contract shall be installed, maintained and removed
by the Contractor unless specifically called for on the Plans. It is the Contractors
responsibility to become familiar with the location and use of the devices described in
these Specifications and on the Plans. All roadway closings (if permitted) shall be
installed and removed by the Authority.
When the work under the Contract requires that a ramp (half-width), mainline lane,
shoulder of an Authority roadway be closed, such closings shall be made only at such
times, to such limits, and in such a manner that the movement of traffic on the roadway
will be maintained. Restrictions to movement of traffic by lane closings shall be
minimized. All traffic moving on lanes not closed shall be able to flow smoothly, and
shall be protected from all hazards pertaining to the Contractor's operations and because
of the lane closings. A lane closing is defined as a reduction in the number of lanes. A
half-width ramp closing of a single lane ramp is considered as a shoulder closing or a
lane shift. Closing a lane on a ramp with two or more lanes is considered as a lane
closing. A lane shift is defined as the lateral movement of traffic without a reduction in
the number of lanes.
The Contractor is advised that the time required to install and remove a lane closing may
be substantial. Approved lane closing hours are inclusive of the time for installation and
removal of traffic protection devices; removal of existing striping, placement and
removal of temporary striping and construction barrier, placement of permanent striping
and all else necessary either to properly close or reopen lane(s) and shoulders to traffic.
The Contractor will be assessed a penalty as defined in Subsection 107.12 for each fifteen
(15) minute delay in reopening of a closing.
Permissible lane and shoulder closing hours for Authority roadways are noted in tabular
form in the Manual. Where the limits of a proposed lane or shoulder closing extend
beyond the limits of a single closing table, the more restrictive hours shall govern.
Because of heavy traffic during morning and evening commuter rush hours, on
weekends, over holidays, and during the summer vacation period (between Memorial
Day and Labor Day), the times or hours when a road, lane or lanes may be closed and
work requiring such closings may be performed are limited. Lanes may be closed and
work requiring lanes to be closed may be performed only during the times prescribed.
Additional restrictions for closings are listed herein. When a proposed closing extends
within 1,000 feet of an interchange or service area ramp, measured from the physical
P300.236
nose of the ramp in either direction to any part of the closing (cone or barrier segment,
including tapers), additional restrictions may be imposed by the Operations Department.
All requests for lane, shoulder or roadway closings, or State Police escorts or slowdowns
shall be scheduled by submitting the proper forms further described herein to the
Engineer no later than 12:00 p.m. on the 2nd Monday prior to the requested escort,
slowdown, closing or opening. If the Contractor fails to submit the appropriate form(s)
to the Engineer in advance as stipulated above, it may result in the denial of the
requested lane closing, escort or slowdown for the week. Notwithstanding, because of
adjacent construction, a roadway, lane, or shoulder closing, or escort or slowdown may
be denied even if properly requested. In any event, the denial of lane, shoulder or
roadway closing or delay of the closing or opening of up to two hours from the
scheduled times shall not be considered as a basis for a claim of delay against the
Authority. The Contractor is advised that closings or openings installed by the Authority
will be initiated within two hours of the time scheduled for such closings or openings.
The Contractor shall establish his priorities for closings and openings and request such
closings and openings at one hour intervals, minimum.
If a prescheduled lane or roadway closing operation which has been approved by the
Authority will not be utilized for any reason by the Contractor, the Contractor shall
notify the Engineer at least forty-eight (48) hours in advance to cancel the scheduled
closing. If the forty-eight (48) hour period falls on a Saturday or Sunday, the notice for
cancellation must be submitted on the preceding Thursday. The Contractor will be
permitted one (1) occasion where the proper advance notification to cancel any
scheduled closing operation is not given. If the Contractor fails to properly cancel a
prescheduled lane or roadway closing a second time, within six (6) months of the first
occurrence, the Contractor will be assessed $2,500 and an additional $2,500 for each
subsequent occurrence within six (6) months of the previous occurrence. If the
Contractor is unable to utilize the lane or roadway closing at the scheduled time due to
weather conditions, as determined by the Engineer, it shall not count as a failure to notify
the Engineer.
Where the Contractor finishes a work operation using a prescheduled lane closing earlier
than scheduled, such that the lane closing operation is not needed on a scheduled day or
days, he shall notify the Engineer as soon as the change in schedule is known, even if
within the forty-eight (48) hour notification period. This case shall not constitute a failure
to properly notify the Engineer.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, for the work covered by these
Specifications, to coordinate with the Engineer and other contractors affected by the
Authority closings and to schedule his work accordingly with the approved progress
schedules of the other contractors and the current status of each project, as described in
Subsection 104.07.
The traffic protection devices for closing of a lane or shoulder shall always be set up
progressively in the direction of traffic from the cone and traffic control trucks traveling
in the lane or shoulder being closed. The protection devices shall always be removed in
the reverse order by the truck backing up on the closed lane or shoulder. Proper flashing
yellow lights shall be installed on all construction vehicles in accordance with Subsection
P300.236
920.13. The Engineer will coordinate the procedures for closing or opening a lane or
shoulder.
Once a lane closing is in place, work shall commence immediately and shall progress on
a continuous basis to completion.
The Contractor's personnel, vehicles, equipment, or materials shall not occupy any area
within thirty (30) feet from the edge of pavement where there is no guide rail or other
physical barrier unless the shoulder has been closed. The storage of materials and
equipment will be permitted within Authority right-of-way only at specific locations to
be designated by the Engineer. Materials or equipment shall not be stored in a closed
lane or shoulder unless protected by a barrier.
Precast concrete construction barrier shall be installed only after the lane or shoulder has
been closed.
During all periods when traffic lanes are not closed, the roadways shall be clear of all
obstructions.
All traffic control devices within the Contractors work area which have been moved or
displaced for whatever reason shall be immediately restored to their proper position by
the Contractor. Cones or other traffic control devices which have been moved or
displaced during such times when the Contractor is not actively engaged at the site, it
shall be restored by the Contractors Traffic Protection Patrol in accordance with
Subparagraph 801.03(A)(7).
The Operations Department or State Police may determine that a scheduled half-ramp,
mainline lane, shoulder or roadway closing must be cancelled, postponed, or delayed in
opening or opened earlier than originally planned. This change in available work hours
shall not be considered as a basis for a claim against the Authority. Lane closings may be
cancelled or may be reopened earlier than scheduled, as required by weather conditions
or other incidents.
The Contractor shall coordinate his requests for closures with adjacent Contracts as
described in Subsection 104.07.
The Contractor shall install, maintain and remove lane closings in accordance with
staged work requirements during the allowed times specified in the Manual, and in
accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
Refer to the Tables provided in the Manual and/or the Plans for allowable lane
closing hours.
(1)
Lane Closings.
Unless otherwise specified by the Authority, the maximum length of any lane
closing, i.e., length between first and last cones, shall be five (5) miles. The
minimum clear distance between two separate lane closings, i.e., from the last
traffic cone of the first closing to the first cone of the second closing, in the same
roadway, shall be three (3) miles. The minimum clear distance between two
P300.236
separate closings one of which is a shoulder closing, from the last traffic cone of
the first closing to the first cone of the second closing, in the same roadway, shall
be a half () of a mile.
Lane closings shall be installed, maintained and removed, by the Contractor, in
accordance with these Specifications, maintenance and protection of traffic
details included in the Plans, and Authority-issued Standard Drawings unless
otherwise approved by the Operations Department. No work shall begin until
traffic protection devices, including Precast Concrete Construction Barrier (if
called for), are completely set in place in accordance with the limits and details
shown in the Plans and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
During permissible lane closing hours, not more than one lane in a roadway may
be closed at any one time in any one work area unless multiple lane closings are
specifically permitted.
The Contractor may request a Supplemental State Police Traffic Patrol for each
mainline lane closing when work is to be performed at roadway level within six
(6) feet of the traveled way and no precast concrete construction barrier is
specified. The Supplemental State Police Traffic Patrol may also be requested for
half width or partial ramp closings with posted speed limits of 40 mph or higher
and where no concrete construction barrier is specified, within the project limits.
The Contractor shall prepare a schedule on the form shown in the Appendices of
these Specifications for a State Police Supplemental Patrol and review the
schedule with the Engineer prior to submittal to the Authority. Supplemental
State Police Traffic Patrols will be made available only during Contractor
working hours.
The Contractor shall submit the request for Supplemental State Police Traffic
Patrol in the Appendices at the same time as the roadway, lane or shoulder
closing, escort or slowdown request. Time required for pavement striping
changes shall be included in the requested Supplemental State Police Traffic
Patrol schedule.
In stages where multiple lanes are closed and inclement weather or other
circumstances may impact the stipulated lane closing pick-up time, the
Contractor shall concentrate his work effort on the lane adjacent to the active
traffic lane or other lane or shoulder as directed by the Engineer. He shall be
prepared to complete work in this lane ahead of work in the remaining area in
order to allow this lane to be opened to traffic as soon as possible. This approach
may require a non-continuous paving operation requiring additional
mobilization of the paving train and crew.
Half-ramp closing allowable hours will be as described on the Plans for each
individual interchange ramp.
Whenever any work to be performed or any equipment occupying a shoulder
not behind a barrier and will be within (or operated within) three (3) feet of a
traveled lane (such as a tractor, a crane swinging, installation and removal of
P300.236
precast concrete construction barrier), the lane adjacent to the shoulder shall also
be closed.
This is referred to as a Supplementary Lane Closing.
Supplementary lane closings will be permitted as specified in Subparagraph
801.03(B)(4).
Where temporary striping will be required for traffic direction, the lane shall be
closed and the Contractor shall remove the existing striping and place the
temporary striping before reopening the lane or shoulder to traffic and closing
the adjacent lane for construction.
In addition to the times outlined on the Plans, the Contractor shall be expected to
provide additional lane closures for If and Where Directed by the Engineer
work, Change Order work, Force Account work, and for Emergency Work
described in Division 400. All additional closures shall be installed in accordance
with the details provided on the Plans and Standard Drawings and as described
in the Specifications. Where a closure is required and is not adequately described
in the Contract Documents, the Engineer will provide the Contractor with the
necessary direction and details for the closure.
Payment will be made in
accordance with Subsection 801.05 under the item Furnishing Traffic Control
Devices.
Lane closing beginning and terminating points may be extended, as directed by
the Engineer, with approval from the Operations Department, to perform
roadway and shoulder pavement repairs, bridge pavement and deck repairs, or
other If and Where directed by the Engineer work, Force Account work,
Change Order work or Emergency Work as necessary. Lane closing extensions
shall be less than one mile in length.
Lane closings for punchlist or correction of defective work shall be at the
Contractors expense. The number and duration of the lane closing installations
for punchlist or correction of defective work shall be that necessary to complete
all punchlist or correction of defective work as directed by the Engineer.
(2)
Emergency Lane Closings.
When in the opinion of the Chief Engineer it becomes necessary to close lanes to
make prompt repairs to work in progress or to other facilities that are damaged,
the Contractor shall provide all the materials and manpower necessary, and shall
work continuously on a 24 hour per day basis to complete the emergency repairs
and again make all lanes available to use by public traffic. Compensation for
emergency repairs of damage beyond the Contractor's control will be paid under
the established pay item in the Contract or on a cost-plus basis as specified in
Subsection 108.04 or on such other basis as agreed upon by the Contractor and
the Engineer. All costs incurred as a result of emergency repairs of damage
caused solely by the Contractor's procedures shall be borne entirely by the
Contractor.
(3)
Shoulder Closings.
Shoulder closings may be permitted between the hours as specified in the Plans,
P300.236
Supplemental Specifications, or within the Appendices of the Manual. Refer to
801.03(A) for Contract documents order of precedence.
Unless a shoulder is closed long term with Precast Concrete Construction Barrier,
once a shoulder closing is in place, work shall commence immediately and shall
progress on a continuous basis to completion. Shoulders shall not be kept closed
when no work is scheduled to be performed.
Simultaneous closing of both the right and left shoulder of a roadway will not be
permitted. All shoulder closings shall be of the shortest overall length and
duration necessary to protect traffic and shall provide as much shoulder as
possible for use by disabled vehicles and/or emergency vehicles.
Shoulder closings shall be installed, maintained and removed by the Contractor
in accordance with these Specifications, maintenance and protection of traffic
details included in the Plans, and Authority issued Standard Drawings. No work
shall begin until traffic protection devices, including precast concrete
construction barrier, are completely set in place in accordance with the limits and
details shown in the Plans in accordance with the Traffic Protection Standard
Drawings and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Additional shoulder closings or an extension in the shoulder closings shown may
be required to perform If and Where Directed work, Force Account work,
Change Order work and/or Emergency Repair work. The additional closings
may be of partial day, full day or multi-day durations. Shoulder closings for
punchlist work and correction of defective work shall be at the Contractors
expense. The number and duration of the shoulder closing installation for
punchlist work shall be that necessary to complete all punchlist work as directed
by the Engineer.
The shifting of traffic from a single lane ramp to the shoulder of a single lane
ramp shall be performed during the same time as lane closings in the Manual.
(4)
Supplementary Lane Closings.
Supplementary lane closings will be permitted as specified on the Plans and, if

not indicated on the Plans, will be permissible during the times prescribed in the
Appendices of the Manual. All lane, ramp, shoulder and supplementary closings
shall be installed, maintained and removed by the Contractor. The installation,
maintenance and removal of supplementary lane closings include the furnishing,
placing and removing arrow boards, placing and removing traffic cones, placing
and removing additional signs, and the changing of sign panels and/or overlays.
(5)
Authority Roadway Closing.
THE CONTRACTOR IS ADVISED THAT ROADWAY CLOSINGS MAY NOT

BE AVAILABLE FOR WORK ON THIS PROJECT. However, the Contractor may
utilize any roadway closing installed/scheduled by others for work on other
Contracts or for Authority maintenance. The Contractor shall not interfere or
conflict with the work for which the closing was installed. If the Contractor
P300.236
performs work within a roadway closing by others, he is responsible for vacating
the closing within the scheduled hours of the closing.
The hours when one roadway of a single direction dual roadway may be closed
are limited. A roadway may be closed, and work requiring roadways to be
closed, may be performed only during the times prescribed in this Contract (if
permitted), in other Contracts or if roadway closings are in place for NJTA
maintenance work.
The initial closing and final re-opening of ramp gates (where applicable) will be
performed only by employees of the Authority and under the direction of the
State Police. The Contractor of this or other Contracts will arrange for such
assistance through the Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall not position his vehicles and
equipment to block all lanes and shoulders of the closed roadway. At least one
lane of emergency access is to be maintained at all times.
The Contractor shall be permitted to undertake only as much work as can be
completed within the time prescribed. Extension of roadway closing hours will
not be granted under any circumstances. The Contractor is reminded that the
time required to close an entire roadway may be substantial and that the
roadway closing hours prescribed are inclusive of closing and reopening times.
Roadway closings may be cancelled or roadways may be reopened earlier than
scheduled, as required by weather conditions or incidents in the open samedirection roadway. The Contractor shall immediately vacate the closed roadway
if so instructed by the State Police or the Operations Department. The
cancellation or curtailment of a roadway closing shall not be considered as a
basis for a claim of delay against the Authority.
(6)
Ramp Closings
Unless otherwise approved on the Contract Plans, the Contractor is advised that
Ramp Closings are not permitted for work on this project unless prior
authorization is obtained from the Authority or as directed by the State Police in
the event of an emergency. However, the Contractor may utilize any Ramp
Closing installed/scheduled by others for work on other Contracts or for
Authority Maintenance where permitted by the Engineer of the
installed/scheduled Ramp Closing. The contractor shall not interfere or conflict
with the work for which the closing was installed. If the Contractor performs
work within a Ramp Closing by others, he is responsible for vacating the closing
within the scheduled hours of the closing.
Where a Ramp Closing is otherwise approved by the Authority or the State
Police whereas the closing was not originally detailed in Contract Plans, the
Ramp Closing shall be in substantial conformance with the Authoritys Standard
Drawings. A Detour Route with appropriate signing shall be provided except in
the case of installation due to emergency whereas the Contractor will provide the
Detour Route and signing within a practical time frame which includes
P300.236
fabrication, installation, mobilization and removal.
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall not position its vehicles and
equipment to block all through lanes and shoulders on the ramp. At least one
lane or one shoulder for emergency access is to be maintained at all times.
The Contractor shall be permitted to undertake only as much work as can be
completed within the time prescribed. Extension of ramp closing hours will not
be granted under any circumstances. The Contractor is reminded that the total
time required to open and close a ramp may be substantial due to the
deployment of necessary detour signing (to close) and the removal and proper
covering or removal of detour signing (to open) that the closing hours prescribed
are inclusive of closing and reopening times.
Ramp closings may be cancelled or ramps may be opened earlier than scheduled,
as required by weather conditions or incidents. The Contractor shall immediately
vacate the closed ramp if so instructed by the Authority or the State Police. The
cancellation or curtailment of a ramp closing shall not be considered as a basis
for a claim of delay against the Authority.
(7)
Slowdowns.
Certain elements of work which cannot be accomplished with lane closings will
be required to be accomplished during the simultaneous slowing of traffic in all
lanes. This work may include but is not limited to the movement of heavy
equipment across a roadway, the erection or removal of bridge elements or sign
structures; installation of bridge deck joints, milling and resurfacing operations;
placement, removal or relocation of precast concrete construction barriers;
installation of traffic tapers; removal of traffic closings; realigning displaced
traffic control devices; and striping changes. The Contractor shall confirm with
the Engineer a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours (48 hours preferred) prior
notice of the time he wishes traffic to be slowed. Slowdowns will not be granted
for such work elements as installation or removal of any line striping or
sweeping.
All requests for slowdowns should be scheduled by submitting the proper
Escort, Slowdown Request Form in the Appendices to the Engineer with the
Lane Closing Request in the Appendices. Emergency slowdowns for the purpose
of maintaining traffic protection devices can be requested by the Contractors
Traffic Control Coordinator. The Contractor shall submit the request for State
Police Traffic Patrol (see Appendices) at the same time as the Escort, Slowdown
Request Form.
Traffic shall be slowed down only by the direction of the State Police. The
Engineer will arrange State Police assistance for these operations through the
Operations Department.
Slowdowns for the movement of equipment, requiring one minute or less, may
be scheduled any time except during the hours of 6:00 AM to 9:00 AM and 4:00
PM to 7:00 PM, Monday through Friday. Slowdowns requiring more than one
P300.236
minute but less than five minutes may be scheduled from 10:00 AM to 2:00 PM
Monday through Friday. Slowdowns of more than five minutes and less than
ten minutes must be scheduled during the allowable roadway or two-lane
closing hours as specified in the Manual. Slowdowns of more than ten minutes
will generally not be permitted.
The method of accomplishing work which would require lengthy slowdowns
will be determined by the Engineer after consultation with the Operations
Department and may involve extremely limited working hours and traffic
control provisions beyond those called for in the Plans and Specifications.
When more than one slowdown is scheduled for the same work area, the flow of
traffic must return to normal before traffic is slowed again.
Slowdowns will not be permitted during the restricted Holiday Periods as
specified in Subparagraph 801.03(D).
(8)
Escorts.
Whenever the Contractor intends to transport oversize or slow moving

equipment on active Authority roadways, he may do so only under State Police
escort.
All requests for escorts should be scheduled by submitting the proper Escort
Request Form to the Engineer on the Monday of the week preceding the
requested escort. In no case, however, will a slowdown be granted after 12:00
PM the day prior. If escort is needed on a Saturday or Sunday, request must be
submitted by 12:00 PM on Thursday.
The Engineer will determine the time and the route of the escort. Escorts will not
be scheduled during the hours of 6:00 AM to 9:00 AM and 4:00 PM to 7:00 PM
Monday through Friday. Escorts are generally permitted only to and from the
nearest Interchange.
A minimum of two flashing amber lights as specified in Subsection 920.13 shall
be mounted on all slow moving vehicles. Tracked vehicles are not permitted to
drive on open roadways.
(C)
TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES.

The Contractor is responsible for installing, maintaining, and removing all traffic
control devices, including but not limited to, concrete construction barriers,
construction signs and sign stands, portable variable message signs, arrow
boards, trucks, attenuators, and all other traffic protection devices furnished
and/or handled by him. The Contractor is also required to fabricate, furnish,
install and remove mainline sign overlay panels and coverings when shown in
the Plans and in accordance with MUTCD. Overlays and coverings shall be
installed and removed during the installation and removal of traffic closings and
shifts.
P300.236
The Contractor shall furnish materials, such as bolts, nuts, washers, adhesive
anchors and polyester resin bonding agent, fasteners, paint, equipment and all
labor required for the construction, placement, replacement, and maintenance of
all traffic protection devices furnished and/or installed by him.
The Contractor or the assigned Traffic Control Coordinator shall maintain all
traffic protection devices for the duration of the project, ensuring their operation,
visibility, and overall effectiveness whenever they are in place at a work site.
Maintenance shall include repairing, replacing, and washing devices as
necessary, properly realigning devices, and any other work deemed necessary by
the Engineer. Traffic protection devices, including but not limited to aluminum
sign stands, sign panels, TMAs, cones and arrow board trailers that become
damaged shall be repaired or replaced immediately upon notification of damage.
The Contractor shall have on the project, an adequate number of spare parts to
repair any damaged devices.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the security and maintenance of all traffic
control devices, whether furnished by the Authority or by himself. Any devices
damaged or lost during the life of the project shall be repaired or replaced at the
Contractors expense unless a repair item is specifically provided for in the
Proposal. Devices damaged due to a documented patron incident/accident shall
be repaired or replaced under Force Account as approved by the Engineer
unless a repair item is specifically provided for in the Proposal.
When traffic control devices are to remain in-place overnight, during weekends,
holidays, periods of inclement weather, or any other time that work will not be in
progress, the Contractor or the assigned Traffic Control Coordinator shall ensure
the full effectiveness of the devices prior to the cessation of work.
Cones or other protective devices moved by the Contractor for his own
convenience in conducting his work operations may be done only with the
approval of the Engineer and at no expense to the Authority. Upon completion
of operations necessitating such moves, the Contractor shall immediately replace
the protective devices to their original positions.
The Contractor shall furnish all supports, including guide rail and concrete
median mounts as shown on the associated Standard Drawing, as required by
each sign location to support the sign panels (except those furnished by the
Authority see Part 801.03(C)(11)). The Contractor is responsible to install and
maintain all sign stands as directed by the Engineer. Sign stands carrying signs
shall be in full extended position and the sign shall provide five (5) feet of
clearance to the top of grade on Authority roadways. The use of clamps will not
be permitted for attaching the sign stand to the median barrier. The sign base
shall be properly tensioned to ensure the sign is stable and visible during passing
truck traffic. After completion of the Contract, the sign stands shall remain the
Contractors property, except those furnished by the Authority, which shall be
returned to the Authority in accordance with Part 801.03(C)(11).
(1) Traffic Cones.
P300.236
The Contractor shall use 36 or 28 traffic cones. The Contractor shall

not combine 28 and 36 cones in a single closing. All cones per closing
shall be the same height. See Subsection 920.01.
(2) Precast Concrete Construction Barrier.
Precast concrete construction barrier delivered to the job site shall be in
new condition and maintained throughout the duration of the Project.
The Engineer shall be the sole judge of the acceptability of the precast
concrete barrier. Precast concrete barrier deemed unsatisfactory by the
Engineer shall be replaced at no cost to the Authority.
Where different joint classifications are required within a section of
barrier, the controlling joint class shall extend a minimum of one
complete barrier length before and after the work area. For example,
where A and D are required, Joint Class D shall extend a minimum of
one complete barrier length before and after the work area which
requires Joint Class D before changing to Joint Class A.
The concrete construction barrier may be installed after the removal of
existing surfacing and removed prior to paving, unless otherwise shown
on Plans, if site conditions and construction sequence require doing so.
The Contractor shall furnish all hardware, concrete barrier interlock
devices, anchors and all else necessary for the complete installation and
subsequent removal and/or relocation of the concrete barrier.
The Contractor shall be required to maintain the precast concrete barrier
units in their correct alignment at all times. The Contractor shall
promptly furnish (any time of the day or night upon notification from
the Authority, State Police or the Engineer) all labor, materials and
equipment as necessary to repair, reset and/or realign any portion of
concrete barrier units damaged or displaced by traffic incidents or
otherwise. All contractor-furnished devices shall remain the property of
the Contractor and shall be removed by the contractor upon completion
of the work.
All precast concrete construction barrier that does not meet the following
criteria, as determined by the Engineer prior to placement on the
roadway, shall be rejected for use:
No more than three cracks in the middle 6 feet of the barrier.
All cracks must be less than inch wide.
No gouges in the lower half of the face exposed to traffic.
No reinforcing steel shall be exposed.
The key way must be intact.
Lifting devices shall be intact.
Face exposed to traffic must be clean of all road dirt.
P300.236
Reflectors shall be in place.
Interlock must accept key full depth without projection of key
cap above barrier.
The full key way must be available.
Precast concrete construction barrier that becomes damaged shall be
replaced within 24-hours, as directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall clean and maintain the drainage slots at the bottom
of the concrete construction barrier at all times as directed by the
Engineer.
Precast concrete construction barrier shall be installed to protect traffic
from the hazards of any excavation or drop off that is four (4) in. or
deeper within twelve feet of the lane line or traveled way, or six (6) in. or
deeper from twelve to thirty feet from the lane line or traveled way
where there is no guide rail, or any other opening in the roadway or
adjacent area which would be dangerous if a vehicle were to enter it.
(3) Modular Glare Screen System.
Within isolated deck replacement areas and at parapet replacement
areas, a Modular Glare Screen System with screening shall be installed
on top of the precast concrete construction barrier at locations shown on
the Plans. The Modular Glare Screen System is required at isolated deck
replacement areas scheduled for a Stage that is permitted for a period of
four (4) days or greater and at all parapet replacement areas.
The Modular Glare Screen System shall be installed prior to beginning
any deck removal and shall remain in place until the new deck has been
constructed. The Modular Glare Screen System and screening may be
temporarily removed for placing, relocating or moving the precast
construction barrier. The removal of the Modular Glare Screen System is
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
The Modular Glare Screen System shall extend for the full length of the
precast concrete construction barrier (except on taper sections) adjacent
to deck breakouts as shown on the Plans.
The screening shall be in accordance with the debris shield mesh netting
material requirements in Subsection 920.17. Screening shall be located
along the top of the barrier and extend to a height above the top of the
barrier equal to the top of the Modular Glare Screen System; it shall be
attached through small holes drilled through the Modular Glare Screen
System panel and secured with plastic ties to every other panel in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
(4) Temporary Impact Attenuators.
P300.236
Temporary impact attenuators refer to non-directive sand-filled
polyethylene plastic frangible modules. Temporary impact attenuator
devices which are lost, stolen, damaged, destroyed or determined by the
Engineer to be unacceptable shall be replaced without additional
compensation.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately upon discovery of
any damaged temporary impact attenuator and shall immediately
replace or repair all damaged portions. The Contractor shall have on the
Project an adequate number of spare parts to repair any damaged
attenuator unit. Any modules of a unit or sand which are damaged due
to the Contractors carelessness while placing, or due to the operation of
the Contractors equipment or personnel after such placement, shall be
replaced at no additional cost to the Authority.
(5) Impact Attenuators (Quadguard).
Impact attenuators (Quadguard) refer to crushable, energy absorbing
systems. Refer to Section 524 for requirements.
(6) Truck with Mounted Attenuator (TMA).
This item shall also include placing, moving and removing the TMA unit
as necessary when the Contractor is working within a closed shoulder or
lane. The TMA shall be removed from the closed shoulder or lane when
no work is in progress or they shall be stored behind precast concrete
construction barrier.
The truck shall be in excellent operating condition and have a minimum
gross weight (11 Tons) in accordance with the TMA manufacturers
recommendation. The truck shall be equipped with a rear-mounted
attenuator, including a crushable energy absorption module, cartridge
support cables, lightweight steel backup plate, corner jacks, hydraulic
tilting system and the hardware necessary for attachment. The truck
mounted attenuator shall be attached to the truck in accordance with the
manufacturers specifications and recommendations.
The Contractor shall provide a heavy truck with mounted attenuator
(TMA) as a barrier vehicle in the closed lane or closed shoulder
preceding each work location where personnel are engaged in
construction activities and no concrete barrier is called for.
The appropriate numbers of TMAs, as shown on the Plans, are to be
provided for work on this Contract. The TMAs shall remain the
Contractors property upon Contract completion. If the Contractor elects
to work at more than one location requiring a TMA, he shall furnish
additional TMAs at no additional cost to the Authority.
The TMA layout (positioning) shall conform to the requirements set
forth in the section on Truck Mounted Attenuators in the most recent
P300.236
Edition of the AASHTO Roadside Design Guide.
Any units or parts of the truck mounted attenuator which are damaged
or become inoperable during construction shall be repaired or replaced.
A complete replacement module and the required components for
restoration shall be available at all times on the project without
additional compensation.
The truck shall be equipped with two (2) conspicuous overhead flashing
lights in accordance with Subsection 920.13 and the appropriate
generator to power the lights. The lights shall be mounted so that they
are visible when the attenuator is in a raised position and the flashing
lights shall run continuously whenever the truck is performing lane and
shoulder closing and opening operations.
In the event that the traffic control truck is hit during the process of the
work and the crash cushions become damaged or inoperable, the
Contractor shall have a replacement cartridge on the site at all times, and
shall immediately repair the truck mounted crash cushions. The
replacement cartridge shall be compatible with the original unit so that
the repair can be accomplished in a minimal amount of time.
The Contractor shall have a truck mounted attenuator with a driver
available at the request of the Engineer for the purpose of inspection,
condition assessment, layout of If and Where Directed work, Change
Order and/or Emergency Work and for the Final Inspection. It is
anticipated that the truck mounted attenuator with the driver will be
needed a minimum of four (4) hours and no more than eight (8) hours
per request with a twelve (12) hour advance notice by the Engineer.
Payment for costs associated with this work shall be in accordance with
Furnishing Truck Mounted Attenuator for Engineers Use, or shall be
included in the unit costs of the various pay items within Division 800.
(7) Cone and TMA Trucks.
All lane and shoulder closing operations shall be performed with a
minimum of two (2) vehicles consisting of a cone truck and a TMA truck.
Both vehicles shall be equipped with approved conspicuous overhead
flashing amber warning lights per Subsection 920.13. The warning lights
shall be mounted so that they are visible when the attenuator is in a
raised position. The warning lights shall run continuously whenever the
vehicles are performing lane and shoulder closing or opening operations.
The cone truck shall be equipped with an approved carrier to hold
personnel placing cones. Cone trucks with side-mounted carrier baskets
may only be used for lane closing installations. Cone trucks with rearmounted carrier baskets may be used for all types of closing
installations.
The shoulder/lane closing crew shall be augmented by a traffic observer,
P300.236
who shall be equipped with an air horn. The traffic observer shall ride
on the cone truck and watch oncoming traffic and this person shall
sound the air horn as a warning if an out-of-control or other errant
vehicles pose a threat to the crew.
The use of a TMA truck and the use of an approved cone truck and a
traffic observer during the lane and shoulder closing or opening
operations are mandatory and no exception shall be made.
Under no circumstances shall a TMA truck or cone truck remain in a
closed lane or shoulder during non-working hours or a period of
inactivity.
(8) Portable Variable Message Signs.
The portable variable message signs shall be physically located off of the
traveled way, within a closed lane or shoulder, behind guide rail, behind
approved closing devices, as shown on the Plans or Standard Drawings,
or as directed by the Engineer. The portable variable message signs shall
be positioned prior to the start of any work.
The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that the sign and generator
runs continuously until sign and generator is no longer required.
Malfunctioning portable variable message signs shall be repaired or
replaced within two (2) hours. The Contractor shall retain a spare
portable variable message sign unit for use in the Contract.
Whilst deactivated, the portable variable message signs shall completely
be removed from the worksite, or be stored behind precast concrete
construction barriers.
(9) Arrow Boards

Arrow boards shall be in accordance with Subsection 920.11.
(10) Devices Furnished by the Authority
All devices furnished by the Authority to the Contractor shall remain the
property of the Authority. All devices furnished for the project by the
Contractor shall become the property of the Authority, with the
exception of those items so designated.
Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall repair or replace as
necessary all devices used on the project, whether furnished by him or
the Authority. The devices shall be restored to a condition suitable for
further use. The Contractor shall transport all restored or replaced
devices to the location designated and shall unload and store them as
P300.236
The Engineer shall be notified of the proposed delivery date of the

devices at least 48 hours in advance so that he can be present upon their
delivery. The Contractor shall obtain a written receipt upon the
satisfactory return of the devices. Adjustments for any shortage or
deficiencies will be made before final payment.
Adjustment in a form of credit to the Authority will be assessed for any
deficiencies or shortages of traffic protection devices returned to the
Authority in accordance with the requirements of the Contract. The
adjustments for this credit will be based on the replacement costs at the
time of final completion and not at the time of issue. These adjustments
will be made before final payment to the Contractor is recommended.
All items furnished by the Contractor shall remain his.
(11) Lighting.
Lights shall conform to the requirements of the Institute of Traffic
Engineers Standards for flashing warning lights. The color of the light
emitted shall be amber. The lens shall not be less than 7 inches in
diameter including a retro reflector ring of approximately 1/2-inch
width around a minimum of 300 degrees of the periphery. When a
circuit of more than 50 volts is used, the lights shall be equipped with an
Underwriter's Laboratory approved ground fault circuitry interrupter.
(i)
Low Intensity Flashing Warning Lights.
Low intensity flashing lights shall have one or two lens

directional faces. They shall have a minimum intensity of 4
candelas. They shall flash at a rate of 55 - 75 flashes per minute
and the flash duration shall be 10 percent of each flash cycle.
They shall be kept lighted from dusk to dawn and when adverse
atmospheric conditions cause the ambient light to be less than 20
foot candles.
(ii)
High Intensity Flashing Warning Lights.
High intensity flashing warning lights shall have a one lens

directional face. They shall have a minimum effective intensity
of 35 candelas. The lights shall flash at: a rate of 55 - 75 flashes
per minute and the flash duration shall be 8 percent of each flash
cycle. They shall be kept lighted 24 hours a day.
Storage batteries or other bulk power sources shall be located as
far as practicable from the traveled way and at ground level.
Three high intensity flashing warning lights shall be placed on
the flared section of a precast concrete construction barrier
configuration.
P300.236
During nighttime lane closings, two high intensity flashing

warning lights shall be mounted at the top of each traffic
protection sign.
(12) Construction Signs.
The Contractor shall provide, erect, support as necessary, maintain and
replace, if required, construction signs as shown on the Plans or as
directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall relocate and/or cover the
signs as directed by the Engineer.
Installation, dimensions, colors and details of signs shall follow the
standards in the current "Standard Highway Sign Publication" and the
current MUTCD for Streets and Highways, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Federal Highway Administration.
Chamfered construction signs are to used along the median of the
Newark Bay-Hudson County Extension and where traffic is shifted into
the left shoulder.
Letters and numerals shall conform to the current manual entitled
"Standard Alphabets for Highway Signs", U.S. Department of
Transportation, Federal Highway Administration.
(i)
Backing Material (Alternatives).
Aluminum shall be flat sheet of 6061 T6 Alloy, 0.125 inches thick.

Plywood shall be 5/8 minimum thickness, exterior type, high
or medium density overlaid on both sides, manufactured in
accordance with "Commercial Standard CS 45 60 for Douglas Fir
Plywood" of the U.S. Department of Commerce.
(ii)
Sign Faces.
Reflective sheeting for the signs shall be orange "Scotchlite No.

2284 as manufactured by Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing
Company or equal. All construction sign legends, borders,
backgrounds, and reflective sheeting shall conform to Subsection
912.02.
(iii)
Supports.
Sign supports shall be well-seasoned lumber, S4S, free of splits,

knots and warp, or steel components subject to the approval of
the Engineer. Sign Supports shall be as specified under
Subsection 920.07.
(iv)
Fastening.
All signs shall be securely fastened to their supports with bolts,
P300.236
nuts and washers of aluminum (2024 T4 Alloy) or galvanized
(ASTM 153).
All signs shall be erected and maintained in a substantial
manner to be approved by the Engineer and shall be maintained
so as to provide maximum visibility and legibility at all times.
(13) Nighttime Operations.
Refer to section 104.18 for information on Nighttime Operations.
(D)
HOLIDAYS, RESTRICTIONS, AND SPECIAL PROVISIONS

Lane and partial ramp closings where the existing number of lanes is
reduced will not be permitted during the following periods, except as
noted:
Mothers Day ................................ 6:00 a.m. Sunday, May 11, 2014 to
10:00 p.m. Sunday, May 11, 2014
Memorial Day .............................. 3:00 p.m. Thursday, May 22, 2014 to
12:01 a.m. Wednesday, May 28, 2014
Independence Day ....................... 12:01 a.m. Wednesday, July 2, 2014 to
12:01 a.m. Tuesday, July 8, 2014
Labor Day ..................................... 3:00 p.m. Thursday, August 28, 2014 to
12:01a.m. Wednesday, September 3,
2014
Columbus Day ............................. 12:00 p.m. Thursday, October 9, 2014 to
12:01 a.m. Wednesday, October 15, 2014
Thanksgiving ................................ 2:00 p.m. Tuesday, November 25, 2014 to
12:01 a.m. Tuesday, December 2, 2014
Christmas ...................................... 12:01 a.m. Friday, December 19, 2014 to
12:01 a.m. Tuesday, January 6, 2015
Martin Luther King Day ............. 5:00 a.m. Friday, January 16, 2015 to
Presidents Day ............................ 5:00 a.m. Friday, February 13, 2015 to
6:00 a.m. Tuesday, February 17, 2015
Easter/Passover ........................... 12:00 p.m. Wednesday, April 1, 2015 to
12:01 a.m. Tuesday, April 7, 2015
P300.236
10:00 p.m. Sunday, May 10, 2015
Independence Day ....................... 12:01 a.m. Wednesday, July 1, 2015 to
12:01 a.m. Tuesday, July 7, 2015
Labor Day ..................................... 3:00 p.m. Thursday, September 3, 2015 to
12:01 a.m. Wednesday, September 9,
2015
12:01 a.m. Tuesday, December 1, 2015
Christmas ...................................... 12:01 a.m. Friday, December 18, 2015 to
Easter/Passover ........................... 12:00 p.m. Wednesday, March 23, 2016 to
12:01 a.m. Tuesday, March 29, 2016
10:00 p.m. Sunday, May 8, 2016
12:01 a.m. Wednesday, June 1, 2016
Independence Day ....................... 12:01 a.m. Friday, July 1, 2016 to
12:01 a.m. Thursday, July 7, 2016
Labor Day ..................................... 3:00 p.m. Thursday, September 1, 2016 to
12:01 a.m. Wednesday, September 7,
2016
12:01 a.m. Tuesday, November 29, 2016
P300.236
Christmas ...................................... 12:01 a.m. Sunday, December 18, 2016 to

12:01 a.m. Thursday, January 5, 2017
Easter/Passover ........................... 12:00 p.m. Wednesday, April 12, 2017 to
12:01 a.m. Tuesday, April 18, 2017
10:00 p.m. Sunday, May 14, 2017
(a)
Lane Closing Restrictions.
Lane shifts are not considered lane closings.

Simultaneous closing of a lane of traffic (reduction in the number of
through lanes) in the same direction roadway within MP 162.2 and MP
163.9 will not be permitted.
(b)
Major Events
Closing of lanes will not be permitted during major events or concurrent

minor events at the Meadowlands Sports Complex. Major or minor
events shall be events with a projected attendance of 50,000 or more
spectators. The Contractor shall contact the New Jersey Sports and
Exhibition Authority (at 201.460.5825) to familiarize himself with which
events might conflict with his schedule.
(c)
High Intensity Construction Cycle Restrictions.
Permissible hours for high intensity construction cycles are shown on

Plans.
Work under this Contract, where the existing number of lanes is
reduced, shall not be performed between May 15, 2014 and September
14, 2014; between May 15, 2015 and September 14, 2015; between May 15,
2016 and September 15, 2016; and between May 15, 2017 and September
14, 2017.
The Contractor shall provide full-time Traffic Protection Patrol for this
Contract. The Proposal amount of Man Hours shall be 2200.
(J)
PAVING OPERATIONS.
P300.236
All paving work shall progress in the direction of traffic.
The Contractor will be permitted to pave the left lane and shoulder of the
mainline roadways as far as conditions will permit during the first day's
operations. Prior to opening all lanes to traffic, a double four inch (4) white line
shall be painted on the old pavement adjacent to the new overlay to notify traffic
of the presence of a longitudinal lip. On the succeeding days the Contractor shall
then pave the adjacent lane(s) and shoulder, not to exceed the length of the first
day's operations. This paving sequence may be repeated during the week;
however, at no time will more than one longitudinal lip be allowed along the
same section of roadway. All mainline paving must be squared up before the
weekend and before Heavy Traffic Days.
The following shall apply to joints during both paving and milling operations:
longitudinal pavement joints shall not exceed a two inch maximum compacted
lip and transverse pavement joints shall have a taper at least three feet per one
inch of pavement mat thickness. Cold patch asphalt shall not be used to form
tapers.
Where any length of longitudinal lip between traveled lanes or lane and shoulder
is left exposed, the Contractor shall take all necessary measures to assure that the
uncompleted section of the roadway can be traveled safely by Parkway patrons.
These measures shall be in accordance with the Manual with the addition of the
following:
(1)
Paint a double four inch (4) white stripe along the edge of unresurfaced
lane or shoulder adjacent to the lane that has been completed, for the
entire length of the exposed lip. If weather conditions preclude
placement of the stripe, fasten approved reflective road markers onto the
pavement at 20-foot spacing.
(2)
Upon resumption of work, remove any road markers prior to continuing

the resurfacing operation.
(3)
Two high intensity flashing warning lights shall be mounted at the top of
each resurfacing lip sign shown on Figure H of the Manual.
(4)
A pair of "Work Area Ahead" signs with two high intensity flashing
warning lights mounted at the top of each sign shall be placed 500
before the signs shown on Figure H of the Manual.
Before beginning any repaving work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
his proposed method of assuring safe operation of any uncompleted section of
roadway and upon approval by the Engineer shall procure and have available at
all times sufficient materials and/or devices to protect the uncompleted length of
roadway. Approval by the Engineer shall in no way relieve the Contractor of full
responsibility for the adequacy of the proposed measures.
Traffic may not be shifted onto newly overlaid surfaces until such surfaces have
P300.236
been completely compacted and cooled to 140 degrees F and new traffic stripes
are in place and sufficiently dried so as not to track up when driven over. The
Contractor shall coordinate his paving operations so that the lane closings are
removed by the hours stipulated in the Manual.
801.04
MEASUREMENT
Furnishing Traffic Control Devices for maintenance and protection of traffic will be
measured on a lump sum basis. Furnishing construction signs of various sizes required,
complete with messages on the specified supports; overlay panels; traffic protection signs
and aluminum sign supports; traffic control vehicles; flashing warning lights; batteries;
cones with bases; stabilizers; flashing arrow boards; furnishing traffic control devices for
installation of roadway, lane and shoulder closings at the locations shown on the Plans or
as directed by the Engineer; replacing defective devices as directed, replacing lost, stolen,
destroyed or unacceptable devices; and all equipment and material necessary therefore
and incidental thereto, unless otherwise noted will not be measured separately for
payment. Shimming, leveling, and/or construction of bituminous pavement strips
necessary for the proper installation and maintenance of the traffic control devices will
not be measured separately for payment.
Furnishing Precast Concrete Construction Barrier will be measured by the linear foot
along the front vertical face of the barrier, including tangent and taper runs, as it is used
on the project, and the quantity will be limited to the maximum linear footage that is
installed simultaneously on the project. Provisions for joint interlocking devices;
reflectors; shimming and leveling; blockouts; grouting joints; anchorages into pavement;
restoring roadway surfaces per the details following barrier removal; lifting devices;
flashing lights; the labor, materials and equipment for transportation and delivery to the
project site; furnishing test results or service history for approval by the Engineer, and
any incidentals required in supplying the required quantity of precast concrete
construction barrier to the Project will not be measured separately for payment.
Placing and Removing Precast Concrete Construction Barrier will be measured by the
linear foot along the front vertical face of the barrier, including tangent and taper runs, as
it is installed in its properly assembled final alignment and subsequently removed. The
barrier shall not be measured twice to account for subsequent removal. Labor for loading
and unloading of units; trucks; all trailers; all heavy machinery and other equipment
required to place and remove the barrier as prescribed will not be measured separately
for payment. Relocating precast concrete construction barrier as a result of accidents will
be paid under the established pay item in the Contract or on a cost-plus basis as specified
in Subsection 108.04 or on such other basis as agreed upon by the Contractor and the
Engineer. Relocating precast concrete construction barrier to gain access to a work area
will not be measured separately for payment.
Resetting Precast Concrete Construction Barrier will be measured by the linear foot
along front vertical face of the barrier, including tangent and taper runs, actually shifted
when an existing barrier alignment is to be modified as shown on the Staging Plans, or as
directed by the Engineer or for staged construction. Resetting Precast Concrete
Construction Barrier will only apply to barrier that had been previously installed on the
Project. Resetting of Precast Construction Barrier for Contractors access or convenience
P300.236
will not be measured for payment. Resetting of barrier that requires the loading of units
onto a truck and unloading of same shall be measured under the item Placing and
Removing Precast Concrete Construction Barrier.
Resetting precast concrete
construction barrier as a result of accidents or to gain access to a work area will not be
Modular Glare Screen System along the top of concrete barrier as directed by the
Engineer will be measured for payment by the linear foot of system furnished, installed
and maintained along the tangent section of barrier in each location as prescribed.
Removal and subsequent installation of the modular guidance system and screening for
the purpose of placing, relocating or removing the precast concrete construction barrier
will not be measured separately for payment. Furnishing, installing and maintaining of
the screening will not be measured separately for payment.
Traffic Protection Patrol will be measured by the man-hours that the patroller is actively
engaged at the site for the purpose of making patrols, correcting any deficiencies to
maintenance and protection devices and reporting as required, including any waiting
periods between patrols. The measurement of man-hours shall begin at the time the
patroller (or TCC or other Contractor Representative) arrives on site as directed by the
Engineer for scheduled patrols, plus response time when addressing an incident, and
shall end at the time the Engineer has deemed that the patroller (TCC or other Contractor
representative) is no longer required on the site. Traffic Protection Patrol and the
maintenance of traffic protection devices that may be required while the Contractor is
actively engaged at the site(s) will not be measured separately for payment, but it will be
included under the associated traffic protection pay items under this contract. Additional
personnel required for correction of deficiencies will not be measured separately for
payment. Duties of any Contractor personnel engaged in the aforementioned will not be
Flaggers will not be measured separately for payment when used on Authority
roadways.
Furnishing Portable Variable Message Sign will be measured by the number of each
and will be limited to the maximum number provided in the Proposal which is installed
simultaneously, plus one spare sign which must be retained by the Contractor for use in
this Contract. Sign placement, removal and maintenance will not be measured
Furnishing Temporary Impact Attenuator will be measured by the number of complete
units (barrel configuration) and shall include the number of complete units installed
simultaneously, limited to the maximum number provided for in the Proposal that are
installed simultaneously.
Placing and Removing Temporary Impact Attenuator will be measured by the total
number of complete units placed in each location as prescribed. Removal, relocating or
resetting of temporary impact attenuators will not be measured separately for payment.
Repair Temporary Impact Attenuators will be measured by the total number of barrels
requiring replacement or repairs in each barrier system, either damaged or destroyed by
P300.236
the traveling public and as directed by the Engineer. Barrels damaged by Contractors
operations will not be measured for payment.
Furnishing Truck with Mounted Attenuator will be measured by the number of each as
they are used on the roadway and will be limited to the maximum number provided for
in the Proposal, which are used simultaneously.
Furnishing Truck with Mounted Attenuator for Engineers Use will be measured by
man-hours and shall include the time the Truck Mounted Attenuator is actively engaged
in service at the request of and for the use of the Engineer. The hours measured shall
exclude travel time prior to picking up the Engineer and travel time after dropping off
the Engineer at the requested locations. The cost of the truck, the operation and
maintenance thereof, and the rate of the driver will not be measured separately for
payment. The minimum number of hours measured for payment will be four (4).
Repair Truck Mounted Impact Attenuators will be measured by the total number of
units repaired or requiring replacement that are either damaged or destroyed by the
traveling public and as directed by the Engineer. Attenuators damaged by Contractors
operations will not be measured for payment.
Any work or expense, including traffic protection required for the closing of lanes or
shoulders in connection with the correction of defective work; for the convenience of the
Contractor which are not specified in the Contract or ordered by the Engineer; for
punch list work; or for the Final Inspection will not be measured for payment.
Cone trucks and traffic observers required for lane and shoulder closing operations or for
observers that may be engaged at the site to ride the cone truck will not be measured
The relocation and if necessary the replacement of existing mile markers during
construction and the covering and uncovering of overhead sign panels (or the installation
or removal of overlay panels) during lane closings will not be measured separately for
payment.
Fabrication, installation and mounting new or existing temporary guide signs will not be
Impact Attenuators (Quadguard) will be measured separately for payment in
Temporary Striping, Removal of Existing Striping and Markings, and Removal of Raised
Pavement Markers will be measured separately for payment in accordance with
Subsection 516.05.
Installation, Maintenance, and Removal of Lane Closing will be measured by the
number of each or percentage thereof (as described in Subsection 801.05), installed,
maintained and removed. See Subsection 801.05 for payment of Supplementary Lane
Closings. Lane or shoulder closings for Force Account, If and Where Directed by the
P300.236
Engineer, Change Order or Emergency work will be measured in accordance with
Subsection 108.04.
801.05
PAYMENT.
PAY ITEM
Furnishing Traffic Control Devices ....................................................................
Furnishing Precast Concrete Construction Barrier ..........................................
Placing and Removing Precast Concrete Construction Barrier......................
Resetting Precast Concrete Construction Barrier .............................................
Modular Glare Screen System ............................................................................
Traffic Protection Patrol .......................................................................................
Flaggers ..................................................................................................................
Furnishing Portable Variable Message Sign .....................................................
Furnishing Temporary Impact Attenuator .......................................................
Placing and Removing Temporary Impact Attenuator ...................................
Repair Temporary Impact Attenuators ............................................................
Furnishing Truck with Mounted Attenuator ...................................................
Furnishing Truck with Mounted Attenuator for Engineers Use ..................
Repair Truck Mounted Impact Attenuators .....................................................
Installation, Maintenance and Removal of Lane Closings ..............................
PAY UNIT
Lump Sum
Linear Foot
Linear Foot
Linear Foot
Linear Foot
Man Hours
Man Hours
Each
Each
Each
Barrel
Each
Man Hours
Each
Each
Except for the items listed in the Proposal, no separate payment will be made for any
costs incurred by the Contractor in complying with the requirements specified under the
various articles of this Section, unless otherwise specifically prescribed elsewhere in these
Specifications, including all tools, equipment, transportation, labor, services and
materials as may be required for maintaining traffic protection devices when the
Contractor is actively engaged at the site; providing lane and shoulder closings; placing,
removing and maintaining flashing arrow board trailer and variable message sign,
covering and uncovering overhead sign panels (or the installation or removal of overlay
panels) for lane closings and any other work or expense in connection with the
maintenance and protection of traffic, during various stages of construction and as may
be required by the Engineer.
No separate payment will be made for furnishing a schedule of operations for each stage
of construction and attending review meetings related to staging of construction; placing,
maintaining or removing variable message signs; furnishing, installing and maintaining
arrow boards; maintaining temporary impact attenuator; furnishing, installing and
maintaining temporary fencing at deck replacement areas; installing, maintaining and
removing signs, traffic cones or sign supports; removing temporary striping; traffic
observers required for lane and shoulder closing or opening operations; all tools,
equipment, transportation, labor, services and materials as may be necessary for
installation, maintenance and removal of lane and shoulder closings; cone trucks and
traffic observers required for lane and shoulder closing operations; relocation and if
necessary the replacement of existing mile markers; the covering and uncovering of
overhead sign panels (or the installation or removal of overlay panels); installing,
P300.236
maintaining and removing lane closings for the purposes of obtaining field
measurements; extending the lane closings for the purposes of performing If and Where
Directed by the Engineer work, Force Account work, Change Orders and/or
Emergency Work; placing, removing and maintaining flashing arrow board trailer;
furnishing and installing any spare parts for repairing or replacing damaged or missing
traffic protection devices; furnishing, installing, maintaining and removal of closings of
service area access locations and closing of U-turn access locations; and all else therefore
and other work associated with and incidental to maintaining and protecting traffic.
A partial payment of 25% of the unit price bid for the pay item Installation,
Maintenance, and Removal of Lane Closing will be made for the following closings:
Supplementary lane closings installed adjacent to a right or left lane closing.
Short duration lane closings required prior to or following the primary lane
closing (pre and post closings) for temporary striping, concrete barrier placement
and removal, and striping restoration.
Lane closings that are cancelled or delayed by the Authority after the Contractor
is mobilized.
Ramp closings including those required in conjunction with mainline closings
and pre and post ramp closings.
Extension of an existing lane closing, as directed by the Engineer to perform
additional work.
The length of extension is anticipated not to exceed one mile.
Shoulder Closings (those not requiring lane shifts).
Lane closings for lane shift installations will be paid for at 100% of the unit price bid for
the pay item Installation, Maintenance, and Removal of Lane Closing, regardless of
the number of lanes shifted.
Short duration lane closings required on mainline roadways for installation and removal
of catches on overhead structures will be paid for at 100% of the unit price bid for the pay
item Installation, Maintenance, and Removal of Lane Closing.
Supplementary right or left lane closings installed adjacent to right or left shoulder
closings will be paid for at 100% of the unit price bid for the pay item Installation,
Maintenance, and Removal of Lane Closing.
Payment for mainline shoulder and half-ramp closings will be made for only those
closings noted in the staging write-up and will be paid for under the pay item
Installation, Maintenance and Removal of Lane Closing. All other closings (i.e.
partial or short sections of ramp closings) will not be paid for separately.
No separate payment will be made for furnishing construction signs of various sizes
required, complete with messages on the specified supports; overlay panels; traffic
protection signs and aluminum sign supports; breakaway barricades; traffic control
vehicles; flashing warning lights; batteries; cones with bases; stabilizers; flashing arrow
boards; furnishing traffic control devices for installation of roadway, lane and shoulder
P300.236
closings at the locations shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer; replacing
defective devices as directed, replacing lost, stolen, destroyed or unacceptable devices;
and all equipment and material necessary therefore and incidental thereto, unless
otherwise noted. No separate payment will be made for shimming, leveling, and/or
construction of bituminous pavement strips necessary for the proper installation and
maintenance of the traffic control devices.
No separate payment will be made for furnishing provisions for joint interlocking
devices; reflectors; shimming and leveling; blockouts; grouting joints; anchorages into
pavement; restoring roadway surfaces per the details following barrier removal; lifting
devices; flashing lights; the labor, materials and equipment for transportation and
delivery to the project site; furnishing test results or service history for approval by the
Engineer, and any incidentals required in supplying the required quantity of precast
concrete construction barrier to the Project. Reflectors shall be replaced when lost or
damaged at no cost to the Authority.
No separate payment will be made for labor involved with loading and unloading of
units; trucks; all trailers; all heavy machinery; and other equipment required to place and
remove the barrier as prescribed; relocating temporary impact attenuators associated
with resetting precast concrete construction barrier; relocating precast concrete
construction barrier to gain access to a work area; and subsequent removal of the barrier.
No separate payment will be made for relocating or resetting of the precast concrete
construction barrier due to the result of an accident, or for contractors access or
convenience.
No separate payment will be made for furnishing, removing and reinstallation associated
with Contractors operations, maintenance, and final removal of the Modular Glare
Screen System (including screening) for the precast concrete construction barrier.
No separate payment will be made for correcting deficiencies to maintenance and
protection devices, reporting to NJTA Traffic Operations, waiting periods between
patrols, personnel required to perform Traffic Protection Patrol and correcting
deficiencies (regardless is TCC or other Contractor personnel), for Traffic Protection
Patrol duties when the Contractor is actively engaged at the site(s), or for Traffic
Protection Patrol duties for deficiencies of maintenance and protection devices due to
Contractors operations.
No separate payment will be made for repairing impact attenuator barrels damaged by
Contractor operations.
Payment for Furnishing Traffic Control Devices shall be made as follows:
50% at start of Contract
25% at midpoint
25% at completion of Contract.

No separate payment will be made for any work or expense, including traffic protection
required for the closing of lanes or shoulders in connection with the correction of
defective work; for the convenience of the Contractor which are not specified in the
P300.236
Contract or ordered by the Engineer; for punch list work; or for the Final Inspection,
but the costs thereof will be included in the unit costs for the various maintenance and
protection of traffic items in the Contract.
Payment for the various items related to Temporary Impact Attenuators (Quadguard)
shall be in accordance with Subsection 524.05.
Payment for Temporary Striping, Removal of Existing Striping and Markings, and
Removal of Raised Pavement Markers shall be in accordance with Subsection 516.06.
P300.236
SECTION 802 STANDBY WRECKER SERVICE

802.01
DESCRIPTION.
The provision of standby wrecker service consists of providing a wrecker and driver
(light duty and heavy duty), as hereinafter specified, to immediately remove from the
construction area any vehicles that become disabled during construction.
The provision of standby wrecker service consists of providing an authorized flatbed tow
truck (also called a Rollback or a Slide) that can be hydraulically inclined and moved to
ground level, allowing a patrons vehicle to be placed on it under its own power or
pulled by a winch, and licensed driver, as hereinafter specified, to immediately remove
from the construction area any vehicles, within its capacity, which become disabled in
the travel lanes when no shoulders are available.
802.02
MATERIALS.
No materials supplied by the Contractor are involved in this work.
802.03
Standby wrecker service is intended only to move disabled patron vehicles, including
light duty trucks, from the construction zone to an authorized location within the
Authority right-of-way. This service will be performed at no cost to the Authority
patron. Removal of the disabled patron vehicle from the respective Authority right-ofway will be paid under another contract in accordance with Authority policies and
regulations without need to re-hook the patrons vehicle.
Standby wrecker service may be performed only by New Jersey Turnpike Authority
authorized firms that operate on the Garden State Parkway from Milepost 162.2 to Milepost
163.9.
The Contractor shall coordinate with the Authority, through the Engineer, for the areas of
the project construction area to be served by the Authoritys qualified towing firms.
Standby wrecker service shall be provided by a heavy duty tow truck in good working
order. It shall be equipped with approved amber light bar and a Garden State Parkway
patron services radio or other approved means of communications with the Authoritys
Traffic Management and Technology Center in Woodbridge. The driver shall possess a
valid New Jersey drivers license, shall have a good command of the English Language
and be experienced in towing operations on the Garden State Parkway.
Light duty wrecker service shall be provided during Peak Hours as follows:
During the hours 6:00 a.m. to 9:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. to 7:00 p.m., Monday through
Friday, drop- off locations for disabled vehicles and patrons shall be at MP 164.1 median
U-turn. U-turns performed by wreckers shall be as indicated in the Subparagraph
801.03(A)(3), the Contract Documents, or as directed by the Engineer.
P300.236
Light duty wrecker service shall be available on an on-call basis.
Extended hours during certain periods or inclement weather may be required by the
Engineer after consultation with the Operations Department.
If the wrecker is called into service, the Authorized Towing Company shall dispatch
another Wrecker to the staging area to act as the designated Stand-by. The service
provider shall keep the Engineer informed as to the time of departure and the time the
replacement truck is on station.
The service provider shall provide acceptable verbal notice to the Engineer when
stationed within the Authority ROW at the start of a shift and at the end of a shift.
Additionally, the service provider shall provide weekly invoices which reflect the daily
name of the driver on duty, the truck identification number, time of arrival and time of
departure and total hours for which payment is sought.
802.04
MEASUREMENT.
Standby Wrecker Service, Light Duty will be measured by the hours that the wrecker is
on duty on Authority roadways.
802.05
PAYMENT.
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
Standby Wrecker Service, Light Duty ................................................... Hour
No additional payment will be made for the time needed to travel to and from the
designated AM and PM staging areas from the towing companys facilities.
No additional payment will be made to the Contractor for the management and payment
of the Wrecker Service provider, but the costs thereof will be included in the unit cost for
the pay items Standby Wrecker Service, Light Duty.
P300.236
SECTION 803 STATE, COUNTY AND LOCAL ROADWAYS

803.01
DESCRIPTION.
LOCAL TRAFFIC
Traffic control for work on State, County and Local owned roadways shall be in
accordance with the NJDOTs Standards. These Standards are available through the
Department at 1035 Parkway Avenue, Trenton, New Jersey 08625 or through their web
site at www.state.nj.us/transportation/eng/. Construction permits will not be required
from the NJDOT. A Memorandum of Agreement between the Authority and the NJDOT
has been executed for this contract. State owned roadways shall be kept open to traffic
unless otherwise approved or shown on the Plans. The Contractor will be responsible for
obtaining permits for work affecting roadways or right-of-way under the New Jersey
Department of Transportation or local municipality jurisdiction.
Construction over or adjacent to local roadways and sidewalks requires temporary lane,
shoulder and sidewalk closings. Closings are required for installation of temporary
shielding systems, bridge deck repairs and resurfacing, parapet replacement, and any
other work as specified at each structure in the Contract Plans.
803.03
The local roadways affected by construction under this Contract are under the
jurisdiction of the agencies noted in the Contract documents. The Contractor shall
prepare and submit a traffic control plan including methods, operations, and a layout
plan indicating signing and traffic control protection devices and obtain approval prior to
the closing of any lanes, shoulders or sidewalks under the jurisdiction of local agencies.
The Contractor shall comply with all regulations, including permissible hours for
closings and obtaining permits imposed by local agencies regarding the maintenance and
protection of traffic. The Contractor shall give proper written notice as required by the
local agencies prior to any closings.
Vehicular traffic on local roadways shall be maintained and protected in accordance with
current NJDOT and MUTCD Standards. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining the
most current NJDOT Standards from the NJDOT.
The Contractor shall secure permission from NJDOT, comply with all regulations, pay
any charges imposed and furnish, place, maintain and remove the required traffic control
devices, including the necessary labor and services when impacting State roadways.
The Contractor is responsible for furnishing, installing, maintaining, and removing all
traffic control devices necessary to properly close lanes, shoulders, roadways and
P300.236
sidewalks as shown on the Plans for each of the local streets or on roadways under the
jurisdiction of agencies other than the Authority.
The Contractor will not be permitted to occupy any section of roadway or sidewalk that
is open to traffic with equipment, materials or personnel.
The Contractor shall coordinate all local traffic control with the agencies having
jurisdiction and local police as applicable. Police Traffic Directors shall be off duty police
officers from within the applicable municipality. Police Traffic Directors shall be
provided where required by the municipality or at specific locations directed by the
Engineer during construction. The following townships and/or counties shall be
contacted in order to obtain the services of police traffic directors and the name, address
and telephone number of their local representative. Police Traffic Directors shall not be
considered to be Flaggers. Flaggers are as defined in the Manual.
Agency
Bergen County
Borough of Paramus
New Jersey Department of
Transportation
Contact Name
Telephone No.
Gary Ascolese
Peter Tenkate
Nicholas Dogias
(201-336- 6824
(201) 262-1140
(609) 530-3634
The Contractor shall comply with all regulations imposed by these agencies regarding
the maintenance and protection of traffic and shall pay for and obtain all necessary
permits as required by them or local agencies having relevant jurisdiction.
Flaggers shall be properly trained, instructed, and experienced in flagman duties, and
shall be uniformed as specified in Subsection 920.12. Any flaggers not satisfactory in the
opinion of the Engineer shall be immediately replaced by an approved flagman. All
flaggers shall be English speaking. Equipment and devices to be used by the flaggers are
to be furnished by the Contractor.
The flagger stations shall be adequately protected and illuminated for nighttime
operations. Refer to the MUTCD for further information and requirements of uniformed
flagmen or flaggers at flagman stations.
If deemed necessary, the agency having jurisdiction may furnish or assign inspectors or
other personnel who will be assigned to the Project during the time the Contractor or any
subcontractor is performing work under this Contract. The cost of these personnel shall
be paid directly by the Contractor to that agency having jurisdiction.
The Contractor shall submit evidence of payment of all charges made to each agency
having jurisdiction in the form of copies of receipted bills, to the Engineer prior to final
payment of the Contract by the Authority.
The traffic control plan shall provide for the treatment of conditions caused by or
encountered during the work on the Project. The traffic control plan shall be based on
the requirements provided in the MUTCD. The Contractor shall work in accordance
P300.236
with the MUTCD, and shall only deviate from the traffic control plan after receiving
written approval.
Prior to the start of construction, the Engineer shall be notified of the single supervisory
level individual, trained in the principles of safe traffic control, who will be assigned the
responsibility and authority for the implementation and maintenance of the traffic
control plan.
Local roadway traffic control is required at the following locations and all adjacent or
intersecting roadways:
(A)
COUNTY OF BERGEN.
The contractor is responsible for obtaining Road Opening/Traffic Permits from
the County of Bergen for construction activities on County roads. The
Contractor shall apply for and obtain these permits from the Bergen County
Engineering Department prior to commencing construction activities within the
right-of-way of these roads. Applications can be made at:
Bergen County Engineering Department
One Bergen County Plaza
Room 411
Hackensack, NJ 07601-7076
Attn: Gary Ascolese, P.E., Asst County Engineer
Phone: 201-336-6824
The contractor will be required to show documentation that the County of
Bergen is an additional insured as proof that the County is an indemnified party
under the contract.
If proposed by the Contractor for construction operations, temporary access
roads or driveways to Bergen County roads are required to receive a County
Road Access Permit prior to construction. Access Permit applications can be
made to the contact above.
closings and protection of traffic and shall provide forty-eight (48) hours written
notice prior to any closings.
(B)
BOROUGH OF PARAMUS.
The contractor is responsible for obtaining Permits from the Borough of Paramus
for traffic control activities on Borough roads. The Contractor shall apply for and
obtain these permits from the Borough Engineering Department prior to
commencing construction activities within the right-of-way of these roads.
Applications can be made at:
Borough of Paramus
1 Jockish Square
Paramus, NJ 07652
P300.236
Attn: Peter Tenate, P.E., Borough Engineer
Phone: 201-262-1140
The contractor will be required to show documentation that the Borough of
Paramus is an additional insured as proof that the Borough is an indemnified
party under the contract.
If proposed by the Contractor for construction operations, temporary access
roads or driveways to Borough roads are required to receive a Borough Road
Access Permit prior to construction. Access Permit applications can be made to
the contact above.
closings and protection of traffic and shall provide forty-eight (48) hours written
notice prior to any closings.
The Contractor shall contact the Paramus Police Department and arrange to have
police officers at the work area for each closing as required and approved by the
Engineer. A minimum of 48 hours advanced notice is required to request police
officers for MPT assistance. The Contractor shall coordinate the work for local
roads with:
LT. Pepe
Paramus Police Department
1 Carlo Drive
Paramus, NJ 07652
201-262-3400, Ext. 377
The Contractor shall coordinate all local traffic control with the county and local
police as applicable. Municipal police traffic directors shall be off duty police
officers. Police traffic directors shall be provided where designated on the plans
or at specific locations directed by the Engineer during construction.
The Contractor shall comply with all regulations imposed by these agencies
regarding the maintenance and protection of traffic and shall pay for and obtain
all necessary permits as required by them or local agencies having jurisdiction.
(C)
NEW JERSEY DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION.

Route 17 is under NJDOT jurisdiction and the traffic control on Route 17 must be
coordinated with NJDOT, including the installation and removal of traffic
control devices.
The Contractor is responsible to notify Traffic Operations North of any temporary
lane/shoulder closures 24 hours in advance with the Engineers approval. A
NJDOT approved Daily Lane and Shoulder Closure request form (TO-101) must be
completed and faxed or emailed to Traffic Operations North.
The contact information is:
P300.236
NJDOT
Traffic Operations North
200 Stierli Ct.P.O. Box 600
Mt Arlington , NJ 07856-1322
Phone: 973-770-5000
(1)
Traffic Impact Notices and Changes.

a.
Terms.
When the following terms are used, the intent and meaning shall be
as follows:
Impacts to normal traffic flow work that requires a portion of
the paved roadway being blocked or closed with safety devices or
vehicles, including, but not limited to, full or partial
lane closures, full
or
partial
ramp closures, shoulder
closures, moving operations such as traffic striping or sweeping,
lane shifts,
or
alternating
traffic.
This applies even when
detours are provided.
Temporary lane closures work described under impacts to normal
traffic flow which is routinely set up and removed on a daily basis.
Permanent lane closures work described under impacts to normal
traffic flow which remains in place continuously for 24 hours or
more.
b.
Advance Notices.
For the initial start of work that requires impacts to normal traffic
flow, the contractor shall notify the resident engineer in writing,
on the advance form to103 provided by the department, of
the proposed date. The notice shall be submitted at least twenty-eight
calendar
days, but
not
more than
sixty calendar
days, before the proposed date. Start of work that impacts normal
traffic flow will not be permitted prior to the date stated in
the notice. The contractor shall confirm, in writing to the resident
engineer, the proposed date seven (and/or fourteen) calendar
days before starting the establishment of the traffic control
measures for
the traffic
impact.
The contractor
shall
immediately notify the resident
engineer
if
the proposed
establishment cannot be completed on the proposed date.
For
a permanent
lane closure,
the contractor
shall
notify the resident engineer in writing, on advance form to103, of
the proposed date a new traffic pattern will be established.
The notice shall be submitted at least twenty-eight calendar
days, but not more than sixty calendar days, in advance of
the proposed date. Start of a new traffic pattern will not
P300.236
be permitted prior to the date stated in the notice. The Contractor
shall confirm, in writing to the Engineer, the proposed date of
the new traffic pattern seven (and/or fourteen) days before starting
traffic control measures for the establishment of the new pattern.
The contractor shall immediately notify the resident engineer if
the proposed establishment cannot be completed on the proposed
date.
Starting the establishment of a new permanent traffic pattern shall
begin no earlier than 11:00 pm Friday and shall be completed and
ready for operations by 6:00 pm the following Sunday. The
establishment shall be completed in accordance with the lane
closure hours specified in the contract.
Advance notices sent prior to the preconstruction meeting shall be
addressed to the contact person as specified in subsection 101.04 of
the special provisions.
c.
Progress Notices.
All impacts to normal traffic flow scheduled for the seven day
period starting on the following Monday shall be submitted to the
resident engineer by 9:00 am of each Friday on weekly form TO101
provided by the department.
Each day of temporary lane closures shall be submitted to
the resident engineer by 9:00 am the day in advance of the start of
those operations on daily form TO-102 provided by the department.
Temporary lane closures for weekends shall be submitted to
the resident engineer by 9:00 am on the immediately preceding
Friday on the daily form TO-102 provided by the department.
d. Changes to the Scheduled Closures.

Request for a change to the traffic control requirements in
the contract documents shall be submitted in writing to the resident
engineer as follows:
Changes to the scheduled hours for temporary lane closures shall
be submitted to the resident engineer at least eight calendar days in
advance of when the change is proposed to start.
Other proposed changes to temporary lane closures and all
changes to permanent lane closures shall be submitted to
the resident engineer at least forty calendar days in advance of
when the change is proposed to start.
(2)
Lane Closings.
Allowable lane closings shall be as detailed on the plans.
P300.236
(3)
Holiday Restrictions.
In addition, lane closures will not be permitted on the following
holidays:
Easter Sunday
Memorial Day
Independence Day
Labor Day
Election Day
Thanksgiving Day
Christmas Day
New Years Day
(including 6:00AM Saturday until Noon

Monday)
(See Note Below)
(See Note Below)
(See Note Below)
(6:00 AM until 8:00 PM the day of)
(See Note Below)
(See Note Below)
(See Note Below)
Note:
If holiday falls on
No lane closure permitted
Sunday or Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday or Saturday
6:00 AM Friday until Noon Tuesday

6:00 AM Friday until Noon Wednesday
6:00 AM Tuesday until Noon Thursday
6:00 AM Wednesday until Noon Monday
6:00 AM Thursday until Noon Monday
The lane occupancy charges for Route 17 shall be in accordance with 107.11.
803.04
MEASUREMENT.
Maintenance and Protection of Traffic on Location No. < > (Local Road Name) will
be measured on a Lump Sum basis. Flaggers will not be measured separately for
payment.
Traffic Protection Patrol or Traffic Control Coordinator efforts of local roadways will not
be measured separately for payment.
Police Traffic Directors (No Bid) provides a lump sum value for reimbursement to the
Contractor for costs associated with local police providing maintenance and protection of
traffic on local roads. The only reimbursable costs permitted will be those charges
approved by the Engineer and by the impacted municipality or county for cost related to
maintenance and protection of local road traffic affected by this Contract.
803.05
PAYMENT.
P300.236
PAY ITEM
PAY UNIT
Maintenance and Protection of Traffic on Location No. __
(Description) ..............................................................................................Lump Sum
Police Traffic Directors (No Bid) .............................................................Lump Sum
No separate payment will be made for preparation of maintenance and protection of traffic plans;
obtaining local agency approval and permits; Contractors traffic protection patrol; furnishing,
placing, maintaining or removing variable message signs; furnishing, installing, maintaining and
removing temporary impact attenuators required for the detour; furnishing, installing and
maintaining construction fencing; furnishing, placing, maintaining and removing signs, sign
support posts, and connecting hardware; placing, maintaining and removing traffic cones, barrels
or concrete barrier; all tools, equipment, transportation, training, labor, services and materials as
may be necessary for maintenance and protection of local roadway traffic or as may be required
by the Engineer or outside agencies; and all else necessary therefore and other work associated
with and incidental to, but the costs thereof will be included in the unit prices bid for the lump
sum items specified in this Section.
No separate payment will be made for furnishing, placing, removing, and repairing temporary
impact attenuators; furnishing concrete, anchors, concrete foundations, epoxy coated
reinforcement and additional hardware for these attenuators; restoration of pavement after
removal of these attenuators; and final removal or legal disposal of these attenuators that are
required for maintenance and protection of traffic on State, municipal, or local roadways, but the
costs thereof will be included in the lump sum prices bid for the pay items Maintenance and
Protection of Traffic on Location No. ____.
Payment for Police Traffic Directors will be made on a lump sum basis based on the total costs
incurred by the Contractor (this amount may be higher or lower than that stipulated in the
Proposal). The Contractor shall provide detailed billings prepared by the local municipalities
identifying the actual maintenance and protection of traffic costs incurred. Final payment to the
Contractor will not be made until the Authority obtains a release stating that all local
municipality costs have been reimbursed from each municipality affected by the Contract.
P300.236
DIVISION 900 - MATERIALS

SECTION 902 - AGGREGATES
902.04
FINE AGGREGATE
Add the following:
Fine aggregate for concrete decks shall contain a maximum of 0.06 percent chloride
content.
902.08
SOIL AGGREGATE
Soil aggregate shall be natural or prepared mixtures consisting predominately of hard
durable particles or fragments of stone, slag, gravel, or sand, and containing some siltclay or stone dust or remediated ID-27 petroleum contaminated soil aggregate (RPCSA)
produced by a New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection (NJDEP) approved
Class B recycling center operating pursuant to NJAC 7:26A.
A list of recycling centers, which have been approved as a source of RPCSA for NJDOT
projects is available from the Departments Bureau of Materials.
Soil aggregate obtained from subaqueous sources and placed by methods other than
hydraulically shall first be placed in a stockpile and drained, and shall not be placed in its
final location until the Engineer has determined that the moisture content is not
excessive.
Soil aggregate shall conform to the following:
(A)
Definitions of Constituent Materials.

Stone shall be crushed or naturally angular particles of rock, a natural solid
mineral matter occurring in large masses or fragments, which shall pass a 2-inch
sieve and be retained on a No. 8 sieve. The stone shall conform to Subsection
902.02.
Blast furnace slag shall be the air-cooled residue resulting from the production of
pig iron and shall consist of tough, durable, angular fragments uniform in
density, absorption, quality, and shall be free from flux stone, dirt, or other
objectionable material. The slag shall conform to Subsections 902.01 and 902.02,
and to the following quality requirements:
Weight per cubic foot (loose measure), pound .......................... 60 minimum
Percentage of wear (Los Angeles Test) ....................................... 50 maximum
Sulfur, percentage by weight ....................................................... 2 maximum
Gravel shall be rounded particles of rock that shall pass a 4-inch sieve and be
retained on No. 8 sieve.
P300.236
Sand shall be granular material resulting from weathering processes, grinding or

crushing of rock and shall pass a No. 8 sieve and be retained on the No. 200
sieve.
Stone dust shall be fine soil or mineral particles, or both, which shall pass the No.
200 sieve. Silt-clay shall be fine soil particles that shall pass the No. 200 sieve.
(B)
Composition of Soil Aggregate.

The composite mixture of any type of soil aggregate specified herein shall be free
from elements or chemicals which, in the presence of water, would produce
detrimental effects to pavements, structures, or utility lines, and be free from
organic matter, wood, garbage, metal, debris, or lumps of clay.
Designations I-1, I-2, I-3, I-4, I-9, I-10, I-11, I-12, and I-13 shall consist of bank-run
sand and gravel, commercial sand and gravel combined, blast furnace slag, or
stone, except blast furnace slag will not be permitted when in contact with
concrete. Designation I-5 shall be hard, durable gravel or stone mixed with sand,
stone dust, or silt-clay so that it can be compacted into a hard, dense mass. The
composite mixture shall contain, by weight, a total of not more than 25 percent of
shale, slate, schist, or soft and decomposed aggregate as determined by lithologic
analysis.
Designation I-5 may be produced from recycled concrete aggregate conforming
to the composition and quality requirements specified for recycled concrete
aggregate in Subsection 902.07, except that the crushed surface requirement shall
not apply, and to the gradation requirements of Subsection 902.09, Table 902-1.
When designation I-5 is produced from recycled concrete aggregate, the
Contractor shall report to the solid waste management district of origin,
according to NJAC 7:26A, the tonnage of concrete aggregate being recycled. A
copy of the reported information shall be provided to the Resident Engineer.
Designations I-6, I-7, and I-8 shall consist of clean, free-draining sand, gravel or
stone.
Designations I-1, I-2, I-3, I-4, I-5, I-9, and I-10 shall comply with the gradation
requirements specified in Subsection 902.09, Table 902-1 after being tested for
materials which break down as determined according to Section 990, A-7.
C.
Gradation.
Soil aggregate shall be graded as shown in Subsection 902.09, Table 902-1 for the
various designations. The gradation requirements shall apply to the material
after it has been placed and compacted on the Project. Where compaction is not
prescribed, the requirements for any given type shall apply to the material at the
time it is placed.
D.
Combining and Mixing.

If bank-run or other materials conforming to the requirements specified
hereinabove are not available, materials that conform thereto may be produced
P300.236
by combining and mixing, and by washing if necessary. Materials may be
combined and mixed on the grade only with approval. The blending on the
grade shall be performed by a traveling high-speed rotor mixer capable of
cutting and thoroughly mixing to a minimum depth of 6 inches.
902.09
TABLE
Table 902-1 Standard Soil Aggregate Gradations
New Jersey Interagency Engineering Committee
Gradation Designations, percentage by weight passing square mesh sieves
Sieve
Size
I-1
4"
100
2"
70100
I-2
I-3
100
100
50-95
65100
60100
100
I-7
I-8
I-9
I-10
I-11
I-12
I-13
100
100
100
100
100
80100
80100
80100
60100
60100
60100
40-75
30100
95100
40100
40100
40100
100
70100
40100
30-60
I-6
100
60100
"
No. 4
I-5
100
1"
"
I-4
25100
80100
80100
30-80
100
No. 8
20100
45100
35100
No.
16
15-85
30-90
25-90
45-70
20-70
20-70
0-20
5-50
5-25
5-35
5-40
0-3
0-8
0-20
0-30
0-8
0-20
No.
50
5-25
5-30
5-35
8-45
10-35
No.
100
No.
200
0-7
0-7
0-8
5-10
5-12
0-2
70100
0-5
30100
0-75
0-75
0-9
0-5
0-12
P300.236
SECTION 903 - HOT MIX ASPHALT (HMA)

903.01
COMPOSITION OF MIXTURES
Replace the first four paragraphs in their entirety with the following:
The composition of the mixture for HMA surface courses shall be coarse aggregate, fine
aggregate, and asphalt binder and may also include mineral filler and up to 10 percent
RAP. RAP will not be permitted in surface course mixes used for Bridge Deck
Resurfacing. The composition of the mixture for base or intermediate courses shall be
coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, and asphalt binder and may also include mineral filler
and up to maximum of 30 percent by weight of RAP as follows:
Percent
Recycled Materials
Reclaimed Asphalt
Pavement (RAP)
Source
0 to 10
11 to 30
Maximum Recycled
Percent
Open System
Open System
10
30
The grade of asphalt binder shall be determined by the Contractor, and submitted for
approval by the Authority, for those projects that include the use of 11 to 30 percent of
RAP.
Reclaimed asphalt pavement, RAP, may be used in base and leveling course mixes. The
RAP shall be the product resulting from the cold milling or crushing of an existing hot
mix asphalt pavement and shall be so processed so that 100 percent will pass the
maximum aggregate size for the mixture being produced. RAP shall not exceed 30
percent of mass (weight) of the total mixture.
903.02
GRADING REQUIREMENTS
Delete this subsection in its entirety.
903.03
JOB MIX FORMULA

903.04
SAMPLING AND TESTING

903.05
TABLES
SECTION 904 - BITUMINOUS MATERIAL
P300.236
904.02
TACK COAT
Tack coat for Work Areas identified on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer shall be
as specified in 904.01.
904.10
INVERTED EMULSIFIED ASPHALTS

Inverted emulsified asphalt of the medium curing (IEMC) type shall be prepared using a
suitable grade of medium curing cut-back asphalt conforming to Subsection 904.04, with
the necessary water and emulsifier required. The inverted asphalt emulsion shall not be
mixable with water in any proportion, shall remain homogeneous after 15 hours at 0 F,
and shall conform to the following:
Kinematic viscosity at 140 F (60 C), centistokes

Settlement, 7 days, % maximum
Distillation, by weight
Asphalt content, % minimum
Water, %
Solvent (by difference), % minimum
Residue from distillation, Absolute viscosity at 140
F (60 C), poises
Ductility at 77 F (25 C), cm min
Solubility in trichloroethylene by weight, %
minimum
IEMC-250
250-500
1
IEMC-800
800-1200
1
65
3-12
15
67
3-12
12
300-1200
30-120
1 00
1 00
98
98
Inverted emulsified asphalts shall contain not more than eight percent VOS, by volume,
and shall be used for mixed-in-place construction. Other limitation requirements and the
use and storage of inverted emulsified asphalts shall conform to Subsection 904.04.
SECTION 905 - CONCRETE, MORTAR AND GROUT

905.01
PORTLAND CEMENT
Add the following:
Subsections 905.21, 905.22 and 905.23 are applicable to Latex Modified Concrete (LMC)
and High Performance Concrete (HPC) with the following noted modifications.
905.05
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

(B). Mix Design.
If a low-alkali cement is used to control alkali-silica reactivity, use cement with
P300.236
equivalent alkali of less than 0.60 percent.
905.15
NON-SHRINK, HIGH EARLY STRENGTH MORTAR.

Pavemend TR or SLQ as manufactured by CERATECH, Inc., 1500 North Beauregard
Street, Suite 320, Alexandria, Virginia 22311, telephone 800-581-8397 shall be used
for all bare deck spall repair areas where called for on the Plans or as required by
the Engineer for various repair items where durations of staged construction
prohibit the use of Portland concrete cement repair materials. Pavemend TR may be
extended using 3/8 maximum aggregate, up to 75% by weight (35 lbs. Aggregate
per 47 lb./5 gallon bucket).
905.21
QUALITY ACCEPTANCE LIMITS FOR PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAY

ADJUSTMENTS
The following modifications are applicable to HPC and LMC:
(A)
QUALITY ACCEPTANCE LIMITS.

Delete subsection (3) in its entirety and replace with the following:
(3)
Permeability.
(a)
AASHTO T277 The Upper Quality Limit (UQL) shall be 2,000
Coulomb resistivity for LMC overlays and 1,100 Coulomb for
HPC.
(b)
Chloride
permeability
High
Charge
passed
(coulombs)
> 4000
Moderate
2000-4000
Low
1000-2000
Very Low
100-1000
Negligible
< 100
AASHTO T259/T260 The chloride permeability shall be

correlated in accordance with the following table:
Type of Concrete
High water-cement ratio,
conventional (> 0.6) PCC*
Moderate water-cement ratio,
conventional (0.4 to 0.5) PCC*
Low water-cement ratio,
conventional (< 0.4) PCC*
including LMC
Latex-modified concrete
Internally sealed concrete
Polymer impregnated concrete
Polymer concrete
Total integral
chloride to 1.6 in.
depth after 90 day
ponding test
> 1.3
0.8 to 1.3
0.55 to 0.8
0.35 to 0.55
< 0.35
* Portland cement concrete.
905.22
QUALITY ACCEPTANCE TESTING, SAMPLING, AND INSPECTION FOR

PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAY ADJUSTMENT
P300.236
Add the following note to the Table I Notes:
(6) The number of Sublots shown in the table, including the requirements in Notes (1)
thru (4), may be modified by the Engineer.
(A)
QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING STANDARDS AND FREQUENCY OF TESTING.

(3)
Coulomb Test.
The following modifications are applicable to HPC and LMC:
For each Sublot, the Engineer will cast four (4) 4 x 8 cylinder
specimens for permeability testing in accordance with AASHTO T277
and two (2) 6 x 6 x 3 thick samples for permeability testing in
accordance with AASHTO T259/T260. The 4 x 8 cylinders shall be
tested at 28 day (two cylinders) for LMC only and at 56 day (two
cylinders) intervals for LMC and HPC in accordance with AASHTO
T277. The 6 x 6 x 3 thick samples for 90 day ponding testing will be
tested in accordance with AASHTO T259/T260. The average of the two
(2) test specimen result values for each Sublot will be considered the
Sublot Coulomb test value.
(B)
REFERENCES.
(1)
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO) Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.
Add the following:
T 259
905.23
Resistance of Concrete to Chloride Ion Penetration.
ADJUSTMENTS TO CONTRACT COMPENSATION.

(B)
PERFORMANCE CRITERIA PARAMETERS.

The following modification applies to HPC only:
Performance Parameters
Compressive Strength
Permeability
Air Content
Minimum PWL
90
90
70
The following modification applies to LMC only:

Performance Parameters
Compressive Strength
Permeability
Bond Strength
Water to Cement Ratio
Air Content
Minimum PWL
90
90
80
80
70
Change the title of Section 906 to the following:
P300.236
SECTION 906 - CONCRETE ADMIXTURES, CURING MATERIALS, AND FILM

EVAPORATORS
906.07
CURING MATERIALS
Add the following at the end of the subsection:

(F) EVAPORATION RETARDERS.
Evaporation retarders shall be BRICKFORM Evaporation Retarder, as manufactured
by Rafco Products BRICKFORM, Rancho Cucamonga, CA (800) 483-9628 or (909)
484-3399 or CONFILM Evaporation Retarder, as manufactured by BASF
Construction Chemicals, LLC, 23700 Chagrin Boulevard, Cleveland, Ohio (800) 6289990 or an approved equal.
SECTION 907 JOINTS

907.07
STRIP SEAL EXPANSION JOINTS.

(A) METALS.
Delete the fourth paragraph and replace it with the following:
Fabricating and welding shall meet the requirements of Subsection 403.06. Groove welds
shall be partial penetration butt welds extending the full height of the extrusions and
across the full width of the flats of the extrusions. Welds shall be 3/8 deep and made
from the back side of the extrusion.
SECTION 908 - REINFORCEMENT STEEL

908.01
REINFORCEMENT STEEL FOR STRUCTURES

(A) Deformed Bars
Low-alloy, low-carbon steel conforming to the requirements of ASTM Designation
A706, Grade 60, may be substituted in situations where welding of cross bars is
employed to expedite the assembly of reinforcement cages. All welding shall
conform to the most current edition of the AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code for
Reinforcing Steel. Tack welding shall only be performed under continuous and
competent control by an approved and qualified fabrication shop. Field welding of
the reinforcement cage assembly shall not be permitted. Additionally, welding of
intersecting bars shall not be permitted in deck slabs.
P300.236
Certification, sampling and testing of the tack welded cage assembly shall be
submitted in accordance with Subsection 105.04.
The following Paragraphs (K) and (L) are added:
(K)
SUPPORT BARS FOR REINFORCEMENT BARS.

Support bars for reinforcement bars on stringers a n d g ird ers shall conform
to the requirements of ASTM A36 and shall not be epoxy coated.
(L)
REINFORCEMENT BAR COUPLERS.

Reinforcement bar couplers used in the construction of the structure shall be
epoxy coated where the spliced reinforcement bars are epoxy coated and shall be
uncoated where the spliced reinforcement bars are uncoated. Reinforcement bar
couplers shall be the threaded bar LENTON Standard "A2" type couplers as
manufactured by ERICO Concrete Construction Products, 34600 Solon Road,
Solon, Ohio 44139-2695, (800) 248-2677 or Dayton D-110 US/MC-SAE Coupler
Splice System as manufactured by Dayton Superior, 1125 Byers Road,
Miamisburg, Ohio 45342, (800) 745-3700.
The reinforcement bar couplers shall be capable of developing 125% of the yield
strength of the ASTM A615 Grade 60 reinforcement and ASTM A2304 Grade 75
stainless steel reinforcement. The coupler shall be machined to have taper
threads at both ends, creating a mechanical butt splice of two sections of
reinforcement steel.
Reinforcement bar couplers used for splicing epoxy coated reinforcement
shall be epoxy coated and capable of developing 125% of the yield strength of
the ASTM A615, Grade 60 reinforcement bars. The reinforcement bar couplers
shall be the Lenton Quick Wedge System as manufactured by Erico Concrete
Construction Products, 34600 Solon Road, Solon, Ohio 44139-2695, (800) 2482677 or the Bar-Grip System manufactured by Barsplice Products Inc., 4900
Webster St., Dayton, Ohio 45414, (937) 275-8700.
SECTION 909 - STRUCTURAL STEEL AND OTHER FERROUS MATERIALS

909.01
STRUCTURAL STEEL
(D)
Stainless Steel
Delete this Paragraph (D) in its entirety.
909.02
FASTENERS
Delete Subsection 909.02(F) and replace it with the following:

(F)
Adhesive and Cast-in-Place Anchors
P300.236
Unless otherwise specified, Adhesive and Cast-in-Place Anchors shall be fully galvanized
high strength steel anchor bolts meeting the requirements of ASTM F1554, Grade 105.
Adhesive Anchors shall be set in drilled holes with an approved epoxy or polyester resin
bonding agent. Where removable anchors are specified, the anchor bolt shall be Teflon
coated prior to installation. Certified manufacturers affidavit shall be furnished attesting
to the pullout strength by proof loading to 90% of the yield of materials, of the various
sizes and types of anchor bolts to be used.
SECTION 912 SIGN MATERIALS

912.01
ALUMINUM SHEET SIGN PANELS AND INCIDENTAL HARDWARE.

(A)
FLAT SHEET SIGN FACE PANELS, BACKUP PLATES, CLIPS, SHIM AND SPACERS.
Aluminum thickness shall be 0.080 for flat panel signs measuring less than 8
square feet in area.
Aluminum thickness shall be 0.100 to 0.125 for flat panel signs measuring 8
square feet or greater in area.
912.02
SIGN COPY AND BACKGROUND.

(A)
CLASSIFICATION AND CONFORMANCE

The second and third paragraphs are deleted and the following is added:
Reflective sheeting for sign panels within NJTA jurisdiction or, as noted on the
plans shall be full cube retroreflective sheeting conforming to the requirements
of ASTM D4956 Type XI. The sheeting shall be one of the following products:
Avery Denison OmniCube T-11000 Series
3M Diamond Grade DG 3 Reflective sheeting, Series 4000
Or equal
No substitutions will be permitted.
Retroreflective sheeting used within State, County or Municipal jurisdiction shall
be Type III sheeting for regulatory signs, warning signs and guide signs
mounted on U-Posts conforming to the requirements of ASTM D4956.
Retroreflective sheeting used within State, County or Municipal jurisdiction shall
be Type VIII or IX sheeting for Guide Signs Mounted on Overhead Sign
Structures, Breakaway Sign Supports, or Non-breakaway Sign Supports
conforming to the requirements of ASTM D4956.
Allowable products shall be those listed on the NJDOT Qualified Products List
(QPL) found at the following website:
P300.236
http://www.state.nj.us/transportation/eng/materials/qualified
SECTION 913 - PAINTS AND COATINGS

913.01
PAINT SYSTEM A
Replace the Paint Systems table in its entirety with the following:
Manufacturer
Carboline
West Caldwell, NJ
201-415-4542 or 800-848-4645
International Paint, Inc.
Union, NJ
973-220-5628 or 908-451-0253
PPG Protective & Marine Coatings
Pittsburgh, PA
800-661-4774
Sherwin-Williams Co.
Zelienople, PA
724-453-1042
Coat
Spot Primer:
Intermediate Coat:
Finish Coat:
Spot Primer:
Intermediate Coat:
Finish Coat:
Spot Primer:
Intermediate Coat:
Finish Coat:
Spot Primer:
Intermediate Coat:
Finish Coat:
Product
Carboguard 60/690
Carboguard 60
Carbothane 133LH
Interseal 670HS
Interseal 670HS
Interthane 870 UHS
Amerlock 2 or 400
Amerlock 2 or 400
Amercoat 450H
Epoxy Mastic Aluminum
II, B62 Series
Epoxy Mastic Aluminum
II, B62 Series
Acrolon 218 HS
Replace Paragraph 913.01(B) with the following:

(B) PAINT COLOR.
The prime coat and intermediate coat shall be different colors. The finish cost shall
match the color of the existing paint system, unless otherwise specified, and shall be
subject to approval by the Engineer. The finish coats shall be as follows:
New Jersey Turnpike
Green: Federal Standard 595B, Color Chip No. 14159.
Brown: Federal Standard 595B, Color Chip No. 20062.
Garden State Parkway
Green (Exterior Surfaces/Fascias): Federal Standard 595B, Color Chip No. 14090.
Green (Interior Surfaces): Federal Standard 595B, Color Chip No. 14672.
913.02
COATING SYSTEM B
Replace the Paint Systems table in its entirety with the following.
Manufacturer
Carboline
West Caldwell, NJ
201-415-4542 or 800-848-4645
Coat
Primer:
Intermediate Coat:
Finish Coat:
Primer:
Product
Carbozinc 859
Carboguard 825
Carbothane 133LH
Interzinc 52
P300.236
Manufacturer
Union, NJ
973-220-5628 or 908-451-0253
Coat
Intermediate Coat:
Finish Coat:
Product
Intergard 475 HS
Interthane 870 UHS

Pittsburgh, PA
800-661-4774
Primer:
Intermediate Coat:
Finish Coat:
Primer:
Amercoat 68HS
Amercoat 385
Amercoat 450H
Zinc Clad III HS Zinc-Rich
Primer
Macropoxy 646 FC Epoxy
Acrolon 218 HS
Zelienople, PA
724-453-1042
Intermediate Coat:
Finish Coat:
Replace Paragraph 913.02(B) with the following:

(B) PAINT COLOR.
913.03
COATING SYSTEM C
Replace the Paint Systems table in its entirety with the following:
Manufacturer
Carboline
West Caldwell, NJ
201-415-4542 or 800-848-4645
Union, NJ
973-220-5628 or 908-451-0253
Pittsburgh, PA
800-661-4774
Zelienople, PA
724-453-1042
Coat
Primer:
Intermediate Coat:
Finish Coat:
Primer:
Intermediate Coat:
Finish Coat:
Primer:
Intermediate Coat:
Finish Coat:
Primer:
Intermediate Coat:
Finish Coat:
Product
Carbozinc 11HS
Carboguard 893 or 888
Carbothane 133LH
Interzinc 22 HS
Intergard 475 HS
Interthane 870 UHS
Dimetcote 9H
Amercoat 385
Amercoat 450H
Zinc Clad II Plus
Macropoxy 646 FC Epoxy
Acrolon 218 HS
(B) PAINT COLOR.

Replace this Paragraph (B) in its entirety with the following:
New Jersey Turnpike
P300.236
Green: Federal Standard 595B, Color Chip No. 14159.
913.04
WATER TOWER PAINT
Delete this Subsection in its entirety.
913.05
TRAFFIC PAINT AND MARKING

Paragraph 913.05(B) is deleted in its entirety.
(C)
Epoxy Resin
Replace the reference of 516.03(I) to 516.03 (J) in the second paragraph.

Add subparagraph number (1) before the Section titled Physical Properties of Mixed
Compound
Renumber subparagraph (6) of the section titled Epoxy Composition to number (2)
Renumber subparagraph (7) of the section titled Sampling and Certified

Analysis to number (3)
Renumber subparagraph (8) of the section titled Containers and Shipments to
number (4)
(E)
Glass Beads
Revise the subsection reference of 990.06 to 990.10 in the second sentence of the
first paragraph.
The following Paragraph is added:

(H)
Preformed Contrast Striping Tape
Preformed contrast tape to be placed on the bridge deck surface shall be Stamark High
Performance All Weather Contrast Marking Tape Series 380AW-5 as manufactured by
3M, 3M Center, Building 235-3A-09 , St. Paul, MN, 55144-1000, (800) 553-1380,
www.3M.com/tss. 3M Stamark Surface Preparation Adhesive P-50 shall be used with the
overlay tape installation.
P300.236
SECTION 914 - FENCE

914.01
CHAIN LINK FENCE

(C). Line and End/Corner Fence Post Sections
Delete this paragraph in its entirety, and replace it with the following:
Line and End /Corner Fence Posts shall be galvanized steel shapes conforming to the
requirements of ASTM F1043. Line posts shall be either Group IC with a minimum yield
strength of 50,000 psi, 2 inch diameter standard Round Steel Pipe posts, 3.12 lb/ft ;
or Group II with a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi, 1 inch standard C-shaped
posts, 2.4 lb/ft; or Group III with a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi; or 2 inch
standard H- shaped posts, 3.26 lb/ft. End/Corner posts shall be Group IA with a
minimum yield strength of 83,000 psi, 2 inch diameter standard Round Steel Pipe
posts, 5.80 lb/ft.
(D). Brace Rail Sections
Brace Rail Sections shall be galvanized (1.8 oz./ft 2 zinc coating, per ASTM F1083) steel
pipe conforming to the requirements of ASTM F1043, Group 1A. Brace rail posts shall be
1 inch outside diameter round pipe, 2.27 lbs/ft.
(I). Drive Anchors
Drive Anchors for H-beam line posts shall be fabricated from steel bars and pressed steel,
of the type and size shown on the Plans, and shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance
with the requirements of ASTM A123.
SECTION 915 - GUARD RAIL

Delete this Section in its entirety and replace it with the following:
SECTION 915 - BEAM GUIDE RAIL

915.01
RAIL ELEMENT
Rail elements shall be 12 gauge steel.
For galvanized beam guide rail, fabricate the rail element, including rounded end
sections and buffer end sections, according to AASHTO M 180, Class A, Type I in Table
2. Ensure that the weight of the zinc coating conforms to AASHTO M 180, Type I in Table
1.
For weathering steel beam guide rail, fabricate the rail element, including rounded end
sections and buffer end sections, shall be high strength, low-alloy weathering steel
conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 709, Grade 50W and AASHTO M 180, Type
IV, Class A.
P300.236
915.02
POSTS AND RECYCLED/SYNTHETIC BLOCKOUTS

For galvanized steel posts, use structural steel conforming to ASTM A 709, Grade 36, that
is galvanized according to ASTM A 123.
For weathering steel posts shall be fabricated of high strength, low-alloy structural,
weathering steel conforming to the requirements of current ASTM A 709, Grade 50W.
The bottom 4'-2" of the six (6) foot guide rail posts and bottom 6'-2" of the eight (8) foot
guide rail posts shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M 111.
Timber posts for end terminals shall conform to Subsection 910.05.
Use recycled/synthetic routed blockouts that are NCHRP 350 tested, test level 3 (TL-3),
approved. Ensure that the name of the manufacturer and model number are stamped on
each blockout and that the blockouts are of the same material and dimensions as the
spacers that were NCHRP tested.
915.03
MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE
For galvanized beam guide rail, ensure that connections or splices, nuts, bolts, washers,
and plates conform to AASHTO M 180, except as follows:
1.
2.
3.
If high-strength bolts are shown on the Plans for bridge guide rail, use highstrength bolts, nuts, and washers conforming to ASTM A 325, Type I, and
galvanized according to ASTM A 153.
For base plate assemblies on bridge guide rail, use an adhesive anchor
system with galvanized bolts as specified in 909.02(F) or galvanized anchor
bolts, nuts, and washers as specified in 909.02(E).
Use plates for beam guide rail on bridges conforming to ASTM A 36 and
galvanized according to ASTM A 123.
For weathering steel beam guide rail, ensure that connections or splices, nuts, bolts,
washers, and plates conform to AASHTO M 180, except as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
915.04
Nuts for beam guide rail end treatment shall conform to ASTM A 563, Grade
A.
Plates and rods for guide rail end treatment shall be structural steel
conforming to ASTM A 36 and galvanized according to AASHTO M 111.
Bolts, nuts, and washers for bridge guide rail, excluding base plate anchor
bolts, shall conform to or exceed the requirements of ASTM A 307 unless
otherwise designated as high-strength on the Plans. High-strength bolts,
nuts, and washers shall conform to AASHTO M 164, Type I (ASTM A/325/
325M, Type I) or ASTM A 449/A 449M. Anchor bolts, nuts, and washers for
base plate assemblies on bridge guide rail shall conform to or exceed the
requirements of AASHTO M 164, Type I (ASTM A/325/ 325M, Type I).
Structural steel plates for guide rail on bridges shall conform to AASHTO M
183/M 183M (ASTM A/36/ A36M).
Bolts and nuts may be mechanically galvanized according to AASHTO M 298,
Class 50, Type 1.
SAMPLING AND TESTING

P300.236
Samples and rate of sampling taken by the Engineer will be in accordance with AASHTO
M180.
915.05
RUB RAIL
For galvanized beam guide rail, rub rail shall be steel channels or bent plate of structural
steel conforming to ASTM A 36 and galvanized according to ASTM A 123.
For weathering steel beam guide rail, rub rail shall be steel channels or bent plate
fabricated of high strength, low-alloy weathering structural steel conforming to the
requirements of current ASTM A 709, Grade 50W.
915.06
CIRCULAR REFLECTORS
Circular Reflectors shall be Model AGR as manufactured by Astro Optics Corporation,
1200 Abbott Drive, Elgin, Il 60123, telephone (847) 488-9151, or approved equal.
SECTION 916 - MASONRY UNITS

916.01
CONCRETE BLOCKS
Delete the second paragraph and replace it with the following:
Each block shall have a compressive strength of not less than 4,500 pounds per square
inch (PSI) when tested in accordance with ASTM-C140.
The following Subsection is added:
SECTION 917 - PIPE

917.08
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE

Corrugated HDPE drainage pipe shall conform to AASHTO M 294, and is Type S
(smooth interior with annular corrugations), with gasketed silt-tight joints.
Submit a certification of compliance, as specified in 105.04 for HDPE pipe.
SECTION 918 - ELECTRICAL MATERIAL

918.01
GENERAL
The following is added after the last paragraph:
All materials and equipment forming part of any assembly shall be new and subject to
the approval of the Engineer. Materials, components and equipment approved by the
Engineer which appear defective when received or which may have become damaged in
any manner, shall not be used until retested and re-approved. Manufacturers
certifications or certified copies of reports of tests shall be furnished as directed by the
Engineer.
P300.236
The sources of supply of each of the equipment items to be incorporated into an

assembly shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. Work performed and materials,
components, and equipment furnished which do not conform to the requirements of
these Specifications will be rejected and shall be removed and replaced, as the Engineer
may direct, at the Contractors expense.
918.07
CABLE AND WIRE

(A)
Multiple Lighting and Power Cable

Replace the color coding requirement for different voltage characteristics with the
following table:
265/460 V.
Or
277/480 V.
120/208V.
120/240 V.
Phase A
Brown
Black
Red
Phase B
Yellow
Red
Black
Phase C
Orange
Blue
--
Neutral
Grey
White
White
Cable or Wire

(F)
Outdoor Network Cable

Outdoor network cable shall consist of 24 AWG solid bare copper conductors,
Category 5e or better rated twisted pairs, polyolefin insulation, inner LLPE
jacket, overall shield (100% coverage), 24 AWG stranded TC drain wire,
industrial grade sunlight- and oil-resistant LLPE jacket and be model 7937A
DATATUFF by Belden or approved equal.
Specifications for the cable shall be as follows:
Number of Conductor Pairs:
4
Total Number of Conductors:
8 # 24 AWG
Conductor Stranding:
Solid
Conductor Material:
Bare Copper
Insulation Material:
Polyolefin
Waterblocking Material:
Polymer Gel
Conductor Color Code:
1 - White/Blue Stripe & Blue
2 - White/Orange Stripe & Orange
3 - White/Green Stripe & Green
4 - White/Brown Stripe & Brown
Inner Jacket Material:
Linear Low Density Polyethylene
Inner Jacket Diameter:
0.230 inches
Outer Shield Type:
Tape
Outer Shield Material:
Aluminum Foil-Polyester Tape
Outer Shield %Coverage:
100 %
Outer Shield Drain Wire AWG:
24
P300.236
Outer Shield Drain Wire Stranding:
Outer Shield Drain Wire Conductor
Material:
Outer Jacket Material:
Outer Jacket Ripcord:
Overall Nominal Diameter:
Operating Temperature Range:
Installation Temperature Range:
Bulk Cable Weight:
Max. Recommended Pulling Tension:
Min. Bend Radius (Install):
IEC Specification:
EU RoHS Compliant (Y/N):
EU RoHS Compliance Date
TIA/EIA Specification:
Other Specification:
Suitability Outdoor:
Suitability Burial:
Sunlight Resistance:
Oil Resistance:
Non-halogenated:
Plenum:
Nom. Mutual Capacitance @ 1 KHz:
Maximum Capacitance Unbalance
(pF/100 m):
Nominal Velocity of Propagation:
Maximum Delay (ns/100 m):
Maximum Delay Skew (ns/100m):
Maximum Conductor DC Resistance @
20 Deg. C:
Maximum DCR Unbalance @ 20 Deg. C:
Max. Operating Voltage UL:
G)
7x32
Tinned Copper
Linear Low Density Polyethylene
No
0.276 inches
-40C To +75C
-25C To +75C
33 lbs/1000 feet
40 lbs.
2.75 inches
11801 Category 5
Yes
01/01/2004
568-B.2 Category 5e
NEMA WC-63.1 Category 5e
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
15 pF/ft
330 pF/100 m
70 %
538 @ 100MHz ns/100 m
45 ns/100 m
9.38 Ohms/100 m
3%
300 V RMS
Fiber Optic Cable Single Mode

Fiber Optic Cable - Single Mode shall be tight buffered breakout type cable as
manufactured by Optical Cable Corporation BX006KSLX9YP or approved equal
(OAE). No splices are permitted, except as required for terminations, unless
shown on the Plans.
The fiber optic communications cable shall be of six fiber configuration as shown
on the plans, each fiber with a color coded Polyvinyl Chloride inner sub-cable
jacket, containing Aramid strength fibers all surrounded by a yellow
Fluoropolymer outer jacket with rip cord.. (If exposed to sunlight, the outer
jacket shall be black.) The single mode fibers shall be structured with 9/125/900
micron diameter. Optical fibers shall be protected in individual color coded,
breakout buffer tubes. The buffer tubes shall be cabled around a central
dielectric strength element with a gel-less water blocking system to inhibit water
migration. The cable shall be suitable for use in cable tray, direct burial,
P300.236
underground duct and aerial installations.
The optical and physical
characteristics of the cable shall be as listed in the table below:
Single Mode Fiber Type:
Core Diameter:
Cladding:
Coating:
Buffer:
Color Coded Breakout Tube
Attenuation @ 1310nm:
@ 1550nm:
Proof Test:
Cable Type:
Operating Temperature:
Storage Temperature:
Installation Temperature:
Fiber Count:
Outer Jacket Color:
Weight:
Maximum Load for Installation:
Max Load for Long Term Apps:
Min Bend Radius for Installation:
Min Radius for Long Term Apps:
Crush Resistance:
Flame Resistance:
Solar Radiation Resistance:
Sub-cable Tube Color Code:
(H)
Low Water Peak

9 +/- 1 Microns (single mode)
125 +/- 2 Microns
245+/- 15 Microns
900+/- 25 Microns
2 mm or 2.5 mm
0.5 dB/Km Maximum
0.5 dB/Km Maximum
100KPSI
Breakout; Tight Buffer; Indoor/Outdoor
-40C to +85C
-40C to +85C
0C to +60C (actual temperature of cable)
6
Yellow (Black if exposed to sunlight)
56 lbs/kft
670 lbs
270 lbs
5.7
3.8
High
UL 1666 (OFNR); IEEE383
High
1. Blue, 2. Orange, 3. Green, 4. Brown, 5. Slate,
6. White
Fiber Optic Cable Multi-mode

Fiber Optic Cable - Multiode shall be tight buffered breakout type cable as
manufactured by Optical Cable Corporation BX006KWLS9OP or approved equal
(OAE). No splices are permitted, except as required for terminations, unless
shown on the Plans.
The fiber optic communications cable shall be of configuration as shown on the
plans, each fiber with a color coded Polyvinyl Chloride inner sub-cable jacket,
containing Aramid strength fibers all surrounded by an orange Fluoropolymer
outer jacket with rip cord. (If exposed to sunlight, the outer jacket shall be black.)
The multimode fibers shall be structured with 62.5/125/900 micron diameter.
Optical fibers shall be protected in individual color coded, breakout buffer tubes.
The buffer tubes shall be cabled around a central dielectric strength element with
a gel-less water blocking system to inhibit water migration. The cable shall be
suitable for use in cable tray, direct burial, underground duct and aerial
installations. The optical and physical characteristics of the cable shall be as
listed in the table below:
Multimode Fiber Type:
Core Diameter:
Graded Index
62.5 +/- 3 Microns (multi mode)
P300.236
Cladding:
Coating:
Buffer:
Color Coded Breakout Tube
Attenuation @ 850nm:
@ 1310nm:
Bandwidth @ 850nm:
@ 1310nm:
Numerical Aperture:
Proof Test:
Cable Type:
Operating Temperature:
Storage Temperature:
Installation Temperature:
Fiber Count:
Outer Jacket Color:
Weight:
Maximum Load for Installation:
Max Load for Long Term Apps:
Minimum Bending Radius:
Min Radius for Long Term Apps:
Crush Resistance:
Impact Resistance:
Solar Radiation Resistance:
Flame Resistance:
Sub-cable Tube Color Code:
(I)
125 +/- 2 Microns

245+/- 15 Microns
900+/- 25 Microns
2 mm or 2.5 mm
3.5 dB/km Maximum
1.5 dB/km Maximum
200 MHz/Km Minimum
500 MHz/Km Minimum
0.275 Nominal
100KPSI
Breakout; Tight Buffer; Indoor/Outdoor
-40C to +85C
-40C to +85C
0C to +60C (actual temperature of cable)
6
Orange (Black if exposed to sunlight)
56 lbs/kft
670 lbs
270 lbs
5.7
3.8
750 lbs./inch Minimum
25 Impacts Minimum @ 3.3Ft.-Lbs
High
UL 1666 (OFNR); IEEE383
1. Blue, 2. Orange, 3. Green, 4. Brown, 5. Slate, 6.
White
Fiber Optic Cable Termination Connector

Fiber Optic Cable Termination Connector shall be a pigtail consisting of a three
foot (one meter) length of tight buffered type cable with a factory installed and
terminated connector. The pigtail shall be fusion spliced to each strand at each
end of every Fiber Optic Cable described in 918.07(H) and 918.07(I) furnished
and installed by the Contractor. The pigtail fiber optic strand type shall match
the strand type of the installed cable and shall be applied to each cable strand
with a fusion splice. The fusion splice shall have a measured attenuation of less
than 0.2 dB or it shall be remade until the quality of the splice meets this
requirement.
Each pigtail shall be furnished with a factory made connector of the type
indicated on the Plans. The connector shall be manufactured to have an average
insertion loss equal to or less than 0.2 dB.
(J)
Twisted Pair Communication Cable

Twisted Pair Communication Cable cable shall consist of 4 pairs of #24AWG
stranded copper conductors, each pair individually shielded, covered by a PVC
jacket. The cable shall be Belden Model 8164 or approved equal.
Specifications for the cable shall be as follows:
P300.236
Number of Conductor Pairs:

Total Number of Conductors:
Conductor Stranding:
Conductor Material:
Insulation Material:
Inner Shield Material:
Inner Shield Coverage:
Inner Shield Drain:
Conductor Color Code (by pair):
Outer Shield Material:

Outer Shield Coverage:
Outer Shield Drain:
Outer Jacket Material:
Outer Jacket Ripcord:
Overall Nominal Diameter:
Operating Temperature Range:
Installation Temperature Range:
Bulk Cable Weight:
Max. Recommended Pulling
Tension:
Min. Bend Radius (Install):
EU RoHS Compliant (Y/N):
EU RoHS Compliance Date
(mm/dd/yyyy):
NEC/(UL) Specification:
Suitability Outdoor:
Suitability Burial:
Sunlight Resistance:
Oil Resistance:
Non-halogenated:
Plenum:
Nom. Mutual Capacitance @ 1
KHz:
Nominal Velocity of Propagation:
Max. Operating Voltage UL:
4
8 # 24 AWG
7x32
Tinned Copper
Foam Polyethylene
100%
24 AWG, 7x32 Tinned Copper
1 - Black & Red
2 - Black & White
3 - Black & Green
4 - Black & Blue
100 %
Tinned Copper Braid
Polyvinyl Chloride
No
0.276 inches
-40C To +60C
-25C To +60C
75 lbs/1000 feet
100 lbs.
4 inches
Yes
01/01/2004
CM
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
12.5 pF/ft
70 %
300 V RMS
Unless otherwise noted, all twisted paid communication cables not carrying
Ethernet signals shall conform to this specification. Cables carrying Ethernet
signals shall conform to Specifications in Section 918.07 (F).
The following Paragraph is added:
(K)
SOOW Multi Conductor Power Cable.

The SOOW multi-conductor portable cable shall be minimum of #10AWG cable,
P300.236
number as shown on the contract plans or as applicable, soft drawn or annealed,
stranded copper individually insulated (color coded in accordance with ICEA
Method 1), with oil and water resistant rubber jacket (EPDM), and overall black
heavy duty CPE rubber jacket, rated 600V and with operating temperature range
of -40C to +90C.
Cable and wire shall be manufactured in conformance with ICEA S-68-516, UL
62, CSA Flexible cords C22.2-49, MSHA, and UL listed for indoor and outdoor
use.
The cable shall be General Cable Part No. 02727, or Custom Cable Corp. Catalog
Number 9026, or approved equal.
Provide cord grip connectors at each cable entry/exit point of the luminaire,
model CGA771750/CGA771850 as manufactured by Bridgeport Fittings or
approved equal.
918.08
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

(F)
Duct Bank Spacers

Spacers shall be prefabricated and made out of high impact Polystyrene. Spacers
shall be manufactured by Underground Devices Inc., Model No. 4W30-2, or an
approved equal.
Where wire or cable passes through a hole or runs along a surface at any point, through
or on the complete assembly, such holes and surfaces shall be deburred and void of any
sharp edges or protuberances that may in any way damage the wire or cable. Rubber
grommets shall be provided and installed in the entrance hole to the shaft and mast arms
where mid-mounted traffic signals are installed.
All hardware, bolts, nuts, and washers used in the installation of the aluminum traffic
signal standards shall be stainless steel. Hardware used for steel traffic signal standards
shall conform to Specifications for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot Wrought, Special Quality
Mechanical Properties, Grade 90, and shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 153.
Bolts shall conform to ASTM F 738M. Leveling nuts shall conform to ASTM F 836M.
Standards and mast bracket arms shall be tested by the manufacturer to ensure
compliance with specified material and strength requirements. The testing shall also
ensure that the items have been manufactured in conformance with the AASHTO
Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and
Traffic Signals. Five copies of the certification stipulating that the items meet the strength
and material requirements shall be submitted.
All aluminum poles and mast bracket arms shall be factory wrapped to protect them
during shipment.
Fabrication operations for aluminum alloy structures not specifically covered in these
P300.236
Specifications shall be according to Section 10, ANSI/AWS D1.2 for Class 1 structures.
The following Sections are added:
918.24
RODENT BLOCKING
The rodent blocking material shall consist of a wad of corrosion resistant metallic mesh,
such as Stuff-It or Copper Blocker brand copper mesh or approved equal, and capped
with a pest control foam sealant, such as IPF Foam from Todol Products or approved
equal.
SECTION 919 - LANDSCAPING MATERIALS

919.10
SEED
The grass seed used shall be the new crops seed and the mixtures to be used shall be as
follows:
Purity Grass Seed Mixture
Minimum
Purity
Percent
Minimum Percent of Total

Germination
Weight of
Percent
Mixture
Type A
Kentucky Blue Grass (American,
Merit)
98
85
25
Creeping Red Fescue
97
85
25
Tall Turf-type Fescue (Houndog,

Mustang, K-31)
Fine Textured Perennial Rye
Grass, (Fiesta, Premier)
Type B
Tall Turf-Type Fescue
(Houndog, Mustang, K-31)
Perennial Rye Grass (Linn)
95
90
25
95
90
25
95
90
75
95
90
25
98
85
30
98
85
30
95
90
40
95
68
35
95
90
25
Type C
Kentucky Blue Grass (Banff,
American)
Kentucky Blue Grass (Merit,
Touchdown)
Fine Textured Perennial Rye
Grass, (Premier)
Type L Legume Seed
Crown Vetch* plus Nitrofying
Bacteria
Bird Foot Trefoil plus Nitrofying
Bacteria
P300.236
Perennial Rye Grass
98
92
40
*Including not more than 35% hard seed.

Straw mulch and binding shall be as specified in Subsection 919.13. Hay mulch shall not
be utilized.
SECTION 920 - TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES

920.01
TRAFFIC CONES
Replace this section with the following:
Traffic Cones shall be NCHRP 350 compliant and shall meet the requirements listed
herein. Cones shall have either separate or molded bases. Cones need not be new but
must be in good condition as approved. The Engineer may order the replacement of any
cones that are dirty, cracked, unstable, exhibiting loose/frayed collars or not in
conformance with the requirements herein. The cone material shall be impregnated with
orange pigment, and the surface shall have a glossy, non-reflectorized finish. The color
of the cone surface shall be in accordance with the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Devices (fluorescent orange). The contractor shall submit certification from the vendor
that the cones meet the evaluation criteria of NCHRP 350 and the physical properties
listed below, in accordance with 105.04.
(A)
Cones.
Each cone shall be provided with a 6-inch wide collar and 4-inch wide collar of silver
(white) retroreflective sheeting meeting the requirements of ASTM D-4956, type III.
The retroreflective sheeting shall be applied to the cone so that the 6-inch collar is three to
four inches from the top of the cone and the 4-inch collar is 2 inches below the 6-inch
collar.
The cones shall be constructed in a manner so that the cones in any given delivery,
shipment or mobilization will nest or stack with each other, with or without stabilizers,
without difficulty.
Cone bases shall be black in color. Bases for 36 Cones shall be flat (no cleats).
Cones shall have the following physical properties:
(1)
Material
(2)
(3)
Overall Height
Cone Weight
Design Criteria
28 Cone
36 Cone
PVC/Plastic or PVC
Rubber
28"
36
7 lbs. (min.)
15.5 lbs. (min.)
P300.236
(4)
Total in-place Weight
(5)
Cone Diameter, Top Interior

(1" from top)
Cone Diameter, Bottom Interior
Base Size, Square
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(B)
Tensile Strength ASTM D638

Elongation
Hardness Durometer ASTM D2240
Fold Resistance A cone is placed in an
upright position and folded at a point near
the middle of its vertical height by holding
the upper tip of the cone by hand for ten
seconds to the base and touching the surface
upon which the base is resting.
Heat Resistance - Cones are placed upright
for 1 hour at 180F with a 3+
_ 0.11 Lb mass
suspended approximately 14 from the top of
each cone. and secured using a 2.6 inch
diameter flat metal disc. Cones are returned
to ambient air temperature, and are stacked in
various configurations with one another.
Cold Resistance A cone is placed upright for
3 hours at 0F. Immediately after, a steel ball
weighing 2 pounds (0.9 kg) is dropped a
distance of 5 feet (1.5m) through a virtually
frictionless guide tube onto the surface of the
cone. The surface of the cone that was struck
by the steel ball shall be in a horizontal
position, with the cone supported and held in
position at both ends. The cone shall be
subjected to five concurrent impacts
concentrated near the middle.
7 lbs. (min.)
Parkway only
15 lbs. (min.,
Turnpike only)
2-3/8" +
_ 1/8"
15.5 lbs. (min.)
2-3/8 +
_ 1/8
10-5/8" +
_ 1/2"
11-3/8 +
_ 1/2
13-3/4" +
_ 1/2"
17" +
_ 1/2"
With Cleats
Without Cleats
1,000 psi (min.) 1,000 psi (min.)
200% (min.)
200% (min.)
80 +
_ 10
80 +
_ 10
The cone shall return to its original
vertical position within 15 seconds after
release.
The cones shall not stick to one another

and shall be easy to remove from the
stack(s).
The cone shall show no evidence of

fracturing, cracking or splitting
Stabilizers
On Turnpike roadways, separate stabilizers shall be provided for 28 cones to meet the
Total in-place Weight requirement listed herein for cones without molded bases; on
Parkway roadways, separate stabilizers are not required for 28 cones that meet the Total
in-place Weight required. 36 cones do not require separate stabilizers if the cones meet
the Total in-place Weight required. The separate stabilizers shall be black in color and
shall be constructed so that they rest evenly on the base of the cone without overhanging.
The stabilizer shall be a minimum of 5 pounds and shall have the same physical
properties as cones in tensile strength, elongation and hardness. Only one stabilizer per
cone shall be used.
P300.236
920.03
SAFETY VESTS
Delete this Subsection in its entirety and replace it with the following:
Safety vests shall meet the ANSI 107-2004 (Class 3) approved American National
Standard for High Visibility Safety Apparel.
920.08
CONCRETE BARRIER
Precast concrete construction barrier for traffic control and protection shall be white or
grey and shall conform to ASTM C825. Additional reinforcement, interlocking, and other
details shall be as shown on the Plans.
Concrete construction barrier and interlocking devices shall be in accordance with
Standard Drawings TP-24 and TP-25. The Contractor may submit alternate barrier
systems with interlocking devices that meet NCHRP Report 350 - Test Level 3
requirements to the Engineer for review and approval.
Concrete construction barriers shall be provided with reflectors mounted on the side of
the barrier with epoxy glue or mounting screws 6 inches from the top at twenty (20) foot
intervals for grey and forty (40) foot intervals for white. The side mounted reflectors
shall be yellow when the construction barrier is to the left of traffic and white when the
construction barrier is to the right of traffic. Reflectors shall also be mounted on the top
of concrete construction barriers at 100-foot intervals on tangent sections, curves of radii
greater than 1,910 feet, and at 50-foot intervals on curves of 1,910 feet or less. Reflectors
shall be provided in accordance with Subsection 923.18.
On tapered portions of precast concrete construction barrier, flashing lights shall be mounted
instead of reflectors. One flashing light is to be mounted at the beginning of the taper and
additional flashing lights are to be mounted at forty (40) foot intervals. The flashing lights shall
be in accordance with Subsection 920.04 and shall be operational twenty-four (24) hours a day.
.
920.10
PREFORMED TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIAL

Replace this subsection with the following:
920.10
REMOVABLE WET WEATHER PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE

The removable wet weather preformed patterned pavement marking tape shall consist of
white or yellow films with clear microcrystalline beads incorporated to provide
immediate and continuing retroreflection during both wet and dry conditions at the
specific luminance levels listed below. The underside of the tape shall be precoated with
a pressure sensitive adhesive which bonds the tape to the roadway surface so as to be
able to withstand traffic immediately after installation.
P300.236
Daylight color of the white tape shall be no darker than color No. 37778 of FED-STD595B. Daylight color of the yellow tape shall conform to the FHWA color tolerance chart
for highway yellow.
When measured with an Advanced Retro Technology (ART) model MX-30 handheld
retroreflectometer, the tape shall have initial, minimum retroflectance values conforming
to:
Dry Condition ASTM E 1710
Entrance Angle = 88.76
Observation
Angle
(Degrees)
1.05
Specific Luminance
White
(Millicandelas
per square
foot per
footcandle)
500
Yellow
(Millicandelas
per square
foot per
footcandle)
300
Note: The angular aperture of both the photoreceptor and the light projector shall be
six minutes of arc. The reference axis shall be taken perpendicular to the test sample.
Continuous Wet Condition ASTM E 2176
Entrance Angle = 88.76
Observation
Angle
(Degrees)
1.05
Specific Luminance
White
(Millicandelas
per square
foot per
footcandle)
250
Yellow
(Millicandelas
per square
foot per
footcandle)
200
Tape shall be capable of being removed manually, intact or in large pieces, at

temperatures above 40F without the use of solvents, burning, grinding, or blasting.
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with the manufacturers installation
recommendations and Certification of Compliance in accordance with Subsection 105.04.
920.11
ARROW BOARD
Provide Type C flashing arrow boards in accordance with the MUTCD (latest edition)
and meeting the following requirements:
1.
Non-reflective, black boards equipped with battery-operated amber lights.
P300.236
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
A minimum peak luminous intensity of 8800 candelas and equipped with

photocells that will automatically reduce the luminous intensity to 1500 candelas
when the ambient light level drops to 5 foot-candles.
A light on the rear face of the board to indicate that the lights are operating.
Solid state controls with polarity and surge protection.
Panel operation controls mounted in a lockable enclosure.
Flashing rate shall be 30 times per minute.
Arrow Board displays shall be in accordance with the Traffic Protection Manual.
The front and rear faces of the board shall be devoid of advertising to include
owner, operator, phone numbers, internet addresses, etc .
Ensure flashing arrow boards are equipped with a diesel charged battery system. Do not
use gasoline powered systems. Securely mount flashing arrow boards on a
manufacturer-approved 2-wheeled towing trailer.
A permissible Flashing Arrow Board Trailer system to use shall be the Arrow Dynamic
Sign (ADS) by ADDCO, Inc., distributed by National Capital Industries, 3420 Kenilworth
Avenue, PO Box 287 Bladensburg, MD 20710 Ph (301)779-7644 or approved equal. The
Engineer will approve the arrow board displays and available options used or
purchased.
Trailer chassis lighting shall be in accordance with Federal and New Jersey State Motor
Vehicle regulations (New Jersey Title 39, Section 39:3-61 (d)). Include license plate
bracket and weatherproof registration document holder. A locking mechanism shall be
included to hold the panel in the operating position or travel position.
920.15
TEMPORARY IMPACT ATTENUATOR.

Modules produced by different manufactures shall not be intermixed when different
manufactures supply inertial impact attenuators for a contract.
Sand placed in the modules should be washed concrete sand conforming to ASTM C-33
or equal.
For non-gating re-directive telescoping temporary impact attenuators installed on a
temporary basis, refer to Subsection 920.20.
The following Subsections are added:
920.17
MODULAR GLARE SCREEN SYSTEM.

Modular Glare Screen System shall be Modular Guidance System MGS120 as
manufactured by Carsonite Composites, LLC, 19845 U.S Highway 76, Newberry, South
Carolina 29108, telephone 800-648-7916 or approved equal. The panels shall be 6 inches
wide with a height of 24 inches. The panels shall be FHWA highway green in color.
Reflective tape three (3) inches wide and six (6) inches high shall be applied to the blades
every ten (10) feet. The tape shall be high intensity grade reflective sheeting 3870 (white)
P300.236
when traffic is to the left and 3871 (yellow) when traffic is to the right, as manufactured
by 3M Company or approved equal. Tape shall be applied vertically centered on the
blade on the edge closest to passing traffic.
The Modular Glare Screen System shall include a debris shield mesh netting on the
interior construction face only (not adjacent to traffic). This debris shield shall be secured
3 inches from the top, center and bottom every 3 feet along the System as required to
prevent sagging and fluttering. The debris shield shall be a high-density polyethylene
material 24 inches high with a maximum mesh opening of . The debris shield shall be
RESINET SM20 product number SM20-48100-BK (cut to 24 inches) as manufactured by
Utility Safeguard, LLC, 7018 AC Skinner Parkway, Suite 230, Jacksonville, FL 32256,
telephone 877-899-7233 or approved equal.
920.18
TRUCK MOUNTED ATTENUATOR.

The truck mounted attenuator shall be NCHRP 350 Test Level 3 compliant, including
optional tests 52 and 53.
The attenuator shall have high intensity orange reflective sheeting. The attenuator shall
have a standard trailer lighting system, including brake lights, taillights, turn signals and
ICC bar lights.
920.19
PORTABLE VARIABLE MESSAGE SIGNS.

Provide a portable variable message sign capable of displaying messages that are visible
under ideal day and night conditions from a minimum distance of 1/2 mile and that are
legible from a minimum distance of 900 feet with a viewing angle of at least 25 degrees.
Ensure that the portable variable message sign is able to operate in ambient temperatures
of -30 to 160F and is capable of withstanding wind gusts up to 80 miles per hour when
raised or lowered. Provide a portable variable message sign with the following:
A. Sign Panel. Provide a sign panel capable of displaying three (3) lines of a message,
with each line capable of displaying up to eight (8) characters. Ensure that the
characters have a minimum height of 18 inches, a minimum width of 12 inches, and
are spaced at least 3 inches apart. Compose characters of a 5 wide by 7 high pixel
matrix, with each pixel composed of between 4 and 6 LED lights. Ensure that the
LED lights have a dominant wavelength between 585 and 595 nanometers and are set
against a black background. Ensure that the LED lights provide a minimum daylight
luminance of 1000 candelas-per-square-meter. Ensure that the sign is equipped with
a photocell to automatically reduce the LED lights' luminance to between 30 to 100
candelas-per-square-meter when the ambient light level drops to 5 foot-candles.
Ensure that LED lights maintain constant luminance intensity with changes in
battery voltage.
Ensure that the sign panel is covered with an ultraviolet-resistant, clear
polycarbonate.
P300.236
B. Controller. Ensure that the controller is unaffected by radio transmissions. Ensure
that the controller is capable of displaying 3 messages sequentially. Ensure that
controller has an adjustable display rate with a minimum of 3 seconds per phase.
Ensure that the controller is capable of storing 100 user programmed messages in
nonvolatile memory that will retain the programmed messages when power is
interrupted. Provide a controller display screen that allows the operator to review
messages before displaying on the message sign. Ensure that the controller display
shows the operator all programming instructions. Ensure that the messages are able
to be programmed at the sign with an integral or plug-in keyboard, and remotely
with a cellular telephone.
Secure panel controls in a lockable weatherproof enclosure. Prevent unauthorized
access to the controller by requiring a password to the keyboard. Prevent
unauthorized remote access by requiring a password. If the correct password is not
entered within 60 seconds of initial phone contact, the phone call will terminate.
C. Power Source. Equip portable variable message signs with either a diesel charged or
a solar charged battery system. Ensure that the variable message sign is also capable
of operating on 120-volt AC electrical service. Provide the power with a battery
backup system capable of providing continuous operation when the primary power
source fails. Ensure that the power source meets the following requirements:
1.
Diesel. Ensure that the fuel tank is capable of operating the sign for a period of
seventy (72) hours without refueling. Equip with an exhaust muffler and a
United States Department of Forestry approved spark arrester. Ensure that the
engine is shock mounted to reduce vibration and locked in a ventilated
enclosure.
2.
Solar. Provide solar panels capable of recharging the batteries at a rate of 4 hours
of sun for twenty-four (24) hours of sign usage. Ensure that the battery capacity
is capable of operating the sign for a period of 18 days without sunlight.
D. Structural Support System. Mount the variable message sign on a portable 2wheeled trailer, equivalent to the trailer as stated in 920.11, Arrow Board. Ensure
that the sign panel is capable of being raised or lowered during sustained wind
speeds of fifty-five (55) miles per hour. Ensure that the sign panel is capable of being
locked into position and is capable of being positioned at the proper height and
orientation required for visibility according to the MUTCD (latest edition).
920.20
NON-GATING, RE-DIRECTIVE IMPACT ATTENUATOR.

The system shall be as manufactured by:
Energy Absorption Systems Incorporated
70 W Madison Street, Suite 2350
Chicago, IL 60602
Phone: (312) 467-6750
SCI Products Inc.'s SMART CUSHION
P300.236
As distributed by Work Area Protection Corp.
2500 Production Drive
St. Charles, IL 60174-9081
Phone: (630) 377-9100
Substitutes will not be permitted unless approved by the Engineer. Attaching hardware
and transition pieces shall be prescribed by the Manufacturer.
The Quadguard System impact attenuator is permitted for use under both permanent
and temporary conditions. The Quadguard System, Type CZ is permitted for use under
temporary work zone conditions.
SECTION 923 - MISCELLANEOUS

923.02
BEARING PADS
(A) Elastomeric Bearing Pads for Bridge Beams.

Replace the section in its entirety with the following:
Elastomeric Bearing Pads for Bridge Beams shall conform to the latest edition of the
AASHTO LRFD Construction Specifications, including the latest interims, as modified by
Section 408 of the Supplementary Specifications. All elastomers shall be Temperature
Grade 3, 60 Durometer elastomers unless indicated otherwise on the Plans.
The required bearings can be supplied by the following manufacturers: Cosmec, Inc.,
Walpole, MA Ph (508) 668-6600; D.S. Brown Company, North Baltimore, Ohio Ph (419)
257-3561; Tobi Engineering, Glenview, Illinois Ph (847) 724-7880; Scougal Rubber, Seattle,
Washington Ph (206) 763-2650; Seismic Energy Products, Athens, Texas Ph (903) 6758571; AMSCOT Structural Products, Dover, NJ Ph (973) 989-8800.
923.06
DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING

(G) Concrete Penetrating Sealer
Penetrating Sealer shall be a VOC compliant silane based concrete penetrating sealer
containing a minimum 100 percent active ingredients such as SL100 Water Repellant as
manufactured by ProSoCo., Inc., Kansas City, KS, and Hydrozo 100 or Hydrozo 100
Plusas manufactured by BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Shakopee, MN (800) 4339517 or an approved equal.
Delete Subparagraph (1) and replace it with the following:
(1) Water absorption values for treated concrete surfaces shall not exceed 1
percent moisture after 48-hour immersion in water and 2 percent after 50
P300.236
days immersion in water in accordance with ASTM C642 testing modified as
follows:
Delete the first paragraph in Part (a), and replace it with the following:
(a) The untreated surfaces of the oven-dried sample shall be coated
with a waterproof substance (i.e. epoxy) prior to determining the
oven-dried weight.
The following Paragraph (H) is added:
(H)
Waterproofing Systems for Substructures

Substructure Waterproofing shall conform to the requirements of (E) Epoxy Resin
Waterproofing.
Substructure Membrane Waterproofing shall consist of a primer and the membrane. The
membrane system must originate from one manufacturer to insure compatibility. The
membrane system shall be Eliminator by Stirling Lloyd Products, Inc., Newington, CT, or
Bridge Deck Membrane by Bridge Preservation, LLC, Kansas City, KS 913-321-9000 as
distributed by R.J. Watson, Inc., Buffalo, NY 716-901-7020, or an approved equal. The
membrane shall conform to the following:
Property
Solids Content
Coverage Rate 80 mils (2mm)
Cure Time
Water Vapor Transmission
Water Absorption
Tensile Strength
Elongation (min)
Adhesion to Concrete
Crack Bridging
Resistance To:
Ethylene Glycol
Calcium Chloride
Diesel Fuel
Gasoline
Test Method
ASTM E96
ASTM D570
ASTM D638
ASTM D638
ACI 503A
ASTM C836
ASTM D543
ASTM D543
ASTM D543
ASTM D543
Criteria
100%
20.5 sq. ft./gal
30 minutes at 68 degrees F
4.3 g/m2/day
<0.5%
400 psi (min)
100%
100 psi (min)
Pass at -15 degrees F
62.5 mils at 10 cycles
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
The following samples and information along with the current published technical
product data and material safety data sheets for the system selected shall be submitted to
the Engineer at least one month before application of the waterproof membrane system is
anticipated by the Contractor:
-
The design mix for the membrane system, including samples for testing and
approval prior to ordering any materials for the waterproofing membrane.
P300.236
-
Primer Coat 1 quart

Liquid Components of the membrane 1 quart each
Hardener Powder
Aggregate 25 lbs.
Written procedures for the surface preparation, application, quality control and
placement of the waterproof membrane.
Manufacturers Literature including descriptive data and specific recommendations
for surface preparation, mixing, and application of all materials, and a copy of the
manufacturers quality assurance program listing all in-house testing criteria.
Manufacturers Materials Safety Data Sheets for each respective product to be
used.
The following Paragraph (I) is added:

(I)
923.18
Methacrylate Crack Sealer

Methacrylate sealer shall be Sealate T-70 as manufactured by Transpo Industries, Inc., 20
Jones Street, New Rochelle, NY 10801, Tel. (914) 636-1000, OR Sika Pronto 19 as
manufactured by SIKA Corporation, 201 Polito Avenue, Lyndhurst, NJ 07071, Tel. (800)
933-7452, or an approved equal.
REFLECTORS
Flexible reflectors units shall be made of a fiberglass reinforced, thermosetting, highdensity polymer resin or an extruded polycarbonite resin, which are resistant to
ultraviolet and infrared radiation, and which meet the following minimum physical
requirements:
1.
Reflector Dimensions.
Reflector units shall be 4 inch wide by 8 inch high, with a minimum thickness of
1/8 inch.
2.
Reflector Color.
Reflector colors shall be as shown on the plans.
3.
Retroreflective Sheeting.
Use 3M Diamond Grade reflective sheeting. Affix yellow, white or red
reflective sheeting to the traffic-facing side of the reflector according to the
Manufacturing sources for reflector products shall use recycled materials as

recommended by the EPA, unless waived by the Engineer. Submit a certification of
compliance, as specified in Subsection 105.04 for the reflectors.
923.22
EPOXY RESIN SYSTEM

P300.236
(A)
EPOXY RESIN FOR INJECTION

Epoxy resin system for injection material to fill structural voids and cracks shall
be a two component, 100% solids, moisture insensitive high modulus high
strength epoxy resin adhesive such as:
Sikadur 35 Hi-Mod LV, Sika corp. 800.933.7452
Duralcrete , Euclid Chemical Co., 800.862.2667
Thermal-Chem Injection Resin, Product No. 2, Thermal-Chem, Inc. 800.635.3773
SCB Concresive 1380 BASF Corp. 800.433.9517
CI-060 Crack Injection System, Hilti Inc. 800.879.8000
The pressure injected epoxy shall be capable of penetrating the cracks and voids
to their full depth and bond to surfaces of cracked concrete and/or structural
steel.
(B)
EPOXY/RESIN FOR ANCHOR BOLTS IN NOMINAL HOLES
Epoxy resin system for injection material to install anchor bolts in non-tension
applications in drilled holes of a nominal diameter as recommended by the
epoxy or resin manufacturer shall be:
Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod, Sika Corp. 800.933.7452
Concresive 1090 BASF Corp. 800.433.9517
HIT-RE 500 Epoxy Adhesive, Hilti Inc. 800.879.8000
Keligrout, Keligrout 101P, Kelken Construction Systems 732.416.6730
PE1000+, Powers Fasteners, Inc. 914.235.6300
(C)
EPOXY/RESIN/GROUT FOR ANCHOR BOLTS IN OVERSIZE HOLES
Epoxy resin system for injection material to install bearing anchor bolts in nontension applications in drilled or preformed holes of up to 3 in diameter shall
be:
Sikagrout 328, Sika Corp. 800.933.7452
Masterflow 648CP Plus BASF Corp. 800.433.9517
Epoxy Grout, Hilti Inc. 800.879.8000
Keligrit, Kelken Construction Systems 732.416.6730
Pure 50+, Powers Fasteners, Inc. 914.235.6300
923.27
POT AND DISC BEARINGS

Delete this Subsection in its entirety.
923.30
SILT FENCE
Delete this subsection in its entirety, and replace it with the following:
P300.236
Provide geotextile material with protective wrapping and, before placement, store the rolls
in a manner that protects them from moisture and minimizes exposure to ultraviolet
radiation. Provide silt fence that is inert to commonly encountered chemicals, and that is
stabilized against ultraviolet light degradation. Label each roll to provide product
identification.
The geotextile material for both silt fence and heavy duty silt fence shall meet the
requirements of AASHTO M 288. The color of heavy duty silt fence shall be black or
orange as shown in the Plans.
923.37
FLY ASH
Fly ash for portland cement concrete shall conform to ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F
except that the loss on ignition shall not be more than three percent. When Class C fly
ash is used, the magnesium oxide shall not exceed 2.5 percent. Fly ash used to control
alkali-silica reactivity shall be Class F and shall contain not more than 1.5 percent
available alkali according to ASTM C 618, Table 1A. Before each source of fly ash is
approved, certified results of tests conducted by a testing agency shall be submitted to
and verified by the Department. Accompanying the certification shall be a statement
from the supplier listing the source and type of coal, the methods used to burn, collect,
and store the fly ash, and the quality control measures employed.
Conformance to the requirements for loss on ignition and fineness shall be determined
by the supplier for each truck load of fly ash delivered to the mixing site. The test values
determined shall be included on the delivery ticket. The Engineer may require that the
fly ash not be used until the Department has performed tests for loss on ignition and
fineness.
Fly ash for other uses shall conform to ASTM C 593 except that the loss on ignition shall
be not more than ten percent, and the combined content of silica and aluminum oxide
shall be a minimum of 50 percent.
923.38
HYDRATED LIME
Hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM C 207, Type N.
923.42
GEOTEXTILE
Provide geotextile rolls with protective wrapping and, before placement, store rolls in a
manner that protects against moisture and minimizes exposure to ultraviolet radiation.
For applications that are above ground or exposed to ultraviolet radiation, provide
geotextiles that are inert to commonly encountered chemicals and are stabilized against
ultraviolet light degradation. Label each roll to provide product identification.
Use geotextiles conforming to the requirements in AASHTO M 288, Class 1 or 2. For Inlet
Filters, use Class 2 for woven monofilament geotextiles or Class 1 for all other types of
geotextiles. For Inlet Filter, Type 2, in addition to the AASHTO M 288 requirements,
P300.236
ensure that the geotextiles burst strength is at least 650 pounds per square inch when
tested according to ASTM D 3786.
For geotextiles that are being permanently incorporated into the Contract, submit a
certification of compliance as specified in 105.04.
923.43
SEDIMENT CONTROL BAGS

Sediment Containment Bags shall be manufactured using polypropylene non-woven
geotextiles conforming to the requirements in Table 923.42-1 below. Sediment
Containment Bags shall be manufactured with a fill spout large enough to accommodate
a 4-inch discharge hose and with straps to secure the hose and prevent pumped water
from escaping without being filtered.
Table 923.42-1 Requirements for Sediment Containment Bag Geotextile
Property
Weight, oz/yd2, min.
Grab Tensile Strength, lbs, min.
Puncture Strength, lbs, min.
Flow Rate, gal/min/ft2, min.
Permittivity, sec1, min.
Mullen Burst Strength, psi, min.
UV Stability, % , min.
Apparent Opening Size, mm, max.
Test Method
ASTM D 3776
ASTM D 4632
ASTM D 4833
ASTM D 4491
ASTM D 4491
ASTM D 3786
ASTM D 4355
ASTM D 4751
Requirements
10
250
150
85
1.2
460
70
0.150
SECTION 924 - SUPERPAVE HOT MIX ASPHALT (HMA)

924.01
COMPOSITION
Replace the first paragraph with the following:
The composition of the mixture for HMA surface courses shall be coarse aggregate, fine
aggregate, and asphalt binder and may also include mineral filler and up to 10 percent
RAP. RAP will not be permitted in surface course mixes used for Bridge Deck
Resurfacing. The composition of the mixture for base or intermediate courses shall be
coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, and asphalt binder and may also include mineral filler
and up to maximum of 30 percent by weight of RAP.
Replace the first sentence of the fifth paragraph with the following:
The several mineral constituents shall be combined in such proportions that the resulting
mixture meets the grading requirements in Subsection 924.04.
924.02
JOB MIX FORMULA

The following is added to the end of the subsection:
P300.236
The Contractor may submit to the Engineer for approval job-mix formulas of the type
specified in the contract documents which have been previously approved for use by the
NJDOT. Such job-mix formulas shall include the NJDOT Laboratory Serial Number.
Submission of pre-approved job-mix formulas on NJDOT Producers Analysis of
Materials and Job Mix Formulas form are acceptable.
The Contractor is advised that NJTA Standard Supplementary Specifications allow 10%
RAP content in dense graded surface course mixes. RAP is not permitted in OGFC and
bridge deck surface mixes. As such, a NJDOT approved job-mix formula with a RAP
content of greater than 10% will not be permitted unless specifically approved by the
Engineer.
924.04
TABLES
The heading for Table 924-6 is replaced as follows:
Table 924-6 Additional Fine Aggregate Requirements for Superpave
Mix Compaction Level
Fine Aggregate Angularity
Clay Content Sand
% Air Voids (minimum)
Equivalent(2)% (minimum)
Delete the last row from Table 924-2.
Delete Note No. 2 from Table 924-3.
Delete Note No. 3 from Table 924-4.
Delete the last row from Table 924.6.
SECTION 990 METHODS OF TESTS

990.11
A-7 RAPIDLY DETERMINING THE BREAKDOWN IN SIZES OF SOIL AGGREGATE

A.
Scope.
This method of test is used to determine rapidly the approximate amount of soil
aggregate that may be expected to break down to finer sizes under field
compaction and exposure to weathering.
B.
Apparatus.
1.
The apparatus for determining moisture density relationship and
aggregate breakdown will conform to AASHTO T 99, Method C.
2.
The apparatus for performing the mechanical analysis will conform to
P300.236
AASHTO T 27.
990.12
C.
Preparation of Sample.
1.
A sample of approximately 150 pounds will be air dried and thoroughly
mixed.
2.
A mechanical analysis will be run on two samples of approximately 12
pounds each, obtained from the above sample by quartering. These two
gradations will be averaged and the average reported as the original
gradation of the material.
3.
A sample will be prepared to have the same gradation as the original
determined in Subpart C.2 above.
4.
The maximum density at optimum moisture content will be determined
from a representative portion of the prepared sample by using AASHTO
T 99, Method C including the replacement option, for material retained
on the -inch sieve.
D.
Procedure.
1.
Another sample will be compacted from the remaining material at the
optimum moisture content determined in Subpart C.4 above.
2.
A mechanical analysis will be performed on the prepared sample after
compaction.
E.
Report.
The report will include the following:
1.
Average of two gradations determined in Subpart C.2 above.
2.
Gradation of the prepared sample after compaction in Subpart D.2
above.
3.
Specified gradation for the material.
4.
Maximum density at optimum moisture of the prepared sample
determined in Subpart C.4 above.
NJDOT B-15 DETERMINING JOB MIX FORMULA FOR OPEN-GRADED FRICTION

COURSE
A.
Scope. This test method is used to determine gradation and the percent binder in an OGFC mixture.
The gradation is verified to ensure stone-on-stone contact, and the impact resistance of the final JMF
is verified. The optimum asphalt content (AC) is determined from: (1) aggregate surface area, (2)
relative Voids in Mineral Aggregate (VMA), and (3) visual drain-down determination of asphalt
content. A simple average of these 3 criteria is used to determine the JMF asphalt content.
B.
Apparatus. Use the following apparatus:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Equipment as needed for AASHTO T 19.

Equipment as needed for Superpave mix design as specified in AASHTO T 312.
Ovens capable of maintaining temperatures as specified in this method.
Clear, glass (Pyrex) 9-inch diameter pie pans.
L.A. Abrasion Machine conforming to AASHTO T 96.
No. 4 sieve according to AASHTO M 92.
P300.236
C.
Procedure. Perform the following steps:

1.
Verification of Stone-On-Stone Contact. Choose the design gradation to meet the air void
requirements and to ensure that the aggregate skeleton exhibits stone-on-stone contact. Sieve
aggregates proportioned to meet the selected JMF gradation over a No. 4 sieve. Keep the
material retained on the No. 4 sieve as the coarse aggregate fraction. Determine the unit weight
Guwca of the coarse aggregate fraction of the aggregate using the dry rodding technique
according to AASHTO T 19 For the selected JMF, determine the voids in the coarse aggregate
of the mix (VCAmix) based on specimens compacted with 50 gyrations according to AASHTO
T 312. Calculate:
100 (Gsbca - G uwca )
VCA drc
G sbca
Where:
VCAdrc = The voids in the coarse aggregate fraction of the JMF aggregate skeleton.
Gsbca = The bulk specific gravity of the coarse aggregate fraction as determined by AASHTO T 85.
Guwca = The unit weight of the coarse aggregate fraction (expressed in kilograms per cubic meter) as
determined by AASHTO T 19.
VCA mix
100
Pca - G mb
G sbca
Where:
VCAmix = The voids in the coarse aggregate fraction of the mix. The coarse aggregate fraction of the
aggregate is that portion of the JMF aggregate skeleton not passing the No. 4 sieve.
Pca = The percent of the coarse aggregate fraction by weight of total mix.
Gmb = The bulk specific gravity of the mix at the design AC content as determined by Section 3.4.
Gsbca = The bulk specific gravity of the coarse aggregate fraction as determined by AASHTO T 85.
For stone-on-stone contact VCAmix must be less than VCAdrc
2.
Surface Area Asphalt Content. Determine surface area asphalt content according to NJDOT
B-16.
3.
Relative VMA Asphalt Content. Mix aggregate graded to proposed JMF with asphalt and
fiber at 5 asphalt contents (1 at the estimated JMF asphalt content, 1 each at + and 0.5 percent
and 1 each at + and 1.0 percent of the estimated JMF asphalt content) according to AASHTO T
312. After mixing, return sample to the oven if necessary, and when at the recommended
compaction temperature, compact the specimens. Compact 3 specimens at each asphalt content
using 50 gyrations of a Superpave Gyratory Compactor according to AASHTO T 312.
Determine the bulk specific gravity, Gmb from each specimen according to AASHTO T 331.
Determine maximum specific gravity, Gmm, at each asphalt content according to AASHTO T
209. From Gmb, Gmm, and each known asphalt content, calculate volumetric information as
follows:
Plot asphalt content versus relative VMA and select the asphalt content at the lowest point on
the curve.
P300.236
Va
100
1 - G mb
G mm
Vb
b G mb
VMA R
Va
Vb
Where:
b = Percent AC by weight of total mix
Gmb = the bulk specific gravity of the specimen as determined by NJDOT B-6 or AASHTO TP 69.
Gmm = the maximum specific gravity at each asphalt content as determined by AASHTO T 209.
Va = Volume of air is equal to the percent air voids.
Vb = Percent by volume of asphalt cement.
VMAR = Relative VMA
The volume of the fiber, absorbed asphalt, and specific gravity of asphalt binder are not
accounted for in this procedure. This procedure measures relative VMA not the true VMA.
4.
Draindown in Uncompacted Asphalt Mixture. Test according to AASHTO T-305. Ensure that
the asphalt mixture drainage does not exceed 0.3 percent.
5.
Select Optimum Asphalt Content for JMF. Determine the JMF asphalt content by averaging
the results from the 3 methods (surface area, relative VMA, and draindown).
AC j m f
AC sc
AC vm a
3
AC dd
Where:
ACjmf = the design JMF
ACsc = the asphalt content determined by the surface area in Step 2.
ACvma = the asphalt content determined by relative VMA in Step 3.
ACdd = the asphalt content determined by draindown in Step 4.
6.
Verification of Abrasion and Impact Resistance of JMF (Cantabro Test). Compact 2

specimens using the JMF at the optimum asphalt content as specified in Step 3. Age the
specimens for 7 days 8 hours in an oven at 140 5 F. Weigh each sample. Utilizing a Los
Angeles Machine conforming to AASHTO T 96, without the charge of steel balls, subject
theaged samples to 300 revolutions at 30 to 33 revolutions per minute. After the 300 revolutions
reweigh the samples.
Calculate the Percent Loss:
Ploss
A-B
100
A
Where:
Ploss = The loss expressed as percent of aged sample before L.A. Abrasion Machine treatment.
A = The weight of the sample before modified L.A. Abrasion test.
B = The weight of the sample after modified L.A. Abrasion test.
P300.236
If the loss is less than 30 percent, the JMF is acceptable. If the JMF is determined to be
unacceptable, redesign the mix.
E.
Report. Report all test results on ME provided forms.
A.
Scope. This test method is used to determine the asphalt binder content to be used in OGFC mixes
based on the surface area of the aggregate. This percentage is averaged with asphalt contents
determined according to NJDOT B-15 to arrive at a design asphalt content for an OGFC mix design.
P300.236
990.13 NJDOT B-16 DETERMINING ASPHALT BINDER CONTENT FOR OPEN-GRADED

FRICTION COURSE
A.
Scope. This test method is used to determine the asphalt binder content to be used in OGFC mixes based on
the surface area of the aggregate. This percentage is averaged with asphalt contents determined according to
NJDOT B-15 to arrive at a design asphalt content for an OGFC mix design.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Ovens capable of maintaining temperatures of 140 5 F and 230 9 F.

Balance meeting the requirements of AASHTO M 231, Class D.
Two metal funnels having minimum dimensions of 3-1/2 inch top diameter, 4-1/2 inch
high and inch orifice. The funnels shall have a metal strainer soldered where the base of
the cone connects to the top of the spout. The equivalent size of the strainer shall not be
larger than No. 10 sieve.
A 3/8-inch sieve and a No. 4 sieve according to AASHTO M 92.
SAE No. 10 lubricating oil.
Two rubber stoppers to fit the funnel outlets.
Ring stand to support the funnels during testing.
Equipment required in AASHTO T 85.
Determine the apparent specific gravity of the aggregate passing the 3/8-inch sieve and
retained on the No. 4 sieve according to AASHTO T 85.
Through quartering, obtain 2 samples weighing approximately 110 grams representative
of the material passing the 3/8-inch sieve and retained on the No. 4 sieve.
Dry the sample in the 230 F oven to a constant weight and allow to cool to room
temperature.
Weigh out 100.0 grams of the material and place in the metal funnel.
Place a stopper in the funnel outlet and fill funnel with SAE No. 10 oil, immersing the
aggregate.
After 5 minutes, remove the stopper and allow the oil to drain for 2 minutes.
Place the funnel containing the aggregate on a pan in the oven maintained at 140 F for
15 minutes of additional draining.
Remove the sample from the funnel, cool to room temperature, reweigh to the nearest 0.1
gram, and record.
Calculations. Perform the following calculations:

1.
Calculate the percent oil retained for each sample as follows:
B- A
100
A
Where:
R = Percent oil retained
A = Weight of sample before test
B = Weight of sample after test
2.
Using the average percent oil retained of the 2 samples, calculate the corrected percent oil
retained as follows:
P300.236
Rc
Ga
100
2.65
Where:
Rc = Corrected percent oil retained
Ga = Apparent specific gravity of aggregate
2.65 = Constant
3.
4.
Using the corrected percent oil retained, determine the surface constant (K c) from Table B16-1.
Calculate the design asphalt content as follows:
Design Asphalt Content
(2.0 K c
4.0) 2.65
Ga
P300.236
Table B-16-1 Determination of Surface Constant Kc
E.
CORR.
%OIL
Kc
CORR.
%OIL
Kc
CORR.
%OIL
Kc
CORR.
%OIL
Kc
0.1
0.1
2.6
1.2
5.1
2.2
7.6
3.1
0.2
0.1
2.7
1.2
5.2
2.2
7.7
3.1
0.3
0.2
2.8
1.2
5.3
2.2
7.8
3.2
0.4
0.2
2.9
1.3
5.4
2.3
7.9
3.2
0.5
0.3
3.0
1.3
5.5
2.3
8.0
3.2
0.6
0.3
3.1
1.4
5.6
2.3
8.1
3.3
0.7
0.4
3.2
1.4
5.7
2.4
8.2
3.3
0.8
0.4
3.3
1.4
5.8
2.4
8.3
3.4
0.9
0.4
3.4
1.5
5.9
2.5
8.4
3.4
1.0
0.5
3.5
1.5
6.0
2.5
8.5
3.4
1.1
0.5
3.6
1.6
6.1
2.5
8.6
3.5
1.2
0.6
3.7
1.6
6.2
2.6
8.7
3.5
1.3
0.6
3.8
1.6
6.3
2.6
8.8
3.5
1.4
0.7
3.9
1.7
6.4
2.6
8.9
3.6
1.5
0.7
4.0
1.7
6.5
2.7
9.0
3.6
1.6
0.7
4.1
1.8
6.6
2.7
9.1
3.6
1.7
0.8
4.2
1.8
6.7
2.8
9.2
3.7
1.8
0.8
4.3
1.8
6.8
2.8
9.3
3.7
1.9
0.9
4.4
1.9
6.9
2.8
9.4
3.8
2.0
0.9
4.5
1.9
7.0
2.9
9.5
3.8
2.1
1.0
4.6
2.0
7.1
2.9
9.6
3.8
2.2
1.0
4.7
2.0
7.2
2.9
9.7
3.9
2.3
1.0
4.8
2.0
7.3
3.0
9.8
3.9
2.4
1.1
4.9
2.1
7.4
3.0
9.9
3.9
2.5
1.1
5.0
2.1
7.5
3.1
10.0
4.0
Report. Report all test results on ME provided forms.
P300.236
990.14 NJDOT B-17 DETERMINING ROTATIONAL VISCOSITY OF ASPHALT RUBBER BINDER

A.
Scope. This method presents procedures for sampling and testing of asphalt-rubber binder in the
field using a hand held portable rotational analog or digital viscometer.
B.
C.
1.
Viscometer. A hand held high range rotational viscometer. The Contractor may use analog
models with indicator needles and scaled dial displays or digital read out viscometers. Analog
models that have been found acceptable include Rion Model VT-04E and Haake Model, VT-02.
Digital models that have been found acceptable include Haake VT 2 Plus.
2.
Rotor. A cylinder with a diameter of 24 1.1 millimeters, height of 53 0.1 millimeters, and a
vent hole attached to a spindle or shaft with length of 87 2 millimeters that is compatible with
the selected viscometer. Acceptable rotors include Rion No. 1, Haake No 1, or an equivalent.
3.
Thermometer. Digital with metal jacket probe accurate to 1 F.
4.
Sample Containers. Clean 1 gallon metal cans with lids and wire bale.
5.
Viscosity Standard Oils. Fluids calibrated in absolute viscosity centipoise (cP).
6.
Viscometer Holder. Clean metal container or stand for safely storing the viscometer between
tests.
7.
Level Surface. Level surface not directly on the ground.
8.
Heat Source. A controllable heat source (i.e. a hot plate, gas stove, or burner) to maintain the
temperature of the asphalt-rubber sample at 375 3 F while measuring viscosity.
9.
Personal Equipment. Eye protection and heat resistant gloves.

1.
Calibration of Equipment. Calibrate the equipment as follows:

1.
2.
3.
Verify the accuracy of the viscometer by comparing the viscosity results obtained
with the hand held viscometer to 3 separate calibration fluids of known viscosities
ranging from 1000 cP to 5000 cP. The known viscosity value are based on the fluid
manufacturers standard test temperature or based on the test temperature versus
viscosity correlation table provided by the fluid manufacturer.
The viscometer is considered accurate if the values obtained are within 300 cP of the
known viscosity.
Verify the calibration of the rotational viscometer using viscosity standards before use
at each site.
2.
Sampling Asphalt-Rubber Binder. Provide new sample containers and ensure that they are
clean before using. Before sampling, draw at least 1 gallon from an appropriate sample valve
on the interaction tank and discard. Then reopen the sample valve and draw at least 3/4 of a
gallon for testing.
3.
Preparing Asphalt-Rubber Binder Samples for Testing. Prepare the asphalt-rubber binder as
follows:
1.
2.
Immediately transport the sample to the testing area. Ensure that the testing area is
close to the sampling location to reduce the potential for temperature loss.
Set the open asphalt-rubber binder sample container on the level surface on or over
the heat source.
P300.236
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
4.
To prevent scorching or burning, manually stir the asphalt-rubber binder sample

using a metal stir rod or the temperature probe.
Continue stirring until a consistent asphalt-rubber binder temperature of 375 3 F is
achieved. Record the actual test temperature with the corresponding viscosity
measurement.
Insert the viscometer spindle and rotor into the hot asphalt-rubber binder sample near
the edge of the can. Ensure that the spindle and rotor are not inserted deeper than the
immersion depth mark on the shaft and are not plugging the vent hole. During
insertion, the Contractor may tilt the spindle and rotor slightly to keep the vent hole
clear.
Allow the rotor to acclimate to the temperature of the asphalt-rubber binder for
approximately 1 minute. During acclimation, stir the sample thoroughly and measure
the temperature.
Orient the sample and the rotor so that the rotor is near the center of the sample, align
the depth mark on the shaft with the asphalt-rubber binder surface, and level the
viscometer in order to measure viscosity.
Testing. Analog viscometers include a level bubble to help orient the device to ensure that the
rotor and shaft remain vertical. Digital viscometers may not include a level bubble. If a level
bubble is not included, the Contractor may attach a small adhesive bubble to the viscometer or
may use a framework with a level bubble.
Test the asphalt-rubber binder as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
As soon as the viscometer is leveled and the depth mark is even with the asphaltrubber binder
surface, begin rotor rotation. When using a digital viscometer, activate the
continuous digital display according to the manufacturers recommendations. Read
and record the peak viscosity value (The peak measurement typically represents the
viscosity of the asphalt-rubber binder; report and log that value. As the rotor
continues to turn, it drills into the sample and spins rubber particles out of its
measurement area. This may cause thinning of the material in contact with the rotor
erroneously indicating a drop in the apparent viscosity of the asphalt-rubber binder)
from the graduated scale labeled with the corresponding rotor number or from the
digital display.
After completing the first measurement, move the viscometer rotor away from the
center of the sample can without removing it from the asphalt-rubber binder sample.
Turn off the rotor rotation.
Stir the asphalt-rubber binder sample thoroughly.
Repeat Steps 1, 2, and 3. Take 3 measurements and average the results to determine
the viscosity.
Return the viscometer to its holder with the rotor suspended in a suitable solvent.
Before using the rotor again, wipe off the solvent and dry the rotor to avoid solvent
contamination of the next sample.
C.
Calculations. Some meters read in units of mPas (0.001 Pascalseconds) or dPas (0.1 Pas),
while others may read in centipoise (cPs) units. The conversion is 1 Pas = 1000 cPs.
D.
Report. Include the following items in the report:

1.
2.
Date and time sampled.

Location of asphalt-rubber binding blending plant.
P300.236
3.
4.
5.
Test temperature and viscosity.

Rotor designation.
Viscometer model and serial number.
P300.236
990.15 NJDOT B-18- DETERMINING GRADATION OF CRUMB RUBBER FOR ASPHALT

MODIFICATION
A.
Scope. This method is used to determine the gradation of the crumb rubber for asphalt-rubber
binder
B.
C.
1.
Oven capable of maintaining a temperatures of 140

weight.
10 F for drying sample to a constant
2.
Rubber balls having a weight of 8.5 0.5 grams, a diameter of 24.5 0.5mm mm, and a
Shore Durometer A hardness of 50 5 per ASTM Designation D 224.
3.
No. 8, 16, 30, 50, 100, and 200 sieves conforming to AASHTO M 92.
4.
Mechanical sieve shaker conforming to AASHTO T 27.
5.
Balance conforming to AASHTO M 231 and having a minimum capacity of 100 grams with
a precision of 0.1 gram.
Procedure. The crumb rubber for asphalt rubber binder shall conform to the gradations specified
below when tested in accordance with ASTM Designation C 136 except as follows:
1. Obtain 100 5 grams from the crumb rubber sample and dry to a constant weight at a
temperature of not less than 135 F nor more than 145 F and record the dry sample
weight.
2.
Place the crumb rubber sample and 5.0 grams of talc in a one pint jar, then shake it by hand
for a minimum of one minute to mix the crumb rubber and the talc. Continue shaking or
open the jar and stir until the particle agglomerates and clumps are broken and the talc is
uniformly mixed.
3.
Place one rubber ball on each sieve. After sieving the combined material for 10 1
minutes, disassemble the sieves. Brush remaining material adhering to the bottom of a
sieve into the next finer sieve. Weigh and record the weight of the material retained on the
No. 8 sieve and leave this material (do not discard) on the scale or balance. Ensure that
observed fabric balls remain on the scale or balance and are placed together on the side of
the scale or balance to prevent the fabric balls from being covered or disturbed when
placing the material from finer sieves on to the scale or balance. Add the material retained
on the next finer sieve (No. 16 sieve) to the scale or balance. Weigh and record that weight
as the accumulative weight retained on that sieve (No. 16 sieve). Continue weighing and
recording the accumulated weights retained on the remaining sieves until the accumulated
weight retained in the pan has been determined. Before discarding the crumb rubber
sample, separately weigh and record the total weight of the fabric balls in the sample.
4.
Determine the weight of material passing the No. 200 sieve (or weight retained in the pan)
by subtracting the accumulated weight retained on the No. 200 sieve from the accumulated
retained weight in the pan. If the material passing the No. 200 sieve (or weight retained in
the pan) has a weight of 5 grams or less, cross out the recorded number for the
accumulated weight retained in the pan and copy the number recorded for the
P300.236
accumulated weight retained on the No. 200 sieve and record that number (next to the
crossed out number) as the accumulated weight retained in the pan. If the material
passing the No. 200 sieve (or weight retained in the pan) has a weight greater than 5
grams, cross out the recorded number for the accumulated weight retained in the pan,
subtract 5 grams from that number and record the difference next to the crossed out
number. The adjustment to the accumulated with retained in the pan is made to account
for the 5 grams of the talc added to the sample. For calculation purposes, the adjusted
accumulated weight is the same as the adjusted accumulated weight retained in the pan.
Determine the percent passing based on the adjusted total sample weight and recorded to
the nearest 0.1 percent.
P300.236
APPENDIX A - AFFIRMATIVE ACTION MANDATORY LANGUAGE

(REVISED 12/11)
EXHIBIT B
MANDATORY EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY LANGUAGE
N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 et seq. (P.L. 1975, C. 127)
N.J.A.C. 17:27
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows:
The contractor or subcontractor, where applicable, will not discriminate against any employee or
applicant for employment because of age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status,
affectional or sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability, nationality or sex. Except with
respect to affectional or sexual orientation and gender identity or expression, the contractor will ensure
that equal employment opportunity is afforded to such applicants in recruitment and employment, and
that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their age, race, creed, color, national
origin, ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability,
nationality or sex. Such equal employment opportunity shall include, but not be limited to the following:
employment, up-grading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or
termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including
apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and
applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the Public Agency Compliance Officer setting forth
provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.
The contractor or subcontractor, where applicable will, in all solicitations or advertisements for
employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive
consideration for employment without regard to age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital
status, affectional or sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability, nationality or sex.
The contractor or subcontractor will send to each labor union, with which it has a collective bargaining
agreement, a notice, to be provided by the agency contracting officer, advising the labor union or
workers' representative of the contractor's commitments under this act and shall post copies of the notice
in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment.
The contractor or subcontractor, where applicable, agrees to comply with any regulations promulgated
by the Treasurer, pursuant to N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 et seq., as amended and supplemented from time to time
and the Americans with Disabilities Act.
When hiring or scheduling workers in each construction trade, the contractor or subcontractor agrees to
make good faith efforts to employ minority and women workers in each construction trade consistent
with the targeted employment goal prescribed by N.J.A.C. l7:27-7.2; provided, however, that the Dept. of
LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program may, in its discretion, exempt a contractor or subcontractor
from compliance with the good faith procedures prescribed by the following provisions, A, B and C, as
Appendix A - 1
P300.236
long as the Dept. of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program is satisfied that the contractor or
subcontractor is employing workers provided by a union which provides evidence, in accordance with
standards prescribed by the Dept. of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program, that its percentage of
active "card carrying" members who are minority and women workers is equal to or greater than the
targeted employment goal established in accordance with N.J.A.C. l7:27-7.2. The contractor or
subcontractor agrees that a good faith effort shall include compliance with the following procedures:
(A) If the contractor or subcontractor has a referral agreement or arrangement with a union for a
construction trade, the contractor or subcontractor shall, within three business days of the
contract award, seek assurances from the union that it will cooperate with the contractor or
subcontractor as it fulfills its affirmative action obligations under this contract and in accordance
with the rules promulgated by the Treasurer pursuant to N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 et seq., as supplemented
and amended from time to time and the Americans with Disabilities Act. If the contractor or
subcontractor is unable to obtain said assurances from the construction trade union at least five
business days prior to the commencement of construction work, the contractor or subcontractor
agrees to afford equal employment opportunities minority and women workers directly,
consistent with this chapter. If the contractor's or subcontractor's prior experience with a
construction trade union, regardless of whether the union has provided said assurances, indicates
a significant possibility that the trade union will not refer sufficient minority and women workers
consistent with affording equal employment opportunities as specified in this chapter, the
contractor or subcontractor agrees to be prepared to provide such opportunities to minority and
women workers directly, consistent with this chapter, by complying with the hiring or
scheduling procedures prescribed under (B) below; and the contractor or subcontractor further
agrees to take said action immediately if it determines that the union is not referring minority
and women workers consistent with the equal employment opportunity goals set forth in this
chapter.
(B) If good faith efforts to meet targeted employment goals have not or cannot be met for each
construction trade by adhering to the procedures of (A) above, or if the contractor does not have
a referral agreement or arrangement with a union for a construction trade, the contractor or
subcontractor agrees to take the following actions:
(l) To notify the public agency compliance officer, the Dept. of LWD, Construction EEO
Monitoring Program, and minority and women referral organizations listed by the
Division pursuant to N.J.A.C. 17:27-5.3, of its workforce needs, and request referral of
minority and women workers;
(2) To notify any minority and women workers who have been listed with it as awaiting
available vacancies;
(3) Prior to commencement of work, to request that the local construction trade union
refer minority and women workers to fill job openings, provided the contractor or
subcontractor has a referral agreement or arrangement with a union for the construction
trade;
(4) To leave standing requests for additional referral to minority and women workers
with the local construction trade union, provided the contractor or subcontractor has a
referral agreement or arrangement with a union for the construction trade, the State
Training and Employment Service and other approved referral sources in the area;
Appendix A - 2
P300.236
(5) If it is necessary to lay off some of the workers in a given trade on the construction
site, layoffs shall be conducted in compliance with the equal employment opportunity
and non-discrimination standards set forth in this regulation, as well as with applicable
Federal and State court decisions;
(6) To adhere to the following procedure when minority and women workers apply or
are referred to the contractor or subcontractor:
(i)
The contractor or subcontractor shall interview the referred minority or women

worker.
(ii)
If said individuals have never previously received any document or certification

signifying a level of qualification lower than that required in order to perform
the work of the construction trade, the contractor or subcontractor shall in good
faith determine the qualifications of such individuals. The contractor or
subcontractor shall hire or schedule those individuals who satisfy appropriate
qualification standards in conformity with the equal employment opportunity
and non-discrimination principles set forth in this chapter. However, a contractor
or subcontractor shall determine that the individual at least possesses the
requisite skills, and experience recognized by a union, apprentice program or a
referral agency, provided the referral agency is acceptable to the Dept. of LWD,
Construction EEO Monitoring Program. If necessary, the contractor or
subcontractor shall hire or schedule minority and women workers who qualify
as trainees pursuant to these rules. All of the requirements, however, are limited
by the provisions of (C) below.
(iii)
The name of any interested women or minority individual shall be maintained

on a waiting list, and shall be considered for employment as described in (i)
above, whenever vacancies occur. At the request of the Dept. of LWD,
Construction EEO Monitoring Program, the contractor or subcontractor shall
provide evidence of its good faith efforts to employ women and minorities from
the list to fill vacancies.
(iv)
If, for any reason, said contractor or subcontractor determines that a minority
individual or a woman is not qualified or if the individual qualifies as an
advanced trainee or apprentice, the contractor or subcontractor shall inform the
individual in writing of the reasons for the determination, maintain a copy of the
determination in its files, and send a copy to the public agency compliance officer
and to the Dept. of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program.
(7) To keep a complete and accurate record of all requests made for the referral of
workers in any trade covered by the contract, on forms made available by the Dept. of
LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program and submitted promptly to the Dept. of
LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program upon request.
(C) The contractor or subcontractor agrees that nothing contained in (B) above shall preclude the
contractor or subcontractor from complying with the union hiring hall or apprenticeship policies
in any applicable collective bargaining agreement or union hiring hall arrangement, and, where
Appendix A - 3
P300.236
required by custom or agreement, it shall send journeymen and trainees to the union for referral,
or to the apprenticeship program for admission, pursuant to such agreement or arrangement.
However, where the practices of a union or apprenticeship program will result in the exclusion of
minorities and women or the failure to refer minorities and women consistent with the targeted
county employment goal, the contractor or subcontractor shall consider for employment persons
referred pursuant to (B) above without regard to such agreement or arrangement; provided
further, however, that the contractor or subcontractor shall not be required to employ women
and minority advanced trainees and trainees in numbers which result in the employment of
advanced trainees and trainees as a percentage of the total workforce for the construction trade,
which percentage significantly exceeds the apprentice to journey worker ratio specified in the
applicable collective bargaining agreement, or in the absence of a collective bargaining
agreement, exceeds the ratio established by practice in the area for said construction trade. Also,
the contractor or subcontractor agrees that, in implementing the procedures of (B) above, it shall,
where applicable, employ minority and women workers residing within the geographical
jurisdiction of the union. After notification of award, but prior to signing a construction contract,
the contractor shall submit to the public agency compliance officer and the Dept. of LWD,
Construction EEO Monitoring Program an initial project workforce report (Form AA 201)
electronically provided to the public agency by the Dept. of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring
Program, through its website, for distribution to and completion by the contractor, in accordance
with N.J.A.C. 17:27-7. The contractor also agrees to submit a copy of the Monthly Project
Workforce Report once a month thereafter for the duration of this contract to the Division and to
the public agency compliance officer. The contractor agrees to cooperate with the public agency
in the payment of budgeted funds, as is necessary, for on-the-job and/or off-the-job programs for
outreach and training of minorities and women.
(D) The contractor and its subcontractors shall furnish such reports or other documents to the
Dept. of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program as may be requested by the Dept. of LWD,
Construction EEO Monitoring Program from time to time in order to carry out the purposes of
these regulations, and public agencies shall furnish such information as may be requested by the
Dept. of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program for conducting a compliance investigation
pursuant to Subchapter l0 of the Administrative Code (N.J.A.C. 17:27).
Appendix A - 4
P300.236
Appendix B - Requirements of Public Law 2005, Chapter 51 (Executive

Order 134) and Executive Order 117
In order to safeguard the integrity of State government procurement by imposing restrictions to insulate the
award of State contracts from political contributions that pose the risk of improper influence, purchase of access,
or the appearance thereof, Executive Order 134 was signed on September 22, 2004 (EO 134). The Order is
applicable to all State agencies, the principal departments of the executive branch, any division, board, bureau,
office, commission within or created by a principal executive branch department, and any independent State
authority, board, commission, instrumentality or agency. Executive Order 134 was superseded by Public Law
2005, c.51, signed into law on March 22, 2005. In September 2008, Executive Order 117 was signed and
become effective November 15, 2008. It applies to the same government contracting entities subject to
Executive Order 134, but extends the political contribution restrictions by expanding the definition of business
entity to include, for example, more corporate shareholders and sole proprietors. Executive Orders 134 and
117, and Public Law 2005, c.51 contain restrictions and reporting requirements that will necessitate a thorough
review of the provisions. Pursuant to the requirements of PL 2005, c.51, the terms and conditions set forth in
this Appendix are material terms of any contract resulting from this bid solicitation:
DEFINITIONS
For the purpose of this section, the following shall be defined as follows:
a) Contribution means a contribution reportable as a recipient under The New Jersey Campaign
Contributions and Expenditures Reporting Act. P.L. 1973, c. 83 (C.19:44A-1 et seq.), and implementing
regulations set forth at N.J.A.C. 19:25-7 and N.J.A.C. 19:25-10.1 et seq. Through December 31, 2004,
contributions in excess of $400 during a reporting period were deemed "reportable" under these laws. As of
January 1, 2005, that threshold was reduced to contributions in excess of $300.
b) Business Entity means any natural or legal person; business corporation (and any officer, person, or
business entity that owns or controls 10% or more of the corporations stock); professional services corporation
(and any of its officers or shareholders); limited liability company (and its members); general partnership (and its
partners); limited partnership (and its partners); in the case of a sole proprietorship: the proprietor; a business
trust, association or any other legal commercial entity organized under the laws of New Jersey or any other
state or foreign jurisdiction, including its principals, officers, or partners. The definition of a business entity also
includes (i)all principals who own or control more than 10 percent of the profits or assets of a business entity ;
(ii)any subsidiaries directly or indirectly controlled by the business entity; (iii)any political organization organized
under section 527 of the Internal Revenue Code that is directly or indirectly controlled by the business entity,
other than a candidate committee, election fund, or political party committee; and (iv) if a business entity is a
natural person, that persons spouse or child, residing in the same household.
Appendix B - 1
P300.236
BREACH OF TERMS OF THE LEGISLATION

It shall be a breach of the terms of the contract for the Business Entity to (i)make or solicit a contribution in
violation of the Legislation, (ii)knowingly conceal or misrepresent a contribution given or received; (iii)make or
solicit contributions through intermediaries for the purpose of concealing or misrepresenting the source of the
contribution; (iv)make or solicit any contribution on the condition or with the agreement that it will be contributed
to a campaign committee or any candidate of holder of the public office of Governor, or to any State or county
party committee; (v)engage or employ a lobbyist or consultant with the intent or understanding that such lobbyist
or consultant would make or solicit any contribution, which if made or solicited by the business entity itself,
would subject that entity to the restrictions of the Legislation; (vi)fund contributions made by third parties,
including consultants, attorneys, family members, and employees; (vii)engage in any exchange of contributions
to circumvent the intent of the Legislation; or (viii)directly or indirectly through or by any other person or means,
do any act which would subject that entity to the restrictions of the Legislation.
CERTIFICATION AND DISCLOSURE REQUIREMENTS
a) The Authority shall not enter into a contract to procure from any Business Entity services or any material,
supplies or equipment, or to acquire, sell or lease any land or building, where the value of the transaction
exceeds $17,500, if that Business Entity has solicited or made any contribution of money, or pledge of
contribution, including in-kind contributions to a candidate committee and/or election fund of any candidate for or
holder of the public office of Governor, or to any State, county or municipal political party committee, or
legislative leadership committee during specified time periods.
b) Prior to the award of any contract or agreement, the intended Awardee shall submit the Certification and
Disclosure form, certifying that no contributions prohibited by the Legislation have been made by the Business
Entity and reporting all contributions the Business Entity made during the preceding four years to any political
organization organized under 26 U.S.C.527 of the Internal Revenue Code that also meets the definition of a
continuing political committee within the means of N.J.S.A. 19:44A-3(n) and N.J.A.C. 19:25-1.7. Failure to
submit the required forms will preclude award of a contract under this bid solicitation, as well as future contract
opportunities.
c) Further, the Contractor is required, on a continuing basis, to report any contributions it makes during the term
of the contract, and any extension(s) thereof, at the time any such contribution is made.
Appendix B - 2
P300.236
STATE TREASURER REVIEW

The State Treasurer or his designee shall review the Disclosures submitted pursuant to this section, as well as
any other pertinent information concerning the contributions or reports thereof by the intended awardee, prior to
award, or during the term of the contract, by the contractor. If the State Treasurer determines that any
contribution or action by the contractor constitutes a breach of contract that poses a conflict of interest in the
awarding of the contract under this solicitation, the State Treasurer shall disqualify the Business Entity from
award of such contract.
ADDITIONAL DISCLOSURE REQUIREMENT OF P.L. 2005, C. 271
Contractor is advised of its responsibility to file an annual disclosure statement on political contributions with the
New Jersey Election Law Enforcement Commission (ELEC), pursuant to P.L. 2005, c. 271, section 3 if the
contractor receives contracts in excess of $50,000 from a public entity in a calendar year. It is the contractors
responsibility to determine if filing is necessary. Failure to so file can result in the imposition of financial
penalties by ELEC. Additional information about this requirement is available from ELEC at 888-313-3532 or at
www.elec.state.nj.us.
ADDITIONAL DISCLOSURE REQUIREMENT OF P.L. 2005, C. 51 (EXECUTIVE ORDER NO. 117)
Governor Jon S. Corzine recently signed Executive Order No. 117, which is designed to enhance New Jerseys
efforts to protect the integrity of government contractual decisions and increase the publics confidence in
government. The Executive Order builds on the provisions of P.L. 2005, c. 51 (Chapter 51), which limits
contributions to certain political candidates and committees by for-profit business entities that are, or seek to
become, State government vendors.
Executive Order No. 117 extends the provisions of Chapter 51 in two ways:
1.
The definition of business entity is revised and expanded so that contributions by the following
individuals also are considered contributions attributable to the business entity:
Officers of a corporation, any person or business entity who owns or controls 10% or more of the
corporations stock, and professional services corporations, including any officer or shareholder, with
the term officer being defined in the same manner as in the regulations of the Election Law
Enforcement Commission regarding vendor disclosure requirements (N.J.A.C. 19:25-26.1), with the
exception of officers of non-profit entities;
Partners of general partnerships, limited partnerships, and limited liability partnerships and members of
limited liability companies (LLCs), with the term partner being defined in the same manner as in the
regulations of the Election Law Enforcement Commission regarding vendor disclosure requirements
(N.J.A.C. 19:25-26.1);
In the case of a sole proprietorship: the proprietor; and
In the case of any other form or entity organized under the laws of this State or any other state or
foreign jurisdiction: the entity and any principal, officer, and partner thereof;
Appendix B - 3
P300.236
Spouses, civil union partners, and resident children of officers, partners, LLC members, persons
owning or controlling 10% or more of a corporations stock, all shareholders of a professional services
corporation, and sole proprietors are included within the new definition, except for contributions by
spouses, civil union partners, or resident children to a candidate for whom the contributor is eligible to
vote or to a political party committee within whose jurisdiction the contributor resides.
2.
Reportable contributions (those over $300.00 in the aggregate) to legislative leadership committees,
municipal political party committees, and candidate committees or election funds for Lieutenant
Governor are disqualifying contributions in the same manner as reportable contributions to State and
county political party committees and candidate committees or election funds for Governor have been
disqualifying contributions under Chapter 51.
Executive Order No. 117 applies only to contributions made on or after November 15, 2008, and to
contracts executed on or after November 15, 2008.
Updated forms and materials have been developed to combine the requirements of P.L. 2005 c. 51 and
Executive Order 117. Beginning November 15, 2008, the intended Awardee only will be required to submit, the
Two-Year Chapter 51/Executive Order 117 Vender Certification and Disclosure of Political Contribution form(s).
The Chapter 51 and EO 117 forms are available on the Department of Treasury Division of Purchase and
Propertys website at: http://www.state.nj.us/treasury/purchase/forms.htm#eo134 . P.L. 2005 c. 271 disclosure
requirements are separate and different from the disclosure requirements under P.L. 2005 c. 51 and Executive
Order 117 and shall be submitted by the intended Awardee at least ten (10) days prior to entering into the abovereferenced contract directly to the New Jersey Election Law Enforcement Commission. The Chapter 271 form is also
available on the Department of Treasury Division of Purchase and Propertys website at:
http://www.state.nj.us/treasury/purchase/forms/CertandDisc2706.pdf
Appendix B - 4
P300.236
Appendix C - Lane Closing Request Form

CONTRACT NO: _______________________
______________________
SUBMITTED BY
_______________________
ACCEPTED BY (Engineer)
Appendix C - 1
10
NO.
DATE
REQUESTED
MP to MP
Revise/Amend as Noted and

Resubmit:________
ROADWAY
Approved:
__________
LANE
REQUESTED PICK UP
INSTALLATION TIME AND PURPOSE
TIME
DATE
OF CLOSING
_____________________
DATE
CONTRACTOR: ________________________
P300.236
NEW JERSEY TURNPIKE AUTHORITY OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT
Appendix D - Escort, Slowdowns Request Form

CONTRACT NO: _______________________
_________________________
ACCEPTED BY (ENGINEER)
TIME
TIME
DAY/DATE
WORK
LOCATION
DURATION
EXPECTED
NO.
SLOWDOWNS
COMMENTS
________________________
SUBMITTED BY
DAY/DATE
MP TO MP
TYPE OF EQUIPMENT
COMMENTS
________________________
DATE
CONTRACTOR: ________________________
ESCORTS
[ ] - REVISE/AMEND AS NOTED AND RESUBMIT
Appendix D - 1
SLOWDOWNS
[ ] - APPROVED
P300.236
Appendix F - State Police Supplemental Patrol Construction Request Form

CONTRACT NO.:_______________________________________________
ENGINEER: ___________________________________________________
DATE: ________________________________________________________
CONTRACTOR: _______________________________________________
SUBMITTED BY: _______________________________________________
TELEPHONE NO.: _____________________________________________
DATE
NO.
MILEPOST
ROADWAY
LANE
TIME*
MON
TUES
START
COMP.
START
COMP.
START
COMP.
START
COMP.
START
COMP.
START
COMP.
START
COMP.
TIME TO BE ENTERED IN MILITARY TIME
Appendix F -1
WED
THUR
FRI
SAT
SUN
P300.236
APPENDIX H - GEORGIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION TEST NO. 78

A.
Scope
Use this test method to determine the Profile Index from profilograms of deck slabs and approach slabs, made
with the profilograph.
Determining the Profile Index involves measuring scallops that appear outside a blanking band.
B.
Apparatus
The apparatus consists of only the following:

Scale: Use a clear plastic scale, 1.50 inch wide and 11.0 inch long. Near the center of the scale is an opaque band,
0.1 inch wide, extending the entire length of 11.0 inches. On either side of this band are lines scribed 0.1 inch
apart, parallel to the opaque band. These lines serve as a convenient scale to measure deviations, or scallops of
the graph above or below the blanking band.
C.
Sample Size and Preparation
No special sample preparation is needed.
D.
Procedures
Place the plastic scale over the profile so it blanks out as much of the profile as possible. The scallops above and
below the blanking band will be approximately balanced (See Figure -1).
The profile trace will move from a generally horizontal position when going around super-elevated curves,
making it impossible to blank out the central portion of the trace without shifting the scale.
In this case, break the profile into short sections and reposition the blanking band on each section (see Figure -2.).
Beginning at the right end of the scale, measure and total the height of all the scallops appearing both above and
below the blanking band.
Measure each scallop to the nearest 0.05 inch.
Short portions of the profile line may be visible outside the blanking band, but unless they project 0.03 inch or
more and extend longitudinally for 2 feet or more, do not include them in the count. (See Figure -1 for special
conditions.)
After totaling the scallops in the first scale length, slide the scale to the left. Align the right end of the scale with a
small mark made at the end of the first scale length.
E.
Calculations
The Profile Index is determined as inches per mile in excess of the 0.1 inch blanking band. The formula for
calculating Profile Index is:
PROFILE INDEX
F.
1 MILE
LENGTH OF SECTION IN MILES
TOTAL COUNT IN INCHES
Report
Report the profile index in inches per mile in excess of the 0.1 inch blanking band on the Profilograph Report
Form.
Appendix H - 1
P300.236
0.7
0.8
0 .5
0 .5
0 .5
0.1
0 .7
0 .9 1
2 1.12 = 0.1 Mil e @ Hori z. Scal e of 1 = 2 5
BLAN KIN G BAND

0.1 WID E
MARK FOR AL IGNING SCALE IN NEXT SEC TION
0 .5
0.8
0.7
Match Lin e
0.7
0.5
0.1
0.5
0 .5
0.15
To ta l coun t for th is 0.1 mile se cti on is 13 ten th s o f an i nch, or 13.0 in ches pe r mi le
TYPICAL CONDITIONS
Scall ops are a reas en closed by
profil e lin e and b lan king b end .
(Show n dime nsion s to this cha rt)
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
Small p roje cti ons wh ich are n ot i nclu ded i n

th e coun t
R ock or dirt on the pa vemen t

(N ot co unted )
Dou ble p acked sca llo p

(On ly hig hest part coun te d)
EXAMPLE SHOWING METHOD OF DERIVING PROFILE INDEX FROM PROFILOGRAMS
Figure -1
METHOD OF COUNTING WHEN POSITION OF PROFILE SHIFTS AS IT MAY

WHEN ROUNDING SHORT RADIUS CURVES WITH SUPERELEVATION
Incorrect position of blanking bond
Blanking band shifted to accommodate lowering of profile
Figure -2
Appendix H -2
P300.236
Profilograph Form
Appendix H -3
P300.236
APPENDIX I - NJDPES STORMWATER PERMIT PROGRAM
Appendix I - 1
P300.236
Appendix I - 2
P300.236
Appendix I - 3
P300.236

STAGING AREA INVENTORY/ INSPECTION FORM
NEW JERSEY POLLUTANT DISCHARGE ELIMINATION SYSTEM
STORMWATER PERMIT PROGRAM
Contractor Name/
Contract Number:
Staging Area Location: (Milepost)
Contractors Contact Person:
Date:
The purpose of this inspection form is to obtain information needed to comply with the New Jersey Department of
Environmental Protection (NJDEP) regulations on stormwater management. Your responses will assist the New
Jersey Turnpike Authority to determine what measures are needed to comply with its stormwater discharge
permit requirements and minimize stormwater pollutants that may enter the waters of the State.
If you have any questions about the stormwater permit requirements or need assistance in completing this
inspection form, please contact the following:
Timothy Doolan
New Jersey Turnpike Authority
Engineering Department, Environmental Section
P.O. Box 5042
Woodbridge, NJ 07095-5050
Phone: (732) 750-5300 x8246
The completed inspection forms should be faxed to Timothy Doolan at (732) 750-5493, and a copy mailed as
well. Forms shall be completed and submitted within 30 days of occupying any staging area. The form shall be
updated every six (6) months and the Contractor shall provide two weeks written notice to Mr. Doolan prior to
vacating the staging area. The Contractor shall provide copies of all forms and notices to the Engineer.
Appendix I - 4
P300.236
I.
VEHICLES AND EQUIPMENT
A general list of machinery that is exposed to stormwater and could potentially be a source of stormwater
pollutants is needed. Review the list below and identify the types of machinery that are present on-site and are
exposed to stormwater. Add any additional machinery not already shown on the list.
Attach additional sheets if necessary.
VEHICLE AND EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
Vehicle/Equipment
On-Site
(yes/no)
Storage Location
(indoors/outdoors)
Exposed to
Stormwater
(yes/no)
Automobiles
Pick-up Trucks
Dump Trucks
Backhoes
Loaders
Bulldozers
Painting Equipment
Paving Equipment
Sweepers
Snow Plows
Tractors
Mowers
Generators
Equipment Trailers
Screeners
Wood Chippers
Compressors
II.
MATERIALS INVENTORY
A general list of materials that are exposed to stormwater and could potentially be a source of stormwater
Appendix I - 5
P300.236
pollutants is needed. Review the list below and identify the types of materials that are stored on-site and are
exposed to stormwater. Add any additional materials not already shown on the list.
MATERIALS EXPOSED TO STORMWATER
Material
Stored On-Site
(yes/no)
Container Type
(drum, tank, bucket, etc.)
Exposed to
Stormwater
(yes/no)
Salt
Sand/gravel/soil
Street sweepings
Asphalt mix
Paint
Pesticides/Herbicides
Gasoline
Diesel Fuel
Heating oil
Kerosene
Hydraulic fluid
Antifreeze
Motor oil
Waste oil
Transmission fluid
Batteries
Degreasing fluid/parts
cleaner
Detergent
III.
FUELING OPERATIONS
The stormwater permit requires equipment and procedures to reduce the chance that a fuel spill will discharge
into the surface water drainage system. Identify the fuel tanks at the staging area, and provide responses to the
fuel system operations questions. If a question does not apply to your location, mark N/A in the response box.
Appendix I - 6
P300.236
FUEL TANK INFORMATION
Tank No.
Tank Capacity
(gallons)
Tank Contents
(gasoline, diesel, etc.)
Tank Type
(aboveground/
underground)
If Aboveground,
Tank is Diked
(yes/no)
FUEL DISPENSER INFORMATION
Tank No.
Number of
Dispensers
Dispenser Location
(on tank/on fuel island)
Distance to Nearest Storm Drain or

Drainage Ditch
FUEL SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Please explain any NO answers. Attach additional sheets if necessary.
1.
Is the contact information for the person(s) responsible for spill response clearly posted
in the fueling area?
2.
Are the fuel system equipment operation procedures clearly posted in the fueling area?
Appendix I - 7
P300.236
3.
Are drip pans used under all hose and pipe connections during bulk fuel transfers
to/from the storage tanks?
4.
Is a trained employee always present to supervise bulk fuel transfers to/from the storage
tanks?
5.
Is spill containment equipment (storm sewer inlet blocks, spill containment berms,
absorbent booms, etc.) available for use during bulk fuel transfers to/from the tanks?
5a.
If so, is the spill containment equipment used during bulk fuel transfers?
6.
Are the fuel system operators instructed that topping off of vehicles, mobile fuel tanks,
and storage tanks is not permitted?
7.
Is leaking, worn, or damaged fuel system equipment repaired or replaced immediately?
IV.
VEHICLE AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
The Stormwater Permit encourages that all vehicle and equipment maintenance be performed indoors whenever
possible. The following questions address existing maintenance procedures.
VEHICLE AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
1.
Is any vehicle and equipment maintenance performed outdoors?
1a. If yes, when vehicle and/or equipment maintenance lasting more than one day is
performed outdoors, is the vehicle or equipment covered with a tarp or tent when not
being worked on?
1c. If yes, when vehicle and/or equipment maintenance is performed outdoors, are drip pans
used beneath the vehicle or equipment?
Appendix I - 8
P300.236
V.
GENERAL GOOD HOUSEKEEPING PROCEDURES
The stormwater permit requires general good housekeeping practices for storage of materials in containers and
cleanup of spilled materials. The following questions address both topics.
CONTAINER STORAGE REQUIREMENTS
1.
Are all containers and aboveground storage tanks maintained in good condition (not
leaking, not rusting, etc.)?
2.
Are the contents of all containers and aboveground storage tanks identified with clean
and visible labels?
3.
Are all containers and aboveground storage tanks tightly closed when not in use?
4.
Are outdoor container storage areas covered to prevent precipitation from falling onto
the containers?
5.
Are containers stored in outdoor areas located on raised pads, spill pallets, or in
bermed/diked areas?
6.
Are any berms/dikes in good condition and capable of containing a spill?
7.
Are container storage areas maintained regularly?
SPILL CLEANUP PROCEDURES

1.
Is absorbent material (Speedy-Dry, sawdust, kitty litter, etc.) available for cleaning up
spills?
2.
Are all spills of liquid or dry materials cleaned up immediately after discovery?
3. Are spills ever cleaned up by washing or rinsing?

3a. If yes, please explain.
4.
Are all spilled material and used absorbent swept up and disposed of properly?
5.
Are spill cleanup materials, spill kits, and drip pans kept in all liquid transfer areas (near
storage tanks, container storage areas, etc.)?
6.
Are all spill materials and spill kits stored in dry areas protected from rainfall?
VI.
DE-ICING MATERIAL HANDLING PROCEDURES
Appendix I - 9
P300.236
The stormwater permit requires specific procedures for handling road de-icing salt.
SALT STORAGE/HANDLING PROCEDURES
1.
Is salt stored at the facility?
2.
Is all salt stored inside salt domes or other permanent, covered storage buildings?
3.
Is spilled salt swept up and re-used or discarded after completion of loading/unloading

activities?
4.
Are salt handling areas swept on a regular basis?
VII.
FACILITY DRAINAGE
DRAINAGE FROM PARKING/STORAGE AREAS
1.
1a.
Do the outdoor areas of the facility have storm drain inlets?
If yes, do the storm drains discharge to the sanitary sewer system?
1b. If yes, do the storm drains discharge through an oil/water separator?
1c. If yes, are any storm drain inlets located in unpaved areas?
1d. If yes, are the storm drain inlets labeled to alert employees that they discharge to surface
water?
Appendix I - 10
P300.236
VIII.
VEHICLE AND EQUIPMENT WASHING PROCEDURES
The stormwater permit does not regulate vehicle and equipment washing activities. However, responses to the
following questions will help to determine the types of water discharges at the storage/staging area.
VEHICLE AND EQUIPMENT WASHING
1.
Does the facility have a washbay or other vehicle/equipment washing facility?
2.
Do the washbay drains discharge to the sanitary sewer or to the storm sewer?
3.
Do the washbay drains discharge through an oil/water separator?
4.
Are vehicles/equipment rinsed in outdoor areas near storm drain inlets or stormwater
drainage ditches/swales?
5.
Is all loose debris (sand, salt, grass clippings, etc.) brushed off of the vehicles/equipment
and disposed of before rinsing?
6.
Does the vehicle/equipment rinsing include the use of soap, degreasers, or other cleaning
compounds?
7.
Do the rinsing operations include cleaning engines?
IX.
STOCKPILED MATERIALS
The stormwater permit sets limits on the stockpiling of sand, soil, street sweepings, and similar materials. The
following questions deal with open stockpiles at the maintenance facility/staging area.
STOCKPILED MATERIALS
1.
Are there stockpiles of sand, soil, gravel, or street sweepings at the staging area?
2.
Are the stockpiles within 50 feet of a storm drain inlet, drainage ditch, swale, stream, or
other drainage facility?
3.
Are the stockpiles enclosed in bins?
4.
Do the bins allow the stockpiled material to spill out through gaps or openings in the bin
walls?
X.
SWEEPING
The stormwater permit requires that facilities are swept at least once every three months.
Appendix I - 11
P300.236
SWEEPING
1.
Are paved areas of the facility swept regularly using a mechanical sweeper?
2.
What is the approximate frequency of sweeping?
XI.
REFUSE CONTAINERS AND DUMPSTERS

REFUSE CONTAINERS AND DUMPSTERS
1.
Are there any dumpsters or refuse containers located outdoors and exposed to
stormwater (not including temporary demolition containers, litter receptacles, and
containers for large bulky items)?
1A. If yes: Are these containers covered at all times to prevent spilling, dumping or leaking
of their contents?
Appendix I - 12
P300.236
APPENDIX J - DISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT ON PUBLIC WORKS

N.J.S.A. 10:2-1
10.2-1. DISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT ON PUBLIC WORKS;
CONTRACT PROVISIONS; SET-ASIDE PROGRAMS
a. In the hiring of persons for the performance of work under this contract or any subcontract hereunder,
or for the procurement, manufacture, assembling or furnishing of any such materials, equipment,
supplies or services to be acquired under this contract, no contractor, nor any person acting on behalf of
such contractor or subcontractor, shall, by reason of race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital
status, gender identity or expression, affectional or sexual orientation or sex, discriminate against any
person who is qualified and available to perform the work to which the employment relates;
b. No contractor, subcontractor, nor any person on his behalf shall, in any manner, discriminate against or
intimidate any employee engaged in the performance of work under this contract or any subcontract
hereunder, or engaged in the procurement, manufacture, assembling or furnishing of any such materials,
equipment, supplies or services to be acquired under such contract, on account of race, creed, color,
national origin, ancestry, marital status, gender identity or expression, affectional or sexual orientation or
sex;
c. There may be deducted from the amount payable to the contractor by the contracting public agency,
under this contract, a penalty of $50.00 for each person for each calendar day during which such person is
discriminated against or intimidated in violation of the provisions of the contract; and
d. This contract may be canceled or terminated by the contracting public agency, and all money due or to
become due hereunder may be forfeited, for any violation of this section of the contract occurring after
notice to the contractor from the contracting public agency of any prior violation of this section of the
contract.
No provision in this section shall be construed to prevent a board of education from designating that a
contract, subcontract or other means of procurement of goods, services, equipment or construction shall
be awarded to a small business enterprise, minority business enterprise or a womens business enterprise
pursuant to P.L.1985, c. 490 (C.18A:18A-51 et seq.).
Appendix J - 1
P300.236
APPENDIX W - NEW JERSEY TURNPIKE AUTHORITY OPERATIONS VIDEO

ATTENDANCE SHEET
OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT VIDEO ATTENDANCE SHEET
As the Prime Contractor

(Company Name) working on New Jersey
Turnpike Authority Project _____________________ (Contract, LTC or Permit No., OPS)
__________________ ____________________________________ (Name/Description) acknowledge receiving
the video entitled Lane Closure and Construction Safety Video. This video shall be viewed by all
employees, sub-contractors, material suppliers and vendors of the above listed project prior to starting any
work on Authority roadways and ramps.
Each of the below listed personnel by signature below, acknowledge that they have viewed the video, fully
understand its content, and agree to abide by all rules and regulations pertaining to work on Authority
roadways and ramps.
NAME
SIGNATURE
TITLE
COMPANY
The Attendance Sheet will be signed by all personnel on the project, and returned to the Resident Engineer
prior to the start of any work on Authority roadways and ramps. The RESIDENT ENGINEER SHOULD
ATTACH THIS ATTENDANCE SHEET TO THE FIRST LANE CLOSING REQUEST
Page 1 of _____
Appendix W - 1
P300.236

OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT VIDEO ATTENDANCE SHEET
NAME
SIGNATURE
TITLE
COMPANY
Page___of____
Appendix X - 2
P300.236
APPENDIX X - NEW JERSEY TURNPIKE AUTHORITY

REQUIREMENTS FOR SMALL BUSINESS ENTERPRISE
SUBCONTRACTORS AND SET-ASIDE PROGRAM
FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
The following pages will provide Bidders with information about the New Jersey Turnpike Authority (the
Authority) Small Business Enterprise (SBE) Program requirements for non-federally funded
construction contracts and subcontracts. Clarification of the SBE specifications along with assistance in
completing the required forms can be obtained by calling Teresa M. Hale at the Authoritys Office of Equal
Employment Opportunity (hereinafter Office of EEO) at (732) 750-5300 (ext. 8732) Prospective Bidders
will also have an opportunity to ask questions regarding the directives contained in the SBE specifications at
the pre-bid conference(s).
CONTRACT CLAUSE
It is the policy of the Authority that SBEs, as determined and defined by the State of New Jersey,
Department of Treasury, Division of Minority and Women Business Development (Division) in N.J.A.C.
17:14-1.1 et seq., have the opportunity to compete for and participate in the performance of contracts and
subcontracts for construction services. The Authority further requires that its contractors shall agree to take
all necessary and responsible steps, in accordance with the aforementioned regulations, to ensure that SBEs
have these opportunities.
This language is included to ensure that all persons who enter into any form of contractual agreement with
the Authority are aware of their responsibilities and the commitment of the Authority to see that its SBE
Policy is carried out in all instances.
EXPLANATORY NOTE
The following information is provided by the New Jersey Turnpike Authority (the Authority) to
prospective bidders in an effort to promote and encourage participation in its Small Business Enterprise
Program (Program) for small businesses registered with the State of New Jersey, Department of
Treasury, Division of Minority and Women Business Development (Division) as a Small Business
Enterprises (SBE). The information provided below is not a complete reproduction of the regulations
governing SBE registration and participation. Accordingly, to the extent that any of the information
contained below conflicts with the applicable regulations, the regulations shall govern. Interested parties
are encouraged to obtain a complete copy of the applicable regulations 17:13-1.1 et seq. and N.J.A.C. 17:141.1 et seq.) prior to registering with the State and submitting bids to the Authority.
I.
Standards Of Eligibility For Small Business Enterprises
See N.J.A.C. 17:13-2.1 and 17:14-2.1
A.
In order to be eligible as a small business, a business must satisfy all of the

following criteria:
1.
The business must be independently owned and operated, as evidenced

by its management being responsible for both its daily and long term
operation, and its management owning at least 51 percent interest in the
business.
Appendix X - 1
P300.236
2.
The business must be incorporated or registered to do business in the

State and have its principal place of business in New Jersey, defined as
such when either 51 percent or more of its employees work in New
Jersey, as evidenced by the payment of New Jersey unemployment taxes
or 51 percent or more of its business activities take place in New Jersey,
as evidenced by its payment of income or business taxes.
3.
The business must be a sole proprietorship, partnership, corporation or

limited liability company with 100 or fewer employees in full-time
positions, not including:
a.
b.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Seasonal and part-time employees employed for less than 90

days, if seasonal and casual part-time employment are common
to that industry; and
Consultants employed under the other contracts not related to
the construction and construction-related services that are under
the subject of the specific contract for which the business wants
to be eligible as a small business.
For goods and services contracts, the business must have gross revenues
that do not exceed $12 million or the applicable Federal revenue
standards established at 13 CFR 121.20 whichever is higher.
For construction contracts, the business must have gross revenues that
do not exceed $3 million or 50% of the applicable revenue standards set
forth in Federal regulation at 13 CFR 121.201 or the applicable annual
revenue standards set forth in 13 CFR 121.201, whichever is higher.
Gross revenues of a business which has been in business for 3 or more
completed years means the revenues of the business over its last 3
completed tax years divided by three.
Gross revenues of a business which has been in business for less than 3
complete tax years means the revenue for the period the business has
been in business divided by the number of weeks in business, multiplied
by 52.
Gross revenues of a business which has been in business 3 or more
complete tax years but has a short year as one of those years means the
revenues for the short year and the two full years divided by the number
of weeks in the short year and the two full years, multiplied by 52. In
addition, the Division may limit participation in its small business setaside programs to businesses whose individual owners do not exceed
$750,000 in personal net worth.
Eligibility is formalized by the Divisions registration and approval
process.
For goods and services contracts, small businesses will be registered in
one of the following three categories:
a.
b.
c.
SBE 1 Small businesses whose gross revenues do not exceed

$500,000; or
$5,000,000; or
SBE 3 -- Small businesses whose gross revenues do not exceed
$12,000,000 or the applicable Federal revenue standards at 13
CFR 121.201, whichever is higher.
Appendix X - 2
P300.236
11.
Small businesses registered in the category SBE 1 will be eligible to

participate in the set-aside contracts and subcontracting programs
available to businesses registered in the categories in SBE 1, 2 and 3.
Small businesses registered in category SBE 2 will be eligible to
available to businesses registered in the category SBE 2 and 3. Small
businesses registered in the category SBE 3 will be eligible to participate
in the set-aside contracts and subcontracting programs available to
businesses registered in the category SBE 3 only.
For construction contracts, small businesses will be registered in one of
the following three categories:
a.
b.
c.

$1 million; or
50% of the applicable annual revenue standards set forth in
Federal regulation at 13 CFR 121.201 and as may be adjusted
periodically.
SBE 6 Small Businesses with gross revenues that do not exceed
the applicable annual revenue standards set forth in Federal
regulation at 13 CFR 121.201 as may be adjusted periodically
(16.75+M to $33.5M).
Small businesses registered in the category SBE 4 will be eligible to

available to businesses registered in the categories in SBE 4, 5 and 6.
Small businesses registered only in category SBE 5 will be eligible to
available to businesses registered in the category SBE 5 and 6 only.
Small businesses registered in category SBE 6 above will be eligible to
participate in set-aside contracts and subcontracting programs available
to businesses registered only in category SBE 6.
II.
Obligation To Provide Information And Penalties For Failure To Provide Complete

And Accurate Information
See N.J.A.C. 17:13-2.2 and 17:14-2.2
A.
B.
Applicants shall accurately and honestly supply all information required by the
Division.
When a business has been approved as a small business on the basis of false
information knowingly supplied by the business and the business has been
awarded an Authority good and services or construction contract or subcontract,
the Director, Division of Minority and Women Business Development, after
notice and opportunity for a contested case hearing pursuant to N.J.S.A. 52:14B10 and N.J.A.C. 1:1, shall:
1.
Assess the business any difference between the contract amount and
what the Authoritys cost would have been if the contract had not been
awarded pursuant to the Program;
2.
Assess the business a penalty in the amount of not more than 10 percent
(10%) of the amount of the contract or subcontract involved; and
Appendix X - 3
P300.236
3.
4.
C.
D.
E.
III.
Order the business ineligible to transact any business with a State

contracting agency for a period of not less than three months and not
more than 24 months; and
Revoke the registration of the business as a small business and remove
the business from the State's small business database.
Any business approved by the Division as a small business shall immediately

apprise the Division of any circumstances which might affect the eligibility of the
business under these rules.
The failure of a business to report any such changed circumstances, or the
intentional reporting of false information, shall disqualify the business for
inclusion in the small business database and may subject the business to adverse
action by contracting agencies and/or the Attorney General or other enforcement
agencies.
When a business has been registered as a small business on the basis of false
information knowingly supplied by the business, but the business has not been
awarded a State contract, the Division, after notice and opportunity for a
contested case hearing pursuant to N.J.S.A. 52:14B-10 and N.J.A.C. 1:1, shall
revoke the registration of the business as a small business, remove the business
from the State's small business database and notify the Office of the Attorney
General and State contracting agencies.
Registration Procedures For Small Business Enterprise

See N.J.A.C. 17:13-3.1 and 17:14-3.1
A.
Registration procedures established by the Division are as follows:
1. The business shall register at www.newjerseybusiness.gov,

http://www.state.nj.us/njbusiness/contracting/sbsa, for Premier Business Services; and
2. The business shall apply to the Division by completing the Vendor Registration Form,
available online at http://www.state.nj.us/njbusiness/contracting/sbsa
i. As part of its application to the Division, a business shall document its principal place
of business, independent status, number of employees, and its gross revenues. This
documentation shall include appropriate forms or reports otherwise submitted to or
issued by State and Federal agencies, such as employee reports filed with the New Jersey
Department of Labor and Workforce Development or certificates of incorporation issued
by the New Jersey Department of State.
ii. If an applicant knowingly supplies inaccurate or false information, the application
shall be denied under this chapter, the business shall be disqualified from inclusion in the
small business database, and the business may be subject to adverse action by contracting
agencies, the Attorney General or other enforcement agencies.
iii. As part of its application, the business shall pay a non-refundable $ 100.00 application
fee for a three-year registration.
B. When an application for registration as a small business has been completed, the
Appendix X - 4
P300.236
Division shall determine whether to approve it and notify the business of its decision. If
approved, the Division will issue the business a registration certification and add the
business to the small business database.
C. The small business database shall be used by State contracting agencies in confirming
eligibility for set-aside contracts and subcontracts and in reporting progress toward
established contract award goals.
D. Every three years, no later than 20 days prior to expiration of the small business's
registration, and not earlier than 60 days prior to the expiration of such registration, a
business interested in remaining registered as a small business shall comply with the
registration procedures pursuant to (a) above.
E. Annually the business shall submit, prior to the anniversary of the registration notice,
an annual verification statement, in which it shall attest that there is no change in the
ownership, revenue eligibility or control of the business.
1. If the business fails to submit the annual verification statement by the anniversary
date, the registration will lapse and the business will be removed from the State's small
business database. If the business seeks to be registered, it will have to reapply and pay
the $ 100.00 application fee.
2. If the business submits the annual verification statement by the anniversary date but
either the verification statement or other information received by the Division indicates
that the business is no longer eligible for registration as a small business, the Division
shall revoke the registration pursuant to this chapter and following revocation, the
business shall be removed from the State's small business database. The business may
appeal this revocation pursuant to the procedures set forth at N.J.A.C. 17:13-3.4.
IV.
Time For Application To Register As A Small Business Enterprise

See N.J.AC. 17:13-3.2 and 17:14-3.2
A.
B.
V.
A business may apply to the Division at any time to be registered as a small

business and to be placed on the small business database.
If a business is to be eligible to bid on a specific set-aside contract or participate
in the subcontracting target programs for purposes of these requirements, it must
be registered as a small business by the Division on the date the bid or bid
proposal is due at the Authority.
Responsive Bid Criteria

A.
The Authority requires that SBE Forms A, B, C and D, as applicable, be
submitted within seven (7) days after Notice of Award. However, the Authority
may extend the deadline for this requirement at its sole discretion.
B.
FAILURE TO TIMELY AND SATISFACTORILY COMPLETE THE SBE
FORMS OR, IF THE GOAL IS NOT MET, TO SHOW GOOD FAITH
EFFORTS TO MEET THE GOAL, SHALL RESULT IN A DETERMINATION
BY THE AUTHORITY THAT THE BIDDER IS NON-RESPONSIVE AND
SHALL CAUSE REJECTION OF THE BID.
C.
If the low Bidder submits the SBE forms within the requested time frame, but
fails to meet the SBE goal, the Office of EEO, in conjunction with the Department
of Engineering will evaluate the efforts made by the Bidder to determine whether
a demonstration of Good Faith Efforts has been made.
Appendix X - 5
P300.236
D.
VI.
Criteria used to evaluate the efforts made to obtain SBE participation are
outlined in Article VI, Good Faith Efforts of Bidders Requirements.
Good Faith Efforts Of Bidders Requirements
See N.J.A.C. 17:13-4.3 and 17:14-4.3
A.
VII.
The following actions shall be taken by a bidder in establishing a good faith

effort to solicit and award subcontracts to eligible small businesses:
1.
The bidder shall attempt to locate qualified potential small business
subcontractors;
2.
The bidder shall request a listing of small businesses from the Division
and the Authority if none are known to the bidder;
3.
The bidder shall keep a record of its efforts, including the names of
businesses contacted and the means and results of contact;
4.
The bidder shall attempt to contact all potential subcontractors on or
about the same day and use similar methods to contact them;
5.
The bidder shall provide all potential subcontractors with detailed
information regarding the specifications;
6.
The bidder shall attempt, wherever possible, to negotiate prices with
potential subcontractors which submitted higher than acceptable price
quotes; and
7.
Bidders shall maintain adequate records to document their efforts.
Counting SBE Participation

A.
Once a firm is determined to be an eligible SBE by the Division, the total
dollar value of the contract awarded to the SBE shall be counted toward
the applicable goal as follows:
1.
The Authority will count towards its SBE goal only awards to SBEs that
perform a commercially useful function in the work of a contract. This
means that a SBE must be responsible for a distinct element of the work
by actually performing, managing, and supervising the work involved.
A SBE may, of course, enter into subcontracts. The subcontract values
may be counted toward the SBE goal. However, if a SBE subcontracts a
significantly greater portion of the work than is usual according to
industry practices, it is presumed the SBE is not performing a
commercially useful function and, therefore, the value of the SBE
subcontract and its subcontracts will not be counted. The SBE may
present evidence to the Authority to rebut this presumption.
2.
No work shall be included in the SBE Participation Schedule if

the Bidder has reasonable cause to believe the listed SBE firm
will subcontract, at any tier, more than 49% to a non-SBE firm.
3.
For construction contracts awarded under this program, 100% of the

total contract amount will count toward the SBE Goal.
4.
For contracts with SBE suppliers of goods and services, 100% of total
contract amount will count toward the SBE goal.
5.
Awards to SBE suppliers that are not manufacturers or regular dealers

will be counted toward the goal on the following basis:
a.
Fees or commission charged will be counted toward the goal for

providing a bona fide service, such as professional, technical,
consultant or managerial services and assistance in the
Appendix X - 6
P300.236
procurement of essential personnel, facilities, equipment,
materials or supplies required for performance of the contract.
6.
VIII.
b.
If a SBE delivers equipment, materials and supplies required on

a job site, the delivery fee charged may be counted toward the
goal. Where such fees are a part of the SBE subcontract amount
on a construction job, they have already been applied to the goal
and cannot be further counted.
c.
Fees or commissions charged for providing any bonds or

insurance specifically required for the performance of the
contract may be counted toward the goal, providing the
aforementioned fees or commissions are determined by the
Authority to be reasonable and not excessive as compared with
fees customarily allowed for similar services.
Awards in subcontracts with businesses that are joint ventures will be

counted on the basis of percentage ownership of the eligible SBE in the
joint venture.
Bid Requirements
Pre-Bid Instructions:
1.
The listing of a SBE firm by a Bidder on its SBE Participation Schedule
(Form A) shall constitute a representation by the Bidder to the Authority
that such SBE firm is qualified and not unavailable, and a commitment
by the Bidder that, if it is awarded the contract, it will enter into a
subcontract with such SBE firm for the portion of the work described in
the SBE Participation Schedule and at the price set forth in its Bid. NO
SUBSTITUTIONS OF SBE FIRMS DESIGNATED IN THE BIDDERS SBE
PARTICIPATION SCHEDULE MAY BE EFFECTED WITHOUT THE
AUTHORITYS PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL. A SBE Bidder which
lists itself on the SBE Participation Schedule is committed to performing
the work indicated with its own personnel.
2.
Agreements between a Bidder and SBE in which SBE promises not to
provide subcontracting quotations to other Bidders are prohibited.
3.
Price alone shall not be an acceptable basis for rejecting a SBE
subcontractors bid, unless the contractor evidences to the Authoritys
satisfaction that no reasonable price could be obtained from the SBE.
4.
A Directory of Small Business Enterprises is available in the Authoritys
Office of EEO upon request. Use of this listing does not relieve the
Bidder of its responsibility to seek SBE participation from other sources.
Post Award Obligations:
1.
After the execution of a contract with the Authority, signed copies of
subcontracts between the prime contractor and SBE subcontractors must
be submitted to the Authoritys Office of EEO no later than 14 business
days after the subcontract execution. The Prime Contract recipient shall
inform the Authority of the anticipated job start date for all SBE
subcontractors prior to the start of same.
2.
The agreement between the prime contractor and subcontractor shall
remain firm for the duration of the contract. Should changes that affect
the SBEs performance and/or compensation be required, the Authoritys
Office of EEO, in conjunction with the Department of Engineering, must
Appendix X - 7
P300.236
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
be notified for its review and approval of the changes prior to their
implementation.
Whenever the Authority issues project change orders, the Engineering
Department, after consultation with the Office of EEO, will determine if
increased SBE participation will be required.
If at any time the contractor believes or has reason to believe that a
proposed SBE has become unavailable or, due to change in ownership or
management responsibility, does not meet the standards set forth in
Article 2, the contractor shall, within 10 days, notify the Authority of that
fact in writing. Within 15 days thereafter, the contractor shall, if
necessary to achieve the stated goal, make every reasonable effort to
subcontract the same or other work to other SBE firms. The contractors
efforts to replace an unavailable SBE firm shall be coordinated with the
Authoritys Office of EEO.
Should a SBE become ineligible during the course of this contract,
effective as of the date of ineligibility, further contractual dollars
expended with the SBE shall not be counted toward the SBE goal.
Within 15 days after notification by the Authority to the contractor of the
ineligible SBE, the contractor will make every reasonable effort to satisfy
the SBE goal. The contractors effort to continue to meet the SBE goal
shall be coordinated with the Authoritys Office of EEO.
Within 15 days of a contract award, a SBE Liaison Officer must be
designated by the Prime Contractor. The liaison officer will be
responsible for cooperating with the Authority regarding SBE
subcontractor matters and will work with the office of EEO as necessary.
To ensure that all obligations under subcontracts awarded to SBEs are
met, the Authority shall review the Prime Contractors SBE involvement
efforts during the performance of the contract. The Contractor shall
monitor the performance of and collect and report data on SBE
participation to the Compliance Officer of the Office of EEO. The
Contractor shall report the SBE status on the SBE Certificate of
Participation form, a copy of which is attached to this Appendix, and
submit it monthly to the Office of EEO. The Contractor must submit
invoices or estimates to the Authority.
SBEs must submit the
appropriate forms on a monthly basis to the Office of EEO. The form
will be reviewed to determine contract compliance with respect to the
SBE goal. Failure to submit this report may result in suspension of
payments as provided in Section D, Audit and Penalties below. If, at
any time, the Authority has reason to believe that any person or firm has
willfully and knowingly provided incorrect information or made false
statements, it shall refer the matter to the Attorney General of the State of
New Jersey.
The Contractor agrees to pay each subcontractor and supplier under this
contract for satisfactory performance of its contract no later than ten (10)
days from the receipt of each payment the Contractor receives from the
Authority.
In accordance with N.J.S.A. 52:32-40 and 52:32-41, the Contractor shall
certify, prior to the issuance of a progress payment by the Authority, that
all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid any amounts due from
previous progress payments and shall be paid any amounts from the
current progress payment. Alternatively, the Contractor shall certify that
there exists a valid basis under the terms of the subcontractors or
Appendix X - 8
P300.236
10.
suppliers contract to withhold payment from the subcontractor or

supplier and therefore payment is withheld.
If the Contractor withholds payment from the subcontractor or supplier,
the Contractor shall provide to the subcontractor or supplier written
notice thereof. The notice shall detail the reason for withholding
payment and state the amount of payment withheld.
If a
Performance/Payment Bond has been provided under this contract, the
Contractor shall send a copy of the notice to the Surety providing the
bond for the Contractor. A copy of the notice shall also be submitted to
the Authority with the certification that payments are being withheld.
Substitution of SBEs
Except as provided herein, the successful Bidder shall not have the work
performed, or the materials or supplies furnished, by any other SBE firm other
than those named in the Schedule of SBE Participation. However, if the
Authority finds that the Bidder upon submission of its bid, committed itself to
the goal in good faith, the Bidder may, in unusual situations, be permitted to
substitute a subcontractor(s). A request for substitution must be in writing, with
complete justification for the request. Whether the Contractor (or Bidder) seeks
to make a substitution prior to award or during performance, the Contractor
must have approval of the Authority before substitution of the SBE
subcontractor, regardless of the reason for the substitution. Failure to obtain
approval from the Authority could result in the Prime Contractor being found to
be in noncompliance with the requirements of the contract. The term unusual
situations includes, but is not limited to, a SBE subcontractors or SBE joint
venture partners:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Failure to quality as a SBE, or maintain SBE registration status.

Death or physical disability, if the named subcontractor or SBE partner
of the joint venture is an individual.
Dissolution, if a corporation or partnership.
Bankruptcy of the subcontractor, subject to applicable bankruptcy laws,
and only in instances where the bankruptcy affects the subcontractors
ability to perform.
Inability to obtain, or loss of, a license necessary for the performance of
the particular category of work.
Failure or inability to comply with a requirement of law applicable to the
subcontract work.
Material failure to comply with the terms and conditions of the
subcontract.
Material failure to successfully perform the subcontract tasks.
Audit and Penalties

The Prime Contractor is advised that failure to carry out the requirements of
these specifications shall constitute a breach of contract and may result in
termination of the contract by the Authority, or such remedy as the Authority
deems appropriate. During the performance of the contract, and for a period of
up to three (3) years following completion of the contract work, the Authority
may conduct reviews for compliance with the requirements of the SBE Program.
Appendix X - 9
P300.236
Such reviews may include the evaluation of monthly reports, desk audits and
site visitations. Where a Prime Contractor, or any subcontractor, is found to be
in noncompliance with the requirements of the SBE Program during the
performance of the contract, it will be required to take corrective action. If
corrective action is not promptly taken by the offending contractor, the following
sanctions may be instituted (singularly, in any combination and in addition to
any other remedies provided by law):
IX.
1.
2.
3.
The Authority may withhold further payments under the contract.
4.
The relevant performance bond(s), if any, may be enforced.
The contract may be terminated for breach.

Suspension or debarment proceedings may be commenced in accordance
with New Jersey law and the Authority regulations.
The Authority Program: Bid/Proposal Submittals

Copies of the following forms are attached to this Appendix:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
The Authority SBE Form A: SBE Participation Schedule:

List all SBE firms scheduled to participate in the contract, including scope of work to
be performed and the dollar value of their anticipated participation. Additionally,
the name of the Contractors SBE liaison officer should be included on this form.
Upon execution of a contract with the Authority the prime contractor must enter into
a formal agreement with the SBE(s) listed on Form A. There can be no substitution of
the SBE(s) listed on Form A without the prior written approval of the Authority. If,
for any reason Form A is not completed, then the bidder must complete and provide
Form D (see below).
The Authority SBE Form B: Affidavit of Small Business Enterprise (If Applicable):
For each SBE owned firm listed on Form A, Bidder shall include a complete and
signed Form B. This form B is not required for set aside contract awards, nor in cases
wherein the Bidder is an SBE itself.
The Authority SBE Program Form C: Affidavit of SBE:
Each SBE firm to be utilized must sign Form C attesting to its validity as a SBE.
The Authority SBE Program Form D: SBE Unavailability Certification (If
Applicable):
If a Bidder is unable to identify SBE(s) as required to meet the targeted goal set for
this Contract, Bidder shall complete and attach this form which documents the
Bidders Good Faith Efforts to do so.
The Authority SBE Program Form E: SBE Certificate of Participation:
This is the payment report that must be completed on a monthly basis by the
successful Bidder, unless the Bidder is an SBE itself.
Appendix X - 10
P300.236
X.
Definitions
See N.J.A.C. 17:13-1.2 and 17:14-1.2, as the case may be.
A.
Construction Contract means any contract to which the Authority is a party involving
any construction, renovation, reconstruction, rehabilitation, alteration, conversion,
extension, demolition, repair or other changes or improvements of any kind whatsoever
of any structure, facility or highway. The term also includes contracts for consultant
services, the supervision, inspection and other functions incidental to actual
construction.
B.
Consultant means an architect, engineer, construction manager, or other provider of

technical and professional services in support of a design or construction or highway
project.
C.
Contractor or Prime Contractor means any party performing or offering to perform a

construction contract or consultant contract, or any party providing materials or goods
used to perform a construction contract issued by the Authority.
D.
Goal means the statutorily determined percentage of contracting dollars awarded by

the Authority to small businesses in order to comply with the small business provisions
of the Set-Aside Act. It further means the percentage of State contracting dollars that the
Authority makes a good faith effort to award to small businesses under Executive Order
No. 71 (1993).
E.
Registration means the process by which any business can have its eligibility for
participation in the Divisions small business programs determined.
F.
Set-Aside Contract means a contract specifically designated by the Authority as

exclusively available for award to a small business.
G.
Small Business, for purposes of registering as a goods and services contractor means
a business which has its principal place of business in the State, is independently owned
and operated, has no more than 100 full-time employees, and has gross revenues that do
not exceed $12 million or the applicable Federal revenue standards established at 13 CFR
121.201 whichever is higher; and satisfying any additional eligibility standards under
this chapter.
H.
Small Business, for purposes of registering as a construction contractor, means a

business which has its principal place of business in the State, is independently owned
and operated, has no more than 100 full-time employees, and has gross revenues that do
not exceed either $3 million, 50% of the applicable revenue standards set forth in Federal
regulation 13 CFR 121.201 or the applicable annual revenue standards set forth in 13
CFR 121.201, whichever is higher.
I.
State Contracting Agency or Contracting Agency means any board, commission,

committee, authority, division, department, college or university of the State which
possesses the legal authority to award and make construction contracts except where
expressly inconsistent with statutory authority.
J.
Subcontractor means a third party that is engaged by a contractor to perform all or

part of the work or to provide supplies, materials or equipment included in a
construction-related contract with the Authority.
K.
Target means the numerical objective which the Authority establishes, on a contract
by contract basis, in order to meet its small business goal. Subcontracting goals are not
applicable if the prime contractor is a registered Small Business Enterprise (SBE)
firm.
Appendix X - 11
P300.236

SMALL BUSINESS ENTERPRISES
FORM A*
PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF SMALL BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PARTICIPATION (SBE PARTICIPATION SCHEDULE)
Contract Number:________________________ Project Title:_______________________________________________
SBE 1 GOAL%_____
SBE 2 GOAL%_____
NAME AND ADDRESS

OF SBE 1, 2, 3, 4 and/or 5, 6
SUBCONTRACTOR
S
B
E
1
S
B
E
2
SBE 3 GOAL%_____ SBE 4 GOAL%_____

S
B
E
3
S
B
E
4
S
B
E
5
S
B
E
6
**
M
B
E
**
W
B
E
SBE 5 GOAL%_____
TYPE OF WORK
TO BE
PERFORMED
SBE 6 GOAL%____
DOLLAR AMOUNT OF
SUBCONTRACTOR
WORK***
SUBCONTRACT
%
The undersigned will enter into a formal agreement with the SBE(s) listed in this schedule conditioned upon execution of a contract with the
Authority for the above referenced project.
Authorized Signature:_________________________________
Print Name:_____________________________
Title_______
Name of Company:___________________________
Prime Contractors Liaison Officer:____________________
Company Phone #__________________ Company Address:_____________________________________________________

This form MUST be completed and submitted within seven (7) days after Notice of Award.
SBE Prime Contractors need only to complete this form for their firm.
* In the event Form A cannot be completed, or if the percentage of the goal for the contract is not met, Form D must be completed.
** The provision of this information is voluntary and will not be considered in determining the successful bid or in calculating SBE participation.
*** Eliminate Price in Professional Service Contracts Only.
Appendix X - 12
TO:
P300.236
SMALL BUSINESS ENTERPRISE
FORM B
INTENT TO PERFORM AS A SUBCONTRACTOR
CONTRACT NUMBER:
(Name of Prime Contractor)
PROJECT TITLE:
The undersigned intends to perform subcontract work in connection with the above-mentioned project as
(Check One):
___ Individual ___ Corporation ___ Partnership ___ Joint Venture ___ L.L.C. ___ Other
The SBE Category status of the undersigned is confirmed on the attached Affidavit of Small Business Enterprise
(NJTA SBE Form C).
The undersigned is prepared to perform the following described work in connection with the above-referenced
project:
and at the following price:

NOTE: Eliminate Price on Professional Service Contracts Only.
The Prime Contractor has projected the following commencement date for such work, and the undersigned
projects completion of such work as follows:
__________ Project Commencement Date
__________ Projected Completion Date
With respect to the proposed subcontract described above, ____% of the dollar value of such subcontract will be
subcontracted and/or awarded to Non-SBE Contractors and/or Non-SBE Suppliers.
The undersigned will enter into a formal agreement for the above work with the Prime Contractor conditioned
upon execution of a contract with the Authority. As a SBE Sub-Contractor, I will cooperate with the certification
and monitoring process set forth by the Authority for the referenced project.
Signature of SBE
Date
Name of SBE Firm
Type Name
Address
Type Title
Telephone Number
Appendix X - 13
P300.236
FORM C
AFFIDAVIT OF SMALL BUSINESS ENTERPRISE
Contract Number:
____________________________
Project Title:
_______________________________________________________
I HEREBY DECLARE AND AFFIRM that I am the (title)

and duly authorized representative of the firm of
located in the STATE OF
_______________
____________________________
________________________________
and COUNTY OF
__________________
Bidder acknowledges and affirms that he/she is registered and approved in good standing with the State
of New Jersey, Department of the Treasury, Division of Minority & Women Business Development
(Division) as a Small Business Enterprise (SBE) and has been placed on the Divisions small vendor
list. This status must be achieved on or before the date the bids are received and opened.
PLEASE ATTACH A COPY OF YOUR SBE REGISTRATION CERTIFICATE.
I DO SOLEMNLY DECLARE AND AFFIRM UNDER THE PENALTIES OF PERJURY THAT THE
CONTENTS OF THE FOREGOING DOCUMENT ARE TRUE AND CORRECT, AND THAT I AM
AUTHORIZED, ON BEHALF OF THE ABOVE FIRM, TO MAKE THIS AFFIDAVIT.
Date
Affiant
Address
STATE OF
________________________
COUNTY OF ________________________
On this __________day of ______________________, 20___, before me, _________________
________________________, the person described in the foregoing Affidavit acknowledged that he/she
executed the same in the capacity therein stated and for the purposes therein contained.
In Witness thereof, I hereunto set my official seal
Notary Public
(Seal)
My Commission Expires ___________________
Appendix X - 14
P300.236
FORM D
SBE UNAVAILABILITY CERTIFICATION
Contract Number:
Project Title:
I,
Name:
Title:
of
located in the STATE OF
Prime Contractor:
Certify that on ________, I contacted the following SBE(s) to obtain a Bid for work items to be performed
on the Project named above.
SBE:
List By Firm Name, SBE Category No. & SBE Registration No. Of Each SBE Contacted
Together With The Type Of Work Requested To Be Performed
(attach additional pages as necessary)
SBE
SBE
Firm Name
Category No.
Registration No.
Type Of Work
To the best of knowledge and belief, each SBE identified in this Form was unavailable for work on this
project, exclusive of unavailability due to lack of agreement on price, and each SBE was unable to prepare
a bid for the following reason(s) (if known):
Reason Unavailable:
Signature of Prime Contractor:
Date: ______________
_______________________________
This form MUST be completed and submitted within seven (7)

days after Notice of Award.
On this __________day of ______________________, 20___, before me _________________
________________________, the person described in the foregoing Affidavit acknowledged that he/she
executed the same in the capacity therein stated and for the purposes therein contained.
In Witness thereof, I hereunto set my official seal
Notary Public
(Seal)
My Commission Expires ___________________
Appendix X - 15
P300.236
SBE CERTIFICATE OF PARTICIPATION
FORM E
Construction
Estimate No.
Contract No:_______________________________________ (Note if Final)_________________
NAME & ADDRESS OF SBE
SUBCONTRACTOR
PAY ITEM & DESCRIPTION

OR PARTS THEREOF, OF
WORK PERFORMED
DATES OF COMMENCEMENT
& ESTIMATED COMPLETION
Period
Ending______________________
ACTUAL AMOUNT
PAID THIS PERIOD
TOTAL AMOUNT
PAID TO DATE
ESTIMATED AMOUNT
TO BE PAID AT END OF
CONTRACT
CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENTS SUBMITTED WITHOUT THE COMPLETED SBE CERTIFICATE OF PARTICIPATION WILL NOT BE PROCESSED.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the undersigned has hereunto set its

General Contractor
Hand and seal this__________day of__________________, 201_
By:________________________
WITNESS OR ATTEST:
___________________________________________________________
General Contractors SBE Liaison Officer
Telephone Number____________________________________________
** COMPLETION OF THIS SECTION IS OPTIONAL
Appendix X - 16
**
M/WBE
P300.236
APPENDIX Y - TRAFFIC PERMIT APPLICATION
Appendix Y -1
P300.236
APPENDIX Z COST-PLUS WORK FORMS

Standardized Schedules for Cost Plus Work
The below schedules are to be utilized by the Construction Firms under contractual agreement with the
Authority. The contractor is to prepare the schedules; once prepared, the contractor forwards the document
to the Resident Engineer (Supervision Consultant). The Resident Engineer will review and approve the
amounts on Schedule A, Summary of Charges. The Project Engineer at the New Jersey Turnpike Authority
will then indicate the amount paid on Schedule A, Summary of Charges.
Schedule A
Schedule B
Schedule B-1
Schedule C
Schedule C-1
Schedule C-2
Schedule D
Schedule E
Schedule F
Summary of Charges
Summarizes all schedules, the total charges will agree to cost plus
amount billed. (Summarizes Schedule B, C, D and E)
Daily Schedule of Labor Charges
Documents the amount of hours each employee worked daily
The hourly rate is from Schedule B-1
Calculation of Hourly Labor Rates
Computation of contractor's calculation for each Union classification
labor rate.
The total hourly rates should be transferred to Schedule B
Daily Schedule of Equipment Charges
Documents the amount of hours equipment was engaged in the performance
of work and/or idle time. The Hourly Rates are from Schedules C-1 and C-2
Calculation of Hourly Equipment Rates
Describes contractor's calculation for equipment rates.
The hourly rate and hourly operating cost rate should be brought to Schedule C
Schedule of Rented Equipment
Documents hours rented equipment was used and invoice information.
Total amount shall be brought to Schedule C
Daily Schedule of Material Charges
Documents materials used for cost plus work. The contractor shall attach
copies of the invoices.
Daily Schedule of Subcontractor Charges
Documents subcontractor charges for cost plus work.
Inspector Report
The standardized Inspector report is be utilized by all Management Firms
performing daily inspections for cost plus work.
All information must be complete and the form must be signed daily by the
inspector and the Contractor's representative at the job site.
Appendix Z - 1
P300.236
Appendix Z - 2
P300.236
Appendix Z - 3
P300.236
Appendix Z - 4
P300.236
Appendix Z - 5
P300.236
Appendix Z - 6
P300.236
Appendix Z - 7
P300.236
Appendix Z - 8
P300.236
Appendix Z - 9
P300.236
Appendix Z - 10

Turnpike Specifications PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Turnpike Specifications PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

P300.

NEW JERSEY TURNPIKE AUTHORITY

Noise Control ................................................................................................................................... 15

SECTION 105 - CONTROL OF MATERIALS ............................................................................................................... 30

SECTION 205 - FOUNDATION EXCAVATION ........................................................................................................... 80

Payment .......................................................................................................................................... 126

SECTION 303 SHOULDER AND BERM SURFACING ............................................................................................. 127

Substructure Waterproofing ........................................................................................................... 190

SECTION 426 - ANTI-GRAFFITI PROTECTIVE COATING ....................................................................................... 197

Fabrication of HLMR Bearing Assemblies ...................................................................................... 241

SECTION 433 TEMPORARY RETAINING STRUCTURES .......................................................................................... 244

Methods of Construction ................................................................................................................. 257

SECTION 515 - DELINEATORS ............................................................................................................................... 261

Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 287

Methods Of Construction. .............................................................................................................. 342

Division 900 - Materials........................................................................................................................................ 350

Rail Element .................................................................................................................................... 363

SECTION 916 - MASONRY UNITS .......................................................................................................................... 365

APPENDIX A - AFFIRMATIVE ACTION MANDATORY LANGUAGE............................................................................ 1

Subscribed and sworn to before me

Firm Name of Bidder _____________________

Firm Name of Bidder _____________________

NEW JERSEY TURNPIKE AUTHORITY

Proposal Bond -1 (Std. 1/97 Rev. 1/00)

Proposal Bond -2 (Std. 1/97 Rev. 1/00)

NEW JERSEY TURNPIKE AUTHORITY

NEW JERSEY TURNPIKE AUTHORITY

NEW JERSEY TURNPIKE AUTHORITY

NEW JERSEY TURNPIKE AUTHORITY

duly organized under the Laws of the State of______________________________________________

and having a usual place of business at____________________________________________________

, as Surety, are holden and stand firmly

lawful money of the United States of America, to and for the

, enter into a contract with the

Obligee, New Jersey Turnpike Authority generally described as follows:

which said contract is made part of this Bond the

NEW JERSEY TURNPIKE AUTHORITY

SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED PERSONS

NEW JERSEY TURNPIKE AUTHORITY

DIVISION 100 - GENERAL PROVISIONS

The Authority issued Electronic Bidding form

The following terms are added:

The means of producing a Proposal using the

Is defined as the New Jersey Turnpike Authority.

Third Party Contractor

Shall mean all persons, firms, partnerships or

Includes Owner, Contractor, any Third Party

Shall mean an individual or organization

Shall mean the insurance carrier providing any or

Shall mean the location described in the Contract

Shall include all laborers, craftspersons,

Shall mean all wages of subject employees

Shall mean Owner provided and paid insurance

The term refers to the person hired by the

a. Excluded Parties are contractors,

Is defined as a representative of the Insurance

Is the document which details all of the

Guidelines and minimum requirements for the

Health and Safety

A written plan or plans that outline the safety

SECTION 102 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONDITIONS

FAMILIARITY WITH WORK

Grading, Paving & Bridges